Kyocera TA 4002 Service Manual

TASKalfa 4002i
TASKalfa 5002i
TASKalfa 6002i
PF-7100/7110/7120
DP-7100/7110
DF-7100/7110/7120
AK-7100/MT-730(B)/BF-730
JS-7100/PH-7A/PH-7C
PH-7100/PH-7120
FAX System 12
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in ASULO 201
2NKSM06
Rev.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BAT-

TERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste
officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE

INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires
municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual
For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed.
Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia

TASKalfa 6002i 60 ppm ○ ○ ○ ○
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 28 June 2016 2-38 Added: IMPORTANT
2-43 Correction: (14-3) Setup setting at high altitude place
3-89 Correction: 2200 sheets paper (64 g/m2)→1750 sheets
2000 sheets paper (80 g/m2)→1500 sheets
4-20 Added: (3-3)Detaching and reattaching the secondary
transfer roller
4-134,4-135 Correction: Procedure in case of replacing
4-136,4-137 Added: (4-4)Detaching and reattaching the fuser
discharger unit
4-145 Correction: Procedure is revised
4-149 Correction: front PWB→Drum/Developer relay PWB
4-157 Added: Remove the IB-35
6-71 Added: Caution
6-124,6-125 Correction: Initial setting Warm Up/ Print
6-127 Added: U167 Correction
6-129 Added: U193
6-131 Added: How to directly start up U201
6-174 Correction: U253 Initial setting: 120V/ 220-240V model
6-278 Added: U952: Maintenance mode workflow preset list
6-279 Correction: U964: How to retrieve a log
7-437 to 7-442 Added: Connector troubleshooting
8-28 Correction: YC17:
Switchback motor→Eject reversing motor
8-37 YC32 A13 to A18 Not used
8-40,8-44 Correction:
YC7: Right cover switch→ Conveying open/close switch
8-43 Added: Container cooling fan motor
8-62,8-63 Correction: YC9 Voltage
9-1 Correction: (1)Repetitive defects gauge
2 9 August 2016 Cover Deletion: DP-7120
Contents Deletion: 2-2 (16),(17)
4-3 (6) (6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height
4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures
2-2 Correction: Installation procedures flow
2-43 Correction: (16),(17)
1. C,M,Y,K→K
*: C,M,Y,K→K
2-60 to 2-62 Deletion: Hook-and-loop fastener, Spacer
Correction: Procedures
2 3-18 Correction: fuser heater→fuser IH
4-4 Added: U469 (Replacing the maintenance kit)
4-5 Added: U469 (Primary transfer unit)
4-18 Correction: Added 1. U469 (Belt Initialize)
4-33,4-34 Added: (6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height
4-52 Correction: Procedures (workflow)
4-105,4-120 Added: IMPORTANT
4-132 Correction: Delete” Except Low-end model (100V, 220-
240V model)”
4-139 Deletion: Hook-and-loop fastener, Spacer
Procedures: After replacing the fuser discharger unit
4-149 Added: IMPORTANT
4-162 Correction: execute U026→ execute U026/ Flash
4-246 to 4-261 Added: 4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures
6-4, 6-129 Deletion: U193
Added: U197
6-6 Deletion: U469 Message
6-17,6-18 Correction: Service status page image
6-19 Correction:(29)→ (28)
6-21 Correction: (54)
Deletion: (59)
6-31 Deletion: U024 color table
6-38 Added: U034 *1: This is only factory inspection use.
6-71 Deletion: Sample Set
6-77,6-78 Deletion: U100 *1, *2, Set DC Auto Adj
6-82, 6-83 Correction: U101 Initial setting
6-96, 6-97 Correction: U107 Initial setting
6-98 to 6-100 Correction: U108 Initial setting
6-104 Added: U127 Method: Clear
6-111 to 6-114 Correction: U140 Initial setting
6-117 Correction: U155 Purpose
6-118 Correction: U156 Contents, Purpose
6-123 Correction: U161 Initial setting
6-127 Deletion: U167 Correction
6-129 Added: U127
6-139, 6-140 Deletion:
Setting: Normal/ AD (CMY, RGB, Full Color)
Setting: Print (Full Color)
6-212,6-213 Correction: U464 Mode contents
6-217 Correction: U469 Contents, Purpose, Error codes list
2 6-277 Deletion: Workflow SET UP: U469
7-73, 7-75, 7- Added: “Turn the drum heater on.”
77, 7-79 to 7-
81,7-83, to 7-85
9-3 Added: D4
9-7 Deletion: W1, W6
3 28 April 2017 Contents
1-2 Correction: Charging system
Added: *4
1-4 Correction: Operating System
1-5 Correction: Note
1-7 Correction: Large Capacity Feeder 1,750→1,650
1-10 Correction: (5-12)Weight Approx. 0.7 kg→Approx. 0.6
kg
1-20 Correction: Changed the figure
1-22 Correction: (1-18), (1-19)
1-24 Correction: 1-4 Module map
2-6 Correction: (2-3) bundled items
2-12 Correction: (2-9) parts name
2-30 Correction: Procedure 2
2-32 Added: Procedure 8
2-37 Correction: (12)Connecting the Power Cord
Added: (13)Turn the power on
2-42 Correction: (15-2) Procedure 1
2-77 Deletion: (9-1) In case installing the document table
2-85 Added: Caution
Correction: [ON]→[Mode1]
2-87,2-89,2-93 Correction: [ON]→[Mode1]
2-90 Correction: Parts item
2-92 Correction: Procedure
2-101 Correction: ProcedureProcedure 28
2-104 to 2-107 Added: (13) Attach the optional cable
3-4 Correction: Parts names
3-18 Added: Fuser high voltage PWB
3-25 Correction: NO.52, 54
3-30 Correction: NO.28, 29
3-42 Added: (1-7)Punch unit
3-72 Correction: Components parts
3 3-74 Deletion: 7. Toner conveying roller
3-87 Correction: Parts name
3-89 Correction: Components parts
3-91 Correction: 1,750→1,650, *1: Inch→Metric
specifications
4-1 Deletion: Caution, (4)
4-4,4-19,4-21 Added: Secondary transfer roller:setting after replacing
4-5 Correction: (1-1) added the retard roller
4-6 to 4-8 Correction: Procedures, figure
4-11,4-24 Correction: Changed the figure
4-14 Correction: Procedures, figure
4-15 Correction: Procedures 2, 3
4-16,4-23 Added: Note
4-26 Correction: AC Calibration→AC Calib/Calibration
(4-2)Procedures 4
4-28 Correction: figure
4-31 Correction: setting after replacing
4-37 to 4-40 Correction: (1-1)PF retard roller, Procedures
4-44,4-45 Correction: Procedures
4-54 Correction: 4-5
4-55,4-58,4-73 Correction: figure
4-56 Correction: Procedures 5
4-61 Correction: LSU rear cover→ISU rear cover
4-62 Added: (1-8)the lower left cover
4-66 Added: Procedures 5
4-70 Correction: Procedures 14
4-121,4-179 Correction: figure
4-135 Added: Note
4-136 Correction: Procedure (1)
4-145 Added: After replacing the fuser discharge needle
4-153 Correction: Procedures 18,19
3 4-160,4-161 Correction: Procedures
4-165 Added: Note
4-169 Correction: Procedures
4-205 Correction: Correction: Procedures 3,4
4-206 Correction: Correction: Procedure 7
4-208 Correction: Procedures 1:four screws→five screws
4-235,4-239 Correction: Procedures 2:waste toner box→PH tank
4-244 Added: 3.Each gears
4-245,4-247 Added: CH: Check feed count by U905
5-4,5-5 Correction: Procedures 1 to 9
6-4, Added: U193
6-9 Added: U000 Configuration List, LLU Report
6-10 Correction: figure (11)TonerLog
6-16 Correction: (11)TonerLog #
6-18,6-19 Correction: Service Status Page
6-20 Correction: (4),(5)
6-23 Added:(88)Software version of option language
6-34 Correction: U026 Purpose
6-35 Correction: U030 SB(CW),SB(CCW)
6-38 Added: U033 Note
6-40,6-60,6- Added: Note
63,6-67,6-68,6-
190
6-46 Correction: U037 Exit Cooling
6-52 Added: U053Method:Contents, Note
6-53 to 6-56 Correction: U053
6-57 Correction: U059 Contents,Purpose
Added: Note
6-65 Correction: U070 Main Scan (CIS) Setting range
Added: Note
6-69 Correction: U073 Size Setting range
6-71 Correction: U087 Initial Setting value 145→48
6-76 Correction: U099 original Area (mm)
6-85 to 6-87,6- Correction: Initial Setting value
90
6-96,6-97 Correction: U107 Contents,Purpose
Added:1st sheet CLN B/W
3 6-98 Correction: U108 Contents,Purpose
6-103 Correction: U119 Execute Contents
6-105 Added: U127 del Note
6-106 Added: U128 ON timing conversion table
6-112,6-115 Added: U140 Freq Mode
6-114 Correction: U140 Setting: Calibration
6-118 Deletion: U155 Method: Waste Toner: Near Full
Method: Calibration: Full
6-121,6-122 Correction: U159 Contents,Purpose
Container UnlockDisplays: Initial setting
Setting: Waste Box Setting
6-123,6-125,6- Added: U161: Ready Time Adjust
126
6-127 Correction: U167 Contents,Purpose
Added: Correction,Clear
6-129 Added: U193
6-144 Added: U208 Note
6-147 Added: U222 Note SSFC
6-152 Correction: U237 Setting value
6-165 Added: U246 Shift Front HP / Shift Tail HP
6-174 Correction: U253 DBL(A3/Ledger)/DBL(B4)
6-198 to 6-200 Correction: U411 Method: DP FD(ChartB),DP
FD(ChartA)
6-214 Added: U464 Timing
6-215 Correction: U465 Contents: Laser Power
6-256 Correction: U671 RECOVERY FAX Storage,FAX Data
CLEAR,Change FAX Strage
6-265 Correction: U905 1000-sheet/3000-sheet→1000-sheet/
4000-sheet
6-279 Correction: U964 Contents
7-1 to 7-520 Correction: Change all pages
8-65 Added: Fuser high-voltage PWB
9-3 Added: K6 (100V model only)
9-4 Correction: R0 3000-sheet →4000-sheet
9-5 Correction: S3 Factory default setting:1→0
9-10 to 9-12 Deletion: (original)
9-13 Added: 12 Main scan direction diagonal image adjust-
ment
9-18 Correction: (5) Right cover switch→Conveying open/
close sensor
3 9-20 Correction: (7) Conveying cover switch→Right cover
switch
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
CONTENTS
1 Specifications
1-1 Detail Specifications ................................................................................................................. 1-1
(1) Common function ................................................................................................................ 1-1
(2) Copy Functions.................................................................................................................... 1-3
(3) Printer Functions ................................................................................................................. 1-4
(4) Scanner Functions............................................................................................................... 1-5
(5) Option .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
(5-1) Document Processor.................................................................................................. 1-6
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2) .................................................................................... 1-6
(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet × 2) .................................................................. 1-7
(5-4) Side Feeder (3000-sheet) .......................................................................................... 1-7
(5-5) Inner Finisher ............................................................................................................. 1-7
(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) .................................................................................. 1-8
(5-7) 1000-sheet Finisher.................................................................................................... 1-8
(5-8) 4000-sheet Finisher.................................................................................................... 1-9
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) .................................................. 1-9
(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)............................................................................ 1-9
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) ................................................................... 1-10
(5-12) Job Separator (JS) Tray ........................................................................................... 1-10
(5-13) Banner Tray.............................................................................................................. 1-11
(5-14) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-11
1-2 Part Names............................................................................................................................. 1-13
(1) Machine ............................................................................................................................. 1-13
(1-1) Exterior ..................................................................................................................... 1-13
(1-2) Connectors/Interior................................................................................................... 1-15
(1-3) With Optional Equipment Attached .......................................................................... 1-16
(1-4) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-17
(1-5) Operation Panel Keys .............................................................................................. 1-18
1-3 Option configuration ............................................................................................................... 1-19
(1) Option ................................................................................................................................ 1-20
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover" ............................................................. 1-21
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox" ................................................................................................ 1-21
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-21
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-21
(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit ".............................................................................................. 1-21
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)" .................................................................. 1-21
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet×2)" ................................................. 1-21
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)" ...................................................................... 1-21
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"............................................................................... 1-21
(1-10) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher".......................................................................................... 1-21
(1-11) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit".............................................................. 1-22
(1-12) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit" ........................................................................ 1-22
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator".......................................................................................... 1-22
(1-14) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad" ...................................................... 1-22
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table".................................................................................. 1-22
(1-16) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder" ................................................................... 1-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-17) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"......................................................................................... 1-22

(1-18) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit".................................................................................... 1-22
(1-19) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ..................................................................... 1-22
(1-20) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ..................................................................... 1-22
(1-21) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" ............................................... 1-23
(1-22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" ...................................................................... 1-23
(1-23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit" ................................................................... 1-23
(1-24) UG-33 "Thin Print Option" ........................................................................................ 1-23
(1-25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit" ............................................................................... 1-23
(1-26) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" .................................................... 1-23
1-4 Module map ............................................................................................................................ 1-24
2 Installation
2-1 Environment ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................. 2-2
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items .............................................................................. 2-3
(1-1) Main unit..................................................................................................................... 2-3
(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items(Enhancement devices) ........................................ 2-4
(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ............................................................................................ 2-4
(2-2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110).............................................................................. 2-5
(2-3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)............................................................................................... 2-6
(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100) ................................................................................ 2-7
(2-5) Document Processor (DP-7110) ................................................................................ 2-8
(2-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ............................................................................................ 2-9
(2-7) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120) ................................................................................ 2-10
(2-8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ............................................................................... 2-11
(2-9) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 2-12
(2-10) Folding unit (BF-730)................................................................................................ 2-13
(2-11) Punch unit (PH-7A / PH-7C / PH-7D)....................................................................... 2-14
(2-12) Punch Unit (PH-7100 / PH-7120 / PH-7130)............................................................ 2-15
(3) Notes on main unit transportation...................................................................................... 2-16
(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame.................................................................... 2-17
(5) Release of lift plate stopper ............................................................................................... 2-18
(6) Attaching the sub tray........................................................................................................ 2-19
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only) .............................................. 2-19
(8) Optional unit installation .................................................................................................... 2-20
(9) Connecting the Interface Cable ......................................................................................... 2-21
(10) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)............................................................. 2-23
(11) Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 2-25
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper................................................................................... 2-25
(11-2) Set paper in the cassette.......................................................................................... 2-26
(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes................................................... 2-30
(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder...................................................................... 2-33
(11-5) Set paper in the side feeder ..................................................................................... 2-35
(12) Connecting the Power Cord .............................................................................................. 2-37
(13) Turn the power on. ............................................................................................................ 2-37
(14) Setting up the Toner Container ......................................................................................... 2-38
(15) Default Setting ................................................................................................................... 2-41
(15-1) Setting Date and Time.............................................................................................. 2-41
(15-2) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection).................................................................. 2-42
(15-3) Paper size and media type setting ........................................................................... 2-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(16) Installing Software ............................................................................................................. 2-43

(17) Setup setting at high altitude place.................................................................................... 2-43
(18) Image adjustment .............................................................................................................. 2-43
(18-1) Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464) ............................... 2-43
(18-2) Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410) ............................. 2-43
(18-3) Output Maintenance report (Execute maintenance mode U000) ............................. 2-44
(18-4) Clearing the counts (Execute maintenance mode U927)......................................... 2-44
(18-5) Setting the delivery date (Execute maintenance mode U278) ................................. 2-44
(19) Exiting from the maintenance mode .................................................................................. 2-45
(20) Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off) .......................................... 2-45
(21) Turn the power on again.................................................................................................... 2-46
2-3 Installing the optional equipment ............................................................................................ 2-46
(1) SD/SDHC memory card .................................................................................................... 2-46
(2) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)................................................................................ 2-48
(3) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51) .......................................................................................... 2-48
(4) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) (120V model standard) .................................................... 2-49
(5) Document table (DT-730(B)) ............................................................................................. 2-53
(6) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110) ............................................................................. 2-57
(7) ID card reader.................................................................................................................... 2-60
(8) USB keyboard (120V /220-230V model only).................................................................... 2-65
(9) Handset (100V model only) ............................................................................................... 2-77
(10) Cassette heater ................................................................................................................. 2-84
(10-1) In the case of main unit cassette.............................................................................. 2-84
(10-2) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100).......................................................................... 2-86
(10-3) In case of Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110) ........................................................... 2-88
(10-4) In case of Side Feeder (PF-7120) ............................................................................ 2-90
(11) Coin Vender (option for 100v model only) ......................................................................... 2-94
(12) Banner Tray..................................................................................................................... 2-102
(13) Attach the optional cable. ................................................................................................ 2-104
2-4 About Optional Applications ................................................................................................. 2-108
2-5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system ......................................................... 2-109
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3-2 Extension device construction (option) ..................................................................................... 3-2
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100) ........................................................................ 3-2
(2) Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110) .......................................................... 3-2
(3) Side feeder cross-section view (PF-7120)........................................................................... 3-3
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100) .......................................................... 3-4
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110) .......................................................... 3-4
(6) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100) ...................................................................... 3-5
(7) Inner Finisher cross-section view (DF-7100)....................................................................... 3-5
(8) 4,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110) ............................................................ 3-6
(9) 1,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120) ........................................................... 3-7
(10) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B)) ............................................................................. 3-8
(11) Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730) ............................................................................ 3-9
(12) Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100) ..................................................................... 3-10
3-3 Paper conveying and Paper detection.................................................................................... 3-11
(1) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110 ........................................................... 3-11
(2) Main unit+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+DF-7110+MT-730(B)+BF-730+PH-7 3-12
(3) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7 ................................................. 3-13
3-4 Electric parts ........................................................................................................................... 3-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1) Wire connection................................................................................................................. 3-14

(1-1) (Machine rear side) .................................................................................................. 3-14
(1-2) Backside of the shield box........................................................................................ 3-15
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs.................................................................................. 3-16
(2-1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................ 3-16
(2-2) Engine PWB ............................................................................................................. 3-16
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB............................................................................................ 3-17
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB ...................................................................................... 3-17
(2-5) Low power voltage PEB ........................................................................................... 3-17
(2-6) IH PWB..................................................................................................................... 3-18
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB...................................................................................... 3-18
(2-8) Fuser high voltage PWB........................................................................................... 3-18
(3) Electric parts layout ........................................................................................................... 3-19
(3-1) PWBs ....................................................................................................................... 3-20
(3-2) Part name table (PWB) ............................................................................................ 3-22
(3-3) Sensors and Switches.............................................................................................. 3-23
(3-4) Part name table (Sensors and Switches) ................................................................. 3-26
(3-5) Motors ...................................................................................................................... 3-28
(3-6) Part name table (motor) ........................................................................................... 3-30
(3-7) Others....................................................................................................................... 3-31
(3-8) Part name table (other) ............................................................................................ 3-33
3-5 Electric parts (Optional unit) ................................................................................................... 3-34
(1) Electric parts layout ........................................................................................................... 3-34
(1-1) Document Processor (DP-7100) .............................................................................. 3-34
(1-2) Document Processor (DP-7110) .............................................................................. 3-35
(1-3) Paper feeder (PF-7100) ........................................................................................... 3-37
(1-4) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110).............................................................................. 3-38
(1-5) Side feeder (PF-7120).............................................................................................. 3-40
(1-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .......................................................................................... 3-41
(1-7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130).................................................................... 3-42
(1-8) Attachment kit (AK-7100) ......................................................................................... 3-43
(1-9) 4000-sheet finisher (DF-7110) ................................................................................. 3-44
(1-10) 1000-sheet finisher (DF-7120) ................................................................................. 3-46
(1-11) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 3-48
(1-12) Punch unit (PH-7)..................................................................................................... 3-49
(1-13) Folding unit (BF-730)................................................................................................ 3-50
(1-14) Job separator (JS-7100)........................................................................................... 3-51
3-6 Drive system ........................................................................................................................... 3-52
(1) Consisting of unit drive ...................................................................................................... 3-52
(2) Drive location..................................................................................................................... 3-57
(3) Drive unit ........................................................................................................................... 3-58
(3-1) Feed drive unit.......................................................................................................... 3-58
(3-2) Main drive unit .......................................................................................................... 3-58
(3-3) Toner supply drive unit ............................................................................................. 3-59
(3-4) Fuser drive unit......................................................................................................... 3-59
3-7 Mechanical construction ......................................................................................................... 3-60
(1) Paper feed and conveying section .................................................................................... 3-60
(1-1) Cassette feed section............................................................................................... 3-60
(1-2) MP tray paper feed section ...................................................................................... 3-63
(1-3) Paper conveying section .......................................................................................... 3-65
(2) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 3-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-1) Image scanner section ............................................................................................. 3-67

(2-2) Laser scanner unit.................................................................................................... 3-70
(3) Developer section.............................................................................................................. 3-72
(3-1) Developer unit .......................................................................................................... 3-72
(4) Drum section ..................................................................................................................... 3-74
(4-1) Main charger unit...................................................................................................... 3-74
(4-2) Cleaning ................................................................................................................... 3-74
(5) Transfer and separation section ........................................................................................ 3-76
(5-1) Primary transfer unit ................................................................................................. 3-76
(5-2) Secondary transfer roller unit ................................................................................... 3-78
(6) Fuser section ..................................................................................................................... 3-80
(6-1) Fuser unit ................................................................................................................. 3-80
(7) Exit feedshift section.......................................................................................................... 3-83
(7-1) Exit unit..................................................................................................................... 3-83
(7-2) Exit paper jam .......................................................................................................... 3-85
(8) Duplex conveying section.................................................................................................. 3-86
(8-1) Duplex conveying unit .............................................................................................. 3-86
3-8 Mechanical construction (option) ............................................................................................ 3-88
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)..................................................................................................... 3-88
(2) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)....................................................................................... 3-91
(2-1) Cassette section....................................................................................................... 3-91
(3) Side feeder (PF-7120) ....................................................................................................... 3-93
(4) Document Processor (DP-7100) ....................................................................................... 3-95
(4-1) Original paper feed section ...................................................................................... 3-95
(4-2) Original conveying section and exit section ............................................................. 3-96
(4-3) Dual Reverse Scan .................................................................................................. 3-99
(5) Document Processor(DP-7110) ...................................................................................... 3-100
(5-1) Original paper feed section .................................................................................... 3-100
(5-2) Original conveying section and exit section ........................................................... 3-101
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ................................................................................................. 3-103
(6-1) Paper conveying section ........................................................................................ 3-103
(6-2) Bundle exit operation.............................................................................................. 3-106
(7) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ....................................................................................... 3-108
(7-1) Paper entry and feedshift and DF tray B exit section ............................................. 3-108
(7-2) Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section........................................ 3-110
(7-3) Finishing section..................................................................................................... 3-110
(7-4) Relief drum operation ............................................................................................. 3-113
(8-1) Finishing section..................................................................................................... 3-117
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))........................................................................................................ 3-122
(9-1) Operation of output to the mailbox tray .................................................................. 3-124
(10) Punch unit (PH-7) ............................................................................................................ 3-125
(11) Folding unit (BF-730)....................................................................................................... 3-127
(11-1) Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding) .............................................. 3-129
(11-2) Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit.................................................. 3-132
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ....................................................................................... 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container ............................................................................................. 4-1
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................... 4-2
(1) Maintenance kit ................................................................................................................... 4-2
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit ............................... 4-3
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................ 4-5
(1) Cassette feed section .......................................................................................................... 4-5
(1-1) Detaching and attaching the retard roller, the pickup roller and the feed roller.......... 4-5
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner........................................................... 4-10
(2) MP tray feed section.......................................................................................................... 4-13
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the MP feed roller .......................................................... 4-13
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the MP retard roller........................................................ 4-15
(3) Transfer section................................................................................................................. 4-16
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit ................................................ 4-16
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer unit............................................ 4-19
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller.......................................... 4-20
(4) Drum section ..................................................................................................................... 4-22
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the drum unit ................................................................. 4-22
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit............................................. 4-26
(5) Developer section.............................................................................................................. 4-28
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the developer unit.......................................................... 4-28
(6) Fuser section ..................................................................................................................... 4-32
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit.................................................................. 4-32
(6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment) ................... 4-34
(7) Others................................................................................................................................ 4-36
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the filter.......................................................................... 4-36
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) ............................................................. 4-37
(1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ................................................................................................... 4-37
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and PF feed roller 4-37
(2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)..................................................................................... 4-42
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and PF feed roller 4-42
(3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)...................................................................................................... 4-46
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF pickup roller and PF feed roller.......................... 4-46
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller ........................................................ 4-48
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller. ........................ 4-49
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller. ....................................................... 4-50
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller. ........................ 4-51
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller. ....................................................... 4-53
4-5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit................................................... 4-54
4-6 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures............................................................................. 4-55
(1) Exterior cover .................................................................................................................... 4-55
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the front cover ............................................................... 4-55
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance..................................... 4-57
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the inner cover............................................................... 4-58
(1-4) Rear top cover.......................................................................................................... 4-60
(1-5) Detaching and reattaching the rear bottom cover .................................................... 4-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-6) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover .......................................................... 4-61

(1-7) Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover ......................................................... 4-61
(1-8) Detaching and reattaching the top left cover/the rear left cover/
the lower left cover. .................................................................................................. 4-62
(1-9) Detaching and reattaching the right top cover.......................................................... 4-64
(1-10) Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover / rear right bottom cover ........... 4-64
(1-11) Detaching and reattaching the right cover Assy....................................................... 4-66
(2) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 4-73
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the LSU ......................................................................... 4-73
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the lens unit ................................................................... 4-85
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit.................................................................. 4-89
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires .......................................................... 4-94
(3) Drive section.................................................................................................................... 4-102
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit........................................................ 4-102
(3-2) Detaching and attaching the main drive unit .......................................................... 4-104
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the container motor ..................................................... 4-108
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit ........................................... 4-115
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit....................................................... 4-127
(4) Others.............................................................................................................................. 4-135
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the SSD ....................................................................... 4-135
(4-2) Hard disk (HDD) ..................................................................................................... 4-137
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the lift motor................................................................. 4-140
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit.............................................. 4-144
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the exit unit .................................................................. 4-146
(4-6) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit .............................................. 4-147
(4-7) Fan motor attachment direction.............................................................................. 4-162
(5) PWBs............................................................................................................................... 4-163
(5-1) Detaching and attaching the engine PWB.............................................................. 4-163
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ............................................................. 4-166
(5-3) Detaching and attaching the main high voltage PWB ............................................ 4-171
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB..................................... 4-174
(5-5) Detaching and attaching the low voltage PWB ...................................................... 4-181
(5-6) Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB.................................................................. 4-186
(5-7) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB ............................................ 4-192
4-7 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures (Option)............................................................. 4-197
(1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ................................................................................................. 4-197
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit .......................................................... 4-197
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ........................................................... 4-198
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB................................................................. 4-200
(2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)................................................................................... 4-202
(3) Side Feeder (PF-7120).................................................................................................... 4-209
(4) Document Processor (DP-7100) ..................................................................................... 4-214
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor.............................................. 4-214
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ........................................................ 4-218
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB ................................................................... 4-219

(5) Document Processor (DP-7110) ..................................................................................... 4-222
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor.............................................. 4-222
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ........................................................ 4-226
(5-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB ................................................................... 4-227
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the DPCIS ................................................................... 4-229
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ................................................................................................. 4-232
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF PWB ................................................................ 4-232
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit ........................................................ 4-235
(8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ...................................................................................... 4-239
(8-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit ........................................................ 4-239
4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures........................................................................................ 4-243
(1) Main unit .......................................................................................................................... 4-243
(2) Option .............................................................................................................................. 4-245
(2-1) DP-7100 ................................................................................................................. 4-245
(2-2) DP-7110 ................................................................................................................. 4-247
(2-3) PF-7100.................................................................................................................. 4-249
(2-4) PF-7110.................................................................................................................. 4-250
(2-5) PF-7120.................................................................................................................. 4-251
(2-6) AK-7100 ................................................................................................................. 4-252
(2-7) DF-7100 ................................................................................................................. 4-253
(2-8) DF-7110 ................................................................................................................. 4-255
(2-9) DF-7120 ................................................................................................................. 4-257
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update....................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing method of the maintenance mode ...................................................................... 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ...................................................................................................... 6-2
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode ............................................................................. 6-9
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure......................................................................................... 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side
through the mechanically reversed DP) .............................................................................. 7-2
(2-1) Abnormal image ......................................................................................................... 7-6
(2-2) Colored background ................................................................................................... 7-7
(2-3) Black or color spots .................................................................................................... 7-9
(2-4) Blurred characters .................................................................................................... 7-10
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
(Front side) ............................................................................................................... 7-11
(Back side) ............................................................................................................... 7-11
(2-7) Horizontal black streaks ........................................................................................... 7-12
(2-8) Vertical streaks, band (black or color) ...................................................................... 7-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
(Front side) ............................................................................................................... 7-15
(Back side) ............................................................................................................... 7-15
(2-11) Vertical streaks, band (white) ................................................................................... 7-16
(2-12) moiré (front side) ...................................................................................................... 7-17
(2-13) moiré (back side)...................................................................................................... 7-17
(2-14) Missing entire image (White / Black) ........................................................................ 7-18
(2-15) Image is dark partly or light ...................................................................................... 7-19
(2-16) Blurred image ........................................................................................................... 7-19
(2-17) Image is missing partly............................................................................................. 7-20
(2-18) Color shift ................................................................................................................. 7-21
(2-19) Skewed image.......................................................................................................... 7-22
(2-20) Entire image is light .................................................................................................. 7-23
(3) Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP).................... 7-25
(3-1) Abnormal image ....................................................................................................... 7-28
(3-2) Colored background ................................................................................................. 7-29
(3-3) Black or color spots .................................................................................................. 7-30
(3-4) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image ...... 7-31
(3-7) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image........ 7-34
(3-9) Moiré ........................................................................................................................ 7-36
(3-10) Missing entire image (White / Black) ........................................................................ 7-36
(3-12) Blurred image ........................................................................................................... 7-38
(3-14) Color shift ................................................................................................................. 7-40
(3-15) Skewed image.......................................................................................................... 7-40
(4) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass).................................................... 7-43
(4-1) Abnormal image ....................................................................................................... 7-46
(4-2) Colored background ................................................................................................. 7-47
(4-3) Black or color spots .................................................................................................. 7-49
(4-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift ................................................................................ 7-50
(4-8) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image........ 7-54
(4-10) Moiré ........................................................................................................................ 7-56
(4-11) No image comes out (White or Black)...................................................................... 7-56
(4-13) Blurred image ........................................................................................................... 7-59
(4-15) Skewed image.......................................................................................................... 7-63
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)...................... 7-66
(5-1) Background appear .................................................................................................. 7-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-2) Black spots (toner smudges).................................................................................... 7-68

(5-3) Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots) .................................................. 7-69
(5-4) Blank image.............................................................................................................. 7-70
(5-6) Dirty reverse side ..................................................................................................... 7-71
(5-8) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black) ................................................................ 7-73
(5-9) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing) ................................................................... 7-74
(5-10) Blurred characters .................................................................................................... 7-74
(5-11) Offset........................................................................................................................ 7-75
(5-12) Fusing failure............................................................................................................ 7-77
(5-13) Paper skew at the trailing edge ................................................................................ 7-78
(5-14) Uneven transfer........................................................................................................ 7-79
(5-15) Blurred image ........................................................................................................... 7-80
(5-16) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning
the first or second side through DP .......................................................................... 7-80
(5-17) Vertical streaks, bands ............................................................................................ 7-81
(6) Engine Factors (Image forming cause) ............................................................................. 7-83
(6-7) Blank image.............................................................................................................. 7-97
(6-8) Toner dirt ................................................................................................................. 7-99
(6-9) Periodic toner dirt ................................................................................................... 7-100
(6-10) No image comes out (Black) .................................................................................. 7-101
(6-11) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black).................................................................. 7-103
(6-12) Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots ....................................................... 7-105
(6-13) Horizontal uneven density ...................................................................................... 7-106
(6-14) Image is missing partly........................................................................................... 7-107
(6-15) Offset...................................................................................................................... 7-108
(6-16) Gradation reproducibility is low .............................................................................. 7-108
(6-17) Blurred image ......................................................................................................... 7-109
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of
the image area ....................................................................................................... 7-110
(6-19) Vertical streaks, bands ........................................................................................... 7-111
(6-20) Vertical uneven density .......................................................................................... 7-112
(6-21) Vertical streaks, band (white) ................................................................................. 7-114
7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................. 7-115
(1) Prior standard check items .............................................................................................. 7-115
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ........................................................... 7-116
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper ............ 7-116
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or
the paper curl ......................................................................................................... 7-117
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide factor. ......................................................................... 7-117
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck. 7-118
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper........................................................................ 7-118

(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys.................................................. 7-119
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor .................................................................................. 7-120
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure ...................................................... 7-120
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity..................................................................... 7-121
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)...................................................... 7-121
(2) Paper misfeed detection.................................................................................................. 7-122
(2-1) Paper misfeed indication ........................................................................................ 7-122
(2-2) Paper misfeed detection condition ......................................................................... 7-123
(3) Jam Codes ...................................................................................................................... 7-128
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures.................................................................................. 7-276
(4-1) Paper creases (Fuser factor).................................................................................. 7-276
(4-2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor) ..................................................... 7-278
(4-3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the
punch unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading
edge being caught by the PH cutter receiving holes .............................................. 7-280
(4-4) Dog-ear .................................................................................................................. 7-281
7-3 Service call error/ System error ............................................................................................ 7-282
(1) Self diagnostic error codes .............................................................................................. 7-282
(2) System Error (Fxxxx)....................................................................................................... 7-411
(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline .......................................................................................... 7-419
7-4 FAX Related Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-425
(1) FAX Related Errors ........................................................................................................ 7-425
(1-1) The login fails with other than the ID card .............................................................. 7-425
(1-2) C0030: FAX PWB system error.............................................................................. 7-425
(1-3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ..................................................... 7-426
(1-4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error.......................................................... 7-426
(1-5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error.......................................... 7-427
(1-6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ..................................................... 7-427
(1-7) C0920: FAX file system error ................................................................................. 7-428
(1-8) C0950: FAX job stay error...................................................................................... 7-428
(1-9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section ........................................... 7-428
(1-10) The FAX cannot be sent......................................................................................... 7-429
(1-11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished..................................... 7-429
(1-12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is
transmitted as the A4 size data .............................................................................. 7-429
(2) Communication Errors..................................................................................................... 7-431
7-5 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-458
(1) Send Related Errors ........................................................................................................ 7-458
(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or
the security software settings ................................................................................. 7-458
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear ................................................................. 7-458
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent ............................ 7-458
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes).......................................................................................... 7-460
(2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes.................................................................................... 7-460
(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes ....................................................................................... 7-466
(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes ...................................................................................... 7-472
7-6 Print Errors ........................................................................................................................... 7-475
(1) The paper loading message appears .............................................................................. 7-476
(2) The paper direction is incorrect ....................................................................................... 7-477
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray.......................................................................................... 7-478

(4) Garbled characters .......................................................................................................... 7-478
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray.................................................................................... 7-479
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out ......................................................................... 7-479
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated on
the printer properties ....................................................................................................... 7-479
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated... 7-480
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error Processing/
Memory lamp is turned on ............................................................................................... 7-480
(10) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up Processing and Memory lamps
on operation panel are lit ................................................................................................. 7-480
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1) ................................................. 7-481
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1) .............................................. 7-485
(25) The printed image is partly missing ................................................................................. 7-487
(26) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears ..................................................................................... 7-488
7-7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................... 7-489
(1) "Check the document processor" appears ...................................................................... 7-489
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/
inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit ............ 7-490
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/
inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit ............ 7-491
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover...................................... 7-492
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance
front cover........................................................................................................................ 7-492
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray .................. 7-493
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed ........................................... 7-493
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor]
is wrongly displayed ........................................................................................................ 7-494
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed ... 7-495
(10) When turning on the power, the display [Network device is running]
does not disappear .......................................................................................................... 7-495
7-8 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................... 7-496
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support) ...................................................................................... 7-497
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section....................................................... 7-497
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section ................................................................... 7-498
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor............................................................... 7-498
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section ........................................................................... 7-498
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy ......................................................................................... 7-499
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section..................................................... 7-499
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side.................................................................. 7-500
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser eject section ................................... 7-500
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser eject section ...................................... 7-501
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section........................................................................... 7-501

(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ....................................................................... 7-502
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)........................................... 7-503
(16) The drive sounds are noisy during printing...................................................................... 7-504
(17) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound) .............. 7-504
(18) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds) ........................ 7-505
(19) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit.............................................................. 7-505
7-9 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................... 7-506
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed ............................ 7-506
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected .......................................................................... 7-508
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate ......................................................................... 7-508
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate ........................................................................ 7-509
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch ..................................... 7-510
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section .................................................................. 7-511
(7) No display in the operation panel .................................................................................... 7-512
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change ................. 7-513
(9) The operation panel remains displaying [Network device is starting].............................. 7-513
(10) The operation panel remains displaying [There is no waste toner box]. ......................... 7-514
(11) The operation panel remains displaying [Close the waste toner box cover]. .................. 7-514
7-10 Connector troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-515
7-11 Others ................................................................................................................................... 7-521
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides .................. 7-521
(1-1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit ..................................................... 7-521
(1-2) Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)............. 7-522
(1-3) Adjusting the center line at U034 ........................................................................... 7-523
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110) .......................... 7-524
8 PWBs
8-1 PWB description ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1) Main PWB............................................................................................................................ 8-1
(1-1) Connector position ..................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-2
(1-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-2
(2) Engine PWB ...................................................................................................................... 8-10
(2-1) Connector position ................................................................................................... 8-10
(2-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-10
(2-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-11
(3) Feed image PWB .............................................................................................................. 8-25
(3-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-25
(3-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-26
(4) Feed drive PWB ................................................................................................................ 8-37
(4-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-37
(4-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-38
(5) Drum/Developer relay PWB .............................................................................................. 8-44
(5-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-44
(5-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-45
(6) Main high-voltage PWB ..................................................................................................... 8-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

(6-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-48
(6-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-49
(7) Transfer high-voltage PWB ............................................................................................... 8-50
(7-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-50
(7-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-51
(8) Low power voltage PEB .................................................................................................... 8-52
(8-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-53
(8-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-54
(9) Operation panel main PWB ............................................................................................... 8-57
(9-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-57
(9-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-58
(10) IH PWB.............................................................................................................................. 8-63
(10-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-63
(10-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-64
(11) Fuser high voltage PWB.................................................................................................... 8-65
(11-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-65
(11-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-65
8-2 PWB description (Option) ....................................................................................................... 8-66
(1) PF PWB (PF-7100)............................................................................................................ 8-66
(1-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-67
(1-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-68
(2) PF PWB (PF-7110)............................................................................................................ 8-72
(2-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-72
(2-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-73
(3) PF PWB (PF-7120)............................................................................................................ 8-77
(3-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-77
(3-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-78
(4) DP PWB (DP-7100)........................................................................................................... 8-81
(4-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-81
(4-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-82
(5) DP PWB (DP-7110)........................................................................................................... 8-86
(5-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-86
(5-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-87
(6) DP Interface PWB (for DP-7110)....................................................................................... 8-91
(6-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-91
(6-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-92
(7) DF PWB (DF-7100) ........................................................................................................... 8-94
(7-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(7-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-95

(8) PH PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130).............................................................................. 8-100
(8-1) Connector position ................................................................................................. 8-100
(8-2) Connector lists........................................................................................................ 8-100
(9) DF PWB (DF-7110) ......................................................................................................... 8-103
(9-2) PWB photograph .................................................................................................... 8-104
(9-3) Connector lists........................................................................................................ 8-105
(10) MT PWB .......................................................................................................................... 8-113
(10-2) Connector lists........................................................................................................ 8-114
(11) BF PWB........................................................................................................................... 8-116
(11-2) Connector lists........................................................................................................ 8-117
(12) PH PWB (PH-7)............................................................................................................... 8-121
(12-2) Connector lists........................................................................................................ 8-122
(13) DF PWB (DF-7120) ......................................................................................................... 8-124
(13-2) PWB photograph .................................................................................................... 8-124
(13-3) Connector lists........................................................................................................ 8-125
9 Appendixes
9-1 Repetitive defects gauge .......................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2 Environmental command .......................................................................................................... 9-2
9-3 Image adjustment procedure chart ......................................................................................... 9-10
9-4 Wiring diagram ....................................................................................................................... 9-14
(1) Engine PWB / Drive PWB.................................................................................................. 9-14
(2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection ............................ 9-15
(3) Feed image PWB (Front side) ........................................................................................... 9-16
(4) Feed image PWB (Rear side)............................................................................................ 9-17
(5) Feed drive PWB ................................................................................................................ 9-18
(6) Drum/Developer relay PWB .............................................................................................. 9-19
(7) LVU PWB / High voltage PWB .......................................................................................... 9-20
(8) Fuser PWB ........................................................................................................................ 9-21
(9) Operation panel PWB / Main PWB.................................................................................... 9-22
9-5 Wiring diagram (Options connection) ..................................................................................... 9-23
(1) Paper feeder connection ................................................................................................... 9-23
(2) Conveying unit / Document finisher connection ................................................................ 9-24
(3) Other Options connection.................................................................................................. 9-25
9-6 Wiring diagram (Options)........................................................................................................ 9-26
(1) Document processor (DP-7100) wiring diagram ............................................................... 9-26
(2) Document processor (DP-7110) wiring diagram ............................................................... 9-27
(3) Paper feeder (PF-7100) wiring diagram ............................................................................ 9-28
(4) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) wiring diagram .............................................................. 9-29
(5) Side feeder (PF-7120) wiring diagram............................................................................... 9-30
(6) Finisher (DF-7100) wiring diagram .................................................................................... 9-31
(7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) wiring diagram: DF-7100 only ............................. 9-32
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only.......................................................... 9-34
(10) Folder unit(BF-730) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only ........................................................... 9-35
(11) Punch unit (PH-7) wiring diagram: DF-7110/7120 only ..................................................... 9-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

9-7 Installation Guide
(1) PF-7100
(2) PF-7110
(3) PF-7120
(4) DP-7100
(5) DP-7110
(6) DF-7100
(7) DF-7110
(8) DF-7120
(9) AK-7100
(10) MT-730(B)
(11) BF-730
(12) PH-7 A/B/C/D
(13) PH-7100/7110/7120/7130
(14) JS-7100
(15) FAX System 12
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1 Specifications
1-1 Detail Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Specifications
Product name 40 ppm model / 50 ppm model / 60 ppm model
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Multi Pur- Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
pose Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letter-
head, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Pur- Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
pose Tray Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Coated,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Multi Pur- A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
pose Tray ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm), 1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 ×
470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" × 48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm
Warm-up Time Power on 17 seconds or less
(23°C/73.4°F, Low Power 15 seconds or less
60%)
Sleep 17 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64g/m2) *1
500 sheets (80 g/m2) *1
Multi Pur- 165 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m2)
pose Tray 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(80 g/m2)
55 sheets (Larger size than A4/Letter, 64 g/m2)
50 sheets (Larger size than A4/Letter, 80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48"))(136 to 163 g/m2)
1-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Output Tray Inner Tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Job Separa- 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
tor
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Light source LED array
Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Charging system Contact positive charge roller (MC) method
Developer system Touch down developing system
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method
Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter curvature separation and discharge needle (Impressing DC volt-
age)
Cleaning system Drum Counter blade + friction roller cleaning system
Primary Fur brush cleaning + Pre-brush system
transfer
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Sliding IH fuser system
Heat source: IH
Temperature excess increase protection devices: thermostat
Memory 4.0 GB
Large capacity storage SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az supported)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
Option eKUIO: 2*2
Fax: 2*3
Wireless LAN: 1*4
Operating Envi- Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
ronment Humidity 10 to 80 %
Elevation 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 602 × 665 × 790 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"
Weight Approx. 82 kg / Approx. 180 lbs. (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D) 920 × 665 mm / 36.23" × 26.19" (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 20 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 12 A
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
*2: When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*3: When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
*4: Standard for North America territory
1-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Copy Functions

Copy Speed 40 ppm A4/Letter 40 sheets/min
model A4-R/Letter-R 28 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 20 sheets/min
B4 24 sheets/min
Legal 24 sheets/min
B5 40 sheets/min
B5-R 28 sheets/min
A5-R 20 sheets/min
A6-R 20 sheets/min
50 ppm A4/Letter 50 sheets/min
B4 30 sheets/min
Legal 30 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min
B5-R 35 sheets/min
A5-R 25 sheets/min
A6-R 25 sheets/min
60 ppm A4/Letter 60 sheets/min
B4 36 sheets/min
Legal 36 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min
B5-R 42 sheets/min
A5-R 30 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min
First Copy Black and 40 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Time White 50 ppm model: 3.7 seconds or less
(A4, place on the 60 ppm model: 3.4 seconds or less
platen, feed from
Cassette)
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%,
25%
Continuous Copy 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed
1-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3) Printer Functions

Printing Speed
40 ppm 12×18"/SRA3 20 sheets/min
model 12×18"/SRA3 25 sheets/min
50 ppm 12×18"/SRA3 30 sheets/min
model
Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy Speed.
60 ppm
model
First Print Time Black and 40 ppm model: 5.1 seconds or less
(A4) White 50 ppm model: 4.3 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 3.8 seconds or less
Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Operating System Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Win-
dows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS X v10.5 or
later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL/PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open XPS
1-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4) Scanner Functions

Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi, 400 dpi × 400 dpi, 200 dpi × 400 dpi, 300 dpi × 300 dpi, 200 dpi
× 200 dpi, 200 dpi × 100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High compressive
PDF/OCR Text Recognition PDF(Option))
Scanning Speed*1 40 ppm 1-sided: B/W 100 images/min, Color 100 Images/min
(A4, 300 dpi, Image model 2-sided: B/W 180 Images/min, Color 180 Images/min
quality: Text/Photo 50 ppm
original)
model
60 ppm
model
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2003/ Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008
R2/ Windows 7/ Windows 8/ Windows 8.1/ Windows 10/ Windows Server 2012/ Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008 R2/ Windows 7/ Win-
dows 8/ Windows 8.1/ Windows 10/ Windows Server 2012/ Windows Server 2012 R2
1-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Option
(5-1) Document Processor
Dual Reverse Scan Dual Scan
Type DP-7100 DP-7110
Document feed method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Original size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized: 297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R (105 × 148 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m2 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2) *1 (50 to 80 g/m2) *1
Dimensions (W × D × H) 593 × 531 × 138.5 mm / 23.35" × 20.91" 600 × 513 × 170 mm / 23.63" × 20.20" ×
× 5.46" 6.70"
Weight Approx. 9 kg / Approx. 19.9 lbs. Approx. 14.5 kg / Approx. 32.0 lbs.
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Paper Supply Method 1. Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 550(64 g/m2)×2 cassettes / 500(80g/m2)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimension (W × D × H) 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"

Weight Approx. 23 kg / Approx. 50.8 lbs.
1-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet × 2)

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 1,650(64 g/m2)×2 cassettes / 1,500(80g/m2)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter

Dimension (W × D × H) 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"
(5-4) Side Feeder (3000-sheet)

Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,500(64 g/m2)×1 cassettes / 3,000(80g/m2)× 1 cassettes)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Dimension (W × D × H) 351 × 585 × 469 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"
Weight Approx. 26.5 kg / Approx. 66.2 lbs.
(5-5) Inner Finisher

Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size(80 g/m2) A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray Envelope C4: 250 sheets
(Non-Stapling) A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive, 16K-R,
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of A3, B4, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
sheets to 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
limit
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom
Dimension (W × D × H) 694.8 × 533.1 × 220.5 mm / 27.36" × 20.99" × 8.69" (When pulling the tray)
Weight Approx. 11.5 kg or less / Approx. 25.4 lbs. or less
1-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom
(5-7) 1000-sheet Finisher

Paper Tray A A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
Size(80 g/m2) (When non- Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
Stapling) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
limit
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
Dimension (W × D × H) 548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm / 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"

Space Required (W × D) 666 × 618.5 mm / 26.23" × 24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
1-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-8) 4000-sheet Finisher

Paper Size Tray A A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,
(80 g/m2) (When non- 8K, 16K-R: 1,500 sheets
Stapling) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter-
R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K,
ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
limit
65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick, Coated,
Custom
Dimension (W × D × H) 607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm / 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"

Space Required (W × D) 725 × 668.5 mm / 26.23" × 24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Paper Weight Paper weight: 45 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom
(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Paper Size(80 g/m2) A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R, Executive,
Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Dimension (W × D × H) 510 × 400 × 470 mm / 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"
1-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Folding Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
possible size
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-folding A4-R, Letter-R
The number Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

of fold 3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
possibility 1 sheets (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-folding 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

Number for 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Storage 11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more
(80 g/m2) Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Tri-folding 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more

Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Tri-folding Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated,

(5-12) Job Separator (JS) Tray

Maximum Number for Storage 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-
R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm)
Dimension (W × D × H) 480 x 430 x 100mm / 18.90" x 16.93" x 3.94"
1-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-13) Banner Tray

Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper width 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length Max. 1220.0 mm (48")
Media types: Heavy 2
Dimension (W × D × H) 400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm / 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"
(5-14) FAX System

FAX function
Intercommunication G3
Applicable line Subscriber telephone line
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/
9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original size Max. width: Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm/63"
Number of originals to auto Max. 270 sheets (with optional document processor)
feed
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
600 × 600 dpi
Print: 1200 × 1200 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 1000 keys
Broadcast TX Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Memory capacity for the image Standard memory (170MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
accumulation
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Option Hand set, Multi port, internet FAX kit
1-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Network FAX functions

Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer
Interface 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX, 1000 BASE-T
Operating system Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server
2012/R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10
Windows Server 2012
TX resolution Ultra fine (400 × 400dpi), Fine (200 × 200dpi), Normal (100 × 200dpi), 600 ×
600dpi
Original size Letter, Legal, Ledger (11 x 17), Statement, A3, A4,A5, Folio, B4, B5(JIS)
Time specified TX Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)
Simultaneous output Possible output on the main unit at the same time as FAX TX
Sequential broadcast TX Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)
Job Accounting Register the login user name and password in the Network FAX driver setting
when [User] is set on the main unit.
Register the account ID in the Network FAX driver setting when [Job accounting] is
set on the main unit.
Cover Page It is possible to select format and create template in the Network FAX driver.
1-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1-2 Part Names

(1) Machine
(1-1) Exterior

Figure 1-1
1. Document Processor 13. Original Width Guides

2. Operation Panel 14. Slit glass
3. Power Switch 15. Job Separator Tray
4. Waste Toner Box Cover 16. Paper Stopper
5. Cassette 1 17. Inner Tray
6. Cassette 2 18. Handles
7. Main Power Switch 19. Front Cover
8. Multi Purpose Tray 20. Platen
9. USB Memory Slot 21. Original Size Indicator Plates
10. Original exit table
11. Original Stopper
12. Original Table
1-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Figure 1-2
22. Paper Length Guide 26. Multi Purpose Tray

23. Paper width guides 27. Paper Width Guides
24. Paper Width Adjusting Tab 28. Right Cover 1 Lever
25. Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose 29. Right Cover 1
Tray
1-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Connectors/Interior

Figure 1-3
1. Option Interface Slot 5. Toner Container (Black)

2. Network Interface Connector 6. Toner Container Cover
3. USB port 7. Waste Toner Box
4. USB Interface Connector 8. Waste Toner Box Cover
1-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) With Optional Equipment Attached

Figure 1-4
1. Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray) 7. Cassette 4

2. Tray A 8. Cassette 5
3. Tray B 9. Finisher tray
4. Job Separator Tray 10. Platen cover
5. Folding unit 11. Control Section of the Finisher
6. Cassette 3
1-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-4) FAX System
Figure 1-5
1. LINE Connector (L2)

Once 2 FAX its are installed, the port 2 can be used.
Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
2. LINE Connector (L1)

Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
This connector is port 1.
3. TEL Connector (T1)

When using an optional handset or available telephone, connect it here.
1-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) Operation Panel Keys

Figure 1-6
1. [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2. [Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.
3. Function Key: Various functions like Copy, Scan/application can be registered
4. [Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.
5. [Accessibility Display] key: Display on the touch panel can be switched to the enlarged view in the [Copy]
screen or the [Send] screen.
6. [Status/Job Cancel] key: Display the Status/Job Cancel screen.
7. [System Menu/Counter] key: Display the System Menu screen.
8. [Reset] key: Return the settings to the default condition.
9. [Stop] key: Cancel or pause the job which is in progress.
10. [Start] key: Start copying, scanning operations or processing settings.
11. [Interrupt] key: Display the Interrupt Copy screen.
12. [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticate key users, or exit each user operation (Log out).
13. [Energy Saver] key: Make the main unit in Sleep Mode. Return from sleep mode if the main unit in sleep
mode.
14. [Attention] indicator: Light or blink when an error occurs and a job stops.
15. [Memory] indicator: Blink while the main unit access to the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory.
16. [Processing] indicator: Blink while printing or sending/receiving the data.
17. Touch Panel: Touch icons on this panel to configure each setting.
1-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1-3 Option configuration

The following options are available for this machine.
3/$7(1&29(5
'3 '3 7<3((
07%
3+$3+& 3+3+
3+' 3+
')
') %DQQHU*XLGH
3)
')
%) 3) 3)
Figure 1-7
*: *: If the following option is installed, fall prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
1-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1) Option
.H\ERDUG+ROGHU
1.1. '7% )$;6\VWHP &DUG

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ.LW%
,%
,%
6RIWZDUHRSWLRQ
,QWHUQHW)$;.LW$
'DWD6HFXULW\.LW(
8* ,%
8*
6FDQ([WHQVLRQ.LW$
86%.H\ERDUG
1-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"

DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Device that scan the originals automatically. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
When the document processor is not installed, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox"

This equipment separates the paper output tray destination to easily sort documents. Installing this option to add 7
output trays. When multiple computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the
4000-Sheet Finisher.
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher"

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be stapled
or hole punched (optional).
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher"

(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit "

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4000-Sheet
Finisher.
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1500-sheet×2) capable of
holding up to 3000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3000-sheet) capable of holding up to
3000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded.
(1-10) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher"

1-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-11) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Inner Finisher and possible to open the punch hole.
(1-12) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
(1-14) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not
appear on the touch panel.
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.
(1-16) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
(1-17) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable
quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time
can be reduced.
(1-18) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. IB-50 supports
traditional protocols such as AppleTalk and Netware.
Only minimum functions of standard utility are supported.
(1-19) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b. IB-51 supports traditional protocols such as Apple Talk and Netware.
Only minimum functions of standard utility are supported.
IB-51 setup utility supports for Windows OS and Mac OS X.
(1-20) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and
11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is supported.
1-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-21) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list.
(1-22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be
added when the FAX Kit is installed.
(1-23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data can-
not be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
(1-24) UG-33 "Thin Print Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(1-25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM
Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
(1-26) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.
1-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
1-4 Module map
Unit configuration of each model is as follows.
Module Specifications
40 ppm model 50 ppm model 60 ppm model
Cassette 1 CT-8550 (302ND9301_)
Legal paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
Cassette 2 CT-8560 (302ND9302_)
SRA3 paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
Primary feed PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP (302ND9421_)
Pickup/feed roller + retard roller system (common)
Conveying, PARTS RIGHT COVER ASSY SP (302ND94740_)
Duplex
Non-stack paper conveying path (common)
Primary transfer TR-6500 (302NK9303_)
Transfer belt + fur brush cleaning system (common)
Secondary PARTS ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER ASSY SP (302ND9418_)
transfer
Transfer roller method (common)
Drum DK-8550 (302ND9307_)
a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Developing 100V: DV-8550K(J)(302ND9J03_)
120V/220-240V: DV-8550K(302ND9303_)
Touch down developing
LSU LK-6500 (302NK9301_)
One polygon motor + +4 beam
Fuser FK-8550 (302ND9308_)
FK-8595IH (302ND9309_):220-230V
FK-8590IH (302ND9310_):100/120V
Sliding IH fuser pressures system (diameter 35 mm)
Exit PARTS EXIT UNIT SP (302ND9408_)
Feed-shift and exit conveying path (common)
1-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2 Installation
2-1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F
(32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power Source: AC100V50/60Hz15A or more
AC110V60Hz15A or more
AC120V60Hz12A or more
AC220 to 240V50Hz7.2A or more
Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
It might be difficult to maintain the image quality depending on surrounding environmental conditions such as outside air.
Therefore, the following conditions are recommended to operate the machines as follows: Humidity: 36 to 65% Temper-
ature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
Avoid locations with vibrations
Avoid locations with rapid temperature/humidity fluctuations
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
In the case of flooring materials where the installation site is susceptible to damage, there might be the possibility to
damage the flooring materials when installing / moving this product.
While this product is in use, there are some ozone generation and chemical substance emission, however, the amount is
a level that does not affect the human body.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
300 mm 450 mm 1000 mm 100 mm

(11-13/16") (17-11/16") (39-3/8") (3-15/16")
Figure 2-1
2-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
2-2 Installing the main unit

Installation procedures
START
Unpacking and checking bundled items

Image adjustment
Maintenance mode workflow
Attaching the sub tray (Maintenance mode U952 )
Optional unit installation Setting the ID correction operation

(Maintenance mode U464)
Connecting the Interface Cable

Adjusting the halftone automatically
Connecting the FAX cable
(FAX installation only)
Output a Maintenance report
Loading Paper
Clearing the counts
Connecting the Power Cord (maintenance mode U927)
Setting the delivery date

Turn the power on (Maintenance mode U278)
Setting up the Toner Container Exiting from the maintenance mode
Default Setting Completion of installing the main unit
Installing Software
*: When setting up at high altitude

㸦Maintenance mode U952:
Execute/ HIGH ALTITUDE㸧
Developer bias adjustment

Primary transfer voltage adjustment

Setting the ID correction operation

*: *Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes

Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.
2-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items

Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tapes and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.
(1-1) Main unit
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
Figure 2-2
1. Outer case 7. Power cord 13. Bottom case

2. Front upper pad 8. Exit spacer 14. Left bottom pad
3. Rear upper pad 9. Right lower cover 15. Right bottom pad
4. Side stay 10. Inner Tray 16. Skid
5. Accessories box 11. Operation cover 17. Hinge
6. Size label 12. Main unit
Note: Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.
2-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items(Enhancement devices)

(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-3
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-4
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)
16
17
18
13
11
19
10
20
9 21
22
8 15 23
14 24 6
5
9
4
3 12
Figure 2-5
1. Outer case 10. Upper sheet 19. Screws (M4x8 P-tite)

2. Inner frame 11. Upper pad 20. Screws (M4x8 S-tite)
3. Bottom pad 12. Size label 21. Cover plate
4. Bottom cushioning material 13. Attachment A 22. Attachment B
5. Main unit 14. Guide film A 23. Spanner
6. Main unit cover 15. Guide film B* 24. Installation guide
7. Front right stay 16. Lock support plate A
8. Front left stay 17. Switch lever
9. Rear stay 18. Lock support plate B*
*: Not used in this model.
2-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100)
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-6
1. Outer case 8. Rear left upper pad 15. Hinge cover right
2. Rear bottom pad 9. Rear right upper pad 16. Label
3. Front bottom pad 10. Front left upper pad 17. Screw
4. Document Processor 11. Front right upper pad 18. Screw
5. Vinyl sheet 12. DP cable cover front
6. Original mat holder 13. DP cable cover rear
7. Original mat 14. Hinge cover left
2-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
Figure 2-7
1. Outer case 8. Original mat 15. Cleaning tool

2. Inner frame 9. DP relay PWB 16. Rear left upper pad
3. Rear bottom pad 10. Screw 17. Rear right upper pad
4. Front bottom pad 11. DP cable cover front 18. Front upper pad
5. Document Processor 12. DP cable cover rear 19. Angle control fitting
6. Vinyl sheet 13. Hinge cover left 20. Right fixing fitting
7. Original mat holder 14. Hinge cover right 21. Left fixing fitting
2-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-8
1. Outer case 5. Bottom spacer 9. Tray

2. Front bottom pad 6. Inner Finisher 10. Cartridge
3. Rear bottom pad 7. Main unit cover 11. Screw
4. Right bottom pad 8. Top spacer
2-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-7) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)

10
4
6 18
19
16 17 15
14
5
20 11
20 20 13
1 12
3
20
20 2 20
Figure 2-9
1. Skid 8. Outer case 15. Cartridge

2. Front bottom pad 9. Front upper pad 16. Screw (M4x8)
3. Rear bottom pad 10. Rear upper pad 17. Screw (M4x20*)
4. 1000-sheet Finisher 11. Right spacer 18. Connecting plate*
5. Left spacer 12. Main tray 19. Installation guide
6. Protection sheet 13. Inner pad 20. Hinge
7. Main unit cover 14. Connector cover*
2-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

8
4
20 21
14
16 17 18 19
12
15
13
22 9
22 22
11
10
1 3
22
22 2 22
Figure 2-10
1. Skid 9. Right spacer 17. Screw (M4x20)

2. Front bottom pad 10. Main tray 18. Connector cover*
3. Rear bottom pad 11. Inner pad 19. Tray label*
4. 4,000-sheet Finisher 12. Ground plate* 20. Connecting plate
5. Main unit cover 13. Wire guide* 21. Installation guide
6. Outer case 14. Cartridge 22. Hinge
7. Front upper pad 15. Exit guide*
8. Rear upper pad 16. Screw (M4x8)
*: *: Not used in this model.
2-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))

16
17
11
13 14 15
10
12
8
9
7
4 5
5 4
Figure 2-11
1. Mailbox 7. Center bottom pad 13. Upper front Cover

2. Outer case 8. Side spacer 14. Upper rear cover
3. Inner frame 9. Accessory case 15. Screw (M4x12)
4. Bottom pad A 10. Tray 16. Tray name label
5. Bottom pad B 11. Poly bag 17. Installation guide
6. Poly sheet 12. Poly bag
2-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-10) Folding unit (BF-730)

12
29
23 24 25 26 27 28
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
Figure 2-12
1. Outer case 11. Spacer E 21. Front side cover

2. Bottom spacer 12. Center-folding exit tray 22. Rear side cover
3. Spacer A 13. Spacer F 23. Pins
4. Spacer B 14. Front rail 24. Screw (M4x8)
5. Folding unit 15. Rear rail 25. Screw (M4x10)
6. Poly sheet 16. Guide 26. Screw (M3x12)
7. Top spacer 17. Spacer G 27. Lock plate
8. Spacer C 18. Output stock tray 28. Binding band
9. Center-folding bridge Unit 19. Spacer H 29. Installation guide
10. Spacer D 20. Paper Stopper
2-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-11) Punch unit (PH-7A / PH-7C / PH-7D)
6 7
8
Figure 2-13
1. Outer case 4. Upper pad 7. Drive unit Assy

2. Bottom pad 5. Punch PWB 8. Waste punch box
3. Punch unit 6. Waste punch box guide
2-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-12) Punch Unit (PH-7100 / PH-7120 / PH-7130)

11
10
5 4
3 1
Figure 2-14
1. Outer case 5. Front bottom pad 9. Waste punch box

2. Right bottom pad 6. Punch unit 10. Screw
3. Left bottom pad 7. Rear upper pad 11. Front right cover
4. Bottom pad 8. Upper pad
2-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Notes on main unit transportation

*: When transporting the main unit, lift the left and right handle of the lower part of the main unit (as marked by red cir-
cles) with four people as shown in the figure.
Do not hold the operation unit as it might be damaged.
Figure 2-15
*: When carrying the paper feeder (PF-7100/7110), please hold the specified position with two persons.
Figure 2-16
2-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame

1. Raise the triangle mark side of the optical lock cover (b) with a flat-blade screwdriver (a) and slide it in the direction
of the arrow to remove it.
2. Place it reversely and put the optical lock cover (b) into the aperture of the hook (c) to fit in the direction of the
arrow.
*: Service Call C3100 might occur if you forget to release.
1 a
2 b c
Figure 2-17
2-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Release of lift plate stopper
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift plate stopper in original position.
Cassette 1
Figure 2-18
Cassette 2
Figure 2-19
2-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Attaching the sub tray

Attach the bundled sub tray to the inner tray.
*: The Sub Tray is not necessary when installing the DF-7100 (Inner Finisher).
*: The Sub Tray is not necessary when installing the AK-7100 (Attachment kit) for DF-7110 (4,000-sheets Finisher) or
DF-7120 (1,000-sheets Finisher).
Procedures
1. Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2. Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
*: Lift up the sub tray (a) to check it does not come off.
b c
a
d e
Figure 2-20
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only)

Affix the operation panel sheet (a) in the applicable language by aligning it to the positioning boss (c) on the operation
panel (b).
Figure 2-21
2-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Optional unit installation

Install necessary optional units in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
Product name Object Referring Instal-

lation guide
PF-7100(Paper Feeder) PF-7100
○
PF PF-7110(Large Capacity Feeder) PF-7110
PF-7120 (Side Feeder) ○ PF-7120
DP-7100 (Document Processor (Dual Reverse DP-7100
DP Scan)) ○
DP-7110 (Document Processor (Dual Scan)) DP-7110
DF-7100 (Inner Finisher) DF-7100
PH-7110 (Punch unit for DF-7100) PH-7100/7110/
7120/7130
AK-7100 (Conveying Unit) AK-7100
DF-7110 (4000-sheet Finisher) DF-7110
DF
MT-730(B) (Mailbox) MT-730(B)
○
BF-730 (Folding Unit) BF-730
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120) PH-7 A/B/C/D
DF-7120 (1,000-sheet Finisher) DF-7120
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120) PH-7 A/B/C/D
JOB JS-7100 (Job Separator Tray) JS-7100
SEPA
FAX FAX System 12 ○ FAX System 12
*:120V /220-240V specification only
*: In case if the optional paper feeder is not installed, attach the bundled right lower cover as shown below.
Procedures
1. Insert two protrusions (b) of the right lower cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
2. Insert the hook (c) to fix it.
c
a
b
Figure 2-22
2-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Connecting the Interface Cable
Connection Environ- Function Necessary Cable

ment
Connect a LAN cable to Printer/Scanner/Network LAN Cable
the main unit FAX (10Base-T, 100Base-TX or 1000Base-T)
Connect a USB cable Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/ USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max.
to the main unit WIA) 5.0m long)
In the case of the LAN connection
1. Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
+8%
Figure 2-23
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK
In the case of the USB connection
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the rear side of the main unit.
+8%
Figure 2-24
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)

General FAX connection example
In the case of the general telephone line
a. Modular jack
a
+8%
Figure 2-25
ADSL
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack d
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC b
a c +8%
Figure 2-26
ISDN
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
c
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b +8%
Figure 2-27
2-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Modular cord connection

Connect a modular cord to the LINE connector of the main unit.
When using a commercially available telephone set, connect a modular cord to the TEL connector of the main unit.
a. Modular jack d
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c. Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
a
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
Figure 2-28
2-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Loading Paper
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.
Figure 2-29
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• Such paper may cause a jam.
• If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cas-
settes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or malfunctions.
2-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-2) Set paper in the cassette

The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, etc.
The cassette can hold 550 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
1. Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.
Figure 2-30
NOTE
Please do not pull out multiple cassettes at same time.
2. Adjust the position of the paper length guide.

1.Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
Figure 2-31
2-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK
NOTE
Please move the paper length guide to the left edge and then push it down in case to use Legal paper in Cassette 1
and 12x18" paper in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-32
3. Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

Figure 2-33
NOTE
Adjust the paper size guide in case if using SRA3, A3 or Leger paper in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-34
2-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-35
Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (Refer to 2-25)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use, the
paper may skew or become jammed.
5. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-36
2-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-37
7. Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-38
2-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes The following procedure is an example for the cassette 1.
Figure 2-39
2. Remove the envelope feed guide.

*: In case of the Post Cards, please go to Step 5.
Figure 2-40
3. In case to use the Envelope over the size of Envelope C5 (Width: 162mm), expand the lever of the envelope feed
guide.
Figure 2-41
2-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.
Figure 2-42
5. Adjust the position of the paper length guide.
Figure 2-43
6. Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

Figure 2-44
2-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Load the envelope with the print side facing up.
Figure 2-45
8. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
*: Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-46
9. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-47
2-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder

The high capacity feeder can hold A4/Letter size plain paper, recycle paper or color paper.
The large capacity feeder can load 3,500 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
*: The following procedure is an example for the 3rd cassette.
Figure 2-48
2. Load paper.
Figure 2-49
Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
2-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Gently insert the cassette all the way.
Figure 2-50
3.Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-51
2-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-5) Set paper in the side feeder

The side feeder can load 3,500 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
Figure 2-52
2. Load paper.
Figure 2-53
Note
• Load the paper with the print side face down.
2-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3.Gently insert the cassette all the way.
Figure 2-54
4.Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-55
2-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(12)Connecting the Power Cord

1. Please connect the supplied power cord to the
main unit and connect the other side to the power
outlet.
*: Only use the power cord that comes with the main unit.
Figure 2-56
(13)Turn the power on.

Open the switch cover (a) and turn on the power switch (b).
ON
a b
Figure 2-57
2-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
(14)Setting up the Toner Container
Set up the toner container.

1. Open the front cover.
IMPORTANT
The container cover does not open when the power is turned off. Make sure to turn the power on to release the con-
tainer cover lock and then open the front cover.
Figure 2-58
2. Take out the new toner container.
Figure 2-59
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the part of dotted line by hands.
Figure 2-60
2-38
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Slightly tap the toner container.
5~ 5~
Figure 2-61
4. Shake the toner container.
5~ 5~
5~
Figure 2-62
5. Install the toner container.
CLICK!
Figure 2-63
2-39
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Close the toner container cover.
Figure 2-64
7. Close the front cover.
Figure 2-65
2-40
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(15)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the main unit is turned on for the first time after the installation and pos-
sible to set necessary items. Also, it is possible to set from System Menu as shown below.
[System Menu/Counter] key
Figure 2-66
(15-1)Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the date and time of installation location.
1. Display the screen
[System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key
> [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
2. Configure the settings
[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Items Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for
summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time of the installation location. If you perform Send as E-
mail, the date and time set in the main unit will be displayed on the header of
the mail.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in
A.D. (20XX)
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-41
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(15-2) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are as follows.
• TCP/IP: On
• DHCP: On
• Auto-IP: On
• IP Address: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Setting procedures
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Set-
tings] > [TCP/IP Setting].
2. Select [IPv4] for setting.
3. Restart the network from System Menu, or turn off the power, wait at least 5 seconds and turn on the power SW.
When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the address.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
When setting Auto IP, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
*: The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model
Login User Name 4000 5000 6000
Login Password 4000 5000 6000
(15-3) Paper size and media type setting

1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/
MP tray Settings].
2. Select [Cassette Setting] > [Cassette 1 (- 5) ] or [MP Tray Setting].
3. Select [Paper Size] and [Media Type] to set them.
2-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(16)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See the Operation
Guide supplied with the main unit)
(17)Setup setting at high altitude place

When setup is done at high altitude place, execute as follows.
Select maintenance mode U952 > [Execute] > [HIGH ALTITUDE] to execute the procedures below.
Procedures
1. Maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
2. Maintenance mode U140 > [AC Calib] > [Calibration] >
Type: 0 (default), K: ON > [Execute]
Press the [Start] key.
3. Maintenance mode U101 > [Force Execute] > [Execute]

4. Maintenance mode U464 > [Calib] > [Execute]

*: If the developer leak appears after setting the above.

Select maintenance mode U140 > [AC Calib] > [Magnification] to lower the values of K.
(18)Image adjustment
Execute the image adjustment in maintenance mode U952 (Maintenance mode workflow)
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Select [Setup] to adjust the main unit and [EH Setup] to adjust the optional units.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the maintenance mode.
6. After transition, execute the following setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
*: When not executing U952, enter the maintenance modes with the numeric keys in the following order to execute
each setting.
(18-1) Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464)

1.Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Calib].
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Calibration starts.
4.Press the [Stop] key.
(18-2) Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)

1.Input "410" using the numeric keys.
* :Display the execution information screen.
2-43
2SA/2RJ/2NK
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.

3.Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back and the
printed side facing down on the platen.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 2-67
* :The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
5.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
7.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
(18-3) Output Maintenance report (Execute maintenance mode U000)

2.Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the maintenance report.
(18-4) Clearing the counts (Execute maintenance mode U927)

2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
(18-5) Setting the delivery date (Execute maintenance mode U278)

2.Select [Today].
3.Press the [Start] key to set the delivery date.
2-44
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(19)Exiting from the maintenance mode

*: The maintenance mode is exited.
(20)Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)

1. Make sure that each indicator is not flashing, and then turn the power switch off.
Figure 2-68
2. Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

*: It takes a few minutes for power off.
2-45
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(21)Turn the power on again

1. Turn the power switch on.
*: Check the main power switch (a) is ON when the power is not turned on.
Figure 2-69
IMPORTANT
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more, and
then turn on the power switch.
2-3 Installing the optional equipment

(1) SD/SDHC memory card
Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read into the main unit after turning the power on.
SD/SDHC memory card installation

1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
*: Before inserting the memory card, make sure that the power switch is turned off.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).
3. Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the SD card cover (c).
b c
a
b
Figure 2-70
2-46
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
SW
b
a
Figure 2-71
5. Reattach the covers.
Formatting an SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC card, you must first format it with the main unit.
*: Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card.
If you have installed an application, do not format the SD card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD
card.
Format it with a PC or Prescribe command in advance.
2-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)

(3) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51)
Procedures
2. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
Figure 2-72
3. Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4. Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a)(M3x8) once removed.
a
a
b
Figure 2-73
*: Install it in the upper slot.
2-48
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) (120V model standard)
Bundled parts of Wireless LAN interface (IB-35)(1503RR0UN0)

• PWB unit1 pc
• Screw (M3x6)1 pc
Figure 2-74
Procedures
2. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-75
2-49
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Open it if the DP is installed.

4. Remove 2 screws (a)(M3x8).
5. Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-76
6. Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
7. Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
d
f
Figure 2-77
2-50
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Secure the PWB unit (b) with a screw (a)(M3x6).
Figure 2-78
9. Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a)(M3x8).
Figure 2-79
2-51
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c)(M3x10).
Figure 2-80
2-52
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Document table (DT-730(B))
Bundled parts of Document table DT-730(B) (1902LC0UN2)

• Tray stay1 pc
• Tray mounting plate1 pc
• Tray cover1 pc
• Tray lower cover1 pc
• Tray fixing plate1 pc
• Sheet2 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Nut M42 pc
• Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head)7 pc
Figure 2-81
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-82
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-83
2-53
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-84
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-85
2-54
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
c
Figure 2-86
10. Attach the tray lower cover (a).

11. Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
B B
A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-87
2-55
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Affix the two sheet (b) on the document table (a).
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
Figure 2-88
2-56
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(6) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110)
Numeric Keypad installation requires the following parts:

• Numeric Keypad NK-7100 (1903RT0UN0)1 pc
• Numeric Keypad NK-7110 (1903RT0US0): 120V model 1 pc
Bundled parts of Numeric Keypad NK-7100 (1903RT0UN0)

Bundled parts of Numeric Keypad NK-7110 (1903RT0US0)
• Numeric Keypad1 pc
• Numeric Keypad cover1 pc
• Screw (M3x8)2 pc
• Label *1 pc
*:NK-7100 only
Figure 2-89
Procedures
2. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) from the operation unit (a).
3. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the operation unit lid (d) in the direction of the arrow.
a c d
Figure 2-90
2-57
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
4. Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
Figure 2-91
5. Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two screws
(d)(M3x8).
a
c
a d
d
Figure 2-92
6. Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) once
removed in step 2.
b a c
Figure 2-93
2-58
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
7. Affix the label (b) on the numeric keypad (a). (Except 120v model)
Figure 2-94
2-59
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) ID card reader
ID card reader holder installation requires the following parts

according to the shape of it:
• Label (Bundled in the main unit)1 pc
Figure 2-95
Procedures
2. Pull up the operation unit (a).
3. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-96
2-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

5. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
6. Detach the exit upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-97
7. Affix two Hook-and-loop fastener to the ID card reader (a) and the holder part of the main unit (b).
*: The mounting procedure differs depending type of ID card readers.
Type A
Thicker and in the same size as its holder:
Figure 2-98
Type B
Thicker but smaller than its holder:
b
Figure 2-99
2-61
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
Type C
Thinner and in the same size as its holder:
b
Figure 2-100
Note when attaching;

• In case if the external shape of the ID card reader (a) is smaller than the holder section, arrange that the receiving
section should come to the label affix standard position (d) of the ISU right front cover (c).
(If it is necessary to fix, use double sided tape, etc. to fix)
• In case if the thickness of the ID card reader (a) is thin and there is a distance gap from the ISU right front cover (c),
please insert a spacer, etc. between the holder section (b) and adjust the height.
The gap between ISU front right cover (c) and ID Card reader (a): 5 to 10mm (From the holder to the cover: About
30mm)
c ⣙mm
a 5㹼10mm
d
c
b
Figure 2-101
2-62
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Connect the USB connector (b) to the USB interface slot (c).
9. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (e) of the main unit.
c
e b
d
a
Figure 2-102
10. Insert the exit upper cover (b) from the back side of the machine and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3X8).
*: Align the upper exit cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-103
11. Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
Figure 2-104
2-63
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Attach the ID card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach
the ISU front right cover in the original position.
Figure 2-105
Activating Card Authentication

To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your dealer or
service representative, and register the "Machine No." indicated on your machine and the "Product ID" indicated on
the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
Refer to [Optional Application] when starting the trial. (Refer to 2-108)
2-64
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) USB keyboard (120V /220-230V model only)
USB keyboard installation requires the following parts:

• Keyboard holder 10 (1709AN0UN0) 1 pc
• USB Keyboard 1 pc
Bundled parts of Keyboard holder 10 (1709AN0UN0)

• Upper keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
• Lower keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
• Upper keyboard cover 1 pc
• Lower keyboard cover 1 pc
• Upper lid 1 pc
• Lower lid 1 pc
• Hook-and-loop fastener2 pairs
• Binding band1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 S-tite) *16 pc
• Screws (M3x8 S-tite Black)2 pc
Figure 2-106
• Screws (M3x8 P-tite)2 pc
• Screws (M4x8 S-tite)4 pc
• Screws (M4x14 S-tite) *22 pc
*1: 4 pc is used for this model.
*2: Not used in this model.
Procedures
2. Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws
(a)(M3x8).
*: Attach it according to the position of the engraved mark B.
a
a
a
a
c
Figure 2-107
2-65
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

4. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 2-108
5. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) of the ISU rear cover (a).

6. Remove two screws (d)(M3x8) of the ISU left cover (c).
7. Lift up the left side of the ISU rear cover (a) and remove the ISU left cover (c).
d c
d
Figure 2-109
2-66
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Pull up the operation unit (a).

9. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-110

11. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
12. Detach the exit upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
2-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-111
14. Release the hook (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b), and then remove the keyboard cover (d) by sliding it.
a
d
Figure 2-112
2-68
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook (c)
to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e)(M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
Figure 2-113
16. Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b)(M4x8).
b
b
a
Figure 2-114
2-69
2SA/2RJ/2NK
17. Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d)(M3x8, black).
*: Attach it while the hooks come to the punch mark B.
b c b
a
d
Figure 2-115
18. Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting plate
(c) and slide it to the rear.
19. Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
b
Figure 2-116
2-70
2SA/2RJ/2NK
20. Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws
(a)(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
Figure 2-117
21. Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
Figure 2-118
2-71
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a)(M3x8 Black).
b a
c
Figure 2-119
23. Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
Figure 2-120
24. Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener(b) and press it to fix.
2-72
2SA/2RJ/2NK
25. Connect the USB cable (c) with the USB connector (d) on the main unit.
d
c
a b
Figure 2-121
26. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
Figure 2-122
2-73
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Note
In case the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the card reader from the hook (c) of
the main unit. Bundle two of the excess USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
b
Figure 2-123
27. Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
Figure 2-124
2-74
2SA/2RJ/2NK
28. Insert the upper exit cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3×8).
*: Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-125
29. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach the ISU front right cover in the
original position.
Figure 2-126
2-75
2SA/2RJ/2NK
30. Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws
(d)(M3×8).
31. Reattach the screw (b)(M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
d
Figure 2-127
32. Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a)(M3x8).
b
c
Figure 2-128
2-76
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(9) Handset (100V model only)
Handset installation requires the following parts:

• Handset (1909AG9JP0)1 pc
• Document table DT-5100 (1902LC0UN2)1 pc
Bundled parts of handset (1909AC9JP0)

• Handset1 pc
• Handset holder1 pc
• Handset mounting plate*11 pc
• Protection cover*11 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Telephone wire1 pc
• Modular cord1 pc
• Nut M42 pc
Figure 2-129
Bundled parts of Document table DT-730(B) (1902LC0UN2_)
• Tray stay1 pc
• Tray mounting plate1 pc
• Tray cover1 pc
• Tray lower cover1 pc
• Tray fixing plate1 pc
• Sheet*12 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Nut M42 pc
*: *1: Not used in this model.
Procedures
2. Remove the right cover (a).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-130
2-77
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-131
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-132
2-78
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-133
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
Figure 2-134
2-79
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. Remove two pins (b) and two nuts (c) from the handset mounting plate (a).
11. Secure the original tray (d) with two pins and two nuts once removed.
b
b
A
A
B
A A
a B
A
B
c
d
c
Figure 2-135
12. Put two catches (c) at the backside of the handset holder (b) into two pins (a) and slide it toward you to fix it on the
document tray (d).
B
A
b A
A
B
A B
A
B
a B
Figure 2-136
2-80
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. Cut the separator cover (b) of the tray lower cover (a) with nippers (C), etc.
a
Figure 2-137
14. Attach the tray lower cover (a).

15. Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
A A
B B
A A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-138
2-81
2SA/2RJ/2NK
16. Affix the sheet (b) on the left side of document table (a).
a
b
A
A
B
B A
A
B
B
Figure 2-139
17. Connect the telephone wire (a) to the handset (b) and handset holder (c).
B
A
Figure 2-140
18. Connect the modular cord (a) to the handset holder (b).
Figure 2-141
2-82
2SA/2RJ/2NK
19. Connect one end of the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the machine right side (c).
a b
c
Figure 2-142
2-83
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Cassette heater
(10-1) In the case of main unit cassette
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
• Cassette heater 100 set (302ND9471_)1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 set (302ND9472_)
• Cassette heater 240 set (302ND9473_)
Bundled parts of cassette heater set for 100V/120V/240V.

• Cassette heater 1001 pc
• Cassette heater 120
• High temperature caution label1 pc
• Heater cover1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 screw with the binding head)2 pc
• Screws (M3x8 P-tite screw with the binding head)5 pc
Figure 2-143
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
Figure 2-144
4. Turn over the lower cassette (a).
5. Secure the heater cover (c) included in the cassette heater set package at the bottom of the cassette with five
screws (b)(M3×8 P tight).
b
b
b
b
b
c a
Figure 2-145
2-84
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
6. Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
7. Attach it with the screw (e)(M3×8) to the base (d).
b
e
b
d
Figure 2-146
8. Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
9. Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
Figure 2-147
10. Reattach the parts in the original position.

11. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 (Cassette heater On/Off) to [Mode1].
*: In order to apply the setting value, exit the maintenance mode once, and perform the shutdown operation from the
normal screen, and turn off / on the power switch.
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-85
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10-2) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100)

• Cassette heater 100 set (303RB9404_)1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 set (303RB9405_)

• Wire saddles4 pc
Procedures
Figure 2-148
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-149
4. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b)(M3x8).
5. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
*: Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
Figure 2-150
2-86
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
6. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-151

IMPORTANT
2-87
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10-3) In case of Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)

• Cassette heater 100 set (303RB9404_)1 pc

Figure 2-152
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4. Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
Figure 2-153
5. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b)(M3x8).
6. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
7. Make sure the wire does not float.
b
c
b
Figure 2-154
2-88
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-155

IMPORTANT
2-89
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(10-4) In case of Side Feeder (PF-7120)

• Cassette heater 100 set (303RL9404_)1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 set (303RL9405_)
• Cassette heater 240 set (303RL9406_)

• Cassette heater 100 assembly1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 assembly
• Cassette heater 240 assembly
• Edge saddle1 pc
Figure 2-156
Procedures
(Side Feeder side)
2. Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
Figure 2-157
4. Pull out the cassette (a),
a
Figure 2-158
2-90
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Release four bosses (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
Figure 2-159
6. Pass the heater cassette cable (a) through the aperture.

7. Insert the hook (d) of the cassette heater set (c) into two lancing (e) and secure it with two screws (M3×8) (f).
de
a
d
e
b
f
Figure 2-160
2-91
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8. Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9. Attach two wire saddles (d) and the edge saddles (e) and secure the wire.
10. Attach the right cover and the rear cover.
e
c
a
d
Figure 2-161
(Main unit side)
11. Remove two screws (a)(M3×8) and remove the cover plate (c) from the main unit paper feeder (b).
a
c
Figure 2-162
2-92
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
12. Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13. Attach to the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d)(M3×8).
d
a
Figure 2-163
14. Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire (d).
a b
Figure 2-164
IMPORTANT
2-93
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Coin Vender (option for 100v model only)
Coin vender installation requires the following parts:

• Coin Vender (1905H99JP0)1 pc
• Vendor relay wire (302NL4631_)1 pc
Bundled parts of Coin Vender (1905H99JP0)

• Vender wire1 pc
• Vender base1 pc
• Screws (M4x6)4 pc
Procedures
2. Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a)(M4x6).
c
b
a
Figure 2-165
Figure 2-166
2-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Push down the lower rear cover (c), release the upper side rib, and release the lower hook (d) while lifting it up
slightly opened. After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
d 3
Figure 2-167

7. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 2-168
2-95
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the front side aperture (b) and widen it in the direction of the arrow to release
four hooks (d) and to remove the upper left cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
b
Figure 2-169
11. Pull out the lower cassette.

12. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).
2-96
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. Lift up three hooks (c) and release them. Then remove the lower left cover (b).
c
b
c c c
a
a
b
a
Figure 2-170
14. Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
a
b a
Figure 2-171
2-97
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
16. Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 5.
a
b
c
Figure 2-172
17. Remove a screw (a) and attach to the earth terminal (b) of the vendor wire.
a
a
Figure 2-173
2-98
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18. Connect the connector (b) of the vendor relay wire (a) to the connector (d) (YC21) of the engine PWB (c).
a b
d
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC40
YC39 YC33 YC23 20
1
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21 YC22
Figure 2-174
2-99
2SA/2RJ/2NK
19. Pass the vendor relay wire (a) through the wire saddle (b) and the edge saddle (c).
Figure 2-175
20. Remove four wire stoppers (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
21. Connect the connector (c) of the vendor relay wire to the vendor wire (d).
c a
Figure 2-176
2-100
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
22. Remove wire stopper (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
Figure 2-177
23. Reattach the left lower cover in the original position.

24. Reattach the left upper cover in the original position.
25. Reattach the rear left cover in the original position.
26. Reattach the rear lower cover in the original position.
27. Reattach the rear upper cover in the original position.
28. Connect the signal wire (a) of the coin vendor to the connector (b) of the vendor wire.
Figure 2-178
29. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-101
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12)Banner Tray
Installation of banner tray requires the following parts:

• Banner Guide 10 (1203RP0UN0)1 pc
Bundled parts of Banner Guide 10 (1203RP0UN0)

• Tray base1 pc
• paper guide A1 pc
• paper guide B1 pc
• paper guide C1 pc
Figure 2-179
Procedures
1. Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
Figure 2-180
2. Unlock the stopper (a) and move it outward.
a
Figure 2-181
3. Open the multi purpose tray (a).
2-102
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 2-182
4. Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
b
Figure 2-183
2-103
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(13)Attach the optional cable.

The following parts are necessary in order to attach the optional cable.
• Key counter wire (302MV4609_)1 pc
• Wire saddle (7YZM610002++H01)5 pc
Procedures
2. After removing front side rib (c) and then remove the upper right cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-184
Figure 2-185
2-104
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4. Open the right cover.

6. Release the hook (b) and remove right rear upper cover (c).
c
b
Figure 2-186
7. Cut the split cover (b) of the upper right cover (a) with the nipper (c) etc.
b
a
Figure 2-187
2-105
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8. Attach the wire saddle (a) x 5.
Figure 2-188
9. Pass the key counter wire (c) from the opening (b) of the right upper cover (a).
b a
Figure 2-189
2-106
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
10. Pass the key counter wire (a) through the wire guide (b) and reattach the right upper cover (c) to the original posi-
tion.
11. Pull out the key counter wire (a) without slack, and fix it at the wire saddle (d) in 5 positions.
b a
c
Figure 2-190
12. Pass the key counter wire (a) through the opening (b) of the shield box and fix it at the wire saddle (c) in 4 posi-
tions.
13. Connect the connector of the key counter wire (a) to the connector (f) (YC22) of the engine PWB (e).
c
f
d
a
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
YC9 YC10 YC34 YC22

YC4 YC27 YC21
Figure 2-191
2-107
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2-4 About Optional Applications
application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
Card Authentication Kit*1 Emulation upgrade kit
ThinPrint Option*1 OCR extension kit*1
*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
*: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
*: If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Use of an Application

Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. Login
with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model
Login User Name 4000 5000 6000
Login Password 4000 5000 6000
2. Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

*: You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] or [Details].
Items
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
3. Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to
Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4. Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
NOTE
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of acti-
vated application are displayed in the Home screen.
2-108
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2-5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system
1. Connect the power plug of the main unit to the

outlet and turn the power on.
4. Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
*: Refer to the following destination code list.
6. Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.
*: Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
Destination code list
Destina- Destination Destina- Destination

tion code tion code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European unification)
007 Argentina ↑ Italy
009 Australia ↑ Germany
022 Brazil ↑ Spain
038 China ↑ U.K.
080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands
084 Indonesia ↑ Sweden
088 Israel ↑ France
097 Korea ↑ Austria
181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland
250 Russia ↑ Belgium
108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark
115 Mexico ↑ Finland
126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal
136 Peru ↑ Ireland
137 Philippines ↑ Norway
152 Middle East 254 Taiwan
156 Singapore
159 South Africa
169 Thailand
7. After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
IMPORTANT
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps of
FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at V.34 com-
munication in such a line.
2-109
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
(Refer to 6-244) U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off
(Refer to 6-239) (U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed]
2-110
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2-111
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view
11
7 6
10
12
5 3
2
Original path / Paper path

Optical path / Paper path (Option)
Figure 3-1
1. Cassette feed section 7. Toner container

2. MP paper feed section 8. Drum unit
3. Paper conveying section 9. Transfer and separation section
4. Image scanner unit 10. Fuser section
5. Laser scanner unit 11. Feedshift/exit section
6. Developer unit 12. Duplex conveying section
3-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-2 Extension device construction (option)

(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100)
2
Paper path
Figure 3-2
1. Cassette feed section
(2) Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110)
2 3 1
Paper path
Figure 3-3
1. Right cassette paper feed section 3. Paper conveying section

2. Left cassette paper feed section
3-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side feeder cross-section view (PF-7120)

1
Paper path
Figure 3-4
1. Cassette feed section
3-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100)

2
1
Original path
Figure 3-5
1. DP feed section 3. DP reversing/exit section

2. DP conveying section
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110)
2 1
Original path
Figure 3-6
1. DP feed section 3. DP exit section

2. DP conveying section
3-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100)

1
Paper path
Figure 3-7
1. Exit section 2. Paper conveying section
(7) Inner Finisher cross-section view (DF-7100)
2 3 5
Paper path
Figure 3-8
1. Exit section 4. Staple unit

2. Paper conveying section 5. Punch unit (Option)
3. Reversing section
3-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) 4,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110)
4 2 1
Paper path
Figure 3-9
1. Punch unit 4. Exit section (tray B)

2. Paper conveying section 5. Exit section (tray A)
3. Staple unit
3-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) 1,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120)

2 1
4
Paper path
Figure 3-10
1. Punch unit 3. Staple unit

2. Paper conveying section 4. Exit section (main tray)
3-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B))
Paper path
Figure 3-11
1. Paper conveying section 3. Exit section (upper tray: DF)

2. Exit section (mail tray)
3-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730)
4 3 2
Paper path
Figure 3-12
1. Paper conveying section 3. Paper folding section

2. Staple unit 4. Exit section
3-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12)Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100)
Paper path
Figure 3-13
1. Exit section (tray)
3-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-3 Paper conveying and Paper detection

(1) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110
T
A
H
I
C
Figure 3-14
3-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Main unit+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+DF-7110+MT-730(B)+BF-730+PH-

7
M
K
Q
J 66xx J
O
O O U
P
H
O
T F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 3-15
3-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7
N N
N U
N
H
T
A H
I
E C
Figure 3-16
[Paper jam] L. Inner Finisher

A. Paper jam at cassette 1 M. Paper jam at the document processor
B. Paper jam at cassette 2 N. Paper jam at the 1000-sheet finisher
C. Paper jam at 550-sheet×2 cassette 3 O. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(inner)
C. Paper jam at 1750-sheet×2 cassette 3 P. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(tray A)
D. Paper jam at 550-sheet×2 cassette 4 Q. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(tray B)
E. Paper jam at 1750-sheet×2 cassette 4 R. Paper jam at the folding unit
F. Paper jam at cassette 5 (Side feeder) S. Paper jam at the BF tray
G. Paper jam at the MP tray T. Paper jam at the conveying section
H. Paper jam at right cover 1 U. Paper jam at the duplex unit
I. Paper jam at right cover 2 V. Paper jam at the registration section
J. Paper jam at the bridge conveying section
K. Paper jam at the mailbox
3-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-4 Electric parts

(1) Wire connection
(1-1) (Machine rear side)
Figure 3-17
1. Main PWB 4. Feed image PWB

2. Engine PWB 5. Feed drive PWB
3. Main high-voltage PWB
3-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Backside of the shield box
Figure 3-18
6. Transfer high-voltage PWB

7. Low power voltage PEB
3-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs

(2-1) Main PWB
It controls the software for the interface and

image data processing, and the hardware
generating operation section.
Figure 3-19
(2-2) Engine PWB
It controls the hardware for the generation

of the high-voltage and the bias, the image
scanner unit, and the paper conveying sys-
tem.
Figure 3-20
3-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB
Output the main charger bias and the

developer bias.
Figure 3-21
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB
Output the transfer bias, separation bias

and transfer cleaning bias.
Figure 3-22
(2-5) Low power voltage PEB
The input voltage (AC) from the AC power

supply is changed to DC such as DC24V.
Figure 3-23
3-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-6) IH PWB
Controlling IH
Figure 3-24
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB
It consists of the wiring relay circuit for the

main PWB, the operation panel sub PWB
and the LCD.
Figure 3-25
(2-8) Fuser high voltage PWB
Output fuser high voltage
Figure 3-26
3-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Electric parts layout
3-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-1) PWBs
Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
16
12
Laser scanner unit 13
Drum unit
14 22 15 1
20 8 2
18 Main unit
24
Fuser unit
IH unit
21 3
10
25 11 23
7
4
17 25
6 5
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-27
3-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and exit drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger bias and the developer bias.
6. Low voltage PWB.................................. Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB K ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Drum/Developer relay PWB.................. Consisting of the feed image PWB, the drum and wiring relay cir-
cuit with developer unit.
18. Drum PWB K......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
19. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
20. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling IH
21. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
22. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
23. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
24. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX PWB.
25. Fuser high voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser heater belt.
3-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-2) Part name table (PWB)

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
1 PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302NK9404_
Main PWB
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP 302NK9405_
2 Engine PWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 302NK9406_
3 Feed image PWB PARTS PWB FEED IMAGE ASSY SP 302NK9408_
4 Feed drive PWB PARTS PWB FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302ND9428_
5 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN
Main high-voltage PWB 302NK9411_
SP
6 PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 100 SP 302ND9461_
Low power voltage PEB
PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 200 SP 302ND9462_
7 PARTS PWB TRANSFER CONNECT
Transfer connect PWB 302ND9429_
ASSY SP
8 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE TRANS-
Transfer high-voltage PWB 302NK9412_
FER SP
9 Transfer PWB TR-6500 302NK9303_
10 Operation panel main PWB PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 302RH9403_
11 Operation panel sub PWB PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 302RH9404_
12 APC PWB LK-6500 302NK9301_
13 PD PWB LK-6500 302NK9301_
14 LED PWB PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302ND9312_
15 CCD PWB PARTS ISU ASSY H SP 302ND9311_
16 Developer PWB K DV-8550K 302ND9303_
17 PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT
Drum/Developer relay PWB 302NK9402_
ASSY SP
18 Drum PWB K DK-8550 302ND9307_
19 Fuser PWB FK-8550 302ND9308_
20 PARTS PWB IH 100 ASSY SP 302ND9430_
IH PWB
PARTS PWB IH 200 ASSY SP 302ND9431_
21 NFC PWB PARTS PWB NFC ASSY SP 302RH9405_
22 RFID PWB PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP 302NK9407_
23 USB hub PWB PARTS PWB USB HUB ASSY SP 302RH9402_
24 KUIO relay PWB PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP 302K99427_
25 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE FUSER
Fuser high voltage PWB 302ND9469_
SP
3-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-3) Sensors and Switches

23 Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
25
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
15 24 14
Fuser unit
IH unit
28
39
40
41
48
Main unit
46
38
52
53 11
27 37 36 42 45
44 26
51 43
29 55 34 16
7 9
47 4
57 21
17 49
32
58 1
8 3
35 12
54
6
19 30 5 2 33 50
56 10 18 31 22 13 20
Figure 3-28
3-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. Paper sensor 1...................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette 1.

2. Paper sensor 2...................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette 2.
3. Lower paper gauge sensor 1 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 1.
4. Upper paper gauge sensor 1 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 1.
5. Lower paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 2.
6. Upper paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 2.
7. Paper length sensor 1........................... Detecting the size of paper length in the cassette 1.
8. Paper length sensor 2........................... Detecting the size of paper length in the cassette 2.
9. Paper width sensor 1 ............................ Detecting the size of paper width in the cassette 1.
10. Paper width sensor 2 ............................ Detecting the size of paper width in the cassette 2.
11. DU sensor 1 .......................................... Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
12. DU sensor 2 .......................................... Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
13. Conveying sensor ................................. Detecting paper jam at the paper conveying section.
14. Original size sensor .............................. Detecting the original size
15. Home position sensor ........................... Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.
16. Rear ID sensor...................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
17. Front ID sensor ..................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
18. MP tray sensor...................................... Detecting the MP tray is pulled out.
19. MP conveying sensor............................ Detecting paper jam at the MP paper conveying section.
20. MP paper sensor................................... Detecting the presence of paper on the MP tray.
21. MP paper length sensor........................ Detecting the size of paper length on the MP tray.
22. MP paper width sensor ......................... Detecting the size of paper width on the MP tray.
23. T/C sensor K ......................................... Detecting the toner density in the developer unit , storing the
developer individual data by EEPROM (Black)
24. Toner level sensor K ............................. Detecting toner level in the developer unit (Black)
25. Belt thermistor....................................... Detecting the transfer belt temperature.
26. Belt release sensor ............................... Detecting the transfer belt release position.
27. Front belt rotation sensor ...................... Detecting the fuser rotation position
28. Rear belt rotation sensor....................... Detecting the fuser rotation position
29. Belt roll-up sensor ................................. Detecting the fuser belt roll-up
30. Retard sensor 1 .................................... Detecting the retard roller rotation of cassette 1
31. Retard sensor 2 .................................... Detecting the retard roller rotation of cassette 2
32. Lift upper limit sensor 1......................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the cassette 1 is
activated.
33. Lift upper limit sensor 2......................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the cassette 2 is
activated.
34. Registration sensor ............................... Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.
35. Weight sensor ....................................... Detecting the waste toner box weight
36. Fuser sensor ......................................... Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.
37. Fuser pressure release sensor ............. Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure.
38. IH position sensor Detecting the IH core home position.
39. Fuser thermistor 1 (middle)................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (middle)
40. Fuser thermistor 2 (center) ................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (center)
41. Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) ..................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (edge)
42. Fuser thermistor 4 (press)..................... Detecting the press roller temperature.
43. Exit reversing sensor ............................ Detecting jam at the exit section.
44. Lower exit full sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
45. Upper exit full sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
46. JS sensor .............................................. Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
47. Front cover sensor ................................ Detecting opening/closing of the front cover.
48. Original size timing sensor.................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
49. PF switch .............................................. Detecting the paper feeder.
50. Main Power Switch ............................... Main Power Switch
3-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
51. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
52. Conveying open/close sensor............... Detecting opening/closing of the conveying section.
53. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
54. Right cover switch................................. Blocking the 24 V power line when the right cover is open and
reset interlock switch.
55. Temperature/humidity sensor................ Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main unit.
56. MP position sensor ............................... Detecting the MP lift plate position
57. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
58. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.
3-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-4) Part name table (Sensors and Switches)

1 Paper sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
2 Paper sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
3 Lower paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
4 Upper paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
5 Lower paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
6 Upper paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
7 Paper length sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
8 Paper length sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
9 Paper width sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
10 Paper width sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
11 DU sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
12 DU sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
13 Conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
14 Original size sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 302ND9480_
15 Home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
16 Rear ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414_
17 Front ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414_
18 MP tray sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
19 MP conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302K99458_
20 MP paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
21 MP paper length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
22 PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR
MP paper width sensor 303R39405_
ASSY SP
23 T/C sensor K DV-8550K 302ND9303_
24 Toner level sensor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
25 Belt thermistor TR-6500 302NK9303_
26 Belt release sensor DR-6500 302NK9302_
27 Front belt rotation sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
28 Rear belt rotation sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
29 Belt roll-up sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406_
30 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 1 302ND9432_
SP
34 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 2 302ND9432_
SP
32 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
33 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
34 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404_
3-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK
35 Weight sensor - -
36 Fuser sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
37 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
38 FK-8595IH 302ND9309_
IH position sensor
FK-8590IH 302ND9310_
39 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8550 302ND9308_
40 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8550 302ND9308_
41 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8550 302ND9308_
42 Fuser thermistor 4 (press) FK-8550 302ND9308_
43 Exit reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
44 Lower exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
45 Upper exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
46 JS sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
47 Front cover sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
48 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
49 PF switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
50 Main Power Switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
51 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110_
52 Conveying open/close sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
53 Waste toner full sensor - -
54 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
55 Temperature/humidity sensor PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
56 MP position sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
57 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
58 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
3-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-5) Motors
15 Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
Laser scanner unit 4
Drum unit
8
9
20
Main unit
Fuser unit
IH unit
2
1 29
31
16
22
27 6
19 17
18 14
26 10
30 28
13
23 25 7 21 12 11 24
Figure 3-29
3-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. IH core motor Drive the IH core.

2. Scanner motor ...................................... Drive the optical section.
3. Polygon motor....................................... Drive the polygon mirror.
4. LSU cleaning motor .............................. Driving the LSU dustproof glass cleaning mechanism.
5. Belt cleaning motor ............................... Driving the cleaning roller of the primary transfer belt.
6. Belt release motor................................. Driving to release the primary transfer belt.
7. MP lift motor.......................................... Operates the MP plate.
8. Container motor .................................... Drive the container
9. Toner motor K ....................................... Supplying toner to developer unit. (Black)
10. Drum motor K........................................ Driving of the drum unit. (Black)
11. Lift motor 1 ............................................ Activating the lift plate of the cassette 1
12. Lift motor 2 ............................................ Activating the lift plate of the cassette 2
13. Paper feed motor .................................. Drive the paper feed mechanism.
14. Developer K / Transfer belt motor ......... Driving the developer unit K and the transfer belt.
15. Vibration motor K .................................. Vibrating the developer unit K.
16. Fuser motor........................................... Drive the fuser section.
17. Fuser pressure release motor............... Driving the fuser pressure release.
18. Waste toner motor................................. Drive the waste toner mechanism.
19. Exit reversing motor .............................. Driving the exit section.
20. IH PWB fan motor ................................. Cooling the IH PWB.
21. Toner absorption fan motor Absorb scattering waste toner.
22. Controller fan motor .............................. Absorb scattering waste toner
23. Developer fan motor K Cooling the developer section.
24. Fuser edge fan motor............................ Cooling the edge of the fuser heater belt.
25. Power source fan motor........................ Cooling the power source PWB and high-voltage PWB.
26. Exit/IH front fan motor ........................... Cooling output paper/IH.
27. Exit/IH middle fan motor........................ Cooling output paper/IH.
28. Container right fan motor Cooling container/toner hopper.
29. Exit fan motor........................................ Cooling the exit section.
30. Vibration motor K Vibrating the waste toner duct K.
31. Container left fan motor Cooling container.
3-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3-6) Part name table (motor)

1 FK-8590IH 302ND9310_
IH core motor
FK-8595IH 302ND9309_
2 Scanner motor PARTS MOTOR ISU SP 302N29401_
3 Polygon motor LK-6500 302NK9301_
4 LSU cleaning motor LK-6500 302NK9301_
5 Belt cleaning motor TR-6500 302NK9303_
6 Belt release motor DR-6500 302NK9302_
7 MP lift motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY A SP 302ND9404_
8 Container motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 SET SP 302ND9451_
9 Toner motor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
10 PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11
Drum motor K 302ND94530
SET SP
11 Lift motor 1 MOTOR LIFT ASSY 302ND9448_
12 Lift motor 2 MOTOR LIFT ASSY 302ND9448_
13 Paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND94770
14 DR-6500
302NK9302_
Developer K / Transfer belt motor (PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 DRUM SET
(302ND9455_)
SP)
15 Vibration motor K DV-8550K 302ND9303_
16 Fuser motor MOTOR-BL W20 ASSY SP 302ND9476_
17 Fuser pressure release motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302ND9405_
18 Waste toner motor - -
19 Exit reversing motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449_
20 IH PWB fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING DLP 70 SP 302K99435_
21 Toner absorption fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302K99436_
22 Controller fan motor FAN BOX COOLING 302FZ4404_
23 Developer fan motor K FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
24 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY
Fuser edge fan motor 302ND9458_
SP
25 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430_
26 Exit/IH front fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
27 Exit/IH middle fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
28 Container right fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_
29 Exit fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460_
30 Vibration motor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
31 Container left fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_
3-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-7) Others
Developer unit
16
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
15,19 12 13 18 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 7
9
11 1
2
3
20
10
4 5 6 8
Figure 3-30
3-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. DU clutch 1 ........................................... Controlling drive of the duplex section.

2. DU clutch 2 ........................................... Controlling drive of the duplex section.
3. MP clutch .............................................. Control drive of the primary paper feed from the MP tray.
4. Registration clutch ................................ Control drive of the secondary paper feed from the cassette.
5. Paper feed clutch 1 ............................... Control drive of the primary paper feed from the cassette 1.
6. Paper feed clutch 2 ............................... Control drive of the primary paper feed from the cassette 2.
7. Developer clutch ................................... Control drive of the developer unit. (Black)
8. Vertical conveying clutch....................... Control drive of the conveying section from the MP tray.
9. Middle clutch ......................................... Control drive of the conveying section.
10. Cleaning solenoid ................................. Cleaning the ID sensor.
11. Container solenoid K............................. Releasing the container lock (Black).
12. Lower exit solenoid ............................... Operation of the feedshift guide.
13. Upper exit solenoid ............................... Operation of the feedshift guide.
14. HDD ...................................................... Hard disk (HDD)
15. LCD....................................................... Displaying the operation screen.
16. Eraser K ................................................ Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum.(Black)
17. Fuser thermostat................................... Prevention of the abnormal IH belt heating.
18. Speaker................................................. Generating the panel touch sound and error sound.
19. Touch Panel .......................................... Converting the operation position data.
20. Drum heater K....................................... Prevention of the drum surface condensation.
3-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-8) Part name table (other)

1 DU clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468_
2 DU clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468_
3 MP clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468_
4 Registration clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 302RH4401_
5 Paper feed clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409_
6 Paper feed clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409_
7 Developer clutch DR-6500 302NK9302_
8 Vertical conveying clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409_
9 Middle clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 302RH4401_
10 Cleaning solenoid PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414_
11 Container solenoid K SOLENOID JS 303NM4401_
12 Lower exit solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99438_
13 Upper exit solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99438_
14 HDD PARTS STORAGE DEVICE SP 302ND9318_
15 LCD PARTS LCD OPERATION SP 302RH9406_
16 Eraser K DK-8550 302ND9307_
17 Fuser thermostat FK-8550 302ND9308_
18 Speaker SPEAKER 302RH4507_
19 Touch panel PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302RH9407_
20 PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY
Drum heater K 302NK9409_
SP
3-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-5 Electric parts (Optional unit)

(1) Electric parts layout
17 2
13
16 19
15
1
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
Figure 3-31
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP exit sensor....................................... Detecting paper output to the document processor.
12. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
3-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
14. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
15. DP lift motor .......................................... Drive the original paper feed lift plate of the document processor.
16. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
17. DP conveying motor.............................. Drive the original conveying section in the document processor
18. DP feedshift motor ................................ Drive the original feedshift section in the document processor.
19. DP reversing motor ............................... Drive the original reversing section in the document processor.

18
21
17
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
Figure 3-32
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
3-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Front page)
9. DP backside timing sensor ................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Back page)
10. DP exit sensor....................................... Detecting paper output to the document processor.
11. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
12. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
13. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
14. DPSHD PWB ........................................ Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
15. DPCIS ................................................... Scanning the backside original data in the document processor.
16. DP lift motor .......................................... Drive the original paper feed lift plate of the document processor.
17. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
18. DP registration motor ............................ Drive the original registration section in the document processor.
19. DP conveying motor.............................. Drive the original conveying section in the document processor
20. DP exit motor ........................................ Drive the original exit section in the document processor.
21. DP drive fan motor ................................ Cool drive section in the document processor.
22. DPCIS fan motor................................... Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document Pro-
cessor (DP-7120)
3-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) Paper feeder (PF-7100)

1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
28
Front side of main unit /
Figure 3-33
1. PF PWB ................................................ Controlling drive of the electrical components in the PF.
2. PF right cover sensor............................ Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the upper cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the lower cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the upper cassette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
9. PF paper width sensor 1 ....................... Detecting the paper width in the upper cassette.
10. PF paper width sensor 2 ....................... Detecting the paper width in the lower cassette.
11. PF paper length sensor 1...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of upper cassette.
12. PF paper length sensor 2...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of lower cassette.
13. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of upper cassette.
14. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of lower cassette.
15. PF conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the upper paper conveying section.
16. PF conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the lower paper conveying section.
17. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the upper cassette
is activated.
18. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the lower cassette
is activated.
19. PF lift motor 1........................................ Driving the lift plate of the upper cassette.
20. PF lift motor 2........................................ Driving the lift plate of the lower cassette.
21. PF feed motor ....................................... Drive the paper feed section.
22. PF feed clutch 1 .................................... Control drive of the primary paper feeding from the upper cas-
sette.
23. PF feed clutch 2 .................................... Control drive of the primary paper feeding from the lower cas-
sette.
24. PF conveying clutch 1........................... Control drive of paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
3-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK
25. PF conveying clutch 2........................... Control drive of paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
26. PF cassette sensor 1 ............................ Detecting presence of the upper cassette.
27. PF cassette sensor 2 ............................ Detecting presence of the lower cassette.
28. PF cassette heater................................ Dehumidifying paper.
(1-4) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)
1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8 17
10 24 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
Figure 3-34
2. PF right cover sensor............................ Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the right cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the left cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
9. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of right cassette.
10. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of left cassette.
11. PF horizontal conveying sensor ............ Detecting paper jam at the horizontal paper conveying section.
12. PF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting paper jam at the vertical paper conveying section.
13. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the right cassette is
activated.
14. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the left cassette is
activated.
15. PF lift motor 1........................................ Driving the lift plate of the right cassette.
16. PF lift motor 2........................................ Driving the lift plate of the left cassette.
17. PF feed motor ....................................... Drive the paper feed section.
18. PF feed right clutch 1 ............................ Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the right cassette.
3-38
2SA/2RJ/2NK
19. PF feed left clutch 2 .............................. Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the left cassette.
20. PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 .......... Control drive of the right horizontal paper conveying section.
21. PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 .......... Control drive of the right horizontal paper conveying section.
22. PF vertical conveying clutch ................. Control drive of the vertical paper conveying section.
23. PF cassette sensor 1 ............................ Detecting presence of the right cassette.
24. PF cassette sensor 2 ............................ Detecting presence of the left cassette.
3-39
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) Side feeder (PF-7120)
13 9
2
11
5
10 8
1
7
12
3
6
4
14
Figure 3-35

2. PF paper sensor ................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette.
3. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
4. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
5. PF lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the cassette is acti-
vated.
6. PF lift lower limit sensor ........................ Detecting the lower limit when the lift plate of the cassette is acti-
vated.
7. PF lift motor........................................... Driving the lift plate of the cassette.
8. PF conveying motor .............................. Control drive of the paper conveying section.
9. PF feed clutch ....................................... Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the cassette.
10. PF paper feed solenoid......................... Switching the paper feeding section.
11. PF feed sensor...................................... Detecting the paper jam at paper feeding section
12. PF cassette sensor ............................... Detecting the insertion of the cassette.
13. PF connection sensor ........................... Detecting the connection between PF and the main unit
3-40
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
Figure 3-36
1. DF PWB ................................................ Control operation of each electrical components.
2. DF staple relay PWB............................. Relaying the staple unit control signals.
3. DF front cover sensor ........................... Blocking the 24 V power line when the right cover is open and
reset interlock switch.
4. DF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.
5. DF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting the adjusting DF plate front home position.
6. DF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting the adjusting DF plate rear home position.
7. DF adjusting sensor .............................. Detecting the paper guides home position.
8. DF bundle exit sensor ........................... Detecting the bundle exit unit position.
9. DF exit sensor....................................... Detecting presence of paper at the exit section.
10. DF paper press sensor 1 ...................... Detecting the bundle exit paper pressure.(Upper limit)
11. DF paper press sensor 2 ...................... Detecting the bundle exit paper pressure.(Lower limit)
12. DF paddle sensor.................................. Detecting the paddle home position.
13. DF tray sensor ...................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.
14. DF slide sensor ..................................... Detecting the staple unit slide position.
15. DF paper entry motor ............................ Drive of the entry roller.
16. DF middle motor ................................... Driving of the middle roller.
17. DF paddle motor ................................... Drive of the paper feed guides.
18. DF exit release motor............................ Drive of the bundle exit unit.
19. DF side registration motor 1.................. DF side registration motor 1
20. DF side registration motor 2.................. Drive of the DF rear adjusting plate.
21. DF exit motor ........................................ Drive of the exit roller.
22. DF tray motor ........................................ Ascending and descending drive of the exit tray.
23. DF slide motor....................................... Sliding drive of the staple unit.
24. DF staple unit........................................ Staple of paper.
25. DF paper press solenoid....................... Switching the bundle exit paper pressure.
3-41
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
26. DF connection sensor ........................... DF connection detection with the main unit (connection detec-
tion).
27. DF release LED .................................... Lighting up when releasing the inner finisher.
(1-7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)
2 6
3 1
7
9 10 4
Figure 3-37
1. PH PWB................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the punch unit

2. PH home position sensor...................... Detecting home position of the PH cam
3. PH pulse sensor.................................... Controlling the rotation of the PH cam
4. PH tank full sensor (Emitter) ................. Detecting the punch dust tank full.
5. PH tank full sensor (Receiver) .............. Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6. PH paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.
7. PH tank set sensor................................ Detecting the presence of the punch dust tank.
8. PH motor............................................... Driving of the PH
9. PH solenoid........................................... Switching the punch holes.(Except 100 V model)
10. PH tank solenoid................................... Shifting the punch waste tank.
3-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-8) Attachment kit (AK-7100)
4
1 5
2 3
Figure 3-38
1. BR PWB................................................ Controlling drive of the electrical components in the Bridge.

2. BR cover sensor ................................... Detecting opening/closing of the bridge cover.
3. BR conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.(right side)
4. BR conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.(left side)
5. BR conveying motor.............................. Control drive of the paper conveying to the bridge.
6. BR job separator sensor ....................... Detecting paper output to the job separator.
3-43
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-9) 4000-sheet finisher (DF-7110)
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25
3 40 13 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
Figure 3-39
3-44
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3. DF operation PWB ................................ Consisting of LEDs and keys.
4. DF front cover sensor ........................... Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
5. DF exit cover sensor ............................. Detecting opening/closing of the exit cover.
7. DF middle sensor.................................. Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
12. DF drum sensor .................................... Paper detection at the relief drum.
15. DF tray upper surface sensor 1 ............ Detecting front side of paper at the main tray.
17. DF tray sensor 1 ................................... Detecting home position of the exit tray.
19. DF tray sensor 3 ................................... Detecting middle position of the exit tray.
20. DF tray sensor 4 ................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.
21. DF tray sensor 5 ................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.(when the folding unit is
installed)
23. DF shift set sensor ................................ Detecting the shift guide home position.
24. DF shift release sensor ......................... Detecting the shift guide release position.
25. DF shift sensor 1................................... Detecting the front shift plate home position.
26. DF shift sensor2.................................... Detecting the rear shift plate home position.
27. DF sub exit sensor ................................ Detecting paper output to the tray B.
28. DF sub tray full sensor .......................... Detecting full that output to the tray B.
35. DF relief drum motor ............................. Drive of the relief drum.
39. DF shift release motor........................... Detecting the shift guide release position.
40. DF shift motor 1 .................................... Drive of the rear shift guide.
41. DF shift motor 2 .................................... Drive of the front shift guide.
42. DF Feedshift solenoid 1 ........................ Switching the feedshift guide.
45. DF exit clutch ........................................ Drive transmission of the exit roller.
47. DF exit fan motor 1 ............................... Cooling the exit paper.(rear) (not connected)
48. DF exit fan motor 2 ............................... Cooling the exit paper.(front) (not connected)
49. DF exit fan motor 3 ............................... Cooling the exit paper.(center) (not connected)
3-45
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-10) 1000-sheet finisher (DF-7120)

26
24
9
11 22
4
14 23
19
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
Figure 3-40
3-46
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3. DF front cover sensor ........................... Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
4. DF top cover sensor.............................. Detecting opening/closing of the top cover.
6. DF middle sensor.................................. Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
16. DF tray sensor 2 ................................... Detecting middle position of the exit tray.
17. DF tray sensor 3 ................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.
3-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-11) Mailbox (MT-730(B))
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
Figure 3-41
1. MT PWB................................................ Controlling electrical components of the mailbox.

2. MT cover sensor ................................... Detecting opening/closing of the mail box cover.
3. MT tray sensor 1 ................................... Detecting overflow of paper output to the tray 1.
10. MT tray exit sensor 1 (photo receptor).. Detecting paper jam.
11. MT tray exit sensor 2 (photo emitter) .... Emitting LED pulses.
12. MT home position sensor...................... Controlling drive motor in the mailbox.
13. MT conveying motor ............................. Paper conveying drive of the mail box.
3-48
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-12) Punch unit (PH-7)
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
Figure 3-42
1. PH PWB................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the punch unit

2. PH home position sensor...................... Detecting home position of the PH cam
3. PH pulse sensor.................................... Controlling the rotation of the PH cam
4. PH slide sensor..................................... Detecting home position of the punch unit.
5. PH tank full sensor................................ Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6. PH paper edge sensor 1 ....................... Detecting the position of the front edge of paper.
7. PH paper edge sensor 2 ....................... Detecting the position of the front edge of paper.
8. PH tank set sensor................................ Detecting the presence of the punch dust tank.
9. PH motor............................................... Driving of the PH
10. PH slide motor ...................................... Driving of the punch unit.
11. PH solenoid........................................... Switching the punch holes.(Except 100 V model)
3-49
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-13) Folding unit (BF-730)
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14
Figure 3-43
1. BF PWB ................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the folding unit.
2. BF tray sensor....................................... Detecting opening/closing of the BF tray.
3. BF left cover sensor .............................. Detecting opening/closing of the BF left cover.
4. BF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
5. BF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting presence of paper on the BF bridge section.
6. BF paper sensor ................................... Detecting presence of paper on the folding unit.
7. BF adjusting sensor 1 ........................... Detecting home position of the lower BF moving plate.
8. BF adjusting sensor 2 ........................... Detecting home position of the upper BF moving plate.
9. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting home position of the BF side registration guide.
10. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting home position of the BF side registration guide.
11. BF blade sensor.................................... Detecting home position of the BF blade.
12. BF exit sensor ....................................... Detecting paper output to the BF tray.
13. BF tray full sensor ................................. Detecting paper full on the BF tray.
14. BF set sensor........................................ Detecting the folding unit.
15. BF main motor ...................................... Drive of the paper conveying in the holding unit.
16. BF paper entry motor ............................ Drive of the entry roller.
17. BF blade motor ..................................... Drive of the BF blade.
18. BF adjusting motor 1............................. Drive of the lower adjusting plate in the folding unit.
19. BF adjusting motor 2............................. Drive of the upper adjusting plate in the folding unit.
20. BF side registration motor 1.................. Detecting home position of the lower BF side registration guide.
21. BF side registration motor 2.................. Detecting home position of the upper BF side registration guide.
22. BF staple motor..................................... Drive of the BF staple.
23. BF feedshift solenoid ............................ Operation of the BF feedshift guide.
3-50
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-14) Job separator (JS-7100)
Figure 3-44
1. JS sensor .............................................. Detecting presence of paper on the job separator tray.
3-51
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-6 Drive system

(1) Consisting of unit drive
(1)Feed/conveying drive Toner motor K
Paper feed motor 1. Toner supply K
1. Paper feed roller
2. Paper feed roller (5)Fuser drive
3. MP paper feed roller Fuser motor
4. Vertical conveying roller 1. Fuser heater belt
5. Middle roller
6. registration roller Fuser pressure release motor
7. Secondary transfer roller 1. Fuser pressure release
8. DU conveying roller
(6)Container drive
(2)Drum drive K Container motor
Drum motor K 1. Toner container
1. Drum K
(3)Developer K / Transfer belt drive

Developer K / Transfer belt motor
1. Developer sleeve roller K
2. Transfer belt drive roller
Belt release motor

1. Transfer belt release
(4)Toner supply drive
3-52
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Feed/conveying drive
Secondary transfer roller
Registration roller left
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Paper feed motor
Middle clutch
Paper feed clutch 1
Vertical conveying clutch
Paper feed clutch 2
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Vertical conveying roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
Figure 3-45
3-53
2SA/2RJ/2NK
MP drive
MP paper feed roller
Paper feed motor
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
Figure 3-46
Drum drive
Drum motor K
Main drive unit
Drum K
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum unit K
Figure 3-47
3-54
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Developer drive
Sleeve roller K

࣋ࣝࢺ㞳㛫࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Developer clutch
Main drive unit
Developer unit K
Figure 3-48
Primary transfer drive
Primary transfer roller K
Main drive unit
Belt release motor
Belt cleaning motor

Transfer belt drive roller
Figure 3-49
3-55
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Fuser/ Exit/ Duplex drive
Exit reversing motor
Upper exit roller
Lower exit roller
Exit conveying roller
Fuser motor
Fuser pressure release motor
Fuser heater belt
Fuser press roller
Paper feed motor
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU conveying middle roller
DU conveying lower roller
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
IH core motor
Figure 3-50
3-56
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Drive location
9
8
7
10
6
1
11
Feed drive unit

1. Paper feed motor Fuser drive unit
2. Paper feed clutch 1 9. Fuser motor
3. Vertical conveying clutch 10. Fuser pressure release motor
4. Paper feed clutch 2
Toner supply drive unit
Main drive unit 11. Toner motor K
5. Drum motor K
6. Developer K / Transfer belt motor
7. Belt release motor
8. Container motor
3-57
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Drive unit

(3-1) Feed drive unit
Figure 3-51
(3-2) Main drive unit
Figure 3-52
3-58
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-3) Toner supply drive unit
Figure 3-53
(3-4) Fuser drive unit
Figure 3-54
3-59
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-7 Mechanical construction

(1) Paper feed and conveying section
The paper feed and conveying section consists of the cassette paper feed section and the MP tray paper
feed section, and the paper conveying section conveying the fed paper to the transfer and separate sec-
tion.
(1-1) Cassette feed section

The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The cassette forwards
paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed
roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
[Components parts]
8 7 62 3 1 4
1. Paper feed roller
2. Pickup roller
3. Pickup holder
4. Retard roller
5. Retard holder 13
6. Friction pad
7. Lift plate 12 5 1
8. Paper width guides 23
6
9. Paper length guide 8 14
10. Cassette base 7
11. Paper width guide release 4
lever
12. Actuator (paper sensor)
12
13. Vertical conveying roller 5
14. Vertical conveying pulley
Figure 3-55
3-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
Figure 3-56
3-61
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Feed drive PWB

Cassette sensor 2 YC5-B11
Cassette sensor 1 YC5-A1
Paper width sensor 1 YC5-A7
Paper width sensor 2 YC5-B3
Lower paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A14
Upper paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A11
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
Paper sensor 1 YC6-B9
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU clutch 2 YC7-A3
Paper feed clutch 1 YC4-1
Lift upper limit sensor 1 YC6-B6
Vertical conveying clutch YC4-3
Paper feed clutch 2 YC4-5
PF lift upper limit sensor 2 YC6-B12
Paper sensor 2 YC6-12
Conveying sensor YC6-B3
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
Upper paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B7
Lower paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B10
Retard sensor 2 YC6-A10
Retard sensor 1 YC6-A7
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
Figure 3-57
3-62
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) MP tray paper feed section

The MP tray can load 150 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP
paper feed roller while lifting up the MP lift plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the
effect of the MP retard roller.
[Components parts] 4 1 6 9 5
1. MP paper feed roller
2. MP Retard roller
3. MP Retard guide
4. MP Retard holder
5. MP lift plate
6. MP friction pad
7. MP tray
8. MP frame
9. MP paper width guides
10. Actuator (MP paper sensor )
11. Sub tray
12. Actuator (MP paper length
sensor)
2 10 8
Figure 3-58
10
9
1
4
5 7
11
2 6 12
9 3
Figure 3-59
3-63
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP position sensor YC8-
MP clutch YC7-A5
MP paper sensor YC8-9
MP paper width sensor YC7-A8
MP paper length sensor YC7-A14
Feed Drive PWB
MP conveying sensor YC8-11

MP tray sensor YC7-A10
YC8-1
MP lift motor YC8-2
Figure 3-60
3-64
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) Paper conveying section

The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section when the paper is fed
from the cassette or the MP tray, or re-fed in the duplex print. The fed paper is conveyed to where it turns
the registration sensor on by the middle roller or the MP conveying roller, and then, conveyed to the trans-
fer and separation section by the registration front and rear rollers.
[Components parts]
1. Middle roller
2. Middle pulley 4 5
3. Registration guide sheet 3
4. Registration roller left 6
5. Registration roller right
6. Registration guide 7
7. Conveying frame 2
1
Figure 3-61
2
1
6
3
Figure 3-62
3-65
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Belt roll-up sensor YC7-B5
Registration clutch YC9-13
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Middle clutch YC6-A4
Registration sensor YC6-A2
DU sensor 2 YC7-B9
Feed drive PWB
Figure 3-63
3-66
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Optical section

The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner
section to write the image.
(2-1) Image scanner section

The image on the original is exposed by the exposure lamp and that reflection light is scanned by the CCD
image sensor on the CCD PWB via three mirrors and the ISU lens to change the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the mirror unit A stops at the original scanning position (slit glass)
and scans the image from the original conveyed in the document processor.
8 5 9 3 6 1 12
8 16 7 15 2
Figure 3-64
[Components parts]
1. CCD 9. Exposure lamp
2. Scanner frame 10. Drive motor
3. Contact glass 11. Scanner wire
4. Original size indicator 12. Scanner wire drum
5. Slit glass 13. Original size sensor
6. ISU lens 14. Home position sensor
7. Mirror A 15. Mirror unit A
8. Mirror B 16. Mirror unit B
Figure 3-65
3-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5
4 14
9
7
3
13
10
11 6
1
2
12
Figure 3-66
3-68
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Home position sensor YC16-A12
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor
YC16-A4
YC16-A5
Original size timing sensor YC16-A6

Lens
Original size sensor YC16-10
CCD PWB YC36
LED PWB
Engine PWB
Figure 3-67
3-69
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Laser scanner unit

The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects
to the polygon mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The
laser scanner unit has some lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to
the drum surface. Also, the LSU cleaning motor operates to automatically clean the LSU glass.
[Components parts]
1. Polygon motor
Drum
2. fθ lens A
3. fθ lens B
4. LSU glass
5. LSU base 6 4
6. Mirror
7. Laser emitting diode
8. Collimator lens
9. LD slit glass plate
10. LD mirror
11. Cylindrical lens
12. PD PWB
13. PD lens 5 1 2 3 7
14. PD mirror
Figure 3-68
9 8 7
12
11 13 14
1
2 10
6 3
Figure 3-69
3-70
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
YC9 YC27
YC1 YC3
PD PWB YC4
LSU cleaning motor YC6-1

YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
Figure 3-70
3-71
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3) Developer section

(3-1) Developer unit
The developer section consists of the magnet roller forming the magnetic brush, the sleeve roller forming
the thin layer by replacing the toner, the developer blade, and the developer screw mixing up the toner.
The toner density is adjusted by impressing the bias to the magnet roller and the sleeve roller. The toner
amount inside the developer unit is detected by the toner sensor.
[Components parts]
1. Sleeve roller
8
2. Magnet roller 2 1
3. Developer blade
4. Developer screw A
5. Developer screw B
6. Developer case
7. Toner sensor
8. Drum
5 7 4 3
Figure 3-71
5
4
2
3
Figure 3-72
3-72
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias
Main high-voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K / Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Feed image PWB
Developer clutch YC23-4
T/C sensor K
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
Vibration motor
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Developer PWB K YC2
Drum relay PWB
Figure 3-73
3-73
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4) Drum section

The drum section consists of the drum, the main charger unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum surface is
evenly charged to prepare forming the electrical latent image by emitting the laser.
(4-1) Main charger unit

The charged roller with the electric charge contacts the drum surface and rotates to charge the drum
evenly.
(4-2) Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected
to the waste toner box by the drum screw. The eraser consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the
remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.
[Components parts] 3 5 6 8
1. MC roller
2. MC cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Cleaning roller
7. Drum screw
8. Eraser
1 2 7
Figure 3-74
2
1
5
6
Figure 3-75
3-74
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
Feed image PWB
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor K
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum relay PWB

᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Cleaning lamp K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Drum PWB K YC10
Drum heater
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK YC6
Figure 3-76
3-75
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Transfer and separation section

(5-1) Primary transfer unit
The primary transfer section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt and primary transfer roller
facing the drum. When printing the image, the toner image formed on the drum is transferred on the transfer
belt by impressing the bias to the primary transfer roller facing the drum, and then the toner image is formed.
Also, the ID sensor attached to the main unit measures the toner density on the transfer belt.
The transfer cleaning unit collects the remaining toner on the transfer belt after the secondary transferring,
and forwards it to the waste toner box as waste toner.
[Components parts]
1. Drive roller
2. Backup roller 8 7 6 5 3 1
3. Primary transfer roller
4. Tension roller
5. Transfer belt
6. Belt pre-brush
7. Cleaning fur brush
8. Cleaning roller
9. Cleaning screw
10. Cleaning blade
10 9 4 2 12
11. Transfer unit cover (B)
12. Drum
Figure 3-77
2
9
8
4
7 3
10
1
11
Figure 3-78
3-76
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
YC34
Transfer high-voltage
Transfer bias
PWB
Engine PWB
Belt release sensor YC23-7
YC23-1
Belt release motor
YC23-2
Feed image PWB
YC24-13
Developer K / YC24-14
Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
Belt thermistor YC2-1

Transfer PWB
YC3-3
Belt cleaning motor
YC3-4
Figure 3-79
3-77
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Secondary transfer roller unit

The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller attached to the paper conveying
unit, the discharge needle and etc.. The DC bias from the high-voltage PWB (HVPWB) is impressed to the
secondary transfer roller, and the toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the
potential gap. After transferring, the paper is separated by self stripping and the electric charge on the paper is
removed by the separation brush contacting the ground.
[Components parts]
1. Secondary transfer roller
2
2. Discharger needle
3. Transfer front guide
4. Transfer spring
3 1 4
Figure 3-80
3 4
Figure 3-81
3-78
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Transfer Bias Transfer T2_OFF_REM

high-voltage T2_CNT YC34-A10
Separate bias T_REM YC34-A13
PWB YC34-A14
Figure 3-82
3-79
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Fuser section

Paper conveyed from the transfer / separation section is caught in between the fuser heater belt and the
fuser pressure roller. Since the fuser heater belt is heated by IH and the fuser pressure roller pressed by
the fuser pressure spring is pressed, the toner is thermally melted by heat and pressure and then fused to
paper.
The surface temperature of the fuser heater belt and the fuser pressure roller is detected by the fuser
thermistor and controlled by the Engine PWB.
(6-1) Fuser unit

[Components parts]
1. Fuser heater belt 9 8
2. IH core
7
3. Fuser thermistor
4. Separator
5. Fuser press roller 2 4
6. Fuser press roller separation 3
5
claw
7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 11
8. Fuser exit roller
9. Fuser exit sub roller 13 12
10. Pressure switching cam
11. Fuser frame
12. Fuser front guide
13. Fuser discharger needle 1
Figure 3-83
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
3-80
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 3-84
3-81
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
Feed drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
Rear belt rotation sensor YC22-16
Fuser thermistor 1 YC22-13
YC22
Fuser pressure release sensor YC2-11
Fuser jam sensor YC2-6
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
IH position sensor YC32-B8
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
Figure 3-85
3-82
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) Exit feedshift section

The exit feedshift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex
conveying section.
(7-1) Exit unit

1
[Components parts]
1. Upper exit roller
10
2. Upper exit pulley 2
3. Lower exit roller 9 8
4. Lower exit pulley 7
5. Exit conveying roller 5
6. Exit conveying pulley 3 6
7. Reversing guide
8. Reversing guide pulley 10
9
4
9. Actuator (Exit paper full sensor) 9
10. Exit feedshift guide
11. Exit guide pulley 7
12. Actuator (Exit reversing sen-
sor)
Figure 3-86
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
Figure 3-87
3-83
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Feed image PWB
Upper exit full sensor YC17-A10
Lower exit full sensor YC17-A7
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Exit reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
Exit reversing sensor YC17-A19
YC17-1A5
Upper exit solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower exit solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-88
3-84
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
(7-2) Exit paper jam

Stretch the exit level lever if the next output paper is caught up by paper output to the exit tray.
1. Stretch the exit level lever (c) on the exit

actuator if the leading edge of the next b b
output paper is caught up by the trailing a c
edge (a) of the output paper.
2. Pushes down the trailing edge (a) of out- a

put paper to prevent the (b) leading edge
of next paper from being caught up.
Figure 3-89
In case of stretching the exit level lever
Figure 3-90
In case of restoring the exit level lever
Figure 3-91
3-85
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Duplex conveying section

(8-1) Duplex conveying unit
The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the exit feed-
shift section in the duplex print to the paper conveying section.
[Components parts] 1
1. DU conveying upper roller
2. DU conveying upper pulley
9
3. DU conveying middle roller
2
4. DU conveying middle pulley 12
5. DU conveying lower roller 3
6. DU conveying lower pulley 4
7. DU registration roller
8. DU registration pulley
9. Actuator (DU sensor 1)
10. Actuator (DU sensor 2) 6
11. DU conveying base 5
12. DU conveying guide 4
11
10
7
8
Figure 3-92
1 9
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
Figure 3-93
3-86
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
Conveying open/close sensor YC7-B13
Duplex sensor 1 YC7-B12
Feed drive PWB
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Duplex clutch 2 YC7-A3
Duplex clutch 1 YC7-A1
Duplex sensor 2 YC7-B9
Figure 3-94
3-87
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3-8 Mechanical construction (option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2) and consists of 2 cas-
settes. Paper from the cassette is picked up by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit
by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
14 3 4
2 1 12
9 10 8 7
13
15
5
12
13
15
1
4
5
2
9 10 8 7 14 3
Figure 3-95
[Components parts]
1. PF feed roller 9. PF paper length guide

2. PF Pickup roller 10. PF cassette base
3. PF Pickup holder 11. PF paper width guide release lever
4. PF retard roller 12. PF conveying roller
5. PF retard holder 13. PF conveying pulley
6. PF friction pad 14. PF actuator (PF paper sensor)
7. PF lift plate 15. PF actuator (PF conveying sensor)
8. PF paper width guide
3-88
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
Figure 3-96
8
9 7
14
2
12
13
4
8 1
6
11
Figure 3-97
3-89
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
PF PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length sensor 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
PF paper width sensor 1 YC3-17
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
PF conveying sensor 1 YC4-6
PF paper sensor 1 YC3-3
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 YC4-3
PF feed clutch 1 YC9-3
PF conveying clutch 1 YC9-1
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
PF conveying clutch 2 YC9-5
PF feed clutch 2 YC9-7
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF paper sensor 2 YC5-3
PF conveying sensor 2 YC4-14
PF paper width sensor 2 YC5-17
YC5-11
PF paper length sensor 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
Figure 3-98
3-90
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)

(2-1) Cassette section
The cassette can load 1650 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 1500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). For feeding from the
cassette, paper is pulled out by the rotation of the pickup roller, and is conveyed to the main unit by the
rotation of the feed roller / conveying roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
1 1 10
[Components parts]
9 8 7 2 4 13 2 4 11
1. PF feed roller
2. PF Pickup roller
3. PF Pickup holder
4. PF retard roller
5. PF retard holder
6. PF friction pad 12 3
7. PF lift plate 5 12 3 14
8. PF paper width guide 5
9. PF paper length guide*1
10. PF conveying roller
11. PF conveying pulley
12. PF actuator (PF paper sen-
sor)
13. PF actuator (PF horizontal
conveying sensor)
14. PF actuator (PF vertical conveying sensor)
*1: Metric specification only
Figure 3-99
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
8
9 11 1
2
8 12
8
10
4
6
7
Figure 3-100
3-91
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
PF feed left clutch 2 YC9-7
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 YC9-9
PF horizontal conveying sensor YC4-14
PF vertical conveying sensor YC4-6
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 YC9-5
PF feed right clutch 1 YC9-3
PF vertical conveying clutch YC9-1
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF PWB
Figure 3-101
3-92
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side feeder (PF-7120)

The cassette can load 3500 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 3000 sheets paper (80 g/m2). For feeding from the
cassette, paper is pulled out by the rotation of the pickup roller, and is conveyed to the main unit by the
rotation of the feed roller / conveying roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
[Components parts]
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
1. PF feed roller
2. PF Pickup roller
3. PF Pickup holder 10
4. PF retard roller
4
5. PF friction pad
6. PF lift plate
7. PF paper width guide 11
8. PF paper length guide 5
9. PF conveying roller
10. PF conveying pulley
11. PF actuator (PF paper sen-
sor)
Figure 3-102
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
Figure 3-103
3-93
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
PF feed clutch YC15-1
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
PF lift upper limit sensor YC5-16
PF lift lower limit sensor YC6-9
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
Figure 3-104
3-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Document Processor (DP-7100)

(4-1) Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to
the original conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP pickup pulley and the DP feed roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP paper feed belt
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
3. DP feed holder
4. DP retard roller 10 4 1 8
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original sensor
7. DP original width guide
8. DP original tray
9. DP feed sensor
10. DP registration roller
11. DP registration pulley
12. DP actuator (DP registration
sensor ) 9 6
13. DP actuator (DP original length
sensor )
Figure 3-105
2
13
12
11
8
1
4
6
8
9 12
Figure 3-106
3-95
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Original conveying section and exit section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The conveyed original is scanned at the
optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass.
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The original already scanned is output to
the original exit table by the exit roller. When scanning the original in the duplex reversing mode, the origi-
nal is conveyed to the reversing tray once and then re-conveyed to the original conveying section by the
reversing roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1 6 8 9
3. DP scanning guide
4. DP scanning guide pulley
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley 14
10. DP feedshift roller
11. DP feedshift pulley
12. DP exit roller
13. DP exit pulley
14. DP exit tray
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
15. DP actuator
(DP exit sensor)
Figure 3-107
3-96
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
Figure 3-108
3-97
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DP timing sensor YC7-5
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DP lift lower limit sensor YC7-12
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP exit sensor YC17-3
DP original width sensor YC6-5
DP original length sensor YC6-3
DP feed sensor YC4-2
DP registration sensor YC7-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC16-8
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP feedshift sensor YC16-5
Figure 3-109
3-98
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) Dual Reverse Scan
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
Conveyed to the DP switchback

2
3
tray by the DP switchback feedshift
guide. DP switchback roller
DP switchback tray
1
DP switchback feedshift guide
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
The second side of original is 2

3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is
conveyed to the DP switchback tray. DP switchback tray
1
Slit glass: second side scanning
Ejected to the original eject table

DP regist roller
by the DP switchback, DP
feedshift and DP eject rollers. DP switchback roller
2
3 1
DP eject roller
Original eject table
DP conveying roller DP feedshift roller
Figure 3-110
3-99
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Document Processor(DP-7110)

(5-1) Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to
the original conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP pickup pulley and the DP feed roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP paper feed belt
11 10 2
3. DP belt tension pulley
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
4. DP retard roller
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original width guide
7. DP lift plate
8. DP feed sensor
9. DP registration roller
10. DP registration pulley
13. DP original tray
14. DP original length sensor 4 5
Figure 3-111
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
Figure 3-112
3-100
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-2) Original conveying section and exit section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The 2nd side of the conveyed original is
scanned when passing the CIS and the 1st side at the optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the
DP slit glass. The original already scanned is output to the original exit table by the exit roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP backside timing sensor 32 1
2. DPCIS
3. DPCIS roller
6. DP scanner guide pulley
7. DP scanner guide
9. DP conveying pulley 3 13
10. DP actuator
(DP exit sensor)
11. DP exit roller
12. DP exit pulley
13. DP exit tray
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
Figure 3-113
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
Figure 3-114
3-101
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DP backside timing sensor YC7-5
DPSHD PWB
DP feed sensor YC7-5
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP original width sensor YC6-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC2-10
DP lift lower limit sensor YC4-2
DP exit sensor YC16-8
DP timing sensor YC16-5
Figure 3-115
3-102
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)

(6-1) Paper conveying section
The conveying section consists of the parts as shown below. Paper on the middle tray is transferred after
adjusting the side registration by moving the DF side registration guides in the staple and sort modes.
[Components parts] 18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF conveying roller 13
4. DF conveying pulley
5. DF entry sensor 14
6. DF paper stopper
7. DF Middle roller 2
8. DF Middle pulley
1
9. DF paddle
10. DF upper guide
11. DF paper width guides
12. DF bundle exit unit
13. DF exit roller 15 17 6 16
14. DF exit pulley
Figure 3-116
15. DF actuator
(DF paper holding sensor)
16. DF stapler
17. DF middle tray
18. DF tray
3-103
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18 13
8
7
14
4
9
2 1
16
Figure 3-117
3-104
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF bundle eject sensor YC19-18
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
DF side registration sensor 1 YC19-6
YC13-2
DF Paper press solenoid
YC13-3
DF exit paper sensor YC16-3
DF Paper press sensor 2 YC19-24
DF Paper press sensor 1 YC19-21
DF paper entry sensor YC17-5
DF Side registration sensor 2 YC19-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF adjusting sensor YC19-27
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
DF staple reley PWB YC10
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
DF paddle sensor YC17-3
DF slide sensor YC19-30
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF PWB
Figure 3-118
3-105
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-2) Bundle exit operation

1st sheet
a
1. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF
middle roller (a), paper is conveyed to
the process section and then conveyed
to the DF tray (b).
Figure 3-119
a
2. The DF bundle exit unit (b) and The DF
upper guide (c) descend when the paper d b
trailing edge passes the DF middle roller
(a). Then, the DF exit roller (d) is rotated c
reversely and paper is sent to the DF mid-
dle tray (e).
Figure 3-120
b a
3. Then, the DF upper guide (a) ascends
and the DF bundle exit unit (b) ascends
by the DF exit release motor drive.
By rotating the DF paddles(c), paper is f c
conveyed to the DF middle tray (d).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (e)
drive the DF side registration guides (f) to
d
adjust paper.
Figure 3-121
3-106
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2nd sheet and after

c
4. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF
middle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is con-
veyed to the process section as the 1st
b
sheet(a).
Figure 3-122
a
5. The DF bundle exit unit (b) and The DF
upper guide (c) descend when the paper d b
trailing edge passes the DF middle roller
(a). Then, by rotating the DF exit roller (d) c
and the DF paddles (e) , paper is con- e
veyed to the DF middle tray (f). Paper is
adjusted which is same as the 1st sheet.
f
Figure 3-123
a
6. Once completing to adjust the last sheet
to bundle, the DF bundle exit unit (a) b
descends and output paper bundle (c) to
the DF tray (d) by the rotation of DF exit
roller (b). c
Figure 3-124
3-107
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

(7-1) Paper entry and feedshift and DF tray B exit section
The paper entry section convey paper from the main unit to the feedshift section. Also, the feedshift guide
3 switches the paper conveying path to convey paper to the DF tray B or finishing section.
[Components parts] 7 9 8
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley 6
3. DF feedshift guide 3
4. DF tray B conveying roller 11
6. DF tray B exit roller
7. DF exit pulley 10
8. DF sub exit sensor 4
5
9. DF actuator (DF sub exit sen-
sor) 2
3
10. DF entry sensor
11. DF tray B 1
Figure 3-125
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
Figure 3-126
3-108
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF Sub tray full sensor YC21-6
DF sub exit sensor YC21-3
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF exit motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF PWB
Figure 3-127
3-109
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7-2) Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section

The feedshift guide 3 (b) is activated by the DF feedshift solenoid 3 (a) and switches the paper conveying path
for the paper conveyed to the feedshift section to output it to the DF tray B (c) or convey to the feedshift sec-
tion for the relief drum (d) or finishing section (e). Also, the DF sub exit sensor (f) detects paper jam when out-
put paper to the DF tray B (c).
a
e
d
b
Figure 3-128
(7-3) Finishing section

The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the main unit and output to
the DF tray A. Also, bundle exit mode and staple mode are processed.
Also, for folding, switch the paper conveying path to the relief drum side by the feedshift guide 1.
3-110
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Components parts] 13 16,17 15 10 9 6 4 7 1

1. DF relief drum 14 11 8
2
4. DF feedshift guide 1 12
5. DF feedshift guide 2
6. DF drum sensor 3
7. DF actuator (DF drum sensor)
8. DF middle sensor
9. DF actuator (DF middle sen- 5
sor)
10. DF Middle roller 18
11. DF Middle pulley
12. DF tray A exit roller
13. DF exit pulley
14. DF exit sensor 19
15. DF bundle exit unit
16. DF side registration sensor 1
18. DF staple unit
19. DF slide sensor
20. DF tray A
Figure 3-129
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
Figure 3-130
3-111
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
DF shift release sensor YC23-18
DF exit clutch YC14-13
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
YC18-7
DF drum sensor YC20-3
DF middle sensor YC20-6
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4

DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC17
DF staple unit
DF bundle exit sensor YC22-15
DF tray upper surface sensor 2 YC13-3
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
YC15-11 / YC15-12
DF exit sensor YC22-11
Figure 3-131
3-112
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7-4) Relief drum operation
When finishing multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to
finish paper, the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
7. DF feedshift guide 1 (b) is activated by a

the DF feedshift solenoid 1 (a) and the
conveying path for the conveyed paper is
switched. The 1st paper of the next
group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
8. Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group is
conveyed to the relief drum (c).
b
c
Figure 3-132
9. When the 3rd paper of the next group is

conveyed into the relief drum, it is con-
veyed to the finishing section (a) with the
1st and 2nd paper. Then, the paper con-
veying path is switched by the feedshift
guide 1 (b).
Figure 3-133
3-113
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) activates

the feedshift guide 2 (c) and it switches
the paper conveying path to convey
paper to the folding unit (a).
Figure 3-134
3-114
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1st sheet c
1. By rotating the middle roller (a), paper is
conveyed to the process section. a
Paper is conveyed to the DF tray A (c)
by the DF tray A exit roller (b).
2. The conveying guide (d) descends when

the paper trailing edge passes the middle
roller (a). Then, the DF tray A exit roller (b) a
is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the
adjusting tray (e).
d
b
e
f
g
3. Then, the paper conveying guide (d)
ascends and the bundle exit unit (g) k
ascends by the DF exit release motor (f)
drive.
h
By rotating the DF tray A exit roller (b) and
adjusting paddles (h), paper is conveyed to
the adjusting tray (i).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (j) drive
the adjusting guides (k) to adjust paper.
d
b i
j
Figure 3-135
3-115
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2nd sheet and after

4. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF mid-
dle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed to b
the process section as the 1st sheet(a). c
5. The conveying guide (d) descends when

e f
the paper trailing edge passes the DF mid-
dle roller (c). Then, by rotating the paddles c
(e) and the adjusting paddles (e), paper is
conveyed to the adjusting tray (g). Paper is
d
h
6. When adjusting the last paper of bundle is
completed, the bundle exit unit (h) j
descends and the DF tray A exit roller (i)
rotates to output the paper bundle to the DF
tray A (j).
Figure 3-136
3-116
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(8-1) Finishing section
The finishing section consists of the parts below and paper conveyed from the main unit is output to the
exit tray. Also, bundle exit mode and staple mode are processed.
[Components parts] 9 10 12 8 6 7 5 4 2 1 15 3
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF entry sensor
4. DF middle sensor
5. DF actuator (DF middle sen-
sor)
6. DF Middle roller
7. DF Middle pulley 11
8. DF bundle exit unit 13,14
9. DF exit roller
10. DF exit pulley
11. DF exit sensor
12. DF adjusting tray
13. DF side registration sensor 1 16
15. DF staple unit
16. DF slide sensor
17. DF paddle
18. DF tray
Figure 3-137
3-117
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18
6
7
18
10
9
1
2
Figure 3-138
3-118
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF exit sensor YC19-8
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC10
DF staple unit
DF bundle exit sensor YC19-12
DF middle sensor YC18-3
YC9-5 / YC9-6
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
YC9-11 / YC9-12
Figure 3-139
3-119
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1st sheet
1. By rotating the DF entry roller (a) and
DF middle roller (b), paper is conveyed
to the process section and then con-
veyed to the finishing section. Paper is
d b
conveyed to the DF main tray (d) by the
exit roller (c).
c
a
2. The conveying guide (e) descends when

the paper trailing edge passes the middle
roller (b). Then, the exit roller (c) is rotated b
reversely and paper is sent to the adjusting
tray (f).
c
e
f
h g
3. Then, the conveying guide (e) ascends and

the bundle exit unit (h) ascends by the DF
l
exit release motor (g) drive.
By rotating the exit roller (c) and adjusting
paddles (i), paper is conveyed close to the
position (j) of the adjusting tray (f).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (k) drive
the adjusting guides (l) to adjust paper.
j
i k
Figure 3-140
3-120
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2nd sheet and after

4. By rotating the DF entry roller (c) and DF
middle roller (d), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed
to the process section as the 1st sheet(a).
b
d
5. The conveying guide (e) descends when

the paper trailing edge passes the middle f
roller (d). Then, by rotating the paddles (f) d
and the adjusting paddles (g), paper is con- e g
veyed to the adjusting tray (h). Paper is
6. When completing to adjust the last sheet to f

bundle, the bundle exit unit (i) descends
and by rotating the main tray exit roller (j),
the paper bundle is output to the DF main
tray (k).
k
j
Figure 3-141
3-121
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))

Paper is output to the mailbox tray 1 to 7 which is specified and stock them.
[Components parts] 9
1. MT conveying pulley
2. MT conveying roller
10
3. MT exit pulley
4. MT exit roller
5. MT lower entry guide 11
3
6. MT middle entry guide 4
7. MT upper entry guide 12
8. MT feedshift nail 3 7
4
9. MT tray 1 13
10. MT tray 2 3 8
4
11. MT tray 3 14 2 1
12. MT tray 4 3 8
13. MT tray 5 4
15
14. MT tray 6 3
15. MT tray 7 4 8
16. MT Actuator 2 1
3 8
(MT overflow sensor) 4
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
Figure 3-142
9
10
11
7
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
Figure 3-143
3-122
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
MT PWB
MT tray exit sensor 2 YC1-18
MT tray sensor 1 YC1-2
YC5-1
MT conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
MT tray exit sensor 1 YC2-2
MT home position sensor YC2-4
YC3
YC7
DF PWB
Figure 3-144
3-123
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9-1) Operation of output to the mailbox tray

As the belt supporting plate (b) moving on the belt (a) passes through the feedshift claw lever (c), the feedshift
claws (d) operate to switch the conveying path of the paper and output them to each tray. Also, the MT tray
exit sensor (e) detects paper jam.
b d
a e
Figure 3-145
3-124
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Punch unit (PH-7)

The punch unit is installed to the paper loading part of the document finisher, and stops the loaded paper once
and make punch holes.
[Components parts]
1. PH cam
2. PH cutter 1
3. PH dust tank 6
4. PH cutter holder
7
5. PH cam shaft
6. PH home position sensor 2
7. PH pulse sensor
8. PH pulse plate
Figure 3-146
8
4
1
5
2
Figure 3-147
3-125
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
YC4-1
PH motor
YC4-3
PH slide sensor YC6-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
PH slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
PH pulse sensor YC8-3
PH home position sensor YC8-6
PH tank set sensor YC9-1
PH PWB
PH tank full sensor YC5-10
YC5-4
YC5-5
PH paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
PH paper edge sensor 2 YC7-1
YC5-2
PH solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF PWB
Figure 3-148
3-126
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Folding unit (BF-730)

The folding unit makes the conveyed paper bi-fold or tri-fold with the BF blade and output paper to the BF tray.
Also, the BF staple unit makes paper half-folded and outputs booklet-stapled paper to the BF tray.
[Components parts]
1. BF conveying roller 1 2 1
2. BF conveying pulley 1 3
3. BF vertical conveying sensor
4. BF conveying roller 2
5. BF conveying pulley 2
6. BF entry roller 21 17 16
7. BF entry pulley 22 19 18 14 15
8. BF entry sensor 5 4
9. BF paper sensor
8
10. BF blade motor 6 7
11. BF blade sensor 25
12. BF right roller
26 20
13. BF left roller
23
14. BF top roller
15. DF staple unit 9
16. DF exit sensor
17. BF conveying roller 3
18. BF conveying pulley 3
19. BF feedshift solenoid
20. BF exit roller
21. BF exit pulley
24 13 1211 10
22. BF tray full sensor
Figure 3-149
23. BF exit paper press arm
24. BF lower moving plate
25. BF upper moving plate
26. BF tray
1
2
1
18
1 21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 4
13 12
Figure 3-150
3-127
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
BF tray full sensor YC20-9
BF side registration sensor 1 YC20-6
BF exit sensor YC20-12
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
BF vertical conveying sensor YC20-15
BF paper entry sensor YC20-29
BF adjusting sensor 2 YC20-26
BF side registration sensor 2 YC20-21
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
BF paper sensor YC20-18
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration sensor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF main PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
YC10-19/ YC10-20
BF adjusting sensor 1 YC20-3
BF blade sensor YC20-24
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF PWB
Figure 3-151
3-128
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-1) Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding)

Center-folding
1. Paper (b) stuck in the folding unit (a) is conveyed to the center-folding position by the BF adjusting motor
1/2 (c) that move the BF upper moving plate (d) and BF lower moving plate (e).
2. The BF adjusting motor 1/2 (f) drives to adjust the paper side registration.
e a d
f c
c f
Figure 3-152
3. The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by the BF blade motor drive to pinch it between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4. Center-folded paper is output to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF exit roller
(d).
c b
d a
Figure 3-153
3-129
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Tri-folding
1. The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor
1/2 as well as the center-folding operation.
2. After the paper side registration, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and have it pinched between the
BF right roller (b) and BF left roller (c).
3. The BF feedshift solenoid (d) activates the BF feedshift guide (e), and switches the conveying path of
paper from the BF right/left roller and convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
Figure 3-154
4. When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated at the space is pinched between the
BF right roller (a) and upper BF roller (b). Then, the paper is folded inside.
3-130
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 3-155
5. Tri-folded paper (a) is output to the BF tray (d) by the BF conveying roller3 (b) and BF exit roller (c).
c b
a
Figure 3-156
3-131
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-2) Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit

Perform the measure below in case to make uniform the width of A, B and C when tri-folding the paper.
A B C
B
Z
*: In case to perform this measure to the
bundled paper, please note that there
might be a little margin for the tri-folding
A C
position and Z section might be folded.
*: Machine default setting (B)

Metric (A4) : 100 to 102 mm
Inch (Letter) : 95 to 96 mm
X
Figure 3-157
3-132
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
Adjustment plate position change method
1. Push the folding unit release lever (a)

and pull out the folding unit (b).
a
Figure 3-158
3-133
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. Open the upper folding unit cover (a) b

upward and remove two screws (b) to
detach the exit cover (c).
b
c
Figure 3-159
3-134
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Loosen two screws (b) securing the

adjustment plate (a) and move it.
*: Raise the adjustment plate to narrower
F
the width of B and lower the adjustment
plate to wider the width of B.
(Scale: 1mm)
*: When adjusting, fix it where the left and

right scale are equal in reference to the
scale (c). b a b
Default setting position

Metric : A4 (d)
Inch : LT (e)
*: Engraved mark for A4 and LT are avail-
able at the machine rear side only.
e
d
Figure 3-160
B
Treatment 2
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting:
Change the setting value of [Three Fold] to
shift the tri-folding position (a) and change the A C A C
width of A and C. Width of B remains
Left Right
unchanged.
Raise the setting value to align the tri-folding

position to the left.
Lower the setting value to align the tri-folding a a
position to the right.
Figure 3-161
3-135
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-136
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the
power lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the
disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to
damage the PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
(2) Storage and handling of the drum

Note the following when handling and storing the drum.
When pulling out the drum unit from the main unit, please be careful not to hit a very strong light, such as
direct sunlight on the surface of the drum.
Store in the range of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C(–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of
85% RH or less. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in
the place where the temperature and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the
tolerable range.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object.
Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3) Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or high humidity environment.
4-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4-2 Maintenance parts

(1) Maintenance kit
100V
Item for the maintenance Quan Part No. Alternative

tity parts No.
Name used in service Name used in parts list
manual
MK-6325 MK-6325/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702NK0JP0 072NK0JP
(600,000 images) • DRUM(H) UNIT 1
• DLP(H) K UNIT 1
• FUSER UNIT(H) 1
• TRANSFER MONO UNIT 1
• ROLLER SECONDRY TRANS- 1
FER ASSY 2
• PULLEY FEED
2
• PULLEY PICKUP
2
• PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY
SP 1
• PULLEY FEED ASSY 1
• RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
• FILTER TOP 1
• FILTER REAR LOWER
120V/ 220-240V
Item for the maintenance Quan Part No. Alternative

tity parts No.
Name used in service Name used in parts list
manual
MK-6325 MK-6325/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702NK0UN0 072NK0UN
(600,000 images) • DRUM(H) UNIT 1
• DLP(H) K UNIT 1
• FUSER UNIT(H) 1
• TRANSFER MONO UNIT 1
• ROLLER SECONDRY TRANS- 1
FER ASSY 2
• PULLEY FEED
2
• PULLEY PICKUP
2
• PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY
SP 1
• PULLEY FEED ASSY 1
• RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
• FILTER TOP 1
• FILTER REAR LOWER
4-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Classifi- Mode Title of the maintenance mode (Setting) MK-6325

cation No.
Replace- U119 Drum unit initial settings ○
ment set-
tings
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Belt Initialize) ○
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Clear) ○
Image U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
adjust-
ment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode) ○
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
U410 Half tone automatic adjustment ○
Mainte- U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear) ○
nance
Items to perform after replacing the unit

Drum unit
Section Mode Title of the maintenance mode (Setting)

No.
Replace- U119 Drum unit initial settings ○
ment set-
tings
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
adjust-
ment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode) ○
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
Developer unit

No.
Replace- U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
ment set-
tings
4-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

No.
adjust-
ment

No.
Replace- U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Belt Initialize) ○
ment set-
tings
adjust-
ment
Secondary transfer roller

No.
Replace- U127 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Clear) ○
ment set-
tings
adjust-
ment
MC roller
Classifi- Mode Title of the maintenance mode (Setting)

cation No.
Replace- U930 Clearing the main charger roller counts (Clear) ○
ment set-
tings
adjust-
ment
4-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures

Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after about 600,000 images. The message [Replace MK.]
appears at the replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following proce-
dures.
(1) Cassette feed section

(1-1) Detaching and attaching the retard roller, the pickup roller and the feed roller.
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
2. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direction a
of the arrow.
b
Figure 4-1
4-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

*: When installing the cassette (a), please d
insert the positioning parts (b), (d) of the
cassette into the rail shaft and pins (c), e
(e).
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-2
3. While holding the lock lever (a) and pull

out the primary feed unit (c) from the main
unit (b) upper row. b
4. Grasp the lock lever (d) and pull out the
primary paper feed unit (e) from the main
unit (b) of the bottom row. c
Figure 4-3
4-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Release hook (a), and remove the retard a

roller (b) from the bushing (c).
c d
Figure 4-4
6. Turn over the primary feed unit (a).
Figure 4-5
4-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary

feed unit (a).
Figure 4-6
8. Release hook (a), and remove the pickup

roller (b) and the feed roller (c) from the
bushing.
*: Remove the pickup roller (b) while lifting it
up slightly.
9. Attach the new feed roller.

10. Attach new pickup roller.
c b
Figure 4-7
11. After replacing the new pickup roller and

feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a) to the
position where it is aligned to the triangle
mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-8
4-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Turn over the primary feed unit.

13. Attach new retard roller.
IMPORTANT
When replacing new feed roller, pickup roller or retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller surface.

*: When installing the primary feed unit (a),
align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of
the primary feed unit to the guide (c) and e
d
align the protrusion (d) at the upper part
of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of
the main unit.
a
In case if the message [The error
occurred with the cassette XX] appears,
remove and insert the primary paper feed
unit.
c b
Figure 4-9
Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.

Clearing the maintenance counts (Execute maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner
1. Open the front cover (a) slightly.
Figure 4-10
2. While opening the front cover (a), grasp

the left and right upper parts of the main-
tenance front cover (b) and open it
a
Figure 4-11
4-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Pull both left and right lever (b) of the

inner cover (a) to open.
b b
Figure 4-12
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push in the A
part until the position of the lever (b) is same
level as both side covers.
Figure 4-13
4-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Grasp the handle of the regist cleaner (a)

and pull it out.
5. Inspect the sponge of the regist cleaner
(a) and, clean or replace it.
Figure 4-14
4-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) MP tray feed section

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the MP feed roller
Procedures
1. Open multi purpose tray (a).
Figure 4-15
2. Pinch the holder (a) and remove the MP b

feed roller (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-16
4-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Removing MP feed roller.
c
1. Slide the MP feed roller holder (c) until
b
the hook (b) comes to visible.
2. Release the hook (b) with a flat head

screwdriver (d) and rotate the MP feed d
roller holder (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
3. Pull out the MP feed roller holder (c) and c

remove the MP feed roller (e). e
4. Attach new MP feed roller (e).
Figure 4-17
4-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the MP retard roller

Procedures
1. Remove the MP retard roller (a) in the
direction of the arrow.
2. Attach the new MP retard roller.
3. Attach the new MP feed roller. a
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP retard roller or MP
feed roller, please be careful not to touch the
roller surface.
Figure 4-18
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP feed roller.

Clearing the maintenance counts (Execute maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3) Transfer section

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a) of the main unit b
(b).
Figure 4-19
Note
Before removing the primary transfer unit (a), b
make sure that the pressure release lever (b)
comes close to the position (c) at the right
edge of the cover of the primary transfer unit.
c a
b
b
Figure 4-20
4-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
2. Open the front cover slightly and open the

maintenance front cover.
3. Open the inner cover. a
4. Push in the release lever (b) and grasp
the handle (c), and then pull out the pri-
mary transfer unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-21
5. After that, hold the upper side handle (b)

of the primary transfer unit (a) and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
6. Inspect the primary transfer unit (a) and,
clean or replace it. a
7. Reattach the parts in the original position. b
IMPORTANT
Make sure not to hit the transfer belt to the
inner cover (d) and maintenance front cover
(c).
d
c
Figure 4-22
4-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Before installing the primary transfer unit (a),
b
confirm the pressure release lever (b) is B A
aligned to the right edge of the primary transfer
unit cover (c).
If coming out to A side, the lever hits when

inserting the unit. c
If coming in to B side, the belt or drum might be
damaged as the transfer roller is pushed when
inserting the unit.
b
a
b
Figure 4-23
*: When attaching the primary transfer unit

(a), hold the handle with one hand, hold
the frame part with the other hand, hold it
c
horizontally, bend the upper part of the
primary transfer unit (b) to the rail (c) of c
the main body,
b
b
a
Figure 4-24
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
1. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
4-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer unit.

Procedures
1. Open the right cover (d).
2. While pressing the front and rear side of d
the front transfer guide plate (a), push the
ribs (b) at the front and rear side of the
a
arm in the direction of the arrow and
release them from the front and rear
hooks (c).
b
c
a
b
c
b
c
Figure 4-25
3. Push the lock lever (b) toward the

machine rear side.
4. Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock 2
lever (b) in the direction of the arrow.
5. Lift up the front side of the secondary 1
transfer unit (d) to remove it.
b
6. Inspect the secondary transfer unit (d)
and clean or replace it. c
Execute the following setting after replac-

ing the secondary transfer roller .
1. Checking/ clearing the transfer counts
(maintenance mode U127): Clear
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute
maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically
Figure 4-26
4-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller

*: In case to remove secondary transfer
roller only without removing transfer front
guide plate. a
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a).
2. Lift up the front and back of the levers (b)
of the transfer front guide plate (d) and b
release the hooks (c) at the front and c
back arm section. Then, lift up the trans-
fer front guide plate (d).
b
c
Figure 4-27
4-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Push the lock lever (b) toward the

machine rear side.
4. Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock
lever (b) in the direction of the arrow. 2
5. Lift up the machine front side of the sec-
ondary transfer roller (d) and remove it. 1
6. Inspect the secondary transfer roller (d) b
and, clean or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original position. c
Execute the following setting after replac-

ing the secondary transfer roller .
1. Checking/ clearing the transfer counts
(maintenance mode U127): Clear
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute
maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically
Figure 4-28
4-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Drum section

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the drum unit
Procedures
Figure 4-29

a
Figure 4-30
4-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Note
Before removing the drum unit (a), make sure b
that the pressure release lever (b) comes close
to the position (c) at the right edge of the cover
of the primary transfer unit.
c a
b
b
Figure 4-31

b b
Figure 4-32
4-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push in the A
part until the position of the lever (b) is same
level as both side covers.
Figure 4-33
4. Open the right cover (a) of the main unit

(b).
b
Figure 4-34
4-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Push up on the lock lever (a) and remove

the four drum units (b). b
6. Attach the new drum units.
a
b
Figure 4-35
IMPORTANT
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the a
developer unit when installing the drum unit
while the developer unit is installed. Otherwise,
it causes the drum damage.
Figure 4-36
4-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
After replacing the drum unit, close the cover and turn on the power.
Drum refresh will be executed automatically.
Please perform the below settings after "Ready" is displayed.
1. Drum unit initial setting (Execute maintenance mode U119): Execute
2. Developer bias adjustment (Execute maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
3. Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464): Calib
4. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode
5. Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464): Calib
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit

Procedures
1. Open the front cover slightly. b
2. Open the front cover for maintenance.
3. Open the inner cover.
5. Remove the drum unit (a).
6. Lay down the drum unit (a).
c ղ
7. Push the lock lever (b).
8. Pull up the main charger unit while pulling
it up and remove the main charger unit (c)
from the drum unit (a) in the direction of ձ
the arrow.
9. Inspect the main charge roller unit (c) and
clean or replace it.
Figure 4-37
4-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
1. When installing the main charger roller
b
unit (a), attach it to the drum unit (c)
with the condition of the MC roller
release lever (b) released.
2. Insert the MC roller release lever (b) into
the opening and push down on part A and
make sure it clicks and locks in place. a
Figure 4-38
Execute the following setting after replacing the MC roller.

1. Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear
4-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5) Developer section

(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the developer unit
Procedures
Figure 4-39

a
Figure 4-40
4-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-41
4. Push up on the lock lever (a) and remove

the four developer units (b).
5. Attach the new developer unit.
Figure 4-42
4-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
1. When installing the developer unit,
securely insert it by pressing the front
side pressing part (a).
Figure 4-43
2. After inserting the developer unit (a), a

securely push the lock shaft (b).
*: Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b)

when inserting the developer unit. Other-
wise, it may cause the drum damage.
b
Figure 4-44
4-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
After replacing the developer unit, close the cover and turn on the power.
Developer unit auto aging correction, etc. will be executed.
1. Developer bias adjustment (Execute maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
4-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Fuser section

(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit
Procedures
b
(b).
Figure 4-45
2. Release the hook (b) while pressing the

left and right levers (a), and remove the
fuser unit (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b b
a a
Figure 4-46
4-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK

*: When installing the fuser unit (a), please
insert the pin (b) by inserting it into the rail
(c) of the main unit and pressing until the
hook is applied.
b c
c
b
Figure 4-47
IMPORTANT
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
1. Back side lock failure
This will cause the C6600 fuser belt rotation failure without drive at the rear side.
2. Front side lock failure
This will cause a factor of image squareness failure due to skew feeding.
4-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment)
Procedures
1. Compare the trailing edge of the image between the original document and output document and check
the image length matching side (image front side or image rear side)
[Origin
nal]
P
Printing direc
ction
(Image front side) (Image rear side)
Output image
[O e A] [O
Output imagee B]
(Image front side is short) (Image rear side is short)
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)
Figure 4-48

(b).
Figure 4-49
4-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

b a a b
Figure 4-50
4. Loosen 2 screws (f) fixing the fuser positioning guide at the inner front frame.
5. Lift the fixing positioning guide (g) and move the fixing height adjustment lever (h) left and right.
[Shift amount reference] (Adjust based on the side with the correct image length)
• When front side of the image is short (Output image pattern A), relocate the fuser height adjust-
ment lever (h) toward the machine right side and lower the position of the fuser positioning guide
(g) by one step. The rear side of the image shrinks about 0.4 mm
• When rear side of the image is short (Output image pattern B), relocate the fuser height adjust-
ment lever (h) toward the machine left side and increase the position of the fuser positioning
guide (g) by one step. The rear side of the image extends about 0.5 mm
f (Inner front frame viewed from the machine rear side)
f
Machine left side
Machine right side

h
Figure 4-51
6. After the adjustment is completed, bring the fuser positioning guide (g) downward so that it hits the fuser
height adjustment lever (h), tighten the two screws (f) and fix it
4-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) Others
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the filter
Procedures
Rear upper filter
1. Push the lever (a) and remove the rear b
upper filter cover (b) and the rear upper
a
filter (c).
2. Clean or replace the upper rear filter and c
refit the filter.
Rear filter
1. Push the lever (d) and remove the rear
filter cover (e) and the rear filter (f).
2. Clean or replace the rear filer (f) and refit
the filter.
Figure 4-52
4-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option)

(1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and PF feed
roller
Procedures
paper feeder (c) and remove it in the
direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-53
3. Open the cover (a).
Figure 4-54
4-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

out the primary feed unit (c) from the b
paper feeder (b) upper row.
primary paper feed unit (e) from the paper c
feeder (b) of the bottom row.
Figure 4-55
6. Release hook (a), and remove the PF a

retard roller (b) from the bushing (c).
c d
Figure 4-56
4-38
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Turn over the primary feed unit (a).
Figure 4-57
8. Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary

feed unit (a).
a
Figure 4-58
4-39
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
9. Release hook (a), and remove the PF

pickup roller (b) and the PF feed roller (c)
from the bushing.
*: Remove the PF pickup roller (b) while lift-
ing it up slightly.
10. Attach new PF feed roller.

11. Attach new PF pickup roller.
c b
Figure 4-59
12. After replacing the new PF pickup roller

and PF feed roller, reseat the feed cover
(a) to the position where it is aligned to
the triangle mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-60
13. Turn over the primary feed unit.

14. Attach new PF retard roller.
IMPORTANT
When replacing new PF feed roller, PF pickup roller or PF retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-40
2SA/2RJ/2NK

*: When installing the primary feed unit (a),
align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of
the primary feed unit to the guide (c) and e
d
align the protrusion (d) at the upper part
of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of
the main unit.
a
In case if the message [The error
occurred with the cassette XX] appears,
remove and insert the primary paper feed
unit.
c b
Figure 4-61
4-41
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and PF feed
roller
Procedures
1. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-62
2. Remove 1 screw (a) (M3x8).

3. Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
Figure 4-63
4-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Pull out the right paper cassette (a) and

the left paper cassette (b) from the paper
feeder (c).
c
b
a
Figure 4-64
5. Hold the handle (a) and pull out the PF

conveying unit (b).
Figure 4-65
4-43
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

*: When installing the PF conveying unit (a),
insert the rail (b) of the PF conveying unit
in accordance with the guide (c) of the
main unit.
b
*: When installing the PF conveying unit (a),
please be careful not to touch the retard
release lever (d) at the bottom of the PF
d
conveying unit to the frame.
c
b
a
Figure 4-66
6. Release hook (b), and remove the PF

retard roller (c) from the bushing (d). a
Figure 4-67
4-44
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Turn over the PF conveying unit (a).

8. Release hook (b), and remove the PF
pickup roller (c) and the PF feed roller (d)
from the bushing.
9. Attach new PF feed roller.

10. Attach new PF pickup roller.
11. Turn over the PF conveying unit.
12. Attach new PF retard roller.

a
c
b
Figure 4-68
IMPORTANT
When replacing new PF feed roller, PF pickup roller or PF retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-45
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF pickup roller and PF feed roller
Procedures
1. Pull out the deck.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and detach
the wire cover (b).
b
Figure 4-69
3. Disconnect the connector (b) from the

main unit (a). d
4. Remove the wire (d) from the clamp (c).
5. Remove one screw (e)(M3×8).
6. Slide the PF feed unit (f) frontward and
remove it while rotating it by using the
a
positioning shaft (g) as fulcrum. c
g
b
f
e
Figure 4-70
4-46
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Remove two stop rings A (b) from the PF b

feed roller shaft (a).
8. Remove two stop rings B (c) and slide the c b
joint (d).
Figure 4-71
9. Slide two bearings (b) on both sides of

the feed roller holder (a). d b
10. Remove the feed roller holder (a) and
a
spring (d) upward from the PF feed unit
(c).
Figure 4-72
4-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller
Procedures
1. Remove the PF feed unit (a).
c
2. Turn over the PF feed unit (a).
3. Remove the stop ring (c) from the PF
retard roller shaft (b). d
4. Pull out the spacer (d) from the PF retard
roller shaft and remove it.
*: Be careful not to drop the set pin when
removing the spacer
Figure 4-73
5. Pull out the set pin (b) of torque limiter

(a).
6. Pull out the torque limiter (a) and the PF
retard roller (d) while pushing retard d
release lever (c), and remove them.
7. Clean or replace the PF retard roller. b a
c
8. Reattach the PF retard roller to the PF
feed unit in the original position.
9. Reattach the PF feed unit in the original
position.
Figure 4-74
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.
4-48
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Pulling release lever (b) and open the fix-
ing cover(c).
Figure 4-75
3. Rotate the DP feed unit (a) and pull it out

in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-76
4-49
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Remove hook (b) and remove the DP
retard roller cover (c). b c
Figure 4-77
3. Remove the stop rings (a), and remove

the DP retard roller (b) and the torque lim-
iter (c).
4. Inspect or replace the DP retard roller
and refit all removed parts.
c
b
Figure 4-78
4-50
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a).

2. Remove two screw (b) (M3×8) of DP feed
b
guide (C). a
b
Figure 4-79
3. Raise the DP feed guide (a) and detach it

in the upward direction
Figure 4-80
4-51
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Raise the DP feed unit (a) upward.
Figure 4-81
5. Remove the front side stop ring (b) from d

the DP feed belt shaft (a). c
6. Slide the DP feed unit (c) frontward and
remove it from the document processor
(d) b
Figure 4-82
4-52
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Detach the DP feed guide (a) and the DP
feed unit.
3. Release hook (a) and remove the DP
retard roller cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-83
4. Remove the stop rings (a), and remove

the DP retard roller (b) and the torque lim- a
iter (c).
5. Attach the new DP retard roller. c
Figure 4-84
4-53
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
After replacing the maintenance kit, please close the cover and turn on the power.
Drum refresh automatic control, developer unit automatic aging correction, etc. will be executed.
Execute by U952 (preset setting for the maintenance mode workflow) (P.6-276)
4. Select the maintenance kit to set.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the mainte-
nance mode.
6. After transition, execute the setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and exit from the maintenance mode.
Start
MK-6325
U119 Setting the drum

(Execute)
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(AC Calib> Calibration)
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit

(Belt Initialize > Execute)
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Clear)
U464 ID correction setting

(Calib > Execute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density

(Normal Mode)

(Calib > Execute)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
U251 Clearing the maintenance counter

(Clear)
4-54
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-6 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures

(1) Exterior cover
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the front cover
Procedures
Figure 4-85

a
Figure 4-86
4-55
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Close the front cover (a).
Figure 4-87
4. Remove the stopper (b) of the front cover

(a).
5. Slide the front cover in the direction of the a
arrow and remove the fulcrum shaft (c)
from the fulcrum section (d).
b
c
d
Figure 4-88
4-56
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance
Procedures
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow. b
Figure 4-89
2. Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum

pin (a).
Figure 4-90
4-57
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Open the front cover slightly.

4. Open the front cover (a) for maintenance.
5. Remove each screw (b) of 2 straps (c )
and remove the front cover for the main-
tenance (a) in the direction of the arrow. b c
c
b
Figure 4-91
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the inner cover

Procedures
tenance front cover (b) and open it a
Figure 4-92
4-58
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-93
4. Release the hook(b) with a flat-blade

screwdriver(a), remove the inner cover
(c) in the direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-94
4-59
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-4) Rear top cover

Procedures
1. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-95
(1-5) Detaching and reattaching the rear bottom cover

Procedures
2. Push down on the lower rear cover (b)
and release the upper rib, then, lift it up
with a little open condition and release
the lower hook (c). After that, remove it in
the direction of the arrow.
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-96
4-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-6) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover

Procedures
2. Detach the rear top cover.
4. Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding
a
Figure 4-97
(1-7) Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover

Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover. a
2. Remove the DP rear cover
3. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8).
4. Detach the ISU rear cover (b) in the direc-
tion of the arrow. a
Figure 4-98
4-61
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-8) Detaching and reattaching the top left cover/the rear left cover/the lower left
cover.
Procedures
1. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8). b
2. Release two hooks (c) and remove the
left rear cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
a
Figure 4-99

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the
front side aperture (b) and widen it in the
direction of the arrow to release four
hooks (d) and to remove the upper left
cover (e).
c

When installing the upper left cover (e), hang a
four lower hooks (f) first and then hang the
d
e
upper hook (d).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-100
4-62
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8. Release four hooks while lifting up the left
bottom cover (b), and detach it.
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-101
4-63
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-9) Detaching and reattaching the right top cover

Procedures

2. After removing front side rib (c) and then
remove the upper right cover (b) in the
b
Figure 4-102
(1-10) Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover / rear right bottom cover
Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover.
2. Open the right cover. c
4. Release the hook (b) and remove right
rear upper cover (c).
a
c
b
Figure 4-103
4-64
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the right rear bottom cover (c) in
Notes when attaching

c
When reinstalling, insert two hooks (b) first to
install.
Figure 4-104
4-65
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-11) Detaching and reattaching the right cover Assy.

Procedures

2. Remove the hooks of the damper spring
(a).
3. Remove the stopper (c) of the fulcrum pin
(b). Slide the arm (d) in the direction of
the arrow and remove it from the fulcrum
pin (b).
a
c
b d
Figure 4-105
4. Rotate the wire cover (b).

5. Push the left and right fulcrum section a
and remove the wire cover (a)
6. Release the wire (b) from the hook (c)
and disconnect two connectors (d).
b
c
d
Figure 4-106
4-66
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Remove the stopper (a) and slide the

strap(b), and then pull it out from the pin.
Figure 4-107
4-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Open front (a) and back (b) of the handle

cover.
9. Raise up the front cover shaft (c). After
that, slide it in the direction of the arrow
10. Tilt up the back cover shaft (a). After that,
slide it in the direction of the arrow b
d
d
a
c
Figure 4-108
4-68
2SA/2RJ/2NK
11. Remove the right cover Assy (a) in the

Figure 4-109
4-69
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit
12. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8).

13. Release two hooks (b) and remove the
wire cover (c).
a
c
Figure 4-110
14. Disconnect the connector (a) and remove

one wire stopper (b).
Figure 4-111
4-70
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
15. Widen the connecting section on both

h
sides of the middle guide (a) with a flat
h
head screwdriver (h) and remove the pin
(c) from the hole (b). c
c
16. Rotate the middle guide (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow 1 and pull it out in the
direction of the arrow 2.
g
Note when attaching; b
17. To attach the middle guide (a), insert the
boss (f) to the pin (e) which is reverse
way of removing it and after that, insert it
d
in both sides of the hole (b).
b
e
Figure 4-112
4-71
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18. Rotate and open the resist guide (a).

19. Raise up the shaft (b) and (c), and slide it
Figure 4-113
20. Remove the conveying unit (a) in the a

Figure 4-114
4-72
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2) Optical section

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the LSU
Procedures
b
(b).
Figure 4-115

tenance front cover (b) and open it a
Figure 4-116
4-73
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-117
5. Grasp the handle of the regist cleaner (a)

and pull it out.
Figure 4-118
4-74
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7. Detach the rear secondary transfer guide
(b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
b
Figure 4-119
8. Disconnect the middle conveying unit

wire (a) from the connector (b).
Figure 4-120
4-75
2SA/2RJ/2NK

When reattaching, connect the wire (a) of the
middle conveying unit to the connector and
then insert the wire into the rib (b).
Figure 4-121
9. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the middle conveying unit (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-122
4-76
2SA/2RJ/2NK

When attaching the middle conveying unit (c), a
insert the positioning section (a) into (d) and a
the positioning hole (b) into (e) first and then,
attach the middle conveying unit.
b
c
b
Figure 4-123
4-77
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. Loosen the LSU fixing pins (b) and spring

(c) with a screwdriver (a) and remove
them.
c
b
c
b
Figure 4-124

arrow.
a
Figure 4-125
4-78
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cover (e).
c

d
e
upper hook (d).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-126
4-79
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-127
4-80
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the LSU left stay (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-128
20. Pull out the laser scanner unit (a) half

way. b
21. Disconnect FFC connector (b) and the
connector (c).
Figure 4-129
4-81
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Pull out the laser scanner unit (a).

23. Inspect the laser scanner unit (a) and,
Figure 4-130
4-82
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Notes when replacing the laser scanner unit

Execute the following adjustment after replacing the laser scanner unit.
1. Drum unit initial setting (Execute maintenance mode U119): Execute

(1)Input "119" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Start the drum setup operation.
(3)Press the [Stop] key.

(2)Select [Calib].
*: Calibration starts.
3. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode

(2)Select [Normal Mode].
(3)Press the [Start] key.
*: Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
(4)Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
(5)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(6)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (2nd sheet)
*: According to the test pattern of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
(8)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(9)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (3rd sheet)
*: Check the correction result.[Finish] appears after normal completion. Display [Finish] .after normal com-
pletion.

(2)Select [Calib].

(1)Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Display the execution information screen.
*: Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.
(3)Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back and the
4-83
2SA/2RJ/2NK
*: Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 4-131

*: The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
(5)Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
*: The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
(7)[Finish] appears after normal completion.
6. Exiting from the maintenance mode

*: Exit from the maintenance mode
4-84
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the lens unit

Procedures

b
Figure 4-132
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and D

detach the right ISU cover (b).
E
D
Figure 4-133
4-85
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove the contact glass (a) in the direc- D

tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-134
5. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8) and D

D
detach the lens cover (b).
D
D
D
Figure 4-135
4-86
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Disconnect the FFC (a).

7. Disconnect the FFC from the FFC con- E
nector (b) with a lock.
Figure 4-136
4-87
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8). a

a
9. Detach the lens unit (b) in the direction of a
the arrow. a
a a
a b a
Figure 4-137
4-88
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Reattaching the lens unit
Decide the fix position of lens unit (a) by the

a
H
following.
The right and left of machine: Confirm the
number a on the label affixed on the lens (b).
Match the line (c) of lens unit (a) to the posi- G
tioning line (b) of same number on frame side.
The front and back of machine: Match the
edge (e) of lens unit (a) to the positioning line F
(d) on frame side.
Fix the lens unit (a) as before with four screws. E
D b
Figure 4-138
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit

Procedures
1. Remove the platen cover or the docu-
ment processor.
b
Figure 4-139
4-89
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and D

detach the right ISU cover (b).
E
D
Figure 4-140
5. Remove the contact glass (a) in the direc- D

tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-141
4-90
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then

detach the front glass cover (b). a
*: Remove right side of the main unit first
and remove it.
b
a
Figure 4-142
7. Remove two pins (a)(M3x8) and then a

detach the rear glass cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-143
4-91
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Peel off two sheets (a).
Figure 4-144
4-92
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9. Move the lamp unit Assy (a) to the cut-out

section (b).
10. Release the hook (c) and remove FFC b
cover (d) from the lamp unit (a).
11. Disconnect FFC (f) from FFC connector
(e).
12. Release two hooks (g) and remove FFC
a
guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
b
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-145
13. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and

a
detach the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame
A (c).
14. Inspect or replace the lamp unit (b), and b
then reattach the removed parts in the a
original position.
15. When replacing the lamp unit (b), execute
maintenance mode U411 (adjusting the
scanner automatically).
c
IMPORTANT
Use an air blower when cleaning the reflector,
light guide plate and diffusion sheet of the LED
mount Assy. Clean not to leave a hair dust.
Figure 4-146
4-93
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires

Precautions
When installing the optical wire (scanner
wire), please be sure to use the specified
wire.
Machine front side (P/N: 302H717380(gray))
Machine rear side(P/N: 302H717390(black))
Tools required to reattach

Two mirror frame fixing tools (P/N: 302NL1711_)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N: 302RH9401_)
Procedures
1. Detach the upper right cover.
2. Detach the ISU right cover.
3. Remove the contact glass.
4. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then

detach the front glass cover (b). a
*: Remove right side of the main unit first
and remove it.
b
a
Figure 4-147
4-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove two pins (a)(M3x8) and then a

detach the rear glass cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-148
6. Peel off two sheets (a).
Figure 4-149
4-95
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Move the lamp unit Assy (a) to the cut-out

section (b).
b
8. Release the hook (c) and remove FFC
cover (d) from the lamp unit (a).
9. Disconnect FFC (f) from FFC connector
(e). a
10. Release two hooks (g) and remove FFC
guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
b
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-150
11. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and a

detach the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame
A (c). b
a
Figure 4-151
4-96
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Remove two screws (c) (M3x×8) (front

and back), and detach the front wire hold- f
ing plate (d) and the rear wire holding
plate (e) from mirror frame A (f).
13. Detach the mirror frame A (f) from the
main unit.
d e
c
c
Figure 4-152
14. Remove the round terminal (b) of the opti- d

cal wire on the left side of the scanner unit b
(a) from the optical wire spring (c).
15. Remove the scanner wire (d) from the
main unit.
a
b
d c
Figure 4-153
4-97
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Reattaching the scanner wires
1. Insert the small ball (a) of the scanner

wire into the small ball hole of the scan-
ner wire drum (b)
2. Wind the scanner wires (c) three turns
inward and five turns outward.
*: Wrap around the ball of the scanner wire
so that the shorter side comes outward
*: Use the gray wire for the machine front
side and black wire for the machine rear
side.
3. Secure the scanner wires (c) by the scan-
ner wire stoppers (d). 5 3
3 5
d d
Figure 4-154
4-98
2SA/2RJ/2NK
c
4. Move the mirror frame B (a) to the position
shown in the figure, and insert the mirror
frame fixing tool (c) in the front and rear
b
positioning holes (b), and fix the position
of the mirror frame B (a)
c
Figure 4-155
(1)Hang the scanner wire (a) on the outside of the main unit in the groove on the outside of the pulley (b) of
the mirror frame B from above.
*: Pass through the scanner wire outside of the positioning pin.
(2)Hang the round terminal (c) on the hook (d) inside the scanner unit
(3)Hang the scanner wire (e) on the inside of the main unit in the groove of the left side pulley (f) of the scan-
ner unit from below.
*: Pass through the scanner wire under the mirror frame B (j)
(4)Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to
above.
(5)Hang it on the pulley (g) on the left side of the scanner unit
(6)Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i).
(7)Apply the procedures 1 through 6 to another scanner wires.
4-99
2SA/2RJ/2NK
hg
i
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
a
b
i e
h
g
j
b e
d
LQQHU
c a
outer
Figure 4-156
4-100
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
5. Detach the scanner wire stoppers and the

mirror frame fixing tools.
6. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire
drum, align the scanner wires to the
inside.
7. Move the mirror frame B (b) left and right
to make the wire fit in correct position.
8. Refit the mirror frame A (a) in the main
unit.
9. Move the mirror frame A (a) and the mirror
frame B (b) to the left side of the main
unit, and then insert the mirror frame fix-
g g d
ing tool (d) in the front and rear positioning e
holes (c), and fix the position of the mirror f
frame A (a) and the mirror frame B (b). d
10. Attach the front wire holding plate (e) and
the rear wire holding plate (f) to the mirror
frame A (a) so as to pinch the wire (h) with
each screw (g)
11. Detach the mirror frame fixing tool (d).
12. Reattach the lamp unit in the original posi- c
tion.
c h
b
a
a h
b
Figure 4-157
4-101
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Drive section

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit
Procedures

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-158
4-102
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Disconnect ten connectors (b) from feed

drive PWB (a).
4. Release the wire saddle (c) and remove
the wire (d).
d
c
YC10
YC9
YC1
YC11
YC6
YC2
YC3
YC7
YC4
YC5
Figure 4-159
4-103
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove five screws (a) (M3x8) and a

detach the feed drive unit (b).
6. Inspect the feed drive unit (b) and, clean
b
or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original position. a a
a
a
b a
a
a a
Figure 4-160
(3-2) Detaching and attaching the main drive unit

Procedures
a
Figure 4-161
4-104
2SA/2RJ/2NK

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-162
4. Disconnect three connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
Figure 4-163
4-105
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Release four wire saddles(a). Remove

the binding band (b) with a snap and
remove the wire (c).
b c
Figure 4-164
6. Disconnect sixteen connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
22
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC C3
2
Y 1
YC
2 3
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a (b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-165
4-106
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Disconnect the connector (b) and remove

the wire (a).
b
a
Figure 4-166
8. Lift up the hook (b) of the waste toner

joint (a) to release the stopper ( c) and
pull it out in front.
IMPORTANT
a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the 1 2
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might
deform and the waste toner full might be mis- c
detected. b
Before removing the main drive unit, please
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-167
4-107
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and detach

the main drive unit (b).
10. Inspect the main drive unit (b) and, clean
or replace it.
a
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-168
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the container motor

Procedures
a
Figure 4-169
4-108
2SA/2RJ/2NK

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-170

Figure 4-171
4-109
2SA/2RJ/2NK

arrow.
a
Figure 4-172

b
(b).
Figure 4-173
4-110
2SA/2RJ/2NK

11. Release the hook (b) and remove right c
c
b
Figure 4-174
12. Disconnect 4 connectors (b) from the

main PWB (a) and pull them out from the
opening section (e). Remove the wire (c) c
from two wire saddles (d). e
d
b
Figure 4-175
4-111
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. Disconnect the FFC (b) and the connec-

tor (c) from the engine PWB (a)
b
c
Figure 4-176
Figure 4-177
4-112
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Lift up the shield box (a) and pull it, and
then release the hooks (b). a
16. Open the shield box (a).
b
Note
When doing some work on the back bottom
side of the main unit with the shield box open,
please be careful not to hit your head against
the shield box.
Figure 4-178

b
container motor (a).
a
Figure 4-179
4-113
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and then

detach the container motor Assy (b)
19. Inspect the container motor Assy (b) and
b a
Figure 4-180
4-114
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit

Procedures
a
Figure 4-181

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-182
4-115
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

Figure 4-183

arrow.
a
Figure 4-184
4-116
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b
(b).
Figure 4-185

c
b
Figure 4-186
4-117
2SA/2RJ/2NK

d
b
Figure 4-187

b
c
Figure 4-188
4-118
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-189
4-119
2SA/2RJ/2NK
b
Note
the shield box.
Figure 4-190
4-120
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

container motor (a). Disconnect ten con- b
nectors (d) from feed image PWB (c). a
18. Remove the wire (c) from five wire sad-
dles (d).
d c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-191

20. Release six upper side hooks (c) and four c
lower side hooks (c) with a flat-blade
screwdriver (b), and then detach the b
transfer terminal cover (d).
a
d
Figure 4-192
4-121
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (8 locations) c
Figure 4-193
21. Disconnect three connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
Figure 4-194
4-122
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Release four wire saddles(a). Remove

the binding band (b) with a snap and
remove the wire (c).
b c
Figure 4-195
23. Disconnect sixteen connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
2
Y C2
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC 3 2
YC 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a (b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-196
4-123
2SA/2RJ/2NK
24. Disconnect the connector (b) and remove

the wire (a).
b
a
Figure 4-197

IMPORTANT
a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the 1 2
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
c
detected. b
Before removing the main drive unit, please
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-198
4-124
2SA/2RJ/2NK
26. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and detach

the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-199
27. Widen both hooks (a) and release the

hook (b), and then pull out the joint sec- d
tion (c) of the toner supply drive unit (d) to
remove it.
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
Figure 4-200
4-125
2SA/2RJ/2NK
28. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the toner supply drive unit (b).
29. Inspect the toner supply drive unit (b)
and, clean or replace it.
a
b a
a a a
b
Figure 4-201
4-126
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit

Procedures
a
Figure 4-202

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-203
4-127
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

Figure 4-204

arrow.
a
Figure 4-205
4-128
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b
(b).
Figure 4-206

c
b
Figure 4-207
4-129
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

d
b
Figure 4-208

b
c
Figure 4-209
4-130
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Figure 4-210
4-131
2SA/2RJ/2NK
b
Note
the shield box.
a
17. Detach the fuser unit.
Figure 4-211
4-132
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
18. Remove two connectors (a) and the wire

(b) from the hook (c).
b
c
Figure 4-212

20. Detach the fuser drive unit (c) in the direc-
tion of the arrow, while pressing the
release lever (b).
21. Inspect the fuser drive unit (c) and, clean
or replace it.
a
c
a
Figure 4-213
4-133
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

When attaching the fuser drive unit (a), pull the
lever (b) in the direction of the arrow and pass
the lever (c) on the opposite side to the open-
ing (d) before installing.
d c
b
Figure 4-214
4-134
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4) Others
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the SSD
Procedures
a
Figure 4-215
2. Remove one screw (a) (M2x4).

3. Disconnect the SSD (b) from the connec-
tor (c).
*: Use a P1 screwdriver and take care not to e
damage the screws.
*: This screw is exclusive. Please do not fix
SSD (b) with screws other than the items
below d
(7BB000204H BIND M SCREW 2x4)
c
a
b
Figure 4-216
4-135
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Please do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
SSD replacement procedures when the SSD replacement is indicated.
*: Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read
Only mode.
Procedures
Preparation: 2 USB memory (for storing firmware and data backup)
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
(1)Store the firmware in a USB memory (USB memory A)

1. Store the newest firmware upgrade pack or set of the released firmware (Main /MMI /Panel Main/
BROWSER /DICTIONARY /Language /OCR /Color Table) in a USB memory.
*: Check the firmware applicable to the target model. Operation becomes unstable if firmware not covered
is included
In order to reboot, at least the main FW is required.
(2)Backup SSD data (USB memory B)

*: A 64GB USB memory is necessary to back up the 32GB SSD.
1. Install USB memory B.
2. Execute maintenance mode U026
Input "026" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Select [SSD].
Select [Backup]. Press the [Start] key.
Turn the power off after completion.
3. Replace with new SSD.
*: When installing SSD (8G/32G) that the capacity is different from the specification, please note that F010
(Communication error with SSD) occurs.
4. While USB memory A is installed, turn on the power.
Program loading from the SSD can't be performed, so the SSD recovery program in the SNOR on the
main board starts up and is automatically formatted
*: Please be careful that F010 will display in case if forgetting to install the USB memory.
5. Once "UPDATE completed" is displayed on the operation panel, turn the power off/on without removing
USB memory A.
(3)Updating firmware. (Refer to P.5-1)

(4)The data backed up to USB memory B is restored with U026.
(5)Install the HyPAS application from the Application screen.
*: Please check the type of Hypas application displayed on the application screen before replacing and
then reinstall.
4-136
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Hard disk (HDD)

Procedures
a
Figure 4-217
2. Disconnect two connectors (a).

3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8). Release
two hooks (d)(M3x8) and detach the hard d d
disk Assy (c).
b
b
c
b
Figure 4-218
4-137
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When disconnecting the connector of the hard
disk (a), please be careful not to apply the
force on the battery of the main PWB (b).
There is a danger of damage to the terminal if
a force is applied b
Figure 4-219
4. Remove four pins (a) and detach the hard

disk (b). a
a
5. Inspect the hard disk (b) and, clean or
replace it.
Figure 4-220
*: Execute maintenance mode U024 (See pageP.6-32) when formatting a new HDD.
4-138
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When installing the HDD (a), hold it without a
touching the PWB side (b) to avoid damage.
a
b
Figure 4-221
4-139
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the lift motor
Procedures
tion of the arrow.
of the arrow.
Figure 4-222

*: When installing the cassette (a), please
d
(e).
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-223
4-140
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

out the primary feed unit (c) from the main
unit (b) upper row. b
primary paper feed unit (e) from the main
unit (b) of the bottom row. c
Figure 4-224
4-141
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove the connector (a) x 2 and the c

each screw (b) (M3x8) x 3. b b
6. Detach the lift motor (c).
7. Inspect the lift motor (c) and, clean or b a
replace it.
a
b b
c
b b
b
b b c
b
Figure 4-225
Procedure when replacing

In case of the upper (A) A a b
(1)When attaching the lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), release two hooks (d)
d
and remove the wire (c).
(2)Connect the connector (b) of the wire (c)

removed to new lift motor (e) and fasten c
two hooks (f).
e b
Figure 4-226
4-142
2SA/2RJ/2NK
In case of the lower (B)

d
(1)When attaching the lift motor, remove the B b
film (b) affixed to the old lift motor (a), dis-
connect the connector (c) and remove the a
wire (d).
*: The film (b) can not be used in the new lift
motor. c
(2)Connect the connector (c) of the wire (d)
once disconnected to the new lift motor (e).
*: Don't fix the wire (d) in the hook (f).
f
e d
Figure 4-227
A
a
B a
Figure 4-228
4-143
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit
Procedures
(b).
Figure 4-229

b b
a a
Figure 4-230
4-144
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Remove three screws (a)(M3x12).

4. Detach the fuser discharger unit (c) from
the IH unit (b)
5. Replace the fuser discharger unit (c).
a
c
a
b
a
Figure 4-231
After replacing the fuser discharge needle unit and IH unit, please perform the below settings.
(Clear the fuser counter value (correction))
Fuser counter clear (Execute the maintenance mode U167): Correction
4-145
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the exit unit

Procedures
(b).
b
Figure 4-232
2. Detach the fuser unit. a

3. Disconnect the connector (a) of the exit
unit.
4. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the exit unit (c).
5. Inspect the exit unit (c) and, clean or
replace it.
b
c
b
b b
Figure 4-233
4-146
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
(4-6) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit
Procedures
*: Remove the toner containers (a) while the power is on.
*: If the container cover (b) is locked, execute maintenance mode U033 to activate the container solenoid
and to open the container cover.
b
a
Figure 4-234

tion of the arrow.
of the arrow.
Figure 4-235
4-147
2SA/2RJ/2NK

*: When installing the cassette (a), please
d
(e).
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-236
3. Release five hooks (b) of front right cover

(a) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-237
4-148
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum

pin (a) of the front cover for maintenance.
Figure 4-238
5. Open the front cover slightly.

6. Open the front cover (a) for maintenance.
7. Remove each screw (b) of 2 straps (c )
and remove the front cover for the main-
tenance (a) in the direction of the arrow. b c
c
b
Figure 4-239
4-149
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8. Close the front cover (a).
Figure 4-240
9. Remove the stopper (b) of the front cover

(a).
10. Slide the front cover in the direction of the
arrow and remove the fulcrum shaft (c) a
from the fulcrum section (d).
c
d
Figure 4-241
4-150
2SA/2RJ/2NK
11. Remove the pin (b) while bending the ful-

crum and remove the waste toner box
cover (a).
Figure 4-242
12. Remove the waste toner box (a).
Figure 4-243
4-151
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-244
14. Detach the primary transfer unit.

15. Remove the drum unit.
16. Remove the developer unit.
17. Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade

screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover
(c) in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-245
4-152
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
18. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

19. Disconnect the connector and remove the
container front cover (c).
b c a
b
b c b b
Figure 4-246

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-247
4-153
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Disconnect the wire (b) from the connec-

tor of waste toner box unit (a).
Figure 4-248
IMPORTANT
When connecting the connector, please wire a
so that there is a margin in the wire (a).
Please be careful that the waste toner box
detection error or waste toner full detection
error in the early stage may appear if the waste
toner box unit is strained with the wiring.
Figure 4-249
4-154
2SA/2RJ/2NK

IMPORTANT
a
When attempting to detach the waste toner
box unit without removing the waste toner joint 1 2
(a), the sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint
might deform and the waste toner full might be
c
mis-detected. b
Before removing the waste toner box unit,
make sure to pull the waste toner joint (a) in
front and release.
Figure 4-250
24. Pull out the rail (b) of upper cassette, and

remove one screw (a)(M3x8).
a b
Figure 4-251
4-155
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

26. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) of the right
front cover(b).
a
a
a
b
Figure 4-252
27. Disconnect the connector (c). Remove

seven screws (a)(M3x8) and then detach
the front inner cover (b).
c
aa b
a
a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-253
4-156
2SA/2RJ/2NK
28. Disconnect two connector (a).

30. Release two hooks (c), and remove the b c
drum / developer relay PWB (d).
d
d d
Figure 4-254

32. Release four hooks (c) and detach the left
rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 4-255
4-157
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cover (e).
c

a
When installing the upper left cover (e), hang d
four lower hooks (f) first and then hang the e
upper hook (d). d
d
b
a
Figure 4-256
4-158
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-257
Figure 4-258
4-159
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

detach the waste toner box unit (b).
41. Inspect the waste toner unit (b) and,
Figure 4-259
After replacing new waste toner box unit, please perform the below settings.
Waste toner box weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
Items included in the waste toner box unit

A: Waste toner box unit
B: Waste toner box
Figure 4-260
Procedures
1. After replacing the waste toner box unit (A), turn the power on without installing the waste toner box.
2. Select the maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3. Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
4. Check if "OK" appears next to [Execute].
4-160
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Insert the empty waste toner box (B) and

close the waste toner box cover (a).
a
Figure 4-261
6. Press [Waste Toner] and check if "None" is changed to "Empty". Then, press [Execute] --> the [Start] key.
7. The value next to [None / Empty] is updated and confirm the [OK] display next to [Execute].
*: If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
4-161
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-7) Fan motor attachment direction

*: When reattaching the fan motor, be aware of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).
h c
a
g j
e
b
d f
Figure 4-262
a. IH PWB fan motor: intake *2 f. Power source fan motor: intake *2

b. The toner intake fan motor: intake *2 g. Exit/Front IH fan motor: intake *2
c. Controller fan motor: intake *1 h. Exit/Middle IH fan motor: intake *2
d. Developer fan motor K: intake *2 i. Exit fan motor: intake *2
e. Fuser edge fan motor: intake *2 j. The left container fan motor *1 : intake *2
*1: rating label side: the upper side, *2: rating label side: the inside, *3: rating label side: the lower side
4-162
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) PWBs
(5-1) Detaching and attaching the engine PWB
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
slide the rear top cover (b) in the direc-
a
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-263
4-163
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the

engine PWB (b).
3. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and then
detach the engine PWB (b). a
4. Inspect or replace the engine PWB (b),
and then reattach the removed parts in a
the original position. b
a
a
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC40
YC39 YC33 YC23 20
1
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21 YC22
Figure 4-264
Notes when detaching a

In case of the FFC connector (YC35) with a
lock, release the lock cover (a) and pull out the
FFC (b).
b b
Figure 4-265
4-164
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Notes when replacing the engine PWB

When replacing the engine PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (b) (YS1) from the old PWB and
install it in the new PWB.
b
YS1
YS1
b
a
a
Figure 4-266
*: After installing the main unit, install newest Engine firmware.
4-165
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB

Procedures
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid- a
Figure 4-267
(Step 2 to 3: Only the model that IB-35 is installed)
2. Disconnect the connector (a) from the

e
connector (c) of the main PWB (b).
3. Detach the screw (d)(M3x6) and detach
the PWB unit (e).
b
IMPORTANT
When disconnecting the connector (a) from the
main PWB (b), pull straight out against the
main PWB (b) and do not pull out diagonally.
a
c
If it is pulled slantwise it will cause damage to
FPC (f)
d e
Figure 4-268
4-166
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(Procedure 4 to 6: Only the model that docu-

ment processor (CIS) is installed)
4. Disconnect the connector (b) from the DP
relay PWB (a).
5. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8).
6. Detach the DP relay PWB (a) while dis- b
connecting the backside connector (d).
c
d
c
a
c
YC2
YC1
Figure 4-269
4-167
2SA/2RJ/2NK

main PWB (a).
8. Remove eight screws (b)(M3x8) and b
detach the main PWB (a).
9. Inspect the main PWB (a) and replace it. b
b
b
b
b
a b
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
YC10
YC2
YC51
YC33
YC32 YC42
YC23
Figure 4-270
4-168
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Notes when replacing the main PWB

When replacing the main PWB, make sure to remove the SSD from the old PWB and install it in the new main
PWB. (Refer to P.4-135)
IMPORTANT
A main unit does not start up if SSD is not installed.
Please do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
Execute the following setting after replacing the main PWB.

1. Restore SSD backup data
*: Please make sure to perform before executing U004.
Execute the maintenance mode U026/Flash/Restore.
2. Return the device settings and job settings exported in advance by U917.
3. Setting the machine serial number

*: When the power is turned on, C0180 occurs as there is no machine serial number data. Therefore,
please execute U004 and match the serial number of the PWB.
Execute after checking the machine serial number of the engine board matches the serial number of the
main unit. Wrong data will be written when there is a discrepancy in U004.
(3)Turn the power switch off / on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
4. Firmware update (See page P.5-1)

*: Check the latest main firmware and upgrade it.

(2)Select [Calib].

(1)Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Display the execution information screen.
*: Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.
(3)Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back and the
4-169
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-271

*: The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
(5)Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
*: The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
(7)[Finish] appears after normal completion.
7. Resetting the setting value

• Confirm the set value with the maintenance report (U000) output in advance and input the value.
U251: Cassette counter value
U265: OEM setting
U065: Main Scan adjustment value
U402: Margin adjustment value
In addition, the data that changed setting at setup
• Re-register certificate (for network)

• In case if using the independent panel display, perform U224 (Install Original Panel Display) to re-register
the home screen.
• In case if the interface block setting or security level has changed in the system menu, please reconfigure
them.
• In case if the security kit is installed, enter the initial encryption code.
• Depending on the environment setting, the network needs to be reconfigured as the MAC address
(Printer name) is changed.
8. Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
4-170
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-3) Detaching and attaching the main high voltage PWB

Procedures
a
Figure 4-272

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-273
4-171
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5. Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
Figure 4-274
4-172
2SA/2RJ/2NK

main high voltage PWB (a).
7. Remove five screws (b)(M3x8).
8. Release three board supports (e).
9. Release two left hooks (c). c
10. Release upper part of three hooks (d) and
remove the main high voltage PWB (a). d
11. Inspect or replace the main high voltage
PWB (a), and then reattach the removed
parts.
c d
d
e
e
e
b
b a
b
Figure 4-275
4-173
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB

Procedures
a
Figure 4-276

Figure 4-277
4-174
2SA/2RJ/2NK

arrow.
a
Figure 4-278

(b).
b
Figure 4-279
4-175
2SA/2RJ/2NK

c
b
Figure 4-280

d
b
Figure 4-281
4-176
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b
c
Figure 4-282
Figure 4-283
4-177
2SA/2RJ/2NK
b
Note
the shield box.
Figure 4-284
4-178
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

container motor (a). Disconnect ten con- b
nectors (d) from feed image PWB (c). a
16. Remove the wire (c) from five wire sad-
dles (d).
d c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-285

18. Release six upper side hooks (c) and four c
lower side hooks (c) with a flat-blade
screwdriver (b), and then detach the b
transfer terminal cover (d).
a
d
Figure 4-286
4-179
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (8 locations)
c
Figure 4-287

transfer high voltage PWB (a).
20. Remove two screws (c)(M3x8).
21. Release two board supports (d) and
remove the transfer high voltage PWB d b
(a).
22. Inspect or replace the transfer high volt-
age PWB (a), and then reattach the
removed parts.
c
a
c
Figure 4-288
4-180
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-5) Detaching and attaching the low voltage PWB

Procedures

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-289

4. Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
Figure 4-290
4-181
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Disconnect two connectors (a).

6. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) and detach
a
the ground terminal (c).
7. Remove the wire saddle (d). b
a d
Figure 4-291
8. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8). c

9. Bring it to the front side and remove from
two lancing positions (b), and then
remove the PF drawer holder (c).
IMPORTANT
When attaching the MP feed roller holder (c),
make sure to hook it to two lancing positions.
a
Figure 4-292
4-182
2SA/2RJ/2NK

main high voltage PWB (a).
12. Release three board supports (e).
13. Release two left hooks (c). c
14. Release upper part of three hooks (d) and
remove the main high voltage PWB (a). d
c d
d
e
e
e
b
b a
b
Figure 4-293
4-183
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the shield lid (b).
a
b
Figure 4-294

17. Remove the power supply shield (b) by
rotating it to pull out the lower side out
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-295
4-184
2SA/2RJ/2NK

power source PWB (a).
20. Release two board supports (c) and c
remove the low voltage PWB (a).
21. Inspect or replace the power source PWB
(a), and then reattach the removed parts. b
c
b
a
b
YC2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 YC5
YC3
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-296
4-185
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-6) Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB

Procedures
1. Lift up the operation panel (a).
a
Figure 4-297
2. Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) and d

release the lock. Then, lift up the rear
side of the main unit (c) and slide it to the
front side.
3. Remove the pin (d) by lifting up and
detach the sub tray (a).
d
b
4. Remove one screw (e)(M3×8).
5. Remove the connector cover (f). a
f
e
Figure 4-298
4-186
2SA/2RJ/2NK
When the job separator is installed
b a
Figure 4-299
2. Lift the lever (b) of the upper tray (a), and

release the lock, and slide the upper tray
in the direction of the arrow, and pull out
the pin (c) and remove in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-300
4-187
2SA/2RJ/2NK

arrow.
a
Figure 4-301

cover (e).
c

d
e
upper hook (d).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-302
4-188
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8. Remove the sub tray (a) in the direction of

the arrow.
Figure 4-303

10. Remove the middle rear cover (b) in the
b a
Figure 4-304
4-189
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12. Detach the sensor mounting plate (b).
Figure 4-305

14. Detach the IH shield plate (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-306
4-190
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Disconnect all connectors from the IH

PWB (b).
17. Release three board supports (c ) and
remove the IH PWB (b). b
18. Inspect or replace the IH PWB (b), and
then reattach the removed parts.
a
a
a
a
a
Figure 4-307
4-191
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-7) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB

Procedures
1. Push down the operation panel (a). e
2. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the
ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward
you and remove four lower hooks (d).
Release six upper side of hooks (e) and
then remove.
d
b
2
a
Figure 4-308
4-192
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade d
screwdriver (c).
5. Detach the exit upper cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow. c

When fasten the screw (a) of the upper exit
cover (b), fasten to pull the upper exit cover (b)
in the front side of the main unit.
b
d
c
Figure 4-309

7. Detach the operation lid (c) from the oper-
ation unit (b) in the direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-310
4-193
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Disconnect three connectors (b) from the d

operation panel (a). d
9. Remove the wire guide (c).
10. Remove two screws (d)(M3x8). a
Figure 4-311
11. Lift up the operation panel (a).

12. Release two hooks (b) with a flat head
screwdriver (c) and remove the exit front
cover (d) while defeating it.
a
b
c
d
Figure 4-312

When attaching the front exit cover (d), insert two lower hooks first and then rotate them and hook them
securely.
4-194
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the operation section (b). b
Figure 4-313
14. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8). g

15. Detach the operation rear top cover (c)
e
from the operation unit (b).
16. Remove one screw (f)(M3x8).
g
d
17. Detach the operation cover (d) from the
operation unit (b).
18. Remove two screws (g)(M3x8).
f
19. Detach the operation rear lower cover (e)
from the operation unit (b).
b a
a
c
Figure 4-314
4-195
2SA/2RJ/2NK
20. Disconnect all FFCs , FPCs and the con-

nectors from the operation PWB (c). a
21. Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8). a
22. Detach the operation panel main PWB (c)
a c a b
from the operation section (b).
23. Inspect or replace the operation panel
main PWB (c) and then reattach the
removed parts.
YC9
YC11
YC8
YC6
YC4
YC7
YC2
YC5
YC3 YC1
YC10
Figure 4-315
4-196
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4-7 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures (Option)

(1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit
Procedures
2. Remove the PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feeder (b).
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-316
4-197
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Disconnect the connector (b) of the motor

(a).
4. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the PF drive unit (d). a
5. Inspect or replace the PF drive unit (d),
and then reattach the removed parts in
the original position. b
c
c
c
c
Figure 4-317
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor

Procedures
Figure 4-318
4-198
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Remove the each connector (a) and the

each screw (b) (M3x8) x 3. b a
4. Detach the PF lift motor (c).
5. Inspect, clean or replace PF lift motor (c)
the original position.
c
b
b
b c
b
a
c
b
b
b b
b c
Figure 4-319
4-199
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Procedure when replacing

a b
(1)When attaching the PF lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), release two hooks (d) d
and remove the wire (c).
(2)Connect the connector (b) of the wire (c)

removed to new PF lift motor (e) and fas- c
ten two hooks (f).
e b
Figure 4-320
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-321
4-200
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PF

PWB (a).
4. Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and
detach the PF PWB (a).
5. Inspect or replace the PF PWB (a), and
b
a
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-322
4-201
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
b
c a
a
a
a
Figure 4-323
3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8).

4. Detach the interface Assy (a).
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-324
4-202
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Release three wire saddle (a) and the

wire stopper (b), and remove the wire (c).
a a a b
Figure 4-325
6. Pull the lever (b) of the wire holder (a)

and remove the wire holder (a).
a b
a
Figure 4-326
4-203
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Remove five screws (b)(M3x8) and

detach the PF drive unit (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
8. Inspect or replace the PF drive unit (a),
a
b
b
b b
Figure 4-327
4-204
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
b
c a
a
a
a
Figure 4-328
3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8).

4. Detach the interface Assy (a).
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-329
4-205
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Disconnect the connector (c). Remove

three screws (b)(M3x8) and detach the lift
motor 2 (a).
b a
b c
Figure 4-330

7. Release the hook (d) from the square
hole (c) of the side frame and remove the
PF lift motor 1 unit (a).
b d
b
b
Figure 4-331
4-206
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9. Disconnect the connector (c) and detach
the PF lift motor 1 (a).
10. Inspect or replace each PF lift motor and
refit all removed parts. a
b
c
b
Figure 4-332
4-207
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Procedures
1. Remove five screws (a) (M3x8).
paper feeder (b).
b
c a
a
a
Figure 4-333
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PF

PWB (a).
PF PWB (a).
c
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-334
4-208
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-335
3. Disconnect three connectors (a) and the

connector (b) from the PF PWB. a d
4. Remove two wire stoppers (c) and
remove the wire.
b a
a
c c
Figure 4-336
4-209
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and

detach the PF drive unit (a) from the main
c
unit while pushing in the switch lever (c).
b
b
Figure 4-337
4-210
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-338
3. Release six wire stoppers and the cable

cramp, and remove the wire of the PF lift
motor (a).
4. Disconnect the connector (b) and (c).
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
Figure 4-339
4-211
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and

detach the PF lift motor unit (a).
6. Inspect or replace the PF lift motor unit
(a), and then reattach the removed parts
in the original position.
Figure 4-340
4-212
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-341
3. Disconnect all connectors from the PF c

PWB (a).
5. Remove the PF PWB (a) from the two
hooks (c).
b
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
Figure 4-342
4-213
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor
Procedures
1. Open the document processor (a).
Figure 4-343
2. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and slide

the rear top cover (b).
Figure 4-344
4-214
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the DP rear cover (b).
Figure 4-345
Figure 4-346
4-215
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove the DP wire cover (a).
Figure 4-347
6. Disconnect the connector (a) of DP wire.

7. Remove the DP wire from wire saddle (b)
and wire saddle (c)
Figure 4-348
4-216
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Disconnect the connector (a) of DP wire

from the wire holder (d).
Figure 4-349
9. Lift up the document processor (a) in the

direction of the arrow and remove the
hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
c
b
Figure 4-350
4-217
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (b) of the docu-
ment processor (a).
b
Figure 4-351
2. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and detach

the DP rear left cover (b).
Figure 4-352
4-218
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB

Procedures
ment processor (a).
b
Figure 4-353
2. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and detach

the DP rear left cover (b).
Figure 4-354
4-219
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Open the lid (a) and take the DP rear mid-

dle cover (b) out.
Figure 4-355
4. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and detach a

the DP rear right cover (b).
Figure 4-356
4-220
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove two wire stoppers (a). b

6. Remove one screw (b)(M3x8) and detach
the wire guide (c).
a
Figure 4-357
7. Disconnect all the connectors from the c

DP PWB (b). a
9. Remove the DP PWB (b) from the docu-
ment processor (c).
10. Inspect or replace the DP PWB (b) and a
reattach the removed parts at the original
position.
b
Figure 4-358
4-221
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor
Procedures
Figure 4-359

remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding
Figure 4-360
4-222
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
Figure 4-361
Figure 4-362
4-223
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove the DP wire cover (a).
Figure 4-363
6. Disconnect the connector (a), release two

wire saddle (c) and remove the DP wire
(b).
7. Disconnect the connector (d), release the
wire saddle (f) and remove the DP wire
e
(e).
f a
c b
c
Figure 4-364
4-224
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Disconnect the connector (a) of DP wire

from the wire holder (d).
a
Figure 4-365
9. Open the document processor.

10. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and the b a a
pin (b).
Figure 4-366
4-225
2SA/2RJ/2NK
11. Slide the document processor (a) in the

direction of the arrow and remove the
hinge (c) from the main unit (b). b
a
c
c
Figure 4-367

Procedures
ment processor (a).
2. Remove the Strap (c) from the DP top
cover.
b
c
Figure 4-368
4-226
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-369
(5-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB

Procedures
ment processor (a).
cover (b).
b
c
Figure 4-370
4-227
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-371

DP PWB (b). c a
6. Remove the DP PWB (b) from the docu-
ment processor (c).
7. Inspect or replace the DP PWB (b) and b
reattach the removed parts at the original
a
position.
Figure 4-372
4-228
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the DPCIS

Procedures
ment processor (a).
cover (b).
b
c
Figure 4-373

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-374
4-229
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) at the

machine rear side, and detach DPCIS
unit (a) upward.
Figure 4-375
5. Disconnect two connectors (b) from the

DPSHD PWB (a).
b
Figure 4-376
4-230
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
6. Remove the DPCIS unit (a) while pushing b

the two hooks (c) of the front and rear 1 b
glass holder (b) in the direction of the
arrow to release them.
7. Detach the DPCIS glass (d) and DPCIS
(e) from DPCIS Unit (a). 2 2 f
c c
IMPORTANT
Check the position of black marking (f) for dis- b
tinction of the front / back side of the glass.
Also, make sure not to touch the glass surface.
If it is dirty, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
Figure 4-377
8. Disconnect the connector (e).

9. Release four pins (c) with the flat-head
screwdriver (b) and detach DPSHD PWB
(d).
10. Replace the DPCIS and then reattach the
removed parts in the original position. b
11. When replacing the new DPCIS Assy,
a c
execute the following procedures.
12. Clean the DPCIS roller and contact glass
(CIS).
13. Execute maintenance mode U091 (White c
lines correction setting). (Refer to P.6-74) e
14. Make test copy with gray originals. d c
15. When white streak appears on the image
of the test copy, execute step 13, 14
again, repeating till white streak disap-
pears.
c
Figure 4-378
16. Execute maintenance mode U411
(scanner auto adjustment) (Refer to
P.6-196)
4-231
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)

(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF PWB
Procedures
1. Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-379
2. Open the staple cover (a).
Figure 4-380
4-232
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-381

5. Lift up the DF front cover (b) and release
two hooks (c) to detach it.
c
a b
Figure 4-382
4-233
2SA/2RJ/2NK

YC9
DF PWB (e). YC4
YC7
YC8 YC13
7. Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and YC17

YC20
YC5
detach the DF PWB (a). YC10

YC11
YC6
8. Inspect or replace the DF PWB (b), and YC16
YC3
then reattach the removed parts in the YC19
original position.
b
a b b
Figure 4-383
4-234
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit
Procedures
1. Open the DF front cover (a).
2. Pull out the PH tank to remove it.
Figure 4-384
3. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under

the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift
it up to release the lock and open the sta-
ple cover (a).
Figure 4-385
4-235
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF staple unit (a).
a
b
b
Figure 4-386
5. Lift up the front side of the DF staple unit

(a) to release the hook (b) and pull it out
toward you.
6. Inspect or replace the DF staple unit (a),
Figure 4-387
4-236
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
2. Remove the cover (b).
Figure 4-388

4. Releases 3 hooks (b) and remove the DF
rear cover (c).
c
a a
Figure 4-389
4-237
2SA/2RJ/2NK

YC8 YC9
DF PWB (e). YC4
6. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8). YC17

YC5
7. Remove board support (c) and remove YC10
YC11
the DF PWB (a). YC19

YC16
8. Inspect or replace the DF PWB (b), and YC3
U3
then reattach the removed parts in the

original position.
b
c
a
b
Figure 4-390
4-238
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

(8-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit
Procedures
1. Open the DF front cover (a).
2. Pull out the PH tank to remove it.
a
b
Figure 4-391
3. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under

the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift
it up to release the lock and open the sta-
ple cover (a).
Figure 4-392
4-239
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF staple unit (a).
a
b
b
Figure 4-393
5. Lift up the front side of the DF staple unit

(a) to release the hook (b) and pull it out
toward you.
6. Inspect or replace the DF staple unit (a),
Figure 4-394
4-240
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
2. Remove the cover (b).
Figure 4-395
3.Remove 3 screws (a) (M4x8).

4. Detach the DF rear cover (b). b
Figure 4-396
4-241
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Disconnect all the connectors from the YC3 YC12 YC18 YC17 YC16
YC19
DF PWB (e). YC21

YC14
6. Remove six screws (b) (M3x8) and YC5 YC20
detach the DF PWB (a). YC4

YC15
YC8
7. Inspect or replace the DF PWB (b), and YC7 YC22
then reattach the removed parts in the YC9

YC6
YC1
original position. YC10
YC2
U3
YC23
YC13
a
b
b b
Figure 4-397
4-242
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures

Check the maintenance counts by the maintenance mode U901.
(1) Main unit

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
PM maintenance (x1000 counts) Remark

Parts name Parts No.
Set UP User Call 300 600 900 1200 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
A <Set Up>
1 TONER (CARTRIDGE) --------
2 IMAGE QUALITY -------- CH CH CH CH CH CH

AD AD AD AD AD AD
MK-8515A -------- RE RE DK(BK),DV(BK),TR,2ND TR ROLLER
FK,FILTER,PARTS PULLEY SET
MK-8515B -------- RE RE COLOR DV-3UNIT
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CH CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 SHEET DUCT PU H 302ND04B80 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

2ND04B80 In-machine cooling air filter
3 FILTER TRANSFER 302ND33240 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
2ND33240 Primary transfer cooling air intake filter
4 FILTER COVER RIGHT 302ND33300 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
2ND33300 PWB cooling air intake filter
C <PF and Conveying section>
1 PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY SP 302ND94020 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
2ND94020 RE Paper dust removal
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302ND94350 CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
2ND94350 RE RE RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP 302ND94210 CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP 302ND94340 CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
5 ROLLERS, PULLEYS -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
6 GUIDES -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
D <Exit and Duplex Section>
4-243
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

1 ROLLERS, PULLEYS -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GUIDES -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
E <Image scanner section>

1 PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(I)SP 302RH94150 CL CL CL CL CL CL Slit glass for DP: Dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
2RH94150 When inatalling DP,clean with dry cloth.
PARTS CONTACT-GLASS 302RH94160 Contact glass for putting the original on: Dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
ASSY(C)SP
2RH94160
2 MIRROR A/B/C -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
4 PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302ND93120 CL Replace at the image failure

2ND93120 RE
5 RAIL ISU R/F -------- LU Apply grease only at an abnormal sound, shake, etc
Grease to the optical rail: PG-671(P/N: 6017000)
6 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPS181EL1M CH Clean with alcohol or wipe with a dry cloth only at an error (sensor transmitter and receiver
H01 only)
CL
7 PARTS ISU 302ND93110 CH Replace at an image failure
2ND93110 RE
F <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
RE
3 Each gears -------- CH CH CH CH CH In case if there is abnormal sound, apply EM-50 LP coating to teeth
LU (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-50LP 50G)
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-244
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2) Option
(2-1)DP-7100

A <Set Up>
1 IMAGE QUALITY ------ CH CH CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
2 DP glass of the main unit CH CL CL CL CL Main unit side
CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

1 PARTS PAPER FEED ASSY SP 303R794100 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3R794100 CH:Performing U905 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
2 PULLEY SEPARATION 303LL07190 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3LL07190 CH:Performing U905 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 SENSOR OPT 7NXPS133GD1+ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
D <Conveying and Reversing section>
1 ROLLER REGISTRATION 303R724020 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724020
2 PULLEY, REGISTRATION 303P724170 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X5 3P724170
3 ROLLER CONVEYING LEFT 303R724030 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724030
4 PULLEY CONVEYING BK 303M824210 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X5 3M824210
5 ROLLER CONVEYING RIGHT 303R724040 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724040
X3 3M824210
4-245
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

7 ROLLER LOOP 303R729010 CL CL CL CL CL
3R729010
X4 3M824210
9 ROLLER EXIT 303R728010 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R728010
10 PULLEY EXIT 3HK10030 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3HK10030
11 ROLLER SHIFT 303R729020 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R729020
12 PULLEY EXIT 3HK10030 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3HK10030
13 GUIDE READING 303R724060 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724060
14 SENSOR OPT 7NXPS124GD1+ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
X2
E <Other section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04201 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3JC04201
4-246
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-2)DP-7110

A <Set Up>
1 IMAGE QUALITY ------ CH CH CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
2 DP glass of the main unit CH CL CL CL CL Main unit side
CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

C <PF Section>
1 BELT PF 303LL07531 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
2 PULLEY LF 303M407480 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3M407480 CH:Performing U905 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 PULLEY SEPARATION 303LL07190 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
4 PARTS GUIDE SEPARATE ASSY 303M494200 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol

SP
3M494200
D <Conveying Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER REGISTRATION 303M494070 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

SP
3M494070
2 PULLEY, REGISTRATION BK 303M424300 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
X8 3M424300
3 PULLEY REG B BK 303M424310 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
3M424310
4 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING 303M494090 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

LEFT SP
3M494090
5 PULLEY GUIDE READING 303LL24190 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
X10 3LL24190
6 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING 303M494100 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

RIGHT SP
3M494100
4-247
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

7 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING 303M494080 CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth

UPPER SP
3M494080
8 PARTS ROLLER EJECT SP 303M494110 CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
3M494110
9 GUIDE READING 303M424251 CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
X3 3M424251
10 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPS124GD1+ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
E <Table Section>
1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPSR11GD6F CL CL CL CL CL CL: Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
F <Other Section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04201 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3JC04201
G <CIS Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER CIS SP ------ CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GLASS CIS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (wet cloth is strictly prohibited.)
4-248
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-3)PF-7100

Parts name Parts No. Based on cycle of the
Set UP User Call Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH
AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
1 PARTS PULLEY SET SP 302ND94700 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94700 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302ND94350 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94350
3 PULLEY FEED 302N406030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2N406030
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP 302ND94340 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94340
5 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP 302ND94360 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS 2ND94360
6 GUIDES -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
D <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
4-249
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-4)PF-7110

machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH
AD
B <Cover>
1 PARTS PULLEY SET SP 302ND94700 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94700 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302ND94350 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94350
3 PULLEY FEED 302N406030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2N406030
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP 302ND94340 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94340
5 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP 302ND94360 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS 2ND94360
6 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOWER SP 303RC94070 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS 3RC94070
D <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
4-250
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-5)PF-7120

machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH CH:check the center alignment gap.
AD (check after center adjustment of copier)
B <PF Section>
1 PULLEY FEED 302K906350 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2K906350 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PULLEY RETARD 302K906360 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
3 PULLEY PICKUP 302K906370 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
4 PARTS ROLLER ASSIST SP 303NG94060 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3NG94060
5 CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV44041 CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
X2 2KV44041 RE
4-251
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-6)AK-7100

machine
2 PARTS ROLLER FEED A SP 303RG94020 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RG94020
3 PARTS ROLLER FEED C SP 303RG94040 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RG94040
4 PULLEYS -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-252
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-7)DF-7100

machine
A <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS, TRAY -------- CL Alcohol or dry cloth
B <PF, Conveying and exit sections>
1 ROLLER FEED 303RD24010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD24010
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER 303RD07020 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD07020
3 ROLLER CONVEYING 303RD24020 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD24020
4 PULLEY MIDDLE A 302H722760 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 2H722760
5 ROLLER MIDDLE 303RD36110 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD36110
6 PULLEY MIDDLE 303NB36661 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3NB36661
7 PULLEY PAPER FEED 3BR07040 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3BR07040
8 PULLEY EXIT 303RD36130 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3RD36130
9 PULLEY EXIT ONEWAYCLUTCH 303RD36180 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3RD36180
10 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER 303NB36500 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
X2 3NB36500
11 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT 303RD36200 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
X2 3RD36200
C <Sensor>
1 SENSOR OPT 7NXPSR11GD6 CL Airblow

MH01
4-253
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

machine
2 SENSOR OPT 7NXPS124GD1+ CL Airblow

H01
3 SENSOR OPT 7NXSG2A241++ CL Airblow

H01
x7
4-254
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-8)DF-7110

machine
A <Cover>
1 ROLLER FEED LOWER 303RW07010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07010
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER 303RW07030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07030
3 ROLLER MIDDLE 303RW36010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW36010
x2 3NB36661
5 ROLLER EXIT 303NB36340 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3NB36340
6 PULLEY EXIT 303NB36200 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2 3NB36200
7 ROLLER SUB CONVEYING 303RW24040 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW24040
8 ROLLER SUB EXIT 303RW24050 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW24050
9 PULLEY SUB EJECT 303B817020 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2 3B817020
10 PULLEY SUB EJECT 303NB24311 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x4 3NB24311
11 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 63212210 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
63212210
3NB36500
13 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE 303NB36490 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x2 3NB36490
4-255
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

machine
14 STATIC-ELIMINATOR SUB EJECT 303NB24300 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
3NB24300
C <Sensor>

H01
x2

H01
x16

H01
4 SENSOR A, SEPARATION 303H327460 CL Airblow
3H327460
5 SENSOR OPT 7NXKB1281AA2 CL Airblow

H01
6 SENSOR OPT 7NXPSR11GD6F CL Airblow

H01
4-256
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-9)DF-7120

machine
A <Cover>
1 ROLLER FEED LOWER 303RW07010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07010
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER 303RW07030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07030
3 ROLLER MIDDLE 303RW36010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW36010
x2 3NB36661
5 ROLLER EXIT 303NC36010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3NC36010
6 PULLEY EXIT 303NB36200 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2 3NB36200
7 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 63212210 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
63212210
3NB36500
9 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE 303NB36490 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x2 3NB36490
C <Sensor>

H01
x2

H01
3 SENSOR OPT. 7NXSG2A141++ CL Airblow

H01
x8
4-257
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

machine
4 SENSOR A, SEPARATION 303H327460 CL Airblow
3H327460
5 SENSOR OPT 7NXKB1281AA2 CL Airblow

H01
4-258
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update
Execute when upgrading the below firmware

*: Parallel process can be done by each group to reduce processing time.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller firmware DL_CTRL.2NK CTRL
2 Panel data DL_PANL.2ND PANL
3 Optional language data DL_OPT.2ND OPT
4 Dictionary data DL_DIC.2ND DIC
5 Browser data DL_BRWS.2ND BRWS
6 OCR dictionary data DL_OCR.2R6 OCR
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
step
1 Slot 1 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1
2 Slot 2 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX2
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
step
1 INNER PUNCH DL_03RF.2ND INNER-PU
2 MAIL BOX DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
3 BOOKLET DL_03ND.2ND BOOKLET
4 PUNCH UNIT DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
5 4000-sheets DF DL_03RW.2ND DF
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF DL_03ND.2ND INNER-DF
6 DP DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
DL_03R7.2ND DP-CIS
7 A4 Side Feeder DL_03RL.2ND PF-SIDE
8 3000-sheets PF DL_03RB.2ND PF-UNDER
500 sheets x 2PF
9 Engine firmware DL_ENGN.2NK ENGN
5-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[GROUP4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.
[GROUP5 UPDATE]
step
1 Panel firmware DL_SPNL.2ND SPNL
5-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Signature verification when updating the FW

Perform signature verification on the update file to prevent the FW update to be executed by illegally falsi-
fied update file
File names of the signature and firmware certificate

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file
name
Controller data 2NK_CTRL_sign.bin 2NK_CTRL_cert.pem
Panel data 2ND_PANL_sign.bin 2ND_PANL_cert.pem
Optional language data 2ND_OPT_sign.bin 2ND_OPT_cert.pem
Dictionary data 2R6_DIC_sign.bin 2ND_DIC_cert.pem
Browser data 2ND_BRWS_sign.bin 2ND_BRWS_cert.pem
OCR dictionary data 2R6_OCR_sign.bin 2R6_OCR_cert.pem
FAX PWB 3R2_FAX_sign.bin 3R2_FAX_cert.pem
INNER PUNCH 2ND_03RF_sign.bin 2ND_03RF_cert.pem
PUNCH UNIT 2RH_03NK_sign.bin 2RH_03NK_cert.pem
BOOKLET 2ND_03ND_sign.bin 2ND_03ND_cert.pem
MAIL BOX 2ND_03N0_sign.bin 2ND_03N0_cert.pem
4000-sheets DF
2ND_03RW_sign.bin 2ND_03RW_cert.pem
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF 2ND_03RD_sign.bin 2ND_03RD_cert.pem
2ND_03R7_sign.bin 2ND_03R7_cert.pem
DP 2ND_03R8_sign.bin 2ND_03R8_cert.pem
2ND_03RJ_sign.bin 2ND_03RJ_cert.pem
3000-sheets PF
2ND_03RB_sign.bin 2ND_03RB_cert.pem
500-Sheets x 2 PF
A4 Side Feeder 2ND_03RL_sign.bin 2ND_03RL_cert.pem
Engine PWB 2NK_ENGN_sign.bin 2NK_ENGN_cert.pem
Panel PWB 2ND_SPNL_sign.bin 2ND_SPNL_cert.pem
Note when upgrading the firmware

When using a USB memory requiring a long time to start up, the main unit will start up before executing the
firmware update. And it is not possible to enter the firmware update mode.
Maintenance mode U025 firmware update (S): Execute the firmware update by the Firmware Update
(Security)
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file
(skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory.
*: If the high-speed master file exists, skip to update the same version of the firmware.
5-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Procedures
1. Push the power switch (a) to turn on the
power.
2. Push the power switch (a) to turn off the
power.
3. Insert the USB memory (b) with the
firmware into the USB memory slot (c).
4. Push the power switch (a) to turn on the
power.
c
b
Figure 5-1
䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢 FW -U PD ATE䢢䢢䢢䢢
5. [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indica-
䢢
tor is displayed. &75/ 0$,/%2;
䢢 3$1/ %22./(7
*: Several kinds of firmware updates are 237
䢢 381,7
processed simultaneously. ',& ')
䢢 %5:6
,11(5')
䢢 3&/87 '35(9
3&/87 '3&,6
䢢
&&/87 '3/2:
䢢 &&/87 3)6,'(
2&5 3)81'(5
䢢
)$; (1*1
)$; 631/
,11(538
Figure 5-2
FW -UPDATE䢢䢢䢢䢢 Com pleted

6. Once [Completed] is displayed, the firm-
ware update is completed. &75/1'B 0$,/%2;1R&KDQJH
3$1/1R&KDQJH %22./(71R&KDQJH
7. Check if the new firmware versions are
2371R&KDQJH 381,71R&KDQJH
displayed. ',&1R&KDQJH ')1R&KDQJH
%5:61R&KDQJH ,11(5')1R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '35(91R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '3&,61R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH '3/2:1R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH 3)6,'(1R&KDQJH
2&51R&KDQJH 3)81'(51R&KDQJH
)$; (1*11'B
)$; 631/1R&KDQJH
,11(5381R&KDQJH
Figure 5-3
*: If there is no corresponding master file, display [No Change].
[*] is displayed after the firmware version if the firmware update is skipped.
*: [----------] is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.
5-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Display the result of the signature verification

Official signature verification file Display the result
Both certificate and signature files are available and they were Version number
successfully verified.
Both certificate and signature files are available however they S000
were failed for verification.
There is no certificate / signature files. S001
Or either of them does not exist.
Note
Please do not turn off the power or remove the USB memory (b) while updating.
8. Turn off the power and remove the USB memory.

9. Turn on the power and check if [Home] screen appears, and then turn off the power.
In case of an error and finish FW -U P D A T E E rror

When an error occurs while updating the firm-
&75/1'B 0$,/%2;1R&KDQJH
ware, stop the process immediately and dis- 3$1/1R&KDQJH %22./(71R&KDQJH
plays the error message and error code. 2371R&KDQJH 381,71R&KDQJH
',&1R&KDQJH ')1R&KDQJH
%5:61R&KDQJH ,11(5')1R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '35(91R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '3&,61R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH '3/2:1R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH 3)6,'(1R&KDQJH
2&51R&KDQJH 3)81'(51R&KDQJH
)$; (1*1(UURU
)$; 631/1R&KDQJH
,11(5381R&KDQJH
Figure 5-4
Code Description Code Description

0000 Others S000 Other signature verification error *1
0100 No Master file S001 Signature verification file is missing
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no update target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
04xx File (No.xx) Checksum mismatch N002 Network connection failed. *3
(There is an update target interrupted)
05xx File (No.xx) Preparation failure
x6xx File (No.xx) Oversize
08xx File (No.xx) Writing failure
*1: Including the expired FM certificate

*2: Automatically restarted for the normal start-up since the normal start-up is available next time.
*3: Change to the USB update mode without restarting automatically as normal start-up might not be possible
next time.
5-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Safe-Update
In case if the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or removing the USB memory during the
firmware update, the firmware update will be retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power switch on without removing the USB memory.
*: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down will be skipped.
5-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode
Service mode for the main unit maintenance and repair is equipped.
(1) Executing method of the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the [▲] [▼] keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Maintenance modes list

Classifi- No. Name of maintenance mode Outline
cation
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Print the reports and export them to a USB
memory
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exit from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initialize to the factory-default setting
U003 Setting the telephone number of the Set the telephone number of the service person.
service person
U004 Machine Number Display and set the machine serial number
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Set the maintenance mode ID
U018 Firmware self verification Check the firmware falsification.
U019 Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the PWB
Initializa- U021 Initializing Memory Initialize the backup RAM
tion
U024 Formatting an HDD Format the HDD
U025 Firmware update (S) Update the firmware
U026 Retrieve the backup data Retrieve the backup data
Driving U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor
Paper U031 Checking the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
feed
Convey- U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
ing U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply
Cooling solenoids
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjust the leading edge timing and the center
line
U035 Folio size setting Set length and width of Folio paper.
U037 Fan motor operation check Drive each fan motor.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjust the paper loop amount between the roll-
adjustment ers
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Set speed correction of each motor.
U059 Fan mode setting Set the drive mode of the conveying fan motor
Optical U061 Lamp lighting check Turn the exposure lamp on
section
U063 Shading position adjustment Change the scanner shading position
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjust the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjust the leading edge timing for table scan-
ning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center Adjust the center line for table scanning
line
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjust the starting position for DP scanning
6-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
Optical U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjust the magnification for DP scanning
section
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Tim- Adjust the DP scanning timing
ing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjust the center line for DP scanning
U073 Scanner motor operation check Operate the scanner in the set condition
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteris- Set the DP image scanning density
tics
U087 Setting the DP scanning position Change the scanning position as the corrective
change operation measures for the black lines
U089 MIP-PG pattern output Output MIP-PG pattern
U091 White lines correction setting Set the white lines detection threshold
U099 Original size detection setting Check the operation of the original size detec-
tion and set detection threshold
High volt- U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
age sec-
tion
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Setting and outputting the primary transfer volt-
age
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjust- Set the secondary transfer voltage correction
ment value
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the transfer belt cleaning voltage
adjustment
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Set control voltage of the transfer belt unit clean-
ing
U110 Drum counter Display the drum counter
U117 Drum unit number Display the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Display the drum history
U119 Drum unit initial setting Set the initial LSU light intensity
U120 Drum drive distance counter Display the drum drive distance counter
U122 Primary transfer unit number Display the primary transfer unit number
U123 Primary transfer unit history Display the machine number and the primary
transfer unit counter history
U127 Clearing the transfer count Display the transfer counter value
U128 Transfer timing adjustment Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF
timing
Devel- U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjust- Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
oper sec- ment
tion U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply in the toner control
level
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drive the toner motor
6-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

cation
Devel- U136 Toner level detection setting Set the number of pages printable at toner near
oper sec- end
tion U139 Temperature, humidity Display the machine inside and outside humidity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values or set the high
altitude mode.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Set the overcharge toner removal mode
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Set auto drum refresh mode
U155 Toner sensor output value Display the toner sensor output
U156 Toner control level adjustment Display and adjust the toner empty level
U157 Developer drive time Display/set the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Display/set the developer counter
U159 Toner container function setting Set the toner container lock and waste toner box
Fuser U161 Fuser control temperature adjust- Set the fuser control temperature
section ment
U164 Fuser unit history Display the machine number and the fuser unit
history
U165 Fuser unit number Display the fuser unit number
U167 Clearing the fuser counter Display/clear the counter value
U169 Setting the fuser power source Display/set the IH PWB control voltage
U193 Fuser drive control setting Set the fuser drive control setting
U197 Setting Fuser Control Set the fuser control
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Opera- U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
tion sec- U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch
tion / panel
Support
equip- U203 Check DP operation Check paper conveying operation for the docu-
ment ment processor alone
U204 Key card/key counter setting Key card/key counter connection setting
U206 Set the coin vendor Set the coin vendor
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key operation
U208 Setting the paper size for the side Set paper size of side feeder
deck
U211 Enhancement unit connection set- Set the connection of the enhancement devices
ting
U221 USB host lock function setting Set USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U222 Setting the IC card type Set the ID card type
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock function
U224 Setting Original Panel Display Set the opening screen
U230 Optional device serial number Display the serial number of the optional devices
6-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

cation
Opera- U234 Setting destination for punch Set the punch unit destination
tion sec- U237 Finisher exit volume limit Set the tray stack capacity
tion /
Support U240 Finisher operation check Check the drive operation
equip- U241 Finisher switch check Check the switch operation
ment
U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the DP motor and solenoid
U244 Checking DP switch Drive the DP sensor
U245 Checking the message Check message
U246 Finisher adjustment Set adjustment value of the finisher
U247 Paper feed operation check Drive the PF motor and clutch
U249 Finisher line test Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Mode U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set Change the preset value
Setting U251 clearing the maintenance counter Display/clear/change the counter value
U252 Destination Set the machine operation and display for each
specification of the destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Set the counting method by each color mode
U260 Switching feed/exit count Set the count-up timing
U265 Setting by destination Set the OEM code
U271 Setting the page count unit Set the counting unit of the long size paper
U278 Delivery date setting Set the mono color copy count mode
U285 Set Service Status Page Register delivery date
U286 Optional language setting Set the print coverage report output
U287 Automatic recovery function Add/delete/change the optional language
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity Set whether to make auto recovery function
notification setting after the error
U325 Paper interval setting Switch the display mode of the abnormal tem-
perature and humidity detection
U326 Set black line cleaning display Switch the black line cleaning guidance display
U327 Cassette heater control setting Select the cassette heater control setting
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coeffi- Set the coefficient of the custom size
cient
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting Set the drum heater
U340 Setting the applied mode Set the memory allocation
U341 Printer cassette setting Set the cassette for printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switch to set the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Maintenance due timing display set- Set the maintenance timing message display
ting
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Set the BAM related sleep mode
6-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
Image U402 Adjusting the printing margins Adjust the scan image margins
process- U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin of scanning originals
ing original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin of scanning originals
original from the document proces-
sor
U407 Writing timing adjustment (Duplex/ Adjust the writing timing when printing duplex
Reversal)
U410 Half tone automatic adjustment Acquire the data for the halftone auto adjust-
ment and the ID correction
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjust the scanner and DP automatically
U412 Adjusting the uneven density Correct the LSU density unevenness
U415 Adjusting the print position automati- Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing
cally
U425 Set Target Input the Lab value described on an adjustment
original
U464 ID correction setting Set the ID correction
U465 ID correction data Display the light intensity control value after the
ID correction
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit Set the primary transfer unit
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Set the JPEG compression ratio
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning Set the LSU cleaning operation check and
cleaning cycle
U485 Image process mode setting Set the image process related items
U520 TDRS setting Check/refer the information for the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initialize all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initialize the software switches except the
machine data
U603 User data 1 Set the user for FAX usage
U604 User data 2 Set the user for FAX usage
U605 Data clear Initialize the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored at 100%
magnification RX mode/auto reduction mode.
U611 System 2 Set number of lines to be adjusted at auto
reduction mode.
U612 System 3 Set operation at FAX communication
U615 System 6 Set the printing size and received image size at
FAX reception
U620 FAX system Set the signal detection method at remote
switching
6-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
FAX U625 Communication settings Set the interval and the number of times for auto
redialing
U630 Communication control procedures Set the FAX communication
1
2
3
4
U634 Communication control procedures Set acceptable error when judging the received
5 TCF signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Set the detection time by remote switching
mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Set the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Set the modem output level
U660 Ring setting Set the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Output the list of the fax communication data
U671 Clearing FAX backup data Clear the FAX backup data
U695 FAX function customization Set ON/OFF of FAX bulk transmission
U698 Setting the maintenance port Set the port to apply
U699 Software switch: Set Set the software switches individually
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper Display/clear the counter value by each feeding
source cassette
U903 Clearing the jam counter Display/clear number of occurrence by jam trig-
ger code
U904 Clearing the service call error coun- Display/clear number of the service call error
ter and system error
U905 Optional counter Display the counter value
U906 Resetting the partial operation Reset the partial operation
U908 Total counter Display the FAX total count
U910 Black rate data Clear the print coverage data and its period
U911 Counter by media type Display/clear the counter by each media type
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Read/write the backup data to a USB memory
U920 Charge counter Display the set value of the charge count
U927 Clearing all the charge/life counters Clear the charge count and the machine life
count
6-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
Others U928 Machine life counter Display the machine life counter value.
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Display and set the MC roller counter value
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log Set the maintenance mode history log
U942 DP loop amount setting Adjust the paper loop amount when using the
document processor
U952 Maintenance mode workflow Execute the maintenance flow with the Work-
Flow data
U964 The log correction flow Transfer the log files stored in the HDD to a USB
memory.
U969 Toner area code Display the toner area code
U977 Setting the data capture mode Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB
memory
U984 Developer unit number Display the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Display the developer unit number history
U989 HDD scan disk Execute the HDD scan disk
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
U991 Scanner counter Display the scanner count
6-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode

U000 Printing Maintenance Report
(Message: Output Maintenance Report)
Contents
Output the list of the current settings of maintenance modes, and occurrence condition of paper
jam or service call error. Output the event log and the service status page.
Also, send output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Check the current settings of maintenance modes, and occurrence condition of paper jam and
service call error.
When initializing or replacing the backup memory, output the list of the current settings of mainte-
nance modes beforehand as it is necessary to re-enter the settings after initialization or replace-
ment.
Method
2.Select the item to output.
Items Output list

Maintenance Maintenance mode setting list
User Status Output User Status Page
Service Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
Network Status Output Network Status Page
Configuration List Output setting value list
LLU Report Output LLU report
All All reports output
3.Press the [Start] key to output the list.

* :If A4/Letter size paper is available, it will be output in this size. If A4/Letter size paper is not
available, select the paper source. Output status is displayed.
Method: send output data to a USB memory

2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Select the item to send.
4.Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].
Items Output list

Print Print a report
USB(Text) Destination: send to USB memory (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)

* :The output data is sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Detail of event log
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6052ci (2) 2016/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (7) Life Count:100000
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time (10) Maintenance Log
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Item. Data and Time
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2 444444 02.01 2014/02/12 17:30
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 1 222222 02.02 2014/02/12 17:30
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5
4 0501.01.08.01.00
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01
0501.01.08.01
2014/02/12 17:30
2014/02/12 17:30
3 (a)
555555 (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01 (e)
2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
(9) Service Call Log (11) Toner Log

# Count. Service Code Date and Time # Count. Item Serial Number Date and Time
8 9999999 01.00.0100 2014/07/05 10:00 5 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/05/01 10:00
7 9999999 02.01.0100 2014/07/04 10:00 4 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/04/05 10:00
6 9999999 01.01.0000 2014/06/26 10:00 3 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/21 10:00
5 9999999 01.00.0000 2014/05/01 10:00 2 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2013/11/30 10:00
4 9999999 01.01.0000 2014/04/05 10:00 1 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2013/11/24 10:00
3 9999999 02.00.0000 2014/02/21 10:00
2 9999999 02.00.0000 2013/11/30 10:00
1 9999999 01.00.0000 2013/11/24 10:00
Figure 6-1
6-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6052ci 2016/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 Life Count:100000
(11) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4302: 0
J0100: 1 J4303: 1
J0101: 11 J4304: 11
J0104: 222 J4309: 2
J0105: 1 J9000: 1
J0106: 1 J9004 0
J0107: 1 J9010: 1
J0110: 1 J9060: 1
J0111: 1 J9061: 2
J0211: 1 J9062: 1
J0212: 1 J9110: 1
J0213: 999 J9120: 0
J0501: 1 J9200: 1
J0502: 1 J9210: 1
J0503: 1 J9220: 2
J0504: 1
J0508: 1 (g) C0000: 0
J0509: 1 C0001: 1
J0511: 1 C0002: 2
J0512: 1 C0003: 3
J0513: 1 C0004: 4
J0514: 1 C0005: 5
J0518: 1 C0006: 6
J0519: 1 C0007: 7
J1403: 1 C0008: 8
J1404: 1 C0009: 9
J1413: 1 C0010: 10
J1414: 1 CF245: 11( 0)
J1604: 1 CF248: 12( 0)
J1614: 1 CF345: 13( 0)
J4002: 1 (h) T00: 10
J4003: 1 M00: 20
J4004: 1 M02: 30
J4009: 1
J4012: 1
J4013: 1
J4014: 1
J4019: 1
J4201: 1
J4202: 0
J4203: 1
J4204: 1
J4208: 0
J4209: 1
J4211: 11
J4212: 222
J4213: 1
J4214: 2
J4218: 1
J4219: 2
J4301: 1
6-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Description of event log
No. Items Contents

(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Total life counter
6-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Record 1 to 16 occurrence The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in hexa- Date and
If number of the past paper time of paper jam. decimal) time of
jam occurrence is less occur-
than 16, all of them are (a) Cause of paper jam rence
described. It will be deleted (b) Paper source
from the old log if it (c) Paper size
exceeds 16 times (d) Paper type
(e) Output location
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection", for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (P.7-
122)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper (12 x
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 35: Youkei type 4
6-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont.
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Thick 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Details of output location (hexadecimal)

01: Main unit face down (FD)
02: Main unit face up (FU)/1,000-sheet finisher (FU)/
4,000-sheet finisher tray B(FU)
03: 1,000-sheet finisher(FD)
4,000-sheet finisher tray A (FD)
05: Job separator tray
07: 4,000-sheet finisher tray B(FD)
0A: Folding unit tray
0B: MT tray 1(FD)
0C: MT tray 1(FU)
15: MT tray 2(FD)
16: MT tray 2(FU)
1F: MT tray 3(FD)
20: MT tray 3(FU)
29: MT tray 4(FD)
2A: MT tray 4(FU)
33: MT tray 5(FD)
34: MT tray 5(FU)
3D: MT tray 6(FD)
3E: MT tray 6(FU)
47: MT tray 7(FD)
48: MT tray 7(FU)
6-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Record 1 to 8 occurrence The total page count at the The first two digits (identifi- Date and
of the past self diagnostics time of the self diagnostic cation number) time of
error. error. 01: Service call / System occur-
If number of the past self error rence
diagnostics error occur- 02: Unit replacement
rence is less than 16, all of
them are described. Next two digits (Auto
reboot information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
Last 4 digits
Self diagnostic error code
(Refer to P.7-282)
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnos-
tic error, 00 indicates with-
out auto reboot and 6000
indicates Self diagnostic
error code.
*: Auto reboot function
can be set at U287
6-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
No. Contents
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and
Time
Record 1 to 8 occurrence Total page count at the Maintenance replacement Date and
of the past unknown toner time of the replacement of item code (1-byte value to time of
detection. If number of the the maintenance item. indicate 2 items) occur-
past unknown toner detec- rence
tion is less than 8, all of First byte (Replacing item)
them are described. The toner replacement log 02: Maintenance kit
is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain Second 1 byte (replace-
such a reference as the ment item type)
toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner con- 01: MK-6325
tainer is inserted.
(11) Toner Log

# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and
Time
Record 1 to 32 occurrence When using the non-genu- log code Date and
of the past unknown toner ine toner container, record First 1byte(Replacing item) time of
detection. If number of the the log at occurrence of 01: Genuine product occur-
past unknown toner detec- the toner container 02: Non-genuine product rence
tion is less than 32, all of replacement (total page
them are described. count). Next 1byte (type of
replacement item)
00: Black
Last 16 digits
Display the serial number
of the toner container.
6-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12) Counter Log

(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for main-
tenance Item
Display the log counter of Display the log counter of Display the log counter by Consist of
paper jams by each loca- self diagnostics errors by the maintenance replace- three log
tion. each cause. ment item. counters
Refer to Paper Jam Log. of paper
The number of auto reboot T: Toner container jams, self
* All factors including those is also displayed at the 00: Black diagnos-
that have not occurred are service call/system error. tics errors,
displayed M: Maintenance kit and main-
01: MK-6325 tenance
(e.g.) CF245: 4(2) replace-
System error 245 occurred ment
four times in the past and Example: T00: 1 items.
auto reboot was done The toner container
twice. (Black) has been replaced
once in the past.
The toner replacement log

is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain
such a reference as the
toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner con-
tainer is inserted.
6-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Detail of service status page
Service Status Page (2) [XXXXXXXXXX]

MFP (3) 2016/03/03 15:15
TASKalfa 6002i (4) [XXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] (5)
(1) Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(6) (7) (8)
Controller Information
Memory status (39) FRPO Status
(9) Total Size 4.0 GB User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
Time User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
(10) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam .
(11) Date and Time 06/04/2010 12:00 .
(12) Time Server 10.183.53.13 .
Installed Options .
(13) Document Processor Installed .
(14) Paper Feeder LCF(1500X2) .
(15) Side Feeder Not Installed .
(16) SD Card Not Installed .
(17) Finisher Not Installed .
(18) Mail Box Not Installed .
(19) Job Separator Not Installed .
(20) Card Authentication Kit (B) .
Installed .
(21) Internet Fax Kit (A) Not Installed
.
(22) Data Security Kit (E) Installed
.
(23) UG-33 Installed
.
(24) UG-34 Installed
.
(25) USB Keyboard Installed .
(26) USB Keyboard Type US-English PDF mode Y5 00
(27) Scan extention Kit(A) Installed e-MPS error control Y6 03
(28) Print Coverage RP Code
Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) (40) 1234 5678 9012
(29) Total (41) 5678 9012 3456
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (42) 9012 3456 7890
(30) Copy (43) 3456 7890 1234
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(31) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(32) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(33) Period (27/10/2009 - 03/11/2009 08:40)
(34) Last Page (%) 1.00
FAX Information
(35) Rings (Normal) 3
(36) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(37) Rings (TAD) 3
(38) Option DIMM Size 16MB
Figure 6-2
6-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Service Status Page [XXXXXXXXXX]

MFP
MFP 2016/03/03 15:15
TASKalfa i [XXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.20 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information Engine Information

Print Settings (46) NVRAM V ersion _CI04709_CI04709
(44) MP Tray Priority (47) FAX Slot1 2NM_1200.001.089
Auto Feed
FAX BOOT Version 2NM_5000.001.006
(45) Altitude Adjustment FAX APL Version 2NM_5100.004.001
FAX IPL Version 2NM_5200.001.006
Status Normal
(48) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
Send Information
(49) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(50) Address mail@bjd.ne.jp
1/2 (51) (52)
(53) 100/100
(54) 0/0/0/0/
(55) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/1/1/1/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69)(70)
(71) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(72) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(79) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(80) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(81) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(82) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(83) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(84) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(85) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(86) XXXXXXXX/
(87) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ]
(88) [ABCDEFGHIJ]
(89) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/
(90) 1/1/1/0/1/0/0/ 2010/12/15 12:34:56
1/5/ (91)(92)
1/1/ (93) (94)
1/0/0 (95)(96)(97)
(98) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
(99) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
Figure 6-3
6-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
No. Items Contents

(1) Firmware Version -
(2) Machine serial number -
(3) System date -
(4) API version of the HyPAS application
(5) Browser version
(6) Engine firmware version -
(7) Engine boot version -
(8) Operation panel firmware version -
(9) Total memory size -
(10) Local time zone -
(11) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(12) NTP server name -
(13) Whether the DP is installed or not Installed/Not Installed
(14) Whether the paper feeder is installed Cassette(500-sheet×2) / Cassette(1500-sheet×2) / Not
or not Installed
(15) Whether the side feeder is installed or Installed/Not Installed
not
(16) Whether the SD memory card is Installed/Not Installed
installed or not
(17) Whether the finisher is installed or not 1000-sheet finisher / Inner finisher /
4000-sheet finisher/not installed
(18) Whether the mail box is installed or not Installed/Not Installed
(19) Whether the job separator is installed Installed/Not Installed
or not
(20) Whether the ID card authentication kit Installed/before installation/trial
(B) is installed or not
(21) Whether the internet FAX kit (A) is Installed/before installation
installed or not
(22) Whether the Data security kit (E) is Installed/before installation
installed or not
(23) Whether the UG-33 is installed or not Installed/before installation/trial
(24) Whether the UG-34 is installed or not Installed/before installation
(25) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(26) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German
French
(27) Whether the scan extension kit (A) is Installed/before installation/trial
installed or not
(28) Average coverage for printer Print coverage notation is just a guide (reference) and do
(Page count converted to the A4/Letter not represent the actual toner consumption
size)
6-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Items Contents

(29) Total average coverage Black
(30) Average coverage for copy Black
(31) Average coverage for printer Black
(32) Average coverage for FAX Black
(33) Cleared date and output date -
(34) Coverage on the last output page -
(35) Number of rings 0 to 15
(36) Number of rings before automatic 0 to 15
switching
(37) Number of rings before connecting to 0 to 15
the answering machine
(38) Optional DIMM size -
(39) FRPO setting -
(40) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
latest update.
(41) RP code Coding the main software version and the date of the lat-
est update.
(42) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
previous update.
(43) RP code Coding the main software version and the date of the pre-
vious update.
(44) MP tray priority setting Off(No setting)/Auto(Auto feed)/Always(All times)
(45) High altitude adjustment setting data Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m
(46) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the
database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the
ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are
identical with (c) and (f).
(47) FAX firmware version -
(48) MAC address -
(49) The last sent date and time -
(50) Transmission address -
6-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Items Contents

(51) Destination information -
(52) Area information -
(53) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(54) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left mar-
gin integer part /Left margin decimal part
(55) Life counter (The first line) Machine life/ MP tray/ Paper feeder 1/ Paper feeder 2/
Paper feeder 3/ Paper feeder 4/ Paper feeder 5/ Duplex
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/Primary transfer unit/Secondary transfer unit/
Developer unit K/MC roller K/Fuser unit
Life counter (The third line) Maintenance kit
(56) Panel lock information F00: OFF
F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(57) USB information U00: Not Connected
U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
(58) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select
1: Paper source fixed
(59) Auto cassette change mode 0: OFF
1: ON (Default)
(60) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(61) Charge count up timing 0: When secondary feed starts
1: When output is completed
(62) Temperature (machine inside) -
(63) Temperature (machine outside) -
(64) Relative outside humidity -
(65) Absolute outside humidity -
(66) Machine inside humidity
(67) Asset Number -
(68) Job end judgment time-out time -
(69) Job end detection mode 0: Detect as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detect as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a
break in job
(70) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
6-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
No. Items Contents

(71) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
*: For details on settings, refer to 2: Normal 2 2: Low
MDAT command in "Prescribe 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Commands Reference Manual". 4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Heavy 4 1: Enable
8: Heavy 5
9: Extra Heavy
(72) IO Calibration information K
(73) Bias Calibration information -
(74) Sensor initial information -
(75) Calibration information -
(80) Paper loop correction shift amount -
(81) Paper loop correction interval -
(82) Paper loop correction patch amount -
(85) RFID information (K) -
(86) RFID read/write version -
(87) Optional PF firmware version -
(88) Software version of option language -
(89) Maintenance information -
(90) Data sanitization information FAX Board/Main Memory/Panel Memory/SSD/Executed
time
1: Success
0: Fail
-: Not performed or Not installed
(91) Toner low setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(92) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(93) Banner print confirmation display set- 0: No display
ting 1: Display every page
(94) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory default)
1: Full-page mode
6-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Items Contents

(95) Wake-up mode 0: Off (No wake up)
1: On (Wake up)
(96) Wake-up timer Display the wake-up time
(97) BAM conformity mode setting 0: Non-conformity mode
1: Conformity Mode
(98) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(99) Developer serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

(Message:Exit Maintenance Mode)
Contents
Exit the maintenance mode and return back to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Execute when exit the maintenance mode.
Method
2.Return back to the normal copy mode.
U002 Set Factory Default

(Message: Set Factory Default)
Contents
Set the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Execute the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
2.Select [Mode1(All)].
Items Contents
Mode1(All) Set the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
4.Turn the power switch off.

* :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off / on, and execute initialization by the mainte-
nance mode U002.
Please wait at least 5 seconds or more between power off and on
Error code list
Code Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U003 Setting the telephone number of the service person

(Message: Set Telephone Number for Service Call)
Contents
Set the phone number displayed at the service call error.
Purpose
Execute to set the phone number for the service call when installing the machine
Setting
* :Display the key to input on the touch panel.
2.Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
U004 Machine Number

(Message: Machine Number)
Contents
Display or set the machine serial number.
Purpose
Use when checking the machine serial number.
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the service call C0180 "machine serial num-
ber mismatch" is displayed.
Method
When the machine serial number of the engine PWB and the main PWB match.
Items Contents
Machine No. Display the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number of the engine PWB and the main PWB do not match.
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Display the machine serial number of the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Display the machine serial number of the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the machine serial numbers do not match.
1.Select [Execute].
* :Start writing the machine serial number
3.Turn the power switch off then on. Please wait at least 5 seconds or more between power off
and on
Completion
6-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Purpose
Prevent vulnerability of security function by changing maintenance mode ID for the field.
Method
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initialize the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Setting: New ID
1.Select [New ID].
2.Press ten key (0–9, *, #) to enter new 8-digit ID.
* :Either [*] or [#] must be included.
4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5.Press ten key (0–9, *, #) to re-enter new 8-digit ID.
Method: Initialize
1.Select [Initialize].
2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Error code list
Code Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
6-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U018 Firmware self verification

(Message: Check Firmware Checksum)
Contents
Verify if the firmware is not falsified.
Purpose
Re-calculate the checksum to verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method
Items Contents
Expected Display the checksum expected value
Result Display the result of the checksum calculation
Execute Execute self-verification
2.Select [Execute].
After execution, display the checksum obtained in the [Expected].
The following appears if the verification result is illegal.
Items Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Illegal data of the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Fails to obtain the checksum
NG Expected value and checksum are different
Completion
6-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U019 Firmware Version

(Message: Firmware Version)
Contents
Display each firmware / software version.
Purpose
Use when checking each firmware / software version.
Method
* :Display each firmware version.
2.Change the screen using the [▲][▼] key.
Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation section firmware
Panel Main Panel firmware
Panel Boot Panel Boot
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
RFID RFID
Dictionary Dictionary firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
OCR OCR dictionary firmware
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DP SSW Document Processor SSW
PF1 Paper feeder 1 firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot
Side PF Side feeder firmware
Side PF Boot Side feeder boot
SMT SSW SMT SSW
PF2 Paper feeder 2 firmware
PF2 Boot Paper Feeder 2 boot
DF finisher firmware
DF Boot finisher boot
PH PH Firmware
PH Boot PH Boot
MT MT Firmware
MT Boot MT boot
6-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
BF BF firmware
BF Boot BF Boot
Fax APL1 Fax APL1
Fax Boot1 FAX Boot1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL1
Fax APL2 Fax APL2
Fax Boot2 FAX Boot2
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL2
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
Completion
6-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U021 Initializing Memory

(Message: Initialize Memory)
Contents
Initialize all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service
call error history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area spec-
ification selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

* :All data other than for adjustments is initialized and set initial setting value by each destina-
tion
and on
* :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When error occurs, turn the power switch off / on, and execute initialization by the mainte-
nance mode U021.
Error code list
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion
6-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U024 Formatting an HDD

(Message: Format HDD)
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Note
The following settings are initialized if the HDD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document
Box, etc.),Shortcut key, Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software.
Method
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
3.Select items to be executed. Display the item to delete.
Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (save in the application software)
4.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the initialization.

and on
* :Manually reinstall deleted software.

Optional language, OCR dictionary software, (OCRDATA): Install using a USB memory.
Install the HyPAS application (FMU, etc.) from the Application screen.
* :If there is no OCR dictionary software, a warning dialog is displayed, and the OCR function
can't be used.
Completion
6-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U025 Firmware update (S)

(Message: Firm Update(Security))
Contents
Execute Firmware-Update from the USB memory when "Very High" is selected in the Security
Level settings under the System Menu.
Supplement
Firmware update starts by executing the maintenance mode U035 under the condition of the
USB memory is installed.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Update the firmware

* :It is not possible to execute when the USB memory is not installed.
4.After completing normal operation, turn the power switch off / on. Please wait at least 5 sec-
onds or more between power off and on
Completion
6-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U026 Retrieve the backup data

(Message: Pulling Backup Data)
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restore the setting value backed up from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Migrate data from backup source SSD to backup destination SSD via USB memory
Method
Items Contents
Flash Update the firmware
SSD When USB memory is installed, back up and restore SSD data.
Method: Flash
1.Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data

and on
Method: SSD
Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data

3.After completion of [Restore], turn the power switch off / on. Please wait at least 5 seconds or
more between power off and on
* :Display "NG" when completed abnormally.

Saved data:
U278 Delivery date setting
U402 Print margin adjustment
U952 Maintenance workflow registration data
Completion
6-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U030 Motor operation check

(Message: Check Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each motor.
Contents
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
2.Select the motor to operate.
* :Each operation start.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the feed motor
DLP(K) Operate the developer K/Transfer belt motor
Belt Lift Operate the belt release motor
Belt Clean Operate the belt cleaning motor
Drum(K) Operate the drum motor K
IH Core Operate the IH Core motor
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
Fuser Release Operate the fuser pressure release motor
SB(CW) Operate the exit reverse motor (CW)
SB(CCW) Operate the exit reverse motor (CCW)
Bridge Operate the BR conveying motor
Container Mix Operate the toner container motor
Toner Recovery Operate the waste toner motor
Vibration Operate the vibration motor
* :To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U031 Checking the conveying switch

(Message: Check Conveying Switch)
Contents
Display the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
Execute to check if the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
2.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
3.The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Display the switching status of the conveying sensor
Regist Display the switching status of the registration sensor
Belt Jam Display the switching state of the belt wound sensor
Exit Feed Display the switching status of the exit sensor
DU1 Display the switching status of the DU sensor 1
DU2 Display the switching status of the DU sensor 2
Bridge1 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Display the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
Fuser Feed Display the switching status of the fuser sensor
Display the switching Display the switching status of the JS sensor
status of the fuser
sensor
Completion
6-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U032 Clutch operation check

(Message: Check Clutch Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch operation.
Method
2.Select the clutch to operate.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the vertical conveying clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DU1 Operate the DU clutch 1
DU2 Operate the DU clutch 2
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Regist Operate the registration clutch
MPT Feed Operate the MP clutch
Cassette2 Operates the feed clutch 2
Cassette1 Operates the feed clutch 1
Motor Operate the motor
* :The clutch operation is available while the motor is operated.
4.To stop the clutch operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U033 Solenoid operation check

(Message: Check Solenoid Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid operation.
Method
2.Select the solenoid to operate.
* :Select the motor first before checking the motor rotation.
* :Operation is not possible if the front cover is open.
* :Operation can' be done even when "Printer preparation in progress" is displayed
*:
Items Contents
Branch Eject Up Operate the upper exit solenoid
Branch Eject Down Operate the lower exit solenoid
ID Sensor Operate the cleaning solenoid
Container Cover(K) *1 Operate the toner container solenoid(K)
Motor Operate the motor
* :The solenoid operation is available while the motor is operated.
4.To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-38
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U034 Paper timing data adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Timing Data)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy image
Execute if regular errors occur on the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Method
2.Select items to be adjusted.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Adjust the leading edge timing
LSU Out Left Adjust the center line
LSU Out Top B/W Adjust the leading edge timing (B/W)
LSU Out Top 3/4 Adjust the leading edge timing (3/4 speed)
Mode*1 Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset*1 Reset the conveying timing inspection data
On Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor ON)
Off Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor retrieve time)
*1: This is only factory inspection use.
Adjustment: LSU Out Top

2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

Setting varia-
value tion
MPT(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (L)
MPT Half(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray Half (L)
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette feed (L)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) sette feed Half (L)
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copy (L)
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) duplex copy Half (L)
6-39
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Setting varia-
value tion
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (S)
MPT Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray Half (S)
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette feed (S)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) sette feed Half (S)
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copy (S)
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) duplex copy Half (S)
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves in the direction of the trailing edge,
and when the setting value is decreased, the image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-4
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034 > U066(P.6-62) > U071(P.6-66)
6-40
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: LSU Out Top B/W


Setting varia-
value tion
tray (L) at black & white (monochrome)
copy
sette feed (L) at black & white (mono-
chrome) copy
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing at duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
black & white (monochrome) copy (L)
tray (S) at black & white (monochrome)
copy
sette feed (S) at black & white (mono-
chrome) copy
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing at duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
black & white (monochrome) copy (S)
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-5
Note
U034 > U066(P.6-62) > U071(P.6-66)
6-41
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: LSU Out Top 3/4


Setting varia-
value tion
tray (L) at 3/4 speed
sette feed (L) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (L) at 3/4 speed
tray (S) at 3/4 speed
sette feed (S) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (S) at 3/4 speed
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-6
Note
U034 > U066(P.6-62) > U071(P.6-66)
6-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: LSU Out Left


Setting varia-
value tion
MPT Adjust the center line when feeding from -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
MP tray
Cassette1 Adjust the center line when feeding from -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
cassette 1
cassette 2
cassette 3 (Optional unit)
Duplex Adjusting the center line when making -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex (back page) copy
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the
setting value is decreased.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-7
Note
U034 < U067(P.6-63) < U072(P.6-68)
6-43
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Execution: Mode
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
* :Operation is started and data is reset
Items Contents
Execute Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Method: On Timing/Off Timing

1.Select items to check
* :Display the measured value.
Items Contents
Value(Plain) Check the measured value(Plain)
Value(Thick) Check the measured value(Thick)
Completion
6-44
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U035 Folio size setting

(Message: Adjust Folio Size)
Contents
Changes the printable area when copying with Folio paper.
Purpose
Preventing the image from missing in the trailing edge or left/right edges by setting the actual
size of Folio paper used
Method

Setting varia-
value tion
Length Set the Folio paper length. 330 to 356 330 1(mm)
(mm)
Width Set the Folio paper width. 200 to 220 210 1(mm)
(mm)
Completion
6-45
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U037 Fan motor operation check

(Message: Check Fan Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
2.Select the fan motor to operate.
Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Fuser Edge Operate the fuser edge fan motor
IH PWB Operate the IH PWB fan motor
DLP4 Operate the developer fan motor K
Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan motor, the right container fan motor
Exit Paper IH Coil Operate the exit/IH fan motor
Toner Operates the toner suction fan motor
LVU Operate the power source fan motor
Belt Cooling Operate the developer fan motor K
Completion
6-46
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded
in a Z-shape.
* :Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method
Items Contents
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at B/W
B/W
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
3/4
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount

3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Items Contents Setting range Data

varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L)
MPT Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L) at half speed
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L) cassette feed (L) at half speed
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
duplex (L)
Duplex Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L) duplex (L) at half speed
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S)
MPT Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S) at half speed
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
6-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK

varia-
tion
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S) cassette feed (S) at half speed
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
duplex (S)
Duplex Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S) duplex (S) at half speed
Initial setting value
Items 60ppm 50ppm 40ppm

MPT(L) -4 -4 -4
MPT Half(L) -4 -3 -3
Cassette(L) -4 -4 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4
Half(L)
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -3
Duplex -3 -2 -2
Half(L)
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4
MPT Half(S) -4 -3 -3
Cassette(S) -4 -4 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4
Half(S)
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -3
Duplex -3 -2 -2
Half(S)
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-8
6-48
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount B/W


varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W MP tray feed (L)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W MP tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W duplex feed (S)

MPT(L) -4 -6 -6
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -4
MPT(S) -4 -6 -6
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -4
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-9
6-49
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount 3/4


varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (S)

MPT(L) -4 -4 -4
Duplex(L) -3 -3 -3
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4
Duplex(S) -3 -3 -3
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-10
6-50
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Completion
6-51
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U053 Adjusting the motor speed

(Message: Adjust Motor Speed)
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
* :The adjustment value "+" makes the motor speed "Slow" and "-" makes the motor speed
"Fast".
Method
Items Contents
Motor1 Adjust the drum motor K
Motor2 Adjust the developer K/Transfer belt motor
Motor3 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the feed
motor, the PF feed motor (Option)
Motor4 Adjust the drum motor K
Motor1 Half Set the drum motor K at the half speed mode
Motor2 Half Set the developer K/the transfer belt motor at the half speed
Motor3 Half Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the feed
motor, PF feed motor (Option) at the half speed
Motor1 3/4 Set the drum motor K at 3/4 speed
Motor2 3/4 Set the developer motor K/transfer belt motor at 3/4 speed
Motor3 3/4 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the feed
motor, PF feed motor (Option) at the 3/4 speed
duction.
Setting: Motor1

varia-
tion
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor K -5000 to 5000 -

Drum(K) 0 8 11
6-52
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Motor2

varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjust the developer K/Transfer belt -5000 to 5000 -
motor

Trans Belt 0 0 0
Setting: Motor3

varia-
tion
SB Adjust the exit motor -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the feed motor -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the PF feed motor (Option) -5000 to 5000 -

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -105 -124 -157
Bridge1 -45 -53 -67
Feed 65 58 73
Option 0 0 0
6-53
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Motor4

varia-
tion
Drum Adjust the drum motor K -5000 to 5000 -
Mono(K)

Drum 22 25 32
Mono(K)
Setting: Motor1 Half


Setting varia-
value tion
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor K at the half speed -5000 to 5000 0 -

Drum(K) 16 16 22
Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.


Setting varia-
value tion
Trans Belt Adjust the developer K/the transfer belt -5000 to 5000 0 -
motor at the half speed

Trans Belt 0 0 0

6-54
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

varia-
tion
SB Adjust the exit motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor at half -5000 to 5000 -
speed
Feed Adjust the feed motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the PF feed motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -307 -328 -426
Bridge1 -96 -96 -134
Feed 70 74 97
Setting: Motor1 3/4


Setting varia-
value tion
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor K at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 0 -

Drum(K) 11 11 16
Setting: Motor2 3/4


varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjust the developer motor K/transfer belt -5000 to 5000 -
motor at 3/4 speed

Trans Belt 0 0 0
6-55
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Motor3 3/4


varia-
tion
SB Adjust the exit motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjusts the fuser motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -
speed
Feed Adjust the feed motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the motors for the optional device -5000 to 5000 -
at 3/4 speed

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -213 -213 -307
Bridge1 -67 -67 -96
Feed 49 49 70
Completion
6-56
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U059 Fan mode setting

(Message: Set Fan Mode)
Contents
In the cooling mode, perform condition setting to turn all the fans.
Purpose
Change the temperature setting which shift to the cooling mode that all fans are rotated at full
speed when the main unit inside temperature becomes high during continuous printing.
Setting
Items Contents
Cooling Mode Set the Cooling Cycle
Setting: Cooling Cycle


Setting varia-
value tion
Cooling Set the Cooling Cycle -3 to 3 0 -
Mode
duction.
Completion
6-57
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U061 Lamp lighting check

(Message: Check Lamp ON)
Contents
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
Light the exposure lamp to confirm.
Method
2.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the DP CIS lamp on (when the simultaneous duplex scanning doc-
ument processor is installed)
3.Press the [Start] key. Lamps are lit.

* :Press the [Stop] key to turn the lamp off.
Completion
6-58
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U063 Shading position adjustment

(Message: Adjust Shading Position)
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning
the shading plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or
scratch of the shading plate.
Setting

Setting varia-
value tion
Position Changes the scanner shading position 0 to 18 0 0.16mm
* :If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and
toward the right side if the value is reduced.
Note
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
6-59
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

(Message: Adjust Scanner Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction if scanner magnification is not
correct.
Note
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depend-
ing on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-60)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-60)
Method

Setting varia-
value tion
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scan- -75 to 75 0 0.02%
ning direction
Sub Scan Adjust scanner magnification in the sub- -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction
duction.
Adjustment: Main Scan

* :When the setting value is increased, the image widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-11
6-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: Sub Scan

* :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-12
Completion
6-61
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

(Message: Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy image
Adjustment

Setting variation
value
Front Adjust the scanner leading edge timing. -30 to 30 0 0.16
(mm)
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-13
Note
U034(P.6-39) > U065(P.6-60) > U066
Completion
6-62
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

(Message: Adjust Table Center)
Contents
Adjust the center line in the main scanning direction for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

Setting variation
value
Front Adjust the scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
duction.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-14
Note
U034(P.6-39) > U065(P.6-60) > U067
Completion
6-63
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U068 DP scanning position adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Scan Position)
Contents
Adjust the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used
* :Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is
changed.
Method

Setting variation
value
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -38 to 38 0 0.16 mm
originals.
Black Line Adjust the scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1.Select [DP Read].
edge.
Adjustment: Black Line

1.Select [Black Line].
4.Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu]
key.
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6.Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
6-64
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U070 DP magnification adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range Set- varia-
ting tion
value
Sub Scan (F) Adjust the back page magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction at duplex scan
Sub Scan (B) Adjust the back page magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction at duplex scan
Main Adjust the back page magnification in the main 0 to 75 0 0.02%
Scan(CIS) scanning direction at duplex scan (DPCIS)
Sub Scan Adjust the back page magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
(CIS) scanning direction at duplex scan (DPCIS)
duction.
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-15
Completion
6-65
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

(Message: Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjust the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the DP is used
Method
DP-7100

Setting variation
value
Front Head Front page leading edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Front Tail Front page trailing edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Head Back page leading edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Tail Back page trailing edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
DP-7110

Setting variation
value
CIS Head Adjust the leading edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
CIS Tail Adjust the trailing edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
DP-7120

Setting variation
value
6-66
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
duction.
Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head/CIS

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-16
Note
Check the back page after adjusting the front page. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-39) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail/CIS Tail

value is decreased.
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 6-17
Completion
6-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U072 Adjusting the DP original center

(Message: Adjust DP Original Center)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
when scanning the original through DP (Document Processor)
Adjustment

Setting variation
value
Front Adjust DP front page center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
Back Adjust DP back page center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
CIS Adjust the DPCIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085
mm
duction.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-18
Note
Check the back page after adjusting the front page. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-39) > U065(P.6-60) > U067(P.6-63) > U072
Completion
6-68
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U073 Scanner motor operation check

(Message: Check Scanner Motor Operation)
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit
glass.
Method
Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading scan position operation for the document processor
3.Select [Execute].
* :Start scanning with the condition specified.
5.To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Setting: Scanner Motor


Setting varia-
value tion
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 (%) 100 1%
Size Original size 100 to 10200 10200 100
Lamp Turning the exposure lamp on/off 0: OFF 1: ON -
1: ON
Paper size corresponding to each set value
Setting Destination Setting Destination Setting Destination

value value value
4300 B5 6100 B5R 8600 B4
5000 A4 6600 8 1/2"×11" 9000 11"×15"
5000 A5R 7100 A4R 10000 A3
5100 11"×8 1/2" 7800 Folio 10200 11"×17"
5100 5 1/2"×8 1/2" 8400 8 1/2"×14"
Completion
6-69
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteristics

(Message: Adjust DP Input)
Contents
Set the DP image scanning density
Purpose
Changes the setting if the background image appears when scanning bluish original or originals
with slightly thick background. Adjust the image difference between the table scanning and DP
scanning. DP CIS scanning is not corrected.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial

Setting
value
Coefficient DP image scanning density correction 0: No correction 0
1: Low-level
correction
2: Middle-level
DP Color Permitting the color registration correction opera- 1: On 1
Regist tion 2: Off
Completion
6-70
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U087 Setting the DP scanning position change operation

(Message: Set DP Scanning Position Operation)
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the original trailing edge scanned data with the scanned
data after the original feed, change the original scan position next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measures for the black lines appearing with dust on the original scanning
position when using the document processor.
Setting

Setting
value
Front Set the front page scanning data threshold 0 to 128 48
Back Set the threshold of the back page scan data at 0 to 128 48
duplex scan
Black Line Initialize the original scanning position 0 to 255 48
* :If the set value is lowered, dark density image are considered dust as it makes dust detec-
tion more likely.
If the set value is increased, it will be difficult to detect dust.
Method: Black Line

1.Select [Clear].
* :Original scan position returns to the initial line.
Completion
6-71
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U089 MIP-PG pattern output

(Message: Output MIP-PG Pattern)
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scan-
ner section using the MIP-PG pattern output without image scanning process.
* :Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and
page count displayed on the service status page.
Method
2.Select the MIP-PG pattern to output
Items Contents
Gray scale Gray scale pattern PG
Mono1 PG for Gray confirmation(Density:0)
Mono4 PG for Gray confirmation(Density:70)
256Gradation PG for the grayscale level check (256 grayscale PG1)
6-72
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty appli-
cation
For the developer status and engine ID check, for the drum quality
check
(Gray scale, Mono1, Mono4)

4.Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.
Completion
6-73
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U091 White lines correction setting

(Message: Set White Line Correction)
Contents
Set the error detection threshold for white lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the DP CIS, DP main PWB or DP CIS roller.
Setting

Setting varia-
value tion
Coefficient(R) Display the red pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - –
Coefficient(G) Display the green pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - –
Coefficient(B) Display the Blue pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - –
Threshold(R) Set the red error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(G) Set the green error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(B) Set the blue error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold Set the abnormal pixel threshold set- 0 to 8191 75 -
(Abnormal) ting
Mode Set the white lines correction mode 0: No correction 0 -
1: Correction
2: Test mode
Execute Execute retaining the white reference - – –
data
* :Normally do not change the threshold from the initial value of 112.
Increase the value if white lines appear while the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Reduce the set value if thin lines disappear depending on the original to use.
Set in the range of 50 to 200. (In the case of out of range, it may affect the image output)
6-74
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Execute
1.Select [Execute].
* :Start retaining the white reference data.
4.Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
* :Match the original and paper size.
* :Outputs 2-sheet test pattern.
1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width
2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about 60mm width)
6.Setting is correctly completed if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.
If vertical black streaks in blank sheet (gray band) or vertical white streaks in black band
appear in the same position, clean the DP CIS roller or DP CIS glass section and then perform
the white strip correction again.
White line correction is completed if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical white
lines. However, check the engine since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.
* :Mode is set to [1].
How to check the test copy
Blank paper Black band Factor Corrective action

No lines No lines - Completion
Black line White lines DP CIS roller/ Execute the U091 CIS roller/glass contamination
glass contami-
nation
Black line No lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
No lines White lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
Completion
6-75
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U099 Original size detection setting

(Message: Set Original Size Detection)
Contents
Check the operation of the original size detection and set detection threshold
Purpose
Change the detection threshold if the original size is frequently misdetected with entirely dark
originals (high density) or dark originals at edges only.
Setting
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Data1 Display original width
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display original width (when document processor is installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
1.Place an original on the table and close the platen cover or the document processor.
2.The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. Whether or not the
original length is present is judged with the document size sensor (Detected twice when the
document processor is installed)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected the original width (mm)
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)
6-76
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
Setting: B/W Level1


Setting varia-
value tion
Original1 Set the threshold for judging as an origi- 0 to 255 50 1
nal
nal
nal
* :Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can
be detected but the original mat may be detected as an original.
* :If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of
placing the original.
Original mat Original

Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"
Figure 6-19
Completion
6-77
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U100 Main high voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Main High Voltage Output)
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the MC roller.
Purpose
Change the setting value and adjust the image when an image failure (background image)
occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Adj AC Bias Adjust main charge AC bias
Set AC Auto Adj Set AC bias automatic adjustment
Set DC Bias Before Display the main charge DC bias correction value. (Adjustment value
before correction)
Set DC Bias After Display the main charge DC bias correction value. (Adjustment value
after correction)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq Set the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current Display the electric current flows
Set AC Gain Set the AC Gain
Setting: Adj AC Bias

* :When the setting value is increased, the image density becomes lighter, and the image den-
sity becomes darker when the setting value is decreased.
Setting value varies depending on the environment.

Setting
value
AC Bias(K) Black main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040
6-78
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Set AC Auto Adj

Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
* :Initial setting value: On

Setting: Set DC Bias Before

1.Display the current setting.
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
Setting: Set DC Bias After

Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
Setting: Adj DC Bias

* :When the setting value is increased, the image density becomes lighter, and the image den-
sity becomes darker when the setting value is decreased.

Setting
value
DC2 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Full -200 to 200 0
speed)
Setting: Set Charger Freq

* :When the setting value is increased, the image density becomes darker, and the image den-
sity become lighter when the setting value is decreased.

Setting
value
Generally Setting the frequency of the main charger (Normal 2000 to 3300 2400
speed)
3/4 Setting the frequency of the main charger (3/4 2000 to 3300 2400
speed)
6-79
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting
value
Half Setting the frequency of the main charger (Half 2000 to 3300 2400
speed)
Setting: Chk Current

Items Contents
K Black inflow current
* :Please do not perform "Chk Current" more than 10 seconds.

* :As discharge products adhere after execution, please execute drum refresh.
Setting: Set AC Gain

Items Contents
Mode Multiplication Mode setting
Value Multiplication value setting
Setting: Value
Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting (default)
Mode Charge Multiplication Mode
Setting: Mode

Setting
value
Multiple Charge Multiplication value
0.8 to 1.3 1.0
Value
* :Initial setting value: Auto

Completion
6-80
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Voltage Output)
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
Items Contents
Voltage Set the primary transfer feedback voltage
Altitude Adjustment Altitude Adjustment setting
Current Set the primary transfer feedback current
Final Current Set the primary transfer feedback final current
Prohibit Reflection Set the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Force Execute Set the forcing primary transfer feedback
Surround Correct Setting the environmental correction ON/OFF
Setting: Voltage
Items Contents
Target Set the primary transfer feedback voltage target
Step Set the primary transfer feedback voltage step
Value Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (1st side)
Value 2nd Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
Setting: Target

Setting varia-
value tion
K Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 70 -
target value
6-81
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Step

Setting varia-
value tion
Step Primary transfer feedback voltage step 0 to 290 30 -
Setting: Value

varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Constant speed)
B/W Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage value
(Monochrome printing at Constant speed)
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage value
(Monochrome printing at 3/4 speed)
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage value
(Monochrome printing at half speed)

Normal(K) 199 194 180
B/W 210 190 130
3/4(K) 180 180 161
B/W 3/4 180 180 160
Half(K) 161 157 142
B/W Half 160 150 140
6-82
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Value 2nd


varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Constant speed)
B/W Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Half speed)
B/W Half Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value

Normal(K) 184 179 166
B/W 200 180 170
3/4(K) 166 166 146
B/W 3/4 170 170 150
Half(K) 146 142 128
B/W Half 150 150 135
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
1st Side Altitude Adjustment setting (1st side)
2nd Side Altitude Adjustment setting (2nd side)
Setting: 1st Side

6-83
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting varia-
value tion
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -2 -
Setting: 2nd Side


Setting varia-
value tion
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -2 -
Setting: Current
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer feedback current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
6-84
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Target
Items Contents Setting Data

range varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
B/W Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target

Normal(K) 242 223 174
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 174 174 121
B/W 3/4 156 156 109
Half(K) 121 113 87
B/W Half 260 200 156
Setting: Target 2nd


range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
B/W Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(3/4 speed)
6-85
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

range varia-
tion
B/W 3/4 Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -

Normal(K) 165 155 119
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 133 133 93
B/W 3/4 133 133 93
Half(K) 93 87 67
B/W Half 93 87 67
Setting: Final Current

Items Contents
Target Primary transfer final current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target

range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)
6-86
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

range varia-
tion

Normal(K) 242 223 174
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 174 174 121
B/W 3/4 156 156 109
Half(K) 121 113 87
B/W Half 260 200 156
Setting: Target 2nd


range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)

Normal(K) 165 155 119
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 133 133 93
B/W 3/4 133 133 93
Half(K) 93 87 67
B/W Half 180 155 119
6-87
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Prohibit Reflection

Items Contents
On Primary transfer feedback result reflection prohibition setting: On
Off Primary transfer feedback result reflection prohibition setting: Off
* :Initial setting value: Off

Setting: Force Execute

1.Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
* :The operation is started.
Items Contents
Execute Forced primary transfer feedback execution
Setting: Surround Correct

Items Contents
On Primary transfer feedback environmental correction prohibition setting:
On
Off Primary transfer feedback environmental correction prohibition setting:
Off
* :Initial setting value:

Completion
6-88
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 2nd Transfer Roller Output)
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage by each paper type.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal1
Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2 / 3
Heavy1 Transfer control value for Normal 1 / 3
Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2 / 3
Heavy 4/5 Transfer control value for Heavy 4 / 5
OHP Transfer control value for Transparency
Bias Bias setting
Setting: Light / Normal1 / Normal2/3

Items Contents
1st Front page transfer control value at full speed
2nd Back page transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) Surface transfer control value on gloss mode at 3/4 speed (Front page)
2nd 3/4(Gloss) Surface transfer control value on gloss mode at 3/4 speed (Back page)
1st B/W Front page transfer control value on B/W at full speed
2nd B/W Back page transfer control value on B/W at full speed
Setting: 1st / 2nd / 1st 3/4(Gloss) / 2nd 3/4(Gloss) / 1st B/W / 2nd B/W

range varia-
tion
Width=105 Setting paper width = 2 to 200 1[uA]
105
210
297
6-89
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[1st]

Width=105 96 120 91
Width=210 82 93 69
Width=297 42 65 50
[2nd]

Width=105 107 158 126
Width=210 105 104 81
Width=297 48 61 48
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]

Width=105 71 71 39
Width=210 53 53 32
Width=297 50 50 30
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]

Width=105 118 118 68
Width=210 65 65 38
Width=297 34 34 19
[1st B/W]

Width=105 131 88 69
Width=210 102 76 59
Width=297 71 39 32
[2nd B/W]

Width=105 166 140 111
Width=210 114 103 92
Width=297 71 93 87
6-90
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Heavy1
Items Contents
1st 3/4 Front page transfer control value at full speed
2nd 3/4 Transfer control value at full speed (Back page)
Setting: 1st 3/4 / 2nd 3/4


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st 3/4]

Width=105 63 63 37
Width=210 51 51 31
Width=297 51 51 31
[2nd 3/4]

Width=105 85 85 49
Width=210 78 78 45
Width=297 44 44 26
6-91
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Heavy2/3
Items Contents
1st Half Front page transfer control value at the half speed
2nd Half Back page transfer control value at the half speed
Setting: 1st Half / 2nd Half


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st Half]

Width=105 56 52 33
Width=210 46 42 29
Width=297 45 42 27
[2nd Half]

Width=105 77 71 44
Width=210 71 65 40
Width=297 40 37 23
6-92
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Heavy4/5
Items Contents
1st Half Front page transfer control value at the half speed
2nd Half Back page transfer control value at the half speed
Setting: 1st Half / 2nd Half


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st Half]

Width=105 40 37 28
Width=210 27 25 19
Width=297 24 23 17
[2nd Half]

Width=105 58 53 42
Width=210 41 39 30
Width=297 24 24 17
6-93
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: OHP

range varia-
tion
105
210
297

Width=105 49 46 35
Width=210 41 38 30
Width=297 40 37 29
Setting: Bias

varia-
tion
Reverse Reverse bias setting (Full speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse Half Reverse bias setting (Half speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse 3/4 Reverse bias setting (3/4 speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse B/W Reverse bias setting (B/W) 0 to 200 -
Cleaning Cleaning (Full speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning Half Cleaning (Half speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning 3/4 Cleaning (3/4 speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]

Reverse 0 0 0
Reverse Half 0 0 0
Reverse 3/4 0 0 0
Reverse B/W 0 0 0
Cleaning 67 62 48
Cleaning Half 50 46 36
Cleaning 3/4 56 52 40
6-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Completion
6-95
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Unit Cleaning Output)
Contents
Belt(A)/(B):Set the transfer belt unit cleaning control voltage
1st sheet CLN B/W: Shift printing surface from the position of the cleaning section
Purpose
Belt(A): Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
1st sheet CLN B/W:
Set when cleaning failure of the transfer belt occurs only on the first sheet after monochrome
continuous printing.
First copy time will be slightly longer after On.
Method
Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting
Belt(B) Belt B setting
1st sheet CLN B/W Set the cleaning operation after monochrome printing
Setting: Belt(A)

varia-
tion
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]

Full 15 15 15
Half 10 10 10
3/4 10 10 10
B/W 15 15 15
6-96
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Belt(B)

varia-
tion
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]

Full 15 15 15
Half 10 10 10
3/4 10 10 10
B/W 15 14 13
Setting: 1st sheet CLN B/W

Items Contents
On Turn on the cleaning operation setting after monochrome printing
Off Turn off the cleaning operation setting after monochrome printing

Completion
6-97
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Separation Shift Bias)
Contents
Separation shift bias output adjustment and ON/OFF timing
Purpose
Change setting if paper separation failure occurs
Method
Items Contents
Output Separation Shift bias output adjustment
Output 3/4 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at 3/4 speed
Timing ON/OFF timing adjustment by paper position
Subtraction Value Subtracted value for the separation bias (correction by fuser count)
Setting: Output

varia-
tion
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the front page of thin
paper at full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the back page of thin
paper at full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the front page of normal
paper at full speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the back page of normal
paper at full speed
Add Normal Lead Additive setting for the lead- -60 to 60 1 uA
ing edge of normal paper
Heavy/OHP Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for Heavy and Transparency
6-98
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Light 1st 20 17 14
Light 2nd 20 17 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5
Add Normal 1 2 2
Lead
Heavy/OHP 0 0 0
Setting: Output 3/4 / Output B/W


varia-
tion
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting for the front page 0 to 60 1 uA
of thin paper at full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting for the back page 0 to 60 1 uA
of thin paper at full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting for the front page 0 to 60 1 uA
of normal paper at full speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting for the back page 0 to 60 1 uA
of normal paper at full speed

Output 3/4

Light 1st 14 14 14
Light 2nd 14 14 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5
Output B/W

Light 1st 20 17 14
Light 2nd 20 17 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 0 0 0
6-99
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Timing

Setting value varia-
tion
On Timing Lead Separation shift bias ON tim- -200 to 200 -20 0.1mm
ing at the leading edge
On Timing Center Separation shift bias ON tim- -200 to 200 30 0.1mm
ing at the center of page
Off Timing Separation shift bias OFF -200 to 200 10 0.1mm
timing

Setting: Subtraction Value
1.Select [Value].

tion
Value Subtracted value for the sep- -60 to 60 -35 1 uA
aration bias
Completion
6-100
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U110 Drum counter

(Message: Drum Unit Counter)
Contents
Execute to display the drum counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method
* :The drum counter value is displayed.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum counter value
Completion
U117 Drum unit number

(Message: Drum Unit Number)
Contents
Display the drum number
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Procedure
* :Display the drum number.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum number
Completion
6-101
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U118 Drum unit history

(Message: Drum Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
* :Select items to refer.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum history
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Drum counter history
Completion
6-102
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U119 Drum unit initial setting

(Message: Set Up Drum Unit) *: High-end model
only
Contents
Set the initial LSU luminosity based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute after replacement of the drum unit or laser scanner unit
After completion, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Send the sensitivity data of the drum (stored in EEPROM) to the engine
PWB and set the LSU light amount correction.

* :Start the drum setup operation.
and on
Completion
U120 Drum drive distance counter

(Message: Drum Driving Distance Counter)
Contents
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to display the drum control counter.
Method
* :Display the counter value.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum drive distance counter
Completion
6-103
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U122 Primary transfer unit number

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit Number)
Contents
Display the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Procedure
* :Display the primary transfer unit number
Completion
U123 Primary transfer unit history

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Perform to check the main unit serial number and the primary transfer unit counter value.
Method
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial n]umber history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Primary transfer unit counter history
Completion
6-104
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Message: Clear Transfer Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counter used for transfer high voltage output correction, etc.
Purpose
Execute when verifying the primary/secondary transfer unit counter value after replacing them.
Also, execute to clear the secondary transfer counter value after replacing it.
Procedure
* : The transfer counter value is displayed
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Display the primary transfer counter value
2nd Trans(Cnt) Display the secondary transfer counter value
Mid Trans(Time) Display the primary transfer unit drive time counter value
2nd Trans(Time) Display the secondary transfer unit drive time counter value
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the secondary transfer counter value.
* :2nd Trans (Cnt)/2nd Trans (Time) only
Completion
6-105
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U128 Transfer timing adjustment

(Message: Adjust Transfer Timing)
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up in the drum.
Setting

range varia-
tion
On Timing 1st Front page transfer On timing -200 to 200 0.1 ms
adjustment value
On Timing 2nd Back page transfer On timing -200 to 200 0.1 ms
adjustment value
Off Timing Transfer Off timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 mm
value

On Timing 1st 72 72 71
On Timing 2nd 72 72 71
Off Timing 10 13 16
ON timing conversion table

Distance per 0.3 0.253 0.2
1ms [mm]
Completion
6-106
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Toner Sensor Control Voltage)
Contents
Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrieved due to the EEPROM on the developer unit failure,etc.,
change to manual adjustment and fix the control value temporary.
Method
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Mode Switch manual adjustment/automatic adjustment
Setting: Manual
Items Contents Setting Initial set-

range ting value
Control(K) Toner sensor(K) control voltage 4400 to 4650 4500
Method: Auto
1.The current setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Default(K) Toner sensor(K) default control voltage
Execution: Mode
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
* :Initial setting value: Auto

Completion
6-107
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U132 Forcible toner supply operation

(Message: Supply Toner Forcefully)
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is detected frequently.
Procedure
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Install toner

* :Execute toner supply forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply
level.
Items Contents
Supply(K) Black toner supply level
Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value
Completion
6-108
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U135 Checking the toner motor operation

(Message: Check Toner Motor Operation)
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
Note
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner inside
and it may lock up.
Method
2.Select the item to operate.
* :Start the operation
Items Contents
Toner Drive the toner motor
Hopper Drive the toner container motor
Completion
6-109
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U136 Toner level detection setting

(Message: Set Toner Near End Detection)
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval
between toner near end and toner empty is too short.
Setting
* :Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.

tion
K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty
becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
Completion
6-110
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U139 Temperature, humidity

(Message: Temperature/Humidity)
Contents
Display the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Procedure
Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside and outside temperature (°C) and machine outside
humidity (%)
LSU Machine inside temperature around LSU (°C)
Developing Machine inside temperature around Developer (°C)
Method: Ext/Int
1.Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature (°C)
Method: LSU
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanning Unit (°C)
Method: Developing
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (°C)
Completion
6-111
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Developing Bias)
Contents
Display/change the developer bias setting values or set high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias setting values.
Method
Items Contents
Sleeve DC Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.
Sleeve AC Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.
Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.
Mag AC Set the developer magnet roller AC bias.
Sleeve Freq Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.
Sleeve Duty Set the developer sleeve roller duty.
Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.
AC Calib Execute and set AC Calibration
Image Preference Set the toner density
Altitude Adjustment Set the altitude adjustment mode
Freq Mode Set the developer frequency mode
Setting: Sleeve DC / Sleeve AC

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting

value
K *1 Black developer sleeve DC/AC bias setting 0 to 100/ 50/1400
1000 to 1900
High *2 Developer sleeve DC/AC bias setting (High 0 to 100/ 50/1400
speed) 1000 to 1900
*1: 40/50ppm model, *2: 60 ppm model only
6-112
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Mag DC

value
K *1 Black developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 350
High *2 Developer magnet roller DC bias setting (High 150 to 500 350
speed)
Setting: Mag DC
Items Contents Setting range Initial set-

ting value
K *1 Black developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200
High *2 Developer magnet roller AC bias setting (High 1500 to 2800 2500
speed)
Setting: Sleeve Freq


value
K *1 Developer K sleeve roller frequency setting 3500 to 4900 4000/4189
(Full speed)
High *2 Developer K sleeve roller frequency setting 3500 to 4900 4000
(High speed)
Setting: Sleeve Duty


value
K *1 Developer K sleeve roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 40/43
speed)
High *2 Developer K sleeve roller duty setting (High 1 to 99 43
speed)
6-113
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Mag Duty


value
K *1 Developer K magnet roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 68
speed)
High *2 Developer magnet roller duty setting (High 1 to 99 68
speed)
Setting: AC Calib
Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
1.Setup at high altitude
2.When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
3.When the developer leakage occurs
4. When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibra-
tion
Magnification Setting the AC calibration target bias value
Execution timing
1. When the developer leak occurs after executing the AC calibration
Setting: Calibration
2.Change the developer ON for executing AC calibration.

value
K Switch On/Off of Black developer 0: Off / 1: On
Execute Executing Calibration
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key. AC calibration is started.
and on
* :The error code is displayed when the error occurs
6-114
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Magnification

value
K Set when developer K leak occurs -10 to 15 11/11/7
* :: 60/50/40 ppm model

Setting: Image Preference


value
Copy Set the toner density on copy -1 to 1 0
* :If the setting value is reduced, the toner consumption decreases.
and on
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
Normal Set 1000m or less
1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m
2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m
3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m
* :Initial setting value: Normal

Setting: Freq Mode

Items Contents
Mode0 Set to Mode0
Mode1 Set to Mode1
* :Initial setting value: Mode1

Completion
6-115
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U147 Setting the toner applying mode

(Message: Set Toner Apply Mode)
Contents
Execute mode setting to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode).
And also execute setting of operation (vibration motor control) of returning the toner accumulated
on the developing blade into the developing unit
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute when changing the frequency
of vibration motor control
* :Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Procedure
Items Contents
Timing Set the toner apply timing
Mode Set the toner applying mode.
Upper limit Set the upper limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing

value
Job End Set the toner apply count (job end) 1 to 255 12
Setting: Mode
Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Off Not to execute the toner applying operation

Setting: Upper limit

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting Data

value varia-
tion
Value Set the upper limit of the toner 0 to 2.0 20 0.1%
applying amount for each operation
mode.
6-116
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
Completion
U148 Drum refresh mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Refresh Mode)
Contents
Set the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting

value
Mode Set Auto drum refresh mode 0: Off
1: Short 2
2: Standard
3: Long
Completion
6-117
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U155 Toner sensor output value

(Message: Toner Sensor Output Value)
Contents
Display the toner sensor output
Purpose
Execute to check output value when an image failure occurs.
Method
2.Select items to refer
* :Switch to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner sensor value
Toner Display the toner sensor value
Calibration Executing the calibration for the waste toner
Method: Waste Toner

1.Display the waste toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Full Display the waste toner sensor value 1 (WTS1)
Method: Toner
1.Display the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor(K) Display the toner sensor output
Method: Calibration
1.Display each setting value.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner weight sensor output value
None Display the adjustment value (no bottle)
Empty Display the adjustment value (empty bottle)
Level Display the accumulated waste toner amount
Execute Executing the calibration
Completion
6-118
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U156 Toner control level adjustment

(Message: Adjust Toner Control Level)
Contents
Display and adjust the toner empty level.
Purpose
Display and adjust the toner empty level.
Setting
2.Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Display the toner empty level
3.Display the toner supply level.
Items Contents
K Display the Black toner empty level
Completion
6-119
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U157 Developer drive time

(Message: Developing Unit Drive Time)
Contents
Display the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit.
Procedure
* :Display the developer unit drive time.
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion
U158 Developer counter

(Message: Developing Unit Counter)
Contents
Display the developer counter value
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method
* :Display the developer counter value
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer counter value.
Completion
6-120
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U159 Toner container function setting

(Message: Set Toner Container Function)
Contents
Perform the container cover lock setting, the lock release operation display setting and the waste
toner box usage setting of the toner container K.
Purpose
Set when changing the container cover lock setting or displaying the lock release operation And
also, use to change setting when the toner container K is used as the waste toner box
* :If you want to unlock the container cover all the time, set lock invalid.
Procedure
Items Contents
Container Lock Container Lock setting
Container Unlock Display Setting to display the toner lock release operation
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Setting: Container Lock

Items Contents
Off Lock disabled
Low Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Low
Empty Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Empty
* :Initial setting value: Empty

* :If it is set as Off, all the container cover open once the front cover is opened.
Setting: Container Unlock Display

Items Contents
On Display the lock release selection in the System Menu --> [Adjust-
ment/Maintenance] screen
Off The lock release selection does not display in the System Menu --
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] screen
100V model: Off
120V model: On
220-240V model: On
6-121
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Waste Box Setting


set- varia-
ting tion
value
Message Set for displaying message to replace the On/Off *1 -
toner container K together with the waste
toner box.
Waste Toner Setting the waste toner amount to judge 0 to 100 50 10%
Level*2 whether to display messages and to output
jobs
*1: 100V model : Off, 120V/220-240V model : On

* 2: Setting can be done only if the Message is set as ON
The date when the data was cleared and the date on which the latest print job was executed
(Replacement message is displayed when it is over setting amount)
After change setting, the power OFF/ON indication appears.
Completion
6-122
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U161 Fuser control temperature adjustment

(Message: Adjust Fuser Control Temperature)
Contents
Set the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl,
creases and fusing failure on thick paper.
Method
Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature at printing
Grain Mode Control for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Ready Time Adjust Setting the low-temperature aging operation temperature
Setting: Warm Up

value
Ready(Center) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200
(Center)
Ready(Edge) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200
(Edge)
Ready(Press) Control temperature at displaying Ready 0 to 200
(Press)
Drive(Center) Stable temperature during driving (Center) 100 to 200
Wait(Center) Stable temperature during halt (Center) 100 to 200
Low Control temperature at low power 0 to 200
Power(Center) consumption (Press)
Full Speed Full speed shift temperature (Center) 0 to 200
Shift(Center)
Pressure(Cen- Pressurizing beginning temperature (Press) 0 to 200
ter)
6-123
2SA/2RJ/2NK

100V

Ready(Center) 160 155 135
Ready(Edge) 125 120 105
Ready(Press) 30 30 30
Drive(Center) 165 160 140
Wait(Center) 170 165 145
Low 85 85 85
Power(Center)
Full Speed 50 50 50
Shift(Center)
Pressure(Cen- 110 105 100
ter)
120V

Ready(Edge) 135 130 105
Low 85 85 85
Power(Center)
Full Speed 50 50 50
Shift(Center)
ter)
220-240V

Ready(Edge) 135 130 105
Low Power 85 85 85
(Center)
Full SpeedShift 50 50 50
(Center)
ter)
6-124
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Print
Items Contents Setting range

Full Speed Temperature during print at full speed 100 to 200
Print(Center) (Center)
Duplex Shift temperature during duplex print at full 0 to 255
Shift(Center) speed (Center)

100V

Full Speed 170 165 155
Print(Center)
Duplex 0 0 0
Shift(Center)
120V/ 220-240V

Full Speed 180 175 165
Print(Center)
Duplex 0 0 0
Shift(Center)
Setting: Grain Mode

1.Select the mode to set.
Items Contents
Mode0 Current level (No special control is done)
Mode1 Improvement mode for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Mode2 More improvement
* :Initial setting value: Mode0

Setting: Ready Time Adjust

Items Contents Setting Initial setting value

range
100V 120V
220-240V
Value Operating temperature correction value (α) 0 to 5 2 2
of low temperature aging
6-125
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
*: If the set value α is decreased, the operating temperature of aging performed after stabilization in the
silent mode decreases.
*: If low operating temperature of low temperature aging is lowered, aging may not enter and fusing level
may be poor.
Aging operation Less than 13+α°C 13+α°C or more 18°C or more

temperature
Aging time 60 seconds 35 seconds 0 seconds
Completion
U164 Fuser unit history

(Message: Fuser Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and fuser unit history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter value.
Method
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 fuser unit counter history.
Items Contents
Cnt History 1 to 3 Fuser unit history
Completion
U165 Fuser unit number

(Message: Fuser Unit Number)
Contents
Display the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Procedure
* :Display the fuser unit number.
Completion
6-126
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U167 Clearing the fuser counter

(Message: Clear Fuser Counter)
Contents
Display the counter value of the fuser counter and, display and clear the correction fuser counter
value.
Purpose
Execute to confirm the counter value after fuser unit replacement. And also, perform when clear-
ing the correction fuser counter value after replacing the IH unit, the fuser discharge needle unit.
Procedure
* : Display the fuser unit counter value
Items Contents
Cnt Display the fuser unit counter value
Release(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (press)
Correction Display and change the correction fuser counter value
Clear Clear the correction fuser counter value
Setting: Correction
1.Select [Correction].
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
* :The correction fuser counter value is cleared
Completion
6-127
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U169 Setting the fuser power source

(Message: Set Fuser Power Source)
Contents
Display and set the control voltage specification of IH PWB
Purpose
Perform to check the control voltage specification.
* :When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting
Items Contents
Set Fuser Setting the fuser unit destination

value
Mode Setting the fuser unit destination 1: 100V model -
2: 200V model (Destination)
3: 120V model
4: 110V model
Completion
6-128
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U193 Fuser drive control setting

(Message: Set Fuser Drive Control)
Contents
Display and change bias setting value for fixing belt charging needle
Purpose
Check and change the bias applied current value to the surface of the fuser belt as a measure
against the fuser electrostatic offset due to the charging of the fuser belt.
* :Increasing the set value suppresses the adhesion of toner to the fuser belt, but if it raises too
much, it will also promote adhesion of organic matter to the charge needle, so that electro-
static offset tends to occur. Therefore, please be careful.
If you can not see the effect even if raising the set value, replace the fuser discharge needle
unit and clear the correction fuser counter value at U167.
Setting
Items Contents
Bias Display and change bias setting value for fixing belt charging needle

variation
B/W Monochrome (High speed) 0 to 200 0.1 uA
3/4 3/4 speed 0 to 200 0.1 uA
Half Half speed 0 to 200 0.1 uA

B/W 20 20 20
3/4 20 20 20
Half 20 20 20
Completion
6-129
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U197 Setting Fuser Control

(Message: Set Fuser Control)
Contents
Change the fuser control setting
Purpose
Change the fuser control setting when the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunctions caused by
the fuser control.
* :For specific areas (100 V specification)
Setting
Items Contents
Security Gate Set malfunction prevention of the security gate (anti-theft gate)
Execution: Security Gate

Items Contents
On Turn on malfunction prevention setting of the security gate (anti-theft
gate)
Off Turn off malfunction prevention setting of the security gate (anti-theft
gate)
Security gate
Direct Path
Swept Transmitter Signal
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
6-130
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U199 Fuser temperature

(Message: Fuser Temperature)
Contents
Display the fuser temperature
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Procedure
* :Display the fuser temperature
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge1 Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt edge section
Heat Roller Center Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt center section
Heat Roller Middle Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt middle section
Press Roller Center Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser pressure roller center section
Completion
6-131
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U200 All LEDs lighting

(Message: Turn ON All Panel LEDs)
Contents
All the LEDs on the operation panel will light up
Purpose
Execute to check the LED on the operation panel
Procedure
2.Select [Execute].
* :All the LEDs on the operation panel will blink
4.Press the [Stop] key to turn the LED off.
Completion
6-132
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U201 Initializing the touch panel

(Message: Initialize Touch Panel)
Contents
Adjust touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation
panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
* :When unable to press the software numeric keys due to the touch screen press position
error and unable to enter the maintenance mode, press and hold [Home], [Stop] and [Reset]
keys 3 seconds to start up U201.
Method Maintenance Mode

1.Press the [Start] key. Maintenance Mode Active U201
2.Select items to be executed. Initialize Touch Panel
3.Press the [Start] key. Initialize
* :Move to each execution screen
Check
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically correct the touch panel display position
Check Check the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
* :Do not touch the touch panel.
Please do not touch a operation panel.
6-133
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1.Press the center of indicated "+".

Press the center of the "+" sign.

*Press it using a tool with a fine tip.


If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.

6-134
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6.After setting is completed, [Initialize Com-

pleted] is displayed and the touch panel is
automatically corrected.
7.After correction is completed, the screen will
move to the [Check] screen
Initialize completed.
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1.Press the center of indicated three "+", and
then check the display position. Initialize
Single Tap Check.


If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.
2.Confirm that the deviation of X and Y of the

displayed coordinates is within 6
(13, -3)
* :If the set value is out of specified value, Initialize
select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key Multi Tap

to return to step 1 Check
Single Tap Check.

(-8, 15)
Select "Mult Tap Check" and press the Startkey to go to the next step.
If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.

(4, -1)
6-135
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Multi Tap Check

Step 1 : Not completed.
1. Select [Multi Tap Check] and press the Step 2 : Not completed.
[Start] key.
2.Press 2 points of [ ] at the same time (Step1) Initialize
* :Display the detected point with a red dot if

it is out of the default value.
Multi tap Check. Step1.
* :If the set value is out of specified value, Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key *Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
to return to step 1.
3.Press 2 points of [ ] at the same time (Step2)

Step 1 : Not completed.
* :[Completed] appears in Step1 and Step2 if Step 2 : Not completed.
it is within the default value.
Initialize
Multi tap Check. Step1.

Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
4.[Multi Tap Check completed.] appears when

Step 1 : Completed.
the setting is complete. Step 2 : Completed.
Multi Tap Check completed.

Press the Stopkey.
The screen for selecting a maintenace item No. is displayed.
Completion
6-136
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U203 Check DP operation

(Message: Check DP Operation)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Execute to check DP operation
Method
2.Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3.Select the scan speed to operate
Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scan:
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed

4.Select items to operate
Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, execute feed operation of single sided original through CCD
CCD RADP With paper, execute feed operation of back page through CCD
CIS With paper, execute feed operation of back page through CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) With paper, execute feed operation (continuous feed) of single sided
original through CCD
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, execute feed operation (continuous operation) of back
page through CCD
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, execute feed operation (continuous operation) of back
page through CIS

Setting: Mode
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key to reset.
6-137
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Result
1.Display the conveying timing data.
Completion
6-138
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U204 Key card/key counter setting

(Message: Set Key-Card/Key-Counter)
Contents
Set the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Procedure
Items Contents
Device Set the key card/key counter connection.
Message Set the message displayed when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1.Select the type of the optional counter to install.
Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Off Not installed

and on
Setting: Message
Items Contents
Key Device When multiple devices are used, change the display priority of the login
screen to the key device
Coin Vendor When multiple devices are used, change the display priority of the login
screen to the coin vendor
* :Initial setting value: Coin Vendor

and on
Completion
Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-139
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U206 Set the coin vendor

(Message: Set Coin Vendor Mode)
Contents
Set the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, set the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is installed.
(This is an optional device which is currently supported for Japan specification only)
Purpose
To run this maintenance mode if a coin vender is installed.
Method
Items Contents
On/Off Config Coin vendor is installed or not
No Coin Action Set the operation when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Setting extended charge unit price
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On Set the coin vendor is installed
Off Set the coin vendor is not installed

and on
Setting: No Coin Action

Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage during the print
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage during the print
Off Do nothing at coin shortage during the print

6-140
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Price
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: Normal / AD
Items Contents
B/W Black and White
2.Change the charger setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting value

A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10
Other Others 0 to 300 10
* :Settable in 10-yen increments

* :Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: Print
Items Contents
B/W Black and White

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting value

A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10
Other Others 0 to 300 10
* :Settable in 10-yen increments

* :Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: Apl
6-141
2SA/2RJ/2NK

value
Apl1 Expanded charging unit price 1 0 to 300 10
Setting: Boot Mode

Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
* :Initial setting value: Copy Service

and on
Setting: Apl Charge Mode

Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.

Completion
6-142
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U207 Operation key check

(Message: Check Panel Key Operation)
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2.[Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3.Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by
one. When pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the
LED is lit.
* :The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
6-143
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck

(Message: Set Deck Paper Size)
Contents
Set paper size used in side feeder.
Purpose
Change the setting when installing the side feeder or the size of paper used in the side feeder is
changed.
Setting
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Cassette3* Setting the paper size for Cassette3
*:High Capacity Feeder(1500 sheet x 2) and Side Feeder (3000-sheet) only
Setting
Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side feeder: A4
B5 Paper size of the side feeder: B5
Letter Paper size of the side feeder: Letter
* :Initial setting value: Letter (Inch specifications), A4 (Other specifications)

and on
Completion
6-144
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U211 Enhancement unit connection setting

(Message: Set Enhancement Connection)
Contents
Execute to set the job separator installation
Purpose
Execute when installing the job separator.
* :Make sure to set [Off] for preventing wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Procedure
2.Select [Inner Job Separator].
Items Contents
Inner Job Separator Job separator setting
Procedure
Items Contents
On Installing the job separator
Off The job separator is not installed

and on
Completion
6-145
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U221 USB host lock function setting

(Message: Set USB Host Lock Function)
Contents
Set ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the
USB host is not recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Procedure
2.Select [Host Lock].
Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off
Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available

and on
Completion
6-146
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U222 Setting the IC card type

(Message: Set IC Card Type)
Contents
Set the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
* :Initial setting value: Other

* :SSFC: Shared Security Formats Cooperation
Completion
6-147
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U223 Operation panel lock

(Message: Set Panel Operation Lock)
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the
users other than those with administrator privileges.
Setting
Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution
setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution set-
ting and Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
* :Initial setting value: Unlock

Operation item Partial Lock 1 Partial Lock 2 Partial Lock 3 Lock

Move to the maintenance mode Permission Permission Permission Permission
Move to the system menu. Permission Permission Prohibition Prohibition
Send, Send from Document Box Permission Permission Permission Permission
Switches the Yellow developer Permission Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition
On/Off setting
Switch to registration/editing Doc- Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition
ument Box
Pressing the [Stop] key Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Pressing the [Status/Job Cancel] Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
key
Disconnect the FAX line Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Completion
6-148
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U224 Setting Original Panel Display

(Message: Install Original Panel Display)
Contents
Change the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine start up and the
image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user request
Setting
1.Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
3.Turn the main power switch on.
Items Contents
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock

Opening Img Startup screen Whole start up screen
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive
area)

* :Start installation or uninstallation
8.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Supplement 1: File information
Description File name Image size (in pixels) File format

Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width : 800
Service call screen callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG
Width : 180
Home Menu menu_background.png Length: 480 PNG
screen Width : 800
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT
message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT
message 2 (Unicode)
6-149
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Supplement 2: Displaying Startup screen

The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call screen
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call.
How to change the message
After, entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display, service call
messages 1 and 2 display.
How to reset the message display
Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous.
Note
The graphics file for startup screen must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping
at recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion
6-150
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U230 Optional device serial number

(Message: Optional Device Serial No)
Contents
Display the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem
occurrence.
Procedure
* :Display the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Display the document processor serial number.
Finisher Display the finisher serial number.
Booklet Display the booklet folder serial number.
PF1 Display the paper feeder 1 serial number.
PF2 Display the paper feeder 2 serial number.
Completion
U234 Setting destination for punch

(Message: Set Punch Destination)
Contents
Set destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
2.Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric

and on
Completion
6-151
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U237 Finisher exit volume limit

(Message: Set Finisher Paper Stack Limit)
Contents
Set the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Procedure
2.Select [Main Tray] or [Middle Tray].

Setting value
Main Tray Set the main tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Middle tray Set the middle tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0

and on
Main tray Center tray

Input value 4000-sheet Finisher 4000-sheet Fin- 1000-sheet Fin-
isher isher
0 4000 sheets 65 sheets 50 sheets
1 1500 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
Completion
6-152
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U240 Finisher operation check

(Message: Check Finisher Operation)
Contents
Turn each motor and solenoid of the finisher on.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the finisher.
Procedure
Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box MT motor operation check
Booklet Booklet folder operation check
Method: Motor
Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drive the DF relief drum motor at high speed.
Save(L) *1 Drive the DF relief drum motor at low speed.
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.
Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and
descends again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off.
ascends again when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the
upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.
6-153
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the PH motor
Punch Move *2 Drive the PH slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
Cooling Fan *1 Drive exit fan motor.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Except Inner finisher
Method: Solenoid
Items Contents
Sub Tray *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Booklet *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 3 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
Three Fold *1 Turn the BF feed-shift solenoid on
Press Paper *2 Turn the DF paper press solenoid
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Inner finisher only

Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Conv Drives the MT drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drives the MT drive motor for feed-shift
6-154
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Booklet
Items Contents
Folding Drive the BF main motor.
Blade Drives the BF blade motor.
Bundle Up Drives the BF adjuster motor 2
Bundle Down Drives the BF adjuster motor 1
Staple Drive the BF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Execute the side registration test (A3).
Width Test(LD) Execute the side registration test (LD).
Feed In Drive the BF paper entry motor.
Completion
6-155
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U241 Finisher switch check

(Message: Check Finisher Switches)
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document finisher.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Procedure
Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the operation of the MT switch and the sensor.
Booklet Check the booklet switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
* :The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover sensor
Eject Cover DF exit cover sensor
Top Cover *2 DF top cover sensor
Tray U-Limit *3 DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle *3 DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF tray sensor 4
Tray L-Limit(BL) *1 DF tray sensor 5
Tray Top *3 DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject *3 DF middle exit sensor
Drum *1 DF drum sensor
Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle tray DF exit sensor
Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1
Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjusting sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1
6-156
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor
Press Paper Up *4 DF paper press sensor 1
Press Paper Down *4 DF paper press sensor 2
Release *4 DF installation detection switch
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: 1000-sheet finisher only, *3: Except Inner finisher, *4: Inner fin-
isher only
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Eject MT tray exit sensor
Cover MT cover open/close switch
Over Flow1 MT tray sensor 1
Over Flow 6 MT tray sensor 6
Over Flow 7 MT tray sensor 7
Motor HP MT home position switch
6-157
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Booklet
Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
Eject BF exit sensor
Paper BF paper sensor
Tray Full BF tray full sensor
Bundle Up HP BF adjusting sensor 2
Bundle Down HP BF adjusting sensor 1
Width Up HP BF side registration sensor 1
Width Down HP BF side registration sensor 2
Blade HP BF blade sensor
Tray BF tray open/close detection switch
Set BF set sensor
left Guide BF left cover sensor
Vertical Feed Vertical feed sensor
Method: Punch
Items Contents
Punch HP *1 PH home position sensor
Edge Face 1 *1 PH paper edge sensor 1
Tank PH tank set switch
Tank Full PH tank full sensor
HP *2 PH entry sensor
*1: Except Inner finisher, *2: Inner finisher only
Completion
6-158
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U243 Checking the DP motor

(Message: Check DP Motors)
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor
Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP exit motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor
DP Fan *1 DP drive fan motor
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan motor
*1: DP-7110 only, *2: DP-7120 only, *3: Except DP-7120
3.Press the [Start] key. Each operation start.

Completion
6-159
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U244 Checking DP switch

(Message: Check DP Switches)
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Feed *2 Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head *2 Check DP back page timing sensor
Set Check DP original sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP upper cover switch
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject Check DP exit sensor
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
*1: DP-7100 only, *2: DP-7110 only
Completion
6-160
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U245 Checking the message

(Message: Check Display Message)
Contents
Display messages indicated on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
Execute to check messages indicated.
Procedure
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, display messages in order.
* :Enter the message number using the numeric keys,then press the [Start] key to display the
message of the designated number.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys key, switch the language.
Completion
6-161
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U246 Finisher adjustment

(Message: Adjust Finisher)
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
· Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in A z-shape in the PH mode.
· Punch position stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the PH mode.
Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the PH mode.
· Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
· Home position adjustment before/after shift
Adjust when exit paper is not aligned.
Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
· Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
· Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjust the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
· Adjustment of center folding position
Adjust the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
· Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjust the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Setting
Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Booklet Adjustment value setting of folding unit
6-162
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Finisher
Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Punch Feed Punch position stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Punch Width *2 Punch center position timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Except Inner finisher
Setting: Punch Regist

1.Select [Punch Regist].
Content to adjust Setting Initial set- Data varia-

range ting value tion
Adjusting the PH registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0.25 mm
* :Increase the value if paper is skewed (sample 1).

Reduce the set value if paper is folded in a Z-shape (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-20
Setting: Punch Feed

1.Select [Punch Feed].

Adjusting the PH position stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.52mm
* :Increase the setting value if the punch position is shorter than specified value.
Reduce the setting value if the punch position is longer than specified value.
6-163
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 6-21
Setting: Punch Width

1.Select [Punch Width].

PH center position timing adjustment -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
* :Reduce the setting value if the punch position is shorter than specified value.
Increase the setting value if the punch position is longer than specified value.
Center line
(within ± 2 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-22
Setting: Width Front HP / Width Tail HP

1.Select [Width Front HP] or [Width Tail HP].

Front width adjuster home position adjust- -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
ment
Rear width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.97mm

4.Press the [Stop] key and return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
5.Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Width Test(A3)].
* :The middle tray side registration guides move to A3 size position.
6.Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7.Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
6-164
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Shift Front HP / Shift Tail HP

1.Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP]

Adjustment of front shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
Adjustment of rear shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.97mm

5.Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Sort Test].
6.Check consistency of the exit paper and repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in
position.
Setting: Staple HP
1.Select [Staple HP].

Front/rear staple home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-23
Method: Booklet
1. Select items to set.
Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos 1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos 2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos 3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos 1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos 2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos 3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri- folding position
6-165
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Setting: Width Up HP/Width Down HP

1.Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP].

Adjustment of upper side registration home posi- -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
tion
Adjustment of lower side registration home posi- -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
tion

5.Enter U240 and select [Booklet] and then [Width Test(A3)].
* :The width guides of the folding unit will move to A3-size position.
6.Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7.Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: Staple Pos

1.Select [Staple Pos 1], [Staple Pos 2] or [Staple Pos 3].

Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Let- -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
ter size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Legal size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Ledger/8K size
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper
× 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-24
Setting: Booklet Pos

1.Select [Booklet Pos 1], [Booklet Pos 2] or [Booklet Pos 3].
6-166
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
size
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
size
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Led- -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
ger/8K size
* :Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3mm
A
Center line Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 6-25
Setting: Three Fold

1.Select [Three Fold].

Adjustment of tri- folding position -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
* :Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-26
Completion
6-167
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U247 Paper feed operation check

(Message: Check Paper Feeder)
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Procedure
Items Contents
2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder
LCF Operate the high capacity feeder
Side Feeder Operate the side feeder
Setting: 2PF
1.Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF feed motor OFF
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2: ON
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Start the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
6-168
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: LCF
Display Contents
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
2.Select [Execute].
Setting: Side Feeder

Display Contents
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF feed solenoid: ON
2.Select [Execute].
Completion
6-169
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U249 Finisher line test

(Message: Finisher Line Test)
Contents
Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Purpose
Execute to check the 4000-sheet finisher operation
Setting
Items Contents
Punch Position Check the PH stop position
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the folding unit

4.Press the [System Menu] key to make a test copy.
Completion
6-170
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set

(Message: Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set)
Contents
Change the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Execute when changing the display timing of messages prompting the maintenance and auto-
matic grayscale adjustment
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial

range Setting
value
M.Cnt A Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 600000
counter (Kit A)
M.Cnt HT Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999
counter (HT adjustment)
Cassette 1 Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 300000
counter (Cassette 1)
Cassette 2 Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 300000
Cassette 3 *1 Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 300000
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *2: 3000-sheet side feeder only

Completion
6-171
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U251 clearing the maintenance counter

(Message: Clear Maintenance Counter)
Contents
Display, clear and change the maintenance counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance counter value
Or, execute to clear the counter value when performing the periodical maintenance
Setting
Items Contents Setting

range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter value (Kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter value (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 1 Maintenance cycle counter value (Cassette 1) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 2 Maintenance cycle counter value (Cassette 2) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 3 *1 Maintenance cycle counter value (Cassette 3) 0 to 9999999
Clear Clear all the maintenance counter value 0
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.
Completion
6-172
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the specification of the destina-
tion.
Purpose
Execute to reset the destination setting to the original value when initializing the back up RAM in
the simulation U021.
Procedure
Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
*1: 100V model only, *2: Except 100V model

* :Initial setting value: Destination
* :Initializes according to the destination
and on
* :An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off / on, and execute initialization using mainte-
nance mode U252.
Error code list
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-173
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U253 Switching the double/single counts

(Message: Set Double/Single Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be
counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2.Select [B/W].
Items Contents
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
3.Select [SGL] or [DBL]
Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set the double counts for A3 (420mm) or more
DBL(B4) Set double count if the size is Legal (356mm) or larger
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2

SGL(All) (100V model), DBL(A3/Ledger) (120V/ 220-240V model)
*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035.
However, the double count will be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or lon-
ger.
Completion
6-174
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U260 Switching feed/exit count

(Message: Set Copy Count Mode)
Contents
Switch count timing such as total count, etc. to feed or exit.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2.Select the copy count timing.
Items Contents
Feed Select secondary feed start timing
Eject Select the paper exit timing
* :Initial setting value: Eject

Completion
U265 Setting by destination

(Message: Set Model Destination)
Contents
Set the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
Items Contents
No. Display the OEM code

and on
Completion
6-175
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U271 Setting the page count unit

(Message: Set Page Count Unit)
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
* :If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting

Setting varia-
value tion
Banner A Count setting of Long Paper A (470.1mm 2 to 30 2 -
to 915mm/18.51” to 36”)
Banner B Count setting of Long Paper B (915.1mm 2 to 30 3 -
to 1220mm/36.01” to 48”)
Completion
6-176
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U278 Delivery date setting

(Message: Set Delivery Date)
Contents
Register the date when the machine was installed.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the installation date of the machine.
Procedure
2.Select [Today].
* :Set the installation date of the machine.
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
* :Clear the installation date of the machine.
Completion
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Service Status Page)
Contents
Set if the print coverage report on the report output is displayed or not.
Purpose
Setting
Items Contents
On Display the print coverage report.
Off Not to display the print coverage report.

3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
6-177
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U286 Optional language setting

(Message: Set Option Language)
Contents
Add/delete/change the optional language
Purpose
Set the optional language that can be selected in the System Menu
Setting
Items Contents
Option Language 1 Set optional language 1
* :Initial setting value: 0(None)

and on
Setting
Items Contents
ARABIC Installed langauage list
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
* :Display varies depending on installed optional language package.

Completion
6-178
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U287 Automatic recovery function

(Message: Set Auto Reset Function)
Contents
Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence of the service call or the
system error.
Purpose
Set to change ON/OFF setting of the automatic recovery function after occurrence of the service
call or the system error.
Setting
Items Contents
C0XXX SET WHETHER TO ENABLE THE AUTOMATIC RECOVERY FUNCTION AFTER
OCCURRENCE OF THE SERVICE CALL "C9XXX".
C1XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C1xxx".
CFXXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the CF system error.
Completion
6-179
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity notification setting

(Message: Set Abnormal Heat and Humidity Warning)
Contents
Set whether to indicate the notification when detecting abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Setting
Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification

Completion
U325 Paper interval setting

(Message: Set Paper Interval (Add Toner))
Contents
Set the print interval at high print coverage.
Purpose
Used to change the print interval at high print coverage.
Setting

Setting
value
Interval Set On/Off of print interval at high print coverage. On/Off Off
Mode Set the print interval mode at high print coverage 1 to 10 1
Completion
6-180
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U326 Set black line cleaning display

(Message: Set Black Line Clean Display)
Contents
Set whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Display the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the con-
tact glass when scanning from the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Black Line Mode Set On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance display
Items Contents
On Display the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not displayed.

Completion
6-181
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U327 Cassette heater control setting

(Message: Set Cassette Heater Control)
Contents
Select the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Select the cassette heater control setting.
Set whether the cassette heater is available in the optional cassette.
Procedure
Items Contents
Mode1 Set the cassette heater control Mode1.
Mode2 Set the cassette heater control Mode2.
Off Set the cassette heater control Off (not installed).

* :Drum refresh is not executed at power-up when the cassette heater control is [On].
* :Mode1: ON at 65%RH or more of the machine outside humidity (OFF: during drive ),
Mode2: during drive ), Mode2: always ON
Completion
6-182
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

(Message: Adjust Coverage Size Calculation Rate)
Contents
Set the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert
the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial set-

ting value
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Mode Switch full-color count and color coverage count 0: Full color 0
display 1: by coverage
Level1 Set low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 1.0
Level2 Set middle coverage threshold value 0.2 to 99.9 2.5
Completion
6-183
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Heater On Mode)
Contents
Set the drum heater
Purpose
Whether or not to display the drum heater setting in the system menu, and perform the drum
heater setting
Method
Items Contents
System Set whether the drum heater setting in the system menu is displayed.
Drum Heater Set the drum heater
Setting
Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled

* :If it is set to [Off] in [System Menu], [Drum Heater] is set to [Off]
Completion
6-184
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U340 Setting the applied mode

(Message: Set Applied Mode)
Contents
Allocate memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Adj Memory The memory allocation setting
Adj Max Job No. of multiple job upper limit setting
Setting: Adj Memory


range ting value
Image Area temporarily used to create output -100 to 0
image. 100(MB)
* :Set the below value in case print failure occurs because of the memory shortage. (recom-
mended value)
Image : +100
* :The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.

and on
Setting: Adj Max Job


range ting value
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 -
* :The maximum [Printer] jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
Completion
6-185
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U341 Printer cassette setting

(Message: Set Printer Exclusive Cassette)
Contents
Set the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it
cannot be used for copy.
Setting
* :Multiple cassettes can be selected.
Items Contents
Cassette1 Set cassette 1 as exclusive cassette for the printer output.
Cassette2 Set cassette 2 as exclusive cassette for the printer output.
Cassette3 *1 Set cassette 3 as exclusive cassette for the printer output (Paper
feeder).
feeder).
feeder).

* :Initial setting value: Off (Cassette1 to 5)
Completion
6-186
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U343 Duplex priority mode

(Message: Set Duplex Priority Mode)
Contents
Switch between duplex copy or simplex copy for initial setting on copy mode.
Purpose
Set the frequently used settings depending on the usage of the user.
Setting
* :Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled

Completion
U345 Maintenance due timing display setting

(Message: Set Maintenance Time Soon Display)
Contents
Set how many prints in the maintenance cycle to display a message notifying that the mainte-
nance time is approaching.
When the maintenance count value reaches the number of pages minus the set value from the
maintenance cycle, a message near the maintenance will be displayed
Purpose
Execute to change the display timing of a message near the maintenance.
Setting

range ting value
Cnt Set the display timing of a message near the 0 to 9999 0
maintenance.
(Remaining number of prints that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle reaches)
SSD Life Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 99 5(%)
for the SSD replacement.
Completion
6-187
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

(Message: Selecting Sleep Mode)
Contents
Change the sleep mode setting.
Purpose
Execute when switching the setting of sleep mode.
Method
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switch Auto Sleep function setting
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Set Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
* :Initial setting value: More Energy Save

and on
Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.
Off The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu.

* :Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off
Completion
6-188
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U402 Adjusting the printing margins

(Message: Adjust Print Margin)
Contents
Adjust the scan image margins.
Purpose
Adjust if each margin is improper.
* :There might be the possibility to occur paper jam at fuser section if the leading edge margin
is less than the specified value.
* :There might be the possibility to occur an image failure (image smudge) on the second page
in continuous print if there is no trailing edge margin.
Adjustment

Setting varia-
value tion
Lead Adjust the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Adjust the printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Adjust the printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Adjust the printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
duction.
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-27
Note
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance
mode to adjust.
U034(P.6-39) > U402
Completion
6-189
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact

glass
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table))
Contents
Adjust the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

Setting varia-
value tion
A Margin Adjust the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjust the scanner leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjust the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjust the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
value is decreased.
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-28
Note
U034(P.6-39) > U402(P.6-189) > U403
Completion
6-190
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the docu-

ment processor
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjust the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment
Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range Setting varia-
value tion
A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjust the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
C Margin Adjust the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjust the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
A Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP left margin (Back page) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
(Back page)
C Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP right margin (Back page) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
(Back page)
*1: Simultaneous duplex scan model only

value is decreased.
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-29
6-191
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Note
U034(P.6-39) > U402(P.6-189) > U403(P.6-190) > U404
Completion
6-192
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U407 Writing timing adjustment (Duplex/Reversal)

(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjust the writing timing when print duplex.
Purpose
Adjust when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the
scanning image (image on the memory)
Note
This adjustment is executed after completion of the adjustment in the following maintenance
mode.
U034(P.6-39) > U402(P.6-189) > U66(P.6-62) >
U403(P.6-190) > U71(P.6-66) > U404(P.6-191) > U407
Adjustment
5.Select [Adj Data].

Setting varia-
value tion
Adj Data Adjust the leading edge timing when -47 to 47 0 1dot
writing the image in the memory
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-30
Completion
6-193
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U410 Half tone automatic adjustment

(Message: Half Tone Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Acquire data necessary for executing halftone automatic adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the halftone density reproducibility is not good
Adjustment
* :Display the execution information screen.
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4/Letter size paper.
2.Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back
and the printed side facing down on the platen.
Figure 6-31
* :The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
4.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
7.An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-194
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error codes
Code Occurrence Contents Re-

position adjust-
ment
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected Enable
S002 Original deviation is in excess in the main scan- Enable
ning direction
S003 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scan- Enable
ning direction
S004 Original skew is in excess Enable
S005 Original type error Enable
SFFF Other scanner error Disable
E001 Engine Engine status error Disable
E002 Adjustment result error Disable
EFFF Other engine error Disable
C001 Controller Pause status Disable
C002 Adjustment result error Disable
C110 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error Disable
(black)
(cyan)
(magenta)
(yellow)
C210 Adjustment value (increase rate) error (black) Disable
C220 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error Disable
(cyan)
C240 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error Disable
(magenta)
C280 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (yel- Disable
low)
CFFF Other controller error Disable
Completion
6-195
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U411 Scanner auto adjustment

(Message: Scanner Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Adjust the scanner section or DP scanning section using the specific originals automatically.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberra-
tion in main/sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color cor-
rection matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF cor-
rection, Input gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Execute when adjusting the scanner section or DP scanning section automatically.
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Table (Chart Execute automatic adjustment of the table 7505000005
A) scanning.
Magnification in the sub scanning direction

/ Leading edge timing
Center line / chromatic aberration
Sub scanning chromatic aberration / MTF
correction COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
gamma in color mode / color correction

matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode
DP Execute DP front page scan automatic 302AC68243
FU(ChartB) *1 adjustment
Execute DP back page scan automatic
DP adjustment
FD(ChartB) *2
Magnification in the sub-scanning direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
6-196
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
DP Execute DP front page scan automatic 7505000005
FU(ChartA) *1 adjustment
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF cor-
rection
matrix
DP Execute DP back page scan automatic
FD(ChartA) *2 adjustment
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF cor-
rection
matrix
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 7505000005
DP Auto Adj Adjusting the document processor Execute in a simplified manner if
*1 scanning section with the chart output by Chart B is not available.
the local machine
Magnification in the sub-scanning direction

Leading edge timing
Center line
*1: DP installed machine only, *2: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP model only
6-197
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Method: Table (Chart A)

In case of the target value auto input
* :Normally, adjust it here.
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
2.Enter maintenance mode U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [Table(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and
the barcode can't be read, adjust by the following procedure after input the target value manually.
In case of the target value manual input
1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment
original (P/N: 7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [Table(ChartA)].
8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
In the following DP adjustment, if the image position shifts large, an error might occur when
adjusting with ChartA, therefore, adjust the color with ChartB (image position) first and then,
adjust with ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
*:DP adjustment original (ChartB)
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 6-32

3.Select [DP FU(ChartB)].
Method: DP FD (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-down on the DP.
3.Select [DP FD(ChartB)].
6-198
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Method: DP Auto Adj

1.Set A4/Letter paper.
2.Press the [Start] key to print the adjustment original.
3.Set the adjustment original output on the table and press the [Start] key.
4.Set the output adjustment original with face-up on the DP.
5.Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
6.Press the [Start] key to start the front page automatic adjustment.
7.Set the output adjustment original with face-down on the DP.
8.Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
9.Press the [Start] key to start the back page automatic adjustment.
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
ment.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.

2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
ment.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
6-199
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
* :When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed. If an error
occurs during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this
case, check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Code Contents Corrective action

00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error 1. Set the original correctly and
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the execute the auto adjustment
sub-scanning direction) again.
2. Check lighting of the lamp or
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading
replace it.
edge in the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in
the main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end
in the main scanning direction)
07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in 1. Check the attachment position of
the main scanning direction) DP.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in 2. Check lighting of the lamp or
the main scanning direction) replace it.
3. Check the back and front of the
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading adjustment original.
0b Black band is not detected
(Original check of DP leading edge in the
sub-scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing
0d White band is not detected (DP trailing
6-200
2SA/2RJ/2NK

0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off / on and
execute again.
0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning 1. Turn the power switch off / on
direction and execute again.
2. Adjust manually.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning
direction
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direc-
tion
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off / on and
execute again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning 1. Turn the power off and on, and
direction execute again.
2. Adjust manually.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direc-
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
tion
16 Magnification error in the main scanning
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and exe-
cute again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error 1. Clean the contact glass and slit
glass.
2. Exchange the adjustment origi-
nal.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction
coefficient error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
6-201
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original
error
63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
Completion
* :*Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-202
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U412 Adjusting the uneven density

(Message: Adjust Uneven Density)
Contents
Scan the test pattern image distribution directly from the scanner and adjust LSU light intensity.
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
* :After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
Items Contents
Normal Mode Normal Mode
On/Off Config Uneven density correction On/Off setting
Method: Normal Mode

* :Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
2.Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
3.Press the [Start] key. Start scanning.
* :Test pattern is output after completing scanning. (2nd sheet)
* :According to the test pattern of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
5.Press the [Start] key. Start scanning.
* :Test pattern is output after completing scanning. (3rd sheet)
* :Check the correction result.[Finish] appears after normal completion. Display [Finish] .after
normal completion.
1st retrial
8.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
9.Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
10.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
11.Execute Step 3 to 7
* :An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-203
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Patch is not detected E002 Background image error
S002 Original position shift in the main E003 Density error
scanning direction
S003 Original position shift in the sub- E004 Uneven density error
scanning direction
S004 Original skew error EFFF Other engine error
S005 Original type error C001 Controller error
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
E001 Engine status error

Items Contents
On Enable the uneven density correction
Off Disable the uneven density correction

* :Automatically set to on after completing correction.
Completion
6-204
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically

(Message: Print Position Auto Adjust)
Contents
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjust leading edge timing/center line/margin
Purpose
Execute when performing various adjustment on the print engine section automatically
* : * Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1.Set A3/Ledger paper.
* :Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
3.Select [Execute].
* :A test pattern is outputted.
5.Set the output Test Pattern as the original.
* :Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Black band is not detected (main C101 Adjustment value error (main
scanning direction far end) scanning direction magnification)
S002 Black band is not detected (main C102 Adjustment value error (auxiliary
scanning direction near end ) scanning direction magnification)
S003 Black band is not detected (auxil- C103 Adjustment value error (leading
iary scanning direction leading edge timing)
edge)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxil- C104 Adjustment value error (center
iary scanning direction trailing line)
edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew C105 Adjustment value error (B margin)
error (1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error C106 Adjustment value error (A margin)
(1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse C107 Adjustment value error (C margin)
original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch) C108 Adjustment value error (D margin)
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
Completion
6-205
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U425 Set Target

(Message: Set Target Adjustment Value)
Contents
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Method
Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Set the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA
Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.

Setting variation
value
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -
6-206
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Black

Setting variation
value
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -
Setting: Gray1

Setting variation
value
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -
Setting: Gray2

Setting variation
value
Setting: Gray3

Setting variation
value
6-207
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting variation
value
Setting: C

Setting variation
value
Setting: M

Setting variation
value
Setting: Y

Setting variation
value
Setting: R
6-208
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting variation
value
Setting: G

Setting variation
value
Setting: B

Setting variation
value
Setting: Adjust Original

* :This setting is usually unnecessary.

Setting variation
value
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
edge.
6-209
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting variation
value
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 189.0 to 191.0 190.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of
black belt 3 of the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the below distance of three locations "A", "B" and "C". (A: 30mm from the left
edge, B: 105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2.Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
4.Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment
original.
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the
right edge of black belt 2.
5.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
7.Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black
belt 3 on the adjustment original at two positions.
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance
from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of
the left edge and deduct A. E:Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge
of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8.Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
Figure 6-33
6-210
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: DP(ChartB)
* :This setting is usually unnecessary.

Setting variation
value
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 388.0 to 392.0 390.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment
original.
2.Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
3.Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
5.Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside)
on the adjustment original.
6.Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
&
ㄪᩚ⏝ཎ✏&KDUW%㸦㒊ရ␒ྕ$&㸧
Figure 6-34
Completion
6-211
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(Message: Set ID Adjustment Mode)
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Execute each setting of the
calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration
Time Interval Sets the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Mode Set execution cycle of the calibration
On/Sleep Out Calibration operation setting (power-up/recovery from sleep mode)
AP/NE Calibration operation setting (AP/NE)
Leaving Time Set the reference time to determine whether to execute calibration from
sleep time when recovering from Sleep mode
Timing Setting the execution timing by drive time
Target Value Setting the sensor target value for the toner thick layer calibration and
light intensity calibration
Calib Executing Calibration
Solid Image Edge reduction setting
Setting: Permission
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration

6-212
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Time Interval


range ting value
Time(sec) Calibration interval 0 to 9999 480
* :Setting is changeable in 10 count increments.

Setting: Mode
Items Contents
Short 0: Calibration cycle setting: Short
Normal 1: Calibration cycle setting: Normal
Long 2: Calibration cycle setting: Long
Custom 3: Calibration cycle setting: Custom
* :Initial setting value: Normal

Setting: On/Sleep Out

Items Contents

Setting: AP/NE
Items Contents

Setting: Leaving Time


range ting value
Time(min) Setting the sleep timer 0 to 480 480
6-213
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Timing

range
Time(sec) Set continuous print standard time 60 to 9999
* :Setting is changeable in 1 count increments.


Timing 600 720 900
Setting: Target Value


range ting value
Thickness(K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 135
Gamma(K) Light amount calibration (Black) 0 to 500 307
Setting: Print Rate(B/W)


range ting value
Threshold Proportion of black/white printing (Threshold) 1: On / 0: Off 0
Method: Calib
1.Select [Execute].
* :Calibration starts.
Items Contents
Execute Execute Full Calibration
Setting: Solid Image

Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges

Completion
6-214
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U465 ID correction data

(Message: ID Adjustment Data)
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute to check the data.
Method
* :Move to the display screen
Items Contents
Laser Power Display the light intensity control value.
Laser Power(En) Display the exposure level (En)
Laser Power(Drum) Display the half exposure level of the drum (Drum)
Laser Power(Max) Display the maximum exposure level (Max)
Bias Calib Sensor value for the toner layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Primary transfer belt durability
Method: Laser Power

* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
K Display the Black light intensity control value.
Method: Laser Power(En)

Items Contents
K Displays the exposure level
Method: Laser Power(drum)

Items Contents
K Display the half exposure level of the drum (Black)
Method: Laser Power(Max)

Items Contents
K Display the Black maximum exposure level (Max)
6-215
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Bias Calib

Items Contents
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Black)
Method: T7 CTD
Items Contents
K T7 control value (Black)
Method: Stress
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Primary transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion
6-216
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit

(Message: Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit)
Contents
Set the operation of the transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the transfer belt unit.
Method
Items Contents
Belt Initialize Executing the primary transfer belt speed correction
Method: Belt Initialize

1.Select [Execute].
* :Start primary transfer belt speed correction.
3.When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

4.Error codes list
Code Description
1 Main body cover open
2 toner empty
3 Waste toner over-filled
4 Detecting the service call error
22 Discharge undetected error K
Completion
6-217
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate

(Message: Adjust JPEG Compression Rate)
Contents
Execute to set compression ratio for JPEG image by the image quality mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. For example, in case of
enlarged copy of 200% or more, increase the setting value to change the compression ratio in
order to eliminate the roughness of the image. If the set value is reduced, compression is high
and image quality is deteriorated. If the set value is increased, image quality is improved but pro-
cessing speed is slower.
Method
Items Contents
Copy Compression ratio for copying
Send Compression ratio for sending
System Compression ratio when storing in the system temporary.
Print Compression ratio for printer
Method: Copy
Items Contents
Photo Compression ratio for the photo mode
Text Compression ratio for the text mode
Setting: Photo

range ting value
Luminance Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 10 10
Setting: Text

range ting value
Luminance Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 10 10
6-218
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Send
Items Contents
Photo Compression ratio for the photo mode
Text Compression ratio for the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Set the compression ratio for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression ratio for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression ratio for High compression PDF (compression pri-
ority).
Setting: Photo

range ting value
Y1 Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
CbCr1 Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)
Setting: Text

range ting value
6-219
2SA/2RJ/2NK

range ting value
Setting: HC-PDF(BG)

range ting value
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)

range ting value
Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)


range ting value
6-220
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: System

range ting value
Y Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)
CbCr Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)
Setting: Print

range ting value
Luminance Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 10 7(%)
Chrominance Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 10 7(%)
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
6-221
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning

(Message: Check LSU Cleaning Operation)
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, set the cleaning operation
interval and timing to enter the operation.
Method
Items Contents
Execute Execute the LSU cleaning operation.
Cycle Set the LSU cleaning operation.
Method: Execute
* :The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle

range ting value
Cnt Set the LSU cleaning cycle. 0 to 5000 1000
Setting: Cnt
* :Settable in 500-sheet increments.
Completion
6-222
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U485 Image process mode setting

(Message: Set Image Process Mode)
Contents
Set the rotation processing method of PDF image rotation method.
Purpose
Execute when changing the rotation processing method of PDF image.
Method
Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
Set- Contents
ting
value
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Completion
6-223
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U520 TDRS setting

(Message: Set TDRS)
Contents
Check/set the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
Setting: Registration
Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Register Access Code
Setting: TDRS User / Access Code / TDRS User & Access Code
Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Set the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Set the TDRS Username
Access Code Set the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Set the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Set the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Set the TDRS proxy username
Text Set the TDRS description
* :[Regist] is not executable if a USB memory is not installed.

* :When the USB memory is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and dis-
played.
After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information
by pressing the [OK] or [Start] key.
* :After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item
that was performed.
When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the
item that has been operated.
* :If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the
"TDRS User" will be indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the "Access Code" will be
indicated.
6-224
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error codes
Items Contents Items Contents

e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error
e0002 The USB memory is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network
e0003 The file to import does not exist in t0003 An illegal parameter error
the USB memory.
e0004 Reading from the USB memory t0004 Insufficient resource
has failed.
e0005 Unmounting the USB memory has t0005 Communication error
failed.
e0006 Moving or renaming the file has t0006 Error in processing communica-
failed. tion.
e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error
e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error
e0009 Error in reading the file t0009 Authentication error
e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A HTTP error: Request error
e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B HTTP error: Error due to the
server
e000C Creating the working directory has t000C HTTP error: Error due to the client.
failed.
e000D Deleting the working file has failed.
Setting: Information
1.Displays the set contents
Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Display of the model name
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS

and on
Completion
6-225
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U600 Initialize: All Data

(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX
PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered con-
tents if the file system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :Display the entry screen for the destination code and OEM code.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
* :Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the destination code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

* :Start initialization of the data.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
5.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
* :When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.

* :Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
Destination code list

tion code tion code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European unification)
007 Argentina ↑ Italy
009 Australia ↑ Germany
022 Brazil ↑ Spain
038 China ↑ U.K.
6-226
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tion code tion code
080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands
084 Indonesia ↑ Sweden
088 Israel ↑ France
097 Korea ↑ Austria
181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland
250 Russia ↑ Belgium
108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark
115 Mexico ↑ Finland
126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal
136 Peru ↑ Ireland
137 Philippines ↑ Norway
152 Middle East 254 Taiwan
156 Singapore
159 South Africa
169 Thailand
6-227
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U601 Initialize: Keep data

(Message: Initialize: Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the des-
tination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :Display the entry screen for the destination code and OEM code.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code].

* :Refer to the destination code list. (Refer to P.6-226)
Items Contents
Country Code Set the destination code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

* :Start initialization of the data.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
6-228
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U603 User data 1

(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Set the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2.Select [Line Type].
Items Contents
Line Type Line Type
Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS

* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
6-229
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U604 User data 2

(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Set the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
2.Select [Rings(F/T)].
Items Contents Setting Initial setting value

range
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
* :If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
Completion
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clear Data)
Contents
Initialize data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.].
Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

Completion
6-230
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto
reduction mode.
Method
Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction
mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/Let-
terR) in the auto reduction mode.
Setting: Cut Line(100%)

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record-
ing capacity when recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting,
they are recorded on the next page.
Contents Setting Initial Data

value tion
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax 0 to 22 3 -
at 100% magnification.
* :Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the
entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

value tion
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
6-231
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the
entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

value tion
Set number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the 0 to 22 0 -
A4R/Letter R auto reduction mode.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Completion
6-232
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U611 System 2
Contents
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method
Items Contents
ADJ LINES Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is
set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size
paper is set.
Setting: ADJ LINES

Setting Initial Data

Contents range Setting varia-
value tion
Set number of lines to be adjusted at auto reduction mode. 0 to 22 7 -

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)


value tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 22 -
A4 paper is set.

6-233
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)

Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

value tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 26 -
letter size paper is set.

Completion
6-234
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U612 System 3
Contents
Set the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
Items Contents
Auto reduct Select auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Set the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Set whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direc-
tion or at 100% magnification.
Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the
FAX paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.

Setting: Protocol List

Set the automatic protocol list printing.
Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion
6-235
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U615 System 6
Contents
Set the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification
machine
Method
Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Setting: RX WIDTH FOR 11"

Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
* :Initial setting value: LEDGER

Completion
6-236
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U620 FAX system

(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Set the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode
Items Contents
One Set the one-shot type detection
Cont Set the continuous type detection
* :Initial setting value: One

Completion
6-237
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U625 Communication settings

(Message: Set Communication)
Contents
Set the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to
complete transmission. Change the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
Items Contents
Interval Set the auto redialing interval
Times Set the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval

value tion
Set the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 min- -
utes

Setting: Times

value tion
Set the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

Completion
6-238
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U630 Communication control procedures 1

(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality
line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
Items Contents
TX Speed Set the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Set the reception speed.
TX Echo Set the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Set the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Set the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34
is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the communication speed.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
* :Initial setting value: 14400bps/V17

Setting: RX Speed
Set the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination
unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the reception speed.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps Set to V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
* :Initial setting value: 14400bps
6-239
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting: TX Echo
Set the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the transmitter side.
Items Contents
500 Send the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Send the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
* :Initial setting value: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Set the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when
an error occurs with echo at the receiver side.
Items Contents
500 Send the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Send the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.

Completion
6-240
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Purpose
Set the transmission and reception of ECM
Set the CED frequency
Method
Items Contents
ECM TX Set ECM transmission.
ECM RX Set ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission cost is higher priority than the image quality.
* :Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.

Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission cost is higher priority than the image quality.
* :Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.

6-241
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: CED Freq

Set the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement mea-
sures for the international communication.
Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz

Completion
6-242
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Correspond to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Set the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Set the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Set whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.
Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Set the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.
Items Contents
1Time Set no. of detection of CNG to 1 time.
2Time Set no. of detection of CNG to 2 time.
* :Initial setting value: 1 Time (100V model)/2 Times (Others)

Completion
6-243
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Set the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Set the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Set the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Set whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and recep-
tion.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Set if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

6-244
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: DIS 2Res

Set the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the cor-
rective measures for transmission errors and other problems.
Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
* :Initial setting value: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Set the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors
occur frequently due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.
Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
* :Initial setting value: 15%

Completion
6-245
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Set the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Exe-
cute it as one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
* :Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2.Select [TCF Check].
Setting range Initial

value
TCF Check Set the allowed error bytes when detecting 1 to 255 0
the TCF signal

Completion
6-246
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U640 Communication time setting 1

(Message: Communication Time 1)
Contents
Set the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Set the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
Setting Initial
Items Contents
range Setting value
Time(One) Set the one-shot detection time for 0 to 255 7
remote switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Set the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80
remote switching.

Completion
6-247
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U641 Communication time setting 2

(Message: Communication Time 2)
Contents
Set the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Set the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Set the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Set the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Set the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Set the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Set the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Set the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Set to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or
when the destination unit sets the auto switching function.
Contents Setting Initial

range Setting value
Set the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 56
58(100V model)


Set the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
*This setting is usually unnecessary.

range Setting value
Set the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 36
38(100V model)

6-248
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception

range Setting value
Set the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Set the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in
the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 6-35 ). If either receiving a FAX signal
within this time or passing this time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode.
Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range Setting value
Set the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 (s) 30

Ring back tone send start
Start of fax reception

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring detection
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Figure 6-35 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time
Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Set the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode, (See figure 6-35). Execute when a reception error occurs
when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range Setting value
Set the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20

6-249
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Set the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in
the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 6-35). Execute when a reception error
occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range Setting value
Set the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after
a connected handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, oper-
ated as a normal phone after this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to
receive a call.

range Setting value
Set the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 (s) 60

Setting: Td Time Out

Set the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to
receive a call. Be sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the
unit is being used as a telephone.

range Setting value
Set the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6
30(100V model)
9(120V model)

Completion
6-250
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Set the G3 cable equalizer. Set the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjust the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Set the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Set the modem detection level.
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
* :Initial setting value: 0dB
Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
* :Initial setting value: 0dB
Setting: RX Mdm Level

1.Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].
* :Initial setting value: -43dBm
Completion
6-251
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Set the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
Setting Initial
Items Contents
range Setting value
Sgl LVL Modem Set the modem output level. -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
(Cent) -9 (100V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6(120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Set the DTMF output level (level dif- 0 to 5.5 2
ference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

Completion
6-252
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U660 Ring setting

(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Set the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Set the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Set the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Set the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Select if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
* :Initial setting value: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Select whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax
is connected to a public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.

6-253
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Busy Tone

Set whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone
is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this prob-
lem may be improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if
the destination line is busy.
Items Contents
On Detect the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
* :Initial setting value: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Select the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
* :Initial setting value: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Set if the loop current is detected before dialing.
Items Contents
On Detect the loop current before dialing.
Off Do not detect the loop current before dialing.

Completion
6-254
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U670 List output

(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
* :Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print
Jobs] is pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4.Output selected list.
Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential
boxes, firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance
mode (self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
6-255
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U671 Clearing FAX backup data

(Message: Clear FAX Back Up Data)
Contents
Clear the communication history information of FAX/Internet FAX which is backed up in MFP.
Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Setting
2.Select the item to output.
Items Contents
RECOVERY FAX Stor- Enable to use the DIMM used in another machine.
age
FAX Data CLEAR Clear all the data in the DIMM.
Change FAX Storage Change the storage destination of the backup data

* :Clear the backup data.
4.When selecting [FAX Data CLEAR], turn the power switch off / on. Please wait at least 5 sec-
onds or more between power off and on
Completion
6-256
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U695 FAX function customization

(Message: Customize FAX Function)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX Set ON/OFF of FAX bulk transmission
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Setting: FAX Bulk TX

1.By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.

Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg

1.By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
2.Initial setting value: Off

Completion
6-257
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U698 Setting the maintenance port

(Message: Set Port for Maintenance)
Contents
Set the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Set the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Set only when different items
are set for each port.
* :This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
2.Press [Port Select].
* :Current setting display is inverted.
Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
Note
Since the setting contents of this item are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning
off the power, it is necessary to make settings after entering the maintenance mode again
Completion
6-258
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U699 Software switch: Set

(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Set the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
* :Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting is not neces-
sary to change.
Method
2.Select [SW No.].
3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specify the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4.Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.
Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion
List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. bit Contents

36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
6-259
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. bit Contents

38 0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or
more
Communication time setting
No. bit Contents

53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Modem setting
No. bit Contents

89 76543 RX gain adjust
NCU setting
No. bit Contents

121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Calling time setting
No. bit Contents

133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected
6-260
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. bit Contents

147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the
DC circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
6-261
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U901 Clearing the counters by paper source

(Message: Clear Paper Feeder Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the counter value by each paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Execute to clear counters when replacing the
maintenance parts.
Method
* :Display the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Display and clear the MP tray counter value
Cassette1 Display and clear Cassette 1 counter value
Cassette2 Display and clear Cassette 2 counter value
Cassette3 *1 Display Cassette 3 counter value
Cassette4 *1 Display Cassette 4 counter value
Cassette 5 *2 Display Cassette 4 counter value
Duplex Display and clear the duplex unit counter value
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2, *2: 3000-sheet side feeder

2.Select the counter to clear.
* :Unable to clear [Cassette 3], [Cassette 4] and [Cassette 5]
Completion
6-262
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U903 Clearing the jam counter

(Message: Clear Paper Misfeed Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Execute to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt

1.Select [Total Cnt].
* :Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
2.Change the screen using the [▲] [▼] key.
* :Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.
Completion
6-263
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U904 Clearing the service call error counter

(Message: Clear Service Call Counter)
Contents
Display and clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Execute to check the service call error. Execute to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Items Contents
Cnt Display and clears the service call error counter.
Total Cnt Display accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt

1.Select [Total Cnt].
* :Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.
Completion
6-264
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U905 Optional counter

(Message: Option Counter)
Contents
Display the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher
and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet
finisher and inner finisher.
Method
2.Select the device to check.
* :Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP *1 Display the counter value of the document processor.
DF *2 Display the counter value of the document finisher.
*1: DP installed machine, *2: DF installed machine
Method: DP
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Display the counter value of simultaneous duplex scanning
*1: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP installed machine
Method: DF
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter Display the counter value of the sorter.
Staple Display the counter value of the staple.
Punch Display the counter value of the PH usage.
Stack *1 Display the main tray exit counter value.
Saddle *1 Display the saddle exit counter value.
Fold *1 Display the center folding counter value.
Three Fold *1 Display the tri-folding counter value.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher installed machine
Completion
6-265
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U906 Resetting the partial operation

(Message: Reset Disable Function Mode)
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after
repairing the parts.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
3.Press the [Start] key to release the partial operation.

and on
Completion
U908 Total counter

(Message: Total Counter)
Contents
Display the total counter value.
Purpose
Display the total counter value to check.
Method
* :Display the total counter value.
Completion
6-266
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U910 Black rate data

(Message: Clear Coverage Data)
Contents
Clear the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4/Letter size paper and its period of time
(as shown on the service status page).
Purpose
Clear data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clear the print coverage data.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.
Completion
6-267
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U911 Counter by media type

(Message: Paper Size Counter)
Contents
Display feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Display the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method
* :Display feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Display A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Display B4 feed counts
B5 *1 Display B5 feed counts
Folio *1 Display Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Display Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Display Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Display Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Display Statement feed counts
ETC Display other feed count.
*1: metric specification, *2: inch specification
Completion
6-268
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U917 Read/Write Backup Data

(Message: Read/Write Backup HDD Data(USB))
Contents
Retrieve the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or write the data from the USB
memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Back up the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method
1.Turn the power switch off.
3.Turn the power switch on.
* :Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
5.Select the object item.
Items Contents Depending data*

Address Book Address book informa- -
tion
Job Account Job accounting infor- -
mation
One Touch One-touch key informa- Address book information
tion
User User management Job accounting information
information
Document Box Document box informa- Job accounting, User information
tion
Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Fax Forward FAX forward informa- Job accounting, User, Document Box information
tion
System System setting informa- -
tion
Network Network setting infor- -
mation
Job Setting Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting informa- -
tion
Fax Setting FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX
setting
Panel Setting Panel setting informa- Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
tion management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX set-
ting and Program
* :Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or
written.
6-269
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6.Select [Export] or [Import].
Items Contents
Import Importing data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
7.Press the [Start] key. Start reading or writing.

* :The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
* :When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
9.When selecting [Import], after completion of writing, turn the power switch off / on. Please wait
at least 5 seconds or more between power off and on
Error code list
Code Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00 toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import
(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion
6-270
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U920 Charge counter

(Message: Charge Counter)
Contents
Display the setting value of the charge count.
Purpose
Execute to check the setting value of the charge count.
Method
2.Select the item to display.
* :Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions counts
Method: Main Function

* :The charge counts for the main functions are displayed.
Items Contents
B/W Copy Display B/W copy counts.
B/W Prn Display B/W printer counts.
B/W FAX Display FAX counts.
Method: Sub Function

* :The charge counts for the sub functions are displayed.
Items Contents
Simplex Display simplex print counts.
Duplex Display duplex print counts.
Combine(Off) Display no combine printer counts.
Combine(2in1) Display combine printer counts (2in1).
Combine(4in1) Display combine printer counts (4in1).
Completion
6-271
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U927 Clearing all the charge/life counters

(Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only))
Contents
Clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values
are 1000 or less.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize the charge count and machine life count.

* :Clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion
U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Machine Life Counter)
Contents
Display the machine life counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine life counter value.
Method
* :Display the machine life counter value.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the machine life counter value.
Completion
6-272
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

(Message: Clear Charger Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and set the MC roller counter value
Purpose
Execute to confirm the counter value after main charger unit replacement. And also, execute
when clearing the counter value after the replacement.
Method
* :Display the MC roller counter value.
Items Contents
K Display the MC roller counter value for Black.
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
Completion
6-273
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log)
Contents
Set the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each main-
tenance item individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export maintenance log to USB memory

Export maintenance log to USB memory
* :If a USB memory is not inserted, [Execute] is grayed out .
* :Display OK/NG after execution.
Setting: Setting
* :Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
Items Contents
U000 to U019 Set the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
U600-U699 Set the maintenance log output for U600 to U699.
6-274
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2.Set on/off for the number desired to set.
Completion
U942 DP loop amount setting

(Message: Adjust DP Original Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method

Items Contents range Setting variation
value
Front Single-side original loop amount -32 to 32 0 0.20mm(DP-
7100)
0.16mm(DP-
7110)
Back *1 Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
Mix *2 Mixed original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
*1: Reversing duplex scanning machine only, *2: except DP-7120

Increase the set value if no feed jam or skew feed occurs and reduce the set value if creases
appear on the original.
Completion
6-275
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U952 Maintenance mode workflow

(Message: Maintenance Mode Work Flow)
Contents
Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow data of machine main unit or USB memory in
order
Purpose
Execute when you want to register routine maintenance mode work in advance.
Method
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Execute the workflow in a USB memory.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Register the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Display the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1.Select maintenance mode number to execute.
* :Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1.Make sure to check that the LED display turns off before turning off the power switch
5.Select [Execute(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory

* :Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow in order
Method: Execute
1.Select the place to save the data to execute.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit

3.Press the [Start] key to start the processing.
6-276
2SA/2RJ/2NK
* :The machine is preset with the following workflow at shipment.
Items Contents
SET UP 464,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK 119,140,469,127,464,412,464,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
Method: Entry(USB)
5.Select [Entry(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
7.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
8.Select [Execute].
* :Register the workflow data in a USB memory to the main unit.
Method: Entry
1.Select [Entry].
2.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the
workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers

* :Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow in order
6-277
2SA/2RJ/2NK
e.g.
It is possible to register in case if USB memory with the following command and wording / main-
tenance number (changeable) is inserted
File format: xxx.mwf
1, SET UP,464,410,000,927,278
2, HIGH ALTITUDE, 140,101,464
3, WARRANTY,089,000
4, MK-A,119,140,469,127,464,412,464,410,251
5, EH SETUP,411,034,246,211
Completion
6-278
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U964 The log correction flow

(Message: Non-display)
Contents
Transfer the log files stored in the HDD to a USB memory.
The data to be transferred includes a log and a panel display when acquiring logs.
Purpose
Transfer the log file stored in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
5.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

* :Start transferring the log files stored in the HDD to a USB memory.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7.[Completed] appears after normal completion.
and on
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Start retrieving the log when pressing and holding three keys on the operation panel (Status/Job
Cancel + System Menu/Counter + Stop) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns on when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.
Error code list
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error Failed to copy from HDD to USB memory
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
6-279
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U969 Toner area code

(Message: Toner Area Code)
Contents
Display the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check current setting of toner area code and model code.
Method
* :Display the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code
Model Code Model code
Completion
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture Mode)
Contents
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
In order to check the data, store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.

* :When detecting abnormal operation, an error code is displayed.
Error code list
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data
processing or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurred
Completion
6-280
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U984 Developer unit number

(Message: Developing Unit Number)
Contents
Display the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method
* :Display the developer unit number.
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer unit number.
Completion
6-281
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U985 Developer unit history

(Message: Developing Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Display the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
* :Select K.
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer unit history.
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 developer counter history.
Items Contents
Cnt History 1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion
6-282
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U989 HDD scan disk

(Message: HDD Scandisk)
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
There might be the possibility that HDD management information may become error when turn-
ing off the power while accessing the hard disk, HDD recovery is executed.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
3.Press the [Start] key to execute scandisk.

and on
Completion
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time

(Message: Clear Scanner Lamp ON Time)
Contents
Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the DP CIS usage.
Method
* :DP CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Display the accumulated DP CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
6-283
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U991 Scanner counter

(Message: Scanner Counter)
Contents
Display the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method
* :Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Display times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Display times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Display times of other scan operations.
Completion
6-284
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
<How to isolate the cause>
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
1. Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page 7-2).

(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass --> CCD failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Main unit CCD scan)
b. On the contact glass (scan by the main unit CCD)
2. Refer to image failure with engine factor (See page 7-66).

(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Primary transfer image formation process failure)
<Image data flow>
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB (LSU)
Sending :
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB PC
Printing data from PC :

APC PWB
Printer driver Engine PWB
(LSU)
7-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back
side through the mechanically reversed DP)
No. Contents Image sample

(2-1) Abnormal image
(2-2) Colored background
(2-3) Black or color spots
(2-4) Blurred characters
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the origi-

nal and the center of the copy image (Front
side)

nal and the center of the copy image (Back
side)
7-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(2-7) Horizontal black streaks
(2-8) Vertical streaks, band (black or color)
(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on

the original image and copy image (Front
side)

the original image and copy image (Back
side)
(2-11) Vertical streaks, band (white)
(2-12) moiré (front side)
7-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(2-13) moiré (back side)
(2-14) Missing entire image (White / Black)
(2-15) Image is dark partly or light
(2-16) Blurred image
(2-17) Image is missing partly
(2-18) Color shift
7-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(2-19) Skewed image
(2-20) Entire image is light
7-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

(When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not connected Clean the FFC terminals of Service
properly. Or it is faulty. the following FFC and recon- Manual -
nect them. If the FFC terminal Section 8
is deformed or broken, "PWBs"
replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the connection The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD connec- Detaching
connected, or is faulty. tion cable. Or, replace it. and reat-
taching the
HDD
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
HDD
4 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
attached properly. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC Clean the terminal of the con- Service
is not connected properly. nectors on the main PWB, Manual -
Or, the wire, FFC, the reconnect the connector of Section 8
PWB is faulty. the wire, and reconnect the "PWBs"
FFC terminal. If the wire or Detaching
the FFC is faulty, repair or and reat-
replace them. If not resolved, taching the
replace the main PWB. Main PWB
7-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to Function
Adjustment is not set. [Auto] at [System Menu/ Defaults
Counter] > [Common Set- (Opera-
tings] > [Function Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to Function
dark. [Manual] to adjust the den- Defaults
sity at [System Menu/Coun- (Opera-
ter] > [Common Settings] > tion Guide
[Function Defaults] - Section
6)
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Back-
Adjustment is not set. Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
Quality]. Density
Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Back-
density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ground density adjustment Image Quality], and adjust Density
is dark. the background density. Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during press-
scanning. ing.
6 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at Detaching
the backside of the contact and reat-
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. When the same phenomenon Mainte-
occurs at the table scanning nance
too, execute U411 Mode List
[Table(chartA)].
7-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Reattach the home position
tion sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
replace the FFC.
10 Checking the lamp unit The lamp unit is not Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
taching the
Lamp Unit
11 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty or Clean the DP slit glass or
not properly attached. reattach it.
12 Adjusting the left DP hinge The original is raised at Adjust the left DP hinge
height scanning. height.
13 DP replacement The DP frame is deformed Replace the document pro- Detaching
or the DP hinges are faulty. cessor. and reat-
taching the
DP
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
15 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass.
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the original The originals out of specifi- Ask a user to use the speci-
cation are used. (They are fied paper.
thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
3 Cleaning the DP convey- The DP conveying roller or Clean the DP conveying
ing roller and the bushings the bushing is dirty. roller and the bushing.
4 Checking the DP convey- The original conveying pul- Reattach the DP conveying
ing pulley and the pressure ley does not rotate pulley and the pressure
spring smoothly. spring.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
parts properly attached.
6 Checking the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up
up guide does not operate properly. guide.
7 Replacing the DP scan- The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning
ning guide deformed. guide.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights Adjust the left DP hinge
height of the DP do not match. height.
9 Checking the DP The document processor Check the positioning of the
is not properly installed in document processor and
the main unit. tighten the screws again.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of Adjust the DP hinges holding
holding pressure the DP hinge is not prop- pressure.
erly adjusted. (The DP
hinge does not operate
smoothly in the up and
down direction, and the
right and left sides of the
DP are distorted because
the DP can not hold the
opened condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
opened condition.)
7-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(Front side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)

1 Checking the original The originals are not prop- Reset the originals.
erly set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scan- Adjust U072 [Front]. Mainte-
ning the front page of the nance
originals at the document Mode List
processor is not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjust- Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
ment when DP scanning is (For the dual scan DP only) nance
not executed. Mode List
4 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjust- Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart Mainte-
ment when DP scanning is B)]. nance
not executed. Mode List
(Back side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)

1 Checking the original The originals are not prop- Reset the originals.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scan- Adjust U072 [Back]. Mainte-
ning the back page of the nance
originals at the document Mode List
processor is not adjusted.
7-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK


3 Executing U072 Scanning the image on the Adjust U072 [Front]. Mainte-
back of the size indication nance
plate. (U072 [Front] adjust- Mode List
ment value is not proper.)
4 Executing U411 Scanning the image on the Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
back of the size indication A)]. nance
plate. (U411 Mode List
[Table(ChartA)] adjust-
ment value is not proper.)
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and
and the DP original con- the DP conveying guide.
veying guide
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and Detaching
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- and reat-
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. taching the
dirty. Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror in the lamp Detaching
unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Checking the lamp unit The dust is adhered on the Remove dust inside the laser Detaching
lamp unit. path of the lamp unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
5 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
6 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. nance
Mode List
8 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
9 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
10 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front]. Mainte-
incorrect. (The streaks or nance
bands appear out of the Mode List
original image.)
11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. nance
original.)
7-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust U068 [DP Read]. Mainte-
scanning an original on the nance
DP is incorrect. Mode List
original image.)
14 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or nance
original.)
15 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or B)]. nance
original.)
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(Front side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Front]. Mainte-
original leading edge at the nance
document processor is not Mode List
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
scanning an original on the (For the dual scan DP only) nance
3 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart Mainte-
scanning an original on the B)]. nance
5 Replacing the DP convey- The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying
ing roller worn down. roller.
6 Applying the grease The DP drive motor rotates Apply the grease to the drive
irregularly and the exces- gear of the DP drive motor.
sive load is applied to the (EM-50LP: Part number
DP drive gear. (7BG010009H))
7 Replacing the DP drive The DP drive motor rotates Reattach the DP drive motor
motor irregularly due to the fault. and reconnect the connector.
If not repaired, replace it.
(Back side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Back]. Mainte-
leading edge on the back nance
page of the originals at the Mode List
document processor is not
properly set.
7-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK


unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Checking the lens cover The lens cover is off. Reattach the lens cover. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Executing U063 The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
backside of the contact scanner shading position. nance
glass is dirty. Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
and the DP original con- the DP original conveying
veying guide guide.
7-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-12) moiré (front side)


1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] at [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] > [Com- Defaults
changes depending on the mon Settings] > [Function (Opera-
image quality.) Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Reloading the original The original is not set Rotate the originals in 90
properly. (moiré appears in degrees and reset them.
the original scanning direc-
tion.)
(2-13) moiré (back side)


1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] at [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] > [Com- Defaults
changes depending on the mon Settings] > [Function (Opera-
image quality.) Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
tion.)
7-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
2 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is not Reattach the DP slit glass.
properly attached.
replace the FFC.
6 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt comes off. belt.
7 Checking the scanner The scanner drive gear is Reattach the scanner drive
drive gear not properly attached. gear.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the table scan- The table scanning of origi- Check if the same phenome- Measures
ning nals is faulty. non occurs when scanning for Table
on the contact glass. If it Scanning
occurs, perform the field
measures for the same phe-
nomenon that occurs when
scanning on the contact
glass.
3 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is bent. Reattach the DP slit glass.
4 Checking the DP scanning DP scanning guide is not Reattach the DP scanning
guide installed properly. guide.


1 Replacing the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Removing condensation The DP slit glass has con- Remove the condensation on
densation. the DP slit glass.
3 Removing condensation The mirror has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the mirror in the lamp unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Removing condensation The lens has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the lens in the lens unit. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Removing condensation The glass of the CCD Remove the condensation on Detaching
PWB has condensation. the CCD PWB glass using a and reat-
blower brush taching the
Lens Unit
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
the scanner is incorrect. A)]. nance
Mode List
replace the FFC.
7-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB


1 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly.
2 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manu- Original
paper side do not match ally. Size
on the operation panel. (Opera-
(The setting is incorrect.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Changing the setting The copy position is Set [Auto Image Rotation] to Function
rotated automatically. [Off] from the System Menu. Defaults
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
properly attached.
replace the FFC.
7-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(2-18) Color shift


1 Checking the original The originals out of specifi- Ask a user to use the speci-
cation are used. (They are fied paper.
thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
4 Checking the DP convey- The original conveying pul- Reattach the DP conveying
ing pulley and the pressure ley does not rotate pulley and the pressure
spring smoothly. spring.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
parts properly attached.
6 Replacing the DP scan- The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning
ning guide deformed. guide.
7 Checking the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up
up guide does not operate properly. guide.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights Adjust the left DP hinge
height of the DP do not match. height.
7-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the DP The document processor Check the positioning of the
is not properly installed in document processor and
the main unit. tighten the screws again.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of Adjust the DP hinges holding
holding pressure the DP hinge is not prop- pressure.
erly adjusted. (The DP
opened condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
opened condition.)
(2-19) Skewed image


1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
2 Checking the original width The original skews. Relocate the original width
guides guides.
3 Adjusting the right DP The right DP hinge position Adjust the right DP hinge Right DP
hinge position is not adjusted back and position back and forth. Hinge
forth. Adjust-
ment (DP-
7110
Installa-
tion Guide)
4 Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. Clean the DP feed roller.
(It can be removed by
cleaning.)
5 Replacing the DP feed The DP feed roller is dirty. Replace the DP feed roller.
roller (It cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
6 Cleaning the DP registra- The DP registration roller Clean the DP registration
tion roller is dirty. roller.
7 Checking the DP registra- The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration
tion pulley registration pulley is faulty. pulley.
7-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop Mainte-
before registration is amount at U942. nance
improper. Mode List


and the DP original con- the DP conveying guide.
veying guide
properly attached.
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality accord- Original
adjusted. (The original ing to the originals. Image
type and image quality dif- (Opera-
fers.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
to "On".) Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [EcoPrint] tion Guide
- Section
6)
6 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be Adjust-
adjusted. (The density set- dark. ment/
ting is too light.) Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Back- Adjust-
adjusted. ([Background ground Density Adjustment to ment/
density] is set to "Off".) make dark. Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] set- Change to [Off] at [System Function
ting is [On] Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [Prevent Bleed-thru] tion Guide
- Section
6)
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
10 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
adjusted. FD(ChartA)] and [DP nance
FU(ChartA)]. Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP)


nal and the center of the copy image
7-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the original image and copy image
(3-9) Moiré
7-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(3-14) Color shift
(3-15) Skewed image
7-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

Object: Dual scan DP
(When scanning the back side through DP)

1 Checking the DP relay The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB.
PWB properly attached.
2 Checking the SATA cable The SATA cable is not Reinsert the connectors of Service
properly connected. the SATA cable between the Manual -
DPSHD PWB and the DP Section 8
relay PWB. "PWBs"
3 Replacing the SATA cable The SATA cable is Replace the SATA cable Service
deformed or broken. between the DPSHD PWB Manual -
and the DP relay PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
4 Checking the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is not Reconnect the DPSHD PWB
PWB properly connected. to the DPCIS.
5 Replacing the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
PWB
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then exe- Detaching
cute U091 and U411. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS-
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7 Replacing the DP relay The DP relay PWB is Replace the DP relay PWB.
PWB faulty.
8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Setting Background Den- The original background Set [Background Density Back-
sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
ground density adjustment Quality]. Density
is set to Off. Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Setting Background Den- The original background Set [Background Density Back-
sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
3 Executing U411 The CIS image adjust- Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
ment (U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. nance
FD(ChartA)]) is not exe- Mode List
cuted.
4 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
5 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller does not Reattach the CIS roller driv-
rotate properly. ing section.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
7-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB


1 Checking the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
7-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB

1 Reloading the original The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly.
2 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust the DPCIS center line Mainte-
is not adjusted. by executing U072 [CIS]. nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
is not adjusted. nance
Mode List
4 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
is not adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. nance
Mode List
7-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Executing U072 The leading edge timing is Adjust U072 [CIS]. Mainte-
improperly adjusted. nance
(Streaks or bands appear Mode List
on the image outside the
original.)
2 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
improperly adjusted. nance
original.)
3 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
improperly adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. nance
original.)
4 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
5 Cleaning the DP convey- The DP conveying guide is Clean the DP conveying
ing guide dirty. guide.
6 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration pulley Clean the DP registration pul-
tion pulley is dirty. ley.
8 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line cor- Execute U091. Mainte-
rection) is not executed. nance
Mode List
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
7-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB

1 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust the DPCIS center line Mainte-
is not adjusted. by executing U072 [CIS]. nance
Mode List
2 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
is not adjusted. nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
is not adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. nance
Mode List
7-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
3 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line cor- Execute U091. Mainte-
rection) is not executed. nance
Mode List
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-9) Moiré

1 Changing the image qual- The image quality mode is Change the image quality Printer
ity mode not set properly. (Moiré mode. Driver
changes depending on the Operation
image mode) Guide
tion.)
3 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
adjustment is not exe- FD(ChartA)]. nance
cuted. Mode List


relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
7-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB


1 Checking the image quality Image quality is not prop- Select the image quality fit- Original
mode erly adjusted. (Original ting the original type. Image
type and image quality are (Opera-
mismatched.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the fold or creases of
creased. the original.
DP conveying guide.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB


1 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass has conden- Remove condensation on the
sation. CIS glass.
DP conveying guide.
3 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is warped. Reattach the CIS glass.
4 Replacing the CIS glass The CIS glass has some Replace the CIS glass.
scratches.
6 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
adjustment is not exe- FD(ChartA)]. nance
cuted. Mode List
7 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is not properly Reattach the DPCIS. Detaching
attached. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
8 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then exe- Detaching
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-38
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Reloading the original The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly.
2 Setting the original size Actual original size and Set the original size manu- Original
detected original size are ally. Size
mismatched. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Changing the Border The Border Erase function Lower the setting of the Bor- Border
Erase function is not properly set. (Setting der Erase. Erase
is too large.) (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-39
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-14) Color shift


1 Checking the first side There is a factor in the Check if the same phenome- Measures
scanning through DP original feeding. non occurs when scanning for 1st
the front side through DP. If it Page DP
occurs, perform the field Scanning
scanning the front side
through DP.
2 Checking the CIS roller The originals are conveyed Reattach the CIS roller.
without contacting the CIS
roller.
3 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying roller is Clean the DP conveying
ing roller (before and after dirty. roller and the bushing.
scanning)
4 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away Reattach the DPCIS. Detaching
from the CIS glass. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
(3-15) Skewed image


1 Checking the first (front) This is the same as the Perform the treatment when Measures
side DP scanning issue that occurs when scanning the first (front) side for 1st
scanning the first (front) through DP. Page DP
side through DP. Scanning
attached. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
7-40
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the table scan- The table scanning of origi- Check if the same phenome- Measures
ning nals is faulty. non occurs when scanning for Table
on the contact glass. If it Scanning
occurs, perform the field
scanning on the contact
glass.
2 Executing U411 U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] is Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
not executed. FD(ChartA)]. nance
Mode List
3 Cleaning the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
attached. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
7-41
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(4-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift

7-43
2SA/2RJ/2NK


the original image and copy image
(4-10) Moiré
(4-11) No image comes out (White or Black)
7-44
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(4-15) Skewed image
7-45
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

1 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. Service
connected, or it is faulty. If FFC terminal is turned up Manual -
or deformed, or FFC is dam- Section 8
aged, replace FFC. "PWBs"
CCD PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the cable The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD cable, or
connected, or is faulty. replace it.
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
6 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors Detaching
to the main PWB. If the wire and reat-
is pinched up or has damage, taching the
repair or replace it. If not Main PWB
repaired, replace the main
PWB.
7-46
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to Function
Adjustment is not set. [Auto] at [System Menu/ Defaults
Counter] > [Common Set- (Opera-
tings] > [Function Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to Function
dark. [Manual] to adjust the den- Defaults
sity at [System Menu/Coun- (Opera-
ter] > [Common Settings] > tion Guide
[Function Defaults] - Section
6)
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Back-
Adjustment is not set. Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
Quality]. Density
Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Back-
density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during press-
scanning. ing.
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
A)]. nance
Mode List
7-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lens Unit
12 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-48
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-49
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift

1 Removing foreign material There is a load on the Remove the foreign objects
scanner movement since on the scanner rails.
the foreign objects adhere
on the scanner rails.
taching the
Lamp Unit
3 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is
improper.
4 Removing foreign material The foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects
on the scanner wire drum. on the scanner wire drums.
5 Removing foreign material The foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects Detaching
on the pulley groove. on the pulley of the lamp unit and reat-
assy. taching the
Lamp Unit
6 Checking the scanner The scanner wire is dirty or Clean the scanner wire or Detaching
wires dropped out. reattach it. and reat-
taching the
Scanner
Wires
7 Replacing the scanner There are scratches on the Replace the scanner wires. Detaching
wire scanner wire. and reat-
taching the
Scanner
Wires
7-50
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set on the contact glass.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass. Detaching
properly attached. and reat-
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is Adjust U067 [Front]. Mainte-
not adjusted. nance
Mode List
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scan- Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
ning adjustment is not exe- A)]. nance
cuted. Mode List
7-51
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Executing U066 Scan the image at back Adjust U066 [Front]. Mainte-
side of the size indication nance
plate. (Adjustment value at Mode List
U066 [Front] is not appro-
priate.
4 Executing U411 Scan the image at back Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
side of the size indication A)]. nance
plate. (Adjustment value at Mode List
U411 [Table(ChartA)] is not
appropriate.
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-52
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. nance
original.)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and Detaching
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- and reat-
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. taching the
dirty. Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lamp Unit
9 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
10 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. nance
Mode List
replace the FFC.
7-53
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
properly. (The leading
edge of the original is not
set on the contact glass
properly)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front]. Mainte-
timing is incorrect nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
timing is incorrect A)]. nance
Mode List
5 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt loose. belt.
6 Checking the scanner wire Installation of the scanner Retighten the screw of the
drums wire drum is loosen. scanner wire drums.
7 Checking the scanner The attachment of the Retighten the screw of the
drive gear scanner drive gear is scanner drive gear.
loose.
7-54
2SA/2RJ/2NK

unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lamp Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Checking the shading The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
plate backside of the contact scanner shading position. nance
glass is dirty. Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-55
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-10) Moiré
1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
changes depending on the [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
image quality.) tion Defaults]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Checking the original The original is not set Rotate the originals in 90
tion.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scan- Change the value at U065 Mainte-
ning direction is large. [Main Scan] to reduce the nance
(This problem occurs when scanner magnification in the Mode List
the print ratio is set as main scanning direction.
100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
scanner section is incor- A)]. nance
rect Mode List
(4-11) No image comes out (White or Black)

1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-56
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting Image quality is not prop- Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
erly adjusted. (Original tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
type and image quality are [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
mismatched.) tion Defaults]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
3 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
4 Checking the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Checking the contact glass Original is scanned on the Set the booklet original while
bent contact glass. not bending the contact
glass.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
10 Replacing the lamp unit A part of LED does not Check if the LED lamp lights Detaching
switch on. by executing U061 [CCD]. If it and reat-
does not light, replace the taching the
lamp unit and execute U411 Lamp Unit
[Table(ChartA)]. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
11 Removing the foreign As the foreign objects Remove the foreign objects
objects and applying adhere on the scanner rail on the scanner rails and
grease or the grease is not apply the grease (PG-671) to
enough, the lamp unit does the rails if necessary.
not operate correctly.
7-57
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Checking the lamp unit The mirror is attached at Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
the incorrect position. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
13 Replacing the lamp unit The LED reflector is not Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
attached properly or and reat-
deformed. taching the
Lamp Unit
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-58
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass has con- Remove the condensation on Detaching
densation. the contact glass. and reat-
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Checking the lamp unit The mirror has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the mirror in the lamp unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Checking the lens unit The lens has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the lens in the lens unit. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Checking the CCD PWB The glass of the CCD Remove the condensation on Detaching
PWB has condensation. the CCD PWB glass using a and reat-
blower brush taching the
Lens Unit
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
the scanner is incorrect. A)]. nance
Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-59
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB.
7-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting Marked part by highlighter Set [Highlight] to [On] at Original
pen on the original cannot [System Menu/Counter] > Image
be scanned. [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
tion Defaults] > [Original tion Guide
Image] - Section
8)
properly.
3 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manu- Original
paper side do not match ally. Size
on the operation panel. (Opera-
(The setting is incorrect.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Changing the setting The copy position is Set [Auto Image Rotation] to Function
rotated automatically. [Off] from the System Menu. Defaults
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
5 Changing the setting The Border Erase function Lower the setting of the Bor- Border
is not properly set. (Setting der Erase. Erase
is too large.) (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The original scanning side Clean the original scanning
of the contact glass is dirty. side of the contact glass.
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7-61
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
replace the FFC.
taching the
Lens Unit
11 Checking the original size Original size and paper Replace the original size sen-
sensor size are not matched on sor.
the operation panel dis-
play. (Original size sensor
is misdetected.)
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-62
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-15) Skewed image

1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set. (The original is
skewed.)
2 Checking the scanner unit The scanner unit height is Adjust the whole scanner unit Adjust-
improper. height. ment of
Scanner
Unit
Height
taching the
Lamp Unit
7-63
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality accord- Original
adjusted. (The original ing to the originals. Image
type and image quality dif- (Opera-
fers.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
2 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
to "On".) Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [EcoPrint] tion Guide
- Section
6)
3 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be Adjust-
adjusted. (The density set- dark. ment/
ting is too light.) Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Back- Adjust-
adjusted. ([Background ground Density Adjustment to ment/
density] is set to "Off".) make dark. Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] set- Change to [Off] at [System Function
ting is [On] Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [Prevent Bleed-thru] tion Guide
- Section
6)
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
A)]. nance
Mode List
7-64
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace the FFC.
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-65
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(5-1) Background appear
(5-2) Black spots (toner smudges)
(5-3) Image is missing partly (blank image, white
spots)
(5-4) Blank image
(5-6) Dirty reverse side
(5-8) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black)
(5-9) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the
original image and the copy image (varia-
tion of paper leading edge timing)
(5-11) Offset
(5-12) Fusing failure
(5-13) Paper skew at the trailing edge
(5-14) Uneven transfer
(5-16) The vertical white streaks or bands appear
on the image when scanning the first or
second side through DP
(5-17) Vertical streaks, bands
7-66
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
1 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
that spans between papers) taching the
of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
transfer belt. After cleaning, Transfer
in case if it is not improved Unit
even performing the calibra-
tion, replace the primary
transfer unit.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the secondary trans-
transfer bias contact bias contact is deformed. fer bias contact so that it
grounds the shaft of the sec-
ondary transfer roller
securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer If image failure occurs at the Detaching
transfer roller roller is dirty. circumferential pitch of the and reat-
secondary transfer roller, taching the
clean it. If it is not improved, Second-
replace the secondary trans- ary Trans-
fer roller. fer Roller
7-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Black spots (toner smudges)

1 Cleaning the cleaning pre- The transfer belt cantbe- Clean the cleaning pre-brush Detaching
brush cleanedasthecleaningpre- of the primary transfer sec- and reat-
brushisdirty.' tion. And Next, execute U474 taching the
[Execute] (LSU cleaning) to Primary
perform cleaning of the trans- Transfer
fer belt. Unit Main-
tenance
Mode List
2 Checking the primary There is dirt and scratches If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit of the long period that the outer pitch (long period and reat-
spans between the sheets that spans between papers) taching the
at the outer pitch (A3 3- of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
sheet continuous printing) transfer belt with the soft Transfer
of the transfer belt cloth that has toner on it. If it Unit
is not improved, replace the
primary transfer unit.
transfer roller roller is dirty or has some circumferential pitch of the and reat-
scratches. secondary transfer roller, taching the
4 Checking the fuser unit Fuser belt is dirty. Or, for- If image failure occurs at the Detaching
eign objects are adhered circumferential pitch (96mm) and reat-
or scratched. of the fuser belt, clean it. Or, taching the
remove foreign objects on the Fuser Unit
fuser belt by printing the solid
image. If it is not improved,
replace the fuser unit.
5 Primary transfer unit The transfer belt cantbe- Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement cleanedasthecleaningpre- unit. and reat-
brushisfaulty.' taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-68
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-3) Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots)

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- The paper is stored in the Install the cassette heater if Installing
age place high humidity environment. necessary. And instruct the the
user to store the paper in a optional
place with low humidity. equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
3 Checking the primary Surface of the transfer belt If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit is dirty or scratched. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
transfer belt. If it is not Transfer
improved, replace the pri- Unit
mary transfer unit.
5 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
properly set. the System Menu. MP Tray
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
6 Executing U161 The fuser temperature is Execute U161 [Print] and Mainte-
shifted largely. reset the fuser temperature to nance
the default value. Mode List
7-69
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-4) Blank image

1 Checking the right cover The right conveying unit is Check the lock of the right
not closed. cover Assy, and open and
close the right cover (convey-
ing unit).
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • Transfer high volt-
age PWB - Engine PWB •
Transfer high voltage PWB -
Feed image PWB
3 Checking the transfer high- The secondary transfer Replace the transfer high- Detaching
voltage PWB bias output from the trans- voltage PWB. and reat-
fer high-voltage PWB is taching the
faulty. Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
4 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
PWB faulty. PWB.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the sec- Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
ondary transfer high-volt- and reat-
age (3.3V to 0V) is not taching the
output from the engine Engine
PWB. PWB
1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to fit them with the
fit with the paper size. paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when Adjust the center line at U034 Mainte-
image writing the data is [LSU Out Left]. nance
incorrect. Mode List
7-70
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-6) Dirty reverse side

2 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
bias is improperly set. bias to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
3 Checking the fuser pres- The fuser pressure roller is Perform the duplex printing
sure roller dirty caused by the paper with the solid image and
type setting. clean the fuser pressure
roller. And set proper paper
thickness in System Menu.
4 Cleaning the conveying The conveying guide or the Clean the conveying guide
guide and the developer developer unit is dirty. and developer unit.
unit
7-71
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if Installing
age place humidity environment. necessary. And instruct the the
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
3 Checking the right cover The right DP hinge position Open the right cover (convey-
is not adjusted back and ing unit) once, and close it
forth. firmly.
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer roller If the primary transfer roller is
transfer unit does not contact the trans- out of position, correct the
fer belt or weak. pressing position.
5 Executing U101 The proper current does Execute U101 [Force exe- Mainte-
not flow on the primary cute]. nance
transfer roller. Mode List
6 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
7 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer
transfer bias contact bias contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed, so, the impres- shape so that it is grounded
sion is unavailable. securely.
Feed image PWB
9 Checking the transfer high- The secondary transfer Replace the transfer high- Detaching
voltage PWB bias output from the trans- voltage PWB. and reat-
fer high-voltage PWB is taching the
faulty. Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
11 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the sec- Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
ondary transfer high-volt- and reat-
age (3.3V to 0V) is not taching the
output from the engine Engine
PWB. PWB
7-72
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-8) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black)

1 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
transfer belt. Transfer
Unit
2 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure Detaching
appears in the fuser belt and reat-
length interval, clean the taching the
fuser belt. Fuser Unit
3 Checking the right cover Only one side of the right Close the right cover (con-
cover (conveying unit) is veying unit).
closed, or the pressure
spring is deformed.
4 Checking the secondary The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring. Detaching
transfer unit properly attached or If not repaired, replace the and reat-
deformed. secondary transfer unit. taching the
Second-
ary Trans-
fer Unit
5 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit faulty. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
6 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
some scratches. and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-73
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-9) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing)
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is Adjust the leading edge tim- Mainte-
not properly adjusted. ing at U034 [LSU Out Top]. nance
Mode List
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount Execute U051 to adjust the Mainte-
before registration is paper loop amount before nance
improper. registration. Mode List
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying Execute U032. If the paper Mainte-
related clutch does not feed / conveying related nance
operate correctly. clutches (feed clutch, middle Mode List
clutch or registration clutch) Detaching
do not operate properly, reat- and reat-
tach them and reconnect the taching the
connectors. If not repaired, Feed Drive
replace the feed drive unit. Unit

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Basic
used. the specification. Paper
Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Applying the grease The drives from the con- Apply the grease to the drive
veying motors are not gear of the conveying related
smoothly transmitted. motor. (EM-50LP: Part num-
ber (7BG010009H))
4 Replacing the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser forwarding guide Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
is deformed or the fuser and reat-
pressure is uneven. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-74
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-11) Offset
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Cassette /
used. the specification, or change MP Tray
to the media type setting Settings
closest to the specified paper. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Change the settings accord- Cassette /
properly set. ing to the media type (paper MP Tray
weight). Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Firmware upgrade The initial setting value Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
change for the transfer belt to the latest version Update
cleaning bias by the
engine firmware is not
reflected. (Implemented in
the middle of production)
4 Executing U107 The setting value of the Reset the primary transfer Mainte-
primary transfer cleaning cleaning voltage to the nance
voltage at U107 is incor- default value at U107. Mode List
rect.
5 (If occurs only on the first The transfer belt is not Set [On] at U107 Mainte-
sheet after finishing contin- cleaned properly at the [1stSheetCLN B/W]. (Engine nance
uous printing) Executing time of the first sheet out- firmware version 002.007 or Mode List
U107 put after finishing continu- after)
ous printing.
6 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
Unit
7 Checking the primary The primary transfer clean- Clean the primary transfer
transfer cleaning bias con- ing bias contact smudges cleaning bias contact. Or,
tact or is deformed. correct its shape so that it is
securely grounded.
8 Executing U106 The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
9 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
7-75
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10 Executing U161 The higher fuser tempera- Execute U161 [Print] and Mainte-
ture is set. reset the fuser temperature to nance
the default value. Mode List
11 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure Detaching
appears in the fuser belt and reat-
length interval, clean the taching the
fuser belt. Fuser Unit
12 Checking the fuser dis- If toner organic material If image failure occurs at the Detaching
charger needles adheres and accumulates circumferential pitch of the and reat-
on the leading ends of the fuser belt after cleaning, taching the
fuser discharger needles check the fuser discharge Fuser Dis-
depending on the high needle. If yellow dirt (toner charger
print volume with the high organic objects) adhere to Needle
print coverage, the charg- the fuser discharge needle, Unit Main-
ing efficiency is reduced. replace the fuser discharge tenance
needle and execute U167 Mode List
[Correction] to reset.
13 Primary transfer unit Transfer cleaning voltage Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement is not applied due to the unit. and reat-
broken wire in the primary taching the
transfer unit. Primary
Transfer
Unit
nected properly or, the lowing wire connectors and Manual -
cleaning bias of the pri- reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
mary transfer does not there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
apply as the wire is faulty. the wire. • Transfer high volt-
Feed image PWB
15 Replacing the transfer The transfer high-voltage Replace the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB PWB is faulty. voltage PWB. and reat-
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
18 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
some scratches. and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-76
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-12) Fusing failure

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the proper
used. paper.
2 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Executing U161 The lower fuser tempera- Change the fuser tempera- Mainte-
ture is set. ture to the default value. nance
Mode List
4 Replacing the fuser unit The nipped pressure Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
(width) to the solid image is and reat-
low and fuser pressure set- taching the
ting (spring) is too weak. Fuser Unit
7-77
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-13) Paper skew at the trailing edge

1 Cleaning the secondary The neighboring parts of Clean the secondary transfer Cleaning
transfer unit the secondary transfer roller, discharge needle, dis- the Sec-
roller are dirty with paper charge sheet and the paper ondary
dust. conveying route. Transfer /
Separa-
tion Sec-
tion
2 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking
material such as a piece of fan motor if it does not oper-
paper. ate properly when executing
U037 [Toner].
3 Relocating the paper width The set position of the Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper paper width guides / MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides is mis- guides to fit them with the
matched with the paper paper size.
size, and so, the paper is
skewed.
4 Checking the conveying The registration rollers or Check if the registration roll-
section the middle pulleys are not ers and the middle pulleys
properly attached, or they are properly attached. If nec-
are dirty. essary, reattach them. Also,
they are dirty with toner or
paper dust, clean them.
5 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (convey-
right cover closed. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
6 Reinstalling the fuser unit The fuser unit is not prop- Insert the fuser unit straight Detaching
erly installed. into the main unit, and lock and reat-
both sides of the fuser unit taching the
firmly. Fuser Unit
7 Adjusting the fuser unit The fuser unit height is Adjust the height adjusting Adjusting
height improper. lever at the machine inner the fuser
front side that can adjust the unit height
fuser unit height.
7-78
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-14) Uneven transfer

1 Opening and closing the The conveying section is Open the right cover (convey-
conveying section not closed completely. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
2 Cleaning the cleaning pre- Paper dust is accumulated Remove the cleaning cover
brush around the cleaning pre- and clean the cleaning pre-
brush. brush.
securely grounded.
4 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
Unit
5 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Repair the deformation of the Detaching
transfer unit roller is faulty. Or, the pres- pressure spring. If not and reat-
sure spring is deformed. repaired, replace the second- taching the
ary transfer unit. Second-
ary Trans-
fer Unit
7 Primary transfer unit There is a scratch on the Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement surface of the transfer belt. unit. and reat-
Or, the primary transfer taching the
cleaning bias contact is Primary
faulty. Transfer
Unit
Feed image PWB
9 Replacing the transfer The primary transfer clean- Replace the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB ing bias contact is faulty. voltage PWB. and reat-
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
7-79
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
12 Replacing the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the drive section or the and reat-
fuser press-release section taching the
are deformed or worn Fuser Unit
down.

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the new dry
paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if Installing
age place humidity environment. necessary. And instruct the the
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
(5-16) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning the
first or second side through DP
mary transfer unit.
3 Checking the exit feedshift Paper contacts to the exit Check the deflection of paper Detaching
guide feedshift guide strongly. at the time of output and rein- and reat-
stall the exit feedshift guide. tachint the
Exit Unit
7-80
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Cleaning the fuser unit The fuser pressure roller, Execute duplex printing with Detaching
the fuser pressure roller the solid image to clean the and reat-
separation pulley and the fuser pressure roller. And taching the
fuser separation plate are also clean the separation Fuser Unit
dirty by the paper dust. claw of the fuser pressure
roller and the fuser separa-
tion plate. If the parts in the
fuser unit is broken, replace
the fuser unit.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Cleaning the exit feedshift The exit feedshift guide Clean the exit feedshift guide. Detaching
guide has toner dirt or welding. and reat-
tachint the
Exit Unit
4 Cleaning the discharger The discharge needle is Clean the discharge needle
needle dirty by the paper dust or which is upper part of the
the toner. secondary transfer roller by
the Cleaning brush, etc..
mary transfer unit.
6 Cleaning the cleaning pre- The transfer belt cantbe- Clean the cleaning pre-brush Detaching
brush cleanedasthecleaningpre- of the primary transfer sec- and reat-
brushisdirty.' tion. And Next, execute U474 taching the
[Execute] (LSU cleaning) to Primary
perform cleaning of the trans- Transfer
fer belt. Unit Main-
tenance
Mode List
securely grounded.
7-81
2SA/2RJ/2NK

transfer roller roller is dirty, is deformed circumferential pitch of the and reat-
or is worn down. secondary transfer roller, taching the
Feed image PWB
10 Replacing the transfer The cleaning bias is not Replace the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB generated from the trans- voltage PWB. and reat-
fer high-voltage PWB. taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
13 Replacing the fuser dis- The fuser discharge nee- Replace the fuser discharge
charger needle unit dle is dirty. needle unit.

1 Checking paper size set- The MP tray size is Set the MP tray paper size
ting detected as unknown [---]. properly. And pull out the sub
tray until the position where
the triangle mark can be seen
or store it in the MP frame
completely.
7-82
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(6-7) Blank image
(6-8) Toner dirt
(6-9) Periodic toner dirt
(6-10) No image comes out (Black)
(6-11) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)
(6-12) Irregular horizontal white streaks, white
spots
(6-13) Horizontal uneven density
(6-15) Offset
(6-16) Gradation reproducibility is low
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of
paper which is outside of the image area
(6-20) Vertical uneven density
7-83
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

1 Measures for the image Uncharged toner is Execute "Developer Adjust-
quality improvement increasing due to the high Refresh", "Calibration" and ment/
density continuous print- "Tone Curve Adjustment" in Mainte-
ing in the high temperature order. nance
environment. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the toner cover- Toner coverage (T/C) is The sensor value on U155 Mainte-
age (T/C) high. [Toner] is a positive value, nance
execute developer refresh Mode List
until the value becomes [0]. Adjust-
ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
3 Checking the print cover- The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on Mainte-
age toner is low. the service status page and if nance
printing is done with high Mode List
density, execute the devel- Adjust-
oper refresh. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Clean the developer bias
bias contact is dirty or deformed. contact, or correct its shape
so that it grounds securely.
5 Checking the developer The toner sensor is faulty. Reinstall the developer unit. Detaching
unit Replace it if it is not fixed. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
6 Checking the high-voltage The high-voltage contact of Clean the high voltage con- Detaching
contact the main high-voltage tact and correct it to ensure and reat-
PWB is dirty or deformed. that it is grounded. Or, rein- taching the
stall the main high voltage Main High
PWB. Voltage
PWB
7-84
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Main high voltage
PWB - Engine PWB • Main
high voltage PWB - Feed
image PWB
8 Replacing the main high- Developing bias output Replace the main high-volt- Detaching
voltage PWB from main high voltage age PWB. and reat-
PWB is high taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-85
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the If the machine inside temper- Mainte-
inside the main unit installation environment. ature is below 10°C / 50°F at nance
U139, instruct user to change Mode List
the installation environment
of the room temperature
16°C / 60.8°F or higher. (This
phenomenon tends to occur
immediately after being left in
a low temperature environ-
ment for few days if turning
on the power).
2 Setting the drum heater Developing section is Set [ON] at U339 [Drum Mainte-
affected by the humidity Heater]. nance
Mode List
3 Checking the main charger The MC roller surface is Clean the MC roller surface. Detaching
unit dirty. If not improved, replace the and reat-
main charger unit. taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
4 Reinstalling the main char- The main charger unit is Reinstall the main charger Detaching
ger unit not installed properly. unit to the drum unit, and and reat-
Reinstall the drum unit to the taching the
main body to ensure that the Main
connector is connected. Charger
Unit
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
5 Main charger unit replace- The MC roller reaches its If the MC roller counter is Mainte-
ment life. over "400,000" at U930, nance
replace the main charger unit Mode List
as the drum surface potential Detaching
become low under the low and reat-
temperature environment. taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
6 Changing the setting The setting value of the If the setting values at U100 Mainte-
main high-voltage is incor- are not the default values, nance
rect. reset them to the default val- Mode List
ues.
7 Checking the drum unit The drum is faulty. Replace the drum unit. Detaching
and the developer unit and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
7-86
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the main charger Main charger high voltage Clean the charger high volt- Detaching
high-voltage contact contact on the main high age contact and correct it to and reat-
voltage PWB is dirty or ensure that it is grounded. Or, taching the
deformed. reinstall the main high voltage Main High
PWB. Voltage
PWB
PWB - Engine PWB • Main
image PWB
10 Replacing the main high- Main charger bias output Replace the main high-volt- Detaching
voltage PWB from the main high voltage age PWB. and reat-
PWB is low. taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-87
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Checking the ID sensor Calibration is not executed Output the event log report Event Log
properly. and if there is a history of Report
C7601 or C7602, clean the Output
front ID sensor or rear ID Adjust-
sensor, and execute calibra- ment/
tion. If not improved, replace Mainte-
front ID sensor or rear ID nance
sensor. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
nected properly. The for- lowing wire connectors and Manual -
eign objects adhere on the reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
connector terminal which there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
makes contact failure. Or, the wire. • Front ID sensor /
the wire is faulty. rear ID sensor - Feed drive
PWB
3 Checking the cleaning The cleaning solenoid Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If Mainte-
solenoid does not operate. the cleaning solenoid does nance
not operate properly, reattach Mode List
it and reconnect the connec-
tor. If not repaired, replace it.
4 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Replace the feed drive PWB.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
6 Checking the connection FFC terminal is not con- Reconnect the following FFC. Service
nected properly. The for- If FFC terminal is deformed Manual -
eign objects adhere on the or FFC is damaged, replace Section 8
connector terminal which FFC. • LSU (APC PWB) - "PWBs"
makes contact failure. Or, Engine PWB
FFC is faulty.
7 LSU replacement The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-88
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Reinstalling the toner con- Toner is collected on one Sufficiently shake the toner Replacing
tainer side. container and reinstall it to the Toner
the main unit. Container
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Replacing the toner con- The toner supply opening If toner opening does not Replacing
tainer does not open. open, replace the toner con- the Toner
tainer. Container
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
3 Measures for the image Calibration is executed Execute "Developer Adjust-
quality improvement with the condition of the Refresh", "Calibration" and ment/
light density, and develop- "Tone Curve Adjustment" in Mainte-
ing bias is controlled with a order. nance
high level. Or, the toner is Menu
deteriorated due to many (Opera-
low density printing. tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Checking the drum unit The developing roller does Reinstall the drum unit and Detaching
and the developer unit not contact with the drum the developer unit. and reat-
as the drum unit or the taching the
developer unit is not Drum Unit
installed properly. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
5 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
ends of the developer unit.
6 Checking the toner cover- Toner density (T/C) is low. If the sensor value at U155 Mainte-
age (T/C) [Toner] is minus value, the nance
toner should be supplied forc- Mode List
ibly with U132 [Execute] until
the value become [0].
7-89
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the print cover- The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on Mainte-
age toner is high. the service status page and if nance
printing is done with low den- Mode List
sity lower than 2%, execute Adjust-
the developer refresh. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
8 Checking the developer The toner sensor has a Execute Developer Refresh Adjust-
unit fault and so toner is not when the PG image output as ment/
supplied. test page is too light. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
9 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Correct the developer bias
bias contact is deformed. contact so that it grounds
securely.
10 Executing U140 The developer bias values Execute U140 and reset the Mainte-
that are fixed (except developer bias to the default nance
"Sleeve AC" and "Mag value. Mode List
DC") and are not changed
according to the Calibra-
tion are changed from the
default value.
11 Correcting the primary Primary transfer bias is not Execute U101 [Force exe- Mainte-
transfer bias contact applied properly cute]. After that, select U101 nance
[Voltage] > [Value] and if the Mode List
displayed value is 290 (upper Detaching
limit value) or 85 (lower limit and reat-
value), correct the primary taching the
transfer bias contact. Output Transfer
event log report and if there is High Volt-
a history of [C513*] is avail- age PWB
able, replace transfer high
voltage PWB.
7-90
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Checking the primary Primary transfer bias is not Select U101 [Current] > [Tar- Mainte-
transfer bias applied properly get] and increase the setting nance
value [+50] and execute Mode List
[Force Execute]. If it is Detaching
improved, check the primary and reat-
transfer bias terminal, and if it taching the
is no problem, replace the pri- Primary
mary transfer unit. Transfer
Unit
13 Checking the primary The primary transfer roller When the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit is not properly attached. roller comes off, replace the and reat-
primary transfer unit. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
14 Checking the primary The image become light If the conductive grease
transfer unit since there is a conductiv- adheres in between the drive
ity between the backup roller and the back up roller,
roller of the primary trans- wipe off the grease.
fer unit and the drive roller,
and the secondary transfer
current leaks to the backup
roller.
15 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
16 Primary transfer unit Transfer belt is worn out. Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
makes contact failure. Or, the wire. • Main high voltage
the wire is faulty. PWB - Engine PWB • Main
image PWB
18 Replacing the main high- The main high-voltage Replace the main high-volt- Detaching
voltage PWB PWB is faulty. age PWB. and reat-
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
7-91
2SA/2RJ/2NK

makes contact failure. Or, the wire. • Transfer high volt-
the wire is faulty. age PWB - Engine PWB •
Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
makes contact failure. Or, the wire. • Toner motor - Feed
the wire is faulty. image PWB
22 Replacing the toner motor Toner motor does not oper- Execute U135 to check the Mainte-
ate properly toner motor operation. If the nance
toner motor does not operate Mode List
properly, reattach it and
reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-92
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Executing Drum refresh Condensation on the drum Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
surface ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Checking the setting Drum surface potential is If the following value at U100 Mainte-
higher than the setting is out of the range of the nor- nance
value. mal value, the electric charge Mode List
adjustment is not correctly Detaching
performed. And, if the value and reat-
at U100 [Chk Current] is out taching the
from 100 to 250 or changing Drum Unit
value is more than 30, there
is an error on the electric
charge. Replace the drum
unit (Eraser damage or drum
grounding failure) or correct
the main high voltage PWB
contact. (The execution of
U100 [Chk Current] should
be done within 10 seconds
and execute the drum
refresh.) • U100 [Adj AC
Bias] > [AC Bias]: 600 - 1300
• U100 [Set DC Bias After] >
[DC2Bias]: 300 - 450
4 Checking the MC roller The voltage applied to the Correct the MC roller contact
contact MC roller contact is high to secure the grounding.
5 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
6 Checking the eraser Eraser is faulty Reinsert the drum unit into Detaching
the main unit all the way and and reat-
reconnect the connector. If taching the
not repaired, replace the Drum Unit
drum unit.
7 Executing U120 Since the photosensitive If the drum drive distance Mainte-
layer is thin, the drum sur- counter at U120 is more than nance
face potential after expo- 450000m, replace the drum Mode List
sure is high unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
7-93
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is worn If there is no continuity Detaching
out. Or, the drum is not between the drum and the and reat-
grounded. frame, replace the drum unit. taching the
Drum Unit
image PWB
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Correcting the release The primary transfer roller Check if the primary transfer
mechanism does not contact the trans- roller is in contact with the
fer belt. transfer belt. If not, correct
the separation mechanism of
the transfer belt.
transfer high-voltage PWB are not the default values, nance
is changed. reset them to the default val- Mode List
ues.
3 Checking the ID sensor Calibration is not executed Output the event log report Event Log
properly. and if there is a history of Report
C7601 or C7602, clean the ID Output
sensor and execute calibra- Adjust-
tion. If not improved, replace ment/
ID sensor. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
makes contact failure. Or, the wire. • Front ID sensor /
the wire is faulty. rear ID sensor - Feed drive
PWB
5 Checking the cleaning The cleaning solenoid Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If Mainte-
solenoid does not operate. the cleaning solenoid does nance
6 Checking the connection The connector or FFC ter- Reconnect the following wire Service
minal is not connected connectors and reconnect the Manual -
properly. Or, the wire and FFC. If there is no continuity, Section 8
FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC "PWBs"
terminal section is deformed
or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC. • LSU - Engine PWB
7 LSU replacement The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
transfer high-voltage PWB are not the default values, nance
is changed. reset them to the default val- Mode List
ues.
7-95
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
14 Changing the setting Toner on the developing Change the value at U464 Mainte-
roller is little as the devel- [Target Value] > [Thickness] nance
oping bias is set low. from the default value to the Mode List
value between [0 to +30]. Adjust-
And after that, execute [Cali- ment/
bration] and [Tone curve Mainte-
adjustment]. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
7-96
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-7) Blank image

1 Reattaching the developer The developing roller does Switch the lock lever up and Detaching
roller not contact with the drum. down and return the devel- and reat-
oper roller to the setting posi- taching the
tion. If the developer roller Developer
does not return due to the Unit
breakage of the lock lever or
the failure of the developer
roller pressure wire, replace
the developer unit.
2 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Clean the developer bias
bias contact is dirty or deformed. contact, or correct its shape
so that it grounds securely.
3 Developer unit replace- The developer drive gear Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
4 Executing U140 The setting value of the Execute U140 and reset the Mainte-
developer bias is improper. developer bias to the default nance
value. Mode List
makes contact failure. Or, the wire. • Developer motor -
the wire is faulty. Feed image PWB • Devel-
oper clutch K - Feed image
PWB • Feed image PWB -
Engine PWB
6 Checking the developer The developing motor Execute U030 to check the Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. developer motor operation. If nance
the developer motor does not Mode List
operate properly, reattach it
and reconnect the connector.
7 Checking the main drive The developer roller does If the developer roller, the
unit not rotate since drive of the gear/coupling of the main
main drive unit is not trans- drive unit which transfer the
mitted. Or, the drum does drive to the drum or the drive
not rotate since drive of the shaft, etc. are not attached
main drive unit (drum properly, repair them. If they
motor) is not transmitted. are damaged, replace them.
8 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed. shape so that it grounds
securely.
7-97
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Drum unit replacement The ground plate in the Check the continuity of the Detaching
drum is deformed, and drum and the frame, if there and reat-
cantbegrounded.' is no continuity, replace drum taching the
unit. Drum Unit
image PWB
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
12 Checking the contact The contact is dirty or Clean the contacts between
deformed. the transfer high-voltage
PWB and the primary transfer
section, or correct them so
that they ground securely.
Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
nected properly. Or, FFC is If FFC terminal is deformed Manual -
faulty. or FFC is damaged, replace Section 8
FFC. • LSU (APC PWB) - "PWBs"
Engine PWB
16 LSU replacement APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-98
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(6-8) Toner dirt

1 Cleaning the developer Toner drops off from the Clean the developer unit and Adjust-
unit / executing Developer developer unit. execute the developer ment/
Refresh refresh. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
2 Executing U474 Toner drops off from the Execute LSU cleaning few Mainte-
cleaning fur brush of the times at U474. (Solve the nance
transfer belt. problem of the toner clogging Mode List
of the cleaning fur brush by
the high density printing.)
3 Primary transfer unit The transfer belt reaches If the value at U127 [Mid Mainte-
replacement to its life. Trans(Cnt)] is more than nance
250000, replace the primary Mode List
transfer unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-99
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-9) Periodic toner dirt

1 (In case of 94mm cycle) The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
Executing drum refresh ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 (In case of 94mm cycle) There are some scratches Replace the drum unit. Detaching
Replacing drum unit on the drum surface. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
4 (In case of 38mm cycle) There is dirt or foreign Wipe the MC roller by dry Detaching
Replacing main charger object on the MC roller sur- cloth or wipe it with water. If it and reat-
unit face. Or, the shaft is cor- does not improve, replace the taching the
roded. charger unit. Main
Charger
Unit
5 (In case of 39mm cycle) There is dirt, foreign object Wipe the developer roller dry. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing devel- or scratch on the develop- If it does not improve, replace and reat-
oper unit. ing roller. the developer unit. taching the
Developer
Unit
6 (In case of 45mm cycle) The foreign objects adhere Replace the primary transfer Detaching
Replacing primary transfer on the primary transfer unit. and reat-
unit roller. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-100
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-10) No image comes out (Black)

1 reinstalling the main char- The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger Detaching
ger unit and drum unit charger unit is not prop- unit to the drum unit and rein- and reat-
erly installed. stall the drum unit into the taching the
main unit to ensure secure Drum Unit
contact . Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
2 Drum unit replacement The cleaning blade winds Replace the drum unit. Detaching
up and is caught between and reat-
the MC roller and the taching the
drum. Drum Unit
3 Checking the MC roller The contact of the MC Clean the MC roller contact. Detaching
contact roller is dirty or deformed. And correct contact to secure and reat-
(Charge bias cantbeap- the grounding. Check the taching the
plied)' value at U100 [Chk Current] Main
and if the value is less than Charger
100 or changes extremely Unit Main-
(30), finish checking within 10 tenance
seconds and execute the Mode List
drum refresh.
4 Checking the high-voltage The high-voltage contact of Clean the high voltage con- Detaching
contact the main high-voltage tact and correct it to ensure and reat-
PWB is dirty or deformed. that it is grounded. Or, rein- taching the
stall the main high voltage Main High
PWB. Voltage
PWB
image PWB
6 Replacing the main high- Bias voltage is not output Replace the main high-volt- Detaching
voltage PWB uniformly from the main age PWB. and reat-
high-voltage PWB. taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-101
2SA/2RJ/2NK

nected properly. Or, FFC is If FFC terminal is deformed Manual -
faulty. or FFC is damaged, replace Section 8
FFC. • LSU (APC PWB) - "PWBs"
Engine PWB
9 LSU replacement APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-102
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-11) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)

1 Executing U140 U140 [AC Calib] is not exe- Change the value at U140 Mainte-
cuted. [AC Calib] > [Calibration] nance
from [0] (Off) to [1] (On) and Mode List
execute. (Sleeve AC value at
U140 will be lower than the
value before AC calib is exe-
cuted.)
2 Checking the developer Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the devel-
unit roller are dirty and it oper roller and the developer
causes the developer bias bias contact.
leakage.
3 Executing Developer The last image remains on Execute the developer Adjust-
refresh the developer roller sur- refresh. ment/
face. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Developer unit replace- Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment roller and the developer and reat-
bias contact are deterio- taching the
rated and it causes the Developer
developer bias leakage. Unit
5 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
7 Drum unit replacement Scratches or pinholes are Replace the drum unit. Detaching
on the drum surface, which and reat-
makes leakage. taching the
Drum Unit
8 Main charger unit replace- The MC roller surface is If image failure occurs at the Detaching
ment dirty or scratch. circumferential pitch of the and reat-
MC roller, replace charger taching the
unit. Main
Charger
Unit
7-103
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer Detaching
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its and reat-
deformed. shape so that it grounds cer- taching the
tainly. If it is not fixed, replace Primary
the primary transfer unit. Transfer
Unit
image PWB
11 Replacing the main high- Bias voltage is not output Replace the main high-volt- Detaching
voltage PWB uniformly from the main age PWB. and reat-
high-voltage PWB. taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-104
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-12) Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots

1 Checking the installation The settings do not match Change the setting at U140 Mainte-
environment the installation environ- [Altitude Adjustment] to [1001 nance
ment (High altitude - 2000m] (if it does not Mode List
exceeding 1,500m above improved, [2001 -3000m]).
sea-level). And next, set [AC Calib] >
[Calibration] to [1] (On) and
also set [Magnification] to
lower than 0. (Lower limit
value: -10)
2 Changing the setting The developer bias is easy Execute U140 [Altitude Mainte-
to leak since the main unit Adjustment] and set the nance
is installed in the low alti- proper altitude. Mode List
tude environment.
3 Executing U140 Developer bias leaks. Execute U140 [AC Calib]. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
4 Checking the MC roller MC roller contact is not Correct the MC roller contact
contact grounded. to secure the grounding.
5 Checking the drum unit The drum unit is not prop- Reinstall the drum unit. Detaching
and the developer unit erly installed, so it does not and reat-
ground the drum drive taching the
shaft. Drum Unit
6 Replacing paper Paper with the high sur- Replace with the recom-
face resistance is used. mended paper.
7-105
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-13) Horizontal uneven density

1 Checking the main charger MC roller rotation is Reattach the main charger Detaching
unit uneven. unit. and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
2 Main charger unit replace- The MC cleaning roller is Replace the main charger Detaching
ment deformed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
3 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
ends of the developer unit.
4 Developer unit replace- The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
5 Cleaning the developing The conduction is not sta- Clean the developer bias
bias contact bilized due to the dirty contact.
developer bias contact.
6 Checking the developer The developer powder in Execute the developer Adjust-
unit the developer unit is deteri- refresh. If not repaired, ment/
orated. replace the developer unit. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
7 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
shape of a streak are on ment/
both ends of the drum sur- Mainte-
face. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
7-106
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit. Detaching
down. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
10 LSU replacement The laser emission is Replace the LSU. Detaching
uneven. and reat-
taching the
LSU

ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement is dirty or deformed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-107
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-15) Offset
ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
down or has some and reat-
scratches. taching the
Drum Unit
4 Cleaning the developing The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
roller
5 Developer unit replace- The developer roller sur- Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment face is worn down or has and reat-
scratches. taching the
Developer
Unit
(6-16) Gradation reproducibility is low

1 Adjusting the image The calibration or grada- Execute System Menu Adjust-
tion adjustment is not exe- [Adjustment/Maintenance] > ment/
cuted. [Calibration] and [Tone curve Mainte-
adjustment]. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
7-108
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
densation. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU dustproof glass is Execute Laser Scanner Adjust-
ner Cleaning dirty. Cleaning. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 LSU replacement The LSU dustproof glass is Replace the LSU. Detaching
deteriorated. and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-109
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of the
image area
1 Executing Developer Toner outside the develop- As a relief measure, execute Adjust-
Refresh ing area width (311mm) of Developer Refresh. ment/
the developing roller flies Mainte-
and is transferred to the nance
drum side. As a result, light Menu
vertical black streaks (Opera-
appears on both ends (out tion Guide
of the image area) of the - Section
SRA3 paper which is wider 10)
than the developing area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the develop- Explain to the user that it is a
ing area width (311mm) of vertical black streak which is
the developing roller flies outside the image area and
and is transferred to the can not be completely elimi-
drum side. As a result, light nated. (It will not be com-
vertical black streaks pletely eliminated by
appears on both ends (out exchanging the developing
of the image area) of the unit, etc.). "SRA 3 (450 x 320
SRA3 paper which is wider mm) is the paper width that
than the developing area can be printed in the margin"
width. Line for marking design work
and marking for cutting (reg-
istration mark) ". The loca-
tion where this vertical black
streak occurs is outside the
[registration mark] and it is
not an image area. therefore,
there is no problem in actual
use."
7-110
2SA/2RJ/2NK

ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Drum unit replacement The cleaning blade or Replace the drum unit. (If the Detaching
drum surface is worn out. drum drive distance counter and reat-
at U120 is more than con- taching the
stant value (upper segment Drum Unit
model:450000, lower seg- Mainte-
ment model: 150000), the nance
cleaning blade is worn out.) Mode List
4 Cleaning the MC roller Streaky dirt adheres to the Wipe the MC roller surface Detaching
surface of the MC roller, with water. and reat-
and no electric potential is taching the
applied. Main
Charger
Unit
5 Main charger unit replace- MC roller surface is Replace the main charger Detaching
ment streaky altered. unit. and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
6 Checking the developer Foreign objects and aggre- Clean the developer roller. Detaching
unit gated toner adhere to the Or, replace the developer unit and reat-
developing roller surface. if not repaired after cleaning. taching the
Developer
Unit
7-111
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-20) Vertical uneven density

1 LSU replacement LSU emits the laser Replace the LSU. Detaching
unevenly. (Inner mirror and reat-
comes off.) taching the
LSU
2 Checking the primary The transfer belt is not Reattach the primary trans-
transfer unit contact with the drum. fer unit.
(The primary transfer roller
does not press evenly the
transfer belt against the
drum).
3 Primary transfer unit The transfer belt is not Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement contact with the drum uni- unit. and reat-
formly. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
4 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
densation. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
6 Checking the main charger Streaky dirt adheres to the Clean the MC roller surface. Detaching
unit surface of the MC roller. If not improved, replace the and reat-
Main
Charger
Unit
down. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
8 Installing the cassette The cassette heater is not Install the cassette heater. Installing
heater installed in the high humid- the
ity environment. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
7-112
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the developer The toner layer on the Execute the developer Adjust-
unit developer roller is uneven. refresh. If not repaired, ment/
replace the developer unit. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
7-113
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU dustproof glass is Execute Laser Scanner Adjust-
ner Cleaning dirty. Cleaning. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Developer unit replace- Foreign objects and aggre- Replace the developer unit Detaching
ment gated toner are mixed in that has a problem. And next, and reat-
the developer unit. check the supply entrance of taching the
the toner container (shutter Developer
section) and remove if the Unit
aggregated toner is adhered.
3 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects Remove foreign objects on
on the laser path of the the frame or sealing material
LSU. between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
6 Drum unit replacement There are some scratches Replace the drum unit. Detaching
on the drum surface. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
7 Checking the main charger There is dirt, foreign object Clean the MC roller surface. Detaching
unit or scratch on the MC roller. If not improved, replace the and reat-
Main
Charger
Unit
8 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
7-114
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1) Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide factor.
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
7-115
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
1 Checking the conveying Each conveying units are Check if the front / back or left
unit not properly attached. / right of the vertical convey-
ing section and the deck hori-
zontal conveying section do
not open pulling by a slight
strength. If necessary, reat-
tach them.
2 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not Open the right cover and
right cover aligned to the other exte- close it again securely.
rior covers.
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough or the cutting by reversing the paper direc-
edge of loaded paper is tion. Correct or replace
damaged. paper if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If
you cannot get user agree-
ment about the paper
replacement, relocate the
leading end of paper and the
trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used Ask a user to use the speci- Basic
or foreign objects are on fied paper type. Or, remove Paper
the paper. the paper with foreign Specifica-
objects. tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
7-116
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the
paper curl
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs,
and the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the check if a piece of torn paper,
leading edge of the sheet foreign objects or the burrs
is bent. on the part do not exist on the
paper path, and remove
them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature Mainte-
fuser temperature is to the default value at U161 nance
improper. when the paper curls. Mode List
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide factor.

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
remove the burrs on the parts
such as the guide or the actu-
ator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the discharge
needle is dirty by the toner,
the paper dust, etc., clean by
the waste cloth or the brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not prop- Check the guide, and remove
erly operate due to the any burrs. Also, if the guide
incorrect attachment or a does not operate smoothly
fault. manually, reattach the guide.
Then, replace the guide if it is
not fixed or if there is defor-
mation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not Execute U033 and check if Mainte-
operate properly. the guide can move smoothly nance
by the operation sounds. If Mode List
the guide does not operate
thoroughly or smoothly, reat-
tach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not
resolved.
7-117
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides width guides do not fit with guides or the MP paper width
the paper size. guides along the paper size
when the paper skew or the
paper creases occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the
enough. paper source. If a part of the
paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper The paper is not properly When the paper is loaded
from the large capacity loaded. over the guide in the deck of
feeder) Checking the the large capacity paper
paper feeder,
reload the paper so the paper
edge is not on the corner of
the deck.
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
7-118
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys

1 Checking the roller or the The roller or surface of the Check if the rollers or the pul-
pulley pulley is dirty, or faulty. leys have no paper dust,
toner, foreign objects, diame-
ter change or frictional wear,
and clean their surface. If not
repaired, replace the parts.
2 Checking the motor The motor does not oper- Execute U030 (main unit), Mainte-
ate properly. U240 (finishers) or U243 nance
(document processors) to Mode List
check the related motor oper- JAM Code
ation. If the motor does not List
operate properly, perform the
field measures of each paper
jam code.
3 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- Execute U032 (main unit), Mainte-
ate properly. U243 (dual scan DP) to nance
check the clutch operation. If Mode List
the clutch does not operate
not repaired, replace the indi-
vidual clutch or the unit con-
taining the clutch.
4 Cleaning the roller shaft The roller shaft or the If a load is given to the roller
and the bearings bearings are dirty. rotation caused by the dirt of
the roller shaft or the bear-
ings, clean.
5 Checking the spring The spring does not press Check if the spring is drop-
the conveying roller or pul- ping off or the roller and the
ley properly. pulley are pressed properly,
then reattach them if neces-
sary.
7-119
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor

1 Checking the actuator and The actuator or the return If the actuator is caught or
the recovery spring spring does not operate came off, reattach the actua-
correctly. tor or recovery spring.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. When the sensor surface or
photoreceptor black felt is
dirty by paper dust, etc.,
clean them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not oper- Check the sensor operation Mainte-
ate correctly. by executing U031 (main nance
unit), U241 (finishers) or Mode List
U244 (document processor).
If the sensor does not oper-
ate properly, clean and reat-
tach it, then reinsert the
connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper lead- The leading edge margin is When there is no margin from Mainte-
ing edge margin not enough. the paper leading edge to nance
4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm), Mode List
and, when there is no check
line (fuser jam) on 20mm(+/-
1mm) from the paper leading
edge of the test pattern that is
output in U034,
adjust the leading margin at
U402.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misde- Relocate the paper width
guides tected. guides or the MP paper width
guides along the paper size
to properly detect the paper
size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not If the media type is not Cassette /
properly set. matched to the actual paper MP Tray
weight (the paper jam occurs Settings
due to the paper separation (Opera-
failure), set the media type at tion Guide
[System Menu/Counter] key - Section
> [Common Settings] > "Org./ 8)
Paper Set.".
7-120
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity

1 Checking the ground The static electricity accu- When the main unit is
mulates. installed in the low humidity
environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates
on the conveying guide dur-
ing the continuous printing,
check if the discharge sheet
in the eject section and the
metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded
securely. Reattach them if
necessary.
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette
are always damp.)
1 Checking the paper stor- Papers have been stored Ask users to store paper in a
age place in the improper place. dry place.
2 Installing the cassette The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater Installing
heater and set the mode by execut- the
ing U327. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-121
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Paper misfeed detection

(2-1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed
message on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the
front cover or paper conveying cover.
The locations are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.
Jam location indication

K
M
Q L
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
1. Shows the location of a paper jam.

2. Shows the previous step.
3. Shows the next step.
4. Shows the removal procedure.
Figure 7-1
A. Misfeed in the cassette 1 K. Misfeed inside the mail box paper

B. Misfeed in the cassette 2 L. Misfeed inside the inner finisher
C. Misfeed in the cassette 3 (500-sheet × 1) M. Paper jam at the document processor
D. Misfeed in the cassette 3 (1500-sheet × 2) N. Misfeed inside the 1000-sheet finisher
C. Misfeed in the cassette 4 (500-sheet × 1) O. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (inner) finisher
E. Misfeed in the cassette 4 (1500-sheet × 2) P. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (Tray A) finisher
F. Misfeed in the cassette 5 (side feeder) Q. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (Tray B)finisher
G. Misfeed in MP tray R. Misfeed inside the Center fold unit
H. Misfeed inside the right cover 1 S. Misfeed inside the Center fold tray
I. Misfeed inside the right cover 2
J. Misfeed inside the bridge conveying
7-122
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Paper misfeed detection condition

Main unit + Optional unit1
19
20
M 22
31 21
K
27
QQ 23 11
J 66xx
13 12 U
OO
26 OO OO L
10 9
J
25 8
PP 24
W H
OO 3
4
VV
29
7 6 GG
1
18 F
AA T 5
2 HH
28
R BB 16
30
17
II
EE 15 CC 14
SS
Figure 7-2
1. Paper sensor 1 12. Upper exit full sensor 22. DP timing sensor
2. Paper sensor 2 13. BR conveying sensor 1 23. DP exit sensor
3. DU sensor 1 14. BR conveying sensor 2 24. DF entry sensor
4. DU sensor 2 15. PF paper sensor 1 25. DF middle sensor
5. Conveying sensor 16. PF paper sensor 2 26. DF exit sensor
6. MP conveying sensor 17. PF vertical conveying sensor 27. DF drum sensor
7. Registration sensor 18. PF horizontal conveying sen- 28. DF sub exit sensor
8. Belt roll-up sensor sor 29. BF entry sensor
9. Fuser sensor 19. PF feed sensor 30. BF vertical conveying sensor
10. Exit reversing sensor 20. DP feed sensor 31. BF exit sensor
11. Lower exit full sensor 21. DP backside timing sensor 32. MT tray exit sensor
7-123
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Main unit + Optional unit
19
20
32 21 M 22
N
N N
N 12
N
N 14 13
Q U
25 23 Q 10
N
24 LL J 11
9
W H
H
H
3
8
4
V
V
6
7V G
G
G
GG
1
T
A 5
2 HH
B
B
BBB
17
I
C
C
C 15
18
D 16
Figure 7-3
1. Paper sensor 1 10. Exit reversing sensor 19. DP feed sensor

2. Paper sensor 2 11. Lower exit full sensor 20. DP backside timing sensor
3. DU sensor 1 12. Upper exit full sensor 21. DP timing sensor
4. DU sensor 2 13. BR conveying sensor 1 22. DP exit sensor
5. Conveying sensor 14. BR conveying sensor 2 23. DF entry sensor
6. MP conveying sensor 15. PF paper sensor 1 24. DF middle sensor
7. Registration sensor 16. PF paper sensor 2 25. DF exit sensor
8. Belt roll-up sensor 17. PF conveying sensor 1
9. Fuser sensor 18. PF conveying sensor 2
7-124
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A. Paper jam at cassette 1 L. Paper jam at the inner finisher

B. Paper jam at cassette 2 M. Paper jam at the document processor
C. Paper jam at cassette 3 (500-sheet × 1) N. Paper jam at the 1000-sheet finisher
D. Paper jam at cassette 3 (1500-sheet × 2) O. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet (inner) finisher
C. Paper jam at cassette 4 (500-sheet × 1) P. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet (Tray A) finisher
E. Paper jam at cassette 4 (1500-sheet × 2) Q. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet (Tray B)finisher
F. Paper jam at cassette 5 (side feeder) R. Paper jam at the Folding unit
G. Paper jam at the MP tray S. Paper jam at the Folding tray
H. Paper jam at right cover 1 T. Paper jam at the conveying section
I. Paper jam at right cover 2 U. Paper jam at the duplex unit
J. Paper jam at the bridge conveying section V. Paper jam at the registration section
K. Paper jam at the mail box W. Paper jam at the Fuser section
7-125
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0000 - J1604 I J4215 W J4903 W J6070 O J7002 L
J0100 - J1614 I J4218 W J4904 W J6080 O J7100 R
J0101 - J4002 T J4219 W J4905 W J6100 O J7110 R
J0104 - J4003 T J4301 U J4908 W J6101 N J7200 R
J0105 - J4004 T J4302 U J4909 W J6102 L J7210 S
J0106 - J4005 T J4303 U J4911 J J6110 O J7300 R
J0107 - J4012 V J4304 U J4912 J J6111 N J7310 S
J0110 - J4013 V J4305 U J4913 J J6112 L J7400 R
J0111 - J4014 V J4309 U J4914 J J6200 O J7500 R
J0114 - J4015 V J4311 U J4915 J J6210 O J7600 R
J0212 - J4101 V J4312 U J4918 J J6300 O J7700 R
J0213 - J4102 V J4313 U J4919 J J6301 N J7710 R
J0300 - J4103 V J4314 U J5001 J J6310 O J7800 O
J0501 A J4104 V J4315 U J5002 J J6311 N J7810 K
J0502 B J4105 V J4319 U J5003 J J6400 O J7900 O
J0503 C J4108 V J4401 U J5004 J J6401 N J7901 N
J0504 D J4109 V J4402 U J5005 J J6402 L J7902 L
J0508 U J4111 W J4403 U J5008 J J6410 O J9000 M
J0509 G J4112 W J4404 U J5009 J J6411 N J9001 M
J0511 V J4113 W J4405 U J5011 J J6412 L J9002 M*1,*2
J0512 T J4114 W J4409 U J5012 J J6500 O J9004 M*1,*3
J0513 T J4115 W J4701 W J5013 J J6510 O J9005 M*1,*2
J0514 T J4118 W J4702 W J5014 J J6511 N J9006 M*1
J0518 V J4119 W J4703 W J5015 J J6512 L J9007 M*1
J0519 V J4201 W J4704 W J5018 J J6600 O J9008 M*2
J0523 C J4202 W J4705 W J5019 J J6610 O J9009 M*1,*2
J0524 E J4203 W J4709 W J6000 -*2 J6710 O J9010 M
J0533 C J4204 W J4711 U J6001 -*1 J6810 O J9011 M
J0534 E J4205 W J4712 U J6002 -*3 J6811 N J9110 M
J0545 F J4208 W J4713 U J6012 -*3 J6812 L J9200 M*1,*3
J0555 F J4209 W J4714 U J6020 O J6910 O J9210 M*1
J1403 C J4211 W J4715 U J6021 N J6911 N J9300 M*2
J1404 I J4212 W J4719 U J6041 N J6912 L J9310 M*2
J1413 I J4213 W J4901 W J6050 O J7000 P J9400 M
J1414 I J4214 W J4902 W J6060 O J7001 N J9410 M
7-126
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J9600 M*1,*2
J9610 M*1,*2
*1:DF-7100
*2:DF-7110
*3:DF-7120
7-127
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Jam Codes
Error code Contents note

J0000 Power ON jam
J0107 Fuser temperature stabiliza-
tion time-out
J0100/J0101/J0104/ Paper jam caused by the
J0105/J0106 firmware factor
J0110/J0111/J0114 Cover open detection J0110: Right cover / Maintenance front cover
open detection (Right cover switch), J0111: Front
cover open detection (Front cover sensor), J0114:
BR cover open detection (BR cover sensor)
J0212/J0213 PF right cover open detection Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
J0300 Paper eject completion non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
detection jam
J0501/J0502/J0503/ Cassette no feed (Prior check Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper
J0504 item) feeder (Cassette3, 4) Remarks: Items to be
checked beforehand when the cassette no paper
feed jam occurs
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the
leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Canthearthedescentsoundoftheliftplate-
whenpullingoutthecassette).'
J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is no
paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper,
and the lift plate does not rise up (Canthearthe-
descentsoundoftheliftplatewhenpullingoutthecas-
sette).'
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the
leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when
pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is no
paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper,
and the lift plate rise up (Can hear the descent
sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cas-
sette), but feed drive does not start.
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper
J0504 1-4 feeder (Cassette3, 4) Condition: Feed slip mark
on paper leading edge. (Pick up pulley cantcon-
veypaper)'
J0504 1-4 feeder (Cassette3, 4) Condition: There is a bent
or tear on the center of paper leading edge
(Cantfeedtillretardroller.Or,theretardrollerdoesno-
trollforward.)'
7-128
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J0504 1-4 feeder (Cassette3, 4) Condition: There is a bent
other than the center of paper leading edge (The
paper jam occurs as paper is caught before paper
goes into the retard roller.)
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.
J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette Object: Paper feeder Condition: Paper conveying
capability is decreasing, or paper is slipping.
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette Object: Paper feeder Condition: The sensor
detection is not stable.
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreas-
ing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotat-
ing.
J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette Object: Paper feeder Condition: Paper conveying
capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or,
the roller is not rotating.
J0508 No paper feed from the Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
duplex section caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
J0508 No paper feed from the Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Duplex
duplex section conveying drive does not rotate. Or, DU clutch
does not operate correctly.)
J0509 No paper feed from the MP Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
tray caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
J0509 No paper feed from the MP Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
tray drive does not start. Or, MP clutch does not oper-
ate correctly.)
J0511 Multi-feeding from cassette 1
J0512 Multi-feeding from cassette
J0513/J0514 Multi-feeding from cassette Object: Paper feeder
J0518 Multi-feeding from the duplex
section
J0519 Multi-feeding from the MP
tray
J0523/J0524 No paper feed from the large Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is
capacity paper feeder a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying
capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
J0523/J0524 No paper feed from the large Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is
capacity paper feeder no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start.
Or, PF feed clutch does not operate correctly.)
J0533/J0534 Multi-feeding from the large Object: Large capacity feeder
capacity paper feeder
7-129
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J0545 No paper feed from the side Object: Side deck Condition: There is a damage
deck on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability
is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
J0545 No paper feed from the side Object: Side deck Condition: There is no damage
deck on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, convey-
ing clutch does not operate correctly.)
J0555 Multi-feeding from the side Object: Side deck
deck
J1403/J1404 Conveying sensor non-arrival Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
jam Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
J1403/J1404 Conveying sensor non-arrival Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
jam Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does
not operate correctly.)
J1413/J1414 Conveying sensor stay jam Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
J1604 PF conveying sensor 1 non- Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is a dam-
arrival jam age on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capa-
bility is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
J1604 PF vertical conveying sensor Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is
non-arrival jam a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying
capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
J1604 PF conveying sensor 1 non- Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is no
arrival jam damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or,
conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
J1604 PF vertical conveying sensor Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is
non-arrival jam no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start.
Or, conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
J1614 PF conveying sensor 1 stay Object: Paper feeder
jam
J1614 PF vertical conveying sensor Object: Large capacity feeder
stay jam
J4002/J4003/J4004/ Registration sensor non- Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder/
J4005 arrival jam Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side
deck Condition: There is a damage on paper.
J4002/J4003/J4004/ Registration sensor non- Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder/
J4005 arrival jam Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4 ), or Side
deck Condition: There is no damage on paper.
(Middle roller does not rotate. Middle clutch does
not operate correctly.)
J4012/J4013/J4014/ Registration sensor stay jam Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder/
J4015 Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side
deck
7-130
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non- Condition: Paper JAM on the primary transfer
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam belt. (Paper does not separate from the belt)
J4109
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non- Condition: Paper JAM after passing through the
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam secondary transfer roller (Belt winding sensor
J4109 does not detect.)
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non- Condition: Paper JAM before the secondary
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam transfer roller.
J4109
J4111/J4112/J4113/ Belt winding sensor stay jam Condition: Paper JAM before fuser section.
J4114/J4115/J4118/
J4119
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper JAM at fuser section.
J4204/J4205/J4208/
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4204/J4205/J4208/ leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4204/J4205/J4208/ leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper JAM after passing through the
J4204/J4205/J4208/ fuser exit roller.
J4209
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the eject unit
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam at the exit section when
J4214/J4215/J4218/ feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the
J4219 punch unit installed for the inner finisher. (Inch
specification only)
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
J4301/J4302/J4303/ DU sensor 1 non-arrival jam
J4304/J4305/J4309
J4311/J4312/J4313/ DU sensor 1 stay jam
J4314/J4315/J4319
J4401/J4402/J4403/ DU sensor 2 non-arrival jam
J4404/J4405/J4409
J4701/J4702/J4703/ Exit reverse sensor non-
J4704/J4705/J4709 arrival jam
7-131
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J4711/J4712/J4713/ Exit reverse sensor stay jam
J4714/J4715/J4719
J4901/J4902/J4903/ BR conveying sensor 1 non-
J4904/J4905/J4908/ arrival jam
J4909
J4919
J5009
J5011/J5012/J5013/ BR conveying sensor 2 stay
J5014/J5015/J5018/ jam
J5019
J6000/J6001/J6002 DF paper entry failure jam Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher), J6001
(1000-sheet finisher), J6002 (Inner finisher)
J6012 Inner DF open jam Object: Inner finisher
J6020/J6021 DF front cover open jam Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher), J6021
(1000-sheet finisher)
J6041 DF top cover open jam Object: 1000-sheet finisher
J6050 BF tray open jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J6060 MT cover open jam Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
J6070 BF unit open jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J6080 BF left cover open jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J6100/J6101/J6102 DF paper entry sensor non- Object: J6100 (4000-sheet finisher), J6101
arrival jam (1000-sheet finisher), J6102 (Inner finisher)
J6110/J6111/J6112 DF paper entry sensor stay Object: J6110 (4000-sheet finisher), J6111 (1000-
jam sheet finisher), J6112 (Inner finisher)
J6200 DF sub eject sensor non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher
arrival jam
J6210 DF sub eject sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6300/J6301 DF middle sensor non-arrival Object: J6300 (4000-sheet finisher), J6301
jam (1000-sheet finisher)
J6310/J6311 DF middle sensor stay jam Object: J6310 (4000-sheet finisher), J6311 (1000-
sheet finisher)
J6400/J6401/J6402 DF exit sensor non-arrival Object: J6400 (4000-sheet finisher), J6401
jam (1000-sheet finisher), J6402 (Inner finisher)
J6410/J6411/J6412 DF exit sensor stay jam Object: J6410 (4000-sheet finisher), J6411 (1000-
sheet finisher), J6412 (Inner finisher)
J6500 DF exit sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam when exiting paper stack
J6510/J6511/J6512 DF exit sensor stay jam when Object: J6510 (4000-sheet finisher), J6511 (1000-
exiting paper stack sheet finisher), J6512 (Inner finisher)
7-132
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-3

J6600 DF drum sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J6610 DF drum sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6710 DF drum sensor stay jam dur- Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
ing paper conveying into the
BF unit
J6810/J6811/J6812 Front DF side registration jam Object: J6810 (4000-sheet finisher), J6811 (1000-
J6910/J6911/J6912 Rear DF side registration jam Object: J6910 (4000-sheet finisher), J6911 (1000-
J7000/J7001/J7002 DF staple jam Object: J7000 (4000-sheet finisher), J7001
(1000-sheet finisher), J7002 (Inner finisher)
J7100 BF paper entry sensor non- Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
arrival jam
J7110 BF paper entry sensor stay Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7200 BF eject sensor non-arrival Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7210 BF eject sensor stay jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J7300 BF eject sensor non-arrival Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam at tri-folding
J7310 BF eject sensor stay jam at Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
tri-folding
J7400 Upper BF side registration Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7500 Lower BF side registration Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7600 BF staple jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J7700 BF vertical conveying sensor Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
non-arrival jam
J7710 BF vertical conveying sensor Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
stay jam
J7800 Mail Box ejection non-arrival Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
jam
J7810 Mail Box eject stay jam Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
J7900/J7901/J7902 DF paddle jam Object: J7900 (4000-sheet finisher), J7901
(1000-sheet finisher), J7902 (Inner finisher).
J9000 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9001 DP small size original jam Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
7-133
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-3

J9002 Paper jam detected when Object: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP and
starting the paper conveying Mechanically Reversed DP Remarks: When
detecting the DP feedshift motor error (C9180)
(up to 2 times), display J9002. (Mechanically
Reversed DP only)
J9004 DP registration sensor non- Object: Mechanically reversed DP
arrival jam during the original
reversing
J9005 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
reversed DP with the DP feed belt
J9006 DP exit sensor non-arrival Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP
jam during the original revers- feed belt
ing
J9007 DP exit sensor stay jam dur- Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP
ing the original reversing feed belt
J9008 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP
(Original is B6 size or smaller)
J9009 DP original jam caused by Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
the image scanning reversed DP with the DP feed belt
J9010 Document processor open Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
detection DP
J9011 DP top cover open detection Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9110 DP feed sensor multi-feeding Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
jam DP
J9200 DP registration sensor non- Object: Mechanically reversed DP
arrival jam
J9210 DP registration sensor stay Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP
jam feed belt
J9300 DPCIS non-arrival jam Object: Dual scan DP
J9310 DP backside timing sensor Object: Dual scan DP
stay jam
J9400 DP timing sensor non-arrival Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
jam DP
J9410 DP timing sensor stay jam Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9600 DP eject sensor non-arrival Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
jam reversed DP with the DP feed belt
J9610 DP eject sensor stay jam Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
reversed DP with the DP feed belt
7-134
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Jam Code

J0000: Power ON jam
The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on.

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which Specify the sensor that dis- Mainte-
is turned on) plays ON at U031. (Go to the nance
next step.) Mode List
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper or the for-
remaining on paper con- eign objects adhere on the
veying route to turn on the conveying path, or a burr in
sensor. the parts such as the guide or
the actuator, remove them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not oper- Clean and reattach the sen- Mainte-
ate correctly. sor specified at U031, and nance
reconnect the connector. If Mode List
the wire. • Feed drive unit -
Feed drive PWB • Faulty sen-
sor defined at U031 - Feed
drive PWB
J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove a piece of paper
activate properly. from each conveying section
and check the sensors. Then,
turn the power switch and the
main power switch off . After
5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power
switch on.
2 Checking the installation The electric power supply Plug the power cord into
environment fluctuates or the electric another wall outlet.
voltage reduces.
3 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-135
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
properly activate. latest version. Update
5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heater is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor

Firmware does not operate correctly. (The conveying related control error)

switch on.
J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection

J0110: Right cover / Maintenance front cover open detection (Right cover switch),
J0111: Front cover open detection (Front cover sensor), J0114: BR cover open
detection (BR cover sensor)
The cover-open is detected during print.

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is closed
firmly, and reattach it if nec-
essary. If the cover is
deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch
operate properly. and reconnect the connector.
If the cover switch is faulty,
replace it.
7-136
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0212/J0213: PF right cover open detection

Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, PF right cover open is detected during printing.

1 Checking the PF right The PF right cover is not Check if the PF right cover is
cover aligned to the other exte- securely closed, and reat-
rior covers. tach it if necessary. Fix or
replace it if it is deformed.
2 Checking the PF right PF right cover sensor does Reattach the PF right cover
cover sensor not operate correctly. sensor and reconnect the
connector. If the PF right
cover sensor is faulty, replace
it.
J0300: Paper eject completion non-detection jam

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
The paper eject completion is not communicated from the finisher.

switch on.
2 Checking the connection The finisher cable is not Reconnect the finisher cable
connected correctly to the to the main unit.
main unit.
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-137
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: Cassette no feed (Prior check item)

Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper feeder (Cassette3, 4) Remarks: Items to
be checked beforehand when the cassette no paper feed jam occurs
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on
after passing the specific time.

1 Reloading the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper in the
bent. cassette.
4 Checking the paper Paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If it
or waving. is difficult to replace, switch
the leading edge and the trail-
ing edge of paper, or flip
paper upside down and reset
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
6 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the for-
paper. eign objects adheres in the
cassette.
J0501/J0502: No paper feed from cassette

Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift
plate does not rise up
(Canthearthedescentsoundoftheliftplatewhenpullingoutthecassette).'
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding
mark on the leading edge of paper)

nected properly. Or, the lift lowing wire connectors and Manual -
motor does not drive as reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • Lift motor 1, 2 -
Feed drive PWB • Feed drive
PWB - Engine PWB
7-138
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the drive parts The lift motor drive is not If there are any problems
transmitted to the lift plate such as breakage or biting of
drive parts because of the foreign objects in the joints of
engagement failure. the gears, couplings etc. of
the motor, clean or replace
them.
3 Checking the lift motor The lift motor is not Reattach the lift motor 1 or 2 Detaching
attached properly or faulty. and reconnect the connector. and reat-
If not repaired, replace it. taching the
Lift Motor
4 Replacing the lift plate The lift plate is damaged or Replace the lift plate.
deformed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge
of paper, and the lift plate does not rise up
(Canthearthedescentsoundoftheliftplatewhenpullingoutthecassette).'
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding

nected properly or PF lift lowing wire connectors and Manual -
motor does not drive as reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • PF lift motor 1, 2 -
PF PWB • PF PWB - Engine
PWB
2 Checking the drive parts The PF lift motor drive is If there are any problems
not transmitted to the PF such as breakage or biting of
lift plate drive parts foreign objects in the joints of
because of the engage- the gears, couplings etc. of
ment failure. the motor, clean or replace
them.
3 Checking the PF lift motor PF lift motor is not Reattach the PF lift motor 1 Detaching
attached properly or faulty. or 2 and reconnect the con- and reat-
nector. If not repaired, taching the
replace it. PF lift
motor
7-139
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing the PF lift plate The PF lift plate is dam- Replace the PF lift plate.
aged or deformed.
5 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift
plate rise up (Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the
cassette), but feed drive does not start.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding

the wire. • Feed clutch 1, 2 -
Feed drive unit • Feed drive
unit - Feed drive PWB • Feed
drive PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the paper feed Feed roller does not rotate Reattach the feed shaft and
shaft and the pin as feed shaft and feed pin feed pin. If there is deforma-
of the feed roller is not tion, etc., replace them.
attach properly.
3 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch is Execute U032. If feed clutch Mainte-
clutch not connected, so the 1 or 2 does not operate cor- nance
paper feed roller does not rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
rotate. nect the connector. If not
repaired, replace it.
4 Removing the foreign The lift plate does not rise Remove a piece of paper or
objects and checking the up till the upper limit posi- foreign objects. Check if the
operation of the actuator tion while the lift upper limit actuator of the lift upper limit
sensor turns on. sensor 1 or 2 is switched to
on when the lift plate rises up.
Then, reattach the actuator if
necessary.
7-140
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Checking the drive gear The drive from the feed If there are any problems on Detaching
motor is not transmitted. the gear, etc. of the feed drive and reat-
unit, replace them. taching the
Feed Drive
Unit
6 Replacing the feed motor The feed roller does not Execute U030 [Feed]. If the Mainte-
rotate since the feed motor feed motor does not operate nance
does not drive. correctly, reattach it and Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge
of paper, and the lift plate rise up (Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when
pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not start.
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding

the wire. • PF feed clutch 1, 2
- PF feed unit • PF feed motor
- PF feed unit • PF feed unit -
PWB
2 Checking the paper feed Feed roller does not rotate Reattach the feed shaft and
shaft and the pin as feed shaft and feed pin feed pin. If there is deforma-
of the feed roller is not tion, etc., replace them.
attach properly.
3 Checking the PF paper PF feed roller does not Execute U247. If PF feed Mainte-
feed clutch rotate since PF feed clutch clutch 1, 2 does not operate nance
is not engaged. properly, reattach it and Mode List
7-141
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Removing the foreign The PF lift plate does not Remove a piece of paper or
objects and checking the rise up till the upper limit foreign objects. Check if the
operation of the actuator position while the PF lift actuator of the PF lift upper
upper limit sensor turns on. limit sensor 1 or 2 is switched
to on when the PF lift plate
rises up. Then, reattach the
actuator if necessary.
5 Checking the drive gear The PF feed motor drive is If there are any problems on Detaching
not transmitted. the gear, etc. of the PF drive and reat-
unit, replace them. taching the
PF Drive
Unit
6 Replacing the PF feed The PF feed roller does Execute U247. If the PF feed Mainte-
motor not rotate since the PF motor does not operate cor- nance
feed motor does not drive. rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
nect the connector. If not
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4

Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper feeder (Cassette3, 4) Condition: Feed
slip mark on paper leading edge. (Pick up pulley cantconveypaper)'
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the pickup roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor
does not turn on.

1 Checking the paper gauge More than upper limit of Reset the number of sheets
paper is loaded. that fit in the upper limit label
position.
guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
3 Checking the pressure The conveying function of Reattach the spring for the Detaching
spring for the pickup pulley the pickup pulley is not pickup pulley if it comes off. If and reat-
enough. deformed, replace it. taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
7-142
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of Clean the pickup pulley sur- Detaching
the pickup pulley is not face. If worn down, replace it and reat-
enough. taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
6 Checking the paper feed The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller Detaching
roller the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, and reat-
enough. replace it. taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller

Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper feeder (Cassette3, 4) Condition: There
is a bent or tear on the center of paper leading edge
(Cantfeedtillretardroller.Or,theretardrollerdoesnotrollforward.)'
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the retard roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor
does not turn on.

1 Checking the retard roller Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the Detaching
retard roller is not enough. retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
replace it. taching the
Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
2 reattaching the retard The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
spring position.
3 (When the paper leading Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
edge is bent or paper is veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
skewed) Checking the paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
paper path the parts such as the convey-
ing surface of the conveying
guide or the actuator, remove
or replace them. If the sheet
or film has a damage, defor-
mation, floating, repair or
replace them.
7-143
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper feeder (Cassette3, 4) Condition: There
is a bent other than the center of paper leading edge (The paper jam occurs as paper
is caught before paper goes into the retard roller.)
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on
since the paper stops at the paper feed roller.

1 Checking the paper Paper is curled downward. Correct or replace paper. If it
is difficult to replace, switch
them.
replace them.

Condition: Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette after feed clutch
turns on, it does not reach to next sensor.

1 Checking the retard roller The conveying perfor- Clean the surface of the Detaching
mance is deteriorated due retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
to poor forward rotation of replace it. taching the
the retard roller Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
2 reattaching retard release The retard release lever Reattach the retard release
lever and retard holder and the retard holder do lever and retard holder.
not operate correctly due
to the installation failure.
3 (When feeding special Conveying capability of the Set special media below the
media) Change setting special media is not storage limit to the paper feed
method for the special enough. tray other than cassette 1.
media Also, when using envelopes,
set the envelope after attach-
ing the envelope attachment
7-144
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
5 (When the paper skew The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
occurs) Relocating the width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
paper width guides the paper size. paper size.
6 (When paper is skewed) More than upper limit of Reset the number of sheets
Checking the paper gauge paper is loaded. that fit in the upper limit label
position.
the wire. • Middle clutch -
Feed drive PWB (Cassette 1)
• Vertical conveying clutch -
• Feed drive PWB - Engine
PWB
8 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- Execute U032 to the opera- Mainte-
ate properly. tion of the clutch related to nance
paper feeding. If the clutch Mode List
does not operate correctly,
reattach it and reconnect the
replace it. (Cassette 1: Mid-
dle clutch, Cassette 2: Verti-
cal conveying clutch)
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-145
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Object: Paper feeder Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing, or paper
is slipping.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette after feed clutch
turns on, it does not reach to next sensor.

1 Checking the retard roller The conveying perfor- Clean the surface of the Detaching
mance is deteriorated due retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
to poor forward rotation of replace it. taching the
the retard roller Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
2 reattaching retard release The retard release lever Reattach the retard release
lever and retard holder and the retard holder do lever and retard holder.
not operate correctly due
to the installation failure.
3 (When feeding special Conveying capability of the Set special media below the
media) Change setting special media is not storage limit to the paper feed
method for the special enough. tray other than cassette 1.
media Also, when using envelopes,
set the envelope after attach-
ing the envelope attachment
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
position.
the wire. • PF conveying
clutch 1, 2 - PF PWB • PF
PWB - Engine PWB
8 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying clutch does Execute U247. If PF convey- Mainte-
ing clutch not operate correctly. ing clutch 1, 2 does not oper- nance
ate properly, reattach it and Mode List
7-146
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
When feeding from cassette1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette and conveyed
through next roller after feed clutch turns on, and reach to next sensor.

1 (In case there is a paper The registration sensor Execute U031 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
loop mark when feeding does not operate properly. registration sensor does not nance
the paper from cassette 1) operate properly, clean and Mode List
Checking the registration reattach it then reconnect the
sensor connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
2 (When feeding paper from The conveying sensor Execute U031 [Cassette2 Mainte-
cassette 2) Checking the does not operate correctly. Feed]. If the conveying sen- nance
conveying sensor sor does not operate prop- Mode List
erly, clean and reattach it
then reconnect the connector.
3 (When feeding paper from The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
cassette 1) Checking the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
connection is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire. • Conveying sensor
- Feed drive PWB • Feed
3 (When feeding paper from The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
cassette 2) Checking the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
PWB faulty.
7-147
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Object: Paper feeder Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
When feeding from cassette1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette and conveyed
through next roller after feed clutch turns on, and reach to next sensor.

the wire. • PF conveying sen-
sor 1, 2 - PF PWB • PF PWB
- Engine PWB
2 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying sensor does Clean and reattach the PF
ing sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1 or 2 and
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-148
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the
roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the
cassette but stops at next roller.

Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
2 Checking the conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the con-
roller and the pulley conveying roller is not veying roller and pulley.
enough. Check the pressure level of
the conveying roller and pul-
ley and if the spring or bear-
ing is dropped off, reattach
them. If they are deformed or
worn out, replace them.
3 Checking the drive gear The conveying roller does If the foreign objects adhere
not rotate since the drive on the drive gear, remove
gear does not transfer the them. If it is damaged, etc.,
drive. replace it.
4 Checking the feed drive Feed drive unit does not Check the operation of the Detaching
unit operate correctly. feed drive unit. If the feed and reat-
drive unit does not operate taching the
correctly, reattach it. If not Feed Drive
repaired, replace it. Unit
position.
replace them.
7-149
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Middle clutch -
• Vertical conveying clutch -
PWB
9 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- Execute U032. If the middle Mainte-
ate properly. clutch (for cassette 1) or the nance
vertical conveying clutch (for Mode List
cassette 2) does not operate
correctly, reattach it and
10 Checking the feed motor The feed motor does not Execute U030 [Feed]. If the Mainte-
rotate. feed motor does not operate nance
correctly, reattach it and Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Object: Paper feeder Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is
slipping. Or, the roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cas-
sette but stops at next roller.

Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
7-150
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the con-
roller and the pulley conveying roller is not veying roller and pulley.
enough. Check the pressure level of
the conveying roller and pul-
ley and if the spring or bear-
ing is dropped off, reattach
them. If they are deformed or
worn out, replace them.
3 Checking the drive gear The conveying roller does If the foreign objects adhere
not rotate since the drive on the drive gear, remove
gear does not transfer the them. If it is damaged, etc.,
drive. replace it.
4 Checking the PF drive unit PF drive unit does not Check the operation of the Detaching
operate correctly. PF drive unit. If the PF drive and reat-
unit does not operate cor- taching the
rectly, reattach it. If not PF Drive
repaired, replace it. Unit
position.
replace them.
the wire. • PF conveying
feed motor - PF PWB • PF
PWB - Engine PWB
9 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying clutch does Execute U247. If PF convey- Mainte-
ing clutch not operate correctly. ing clutch 1, 2 does not oper- nance
ate properly, reattach it and Mode List
7-151
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10 Checking the PF feed The PF feed motor does Execute U247. If the PF feed Mainte-
motor not rotate. motor does not operate cor- nance
rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is
decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).

1 Performing the prior stan- There is a mechanical Perform the prior standard Prior Stan-
dard check items cause such as the dirty check items. dard
guide, etc. Check
Items
replace them.
3 (When paper leading edge The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is
is bent) Checking paper damp.
4 (When paper stops at the Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
DU conveying roller due to used. paper within the specifica- Paper
slip) Checking paper tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
7-152
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the DU conveying
DU conveying roller) ity is decreasing or slip- roller and the surface of the
Checking the DU convey- ping. (Rotation is not DU conveying pulley. Check
ing roller and the pulley smooth) the pressure level of the roller
and the pulley, if the spring or
bearing are dropped off, reat-
tach them. If they are
deformed or worn out,
replace them. If the foreign
objects are on the drive gear,
remove them. If it is dam-
aged, replace it.
6 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Reattach the actuator and the
the spring operate properly. spring of the registration sen-
sor. If the do not operate cor-
rectly due to the deformation,
etc., repair or replace them.
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Duplex conveying drive does not rotate.
Or, DU clutch does not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).

1 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive is not Check if the DU conveying
DU conveying roller) transmitted properly. roller manually rotates
Checking the drive parts smoothly. And clean and
reattach the drive parts if nec-
essary. If not repaired,
replace them.
the wire. • DU sensor 1, 2 -
Feed drive PWB • DU clutch
1, 2 - Feed drive PWB • Feed
motor - Feed drive PWB •
Feed drive PWB - Engine
PWB
3 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not oper- Execute U031 [DU1] or Mainte-
ate correctly. [DU2]. If the DU sensor 1 or 2 nance
does not operate properly, Mode List
clean and reattach it then
7-153
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not oper- Execute U032 [DU1] or Mainte-
ate correctly. [DU2]. If DU clutch 1 or 2 nance
does not operate correctly, Mode List
replace it.
operate correctly. feed motor does not operate nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is
decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
The MP conveying sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.

1 (When paper stops at the The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
MP feed roller) Checking crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
paper tion
2 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from MP
is bent) Checking paper bent. tray.
3 (When paper leading edge Paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If it
is bent) Checking paper or waving. is difficult to replace, switch
them.
4 (When paper leading edge foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the for-
is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adheres from
MP tray.
7-154
2SA/2RJ/2NK

MP feed roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
paper tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
replace them.
7 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the MP Detaching
MP feed roller) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
the MP feed roller and the ping. (Rotation is not replace it. And if the foreign taching the
drive gear smooth) objects are on the drive gear, MP Feed
remove it. If it is damaged, Roller
replace it.
the spring operate properly. spring of the MP conveying
sensor. If the do not operate
correctly due to the deforma-
tion, etc., repair or replace
them.
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, MP clutch
does not operate correctly.)
When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn on.

1 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate if it
attached properly. does not rise up.
2 Checking the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not When the MP lift plate does
operate properly. not rise up, reattach the MP
lift motor and reconnect the
replace it.
7-155
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the feed
MP feed roller) Checking transmitted properly. motor is transmitted to the
the drive parts conveying unit and, clean
and reattach the drive parts if
necessary. If not repaired,
replace the parts.
the wire. • Registration sen-
sor - Feed drive PWB • MP
clutch - Feed drive PWB •
Feed motor - Feed drive
PWB • Feed drive PWB -
Engine PWB
5 Checking the registration The registration sensor Execute U031 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. registration sensor does not nance
operate properly, clean and Mode List
reattach it then reconnect the
replace it.
6 Checking the MP clutch The MP clutch does not Execute U032 [MPT Feed]. If Mainte-
operate correctly. the MP clutch does not oper- nance
ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette 1

When feeding from cassette 1, registration sensor is kept ON and does not turn off.

1 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
tion
7-156
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace paper. And install Installing
the cassette heater if neces- the
sary. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
3 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force Clean the surface of the Detaching
of the retard pulley is not retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the retard spring The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
position.
the wire. • Paper length sen-
sor 1 - Feed drive PWB •
Registration sensor - Feed
drive PWB • Registration
Feed clutch 1 - Feed drive
Engine PWB
6 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected If the paper size loaded in the
sensor by paper length sensor. cassette differs from the
paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach
paper length sensor 1 and
7 (When there is no paper The rotation of the registra- Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
loop mark) Checking the tion roller does not stop registration clutch does not nance
registration clutch while the registration operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
clutch remains engaged. and reconnect the connector.
replace it.
7-157
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the paper feed The rotation of the feed Execute U032 [Cassette1]. If Mainte-
clutch roller does not stop while feed clutch 1 does not oper- nance
the feed clutch remains ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
engaged. reconnect the connector. If
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0512: Multi-feeding from cassette

Conveying sensor does not turn off at paper feed from cassette 2.

tion
sary. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
position.
Conveying sensor - Feed
drive PWB • Feed clutch 2 -
PWB - Engine PWB
7-158
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected If the paper size loaded in the
sensor by paper length sensor. cassette differs from the
paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach
paper length sensor 2 and
7 Checking the conveying The conveying sensor Execute U031 [Cassette2 Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. Feed]. If the conveying sen- nance
sor does not operate prop- Mode List
8 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch Execute U032 [Cassette2]. If Mainte-
clutch does not operate properly. feed clutch 2 does not oper- nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0513/J0514: Multi-feeding from cassette

Object: Paper feeder
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, PF conveying sensor does not turn off.

tion
sary. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
7-159
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 (In case of occurring at the The fan shaped arm shifts Reattach the fan shaped arm
initial setup) Checking the due to run-over of the actu- (302DN0918_). If it is
fan shaped arm ator for paper length sen- deformed, replace it.
sor. Or, if the fan shaped
arm is deformed, the paper
length sensor in the cas-
sette misdetects.
Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
position.
6 Checking the installation There is no ground Check the continuity between
between the main unit and the main unit and the paper
the paper feeder. feeder, and reconnect the
drawer connector.
the wire. • PF paper length
sensor 1, 2 - PF PWB • PF
conveying sensor 1, 2 - PF
PWB • PF feed clutch 1, 2 -
PWB
8 Checking the PF paper Paper size is misdetected If the paper size loaded in the
length sensor by the PF paper length cassette differs from the
sensor. paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach the
PF paper length sensor 1 or 2
ing sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1 or 2, then
10 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Execute U247 [2PF] > Mainte-
feed clutch does not operate properly. [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch] or [C2 nance
Clutch]. If PF feed clutch 1 or Mode List
2 does not operate properly,
replace it.
7-160
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section.

tion
2 Checking the paper Paper is curled or waved Correct or replace paper. If it
due to the moisture is difficult to replace, switch
absorption. the leading edge and the trail-
them.
the wire. • Registration clutch
- Feed drive PWB • Registra-
tion sensor - Feed drive PWB
• DU clutch 1, 2 - Feed drive
Engine PWB
4 (When there is no paper The rotation of the registra- Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
loop mark while paper is at tion roller does not stop registration clutch does not nance
the registration section) while the registration operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
Checking the registration clutch remains engaged. and reconnect the connector.
clutch If not repaired, replace it.
replace it.
7-161
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not oper- Execute U032 [DU1] or Mainte-
ate correctly. [DU2]. If DU clutch 1 or 2 nance
replace it.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn off.

tion
2 Checking the paper Paper is curled or waved. Correct or replace paper. If it
them.
3 Checking the MP feed The paper fanning is not Clean the MP feed roller and Detaching
roller and the MP friction enough. the MP friction pad, or and reat-
pad replace them. taching the
MP Feed
Roller
the spring operate properly. spring of the MP conveying
sensor. If the do not operate
them.
sor - Feed drive PWB • MP
PWB
7-162
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
7 Checking the MP clutch The rotation of the MP Execute U032 [MPT Feed]. If Mainte-
feed roller does not stop the MP clutch does not oper- nance
while the MP clutch ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
remains engaged. reconnect the connector. If
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying
sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the
is bent) Checking paper bent. deck.
them.
is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adhere from the
deck
replace them.
7-163
2SA/2RJ/2NK

position.
PF feed roller) Checking crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
paper tion
PF feed roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
8 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
the PF feed roller ping. (Rotation is not replace it. taching the
smooth) PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
9 (When paper stops at the The PF feed motor drive is Check if the drive of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to and reat-
the drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean taching the
and reattach the drive parts if PF Drive
necessary. If not repaired, Unit
replace the parts.
the spring operate properly. spring of the PF feed sensor.
If they do not operate cor-
rectly due to the deformation,
etc., repair or replace them.
11 Checking the PF retard The paper separation force Clean the PF retard pulley Detaching
pulley of the PF retard pulley is surface. If it is worn down, and reat-
insufficient. replace it. taching the
PF Retard
Roller
12 reattaching PF retard The PF retard spring Reattach the PF retard
spring comes off. spring.
7-164
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive
does not start. Or, PF feed clutch does not operate correctly.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying
sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper stops at the The PF feed motor drive is Check if the drive of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to and reat-
the drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean taching the
and reattach the drive parts if PF Drive
necessary. If not repaired, Unit
replace the parts.
the wire. • PF horizontal con-
veying sensor - PF PWB (Left
deck) • PF vertical conveying
sensor - PF PWB (Right
deck) • PF feed clutch 1, 2 -
PWB
3 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor or the ing sensor or the PF verti- horizontal conveying sensor
PF vertical conveying sen- cal conveying sensor does or the PF vertical conveying
sor not operate correctly. sensor, then reconnect the
replace it.
4 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Execute U247. If PF feed Mainte-
feed clutch does not operate properly. clutch 1, 2 does not operate nance
properly, reattach it and Mode List
motor not operate correctly. motor does not operate cor- nance
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-165
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0533/J0534: Multi-feeding from the large capacity paper feeder

Object: Large capacity feeder
When feeding from large capacity feeder, they do not turn off even predetermined time has passed since the
PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor turns on.

tion
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the
bent. deck.
paper. eign objects adhere from the
deck
PF Retard
Roller
6 Checking the installation The ground between the Check the continuity between
main unit and the large the main unit and the large
capacity paper feeder is capacity paper feeder, and
not secured. reconnect the drawer con-
nector.
the wire. • PF horizontal con-
veying sensor - PF PWB (Left
deck) • PF vertical conveying
sensor - PF PWB (Right
deck) • PF feed clutch 1, 2 -
PWB
8 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor or the ing sensor or the PF verti- horizontal conveying sensor
PF vertical conveying sen- cal conveying sensor does or the PF vertical conveying
sor not operate correctly. sensor, then reconnect the
replace it.
7-166
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0545: No paper feed from the side deck

Object: Side deck Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught.
Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
When feeding from side deck, PF feed sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed since PF
feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the
is bent) Checking paper bent. side deck.
them.
is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adhere from the
side deck
replace them.
position.
7-167
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance of front Reattach the pressure spring Detaching
Checking the pressure and rear of the PF feed of the PF feed roller. If it is and reat-
spring rollers are not proper. deformed, repair or replace it. taching the
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
PF feed roller) Checking crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
paper tion
PF feed roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
9 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
the PF feed roller and the ping. (Rotation is not replace it. And if the foreign taching the
drive gear smooth) objects adhere on the drive PF Pickup
gear, remove them. If it has a Roller and
damage, replace it. PF Feed
Roller
PF Retard
Roller
J0545: No paper feed from the side deck

Object: Side deck Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not
start. Or, conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
When feeding from side deck, PF feed sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed since PF
feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper stops at the The PF feed motor drive is Check if the drive of the PF
feed roller) Checking the not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to
drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean
replace the parts.
7-168
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the installation There is no ground Check the continuity between
between the main unit and the main unit and the large
the side deck. capacity paper feeder, and
reconnect the drawer con-
nector.
the wire. • PF feed sensor -
PF PWB • PF feed clutch -
PF PWB • PF conveying
motor - PF PWB • PF PWB -
Engine PWB
4 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed sensor Clean and reattach the PF
feed sensor does not operate properly. feed sensor, then reconnect
the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
5 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Execute U247 [Side Feeder] Mainte-
feed clutch does not operate properly. > [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch]. If the nance
PF feed clutch does not oper- Mode List
ate properly, reattach it and
6 Checking the PF convey- The PF conveying motor Execute U247 [Side Feeder] Mainte-
ing motor does not operate correctly. > [Motor]. If the PF conveying nance
motor does not operate prop- Mode List
erly, reattach it and reconnect
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-169
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0555: Multi-feeding from the side deck

Object: Side deck
When feeding from side deck, it does not turn off even predetermined time has passed since PF feed sensor
is turned on.

tion
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with for-
paper. eign objects.
PF Retard
Roller
5 Checking the PF retard The PF retard spring Reattach the PF retard
6 Checking the installation There is no ground Install the rail of the side deck PF-7120
between the main unit and (Bundled items of the side Installa-
the side deck. deck) to the main unit. tion Guide
the wire. • PF feed sensor -
PF PWB • PF feed clutch -
PWB
8 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed sensor Clean and reattach the PF
feed sensor does not operate properly. feed sensor, then reconnect
replace it.
9 Checking the PF paper The rotation of the PF feed Execute U247 [Side Feeder] Mainte-
feed clutch roller does not stop while > [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch]. If the nance
the PF feed clutch remains PF feed clutch does not oper- Mode List
engaged. ate properly, reattach it and
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-170
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder Condition: There is a damage on
paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

replace them.
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
4 (When paper is skewed or Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
conveyed late) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
Roller
tion
bent. cassette.
7-171
2SA/2RJ/2NK

them.
cassette.
9 (When paper slips) Check- Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
ing paper used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder Condition: There is no damage on
paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

PF feed roller) Checking not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to
the drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean
replace the parts.
- Feed drive PWB • PF feed
feed motor - PF PWB • Feed
drive PWB - Engine PWB •
PF PWB - Engine PWB
7-172
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1413/J1414: Conveying sensor stay jam

The conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

replace them.
position.
7-173
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
5 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with Reattach the conveying
occurs) Checking the con- the conveying guide. guide. If a burr in the convey-
veying guide ing surface of the conveying
guide, remove or replace it.
6 Checking the PF feed Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
roller and the drive gear ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
ping. (Rotation is not replace it. And if the foreign taching the
smooth) objects adhere on the drive PF Pickup
Roller
7 Checking the PF cover The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
closed securely. Replace it if
it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
tion
bent. cassette.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
cassette.
7-174
2SA/2RJ/2NK

- Feed drive PWB • PF feed
clutch 1, 2 - PF PWB • Feed
PF PWB - Engine PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught.
Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.

tion
paper. eign objects adhere in the
cassette.
7-175
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace them.
Roller
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper in the
is bent) Checking paper bent. cassette.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
7-176
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

tion
paper. eign objects adhere in the
deck.
replace them.
Roller
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper in the
is bent) Checking paper bent. deck.
them.
7-177
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

Object: Paper feeder Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not
start. Or, conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.

replace the parts.
the wire. • PF conveying sen-
sor 1 - PF PWB • PF convey-
ing clutch 2 - PF PWB • PF
feed motor - PF PWB • PF
PWB - Engine PWB
ing sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1, then
4 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying clutch does Reattach the PF conveying
ing clutch not operate correctly. clutch 2 and reconnect the
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-178
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Large capacity feeder Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive
does not start. Or, conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

replace the parts.
the wire. • PF vertical convey-
ing sensor - PF PWB • PF
horizontal conveying clutch 2
- PF PWB • PF feed motor -
PWB
3 Checking the PF vertical The PF vertical conveying Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor sensor does not operate vertical conveying sensor,
correctly. then reconnect the connector.
4 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Execute U247. If PF horizon- Mainte-
conveying clutch ing clutch does not operate tal conveying clutch 2 does nance
correctly. not operate properly, reattach Mode List
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-179
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1614: PF conveying sensor 1 stay jam

Object: Paper feeder
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feed paper from the cassette 4.

replace them.
Roller
position.
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
6 (When the paper convey- The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
ing was delayed) Checking closed securely. Replace it if
the PF cover it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
7-180
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tion
bent.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
12 Checking the PF paper The PF feed sensor is not Reattach the PF feed sensor
feed sensor attached properly. The and reconnect the connector.
connector is not connected If not repaired, replace it.
properly. Or, the wire is
faulty.
the wire. • PF PWB - Engine
PWB
14 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
est version. to the latest version Update
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-181
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1614: PF vertical conveying sensor stay jam

The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

replace them.
Roller
position.
5 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance of front Reattach the pressure spring
Checking the pressure and rear of the conveying of the conveying related roll-
spring related rollers are not ers. If it is deformed, repair or
proper. replace it.
deformation.
tion
bent.
them.
7-182
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
the wire. • PF vertical convey-
ing sensor - PF PWB • PF
PWB - Engine PWB
14 Checking the PF vertical The PF vertical conveying Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor sensor does not operate vertical conveying sensor,
correctly. then reconnect the connector.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or
Side deck Condition: There is a damage on paper.
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side deck.

1 (When there is a catch Paper is caught by foreign If the foreign objects, a burr
mark at the paper leading objects, a hole, a burr, etc. are on the conveying surface
edge or paper is skewed) on the conveying surface of the conveying guide,
Checking paper path of the conveying guide. remove or replace them. If
the sheet guide has a dam-
age, deformation, floating,
repair or replace it.
7-183
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 (When paper is bent such The conveying path is If the foreign objects, a burr
as Z-shape) Checking clogged with foreign are on the conveying surface
paper path objects such as a piece of of the conveying guide,
paper, etc.. remove or replace them. If
there is a damage, replace
them.
3 (When paper is skewed or Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the mid-
bent such as Z-shape) ity is decreasing or slip- dle roller. If it is worn out,
Checking the middle roller ping. (Rotation is not replace it. If the foreign
and the drive gear smooth) objects adhere on the drive
gear, remove them. And if it is
damaged, replace it.
position.
proper. replace it.
deformation.
8 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper in the
is bent) Checking paper bent. cassette.
them.
is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adheres in the
cassette.
middle roller and paper crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
leading edge is bent) tion
Reloading paper
7-184
2SA/2RJ/2NK

middle roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
13 (When paper is bent such The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
as Z-shape and jammed nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
before the registration is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
roller) Checking the con- there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
nection the wire. • Registration sen-
sor - Feed drive PWB • Mid-
dle clutch - Feed drive PWB •
PWB
replace it.
15 Checking the middle clutch When paper stops at the Execute U032 [Middle]. If the Mainte-
middle roller: As the middle middle clutch does not oper- nance
clutch does not turn on, the ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
middle roller does not reconnect the connector. If
rotate. When paper not repaired, replace it.
become Z-fold and paper
JAM occurs before the reg-
istration roller: The rota-
tion of the middle roller
does not stop while the
middle clutch remains
engaged.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-185
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4 ), or
Side deck Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Middle roller does not rotate.
Middle clutch does not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side deck.

1 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive does Check if the drive of the feed
middle roller) Checking the not transmit to the middle motor is transmitted to the
drive parts roller. feed drive unit and, clean and
reattach the drive parts if nec-
essary. If not repaired,
replace the parts.
2 (When paper JAM occurs The paper is not suffi- Set the paper loop amount at Mainte-
before registration roller) ciently pinched between U051. nance
Setting paper loop the registration rollers. Mode List
sor - Feed drive PWB • Mid-
dle clutch - Feed drive PWB •
Feed motor - Feed drive
Engine PWB
replace it.
5 Checking the middle clutch The middle clutch does not Execute U032 [Middle]. If the Mainte-
operate properly. middle clutch does not oper- nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-186
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4012/J4013/J4014/J4015: Registration sensor stay jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or
Side deck
The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side deck.

replace them.
position.
proper. replace it.
5 (When multi-feed occurs) The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
Reloading the paper crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
6 (When multi-feed occurs) The paper fanning is not Clean the feed roller and the Detaching
Checking the paper feed enough. retard roller. And replace and reat-
roller and the retard pulley them. taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Retard
Roller
Replace-
ment
7 Checking the conveying The paper conveying force Clean or replace the convey-
rollers of the conveying rollers is ing related rollers.
insufficient.
bent. cassette.
7-187
2SA/2RJ/2NK

them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
cassette.
sor - Feed drive PWB • Reg-
istration clutch - Feed drive
Engine PWB
replace it.
14 Checking the registration The registration clutch Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
clutch does not operate properly. registration clutch does not nance
operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-188
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4101/J4102/J4103/J4104/J4105/J4108/J4109: Belt winding sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper JAM on the primary transfer belt. (Paper does not separate from the
belt)
The belt roll-up sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side deck, duplex sec-
tion or the MP tray.

1 Cleaning the discharge Toner, paper dust are stick- Clean the discharge needle Cleaning
needle and separation ing to the discharge needle located at upper section of the Sec-
sheet or separation sheet, and the secondary transfer roller ondary
separation performance is and the separation sheet. Transfer /
decreasing. Separa-
tion Sec-
tion
2 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
4 Checking the connection The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector
conveying unit that con- between the paper conveying
nects to the main unit is unit and the main unit.
not properly connected.
(Loose connection, etc.)
the wire. • Belt roll-up sensor
6 Checking the belt winding The belt winding sensor Execute U031 [Belt Jam]. If Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. the belt roll-up sensor does nance
not operate properly, clean Mode List
and reattach it then recon-
7 Execute U108 The separation shift bias Change the setting [On Tim- Mainte-
ON timing of paper leading ing Lead] at U108 [Timing] nance
edge is late. back to the default value. Mode List
7-189
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper JAM after passing through the secondary transfer roller (Belt
winding sensor does not detect.)

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-190
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Paper JAM before the secondary transfer roller.

1 (When there is any dam- Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
age at paper leading edge) veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
Checking paper path paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
the parts such as the convey-
replace them.
2 (If there is a damage on Paper is caught in clear- Reattach the transfer for-
paper leading edge) Rein- ance of the transfer forwarding guide.
stalling the transfer forwarding guide.
warding guide
3 (When there is a damage Paper is caught in the reg- If the registration guide sheet
in the middle of paper) istration guide sheet. has a damage, deformation,
Checking the registration floating, repair or replace it.
guide sheet
4 (If there is a damage in the Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
middle of paper) Replacing ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
paper and install the cas- absorption. optional
sette heater equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
5 Changing the setting The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
6 Setting the paper loop The paper is not suffi- Set the paper loop amount at Mainte-
amount ciently pinched between U051. nance
the registration rollers. Mode List
8 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Close the right cover securely
transfer roller roller does not rotate prop- so that the drive of the pri-
erly. mary transfer belt is transmit-
ted to the secondary transfer
roller. If there is deformation
of the secondary transfer
roller, breakage of the drive
gear, scraping of the bearing
etc., replace it.
7-191
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the drive gear The drive is not transmitted Repair or replace the drive
to the registration roller. gears transmitting the drive of
the feed motor to the registra-
tion roller.
the wire. • Registration clutch
7 Checking the registration The registration clutch Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
clutch does not operate properly. registration clutch does not nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4111/J4112/J4113/J4114/J4115/J4118/J4119: Belt winding sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper JAM before fuser section.

1 Performing the prior stan- There is a mechanical Perform the prior standard Prior Stan-
dard check items cause such as the dirty check items. dard
guide, etc. Check
Items
7-192
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 (When the paper leading Paper is caught in the If a piece of paper, the foreign
edge is bent or paper is fuser entrance guide. objects are on the conveying
skewed) Checking the path, or the foreign objects, a
paper path burr are on the conveying
surface of the fuser entrance
guide, remove them. Or,
replace the fuser entrance
guide. If the sheet or the film
is dropped off, repair or
replace them.
4 Checking the fuser roller The fuser roller does not Install the fuser unit so that Detaching
and the drive parts operate correctly. the drive of the fuser motor is and reat-
transmitted to the fuser roller. taching the
If there is a drive gear dam- Fuser Unit
age of the fuser roller, scrap-
ing of the bearing etc.,
replace it.
(belt roll-up sensor) conveying unit that con- between the paper conveying
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-193
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4205/J4208/J4209: Fuser sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper JAM at fuser section.
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit when feeding paper from
cassette 1 to 4, the side deck, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 (When the jam occurs The actuator does not Reinstall the actuator and the Detaching
such as an accordion jam) operate properly. spring of the fuser sensor. If it and reat-
Checking the actuator and does not operate correctly taching the
the spring due to the deformation, repair Fuser Unit
or replace them.
2 Checking the fuser exit Paper is caught in the con- If welding of toner, a burr are Detaching
guide veying surface of the fuser on the conveying surface of and reat-
exit guide. the fuser exit guide, remove taching the
or replace them. Fuser Unit
3 Changing the setting The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Replacing paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
bent.
6 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If it
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
9 Checking the fuser pres- The foreign objects adhere Clean the fuser pressure Detaching
sure roller/fuser belt/fuser on the fuser pressure roller, fuser belt and fuser for- and reat-
forwarding guide roller, fuser belt or fuser warding guide. Or, replace taching the
forwarding guide. the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
7-194
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck, duplex section or MP tray, paper wraps around fuser
roller, fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 Adjusting the paper lead- The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven, Mainte-
ing edge timing leading edge is incorrect. adjust the leading margin in nance
U034. Mode List
3 Replacing paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
bent.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
sure roller and the fuser to the fuser pressure roller roller and the fuser belt. And and reat-
belt or the fuser belt. replace the fuser unit. taching the
Fuser Unit
9 Checking the fuser separa- Toner or etc. adheres to If the toner, etc. are on the Detaching
tion plate the fuser separation plate, fuser separation plate, and reat-
or there is deformation or remove them. If it is taching the
floating. deformed, replace the fuser Fuser Unit
unit.
7-195
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck, duplex section or MP tray, paper wraps around fuser
roller, fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
2 (When using the thin Thin paper of 55g or less is Change paper type to [Cus- Cassette /
paper) Checking the image used and the solid image tom 7] at System Menu and MP Tray
of 30mm and more also change paper weight of Settings
appears at the leading [Custom 7] to [light]. Custom (Opera-
edge. 7 thin paper setting: this is tion Guide
the mode to support the fuser - Section
separation failure by decreas- 8)
ing the conveying speed and
the fuser temperature. (After
change setting, [
sure roller and the fuser to the fuser pressure roller roller and the fuser belt. And and reat-
belt or the fuser belt. replace the fuser unit. taching the
Fuser Unit
4 Checking the fuser separa- Toner or etc. adheres to If the toner, etc. are on the Detaching
tion plate the fuser separation plate, fuser separation plate, and reat-
or there is deformation or remove them. If it is taching the
floating. deformed, replace the fuser Fuser Unit
unit.

Condition: Paper JAM after passing through the fuser exit roller.
When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck, duplex section or MP tray, paper goes through the fuser
exit roller and paper JAM occurs, but the fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 (When the paper skew The actuator does not Reinstall the actuator and the Detaching
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of the fuser sensor. If it and reat-
ator and the spring does not operate correctly taching the
due to the deformation, repair Fuser Unit
or replace them.
2 (When paper is skewed) The fuser exit guide is Reattach the fuser exit guide. Detaching
Checking the fuser exit deformed. If there is a warp on the con- and reat-
guide veying surface of the fuser taching the
exit guide, repair or replace it. Fuser Unit
3 (When paper is skewed) The conveying capability Clean the fuser exit roller. If Detaching
Checking the fuser exit of the fuser exit roller is not the surface is worn out, and reat-
roller enough. replace it. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-196
2SA/2RJ/2NK

bent.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
9 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reconnect the drawer con- Detaching
not properly connected. nector between the fuser unit and reat-
and the feed image PWB. taching the
Fuser Unit
the wire. • Fuser sensor -
Feed image PWB • Feed
image PWB - Engine PWB
8 Checking the fuser sensor The fuser sensor does not Execute U031 [Fuser Feed]. Mainte-
operate properly. If the fuser sensor does not nance
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-197
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4215/J4218/J4219: Fuser sensor stay jam

When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck, duplex section or MP tray, paper JAM occurs before the
exit roller and the fuser sensor does not turn off.

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
2 Checking the eject guide Paper is caught in the exit If a piece of paper, the foreign
guide, a piece of paper, objects are on the conveying
etc.. path, or a burr in the parts
such as the conveying sur-
face of the exit guide or the
actuator, remove or replace
them.
3 Installing the cassette Due to steam generated Install the cassette heater. Installing
heater from paper, paper sticks to the
the exit guide. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
4 Checking the eject guide Toner is welded to the exit Clean the conveying surface Detaching
guide. of the exit guide. and reat-
tachint the
Exit Unit
5 Checking the actuator The actuator is not Reattach the actuator for the
attached properly. fuser sensor.
6 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reconnect the drawer con- Detaching
not properly connected. nector between the fuser unit and reat-
and the feed image PWB. taching the
Fuser Unit
Feed image PWB • Fuser
Engine PWB
8 Checking the exit roller The exit roller or drive Reinstall the exit unit so that Detaching
and the drive parts parts do not operate cor- the drive of the fuser motor is and reat-
rectly. transmitted to the upper and tachint the
lower exit roller. If there is a Exit Unit
damage of the upper and
lower exit roller, scraping of
the bearing tec., replace it.
7-198
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 reattaching corrugation Corrugation parts do not Reattach the corrugation Detaching
parts operate correctly. parts in the exit unit. (Parts to and reat-
add stiffness to the output tachint the
paper) Exit Unit
replace it.
11 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor does not Execute U030 [Fuser]. If the Mainte-
operate properly. fuser motor does not operate nance
12 (When the issue occurs The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
when conveying paper to nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the job separator or the is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
duplex section) Checking there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the connection the wire. • Exit reverse motor
- Feed image PWB • Feed
13 (When the issue occurs The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
when conveying paper to does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
the job separator or the not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
duplex section) Checking tach it and reconnect the con-
the exit reverse motor. nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper jam in the eject unit
When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck, duplex section or MP tray, paper JAM occurs at the exit
section and the fuser sensor does not turn off.

1 Checking the paper tray There is an obstacle on the Remove an obstacle.
tray.
7-199
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the paper tray Paper stopper is not Store paper stopper upper
stored. exit tray.
5 Checking the eject guide Foreign objects such as Clean the eject guide, or
toner are on the eject replace the eject unit.
guide.
6 Checking the eject roller The eject roller does not Replace the eject unit if the Detaching
rotate. drive gear is deformed, the and reat-
torque limiter is faulty, or the tachint the
bushing is worn down. Exit Unit
7 (When the sensor does not The fuser unit or the exit Reinstall the fuser unit and Detaching
turn on under the condition unit is not installed prop- the exit unit, and reconnect and reat-
that paper is available) erly. the connector of the exit unit. taching the
reinstalling the fuser unit or Fuser Unit
the exit unit Detaching
and reat-
tachint the
Exit Unit
Feed image PWB • Exit
reverse motor - Feed image
Engine PWB
9 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Reinstall the actuator and the Detaching
the spring operate properly. spring of the fuser sensor. If it and reat-
does not operate correctly taching the
due to the deformation, repair Fuser Unit
or replace them.
replace it.
7-200
2SA/2RJ/2NK

11 (When the issue occurs The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
when conveying paper to does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
the job separator or the not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
duplex section) Checking tach it and reconnect the con-
the exit reverse motor. nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper jam at the exit section when feeding LetterR or Legal on the
machine with the punch unit installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex
section or the MP tray, the corners of the paper leading edge are caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of
the punch unit and paper jam occurs, and the fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled Reload paper upside down.
upward. And so, it is easy
to be caught by the PH cut-
ter receiving hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since Relocate the paper width
guides there is a gap between the guides so that there is no gap
paper width guides and the between them to the paper
paper edges. edges.
3 Explanation for user The corners of the paper Request user to feed paper
(request to change from leading edge of LetterR as "Letter" not but "LetterR".
"LetterR" to "Letter") are close to the PH cutter If user accepts, relocate the
receiving holes of the paper width guides to "Letter"
punch unit. Consequently, position and load the paper.
the corners are caught by Then, explain users who
the holes if each center need to change "Orientation"
position is not adjusted. in Quick Print on the printer
drive so that the orientation is
rotated to 90 degrees C.
7-201
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Adjusting the center posi- The center positions of the Adjust each center position Adjusting
tions of the punch unit and punch unit and the paper by the following procedures. the center
the paper width guides width guides are mis- (Refer to the reference docu- positions
matched, and so, the cor- ment" for the details.) 1. Load of the
ners of the paper leading paper on the MP tray. Then, punch unit
edge is caught by the PH set the punch holes and exe- and the
cutter receiving holes of cute the test print to align the paper
the punch unit. position of the punch unit. 2. width
Feed paper from each paper guides
source except the MP tray to
check if the forward and
backward punch holes are
not shifted. 3. If the forward
and backward punch holes
are shifted aside in above 2,
change the center position of
the paper width guides to
adjust. After changing the
center position, execute
U034 [LSU Out Left] and
adjust the center line except
for "MPT".

When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck, duplex section or MP tray, paper JAM occurs at the exit
feedshift guide and fuser sensor does not turn off.

tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
bent.
them.
7-202
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 (When paper stick to the Toner is welded to the exit Clean the conveying surface
exit feedshift guide and feedshift guide. of the exit feedshift guide.
paper JAM occurs) Clean
the exit feedshift guide
6 (When paper JAM occurs The paper curls. Replace with long grain
in the middle of the exit paper.
feedshift guide) Replacing
paper
7 (When paper JAM occurs Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
in the middle of the exit ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
feedshift guide) Replacing absorption. optional
paper and installing the equip-
cassette heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
8 (When the paper jam The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
occurs at the middle of the paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
exit feedshift guide) type, paper size) do not Settings
Checking paper match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
9 (When the paper jam Paper is caught in the exit If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs since paper hits the feedshift guide, a piece of objects are on the conveying
exit feedshift guide) paper, etc.. path, or a burr in the parts
Checking paper convey- such as the conveying sur-
ing path face of the exit feedshift
or replace them.
10 (When the paper jam The exit feedshift guide Reattach the exit feedshift
occurs since paper hits the does not operate correctly. guide. Or, reconnect the con-
exit feedshift guide) nector of the exit unit.
Checking the exit feedshift
guide
11 (When the paper jam The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Mainte-
occurs since paper hits the operate correctly. Up] or [Branch Eject Down] to nance
exit feedshift guide) check the exit feedshift guide Mode List
Checking the exit solenoid operation. If it does not oper-
ate correctly, reattach the exit
upper solenoid or the exit
lower solenoid and recon-
7-203
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 (When the paper jam The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
occurs since paper hits the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
exit feedshift guide) is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
Checking the connection there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • Exit upper solenoid
/ Exit lower solenoid - Feed
image PWB • Feed image
PWB - Engine PWB
13 (When paper hit the exit The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
feedshift guide and paper faulty. PWB.
JAM occurs) Replacing the
feed image PWB
14 (When paper hit the exit The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
feedshift guide and paper and reat-
JAM occurs) Replacing the taching the
engine PWB Engine
PWB
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4304/J4305/J4309: DU sensor 1 non-arrival jam

When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck or MP tray, DU sensor 1 does not turn on after dual
reverse operation.

1 (When paper is bent Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
before the DU conveying veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
roller) Checking paper path paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
replace them.
2 (When paper is bent The paper curls. Replace with long grain
before the DU conveying paper.
roller) Replacing paper
3 (When paper is bent Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
before the DU conveying ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
roller) Replacing paper absorption. optional
and install the cassette equip-
heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
7-204
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 (When paper is bent The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
before the DU conveying paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
roller) Changing setting type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
bent.
them.
8 Checking the paper con- The roller, the guide, etc. is Clean , repair and reattach
veying parts not attached properly. Or, the conveying parts such as
they are dirty, deformed, the roller, guide, etc. If not
worn out. repaired, replace it.
9 (When paper is skewed) Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
Checking paper used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
10 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the reverse Reattach the reverse guide
Checking the reverse guide pulley is not enough. pulley. If the pressing parts
guide pulleys are deformed or damaged,
replace them.
11 (When paper is skewed) Conveying capability of the Clean the DU upper convey-
Checking the DU convey- DU conveying roller is not ing roller. If the surface is
ing roller enough. worn out, replace it.
12 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the DU con- Reattach the DU upper con-
Checking the DU convey- veying pulley is not veying pulley. If the pressing
ing pulleys enough. parts are deformed or dam-
aged, replace them.
7-205
2SA/2RJ/2NK

13 Checking the connection The exit unit connector or Reconnect the connector of Detaching
the conveying unit connec- the exit unit and the connec- and reat-
tor connecting to the main tor between the conveying tachint the
unit is not connected prop- unit and the main unit. Exit Unit
erly. (Pin is disconnected, Detaching
etc.) and reat-
taching the
Right
Cover
Assy
the wire. • DU sensor 1 -
1 - Feed drive PWB • Feed
PWB • Engine PWB - Main
PWB (In case that the abnor-
mal image due to the FFC
connection failure also
appears at the same timing)
15 Checking DU sensor 1 The DU sensor 1 does not Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
operate correctly. sensor 1 does not operate nance
properly, clean and reattach it Mode List
16 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Repair the drive parts in
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as the between the feed motor and
Checking the drive parts drive parts are faulty. the DU upper conveying
roller. If they do not operate
correctly due to the damage,
replace them.
17 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as DU clutch 1 does not operate cor- nance
Checking DU clutch 1 clutch does not operate rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
correctly. nect the connector. If not
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-206
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/J4315/J4319: DU sensor 1 stay jam

When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck or MP tray, DU sensor 1 does not turn off after dual
reverse operation.

4 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not oper- Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
ate correctly. sensor 1 does not operate nance
5 Checking the drive parts The DU conveying roller Repair the drive parts in
does not rotate correctly as between the feed motor and
the drive parts are faulty. the DU upper conveying
roller or the DU middle con-
veying roller. If they do not
operate correctly due to the
damage, replace them.
6 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not oper- Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
ate correctly. clutch 1 does not operate cor- nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-207
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4401/J4402/J4403/J4404/J4405/J4409: DU sensor 2 non-arrival jam

When feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck or MP tray, DU sensor 2 does not turn on even predeter-
mined time has passed after DU sensor 1 turns on.

2 (When paper is bent Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
before the DU conveying veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
roller) Checking paper path paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
replace them.
3 (When paper is bent The paper curls. Replace with long grain
before the DU conveying paper.
roller) Replacing paper
4 (When paper is bent Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
before the DU conveying ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
roller) Replacing paper absorption. optional
and install the cassette equip-
heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
5 (When paper is bent The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
before the DU conveying paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
roller) Changing setting type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
bent.
them.
7-208
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 (When paper is skewed) Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
Checking paper used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
10 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the reverse Reattach the reverse guide
Checking the reverse guide pulley is not enough. pulley. If the pressing parts
guide pulleys are deformed or damaged,
replace them.
11 (When paper is skewed) Conveying capability of the Clean the DU middle/lower
Checking the DU convey- DU conveying roller is not conveying roller. If the press-
ing roller enough. ing parts are deformed or
damaged, replace them.
12 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the DU con- Clean the DU middle/lower
Checking the DU convey- veying pulley is not conveying pulley. If the press-
ing pulleys enough. ing parts are deformed or
damaged, replace them.
PWB • Engine PWB - Main
PWB (In case that the abnor-
mal image due to the FFC
connection failure also
appears at the same timing)
15 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not oper- Execute U031 [DU2]. If DU Mainte-
ate correctly. sensor 2 does not operate nance
7-209
2SA/2RJ/2NK

16 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Repair the drive parts in
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as the between the feed motor and
Checking the drive parts drive parts are faulty. the DU middle conveying
roller or the DU lower convey-
ing roller. If they do not oper-
ate correctly due to the
damage, replace them.
17 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Execute U032 [DU2]. If DU Mainte-
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as DU clutch 2 does not operate cor- nance
Checking the DU clutch clutch does not operate rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
correctly. nect the connector. If not
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4701/J4702/J4703/J4704/J4705/J4709: Exit reverse sensor non-arrival jam

The exit reverse sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side deck or the MP
tray.

2 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs) Checking the piece of paper, etc. objects are on the conveying
paper path path, or a burr in the parts
ator, remove them.
3 (When the paper skew The actuator does not Reattach the actuator and
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of the exit reverse sen-
ator and the spring sor. If they do not operate
them.
7-210
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 (When paper jam occurs in The paper curls. Replace with long grain
the middle of the exit feed- paper.
shift guide) Replacing
paper
6 (When paper jam occurs in Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
the middle of the exit feeding due to moisture cassette heater. the
shift guide) Replacing absorption. optional
paper and installing the equip-
cassette heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
7 (When paper jam occurs in The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
the middle of the exit feed- paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
shift guide) Changing set- type, paper size) do not Settings
ting match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
bent.
them.
12 (When the paper jam The exit feedshift guide Reattach the exit feedshift Detaching
occurs since the paper hits does not operate correctly. guide and reconnect the con- and reat-
the exit feedshift guide) nector of the exit unit. tachint the
Checking the exit feedshift Exit Unit
guide
13 (When paper hits the exit Toner or etc. adheres to Clean the exit feedshift guide. Detaching
feedshift guide and paper the exit feedshift guide. If not repaired, replace the and reat-
jam occurs) Cleaning the exit unit. tachint the
exit feedshift guide or Exit Unit
replacing the exit unit.
7-211
2SA/2RJ/2NK

14 Checking the exit upper The exit upper roller does Replace the eject unit if the Detaching
roller not rotate. drive gear is deformed, the and reat-
15 Checking the connection The connector of the exit Reconnect the connector of Detaching
unit is not connected prop- the exit unit. and reat-
erly. tachint the
Exit Unit
the wire. • Exit reverse sen-
sor - Feed image PWB • Exit
upper solenoid / Exit lower
solenoid - Feed image PWB •
Exit reverse motor - Feed
PWB - Engine PWB
17 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse sensor Execute U031 [Exit Paper]. If Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. the exit reverse sensor does nance
18 Checking the exit solenoid The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Mainte-
operate correctly. Up] or [Branch Eject Down] to nance
check the exit feedshift guide Mode List
operation. If it does not oper-
19 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
tach it and reconnect the con-
nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-212
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4711/J4712/J4713/J4714/J4715/J4719: Exit reverse sensor stay jam

The exit reverse sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side deck or the MP
tray.

ator, remove them.
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of the exit reverse sen-
ator and the spring sor. If they do not operate
them.
5 Checking the exit feedshift Toner or etc. adheres to Clean the exit feedshift guide. Detaching
guide the exit feedshift guide. Or, replace the exit unit. and reat-
tachint the
Exit Unit
6 Checking the exit upper The exit upper roller does Replace the eject unit if the Detaching
roller not rotate. drive gear is deformed, the and reat-
7 reconnecting the connec- The connector of the exit Reconnect the connector of Detaching
tor of the exit unit. unit is not connected prop- the exit unit. and reat-
erly. tachint the
Exit Unit
the wire. • Exit reverse sen-
sor - Feed image PWB • Exit
upper solenoid / Exit lower
solenoid - Feed image PWB •
Exit reverse motor - Feed
PWB - Engine PWB
7-213
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse sensor Execute U031 [Exit Paper]. If Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. the exit reverse sensor does nance
10 Checking the exit solenoid The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Mainte-
operate correctly. Up] or [Branch Eject Down] to nance
check the exit feedshift guide Mode List
operation. If it does not oper-
11 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4901/J4902/J4903/J4904/J4905/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1to 4, the side deck, the duplex
section or the MP tray.

ator, remove them.
7-214
2SA/2RJ/2NK

occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of BR conveying sen-
ator and the spring sor 1. If they do not operate
them.
5 Checking the conveying The foreign objects such Clean or replace the convey-
guide as toner are on the con- ing guide.
veying guide.
6 Checking the paper con- The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear
veying roller does not rotate. is deformed, the torque lim-
iter is faulty, or the bushing is
worn down.
7 Checking BR conveying The BR conveying sensor Execute U031 [Bridge1 Mainte-
sensor 1 1 does not operate cor- Feed]. If BR conveying sen- nance
rectly. sor 1 does not operate prop- Mode List
8 Replacing the BR convey- The BR conveying motor Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the Mainte-
ing motor does not operate correctly. BR conveying motor does not nance
9 reattaching the attach- The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying AK-7100
ment kit between BR PWB and unit. Installa-
feed image PWB is not tion Guide
connected properly.
10 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-215
2SA/2RJ/2NK

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1to 4, the side deck, the duplex

ator, remove them.
them.
veying guide.
worn down.
connected properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-216
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1to 4, the side deck, the duplex

ator, remove them.
them.
veying guide.
worn down.
7-217
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying AK-7100
between BR PWB and unit. Installa-
connected properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/J5015/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1to 4, the side deck, the duplex

ator, remove them.
them.
veying guide.
7-218
2SA/2RJ/2NK

worn down.
8 Checking the BR convey- The BR conveying motor Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the Mainte-
connected properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J6000/J6001/J6002: DF paper entry failure jam

Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher), J6001 (1000-sheet finisher), J6002 (Inner
finisher)
Turning on of the DF paper entry sensor is detected before the paper eject from the main unit.

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects are on the conveying
path, or a burr in the parts
ator, remove them.
the wire. • DF entry sensor -
DF PWB
7-219
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the DF paper The DF entry sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
entry sensor not operate correctly. [HP]. If the DF entry sensor nance
clean and reattach it, then
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6012: Inner DF open jam

Object: Inner finisher
The Inner DF open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF connec- The DF connection sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
tion sensor does not operate properly. [Release]. If the DF connec- nance
tion sensor does not operate Mode List
J6020/J6021: DF front cover open jam

Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher), J6021 (1000-sheet finisher)
The DF front cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF front The DF front cover is not Check if the DF front cover
cover aligned to the other exte- closes firmly and reattach the
rior covers. DF front cover if necessary. If
the DF front cover is
deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DF front The DF front cover sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
cover sensor does not operate properly. [Front Cover]. If the DF front nance
cover sensor does not oper- Mode List
7-220
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6041: DF top cover open jam

Object: 1000-sheet finisher
The DF top cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover is not Check if the DF top cover is
aligned to the other exte- closed firmly and reattach the
rior covers. DF top cover if necessary. If
the DF top cover is deformed,
repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Top Cover]. If the DF top nance
J6050: BF tray open jam

Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
The BF tray open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray does not oper- Check if the BF tray closes
ate properly. firmly, and reattach the BF
tray if necessary. If the BF
tray is deformed, repair or
replace it.
2 Checking the BF tray sen- The BF tray sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Tray]. If the BF tray sensor nance
replace it.
J6060: MT cover open jam

Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
The MT cover open is detected during the paper conveying to the Mail Box.

1 Checking the MT cover The MT cover is not Check if the MT cover is
aligned with the other exte- securely closed, and reat-
rior covers. tach it if necessary. Repair or
7-221
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the MT cover The MT cover sensor does Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
sensor not operate properly. [Cover]. If the MT cover sen- nance
replace it.
J6070: BF unit open jam

The BF unit open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF set sen- The BF set sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Set]. If the BF set sensor nance
replace it.
J6080: BF left cover open jam

The BF left cover open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover is not Check if the BF left cover
sensor aligned with the other exte- turns on the BF left cover
rior covers. sensor firmly. If the BF left
cover is deformed, repair or
replace it.
2 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover sensor Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Left Guide]. If the BF left nance
7-222
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6100/J6101/J6102: DF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

finisher)
J6100/6101: DF conveying sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after BR conveying
sensor 2 turned on. J6102: DF conveying sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after
fuser sensor located at the main unit turned on.

DF PWB • DF entry motor -
DF PWB
replace it.
4 Checking the DF paper The DF entry motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
entry motor not operate correctly. [Feed In]. If the DF entry nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6110/J6111/J6112: DF paper entry sensor stay jam

finisher)
The DF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

7-223
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF PWB • DF entry motor -
DF PWB
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6200: DF sub eject sensor non-arrival jam

The DF sub eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor
turned on.

the wire. • DF sub exit sensor
- DF PWB • DF feedshift sole-
noid 3 - DF PWB • DF entry
motor - DF PWB • DF exit
motor - DF PWB
7-224
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the DF sub eject The DF sub exit sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Sub Tray Eject]. If the DF nance
sub exit sensor does not Mode List
4 Checking DF feedshift The DF feedshift solenoid Execute U240 [Solenoid] > Mainte-
solenoid 3 3 does not operate cor- [Booklet]. If DF feedshift sole- nance
rectly. noid 3 does not operate prop- Mode List
replace it.
replace it.
6 Checking the DF eject The DF exit motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Eject]. If the DF exit motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6210: DF sub eject sensor stay jam

The DF sub eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since the DF sub eject sensor turned
on.

7-225
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • DF sub exit sensor
- DF PWB • DF feedshift sole-
motor - DF PWB • DF exit
motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF sub eject The DF sub exit sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Sub Tray Eject]. If the DF nance
sub exit sensor does not Mode List
replace it.
replace it.
replace it.
7 Checking the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-226
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6300/J6301: DF middle sensor non-arrival jam

The DF middle sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned
on.

1 Checking the mechanical The roller, the guide, etc. is Perform the prior standard Prior Stan-
factor not attached properly. Or, check items. dard
they are dirty, deformed, Check
worn out. Items
the wire. • DF middle sensor -
DF PWB • DF feedshift sole-
motor - DF PWB • DF middle
motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Middle Tray Eject]. If the DF nance
middle sensor does not oper- Mode List
replace it.
replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle The DF middle motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > [Mid- Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. dle]. If the DF middle motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-227
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6310/J6311: DF middle sensor stay jam

The DF middle sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

DF PWB • DF exit clutch - DF
PWB • DF exit motor - DF
PWB • DF middle motor - DF
PWB
4 Checking the DF eject The DF exit clutch does Reattach the DF exit clutch
clutch not operate correctly. and reconnect the connector.
replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle The DF middle motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > [Mid- Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. dle]. If the DF middle motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-228
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF exit sensor non-arrival jam

finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF middle sensor turned on.

DF PWB • DF exit sensor -
DF PWB • DF exit motor - DF
PWB • DF tray motor - DF
PWB
4 Checking the DF exit sen- The DF exit sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Middle Tray]. If the DF exit nance
sensor does not operate Mode List
replace it.
6 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Tray]. If the DF tray motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-229
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6410/J6411/J6412: DF exit sensor stay jam

finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF exit sensor turned on.

the wire. • DF exit sensor -
PWB
replace it.
replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Update
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-230
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6500: DF exit sensor non-arrival jam when exiting paper stack

When making bundled output, DF exit sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after DF
middle sensor turned on.

DF PWB • DF exit sensor -
PWB
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-231
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6510/J6511/J6512: DF exit sensor stay jam when exiting paper stack

finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn off after the bundle exit started.

the wire. • DF exit sensor -
PWB
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-232
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6600: DF drum sensor non-arrival jam

The DF drum sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned
on.

the wire. • DF drum sensor -
noid 1 - DF PWB • DF drum
motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF drum The DF drum sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor not operate correctly. [Drum]. If the DF drum sensor nance
replace it.
solenoid 1 1 does not operate cor- [Sub Tray]. If DF feedshift nance
rectly. solenoid 1 does not operate Mode List
5 Checking the DF drum The DF drum motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Eject Conv]. If the DF drum nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-233
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6610: DF drum sensor stay jam

The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

noid 1 - DF PWB • DF drum
motor - DF PWB
replace it.
solenoid 1 1 does not operate cor- [Sub Tray]. If DF feedshift nance
rectly. solenoid 1 does not operate Mode List
5 Checking the DF drum The DF drum motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Eject Conv]. If the DF drum nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-234
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on when conveying the
paper to the folding unit.

DF PWB • DF relief drum
motor - DF PWB • BF entry
motor - BF PWB • DF PWB -
BF PWB
replace it.
4 Checking the DF retraction The DF relief drum motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
drum motor does not operate correctly. [Save]. If the DF relief drum nance
replace it.
5 Checking the BF paper The BF entry motor does Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
entry motor not operate correctly. [Feed In]. If the BF entry nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-235
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6810/J6811/J6812: Front DF side registration jam

finisher)
DF side registration sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor
1 turned on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the front DF The front DF adjusting Check if the DF front adjust-
adjusting plate plate is not properly ing plate shifts manually.
attached, or it is dirty, Clean and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not shift smoothly. Then,
replace it if it is not fixed.
the wire. • DF side registra-
tion sensor 1 - DF PWB • DF
side registration motor 1 - DF
PWB
3 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
tion sensor 1 sensor 1 does not operate [Width Front HP]. If the DF nance
correctly. side registration sensor 1 Mode List
does not operate properly,
replace it.
4 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 1 motor 1 does not operate [Width Test]. If DF side regis- nance
correctly. tration motor 1 does not oper- Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-236
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6910/J6911/J6912: Rear DF side registration jam

finisher)
DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor
2 turned on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the rear DF The rear DF adjusting Check if the DF rear adjusting
adjusting plate plate is not properly plate shifts manually. Clean
attached, or it is dirty, and reattach it if it does not
deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace
it if it is not fixed.
tion sensor 2 - DF PWB • DF
side registration motor 2 - DF
PWB
3 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
tion sensor 2 sensor 2 does not operate [Width Tail HP]. If the DF side nance
correctly. registration sensor 2 does not Mode List
4 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 2 motor 2 does not operate [Width Test]. If DF side regis- nance
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-237
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7000/J7001/J7002: DF staple jam

finisher)
The DF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the DF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up
was detected during the DF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF reg- Check if the lower BF regis- Staple
istration guide shifts manu- tration guide shifts manually, Jam Clear
ally, and reattach it if it and reattach it if it does not (Opera-
does not smoothly shift. smoothly shift. tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the drive parts The DF staple motor does Check if the DF staple motor Detaching
not rotate due to the rotates manually. Replace the and reat-
excessive load. DF staple unit if it does not taching the
rotate smoothly due to the DF Staple
damaged gear, etc. Unit
the wire. • DF staple unit - DF
staple relay PWB • DF staple
relay PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
unit and reat-
taching the
DF Staple
Unit
5 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple relay PWB Replace the DF staple relay
relay PWB is faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7100: BF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the BF vertical conveying
sensor turned on.

7-238
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • BF entry sensor -
BF PWB • BF entry motor -
BF PWB • BF PWB - DF
PWB
3 Checking the BF paper The BF entry sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
entry sensor not operate correctly. [HP]. If the BF entry sensor nance
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7110: BF paper entry sensor stay jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since the BF vertical conveying
sensor turned on.

the wire. • BF entry sensor -
BF PWB • BF entry motor -
PWB
7-239
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the BF paper The BF entry sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
entry sensor not operate correctly. [HP]. If the BF entry sensor nance
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7200: BF eject sensor non-arrival jam

The BF eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the center fold operation started.

the wire. • BF exit sensor - BF
PWB • BF blade motor - BF
PWB • BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF eject sen- The BF exit sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Eject]. If the BF exit sensor nance
replace it.
4 Checking the BF blade The BF blade motor does Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Blade]. If the BF blade motor nance
replace it.
7-240
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7210: BF eject sensor stay jam

The BF eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on during the center fold
operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reat-
attached. tach the BF tray.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7300: BF eject sensor non-arrival jam at tri-folding

The BF eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since starting the tri-fold operation.

7-241
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB • BF feedshift solenoid -
PWB
replace it.
4 Checking the BF feedshift The BF feedshift solenoid Execute U240 [Solenoid] > Mainte-
solenoid does not operate correctly. [Three Fold]. If the BF feed- nance
shift solenoid does not oper- Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7310: BF eject sensor stay jam at tri-folding

The BF eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on during the tri-fold oper-
ation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reat-
attached. tach the BF tray.
7-242
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7400: Upper BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the upper BF side registra-
tion guide shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the upper BF The upper BF side regis- Check if the upper BF side
side registration guide tration guide is not properly registration guide shifts man-
attached, or it is dirty, ually, and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not smoothly shift.
the wire. • BF side registra-
tion sensor 2 - BF PWB • BF
side registration motor 2 - BF
3 Checking BF side registra- The BF side registration Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
tion sensor 2 sensor 2 does not operate [Width Down HP]. If the BF nance
correctly. side registration sensor 2 Mode List
replace it.
tion motor 2 motor 2 does not operate [Width Test]. If BF side regis- nance
7-243
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7500: Lower BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the lower BF side registra-
tion guide shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the lower BF The lower BF side registra- Check if the lower BF side
side registration guide tion guide is not properly registration guide shifts man-
attached, or it is dirty, ually, and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not smoothly shift.
tion sensor 1 - BF PWB • BF
side registration motor 1 - BF
tion sensor 1 sensor 1 does not operate [Width Up HP]. If the BF side nance
correctly. registration sensor 1 does not Mode List
tion motor 1 motor 1 does not operate [Width Test]. If BF side regis- nance
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-244
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7600: BF staple jam

The BF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the BF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up
was detected during the BF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF reg- Check if the lower BF regis- Staple
istration guide shifts manu- tration guide shifts manually, Jam Clear
ally, and reattach it if it and reattach it if it does not (Opera-
does not smoothly shift. smoothly shift. tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple motor does Check if the BF staple motor
unit not rotate due to the rotates manually. Replace the
excessive load. BF staple unit if it does not
rotate smoothly due to the
damaged gear, etc.
the wire. • BF staple unit (BF
staple motor) - BF PWB • BF
PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
unit
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7700: BF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the eject signal from
the main unit was received.

7-245
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • BF vertical convey-
ing sensor - BF PWB • BF
entry motor - BF PWB • BF
PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
conveying sensor sensor does not operate [Vertical Feed]. If the BF verti- nance
correctly. cal conveying sensor does Mode List
not operate properly, reattach
4 Checking the drive parts The BF paper entry motor Check if the BF entry motor
drive parts are faulty. rotates by manually and if it
does not rotate smoothly due
to the damage of the gear,
etc., replace the drive parts of
the BF entry motor.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-246
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7710: BF vertical conveying sensor stay jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since it turned on.

the wire. • BF vertical convey-
ing sensor - BF PWB • BF
entry motor - BF PWB • BF
PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
conveying sensor sensor does not operate [Vertical Feed]. If the BF verti- nance
correctly. cal conveying sensor does Mode List
not operate properly, reattach
4 Checking the drive parts The BF paper entry motor Check if the BF entry motor
drive parts are faulty. rotates by manually and if it
does not rotate smoothly due
to the damage of the gear,
etc., replace the drive parts of
the BF entry motor.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-247
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7800: Mail Box ejection non-arrival jam

MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper is output from the main
unit.

1 Checking the belt and the The belt and surrounding Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
neighboring parts parts are not attached [Conv] to check the operation nance
properly. Or, they are dirty, of the belt. If the belt does not Mode List
deformed or worn out. operate correctly, repair the
belt and the neighboring parts
(feedshift claw lever, guide,
etc.). If not repaired, replace
the part.
the wire. • MT tray exit sensor
1, 2 - MT PWB • MT home
position sensor - MT PWB •
MT conveying motor - MT
PWB • MT PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the MT tray exit MT tray exit sensor 1 or 2 Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly. [Eject]. If MT tray exit sensor nance
1 or 2 does not operate prop- Mode List
replace it.
4 Checking the MT home The belt holding plate does Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
position sensor not operate properly since [Motor HP]. If the MT home nance
the MB home position sen- position sensor does not Mode List
sor is not properly con- operate properly, reattach it
nected or not attached. and reconnect the connector.
5 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying motor Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor does not operate properly. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
replace it.
6 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-248
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7810: Mail Box eject stay jam

The MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

1 Checking the belt and the The belt and surrounding Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
neighboring parts parts are not attached [Conv] to check the operation nance
properly. Or, they are dirty, of the belt. If the belt does not Mode List
deformed or worn out. operate correctly, repair the
belt and the neighboring parts
(feedshift claw lever, guide,
etc.). If not repaired, replace
the part.
2 Checking the MT tray The MT tray is not properly Reattach the MT tray.
attached.
the wire. • MT tray exit sensor
1, 2 - MT PWB • MT convey-
ing motor - MT PWB • MT
PWB - DF PWB
4 Checking the MT tray exit MT tray exit sensor 1 or 2 Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly. [Eject]. If MT tray exit sensor nance
1 or 2 does not operate prop- Mode List
replace it.
5 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying motor Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor does not operate properly. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-249
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7900/J7901/J7902: DF paddle jam

finisher).
Turning on of the DF paddle sensor is not detected after passing 1s since the DF paddle motor activated.

1 Removing the paper The paper is jammed in Remove the jammed paper
the DF paddle. from the DF paddle.
2 Checking the drive parts The DF paddle does not Check if the DF paddle motor
rotate due to the excessive rotates by manually and if it
load. does not rotate smoothly due
to the damage of the drive
parts, replace it.
the wire. • DP paddle sensor -
DP PWB • DP paddle motor -
DP PWB
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Lead Paddle]. If the DF pad- nance
dle sensor does not operate Mode List
5 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Beat]. If the DF paddle motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-250
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9000: No original feed from the DP

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP
The DP feed sensor does not turn on after the paper feed was retried.

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is folded.
2 Checking the original The original curls down- Correct or replace the origi-
ward or waves. nal. If it is difficult to replace,
switch the front end and the
rear end of the original, and
reset.
3 Checking the original The original out of specifi- Explain users to use the origi-
cation is used. nal within the specifications.
4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on Remove the original with the
the original. foreign objects.
5 Checking the paper path The original is caught up If a piece of paper, the foreign
by a piece of paper. objects are on the conveying
ator, remove them.
6 Checking the DP feed The paper conveying force Clean the DP feed roller sur-
roller of the DP feed roller is face. If worn down, replace it.
insufficient.
7 Replacing the DP front The film of the DP front Replace the DP front separa-
separation pad assy separation pad assy is tion pad assy (including the
peeling off. film).
the spring operate properly. spring of the DP feed sensor.
If it does not operate correctly
due to the deformation, etc.,
repair or replace them.
for the mechanically nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
reversed DP with the DP is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
feed roller there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • DP feed sensor -
DP PWB • DP feed clutch -
DP PWB • DP conveying
motor - DP PWB
for the dual scan DP or the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
mechanically reversed DP is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
with the DP feed belt there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
DP PWB • DP feed motor -
DP PWB
7-251
2SA/2RJ/2NK

11 Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed sensor does Execute U244 [Feed]. If the Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. DP feed sensor does not nance
12 Checking the DP feed The DP feed clutch does Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. Mainte-
clutch for the mechanically not operate correctly. If the DP feed clutch does not nance
reversed DP with the DP operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
feed roller and reconnect the connector.
13 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying motor Execute U243 [Conv Motor]. Mainte-
ing motor for the mechani- does not operate correctly. If the DP conveying motor nance
cally reversed DP with the does not operate correctly, Mode List
DP feed roller reattach it and reconnect the
replace it.
14 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor does Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. Mainte-
motor (For the dual scan not operate correctly. If the DP feed motor does not nance
DP and the mechanically operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
reversed DP with the DP and reconnect the connector.
feed belt)) If not repaired, replace it.
15 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9001: DP small size original jam

1. DP timing sensor turned off immediately after DP timing sensor turns ON. 2. When secondary feed starts,
DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF. 3. When DP timing sensor is ON, DP feed sensor or DP
registration sensor is OFF. 4. When DP registration sensor is OFF, the original at secondary feed section
does not reach to DP timing sensor.

cation is fed. nal within the specifications.
2 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Remove the sponge for the
the spring operate properly. sound cut of the actuator
operation (for the DP regis-
tration sensor). And if the
actuators or the springs are
deformed, etc. that they do
not operate correctly, replace
them.
7-252
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

Object: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP and Mechanically Reversed DP Remarks:
When detecting the DP feedshift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times), display J9002.
(Mechanically Reversed DP only)
The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying.

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which Specify the sensor that dis- Mainte-
is turned on) plays ON at U244. (Go to the nance
next step.) Mode List
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper, the foreign
remaining on paper con- objects are on the conveying
veying route to turn on the path, or a burr in the parts
sensor. such as the guide or the actu-
ator, remove them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not oper- Clean and reattach the sen- Mainte-
ate correctly. sor specified at U244, and nance
reconnect the connector. If Mode List
the wire. • Faulty sensor
defined at U244 - DP PWB
7-253
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9004: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Mechanically reversed DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation
started.

ator, remove them.
2 (If the thin original with low The gap at the time of sep- Replace the release lever in
stiffness is used) Replac- aration of the DP reversing order to widen the gap at the
ing the release lever. roller is narrow, and the time of DP reverse roller sep-
second original (first side) aration. (LEVER DU PRESS:
cantenterbetweentheDPre- 303R70730_, the last digit 1
versingrollerswhenrevers- or newer).
ingthefirstoriginal'
3 (When the original is The paper conveying per- Clean the DP conveying
skewed) Checking the DP formance of the DP con- roller surface. If worn down,
conveying roller veying roller is insufficient. replace it.
4 (When the original is The location of the original Align the original width
skewed) Relocating the width guides and the origi- guides to the original size.
original width guides nal size are mismatched.
5 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feedshift
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feedshift guide. guide. If there is a burr on the
feedshift guide conveying surface of the DP
branch guide, remove or
replace it.
6 (When the original is The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
skewed) Checking the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire. • DP feedshift motor
- DP PWB
7 (When the original is The DP feedshift guide Execute U243 [Rev Motor]. If Mainte-
skewed) Checking the DP does not switch as the DP the DP feedshift motor does nance
feedshift motor for the feedshift motor does not not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
mechanically reversed DP operate correctly. tach it and reconnect the con-
with the DP feed roller nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
8 (When the original is The DP feedshift guide Reattach the DP feedshift
skewed) Checking the DP does not switch as the DP motor and reconnect the con-
feedshift motor for the feedshift motor does not nector. If not repaired,
mechanically reversed DP operate correctly. replace it.
with the DP feed belt
9 (When the original convey- The paper conveying force Clean the DP reverse roller
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller is surface. If worn down,
DP reverse roller insufficient. replace it.
7-254
2SA/2RJ/2NK

original is folded.
reset.
the wire. • DP registration
sensor - DP PWB • DP con-
veying motor - DP PWB (DP
feed roller type) • DP reverse
motor - DP PWB (DP feed
belt type)
15 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration sensor Execute U244 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
tion sensor does not operate correctly. DP registration sensor does nance
not operate correctly, clean Mode List
and reattach it, then recon-
ing motor for the mechani- does not operate correctly. If the DP conveying motor nance
cally reversed DP with the does not operate correctly, Mode List
DP feed roller reattach it and reconnect the
replace it.
17 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse motor Execute U243 [Eject Motor]. Mainte-
motor for the mechanically does not operate correctly. If the DP reverse motor does nance
reversed DP with the DP not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
feed belt tach it and reconnect the con-
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-255
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9005: No original feed from the DP

Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
The DP lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even the specific pulse has passed when the DP lift plate rise
up.

1 (When the DP lift plate The DP lift plate is not Reattach the DP lift plate.
does not rise up) Reattach- attached properly.
ing the DP lift plate
2 (When the DP lift plate The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
does not rise up) Checking nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the connection is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire. • DP lift motor - DP
PWB • DP original sensor -
DP PWB
3 (When the DP lift plate The DF lift motor does not Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If Mainte-
does not rise up) Checking operate properly. the DP lift motor does not nance
the DP rise motor operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
4 (When the DP lift plate The DP original sensor Execute U244 [Set]. If the DP Mainte-
does not rise up) Checking does not operate correctly. original sensor does not nance
the DP original sensor operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
5 Checking the original The original is not set Insert the original all the way
properly. and align the original width
guides to the original.
original is folded.
reset.
9 Checking the actuator The actuator does not Depending on the original, if
operate properly. the actuator of the DP lift
upper sensor does not turn
on, reattach the actuator.
the wire. • DP lift upper limit
sensor - DP PWB
7-256
2SA/2RJ/2NK

11 Checking the DP lift upper The DP lift upper limit sen- Execute U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If Mainte-
limit sensor sor does not operate cor- the DP lift upper limit sensor nance
rectly. does not operate correctly, Mode List
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9006: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
The DP eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

1 (When the original leading The original is caught by If a piece of paper, the foreign
end has any damage) the conveying guide or a objects are on the conveying
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. path, or a burr in the parts
ator, remove them. If the rib
of the guide is damaged,
replace it.
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feedshift guide. guide. If the burrs are on the
feedshift guide original conveying side of the
DP feedshift guide, remove
them or replace the guide.
5 Checking the DP feedshift The DP feedshift motor Reattach the DP feedshift
motor does not operate correctly. motor and reconnect the con-
nector.
6 (When the original convey- The conveying capability Clean the DP reverse roller or
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller or the surface of the DP feed-
DP reverse roller and the the DP feedshift roller is shift roller. If they are worn
DP feedshift roller not enough. out, replace them.
original is folded.
7-257
2SA/2RJ/2NK

reset.
the wire. • DP exit sensor -
DP PWB • DP reverse motor
- DP PWB
11 Checking the DP eject The DP exit sensor does Execute U244 [Eject]. If the Mainte-
sensor not operate correctly. DP exit sensor does not oper- nance
motor does not operate correctly. If the DP reverse motor does nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9007: DP exit sensor stay jam during the original reversing

The DP eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

ator, remove them.
7-258
2SA/2RJ/2NK

skewed) Checking the DP the DP feedshift guide. guide. If the burrs are on the
feedshift guide original conveying side of the
DP feedshift guide, remove
them or replace the guide.
5 Checking the DP feedshift The DP feedshift motor Reattach the DP feedshift
motor does not operate correctly. motor and reconnect the con-
nector.
6 (When the original convey- The conveying capability Clean the DP reverse roller or
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller or the surface of the DP feed-
DP reverse roller and the the DP feedshift roller is shift roller. If they are worn
DP feedshift roller not enough. out, replace them.
original is folded.
reset.
DP PWB • DP reverse motor
- DP PWB
motor does not operate correctly. If the DP reverse motor does nance
replace it.
7-259
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9008: No original feed from the DP (Original is B6 size or smaller)

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the original feeding
started.

ator, remove them.
2 (When the original is The paper conveying per- Clean the DP feed belt sur-
skewed) Checking the DP formance of the DP feed face. If worn down, replace it.
feed belt belt is not enough.
3 Checking the original The original is not set Insert the original all the way
properly. and align the original width
guides to the original.
original is folded.
reset.
the wire. • DP backside tim-
ing sensor - DP PWB • DP
feed motor - DP PWB
8 Checking the DP backside The DP backside timing Execute U244 [CIS Head]. If Mainte-
timing sensor sensor does not operate the DP backside timing sen- nance
correctly. sor does not operate cor- Mode List
rectly, reattach it and
7-260
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor does Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. If the DP feed motor does not nance
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning

The next original is in standby of the secondary paper feed during the image scanning.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the originals and
activate properly. check the sensors. Then, turn
the power switch and the
switch on.
3 Checking the DP relay The image data transmis- Reconnect the DP relay
cable sion processing failed due cable.
to the DP relay cable con-
nection failure.
4 Executing [Memory Diag- The memory in the main Execute [Memory Diagnos- Adjust-
nostics] PWB is faulty. tics] at [Adjustment/Mainte- ment/
nance] in the System Menu. Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-261
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9010: Document processor open detection

The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP The document processor Check if the document pro-
is not properly installed, or cessor is securely closed,
it is faulty. and reinstall it if necessary.
Fix or replace the DP covers
if it is deformed.
the wire. • DP opening/clos-
ing sensor - DP PWB
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the Mainte-
closing sensor sensor does not operate DP opening/closing sensor nance
properly. does not operate correctly, Mode List
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9011: DP top cover open detection

The DP top cover open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover is faulty. Check if the DP top cover is
securely closed, and reat-
tach it if necessary. Fix or
the wire. • DP top cover sen-
sor - DP PWB
3 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover sensor Execute U244 [Cover Open]. Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. If the DP top cover sensor nance
replace it.
7-262
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

original is folded.
reset.
5 (Except for the dual scan The paper separation force Clean the DP reverse roller
DP) Checking the DP of the DP reverse roller is surface. If worn down,
reverse roller insufficient. replace it.
6 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse cover Reattach the DP reverse
cover comes off. cover.
7 (When the original is Conveying capability of the Clean the DP feed roller or Detaching
skewed) Checking the DP DP feed roller or DP feed the surface of the DP feed and reat-
feed roller or the DP feed belt is not enough. belt. If they are worn out, taching the
belt replace them. DP Pickup
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
9 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feed guide.
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed guide. If the burrs are on the original
feed belt conveying side of the DP
feed guide, remove them or
replace the DP feed guide.
7-263
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DP PWB
for the mechanically nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
reversed DP with the DP is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
feed roller there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • DP feed clutch -
DP PWB
12 Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed sensor is Clean and reattach the DP
sor dirty, is not properly feed sensor, then reconnect
attached, is not properly the connector. If not repaired,
connected, or it is faulty. replace it.
13 Checking the DP feed The rotation of the DP feed Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. Mainte-
clutch for the mechanically roller does not stop while If the DP feed clutch does not nance
reversed DP with the DP the DP feed clutch remains operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
feed roller engaged. and reconnect the connector.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Mechanically reversed DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned
on.

ator, remove them.
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
7-264
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP conveying
skewed) Checking the DP the DP conveying guide. guide. If there is a burr on the
conveying guide conveying surface of the DP
conveying guide, remove or
replace it.
5 (When the original convey- The paper conveying per- Clean the DP conveying
ing delays) Checking the formance of the DP con- roller surface. If worn down,
DP conveying roller veying roller is insufficient. replace it.
6 (When the original convey- The DP top cover is Check if the DP top cover is
ing delays) Checking the deformed. securely closed. If it cannot
DP top cover be closed due to the defor-
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
switch the leading edge and
the trailing edge of paper, and
reset. Or, when scanning
duplex, flip paper upside
down and reset them.
veying motor - DP PWB
replace it.
ing motor does not operate correctly. If the DP conveying motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-265
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9210: DP registration sensor stay jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned
on.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-266
2SA/2RJ/2NK

veying motor - DP PWB
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9300: DPCIS non-arrival jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor
turned on.

ator, remove them.
7-267
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
conveying motor - DP PWB
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-268
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor
turned off.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-269
2SA/2RJ/2NK

conveying motor - DP PWB
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP
registration sensor turned on.

ator, remove them.
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
7-270
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
the wire. • DP timing sensor -
motor - DP PWB
12 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the Mainte-
sensor operate correctly. DP timing sensor does not nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-271
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP
registration sensor turned off.

ator, remove them.
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-272
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • DP timing sensor -
motor - DP PWB
13 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the Mainte-
sensor operate correctly. DP timing sensor does not nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
J9600: DP eject sensor non-arrival jam

The DP eject sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
7-273
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 (When the original convey- The height of the DP Adjust the height of the DP
ing delays in the dual scan hinges is improper. hinges.
DP) Adjusting the height of
the DP hinges
5 (When the original convey- The opening/closing oper- Check if the document pro-
ing delays) Checking the ation of the document processor is securely closed. If it
opening/closing motion of cessor is faulty. cannot be closed due to the
the document processor DP frame deformation,
replace the document pro-
cessor.
original is folded.
motor - DP PWB
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-274
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9610: DP eject sensor stay jam

The DP eject sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned off.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
3 (When the original convey- The paper conveying force Clean the DP eject roller sur-
ing delays) Checking the of the DP eject roller is face. If worn down, replace it.
DP eject roller insufficient.
4 (When the original convey- The height of the DP Adjust the height of the DP
ing delays in the dual scan hinges is improper. hinges.
DP) Adjusting the height of
the DP hinges
5 (When the original convey- The opening/closing oper- Check if the document pro-
ing delays) Checking the ation of the document processor is securely closed. If it
opening/closing motion of cessor is faulty. cannot be closed due to the
the document processor DP frame deformation,
replace the document pro-
cessor.
original is folded.
motor - DP PWB
7-275
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures
No. Contents Condition

(1) Paper creases (Fuser factor)
(2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer
factor)
(3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from
paper in the main unit with the punch unit cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder),
for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the cor- duplex section or the MP tray, the corners of
ners of the paper leading edge being paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes receiving holes of the punch unit and the dog-ear
occurs
(4) Dog-ear When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the
dog-ear occurs at the primary feeding due to the
downward curl of paper.
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures
(4-1) Paper creases (Fuser factor)

Condition: The image is printed on the crease section. (Fuser factor)

1 Checking the paper Paper is curled caused by Flip paper upside down and
the moisture absorption. reset. Or, replace with new
Or, paper leading edge is paper which is unopened
waving. paper.
7-276
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Clean the rear transfer The surrounding area of Clean the rear transfer guide, Cleaning
guide and the discharge the rear transfer guide is the discharge needle, the dis- the Sec-
needle dirty with the toner, paper charge sheet and paper con- ondary
dust, etc.. veying path. Transfer /
Separa-
tion Sec-
tion
3 (When the paper is Paper is caught in the rear If a piece of paper, the foreign
skewed) Checking the rear transfer guide, discharge objects are on the conveying
transfer guide and the dis- needle, a piece of paper, path, or the foreign objects, a
charge needle. etc.. burr are on the rear transfer
guide, the discharge needle,
remove or replace them. If
the guide materials are
dropped off, repair or replace
them.
4 (When the paper creases Under the condition of con- Clean the fuser exit guide
occur at the center of the densation in the fuser exit and clear the condensation.
paper leading edge in case guide, curled paper due to After that, replace with new
of feeding the duplex 2nd moisture absorption is paper which is unopened
page) Checking the use used (it is caught in the paper.
environment dent located at the center
of the fuser exit guide as
there is no stiffness on
paper.)
5 (If occurring under a spe- The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
cific condition) Changing paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
the setting type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
6 (When occurring under a Large size printing after Change the setting of the Mainte-
specific condition that the continuous small size fuser temperature back to the nance
fuser temperature of printing, long standby set- default condition and check . Mode List
before and after becomes ting after printing drive is (after open the right convey-
non-uniform) Changing the done ing section and leave it open
setting to decrease the fuser temper-
ature.)
7 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in a damp Instruct the user to store Installing
age place place. paper tightly sealed in the the
location where the humidity is optional
low. Or, install the cassette equip-
heater. ment
(Cassette
Heater)
7-277
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer Detaching
transfer roller roller is dirty with the toner, roller. If the secondary trans- and reat-
paper dust, etc.. Or, it is fer roller is worn out, replace taching the
worn out. it. Second-
ary Trans-
fer Roller
9 Replacing the fuser unit Paper entrance guide of Check the pressure balance Detaching
the fuser unit is deformed. of both ends of the fuser unit and reat-
The center of the fuser by checking the nipped pres- taching the
pressure roller is worn out. sure on the solid image. If the Fuser Unit
The pressure spring of balance is uneven, replace
back and front of fuser unit the fuser unit.
is not attached properly.
10 Replacing the fuser dis- The front and back of If the leading edge of the Detaching
charger needle unit paper entry guide of the fuser discharge needle is and reat-
fuser unit are unevenly dirty with sediments, replace taching the
charged and discharged. the fuser discharge needle Fuser Dis-
unit. charger
Needle
Unit
(4-2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor)

Condition: The image is not printed on the crease section. (Registration, transfer
factor)

1 Checking the paper The paper is curled down- Correct or replace paper. If
ward or wavy. you cannot get user agree-
ment about the paper
replacement, relocate the
leading end of paper and the
trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
paper. eign objects adhere from the
cassette.
3 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (convey-
right cover closed. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
4 (When the paper is being The set position of the Reset the paper width guide
conveyed obliquely) paper width guides / MP or the MP paper width guide
Resetting the paper width paper width guides is mismatches to paper size. Or,
guide or MP paper width matched with the paper check set position of the sup-
guide size, and so, the paper is port guide. (Excluding the
skewed. cassette1)
7-278
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
6 Checking the conveying Conveying related rollers Clean the surface of the con-
rollers are not attached properly. veying related rollers and the
Or, the conveying capabil- pulleys (vertical conveying,
ity is not enough due to middle, registration) and reat-
dirty. tach.
7 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance is not Check the pressure of the
Checking the pressure good because the pres- conveying related rollers and
spring sure spring of front and the pulleys, and if the spring
back of the roller are not or the bearings are dropped
attached properly. off, reattach them. If they are
deformed or worn out,
replace them.
8 (When the paper skew Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs) Checking the veying guide, piece of objects are on the conveying
paper path paper, etc.. path, or the foreign objects, a
burr are on the conveying
surface of the conveying
guide, remove or replace
them. If the sheet guide
material has a damage,
deformation, floating, repair
or replace them.
9 Cleaning the conveying The middle roller guide, Clean the middle roller guide
guide transfer forwarding guide and conveying surface of the
are dirty with the toner, transfer forwarding guide.
paper dust, etc..
10 Checking the conveying The middle roller guide, Reattach the middle roller
guide transfer forwarding guide guide and the transfer for-
are not attached properly. warding guide. If they are
Or, they are faulty. faulty, replace them.
7-279
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch
unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes
Condition: When feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the punch unit
installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section
or the MP tray, the corners of paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit
and the dog-ear occurs

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled Reload paper upside down.
upward. And so, it is easy
to be caught by the PH cut-
ter receiving hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since Relocate the paper width
guides there is a gap between the guides so that there is no gap
paper width guides and the between them to the paper
paper edges. edges.
3 Explanation for user The corners of the paper Request user to feed paper
(request to change from leading edge of LetterR as "Letter" not but "LetterR".
"LetterR" to "Letter") are close to the PH cutter If user accepts, relocate the
receiving holes of the paper width guides to "Letter"
punch unit. Consequently, position and load the paper.
the corners are caught by Then, explain users who
the holes if each center need to change "Orientation"
position is not adjusted. in Quick Print on the printer
drive so that the orientation is
rotated to 90 degrees C.
4 Adjusting the center posi- The center positions of the Adjust each center position Adjusting
tions of the punch unit and punch unit and the paper by the following procedures. the center
the paper width guides width guides are mis- (Refer to the reference docu- positions
matched, and so, the cor- ment" for the details.) 1. Load of the
ners of the paper leading paper on the MP tray. Then, punch unit
edge is caught by the PH set the punch holes and exe- and the
cutter receiving holes of cute the test print to align the paper
the punch unit. position of the punch unit. 2. width
Feed paper from each paper guides
source except the MP tray to
check if the forward and
backward punch holes are
not shifted. 3. If the forward
and backward punch holes
are shifted aside in above 2,
change the center position of
the paper width guides to
adjust. After changing the
center position, execute
U034 [LSU Out Left] and
adjust the center line except
for "MPT".
7-280
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-4) Dog-ear
When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the dog-ear occurs at the primary feeding due to the downward
curl of paper.

1 Reloading the paper Paper is caught up at the Reload paper upside down.
PF frame with the down-
ward curl.
2 Affixing the seal materials The leading edge corner In order to relieve the entry Proce-
section of paper enters into angle to the location on the dures for
the gap between the PF lift PF frame where paper hits, affixing
plate and the PF frame, affix the seal material PARTS
and hits the vertical sur- (PARTS SHEET DECK SHEET
face of the PF frame. FEED SET SP:303RC9408_) DECK
to the PF frame. FEED SET
7-281
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-3 Service call error/ System error

If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
*: Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the
power switch off and unplug the machine from power. (Allow at least 5 s before starting to conduct ser-
vice until the capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.)
(1) Self diagnostic error codes
Error code Contents

C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0060 Type mismatch error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0080 Optional Printing System device error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0150 Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0350 Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
C0361 Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
C0362 Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
C0640 Hard Disk error
C0650 FAX image storage pair-check error
C0660 Hard Disk encryption key error
C0670 Hard Disk overwriting error
C0680 SSD error
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error ("Time for maintenance T" appears)
C0870 PC FAX Image data transmission error
C0920 FAX file system error
C0950 FAX job stay error
C0980 24V power interruption detection
C1000 MP lift motor error
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 Lift motor 2 error
C1030 PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)
7-282
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C1040 PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)
C1140 PF lift motor error (Side deck)
C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1820 Side deck communication error
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
C1920 Side deck EEPROM error
C1950 Primary transfer unit EEPROM error
C2201 Drum motor K steady-state error
C2300 Fuser motor error
C2500 Feed motor error
C2600 PF feed motor error
C2700 Primary / secondary transfer release error
C2760 Developer K/Transfer belt motor startup error
C2810 Waste toner motor error
C2840 Belt cleaning motor error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 LED lamp startup error
C3210 CIS lamp error
C3300 CCD AGC error
C3310 CIS AGC error
C3500 Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC
C3600 Scanner sequence error
C3800 AFE error
C4001 Polygon motor synchronization error
C4011 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 BD initialization error
C4201 BD steady-state error
C4600 LSU cleaning motor error
C4701 VIDEO ASIC device error 1
C4801 LSU type mismatch error
C5101 Main high voltage error K
C5130 Primary transfer high-voltage error
C6000 IH heating error 1
C6020 Center thermistor high temperature error
C6030 Center thermistor broken
C6050 Center thermistor low temperature error
C6120 Press thermistor high temperature error
7-283
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C6130 Press thermistor broken
C6200 IH heating error 2
C6220 Edge thermistor high temperature error
C6230 Edge thermistor broken
C6250 Edge thermistor low temperature error
C6320 Middle thermistor high temperature error
C6330 Middle thermistor broken
C6410 Uninstalled fuser unit
C6600 Fuser belt rotation error
C6610 Fuser pressure release sensor error
C6620 IH core motor rotation error
C6740 IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)
C6760 Fuser IH input excessive electric current error
C6770 IH low power error
C6900 Edge fan motor error
C6910 Engine firmware unexpected error
C6920 Eject/IH fan motor error
C6950 IH PWB communication error
C6980 Fuser unit EEPROM error
C6990 Fuser power source destination error
C7001 Container motor error
C7101 T/C sensor K error
C7200 Inner thermistor broken (developer)
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)
C7221 LSU thermistor broken
C7231 LSU thermistor short-circuited
C7241 Belt thermistor broken
C7251 Belt thermistor short-circuited
C7301 Toner motor K error
C7320 Toner container detection connector error
C7420 Uninstalled primary transfer unit
C7470 Toner sucking fan motor error
C7480 Power source fan motor error
C7490 Eject fan motor error
C7601 Front ID sensor error
C7602 Rear ID sensor error
C7611 Bias calibration read value error (Black)
7-284
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C7800 Outer thermistor broken
C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C7901 Drum unit K EEPROM error
C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
C7941 LSU EEPROM error
C7970 Weight sensor error
C7980 Waste toner overflow (Waste toner full sensor error)
C8010 PH motor error 1
C8090 DF paddle motor error
C8100 DF eject release motor error
C8110 DF shift motor 1 error
C8120 DF shift motor 2 error
C8130 DF shift release motor error
C8140 DF tray motor error 1
C8160 DF tray motor error (3)
C8170 DF side registration motor 1 error 1
C8210 DF staple motor front/rear error
C8230 DF staple motor error 1
C8250 DF main tray error 4
C8260 DF middle motor HP detection error
C8300 Main program error / BF unit communication error
C8310 BF side registration motor 2 error
C8320 BF adjustment motor error
C8330 BF blade motor error
C8340 BF staple motor error 1
C8350 BF side registration motor 1 error
C8360 BF main motor error
7-285
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C8370 BF staple motor error 2
C8410 PH slide motor error 1
C8420 PH slide motor error 2
C8430 Main program error / Punch unit communication error
C8500 Main program error / Mail Box communication error
C8510 MB conveying motor error 1
C8520 MB conveying motor error 2
C8800 Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)
C8900 DF backup error
C8930 BF unit backup error
C9000 Main program error / DP communication error
C9040 DP lift motor ascend error
C9050 DP lift motor descend error
C9060 DP EEPROM error
C9070 DP - SHD communication error
C9080 LED failure detection
C9180 DP feedshift motor error
C9500 Image processing PWB error (Scanner)
C9510 Image processing circuit error (DP)
C9540 Backup data error
C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch. After lation
5s passes, reinstall the FAX Guide
PWB, and then turn on the
main power switch and the
power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Update
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
7-286
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0060: Type mismatch error

Install the SSD for different model. Or, it is not possible to communicate with some units.

1 Checking the SSD Installed SSD containing Install SSD containing firm- Detaching
firmware which is not for ware which is for the applica- and reat-
the applicable model. ble model. taching the
SSD
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire which connect to the below nance
is faulty. unit. If there is no continuity, parts
replace the wire. - Drum unit replace-
- Developer unit - Primary ment pro-
transfer unit - Fuser unit cedures
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB,
any normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the FAX Instal-
PWB is installed. applicable model. lation
Guide
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Update
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0080: Optional Printing System device error

Object: Printing System 15 (for 120V, 230V and 240V)
It is not possible to read FPGA version of the Fiery relay PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn the power switch and
operate properly. the main power switch off .
After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Replacing the Fiery relay Fiery relay PWB for the Replace Fiery relay PWB
PWB other models is installed. which is applicable to the
model.
3 Firmware upgrade The version of the main Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
firmware is not supported the latest version. Update
for the fiery relay PWB.
7-287
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the Fiery relay The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the con-
PWB nected properly. The wire nectors connecting on the
or the PWB is faulty. Fiery relay PWB and recon-
nect the connector. If the wire
is faulty, repair or replace it. If
not resolved, replace the
Fiery relay PWB.
5 Checking the main PWB The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the con-
nected properly. The wire nector (for Fiery relay PWB)
or the PWB is faulty. on the main PWB and recon-
nect. If it is not improved,
replace Fiery relay PWB.
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does Turn the power switch and
not operate properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

power switch on.
2 Checking the MAC The MAC address is incor- Replace the main PWB when Detaching
address rect. the MAC address is not indi- and reat-
cated on the network status taching the
page. Main PWB
7-288
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

power switch on.
C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error

1. Five times consecutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing. 2.
Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. 3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8
consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Turn the power switch and
engine PWB does not the main power switch off .
operate properly. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM on Detaching
the engine PWB erly attached. the engine PWB. and reat-
taching the
EEPROM
(Section 4
"Notes
when
replacing
the engine
PWB")
7-289
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the Detaching
engine PWB and execute and reat-
U169. Next, compare the set- taching the
ting value of the maintenance EEPROM
report outputted at U000 in (Section 4
advance and the setting "Notes
value of the maintenance when
report outputted after replac- replacing
ing EEPROM, and change the engine
the setting value which are PWB")
different. (Related mainte- Mainte-
nance mode: U053, U100, nance
U101, U106, U140, U161, Mode List
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U066, U067) Finally, execute
the following maintenance
mode in the following order.
U119 (for the 35 ppm or
faster models) > U411 >
U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC
Calib] > U140 [Calibration] >
U412 [Normal Mode] > U464
[Calib] > U410 > U155 [Cali-
bration] (The empty waste
toner box is necessary.)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-290
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Turn the power switch and
engine PWB does not the main power switch off .
operate properly. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021. Mainte-
EEPROM on the engine nance
PWB is faulty. Mode List
engine PWB and execute and reat-
U169. Next, compare the set- taching the
ting value of the maintenance EEPROM
report outputted at U000 in (Section 4
advance and the setting "Notes
value of the maintenance when
report outputted after replac- replacing
ing EEPROM, and change the engine
the setting value which are PWB")
different. (Related mainte- Mainte-
nance mode: U053, U100, nance
U101, U106, U140, U161, Mode List
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U119 > U411 > U469 [Auto] >
U140 [AC Calib] > U140 [Cal-
ibration] > U412 [Normal
Mode] > U464 [Calib] > U410
> U155 [Calibration] (The
empty waste toner box is
necessary.)
C0170: Charger count error

The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side
and the engine side.

1 Checking the machine The main PWB for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. of the main PWB ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
main PWB if the MAIN No. Detaching
differs. and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-291
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
EEPROM on the engine Detaching
PWB if the ENGINE machine and reat-
serial No. differs. taching the
EEPROM
(Section 4
"Notes
when
replacing
the engine
PWB")
3 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine Mainte-
serial No. differs at U004, nance
replace the main PWB and Mode List
execute U004. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number Mainte-
the engine PWB in the engine PWB is different nance
at U004, reattach the Mode List
PWB. If not repairing, replace and reat-
the EEPROM and execute taching the
U169. Next, compare the set- EEPROM
ting value of the maintenance (Section 4
report outputted at U000 in "Notes
advance and the setting when
value of the maintenance replacing
report outputted after replac- the engine
ing EEPROM, and change PWB")
the setting value which are
different. (Related mainte-
nance mode: U053, U100,
U101, U106, U140, U161,
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U119> U411 > U469 [Auto] >
Mode]> U464 [Calib] > U410
necessary.)
7-292
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the
power on.

1 Checking the machine The main PWB for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. of the main PWB ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
main PWB if the MAIN No. Detaching
differs. and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
PWB if the ENGINE machine and reat-
serial No. differs. taching the
EEPROM
(Section 4
"Notes
when
replacing
the engine
PWB")
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine Mainte-
serial No. differs at U004, nance
replace the main PWB and Mode List
execute U004. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-293
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number Mainte-
the engine PWB in the engine PWB is different nance
at U004, reattach the Mode List
PWB. If not repairing, replace and reat-
the EEPROM and execute taching the
U169. Next, compare the set- EEPROM
ting value of the maintenance (Section 4
report outputted at U000 in "Notes
advance and the setting when
value of the maintenance replacing
report outputted after replac- the engine
ing EEPROM, and change PWB")
the setting value which are
different. (Related mainte-
nance mode: U053, U100,
U101, U106, U140, U161,
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U119 > U411 > U469 [Auto] >
Mode] > U464 [Calib] > U410
necessary.)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication

error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial com-
mand was transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.

1 Resetting the main power The operation of the oper- Turn the power switch and
ation panel main PWB is the main power switch off .
faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
7-294
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Operation panel
main PWB - Main PWB •
Operation panel main PWB -
NFC PWB
3 Replacing the operation The operation panel main Replace the panel main Detaching
panel main PWB PWB is faulty. PWB. and reat-
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
5 Replacing the NFC PWB The NFC PWB is faulty. Replace the NFC PWB.
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire. • Feed drive PWB -
Engine PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-295
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire. • Feed image PWB -
Engine PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C0640: Hard Disk error

The HDD cannot be accessed properly.

1 Releasing the partial oper- The partial operation is Execute resetting the partial Mainte-
ation executed. operation at U906. nance
Mode List
2 (For the main unit without When installing the 8GB Replace with the correct Detaching
the HDD) Replacing the HDD mistakenly, it tries to 32GB SSD. and reat-
SSD access the HDD. At that taching the
time, the error appears if SSD
the HDD is not installed in
the main units .
3 (When abnormal sounds The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the Detaching
occur) Replacing the HDD abnormal sounds are from and reat-
the HDD. taching the
HDD
4 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the below SATA Service
nected properly. The SATA cable and connector of the Manual -
cable or the wire is faulty. wire. If there is no continuity, Section 8
replace SATA cable or the "PWBs"
wire. - HDD - main PWB
7-296
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Mainte-
faulty. Format). nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Detaching
age) already used in other used once, replace with the and reat-
unit is installed. correct SSD. taching the
SSD
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Mainte-
age) already used in other used once, execute U671 nance
unit is reused without exe- [FAX Data CLEAR]. Mode List
cuting U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Be sure to install the SSD to Detaching
age) is not properly the connector on the main and reat-
installed. PWB. taching the
SSD
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Replace with the new SSD. Detaching
age) is faulty. and reat-
taching the
SSD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0660: Hard Disk encryption key error

1. The encrypted password entered when replacing the main PWB is not correct.
2. Install SSD which is used in the other machine.

1 (When the issue occurs The encryption key after Execute U004 when this Mainte-
after replacing the main replacing the main PWB is issue occurs after replacing nance
PWB) Executing U004 faulty. the main PWB. Mode List
7-297
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the Detaching
(abnormal sounds) abnormal sounds are from and reat-
HDD
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0670: Hard Disk overwriting error

The area that cannot be properly overwritten exists in a part of the HDD.

1 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the Detaching
(abnormal sounds) abnormal sounds are from and reat-
HDD
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-298
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0680: SSD error

The SSD cannot be accessed, or the error occurs when accessing to the SSD.

1 Checking the SSD (if lit An SSD out of specifica- Install the SSD matching the
after replacing the SSD) tion is installed. memory capacity specifica-
tion.
2 Resetting the main power The SSD is faulty. Turn the power switch and
the main power switch off .
power switch on.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The connection with the Reinstall the SSD on the Detaching
main PWB is faulty. main PWB. and reat-
taching the
SSD
4 Initializing the SSD The data stored in the SSD Retrieve the SSD storage Mainte-
is faulty. data at U026, and then initial- nance
ize the SSD at U024. Mode List
5 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Retrieve the SSD storage Mainte-
data at U026, and then nance
replace the SSD. Mode List
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
SSD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only
when handling the certain
image data, check if the
image data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of Acquire the jobslogifthephe- Checking
the certain file is faulty. nomenoncanbereproduced- Job & Job
byspecifyingthejobwhentheer Operation
rorwasdetected.' (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
7)
7-299
2SA/2RJ/2NK

C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Update
2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not con- Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main power switch. After lation
power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
is faulty. FAX. nance
Mode List
lation
Guide
C0840: RTC error ("Time for maintenance T" appears)

<Check at the start up> • Setting value of RTC has returned to the past. • The power has not turned on more
than 5 years. • Setting value of RTC is older than 00:01 January 1st, 2000. <Check regularly (each 5 min-
utes) after start up> • Setting value of RTC has returned to the past which is older than the time previously
checked. After detecting C0840, reset the main power to go into disable function and [Time for Maintenance]
is displayed.

1 Executing U906 The backup battery on the Execute U906 and reset the Mainte-
main PWB is faulty, and display [Maintenance T]. nance
so, the RTC settings are After that, set the date and Mode List
erased after unplugging time (RTC) through System Date/
the power cord. menu. (It is necessary to per- Timer/
form this process every time Energy
when unplug/plug the power Saver
cord.) (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-300
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty, or The user call regarding Detaching
the backup battery runs C0840 is frequent even if per- and reat-
out. forming the previous treat- taching the
ment, replace the main PWB. Main PWB
C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data
is transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch off . lation
After 5s passes, reattach the Guide
FAX PWB and turn the main
switch on.
Mode List
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
the latest version. Update
lation
Guide
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD Execute U024 [SSD Format]. Mainte-
is faulty. nance
Mode List
C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
incorrect FAX. nance
Mode List
power switch.
7-301
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Reconnecting the FAX The FAX PWB is not con- Reinstall FAX PWB to Main FAX Instal-
PWB nected properly. PWB. lation
Guide
Update
lation
Guide
C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power Print processing is not Turn the power switch and
properly executed. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
properly activate. the latest version. Update
C0980: 24V power interruption detection

1. Detected 24 V power off signal for 1s continuously. 2. Another service call occurred when passing 100ms
after detecting 24V power failure detection signal, and then 24 power supply was recovered.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire. • Low voltage PWB -
Engine PWB
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is When the +24V generation Detaching
PWB faulty. from the low voltage PWB is and reat-
not stable, and it lowers, taching the
replace the low voltage PWB. Low Volt-
age PWB
7-302
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1000: MP lift motor error

1. When the MP lift motor rotates in the descending direction, the MP position sensor does not turn on within
1850ms. 2. When the MP lift motor rotates in the ascending direction, the MP position sensor does not turn
off within 1600ms.

1 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate does not Repair or replace the MP lift
operate properly. plate on the MP tray when it
does not move vertically.
2 Checking the lift lever The lift lever is not properly Check if the lift lever is verti-
attached. cally shifted by the lift motor
cam, or if it has the excessive
load. Then, reattach the MP
tray. Then, replace the MP
tray if it is not fixed.
3 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the MP lift plate lift-
MP lift plate does not up drive gears rotate
rotate properly. smoothly or have no exces-
sive load. And apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part no.:
7BG010009H) to the sliding
section and repair the related
parts so that they can rotate
smoothly.
the wire. • Main unit - Paper
conveying unit • MP position
sensor - Relay connector -
PWB - Engine PWB
5 Replacing the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not Replace the MP lift motor.
operate properly.
6 Checking the MP position The MP position sensor is Reattach MP position sensor.
sensor not attached properly.
7 Replacing the MP position The MP position sensor is Replace MP position sensor.
sensor faulty.
PWB faulty.
7-303
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1010: Lift motor 1 error

Five times consecutive detection of any one of the below condition. 1. Lift upper limit sensor 1 does not detect
on even 16s passed after inserting cassette 1. 2. After turning on lift motor 1, lock signal does not release for
300ms. 3. After detecting lift upper limit sensor 1 OFF during printing, lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on
even passing 1s from ascending control.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not Repair or replace the lift plate
operate properly. when it does not move verti-
cally.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the lift plate lift-up
lift plate does not rotate drive gears rotate smoothly
properly. or have no excessive load.
And apply the grease (EM-
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire. • Lift motor 1 - Feed
drive PWB • Feed drive PWB
- Engine PWB
4 Checking lift motor 1 Lift motor 1 is faulty. Check the operation of lift Detaching
motor 1, and replace it if nec- and reat-
essary. taching the
Lift Motor
the wire. • Lift upper limit sen-
PWB
7-304
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking lift sensor 1 Lift upper limit sensor 1 is Reattach lift upper limit sen-
not properly attached, or it sor 1. Replace it if it is not
is faulty. fixed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1020: Lift motor 2 error

Five times consecutive detection of any one of the below condition. 1. Lift upper limit sensor 2 does not detect
on even 16s passed after inserting cassette 2. 2. After turning on lift motor 2, lock signal does not release for
300ms. 3. After detecting lift upper limit sensor 2 OFF during printing, lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on
even passing 1s from ascending control.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not Repair or replace the lift plate
operate properly. when it does not move verti-
cally.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the lift plate lift-up
lift plate does not rotate drive gears rotate smoothly
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire. • Lift motor 2 - Feed
- Engine PWB
4 Checking lift motor 2 Lift motor 2 is faulty. Check the operation of lift Detaching
motor 2, and replace it if nec- and reat-
essary. taching the
Lift Motor
7-305
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Lift upper limit sen-
PWB
6 Checking lift sensor 2 Lift upper limit sensor 2 is Reattach lift upper limit sen-
not properly attached, or it sor 2. Then, replace it if it is
is faulty. not fixed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1030: PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)] 1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 3
was inserted. 2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 1. 3. Since PF lift
sensor 1 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s from the
ascend control. [PF-7110 (Large Capacity Feeder)] 1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after pass-
ing 24s since cassette 3 was inserted. 2. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 3s from the
ascend control when starting printing.

1 Checking the PF lift plate The PF lift plate does not Repair or replace the PF lift
operate properly. plate when it does not move
vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the PF lift plate lift-up
PF lift plate does not rotate drive gears rotate smoothly
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
7-306
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • PF lift motor 1 - PF
PWB
4 Checking PF lift motor 1 PF lift motor 1 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 1.
the wire. • PF lift upper limit
sensor 1 - PF PWB
6 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Reattach PF lift upper limit
is not properly attached, or sensor 1. Then, replace it if it
it is faulty. is not fixed.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
C1040: PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)] 1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 4 is
inserted. 2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 2. 3. Since PF lift sen-
sor 2 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s from the ascend
control. [PF-7110 (Large Capacity Feeder)] 1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 24s
since cassette 4 is inserted. 2. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend
control when starting printing.

vertically.
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
7-307
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • PF lift motor 2 - PF
PWB
4 Replacing PF lift motor 2 PF lift motor 2 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 2.
sensor 2 - PF PWB
6 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Reattach PF lift upper limit
is not properly attached, or sensor 2. Then, replace it if it
it is faulty. is not fixed.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
C1140: PF lift motor error (Side deck)

Object: Side deck
1. The PF lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even 30s passed after inserting the cassette5. 2. The lock
signal is detected for 200ms continuously during the operation of PF lift motor. 3. When start printing, PF lift
upper limit sensor does not detect on even passing 2s from ascending control.

vertically.
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire. • PF lift motor - PF
PWB
4 Checking the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. Replace the PF lift motor.
7-308
2SA/2RJ/2NK

sensor - PF PWB
6 Checking the PF lift upper The PF lift upper limit sen- Reattach the PF lift upper
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor. Then, replace it if
attached, or it is faulty. it is not fixed.
7 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

1. Communication error was detected 10 times continuously. 2. The ready signal is not notified from the paper
feeder or the large capacity feeder within 6s after communication starts.

1 Checking the connection The cable is not properly Reconnect the cable into the
connected to the main unit. main unit.
the wire. • PF PWB - Engine
PWB
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-309
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C1820: Side deck communication error

Object: Side deck
1. Communication error was detected 10 times continuously. 2. The ready signal is not notified from the side
deck within 6s after communication starts.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected Reconnect to the main unit.
to the main unit.
the wire. • PF PWB - PF PWB
(Side deck)
4 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB (in the side Replace PF PWB (Side Detaching
(side deck) deck) is faulty. deck). and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
(Side
deck)
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Reconnecting the paper It is not properly connected Reinstall the paper feeder to PF-7100 /
feeder to the main unit. the main unit. PF-7110
Installa-
tion Guide
7-310
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector of Service
nected properly, or the wire the wire between the engine Manual -
is faulty. PWB and the PF PWB. If the Section 8
wire is faulty, repair or "PWBs"
replace it. If not resolved, Detaching
replace the PF PWB. and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1920: Side deck EEPROM error

Object: Side deck
For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Reconnecting the side It is not properly connected Reinstall the side deck to the PF-7120
deck to the main unit. main unit. Installa-
tion Guide
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector of Service
nected properly, or the wire the wire between the engine Manual -
is faulty. PWB and the PF PWB (side Section 8
deck). If the wire is faulty, "PWBs"
repair or replace it. If not
resolved, replace the PF
PWB.
3 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace PF PWB (Side Detaching
deck). and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
(Side
deck)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-311
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C1950: Primary transfer unit EEPROM error

1. Five times consecutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing.
2. Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times.
3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive times.

1 Reinstalling the primary The primary transfer unit is Reinstall the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit not properly installed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire. • Primary transfer
unit - Transfer PWB • Trans-
fer PWB - Feed image PWB •
Feed image PWB - Engine
PWB
3 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement faulty. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C2201: Drum motor K steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 2s continuously after drum motor K becomes stable.

1 Checking drum motor K The drum motor K drive is Execute U030 [Drum K] to Mainte-
faulty. check the drum motor K oper- nance
ation. Check if the drive gears Mode List
rotate and have no excessive
load, and apply the grease
(EM-LP, Part no:
smoothly.
7-312
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Drum motor K -
3 Checking drum unit K The drum unit is faulty. Check if the drum or the drum Detaching
screw is rotated manually, and reat-
and replace the drum unit if taching the
not rotated. Drum Unit
4 Checking drum motor K Drum motor K is faulty. Replace drum motor K.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C2300: Fuser motor error

The ready signal is at the H level for 1.5s continuously during the fuser motor drive.

1 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor operation Execute U030 [Fuser] to Mainte-
is faulty. check the fuser motor opera- nance
tion. Check if the drive gears Mode List
(EM-LP, Part no:
smoothly.
the wire. • Fuser motor - Feed
- Engine PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-313
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing the fuser drive The fuser drive unit is Replace the fuser drive unit. Detaching
unit faulty. and reat-
taching the
Fuser
Drive Unit
5 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Replace the fuser motor. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Fuser
Drive Unit
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C2500: Feed motor error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 2s since the feed motor drive was started.

1 Checking the feed motor The operation of the feed Execute U030 [Feed] to Mainte-
motor is faulty. check the feed motor opera- nance
tion. Check if the drive gears Mode List
(EM-LP, Part no:
smoothly.
the wire. • Feed motor - Feed
- Engine PWB
3 Replacing the feed motor The feed motor is faulty. Replace the feed motor.
4 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive unit is Replace feed drive unit. Detaching
unit faulty. and reat-
taching the
Feed Drive
Unit
7-314
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
to the latest version Update
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
8 Replacing the feed image The power cantbesup- Replace the feed image
PWB pliedtothefeeddrivePWB.' PWB.
C2600: PF feed motor error

The ready signal is not at the L level (stable rotation) after passing 1s since the PF feed motor drive started.

1 Checking the PF feed The PF feed motor is not Execute U247 [2PF] or [LCF] Mainte-
motor properly connected, or it is > [Motor On] to check the nance
faulty. paper feed operation. If the Mode List
PF feed motor does not oper-
ate properly, reconnect the
connector of the motor.
Check if the PF feed roller
and the drive gears rotate
smoothly and have no exces-
sive load, apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire. • PF feed motor - PF
PWB • PF PWB - Engine
PWB (Drawer connector
between the paper feeder
and the main unit)
3 Replacing the PF feed The PF feed motor is Replace the PF feed motor. Detaching
motor faulty. and reat-
taching the
PF Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware or the Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
PF firmware is faulty. and the PF firmware to the Update
latest version.
7-315
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C2700: Primary / secondary transfer release error

The belt release motor was pressed or drove to the releasing direction, and releasing or pressing condition
continued for 2.3s.

1 Checking the drive parts The drive transmission of Execute U030 [Belt Lift]. If the Mainte-
the belt release motor is motor drive is not transmitted, nance
faulty. repair the drive transmission Mode List
parts.
the wire. • Belt release motor
- Feed image PWB • Belt
release sensor - Feed image
Engine PWB • Feed image
PWB - Low voltage PWB
3 Checking the belt release The belt release sensor Reattach or replace the belt
sensor comes off. release sensor.
4 Checking the belt release The belt release motor is Reattach or replace the belt
motor not operated correctly. release motor.
5 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement lift-up drive section is unit. and reat-
faulty. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
7 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
faulty. to the latest version Update
7-316
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
9 Replacing the low voltage The power is not supplied If the power is not supplied Detaching
PWB from the low voltage PWB from the low voltage PWB, and reat-
to the belt release motor. replace the low voltage PWB. taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
C2760: Developer K/Transfer belt motor startup error

1. FG pulse of the motor does not enter for 2s continuously during driving the motor.
2. FG pulse exceeding 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.
3. The condition where the target speed +/-6.25% of the motor deviated continued for 2s.

1 Primary transfer unit The transfer belt is faulty. Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the developer K/ The drive transmission of Execute U030 [DLP(K)] to Mainte-
transfer belt motor drive the developer K/transfer check the excessive load is nance
transmission section belt motor is faulty. not applied to the drive gears, Mode List
roller and the belt by rotating
them. After that, clean the
drive section of the primary
transfer unit.
the wire. • Developer K/
Transfer belt motor - Feed
PWB - Engine PWB
4 Checking the developer K/ The developer K/transfer Reattach the developer K/
transfer belt motor belt motor is faulty. transfer belt motor and recon-
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-317
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C2810: Waste toner motor error

1. The lock detection signal shows L level during driving the waste toner motor. (0.5s x 3 times retry continu-
ously with 2ms cycle)
2. Low level of the lock detection signal can not detect within 50ms from the switching REM signal L to H. (3
times retry with 50ms cycle)

1 Checking the waste toner The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box. Replacing
box properly installed. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor Execute U030 [Toner Recov- Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. ery] to check whether the nance
waste toner motor operation Mode List
has an excessive load or not.
Then, repair it if necessary.
3 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not Check if the excessive load is
rotate properly. not applied to the drive gears
by rotating the gears, and
clean the drive gears and the
bushing, etc.
4 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box is Replace the waste toner box. Replacing
box faulty. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
5 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor is Reinsert the connector into
motor not properly connected. the waste toner motor.
the wire. • Waste toner motor
- Engine PWB
7-318
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C2840: Belt cleaning motor error

1. FG pulse of the motor does not enter for 2s continuously during driving the motor.
2. FG pulse exceeding 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.
3. The condition where the target speed +/-6.25% of the motor deviated continued for 2s.

1 Checking the primary The primary transfer unit is Reinstall the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit not properly installed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Cleaning the primary The roller in the primary Remove the waste toner
transfer cleaning section transfer cleaning section remaining in the primary
does not rotate properly. transfer cleaning section.
the wire. • Belt cleaning
motor - Transfer PWB •
Transfer PWB - Transfer con-
nect PWB • Transfer connect
PWB - Feed image PWB •
Feed image PWB - Feed
drive PWB • Feed image
PWB - Engine PWB
4 Checking the belt cleaning The belt cleaning motor Reattach the belt cleaning
motor does not operate properly. motor. If not repaired, replace
it.
5 Primary transfer unit The cleaning drive section Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement of the primary transfer unit unit. and reat-
is faulty. Transfer PWB or taching the
transfer connection PWB Primary
is faulty. Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-319
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty.
C3100: Carriage error

The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or fin-
ishing the original scan by the scanner.

1 Unlocking the primary mir- The primary mirror unit is Unlock the primary mirror Unlocking
ror unit not unlocked. unit. Primary
Mirror Unit
2 Removing foreign objects A load is applied to the Confirm the operation of the Mainte-
and applying the grease scanner movement. mirror unit by executing U073 nance
or moving by manual opera- Mode List
tion. If there is a heavy load
on it, check whether there are
any foreign objects on the
scanner wire or the scanner
wire drum, and then clean it.
After that, apply grease (PG-
671) on the scanner rail.
3 Checking the scanner The scanner wires are dirty Clean the scanner wire or Detaching
wires or come off. reattach it. and reat-
taching the
Scanner
Wires
4 Checking the scanner The scanner motor is Reattach the scanner motor
motor faulty. and reconnect the connector.
5 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
of the scanner motor scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is
improper.
the wire. • Scanner motor -
Engine PWB
7-320
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Home position
sensor - Engine PWB
9 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Replace the home position
tion sensor is faulty. sensor.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3200: LED lamp startup error

The white reference data acquired by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or less.
(Over 2 LED lamps do not light.)

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not Check if the LED lamp lights Detaching
light. by executing U061 [CCD]. If it and reat-
nance
Mode List
replace the FFC. • CCD PWB
- Engine PWB • LED PWB -
CCD PWB
3 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and Detaching
execute U411. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-321
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3210: CIS lamp error

The input data did not exceed threshold for 5s when lighting the CIS lamp.

Mode List
2 Checking the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not Check if the CIS lamp lights Detaching
light. by executing U061 [CIS]. If it and reat-
DPCIS and execute U091 DP CIS
and U411.
3 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass or the CIS Clean the CIS glass and the
and the CIS roller roller is dirty. CIS roller.
the wire. • DP SHD PWB -
DP PWB • DP PWB - Engine
PWB
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-322
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3300: CCD AGC error

The brightness of the LED lamps is darker (1 LED lamp does not turn on) or brighter than anticipated when
executing the AGC process for the CCD lamp.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp is broken. Check if the LED lamp lights Detaching
by executing U061 [CCD]. If it and reat-
nance
Mode List
2 Cleaning the backside of The white reference sheet Clean the white reference Detaching
the contact glass is dirty. sheet at the backside of the and reat-
contact glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
- Engine PWB • LED PWB -
CCD PWB
taching the
Lens Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-323
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3310: CIS AGC error

For internal count
The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

Mode List
2 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass or the CIS Clean the CIS glass and the
and the CIS roller roller is dirty. CIS roller.
PWB
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then Detaching
execute U091 and U411. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine
CPU.

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-324
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3600: Scanner sequence error

The program internal processing error of the scanner sequence occurs.

1 Executing U021 The memory operation is Execute U021. Mainte-
faulty. nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3800: AFE error

When writing, writing data and reading data does not match 3 times continuously. There is no response from
AFE for 100ms.

- Engine PWB
taching the
Lens Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 15s since the polygon motor drive was started.

replace the FFC. • LSU (APC
PWB) - Engine PWB
7-325
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of Detaching
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and reat- and reat-
tach or replace the LSU if it taching the
does not rotate properly. LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 15s continuously after the polygon motor drive becomes stable.

PWB) - Engine PWB
2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of Detaching
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and reat- and reat-
tach or replace the LSU if it taching the
does not rotate properly. LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4101: BD initialization error

The BD signal was not detected for 1s after driving the polygon motor.

PWB) - Engine PWB
7-326
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU Detaching
diode is faulty. while paying attention to the and reat-
static electricity. taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4201: BD steady-state error

The BD signal is not detected during the laser lighting.

PWB) - Engine PWB
2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU Detaching
diode is faulty. while paying attention to the and reat-
static electricity. taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-327
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C4600: LSU cleaning motor error

The LSU cleaning motor lock-up was detected, or the motor continued to be shifted in the same direction for
8s or more.

1 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU cleaning drive Execute Laser Scanner Adjust-
ner Cleaning gear and the cleaning pad Cleaning. ment/
have the load and so they Mainte-
are not shifted smoothly. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Cleaning the LSU clean- The LSU cleaning drive Clean the LSU cleaning drive
ing drive gear and the gear and the cleaning pad gear and the cleaning pad.
cleaning pad have the load and so they
are not shifted smoothly.
3 LSU replacement The LSU cleaning drive Replace the LSU. Detaching
gear, cleaning wire or the and reat-
cleaning pad are taching the
deformed, or they are LSU
faulty.
4 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is Clean the following wire con- Service
not connected properly. Or, nector terminal and FFC ter- Manual -
the wire or FFC is faulty. minal, then reconnect the Section 8
connector and the FFC. If the "PWBs"
wire or FFC is faulty, replace
them. • LSU cleaning motor -
APC PWB (LSU) • APC PWB
(LSU) - Engine PWB
5 Checking the LSU clean- The LSU cleaning motor is Reattach the LSU cleaning
ing motor not properly attached, or it motor and reconnect the con-
is faulty. nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-328
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C4701: VIDEO ASIC device error 1

Communication with VIDEO ASIC has fails 10 times continuously. (After writing to VIDEO ASIC, read from
same address and the error occurred that the value does not match)

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn the power switch and
engine is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware Firmware
est version. and the engine firmware to Update
the latest version.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4801: LSU type mismatch error

The LSU mismatches with the main unit.

1 Checking the LSU The different type LSU is Install the correct LSU. Detaching
installed. and reat-
taching the
LSU
PWB) - Engine PWB
3 LSU replacement The APC PWB is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-329
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C5101: Main high voltage error K

1. The flowing current when Vpp is varied in three stages during Vpp adjustment is measured and the differ-
ence between the zero current value and the current value in the second step is equal to or less than the ref-
erence value. 2. Even if Vpp [C] is applied, the detected Idc is too small. (Less than 5uA)

1 Reinstalling the main high- Proper current does not Reinstall the main high-volt- Detaching
voltage PWB flow as the MC roller con- age PWB. and reat-
tact point of the main high taching the
voltage PWB is not prop- Main High
erly contacted. Voltage
PWB
2 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum Check if the drum or the drum Detaching
and the developer unit screw is not rotated prop- screw is rotated manually, and reat-
erly due to the excessive and replace the drum unit if taching the
load. not rotated. Drum Unit
3 Replacing drum motor K Drum motor K is faulty. Replace drum motor K.
4 Checking the main charger Proper current does not Clean the high-voltage con- Detaching
unit flow as the foreign objects, tact of the main charger unit, and reat-
etc. adheres to the high and apply conductive grease taching the
voltage contact point of the to the roller shaft. Main
main charger unit. Charger
Unit
5 Main charger unit replace- Proper current does not Replace the main charger Detaching
ment flow as the high voltage unit and execute U930. and reat-
contact point of the main taching the
charger unit is deformed or Main
damaged. Charger
Unit Main-
tenance
Mode List
PWB - Engine PWB
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-330
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C5130: Primary transfer high-voltage error

When adjusting the feedback, the detected electric current value exceeds the upper limit or is less than the
lower limit, or the adjustment result is 300V or less or is 2,900V or more.

transfer unit not properly installed. unit so that the connector and reat-
firmly connects. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the high-voltage Proper current does not Clean the high-voltage con-
contact flow as the foreign objects, tact of the primary transfer
etc. adheres to the high roller, and apply conductive
voltage contact point of the grease to the roller shaft.
primary transfer roller.
3 Reinstalling the transfer Proper current does not Reinstall the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB flow as high voltage con- voltage PWB. and reat-
tact of the transfer high taching the
voltage PWB is faulty. Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-331
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6000: IH heating error 1

After warm-up is started, the center thermistor does not reach 100°C / 212°F even 60s passed. Or, during the
warm-up, specified temperature (Ready display temperature) is not detected even 420s passed after center
thermistor reached 100°C / 212°F.

1 Executing U169 The IH setting mis- Set the destination same as Mainte-
matches the power supply the voltage of the IH PWB at nance
specification. U169. Mode List
2 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects If there are foreign objects Detaching
between the fuser unit and between the fuser unit and and reat-
the fuser IH unit. Or, the the fuser IH unit, or on the taching the
foreign objects are fuser belt, remove them. After Fuser Unit
adhered on the fuser belt. that, reinstall the fuser unit.
3 Reinstalling the fuser unit The foreign objects adhere Clean the drawer connection Detaching
on the drawer connection terminal of the fuser unit. and reat-
terminal of the fuser unit. Check the pin of the drawer taching the
Or, the drawer connector is connector is not bent, and Fuser Unit
not inserted completely. replace the fuser unit if it is
bent. If the pin is normal, rein-
stall the fuser unit so that the
drawer connector is securely
connected.
the wire. • Drawer connector
of the fuser unit - Feed image
Engine PWB • Fuser IH unit -
IH PWB • IH PWB - Engine
PWB
6 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature cannot Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
be detected properly due and reat-
to the broken thermostat or taching the
the thermistor error. Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-332
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Fuser IH unit - IH
PWB • IH PWB - Engine
PWB
10 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
C6020: Center thermistor high temperature error

The center thermistor detects 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

connected.
Engine PWB
to the thermistor error, etc. taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-333
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6030: Center thermistor broken

The center thermistor temperature is detected at less than 41°C / 104°F for 1s when the edge thermistor
detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

1 Removing foreign material There is foreign material Remove foreign material if it Detaching
between the fuser unit and is on between the fuser unit and reat-
the fuser IH unit. Or, for- and the fuser IH unit, or on taching the
eign material adheres on the heat roller. Then, reinstall Fuser Unit
the heat roller. the fuser unit.
connected.
Engine PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature is not Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
properly detected due to and reat-
the broken wire or the taching the
thermistor error in the fuser Fuser Unit
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-334
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6050: Center thermistor low temperature error

The center thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

1 Changing the wall outlet The power voltage Connect the power cord to a
descends by 10% or more different wall outlet if the
of the rated voltage when power supply voltage
printing. descends by 10% or more of
the rated voltage.
connected.
Engine PWB
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-335
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • IH PWB - Engine
PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
PWB
12 Replacing the fuser IH unit The fuser IH unit is faulty. Replace the fuser IH unit.
C6120: Press thermistor high temperature error

The press thermistor detected 210°C / 410°F or more for 1s.

connected.
Engine PWB
to the thermistor error, etc. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-336
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6130: Press thermistor broken

1. During warm-up, press thermistor detects less than 35 ° C for 60s continuously. 2. After finishing warm-up,
press thermistor detects less than 35 ° C for 10s continuously.

connected.
Engine PWB
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-337
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
C6200: IH heating error 2

The detected temperature of the edge thermistor does not reach 80 ° C within 60s after warm-up starts. Dur-
ing the warm-up, the detected temperature of the edge thermistor does not reach the ready display tempera-
ture within 420s after reaching 100 ° C.

connected.
Engine PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit Correct temperature Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
cantbedetecteddueto- and reat-
thewirebreakageortheth- taching the
ermistorerrorinthefuserunit Fuser Unit
.Or,thefuserbeltisfaulty.'
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-338
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
PWB
C6220: Edge thermistor high temperature error

The edge thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

connected.
Engine PWB
unit.
7-339
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan
motor properly attached. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
C6230: Edge thermistor broken

The edge thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor detected
100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

connected.
Engine PWB
to the heater broken or the taching the
thermistor error. Fuser Unit
7-340
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6250: Edge thermistor low temperature error

The edge thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

connected.
Engine PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-341
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
PWB
C6320: Middle thermistor high temperature error

The middle thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

connected.
Engine PWB
the wire short-circuit or the taching the
unit.
7-342
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan
motor properly attached. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
C6330: Middle thermistor broken

The middle thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor or the
edge thermistor detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

connected.
Engine PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-343
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
C6410: Uninstalled fuser unit

The unit identification code is mismatched. The unit for other models is installed.

1 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit for other Install the fuser unit for the Detaching
models is installed. applicable models. and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
connected.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
Engine PWB
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-344
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6600: Fuser belt rotation error

The belt rotation pulse is not input for 1.8s continuously.

connected.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit parts such Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
as the fuser belt, the belt and reat-
rotation detecting system, taching the
or the belt rotation sensor Fuser Unit
are faulty
3 Applying the grease The load increases due to Execute U030 [Fuser] to Mainte-
the lack of grease on the check the fuser motor opera- nance
bushing or the gears for tion. If the fuser motor does Mode List
the fuser motor. not rotate smoothly, apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part no.:
7BG010009H) to the bush-
ings or the gears.
the wire. • Fuser motor - Feed
- Engine PWB • Feed image
PWB - Engine PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
9 Replacing the fuser drive The fuser drive gear is Replace the fuser drive gear.
gear faulty.
7-345
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6610: Fuser pressure release sensor error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn off even after 3s passed from instructing to reduce the
fuser pressure of the fuser pressure release motor or to move the JAM processing position. 2. The fuser pres-
sure release sensor does not turn on even after 6s passed from instructing to add the fuser pressure of the
fuser pressure release motor. 3. The lock signal of the fuser pressure release motor became Low for 200ms.
(However, when shifting to JAM process, stop the fuser pressure release motor only and not service call turns
on in the area from the stop position 500ms before to the stop position.)

connected.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Execute U030 [Fuser Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire Release]. If the fuser pres- nance
is faulty. sure release motor does not Mode List
operate properly, reconnect Service
the connectors of the follow- Manual -
ing wires. If there is not conti- Section 8
nuity, replace the wire. • "PWBs"
Fuser pressure release motor
Drawer connector of the fuser
unit - Feed image PWB •
Feed drive PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty at Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the fuser pressure release and reat-
mechanism or the fuser taching the
pressure release sensor . Fuser Unit
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Replacing the fuser pres- The fuser pressure release Replace the fuser pressure
sure release motor motor is faulty. release motor.
7-346
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Replacing the gear in the The gear of the fuser pres- Replace the gears in the
fuser pressure releasing sure releasing mechanism fuser pressure releasing
system at the main unit at the main unit is faulty. mechanism at the main unit.
C6620: IH core motor rotation error

1. When detecting the home position, IH position sensor does not detect ON within 5s after IH core motor is
driven under the condition of the IH position sensor is OFF. 2. When detecting the home position, IH position
sensor does not detect ON after it is turned off within 5s after IH core motor is driven under the condition of the
IH position sensor is ON. 3. When small size paper moves the position, IH position sensor does not detect
OFF within a predetermined pulse after IH core motor is driven under the condition of the IH position sensor is
ON.

1 Checking the fuser IH unit The connector of the fuser Check if the connector pins of
IH unit is not properly con- the fuser IH unit do not bend.
nected. If the pins bend, fix them.
Next, reinstall the fuser IH
unit so that the connector
firmly connects.
2 Checking the IH position- The IH positioning sensor Reattach the IH positioning
ing sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
3 Cleaning the IH positioning The IH positioning sensor Clean the IH positioning sen-
sensor cannot detect properly sor.
since it is dirty.
the wire. • IH core motor
(Fuser IH unit) - Feed drive
unit • Feed drive PWB -
Engine PWB
5 Replacing the fuser IH unit The IH positioning sensor Replace the fuser IH unit.
or the IH core motor is
faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-347
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6740: IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)

The IGBT temperature acquired from the power microprocessor detected is 115°C / 239°F or more for 1s con-
tinuously.

1 Checking the IH PWB fan The connection of the IH Execute U037 [IH PWB] and
motor PWB fan motor, or the IH check the operation of the fan
PWB fan motor is faulty. motor of the IH PWB. If it is
not operating, move to the
step2 [connect fan motor of
the IH PWB]. If it is operating,
move to the step3 [replace
fan motor of the IH PWB].
2 Connecting the IH PWB The connector of the IH Reinsert the connector of the
fan motor PWB fan motor wire is not IH PWB fan motor.
inserted securely.
3 Replacing the IH PWB fan The IH PWB fan motor is Replace the IH PWB fan Fan
motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6760: Fuser IH input excessive electric current error

The input current obtained from the power microcomputer was 20A (100/120V) or 10A (200V) or more contin-
ued for 200ms.

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt is faulty. Detach the fuser unit and Detaching
check if the fuser belt is not and reat-
faulty. If there is any damage, taching the
replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
7-348
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6770: IH low power error

After fuser unit is started to heat, fuser rotation pulse signal
cantbedetectedcontinuouslyfor1s.Or,noelectricpowerissuppliedtoIHfuserunit.(ElectricpowerdetectionontheIHP
WBdetectedasetelectricpowervalueof30%orlessforapredeterminedtime.)'

PWB • IH PWB - Engine
Engine PWB
7-349
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the fuser unit The fuser unit drawer con- If foreign objects adhere on Detaching
drawer connectors nectors are not properly the drawer pins of each and reat-
connected. drawer connector, clean the taching the
drawer pins. If the drawer Fuser Unit
pins are deformed, repair or
replace it. • In case the
drawer pins in the fuser unit
are faulty and they cannot be
repaired by cleaning and fix-
ing: Replace the fuser unit. •
In case the drawer pins in the
main unit are faulty and they
cannot be repaired by clean-
ing and fixing: Replace the
wire. (Part no.:
302ND4637_). If the drawer
pins are not faulty, reinstall
the fuser unit into the main
unit so that the drawer con-
nectors connect each other
firmly.
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7 Checking the cause The input power is Change the input power.
depending on the input improper.
power
(The coil is broken.)
9 Replacing the fuser unit The belt rotation sensor in Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the fuser unit is faulty. The and reat-
thermostat is broken. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-350
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6900: Edge fan motor error

The lock-up was detected for 20s continuously when driving the fan motor.

1 Checking the edge fan The connector is not con- Execute U037 [Fuser Edge] Mainte-
motor nected properly. The wire to check the edge fan motor nance
is faulty. The fan does not operation. And, check if the Mode List
operate as paper size on paper size on the MP tray is Detaching
the MP tray is misdetected. detected properly. If the edge and reat-
fan motor does not operate taching the
properly or the paper size on Right
the MP tray is misdetected, Cover
reconnect the connector of Assy
the conveying unit (edge fan
motor) to the relay connector
at the main unit.
the wire. • Edge fan motor -
PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the edge fan The edge fan motor is Replace the edge fan motor. Fan
motor faulty. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6910: Engine firmware unexpected error

1. The engine stabilization control continued for 1 hour. 2. The feed motor does not drive even passing 3s or
more when driving the drum motor or the developer K/transfer belt motor. 3. Only the high-voltage remote sig-
7-351
2SA/2RJ/2NK
nal turned on under the condition that the drum is stopped. 4. The main charger bias turned off while the
developer bias was on.

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
3 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is not Retighten the screws secur- Detaching
properly attached or con- ing the engine PWB so that it and reat-
nected. can ground securely, and taching the
reinsert the connectors all the Engine
way. PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6920: Eject/IH fan motor error


1 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Execute U037 [Exit Paper IH Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire Coil]. If the following fan nance
is faulty. motor does not operate prop- Mode List
erly, clean the terminal of the Service
connector and reconnect the Manual -
connector. If there is no conti- Section 8
nuity, replace the wire. • Exit/ "PWBs"
IH front fan motor - Feed
image PWB • Exit/IH middle
fan motor - Feed image PWB
• Exit/IH rear fan motor -
2 Checking the eject/IH fan The eject/IH fan motors do Clean the following fan Fan
motors not properly operate. motors, and remove foreign Motors
objects if they adhere on the Attach-
fan motor. If not repaired after able Direc-
that, replace the fan motor. • tion
Exit/IH front fan motor • Exit/
IH middle fan motor • Exit/IH
rear fan motor
7-352
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6950: IH PWB communication error

1. Communication between the IH PWB and the engine PWB is not established in the initial communication.
(150ms interval x 10 times retries are performed) 2. After the initial communication is established, communi-
cation between the IH PWB and the engine PWB is not established. (For 500ms)

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
nected properly. Or, the lowing wire connectors and Manual -
wire is faulty. (Power sup- reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
ply failure to the IH PWB or there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
communication error by the wire. • Low voltage PWB -
the grounding failure.) IH PWB • IH PWB - Engine
PWB
3 Checking the power supply The abnormal electric Plug the power cord into
voltage noise is mixed in the power another wall outlet.
supply voltage.
4 Checking the low voltage The fuse on the low volt- Check the continuity of the Detaching
PWB age PWB is broken. fuse (F002) on the low volt- and reat-
age PWB. Then, replace the taching the
low voltage PWB if there is Low Volt-
no continuity. age PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-353
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6980: Fuser unit EEPROM error

It is not possible to access the fuser unit EEPROM since it matches one of the following. 1. Five times con-
secutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing. 2. Data read in 2
places does not match 8 consecutive times. 3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive
times.

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser unit drawer con- If foreign objects adhere on Detaching
drawer connectors nectors are not properly the drawer pins of each and reat-
connected. drawer connector, clean the taching the
drawer pins. If the drawer Fuser Unit
pins are deformed, repair or
replace it. • In case the
drawer pins in the fuser unit
are faulty and they cannot be
repaired by cleaning and fix-
ing: Replace the fuser unit. •
In case the drawer pins in the
main unit are faulty and they
cannot be repaired by clean-
ing and fixing: Replace the
wire. (Part no.:
302ND4637_). If the drawer
pins are not faulty, reinstall
the fuser unit into the main
unit so that the drawer con-
nectors connect each other
firmly.
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6990: Fuser power source destination error

The information mismatches between the engine backup and the IH PWB.

1 Executing U169 The voltage setting at Set the destination same as Mainte-
U169 mismatches the volt- the voltage of the IH PWB at nance
age of the IH PWB. U169. Mode List
7-354
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7001: Container motor error

1. After the container motor is started, ready signal does not turn on even 2s passed. 2. After the container
motor is stabilized, ready signal is kept off 2s continuously.

1 Replacing the toner con- The toner container locks Replace the toner container. Replacing
tainer up and is not rotated. the Toner
Container
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the toner con- The toner container drive Execute U030 [Container Mainte-
tainer drive parts parts are not operated Mix] to check the container nance
properly, or the excessive motor operation. If the con- Mode List
load is applied to it. tainer motor does not operate
properly, clean the drive
gears and the couplings in
the container drive unit and
apply the grease (EM-50LP,
Part no.: 7BG010009H) to
them.
the wire. • Container motor -
Feed image PWB
4 Checking the toner con- The toner container motor Reattach the container motor Detaching
tainer motor is faulty. and reconnect the connector. and reat-
If not repaired, replace it. taching the
Container
Motor
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-355
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7101: T/C sensor K error

The output value of T/C sensor is not settled within +100 (Toner is not detected) or -1000 (sensor connector is
coming off) against the initial toner setting value which is stored in the EEPROM of the developer unit. And
this condition was detected 3 times continuously.

1 Reinstalling the developer The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit K so Detaching
unit properly installed. that the connector firmly con- and reat-
nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
the wire. • Drum/developer
relay PWB - Feed image
Engine PWB
3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for the Replace the developer unit K
developer unit K is bro- drive gear.
ken. (The developer screw
does not rotate.)
4 Developer unit replace- Developer unit K (T/C sen- Replace developer unit K. Detaching
ment sor K) is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
6 Replacing the drum/devel- The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer Detaching
oper relay PWB PWB is faulty. relay PWB. and reat-
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit")
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-356
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7200: Inner thermistor broken (developer)

Input sampling value of the T/C sensor K (machine inside thermistor) is over the standard value.

nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
PWB
taching the
Developer
Unit
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit")
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-357
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

Input sampling value of the T/C sensor K (machine inside thermistor) is below the standard value.

nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
PWB
taching the
Developer
Unit
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit")
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-358
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7221: LSU thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or more.

PWB) - Engine PWB
2 LSU replacement The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU. Detaching
is faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7231: LSU thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or less.

PWB) - Engine PWB
2 LSU replacement The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU. Detaching
is faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-359
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7241: Belt thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or more.

Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire. • Transfer PWB -
Transfer connect PWB •
Transfer connect PWB - Feed
image PWB
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
5 Replacing the transfer con- The transfer connection Replace the transfer connec-
nection PWB PWB is faulty. tion PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7251: Belt thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or less.

Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire. • Transfer PWB -
Transfer connect PWB •
Transfer connect PWB - Feed
image PWB
7-360
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7301: Toner motor K error

Toner supply motor drive stopped and waited for 0.1s when the pulse plate of the toner supply screw could not
detect the pulse for 2s during the toner supply motor operation. Even if these operations repeated 3 times
continuously, the pulse could not be detected.

1 Checking the toner supply The toner supply screw is Check if the toner is not
drive unit not rotated properly due to clogged inside the toner sup-
the excessive load. (The ply drive unit by rotating the
pulse plate is not rotated.) toner supply screw manually.
Then, clean the unit if neces-
sary.
the wire. • Toner motor K -
Feed image PWB
3 Replacing the toner sup- Toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply Detaching
ply drive unit (toner motor K or toner drive unit. and reat-
remaining sensor K) is taching the
faulty. Toner Sup-
ply Drive
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-361
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7320: Toner container detection connector error

Disconnection of the toner container detection connector was detected when closing the toner container
cover.

the wire. • Container drive
unit (RFID PWB) - Feed
image PWB
2 Checking the container The connector is not con- If the connector of the wire
drive unit nected properly, or the wire inside the container drive unit
is faulty. disconnects, reconnect it. If
not repaired, replace the con-
tainer drive unit.
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7420: Uninstalled primary transfer unit

1. Unit identification code does not match. 2. Unit for the other model is installed.

1 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer unit Install the primary transfer Detaching
replacement for other models is unit for the applicable mod- and reat-
installed. els. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Reinstalling the primary The connector of the pri- Reinstall the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit mary transfer unit is not unit so that the connector and reat-
firmly connected. firmly connects. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire. • Transfer connect
PWB - Feed image PWB
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
7-362
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
C7470: Toner sucking fan motor error


the wire. • Toner absorption
fan motor - Feed image PWB
2 Checking the toner suck- The fan motor does not Clean the toner sucking fan Fan
ing fan motor rotate properly since it is motor and check if the fan is Motors
dirty. rotated manually. Then, reat- Attach-
tach it. able Direc-
tion
3 Replacing the toner suck- The toner sucking fan Execute U037 [Toner] to Fan
ing fan motor motor is faulty. check the operation. If the Motors
toner absorption fan motor Attach-
does not properly operate, able Direc-
replace it. tion
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7480: Power source fan motor error


the wire. • Power source fan
motor - Engine PWB
2 Checking the power The fan motor does not Clean the power source fan Fan
source fan motor rotate properly since it is motor and check if the fan is Motors
dirty. rotated manually. Then, reat- Attach-
tach it. able Direc-
tion
7-363
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the power The power source fan Replace the power source Fan
source fan motor motor is faulty. fan motor if it does not oper- Motors
ate properly when executing Attach-
U037 [LVU]. able Direc-
tion
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7490: Eject fan motor error


the wire. • Exit fan motor
(Fuser drive unit) - Feed drive
PWB
2 Checking the eject fan The fan motor does not Clean the eject fan motor and Fan
motor rotate properly since it is check if the fan is rotated Motors
dirty. manually. Then, reattach it. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
3 Replacing the eject fan The eject fan motor is If the exit fan motor does not Fan
motor faulty. operate properly when exe- Motors
cuting U037 [Exit Cooling], Attach-
replace it. able Direc-
tion
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7601: Front ID sensor error

Dark potential error: Sensor output value (FrontDarkP, FrontDarkS) is less than 0.15V or bigger than 0.80V.
Bright potential error: FrontBrightS is less than FrontDarkS or FrontBrightP is less than FrontDarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the front ID sen- The front ID sensor is dirty. Clean the front ID sensor sur-
sor face.
7-364
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If Mainte-
shutter not operate properly. the ID sensor shutter does nance
the cleaning solenoid.
the wire. • Front ID sensor -
Feed drive PWB • Cleaning
solenoid - Feed drive PWB •
PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is Replace the cleaning sole-
solenoid faulty. noid.
5 Checking the front ID sen- The front ID sensor is not Reattach the front ID sensor.
sor properly attached.
6 Replacing the front D sen- The front ID sensor is Check if the value of U465 Mainte-
sor faulty. [T7 CTD] is fluctuated before nance
and after Calibration, and Mode List
replace the front ID sensor if
it was not fluctuated (uncali-
brated).
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7602: Rear ID sensor error

Dark potential error: Sensor output value (RearDarkP, RearDarkS) is less than 0.15V or bigger than 0.80V.
Bright potential error: RearBrightS is less than RearDarkS or RearBrightP is less than RearDarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is dirty. Clean the rear ID sensor sur-
sor face.
7-365
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • Rear ID sensor -
Feed drive PWB • Cleaning
solenoid - Feed drive PWB •
PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is Replace the cleaning sole-
solenoid faulty. noid.
5 Checking the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is not Reattach the rear ID sensor.
sor properly attached.
6 Replacing the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is Check if the value of U465 Mainte-
sor faulty. [T7 CTD] is fluctuated before nance
and after Calibration, and Mode List
replace the rear ID sensor if it
was not fluctuated (uncali-
brated).
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7611: Bias calibration read value error (Black)

The ID sensors cannot properly read the patch density on the primary transfer belt when executing Calibra-
tion.

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
7-366
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 (In case if the printout is The developing roller does Switch the lock lever up and Detaching
light) Checking the devel- not contact with the drum. down and return the devel- and reat-
oper unit oper roller to the setting posi- taching the
tion. If the developer roller Developer
does not return due to the Unit
breakage of the lock lever or
the failure of the developer
roller pressure wire, replace
the developer unit.
3 (In case if the printout is The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not Detaching
light) Cleaning / replacing properly from the LSU. Or, repaired, replace it. and reat-
the LSU. LSU dustproof glass is taching the
dirty. LSU
4 (In case if the printout is Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. Adjust-
light) Improving the con- surface And next, set [On] at U339 ment/
densation of the drum sur- [Drum heater] to turn on the Mainte-
face drum heater. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10) Main-
tenance
Mode List
5 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front
and rear ID sensors.
6 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
8 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Clean the surface of the pri- Detaching
transfer unit surface is dirty. mary transfer belt, or replace and reat-
the primary transfer unit. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
9 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not prop- Reattach the front and rear ID
erly attached, or the con- sensors and reconnect the
nector is not properly connectors.
connected.
10 (When the image is too Proper current does not Reattach the main high volt-
light) Checking the main flow as the main high voltage PWB and the transfer
high voltage PWB / trans- age PWB or the contact high voltage PWB.
fer high voltage PWB point of the transfer high
voltage PWB is faulty.
7-367
2SA/2RJ/2NK

11 (When the image is too The parts for the drum unit, In case if the image is too Mainte-
light) Checking the drum developer unit and LSU is light, clean the drum unit, nance
unit / developer unit / LSU dirty or worn out. developer unit and the LSU. parts
Or, replace them. replace-
ment pro-
cedures
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
est version. latest version. Update
the wire. • Front ID sensor
and Rear ID sensor - Feed
- Engine PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or
more.

the wire. • Temperature/
humidity sensor - Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the tempera- The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/
ture/humidity sensor sensor is faulty. humidity sensor.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-368
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or
less.

the wire. • Temperature/
humidity sensor - Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the tempera- The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/
ture/humidity sensor sensor is faulty. humidity sensor.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7901: Drum unit K EEPROM error

consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and
EEPROM in the drum unit the main power switch off .
is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not prop- Reinstall drum unit K to con- Detaching
erly installed. nect the connector firmly. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
the wire. • Drum unit - Drum/
developer relay PWB • Drum/
developer relay PWB - Feed
PWB - Engine PWB
7-369
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Drum unit replacement The EEPROM in the drum Replace drum unit K. Detaching
unit is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
5 Checking the connection EEPROM signal line of If the signal wire has a Service
of the EEPROMS in each some units are faulty ground fault, replace it. • Sig- Manual -
unit grounded. nal wires (SCL, SDA) from Section 8
the EEPROMs in the drum "PWBs"
unit and the developer unit -
Drum/developer relay PWB •
Signal wires (SCL, SDA) from
the EEPROMs in the primary
transfer unit and the fuser
unit - Feed image PWB
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit")
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-370
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7911: Developer unit K EEPROM error

consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and
EEPROM in the developer the main power switch off .
unit is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
Engine PWB
4 Developer unit replace- The EEPROM in the devel- Replace developer unit K. Detaching
ment oper unit is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit")
7 Checking the feed image The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-371
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7941: LSU EEPROM error

Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. Writing data and reading data does not match 8
consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in the Turn the power switch and
LSU is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Checking the FFC FFC is not connected Clean the FFC terminals of Service
PWB) - Engine PWB
3 LSU replacement The APC PWB (LSU) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
C7970: Weight sensor error

The condition of the sensor output value was less than the specified value continued for 500ms.

1 Reinstalling the waste The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box Replacing
toner box properly installed. into the main unit slowly, and the Waste
then check if it moves verti- Toner Box
cally. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the wire The relay connector Realign the wire so that the Connec-
(engine PWB and waste wire of the relay connector at tion of
toner motor/weight sen- the waste toner box unit Relay
sor) is not connected prop- backside is not excessively Connector
erly or disconnected as strained. Then, reconnect the of Waste
excessive tensioning of the relay connector. Toner Box
wire located at the back Unit (Sec-
side of the waste toner box tion 4
unit during maintenance "Detach-
work. ing and
reattach-
ing waste
toner box
unit)
7-372
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the weight sen- The connector is not prop- Reconnect the connector of
sor and the actuator erly connected. Or, the the weight sensor. And, cor-
actuator is not attached rect the actuator position.
properly.
4 Checking the spring for the The spring of the weight Reattach the spring for the
weight sensor sensor is not attached weight sensor located under
properly. the waste toner box unit.
5 Cleaning around the The weight sensor and Clean around the weight sen-
weight sensor surrounding parts are dirty. sor with an air-blower.
6 Executing U155 The calibration of the Execute the waste toner cali- Mainte-
weight sensor is not exe- bration at U155. nance
cuted properly. Mode List
7 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box is Replace the waste toner box. Replacing
box faulty. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7980: Waste toner overflow (Waste toner full sensor error)

The waste toner full sensor detected full (lock) of the waste toner box for 4 times continuously.

1 Checking the waste toner The waste toner box is full. Replace the waste toner box Replacing
box if it is full. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the waste toner The connector is not prop- Reconnect the connector of
full sensor erly connected. the waste toner full sensor.
3 Cleaning the waste toner The waste toner is clogged Clean inside the waste toner Detaching
box joint section at the waste toner joint box joint section of the main and reat-
section. drive unit. taching the
Main Drive
Unit
7-373
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the connection The waste toner box joint Realign the wire so that the Connec-
section and the waste wire of the relay connector at tion of
toner box are not properly the waste toner box unit Relay
connected. backside is not excessively Connector
strained. Then, reconnect the of Waste
relay connector. After that, Toner Box
reinstall the waste toner box Unit (Sec-
into the main unit. tion 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing waste
toner box
unit)
the wire. • Feed image PWB -
Feed drive PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB faulty.
C8010: PH motor error 1

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher (When punch unit is
installed)
1. The PH home position sensor does not turn on even 200ms passed when the PH motor drives. 2. The
pulse plate does not count the specified pulse even 300ms passed after the punch operation was started. 3.
After correction operation starts, the punch unit does not stop at 2-pulse position from the PH home position
sensor turning on within 500ms. (If the PH home position sensor turns on, the processing finishes normally.)

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch unit does not
assembled properly. move manually, repair the
position where restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the PH cam The PH cam drive parts Reattach the punch cam
drive parts are not attached properly, drive parts. If not repaired,
or faulty. replace them.
7-374
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • PH motor - PH
PWB • PH home position
sensor - PH PWB • PH PWB
- DF PWB
4 Replacing the PH motor The PH motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
[Punch]. If the PH motor does nance
not operate properly, replace Mode List
it.
5 Checking the PH home The PH home position Execute U241 [Punch] > Mainte-
position sensor sensor is not properly [Punch HP]. If the PH home nance
attached, or it is faulty. position sensor does not Mode List
operate properly, reattach it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the PH firmware to Firmware
7 Replacing the PH PWB The PH PWB is faulty. Replace the PH PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

installed)
The positioning alignment of the home position is not completed within 3s when initializing or waiting the home
position.

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam The PH cam drive parts Reattach the PH cam drive
drive parts are not attached properly, parts. If not repaired, replace
or faulty. them.
7-375
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB • PH PWB - DF PWB
it.
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

installed)
The home position detection does not turn off within 50ms when initializing the home position.

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam The PH cam drive parts Reattach the PH cam drive
drive parts are not attached properly, parts. If not repaired, replace
or faulty. them.
PWB • PH PWB - DF PWB
7-376
2SA/2RJ/2NK

it.
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8090: DF paddle motor error

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher
1. The DF paddle sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF paddle motor drives. 2. The DF pad-
dle sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 1s from on condition.

1 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle drive parts Reattach the DF paddle drive
drive parts are not properly attached, parts. If not repaired, replace
or it is faulty. them.
the wire. • DF paddle motor -
DF PWB • DF paddle sensor
- DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Beat]. If the DF paddle motor nance
replace it.
4 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor faulty. [Lead Paddle]. If the DF pad- nance
dle sensor does not operate Mode List
properly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-377
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8100: DF eject release motor error

1. The DF bundle exit sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF exit release motor drives. 2. The
DF bundle exit sensor does not turn off even if drives for 1s from on condition.

1 Checking the DF bundle The eject guide in the DF Repair the DF bundle exit
exit unit bundle exit unit is unit.
deformed.
2 Checking the DF bundle The DF bundle exit unit Reattach the DF bundle exit
exit unit drive parts drive parts are not properly unit drive parts. If not
attached, or they are faulty. repaired, replace them.
the wire. • DF exit release
motor - DF PWB • DF bundle
exit sensor - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF eject The DF eject release Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
release motor motor is faulty. [Eject Unlock(HP)]. If the DF nance
exit release motor does not Mode List
operate properly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF bundle The DF bundle exit sensor Reattach the DF bundle exit Mainte-
exit sensor is not attached properly or sensor, then check the sen- nance
faulty. sor operation by executing Mode List
U241. If the DF bundle exit
sensor does not operate
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8110: DF shift motor 1 error

DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 1.

1 Checking the front shift The front shift guide is not If the front shift guide does
guide assembled properly. not move manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the front shift The front shift guide drive Reattach the front shift guide
guide drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
attached, or they are faulty. replace them.
7-378
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • DF shift motor 1 -
DF PWB • DF shift sensor 1 -
DF PWB
4 Replacing DF shift motor 1 DF shift motor 1 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 1 if it Mainte-
does not operate properly nance
when checking the operation Mode List
at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 1 DF shift sensor 1 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 1, Mainte-
properly attached, or it is then execute U241 [Finisher] nance
faulty. > [Shift Front HP]. If DF shift Mode List
sensor 1 does not operate
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8120: DF shift motor 2 error

DF shift sensor 2 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 2.

1 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not
guide assembled properly. move manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide drive Reattach the rear shift guide
the wire. • DF shift motor 2 -
DF PWB • DF shift sensor 2 -
DF PWB
4 Checking DF shift motor 2 DF shift motor 2 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 2 if it Mainte-
does not operate properly nance
at U240.
7-379
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Checking DF shift sensor 2 DF shift sensor 2 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 2, Mainte-
properly attached, or it is then execute U241 [Finisher] nance
faulty. > [Shift Tail HP]. If DF shift Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8130: DF shift release motor error

1. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF shift release motor drives. 2.
The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even if the DF shift release motor drives for 3s toward the direc-
tion of the HP detection. 3. The DF shift release sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 3s toward the
direction of the HP detection off.

1 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not
guide assembled properly. move manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide drive Reattach the rear shift guide
the wire. • DF shift release
motor - DF PWB • DF shift
release sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF shift The DF shift release motor Replace the DF shift release Mainte-
release motor is faulty. motor if it does not operate nance
properly when checking the Mode List
operation at U240.
5 Checking the DF shift The DF shift release sen- Reattach the DF shift release Mainte-
release sensor sor is not properly sensor, then execute U241 nance
attached, or it is faulty. [Finisher] > [Shift Unlock HP]. Mode List
If the DF shift release sensor
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-380
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8140: DF tray motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
The DF tray sensor or the DF tray upper side sensor does not turn on after passing 30s when ascending the
DF main tray or the DF tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray / DF tray If the DF main tray or the DF
/ DF tray is not assembled properly. tray does not move up and
down manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray / DF tray Reattach the DF main tray /
/ DF tray drive parts drive parts are not properly DF tray drive parts. If not
the wire. • DF tray motor - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor [Tray]. If the DF tray motor nance
replace it.
5 (When installing the 1000- The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
sheet finisher) Checking nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire. • DF tray sensor 1 -
DF PWB
6 (When installing the 4000- The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
sheet finisher) Checking nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire. • DF tray sensor 1 -
DF PWB • DF tray sensor 2 -
DF PWB
the wire. • DF tray upper sur-
face sensor 1 - DF PWB • DF
tray upper surface sensor 2 -
DF PWB
7-381
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 (When installing the 1000- DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, Mainte-
sheet finisher) Checking properly attached, or it is then execute U241 [Finisher] nance
DF tray sensor 1 faulty. > [Tray U-Limit]. If DF tray Mode List
9 (When installing the 4000- DF tray sensors 1, 2 are Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or Mainte-
sheet finisher) Checking not properly attached, or 2, then execute U241 [Fin- nance
DF tray sensor 1, 2 they are faulty. isher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray Mode List
HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2
replace it.
10 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper surface sen- Reattach DF tray upper sur- Mainte-
side sensors 1, 2 sors 1, 2 are not properly face sensor 1 or 2, then exe- nance
attached, or they are faulty. cute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Mode List
Top]. If DF tray upper surface
sensor 1 or 2 does not oper-
ate properly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

Turning on/off of DF paper holding sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 4s when ascending the
DF tray.

1 Checking the DF tray The DF tray is not assem- If the DF tray does not move
bled properly. up and down manually, repair
the position where restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the DF tray drive The DF tray drive parts are Reattach the DF tray drive
parts not properly attached, or parts. If not repaired, replace
they are faulty. them.
PWB • DF paper holding sen-
sor 1 - DF PWB • DF paper
holding sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if Mainte-
motor it does not operate properly nance
at U240.
7-382
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Checking DF paper hold- DF paper holding sensors Reattach DF paper holding Mainte-
ing sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly sensor 1 or 2, then check the nance
attached, or they are faulty. sensor operation by execut- Mode List
ing U241. If DF paper holding
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

Object: 1000-sheet finisher Remarks: If the error is detected during job, the tray full
is displayed and this service call will not come up.
Turning on and off of DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing
5s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
PWB • DF tray sensor 1 - DF
PWB • DF tray upper surface
sensor 1 - DF PWB • DF tray
upper surface sensor 2 - DF
PWB
at U240.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 1 DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, Mainte-
properly attached. then check the sensor opera- nance
tion by executing U241. If DF Mode List
tray sensor 1 does not oper-
7-383
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper side sensors Reattach DF tray upper sur- Mainte-
side sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly face sensor 1 or 2, then nance
attached. check the sensor operation Mode List
by executing U241. If DF tray
upper surface sensor 1 or 2
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

Turning on and off of DF tray sensors 1, 2 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after pass-
ing 5s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not
assembled properly. move up and down manually,
repair the position where
restricts the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive Reattach the DF main tray
drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
PWB • DF tray upper surface
sensor 1 - DF PWB • DF tray
upper surface sensor 2 - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
replace it.
5 Checking DF tray sensors DF tray sensors 1, 2 are Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or Mainte-
1, 2 not properly attached, or 2, then execute U241 [Fin- nance
they are faulty. isher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray Mode List
HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2
replace it.
7-384
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper surface sen- Reattach DF tray upper sur- Mainte-
side sensors 1, 2 sors 1, 2 are not properly face sensor 1 or 2, then exe- nance
attached, or they are faulty. cute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Mode List
Top]. If DF tray upper surface
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8160: DF tray motor error (3)

DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on after passing 30s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
PWB • DF tray sensor 3 -DF
PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
replace it.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 3 DF tray sensor 3 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 3, Mainte-
properly attached, or it is then check the sensor opera- nance
faulty. tion by executing U241. If DF Mode List
tray sensor 3 does not oper-
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-385
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF tray sensors 4, 5 does not turn on after passing 60s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not
assembled properly. move up and down manually,
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive Reattach the DF main tray
drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
PWB • DF tray sensor 4 -DF
PWB or, • DF tray sensor 5
(when installing the folding
unit) -DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
replace it.
5 Checking DF tray sensors DF tray sensors 4, 5 are Reattach DF tray sensor 4 or Mainte-
4, 5 not properly attached, or DF tray sensor 5 (when nance
they are faulty. installing the folding unit), Mode List
then execute U241 [Finisher]
> [Tray L-Limit] or [ Tray L-
Limit(BL)]. If DF tray sensor 4
or 5 does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

The DF tray sensor does not turn on after passing 4s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
7-386
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB • DF tray sensor - DF
PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if Mainte-
at U240.
5 Checking the DF tray sen- The DF tray sensor is not Reattach the DF tray sensor, Mainte-
sor properly attached, or it is then check the sensor opera- nance
faulty. tion by executing U241. If the Mode List
DF tray sensor does not
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error 1

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registra- If the DF side registration
registration guide tion guide is not assem- front guide does not move
bled properly. manually, repair the position
where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive front guide drive parts are tration front guide drive parts.
parts not properly attached, or If not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
tion motor 1 - DF PWB • DF
side registration sensor 1 -
DF PWB
7-387
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
Test(LD)]. If DF side registra- Mode List
tion motor 1 does not operate
5 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration sensor Reattach DF side registra- Mainte-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly attached, tion sensor 1, then execute nance
or it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Mode List
Front HP]. If DF side registra-
tion sensor 1 does not oper-
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

J6810/J6811/J6812 (Front DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registra- If the DF side registration
registration guide tion guide is not assem- front guide does not move
bled properly. manually, repair the position
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration Reattach the front DF side
registration guide drive front guide drive parts are registration guide drive parts.
parts not properly attached, or
they are faulty.
3 Replacing the front DF The front DF side registra- Replace the front DF side
side registration guide tion guide drive parts are registration guide drive parts.
drive parts faulty.
DF PWB
5 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 1 1 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
7-388
2SA/2RJ/2NK

or it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Mode List
Front HP]. If DF side registra-
tion sensor 1 does not oper-
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registra- If the DF side registration rear
registration guide tion guide is not assem- guide does not move manu-
bled properly. ally, repair the position where
2 Checking the rear DF side The DF side registration Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive rear guide drive parts are tration rear guide drive parts.
parts not properly attached, or If not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
DF PWB
4 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tration motor 2 2 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
or it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail Mode List
HP]. If DF side registration
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-389
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J6910/J6911/J6912 (Rear DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registra- If the DF side registration rear
registration guide tion guide is not assem- guide does not move manu-
bled properly. ally, repair the position where
2 Checking the rear DF side The side registration rear Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive guide drive parts are not tration rear guide drive parts.
parts properly attached, or they If not repaired, replace them.
are faulty.
DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 2 2 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
5 Checking DF side registra- DF width adjustment sen- Reattach DF side registra- Mainte-
tion sensor 2 sor 2 is not installed prop- tion sensor 2, then execute nance
erly. Or, it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail Mode List
HP]. If DF side registration
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-390
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8210: DF staple motor front/rear error

The home position could not be detected after passing 3s when replacing to the home position at the initial
operation.

1 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit does not
unit assembled properly. move front and back manu-
ally, repair the position where
2 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit drive Reattach the DF staple unit
unit drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
the wire. • DF staple motor -
DF PWB • DF staple sensor -
DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Sta- Mainte-
motor faulty. ple]. If the DF staple motor nance
replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF Staple
Unit
5 Checking the DF staple The DF staple motor is not Reattach the DF staple sen- Detaching
sensor properly attached, or it is sor. Then, replace the DF sta- and reat-
faulty. ple unit if the sensor is not taching the
fixed. DF Staple
Unit
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8230: DF staple motor error 1

DF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: after the
motor is started, home position cantbedetectedeven600mspassed.)'

1 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple cantbedone-
unit assembled properly. withoutpaperjam,repairthepo-
sitionwhererestrictstheoperati
on.'
7-391
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • DF staple unit - DF
PWB
3 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
unit and reat-
taching the
DF Staple
Unit
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8250: DF main tray error 4

The lock-up signal was 0.7V or less for 10s continuously during the DF tray motor operation.

the operation.
PWB
at U240.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-392
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

J790X (Middle paddle jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle drive parts Reattach or replace the DF
drive parts are not properly attached, paddle drive parts.
or it is faulty.
the wire. • DF middle motor -
DF PWB • DF paddle sensor
- DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Mid- Mainte-
motor faulty. dle(H)] or [Middle(L)]. If the nance
DF middle motor does not Mode List
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Reattach the DF paddle sen- Mainte-
sensor not properly attached, or it sor, then execute U241 [Fin- nance
is faulty. isher] > [Lead Paddle]. If the Mode List
DF paddle sensor does not
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8300: Main program error / BF unit communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the folding unit
After confirming connection with the holding unit, the communication has cut off.

1 Checking the BF set sen- The BF set sensor is not Reattach the BF set sensor.
sor attached properly.
the wire. • BF PWB - DF
PWB
3 Replacing the BF set sen- The BF set sensor is faulty. Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor [Set]. If the BF set sensor nance
replace it.
7-393
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8310: BF side registration motor 2 error

BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the upper BF The upper BF side regis- If the BF side registration
side registration guide tration guide is not assem- upper guide does not move
bled properly. front and back manually,
2 Checking the upper BF The BF side registration Reattach the BF side regis-
side registration guide upper guide drive parts are tration upper guide drive
drive parts not properly attached, or parts. If not repaired, replace
tion motor 2 - BF PWB • BF
BF PWB
4 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration Mainte-
tration motor 2 2 is faulty. motor 2 if it does not operate nance
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reattach BF side registration Mainte-
tion sensor 2 2 is not properly attached, sensor 2, then execute U241 nance
or it is faulty. [Booklet] > [Width Down HP]. Mode List
If BF side registration sensor
2 does not operate properly,
replace it.
7-394
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8320: BF adjustment motor error

At the initialization, turning on of the BF adjustment sensor is not detected after 2.5s passes.

1 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt is not If the BF shift belt is not oper-
assembled properly. ated manually, repair the part
that restricts the operation.
2 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt drive Reattach the BF shift belt
drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If the belt comes
attached, or they are faulty. off, reattach it. If not repaired,
replace the BF shift belt drive
parts.
the wire. • BF adjusting motor
1, 2 - BF PWB • BF adjusting
sensor 1, 2 - BF PWB
4 Replacing BF adjustment BF adjustment motors 1, 2 Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motors 1, 2 are faulty. [Bundle Down] or [Bundle nance
Up]. If DF adjusting motor 1 Mode List
or 2 does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
5 Checking BF adjustment BF adjustment sensors 1, Reattach BF adjusting sensor Mainte-
sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly 1 or 2, then execute U241 nance
attached, or they are faulty. [Booklet] > [Bundle Down HP] Mode List
or [Bundle Up HP]. If BF
adjusting sensor 1 or 2 does
not operate properly, replace
it.
C8330: BF blade motor error

The BF blade sensor does not turn on after passing 3s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the BF blade The BF blade is not If the BF blade does not oper-
assembled properly. ation manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the BF blade The BF blade drive parts Reattach the BF blade drive
drive parts are not properly attached, parts. If not repaired, replace
or they are faulty. them.
7-395
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • BF blade motor -
BF PWB • BF blade sensor -
BF PWB
4 Replacing the BF blade The BF blade motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Blade]. If the BF blade motor nance
replace it.
5 Checking the BF blade The BF blade sensor is not Reattach the BF blade sen- Mainte-
sensor properly attached. sor, then execute U241 nance
[Booklet] > [Blade HP]. If the Mode List
BF blade sensor does not
C8340: BF staple motor error 1

BF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: after the
motor is started, home position cantbedetectedeven600mspassed.)'

1 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit does not
unit assembled properly. operation manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit drive Reattach the BF staple unit
the wire. • BF staple unit - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
unit faulty. [Staple]. If the BF staple nance
erly, replace the BF staple
unit.
7-396
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8350: BF side registration motor 1 error

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the lower BF The lower BF side registra- If the BF side registration
side registration guide tion guide is not assem- lower guide does not opera-
bled properly. tion manually, repair the posi-
tion where restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the lower BF The BF side registration Reattach the BF side regis-
side registration guide lower guide drive parts are tration lower guide drive
drive parts not properly attached, or parts. If not repaired, replace
tion motor 1 - BF PWB • BF
BF PWB
4 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration Mainte-
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. motor 1 if it does not operate nance
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reattach BF side registration Mainte-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly attached, sensor 1, then execute U241 nance
or it is faulty. [Booklet] > [Width Up HP]. If Mode List
replace it.
C8360: BF main motor error

The lock-up signal was detected for 1s continuously during the motor operation.

1 Checking the BF convey- The BF conveying roller is If the BF conveying roller is
ing roller not assembled properly. not rotated manually, repair
the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the BF convey- The BF conveying roller Reattach the BF conveying
ing roller drive parts drive parts are not properly roller drive parts. If not
7-397
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • BF main motor -
BF PWB
4 Replacing the BF main The BF main motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Blade]. If the BF blade motor nance
replace it.
C8370: BF staple motor error 2

BF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: during
the motor is operating, home position cantbedetectedeven600mspassed.)'

1 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit does not
unit assembled properly. operation manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit drive Reattach the BF staple unit
the wire. • BF staple unit - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Staple]. If the BF staple nance
erly, replace it.
5 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
unit
7-398
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8410: PH slide motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
The PH slide sensor does not turn on after shifting 30mm when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section
assembled properly. does not move front and back
manually, repair the position
2 Checking the PH drive The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts.
parts attached properly, or faulty. If not repaired, replace them.
the wire. • PH slide motor -
PH PWB • PH slide sensor -
PH PWB • PH PWB - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the PH slide The PH slide motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Punch Move]. If the PH slide nance
erly, replace the DF staple
unit.
5 Checking the PH slide sen- The PH slide sensor is not Reattach the PH slide sensor, Mainte-
sor properly attached, or it is then check the sensor opera- nance
faulty. tion by executing U241. If the Mode List
PH slide sensor does not
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-399
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8420: PH slide motor error 2

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
The paper edge cannot be detected even if shifting 30mm when detecting the paper edge.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section
assembled properly. does not move front and back
manually, repair the position
2 Checking the PH drive The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts.
parts attached properly, or faulty. If not repaired, replace them.
the wire. • PH slide motor -
PH PWB • PH paper edge
sensor 1, 2 - PH PWB • PH
PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the PH slide The PH slide motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Punch Move]. If the PH slide nance
erly, replace the DF staple
unit.
5 Checking the PH paper PH paper edge sensors 1, Reattach PH paper edge sen- Mainte-
edge sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly sor 1 or 2, then check the nance
attached, or they are faulty. sensor operation by execut- Mode List
ing U241. If PH paper edge
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-400
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error

installed)
The communication could not succeed after confirming the connection with the punch unit.

the wire. • PH PWB - DF
PWB
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the mail box
The communication failed after confirming the connection with the mail box.

1 Resetting the main power The PWB malfunctions. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire. • MT PWB - DF
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-401
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8510: MB conveying motor error 1

The MT home position sensor does not turn on after passing 10s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying roller is If the MT conveying roller is
operation.
the wire. • MT conveying
motor - MT PWB • MT home
position sensor - MT PWB
3 Replacing the MT convey- The MT conveying motor is Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor faulty. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
erly, replace it.
4 Checking the MT home The MT home position is Reattach the MT home posi- Mainte-
position sensor not properly attached, or it tion sensor, then execute nance
is faulty. U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor Mode List
HP]. If the MT home position
C8520: MB conveying motor error 2

The MT home position sensor does not turn off after passing 2s during the standby operation.

1 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying roller is If the MT conveying roller is
operation.
2 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying roller Reattach the MT conveying
ing roller drive parts drive parts are not properly roller drive parts.
attached, or they are faulty.
3 Replacing the MT convey- The MT conveying roller Replace the MT conveying
ing roller drive parts drive parts are faulty. roller drive parts.
7-402
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire. • MT conveying
motor - MT PWB • MT home
position sensor - MT PWB
5 Replacing the MT convey- The MT conveying motor is Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor faulty. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
erly, replace it.
6 Checking the MT home The MT home position is Reattach the MT home posi- Mainte-
position sensor not properly attached, or it tion sensor, then execute nance
is faulty. U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor Mode List
HP]. If the MT home position
C8800: Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)

1. When turning on the power, there was an error in the main program. 2. The communication error between
the Engine and DF is detected 10 times continuously. 3. The ready signal is not notified from the DF within 6s
after the communication starts.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start Turn the power switch and
up properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
the wire. • DF PWB - Engine
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-403
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C8900: DF backup error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

the wire. • DF PWB - Engine
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C8930: BF unit backup error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

the wire. • BF PWB - DF
PWB
7-404
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C9000: Main program error / DP communication error

Object: Document processor
The document processor cannot be communicated.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware version Upgrade the firmware for the Firmware
between the main unit and main unit and the document Update
the document processor processor to the latest ver-
mismatches. sion.
the wire. • DP PWB - Engine
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C9040: DP lift motor ascend error

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift upper limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift
motor ascend drive. That status was continued 5 times or more.

1 Checking the original lift The original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does
plate attached properly. Or, the not move up and down manu-
fulcrum located at the back ally, repair the position where
side of the machine for the there is stuck. If damaged,
original lift plate is broken. replace it.
PWB • DP lift upper limit sen-
sor - DP PWB
3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If Mainte-
the DP lift motor does not nance
operate properly, replace it. Mode List
7-405
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the DP lift upper The DP lift upper limit sen- Reattach the DP lift upper Mainte-
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor and execute nance
attached, or it is faulty. U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If the sen- Mode List
sor does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
C9050: DP lift motor descend error

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift lower limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift
motor descend drive. (The recovery is 3 times.)

1 Checking the original lift The DP original lift plate is If the original lift plate does
plate not properly attached. not move up and down manu-
ally, repair the position where
PWB • DP lift lower limit sen-
sor - DP PWB
3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If Mainte-
the DP lift motor does not nance
operate properly, replace it. Mode List
4 Checking the DP lift lower The DP lift lower limit sen- Reattach the DP lift lower Mainte-
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor and execute nance
attached, or it is faulty. U244 [Lift L-Limit]. If the sen- Mode List
sor does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-406
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C9060: DP EEPROM error

Object: Document processor
The writing data and the reading data into the EEPROM mismatch.

1 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM on Detaching
erly installed. the DP PWB. and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
DP PWB, then execute U411. and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
C9070: DP - SHD communication error

The communication error between the DP PWB and the DP SHD PWB is detected during the communication.

DP PWB
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-407
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C9080: LED failure detection

For internal count
After 4 blocks of the LED lamps of the DPCIS are lit when turning on the power, the acquired peak value of
some blocks is the reference value or less.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp of the Execute U203 to confirm that Mainte-
DPCIS does not light. the LED lamp of the DPCIS nance
does not light. Go to the next Mode List
step.
DP PWB
4 Executing U411 DP scanning is not prop- Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
erly adjusted. FD(ChartB)] and [DP nance
FD(ChartA)]. Mode List
5 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then Detaching
execute U091 and U411. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB
C9180: DP feedshift motor error

HP
cantbedetectedevenaftertheretryingprocessfortheHPdetectionoftheDPfeedshiftguidefor3timescontinuously.
*HPdetectionoftheDPfeedshiftguide:WhentheDPfeedshiftmotormovestoHP,ifHPcan'tbedetectedevendrivingth
eDPfeedshiftmotorfor1round,theretryisdone.'

1 Removing the original The original accordion jam Remove the original which is
in the guide between the stuck in the guide between
DP reversing tray and the the DP reversing tray and DP
DP registration roller (The registration roller.
position is not visible when
the DP upper cover is
opened)
7-408
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Cleaning the original con- Sticky foreign objects Clean the original conveying
veying guide. adhere to the original con- guide.
veying guide
3 Resetting the main power The DP feedshift motor is Turn the power switch and
not controlled correctly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
4 Checking the DP feedshift The DP feedshift motor is After removing the DP feed-
motor not rotated correctly. Or, shift motor and repair it by
there is an excess load. rotating the drive section
manually, reattach it.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the connector terminal Service
nected properly, or the wire of the wire and reconnect. If Manual -
is faulty. there is no continuity, replace Section 8
the wire. • DP feedshift motor "PWBs"
- DP PWB • DP feedshift
sensor - DP PWB
7 Replacing the DP feed- The DP feedshift motor is Replace the DP feedshift
shift motor faulty. motor.
8 Checking the DP feedshift The DP feedshift sensor is Reattach the DP feedshift
sensor not attached properly or sensor. If not repaired,
faulty. replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
C9500: Image processing PWB error (Scanner)

replace the FFC. • Engine
PWB - Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-409
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C9510: Image processing circuit error (DP)

2 Checking the connection The SATA cable is not Reconnect the connector of Service
properly connected, or it is the following SATA cable. If Manual -
faulty. there is no continuity, replace Section 8
the SATA cable. • DP SHD "PWBs"
PWB - DP relay PWB
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C9540: Backup data error

When multiple parts are replaced at the same time, the internal data is changed and it interferes with the
machine operation. Consequently, the main unit cannot recover.

1 Checking the PWB Multiple PWBs were Recover to the original, if 2 or
replaced at the same time. more of the following related
parts were replaced at the
same time. • Related parts:
Memory, each PWB
2 Checking the unit Multiple units were Be sure not to perform the
replaced at the same time. following works at the same
time when the memory or
each PWB is replaced. •
Replacing the drum unit or
the developer unit
7-410
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) System Error (Fxxxx)
Error code Contents

F000 Communication error between the main unit and CPU
F010 Program read error (SSD)
F020 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
F021 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
F022 System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
F040 Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between
the controller and the print engine)
F041 Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
F050 Engine main program error
F051 Scanner engine program error
F052 Panel engine program error
F14E Error detection at FAX control section
F186 Abnormal detection in the Video control section
F278 Error detection of the secondary power supply
Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel
main PWB is unavailable.

1 Resetting the main power The communication Turn off the power switch and
between the main PWB the main power switch. After
and the operation panel 5 seconds, turn on the main
main PWB is faulty. power switch and the power
switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the below wire, the ter- Service
nected properly. Or, the minal of SATA cable connec- Manual -
wire or the SATA cable is tor and reconnect them. If Section 8
faulty. there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire.
• Main PWB - Operation
panel main PWB
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the Mainte-
faulty. backup RAM data. nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-411
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
F010: Program read error (SSD)

The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory.

1 (When the service call The firmware is not stored Insert the USB memory Firmware
error appears after replac- in the SSD. device containing all released Update
ing the SSD) Replacing the firmware into the main unit,
SSD along the correct pro- and turn the main power on.
cedures
2 Checking the SSD (if lit An SSD out of specifica- Install the SSD matching the
after replacing the SSD) tion is installed. memory capacity specifica-
tion.
switch.
4 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Check if there is an error on Detaching
properly. the terminal of the SSD and and reat-
Clean. After that, reconnect taching the
SSD. SSD
the wire.
• Main PWB - Operation
panel main PWB
Mode List
7 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Execute U026 to back up the Mainte-
SSD data. After that, replace nance
SSD and turn on the power Mode List
while USB memory that con- Detaching
tains the firmware for the and reat-
appropriate model is inserted taching the
to the main unit. SSD
7-412
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

switch.
Mode List
F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for main PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and
properly start up. the main power switch. After
5 seconds, turn on the main
switch.
Mode List
7-413
2SA/2RJ/2NK
F022: System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for DP relay PWB ASIC at start up.

switch.
Mode List
3 Checking the DP relay DP relay PWB is not con- Reattach the DP relay PWB DP-7110
PWB nected or installed prop- and tighten the screw. If not Installa-
erly. repaired, replace the DP tion Guide
relay PWB.
F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error
between the controller and the print engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

between the controller and the main power switch. After
the print engine is faulty. 5 seconds, turn on the main
switch.
the wire.
• Engine PWB (YC43) - Main
PWB (YC63)
• Engine PWB - Low voltage
PWB (YC63)
the latest version.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-414
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
6 Replacing the low voltage Power is not supplied from If there is no output of 5V and Detaching
PWB the low voltage PWB to the 24V from the low voltage and reat-
engine PWB. PWB, replace the low voltage taching the
PWB. Low Volt-
age PWB
F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (Scanner).

between the controller and the main power switch. After
the scanner is faulty. 5 seconds, turn on the main
switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is Reconnect the following wire Service
not connected properly. Or, connectors and reconnect the Manual -
the wire or FFC is faulty. FFC. If there is no continuity, Section 8
replace the wire. If the FFC "PWBs"
terminal section is deformed
or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
• Main PWB - Engine PWB
the latest version.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-415
2SA/2RJ/2NK
F050: Engine main program error

The engine program cannot start up.

2 Resetting the main power The print engine ROM Turn off the power switch and
checksum is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM.
erly attached.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC Clean the terminal of the con- Service
is not connected properly. nectors on the engine PWB, Manual -
replace it. If not resolved, taching the
replace the engine PWB. Engine
PWB
F051: Scanner engine program error

The scanner program cannot start up

2 Resetting the main power The scanner engine RAM Turn off the power switch and
checksum is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
3 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Reinstall SSD. Detaching
properly. and reat-
taching the
SSD
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC Clean the terminal of the con- Service
is not connected properly. nectors on the engine PWB, Manual -
PWB
7-416
2SA/2RJ/2NK
F052: Panel engine program error

The panel program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the panel firmware Firmware
est version. to the latest version. Update
2 Resetting the main power The panel RAM checksum Turn off the power switch and
is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the connector on the Service
nected properly, or the wire operation panel main PWB Manual -
is faulty. and reconnect the connector. Section 8
If there is no continuity, "PWBs"
replace the wire.
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
F14E: Error detection at FAX control section

If the communication between the main PWB and the FAX is interrupted, the signal is resent but it continues
to wait until necessary signal comes in and locks up.

1 Resetting the main power As the power reset was Turn off the power switch and
performed instantly, an the main power switch. After
error occurred in the com- 5 seconds, turn on the main
munication between the power switch and the power
controller and the FAX. switch.
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not con- Clean the following connec- Service
nected properly. tion terminals and reconnect Manual -
the FAX PWB. Section 8
Main PWB - FAX PWB "PWBs"
FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
lation
Guide
7-417
2SA/2RJ/2NK
F186: Abnormal detection in the Video control section

There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

1 Resetting the main power As the power reset was Turn off the power switch and
performed instantly, an the main power switch. After
error occurred in the com- 5 seconds, turn on the main
munication between the power switch and the power
controller and the engine. switch.
2 Checking the connection FFC is not connected Clean the following FFC ter- Service
properly. Or it is faulty. minal of the FFC and recon- Manual -
nect. If the FFC terminal is Section 8
deformed or FFC is short cir- "PWBs"
cuited, replace FFC.
• Engine PWB (YC35) - Main
PWB (YC43)
the latest version.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
F278: Error detection of the secondary power supply

The operation became unstable as the primary power supply temporarily drops off and recovers.

1 Resetting the main power The power reset was per- Turn off the power switch and
formed instantly. the main power switch. After
switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the connector on the Service
nected properly, or the wire low voltage PWB and recon- Manual -
is faulty. nect the connector of the Section 8
wire. If there is no continuity, "PWBs"
replace the wire.
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage Detaching
PWB faulty. PWB. and reat-
taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
7-418
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
*: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on.
Number Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks Content

- It locks on a Welcome screen. 1. Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main boards, * Execution of U024 will vanish user data [Main <=> Panel]
(Even if time passes for a definite period of time and perform an operation check. and the software installed. Main PWB: YC12
in more than * notes, a screen does not 2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required. Panel PWB: YC5
change) (FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed.
4. Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation check.
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
6. It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service headquarters.
* : Only HDD standard model
- It locks on a starting logo (Taskalfa/Ecosys) 1. Check the mounting failure of optional equipment and perform an operation check. * Execution of U024 will vanish user data [Main <=> Engine]
screen. 2. Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Engine<=>Main and the software installed. Main PWB: YC63
(Even if time passes for a definite period of time boards, and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required. Engine PWB: YC35
in more than * notes, a screen does not 3. Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main boards,
change) and perform an operation check. [Main <=> DP I/F PWB]
4. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) * [Main <=> Panel]
5. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. Main PWB: YC12
6. Exchange a Engine board and perform an operation check. Panel PWB: YC5
F000 CF000 will be displayed if * notes progress is 1. Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), and the connection state of a con- [Main <=> Panel]
carried out for a definite period of time with a nector between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC12
Welcome screen. 2. Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an operation check. Panel PWB: YC5
The communication fault between Panel-Main If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation check.
boards 3. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Communication fault between Panel Core-Main (FULL of U024) *
Core Notes 2 4. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed.
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
F12X Abnormality detecting in a Scan control section 1. Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a [Main <=> Engine]
connector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC64
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Engine PWB: YC37
(FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. [Main <=> DP I/F PWB
4. Exchange a DP I/F, Engine and SHD board and perform an operation check.
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. [DP I/F <=> SHD]
6. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. DP I/F PWB: YC2
* Only HDD standard model SHD PWB: YC3
7-419
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F13X Abnormality detecting in a Panel control section 1. Turn the power switch OFF/ON, check if the same system error occurs again. [Main <=> Panel]
2. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. Main PWB: YC12
Panel PWB: YC5
F14X Abnormality detecting in a FAX control part 1. Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a connector, [Main <=> KUIO I/F]
and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC8, YC9
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. KUIO PWB: YC3, YC4
(FULL of U024) *
4. Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
* Notes
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are required.)
5. Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
* Notes
6. Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
8. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
* Note: Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F15X Abnormality detecting in an authentication 1. Check the harness between authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection Authentication device: IC card reader etc. [Main <=> USB I/F]
device control section situation of a connector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC59, YC60
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. USB-HUB PWB: YC3, YC5
(FULL of U024) *
3. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
5. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F17X Abnormality detecting in a printer data control 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
part 2. (FULL of U024) *
F18X Abnormality detecting in a Video control section 1. Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a con- [Main <=> Engine]
nector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC65
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Engine: YC3
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation check.
F1DX Abnormality detecting of the image memory 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Management Department (FULL of U024) *
7-420
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F21X Abnormality detecting in an image-processing 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F22X part (FULL of U024) *
F23X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F24X Abnormality detecting in the system Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * F248 is the abnormalities of a printer pro- [Controller failure]
ment Department (FULL of U024) * cess. The solution method is only the power
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. In recurring by specific printer data, please Off / On.
3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. give me cooperation at acquisition of cap- USBLOG is required for the investiga-
4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * ture data and USBLOG. tion.
F25X Abnormality detecting in a network manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * It may occur according to a visitor's net-
ment department (FULL of U024) * work environment.
4. Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service headquarters.
F26X Abnormality detecting in the system Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F2BX Abnormality detecting in a network control part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F2CX (FULL of U024) *
F2DX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F2EX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2FX 4. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F30X (Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture acquisition)
F31X * Only HDD standard model
F2BX
F33X Abnormality detecting in the Scan Management 1. Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a [Main <=> Engine]
Department connector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC63
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Engine PWB: YC35
(FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. [Engine <=> DP Driver PWB]
4. Exchange a Engine/DP Driver board and perform an operation check. Engine PWB: YC33
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. DP Driver PWB: YC3
7-421
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F34X Abnormality detecting in the Panel Manage- 1. Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a connec- [Main <=> Panel]
ment Department tor, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC12
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Panel PWB: YC5
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
F35X Abnormality detecting in the printing controlling 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Management Department (FULL of U024) *
F37X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. No Flash for FAX data
Department (FULL of U024) * When OFF of the security kit that
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. replaced the HDD to the SSD.
3. Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are required.) * notes
4. Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
* Notes
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F38X Abnormality detecting in the authentication 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
authorized Management Department (FULL of U024) *
F3AX Abnormality detecting in the Entity Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F3BX ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F3CX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F3DX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3EX 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F3FX 5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F40X * Only HDD standard model
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X
F46X Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of a printer pro-
2. the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out cess.
(Depending on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) In recurring by specific printer data, please
* Only HDD standard model give me cooperation at acquisition of cap-
ture data and USBLOG.
7-422
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F47X Abnormality detecting of an image editing pro- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F48X cessing part (FULL of U024) *
F49X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F4AX Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F4CX (FULL of U024) *
F4DX Abnormality detecting in the Entity Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F4FX Abnormality detecting in the JOB Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur-
Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition.
F50X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur- No Flash for FAX data
Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give When OFF of the security kit that
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition. replaced the HDD to the SSD.
F51X Abnormality detecting in a JOB execution part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur-
F52X (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give
F53X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition.
F55X 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F56X 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F57X 5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F58X Abnormality detecting in the various-services 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log at the time of occur- F5DX (especially if X is 9,A,B,C or D)
F59X Management Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give occurs when processing FAX reception
F5AX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition. and URDS related matter.
F5BX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. When occurred, check data sent from
F5CX 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * PC.
F5DX 5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F5EX * Only HDD standard model
7-423
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F5FX Abnormality detecting in a service execution 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur-
part (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give
F62X Abnormality detecting in a service execution 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log at the time of occur- USB log at the time of occurrence is
part (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give required for the analysis.
F63X Abnormality detecting in a device control sec- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
tion (FULL of U024) *
F68X Abnormality detecting in a storage device con- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * F684 is the overwrite error at the time of Each of the SSD / HDD to check the
trol section (FULL of U024) * an HDD security kit. operation after initializing. (U024 of SSD
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. / FULL, U024 of HDD / FULL)
F69X Abnormality detecting in a HyPAS-E part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F6AX (FULL of U024) *
F6BX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F6CX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
7-424
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-4 FAX Related Errors

(1) FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section
(10) The FAX cannot be sent
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1) The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job ID Card
while the card authentica- Account] > [ID Card Settings] Authenti-
tion kit is not installed. > [Key Login] via the System cation Set-
Menu. tings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
9)
(1-2) C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

power switch.
7-425
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update
lation
Guide
(1-3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB,
any normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the FAX Instal-
PWB is installed. applicable model. lation
Guide
Update
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
(1-4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Detaching
age) already used in other used once, replace with the and reat-
unit is installed. correct SSD. taching the
SSD
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Mainte-
age) already used in other used once, execute U671 nance
unit is reused without exe- [FAX Data CLEAR]. Mode List
cuting U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Be sure to install the SSD to Detaching
age) is not properly the connector on the main and reat-
installed. PWB. taching the
SSD
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Replace with the new SSD. Detaching
age) is faulty. and reat-
taching the
SSD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-426
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Update
2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not con- Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main power switch. After lation
power switch.
Mode List
lation
Guide
(1-6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data
is transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch off . lation
After 5s passes, reattach the Guide
FAX PWB and turn the main
switch on.
Mode List
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
lation
Guide
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD Execute U024 [SSD Format]. Mainte-
is faulty. nance
Mode List
7-427
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-7) C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
incorrect FAX. nance
Mode List
power switch.
3 Reconnecting the FAX The FAX PWB is not con- Reinstall FAX PWB to Main FAX Instal-
PWB nected properly. PWB. lation
Guide
Update
lation
Guide
(1-8) C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
(1-9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware Firmware
and the FAX firmware to the Update
latest version.
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not con- Check the connection FAX Instal-
nected properly. between the main PWB and lation
the FAX PWB, and reconnect Guide
it if necessary.
lation
Guide
7-428
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-10) The FAX cannot be sent

1 Checking the connection The modular cable discon- Reconnect the modular
of the modular cable nects. cable.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit
switching device or the like to the telephone line.
is connected to the tele-
phone line, it is affected.
3 Changing the setting The line settings are incor- Correct the line settings.
rect. (Reduce the transmission
speed, etc.)
4 Checking the status at the The destination unit is Wait a while and then redial
destination unit. busy. the number if busy tones are
heard.
5 Checking the status at the The modular cable is dis- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit. connected in the destina- to reconnect the modular ation
tion unit if the destination cable. Guide
unit does not receive the
calling.
6 Checking the setting at the The manual reception is Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
destination unit set in the destination unit if change the reception set- ation
the destination unit does tings. Guide
not receive the calling.
7 Changing the sending con- When transmitting the data Input a pause at the last of FAX Oper-
tent to the other country, the the destination FAX number. ation
communication line is Guide
automatically cut.
(1-11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished

(1-12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is

transmitted as the A4 size data

1 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] FAX Oper-
destination unit is A4 / Let- according to the receivable ation
ter. size at the Address book reg- Guide
istration display > [i-FAX] >
[Paper size].
7-429
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select the condition of the FAX Oper-
destination unit is A4 / Let- destination unit when trans- ation
ter. mitting the data, choose [B4] Guide
or [A3/Ledger] according to
the receivable sizes.
7-430
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Communication Errors

Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error
code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-
digit number)
Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits
small classification of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code

General classification of error code
Error code indication
Figure 7-4
7-431
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted num-
ber. Or, sub address-based bulletin board transmission request was received but inter-
rupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub
address password was not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address
password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not pres-
ent in the sub address box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address
password was not registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match
in the restricted transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number
was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified
encryption box was not registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section problem
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM
signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after send-
ing CNC signal. (between own machines)
ing CTC signal. (ECM)
ing EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
ing RR signal. (ECM)
7-432
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

U01028/E01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and
communication speed at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR
signal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed com-
monly used with the destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
7-433
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed com-
monly used with the destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box
specified by the destination unit.
U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mis-
match in permitted ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based bulletin
board reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID or tele-
phone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destina-
tion unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password
was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mis-
match in the specified sub address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had
no sub address bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub
address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was
not registered in the destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address
transmission was executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti-
nation unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not
match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted
FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination
unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Conse-
quently, the transmission was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not
match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the own unit did not return its phone num-
ber.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
7-434
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
can receive the data and ation
resend the data if there is no Guide
particular problem.
U00100/E00100
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted by a press of the
stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted Suspend resending from the FAX Oper-
by a press of the [Stop] destination unit or request the ation
key. destination unit to resend the Guide
data.
U00300/E00300
1 Request to the destination Recording paper on the Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit destination unit has run out to set the recording papers. ation
during transmission. Guide
U00430/E00430
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bul- Register a valid permitted FAX Oper-
number letin board transmission number ation
were requested, but the Guide
communication was inter-
rupted because the permit-
ted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting
unit.)
7-435
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00431/E00431
1 Request to the destination An sub address bulletin Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit board transmission was password in the destination ation
interrupted because the unit. Guide
specified sub address
password was not regis-
tered.
U00432/E00432
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Send by using correct the sub FAX Oper-
password board transmission was address password. ation
interrupted because the Guide
sub address password did
not match.
U00433/E00433
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Set data in the sub address FAX Oper-
box board transmission box. ation
request was received but Guide
data was not present in the
sub address box.
U00440/E00440
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address FAX Oper-
password reception was interrupted password. ation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
1 Checking the permitted The reception was inter- Register the permitted num- FAX Oper-
number rupted because the permit- ber to be consistent at own ation
ted ID and FAX number did machine side. Guide
not match in the restricted
transmission (password
check transmission) in the
destination unit.
7-436
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00460/E00460
1 Checking the encryption The encryption reception Register an encrypted box FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because number. ation
the specified encryption Guide
box number was not regis-
tered.
U00462/E00462
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key. FAX Oper-
key interrupted because the ation
encryption key for the Guide
specified encryption box
was not registered.
U00601/E00601
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and
resend.
2 Checking the original The original length Check if the original length
exceeds the maximum does not exceed 1.6 meter
allowed. and resend.
U00613/E00613
1 Checking the service call Image writing section error Check the service call error Event Log
error record record and perform the cor- Report
rective actions. Output
7-437
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00656/E00656
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted because there was
an error in the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was inter- Turn off the power switch and
rupted because there was pull out the power plug. After
an error in the modem. passing 5s, reattach the FAX
PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
changed. FAX. nance
Mode List
lation
Guide
U00690/E00690
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and
pull out the power plug. After
passing 5s, reinsert the
power plug and turn on the
power switch.
2 Measures for the system System error in the main Perform the corrective System
error unit actions for the system error in Error List
the main unit.
U00800/E00800
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not prop- Mainte-
speed occurred because of erly sent and resending does nance
reception of a RTN or PIN not solve it, reduce transmit Mode List
signal. start speed and resend the
data.
7-438
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00811/E00811
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not prop- Mainte-
remained after retry of erly sent and resending does nance
transmission in the ECM not solve it, reduce transmit Mode List
mode. start speed and resend the
data.
U00900/E00900
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a
transmitted because of a page not transmitted prop-
page reception error. erly.
U01000/E01000
1 Resending An FTT signal was Resend.
received for a set number
of times after TCF signal
transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was
received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400
bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-439
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01001/E01001
1 Resending Function as indicated by Resend.
DIS signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
data.
U01016/E01016
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since Resend.
MBF signal is received but
DIS signal is not after
sending EOM signal.
data.
U01019/E01019
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
data.
7-440
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01020/E01020
after sending CTC signal.
(ECM)
data.
U01021/E01021
after sending EOR•Q sig-
nal. (ECM)
data.
U01022/E01022
after sending RR signal.
(ECM)
data.
7-441
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01028/E01028
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected Resend.
when sending in ECM
(ECM)
data.
U01052/E01052
1 Resending DCN signal is received Resend.
after sending RR signal
(ECM)
data.
U01080/E01080
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
data.
7-442
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01092/E01092
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol
speed and communication
speed at V.34 sending.
data.
U01093/E01093
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection Mainte-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mm Level]. nance
received signal is attenu- (Initial setting: -43dBm) Mode List
ated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
received signal is attenu- RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01094/E01094
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send Resend.
retrial time is exceeded at
phase B during transmis-
sion.
data.
7-443
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01096/E01096
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid com- Resend.
mand is received at phase
D during transmission.
data.
U01097/E01097
1 Resending The preset number of com- Resend.
mand retransfers was
exceeded after transmis-
sion of an RR signal or no
response.
data.
U01100/E01100
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request the destination unit
signal is not consistent to resend the data.
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-444
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01101/E01101
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request the destination unit
signal except communica- to resend the data.
tion type is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
Speed]. Mode List
U01102/E01102
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is Request the destination unit
received while own to resend the data.
machine has no transmis-
sion data.
Speed]. Mode List
U01110/E01110
1 Request for resending No response is received Request the destination unit
after sending DIS signal. to resend the data.
Speed]. Mode List
U01111/E01111
after sending DTC (NSC) to resend the data.
signal.
Speed]. Mode List
7-445
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01113/E01113
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection Mainte-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mm Level]. nance
received signal is attenu- (Initial setting: -43dBm) Mode List
ated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
received signal is attenu- RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01125/E01125
after sending CNS signal. to resend the data.
(between own machine)
Speed]. Mode List
U01129/E01129
1 Request for resending No response after trans- Request the destination unit
mitting an SPA signal. to resend the data.
(Short protocol)
Speed]. Mode List
U01141/E01141
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request the destination unit
after sending DTC signal. to resend the data.
Speed]. Mode List
7-446
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01143/E01143
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
after sending FTT signal. equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
0dBm)
U01155/E01155
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request the destination unit
after sending SPA signal. to resend the data.
(simplified protocol)
Speed]. Mode List
U01160/E01160
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request the destination unit
time per line is exceeded to resend the data.
while receiving message.
Speed]. Mode List
U01162/E01162
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request the destination unit
time per line is exceeded to resend the data.
while receiving message.
Speed]. Mode List
7-447
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01191/E01191
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request the destination unit
with error during image to resend the data.
data receipt sequence at
V.34.
Speed]. Mode List
U01193/E01193
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal Extend T2 time-out time in Mainte-
or invalid command is U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. nance
received at phase C/D dur- (Change from the initial set- Mode List
ing reception. ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures Mainte-
for echoes at the reception in nance
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set- Mode List
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting Mainte-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. nance
Mode List
U01194/E01194
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request the destination unit
phase B during reception. to resend the data.
Speed]. Mode List
7-448
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01195/E01195
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in Mainte-
phase C during reception. U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. nance
(Change from the initial set- Mode List
ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures Mainte-
for echoes at the reception in nance
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set- Mode List
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting Mainte-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. nance
Mode List
U01196/E01196
1 Resending Error line control overflow Resend.
and decoding error
occurred in messages dur-
ing reception.
Speed]. Mode List
U01400/E01400
1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" Delete "#" from the registered FAX Oper-
number on the phone numbers of numbers if "#" exists in ation
the destination unit, so it is advance of "x" on the phone Guide
processed as the invalid numbers of the destination
dial line. unit.
U01500/E01500
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed the poor condition. reduce the transmit start nance
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of Mainte-
speed condition is poor and an the transmit start speed by nance
error frequently occurs. executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-449
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01600/E01600
1 Request to the destination The communication line is Request the destination unit
unit the poor condition. to resend the data after
reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit Mainte-
timing condition is poor and an to resend the data after low- nance
error frequently occurs. ering the reception start Mode List
speed.
U01700/E01700
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
data.
U01720/E01720
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4
(replacing the modem
parameter).
data.
7-450
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01721/E01721
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there
is no communication
speed commonly used
with the destination unit.
data.
U01800/E01800
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 2 (line to resend the data after
probing). reducing the transmit start
speed.
Speed]. Mode List
U01810/E01810
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
Speed]. Mode List
U01820/E01820
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
Speed]. Mode List
7-451
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01821/E01821
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit
interrupted because there to resend the data after
is no communication reducing the transmit start
speed commonly used speed.
with the destination unit.
Speed]. Mode List
U03000/E03000
1 Request to the destination No document was present Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit in the destination unit to set the originals. ation
when polling reception Guide
started.
U03200/E03200
1 Request to the destination There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit address box in the main to store the original data in ation
unit that are specified from the sub address box. Guide
the destination unit.
U03300/E03300
1 Request to the destination The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit number registered in the to register the own ID and the ation
destination unit are incor- own FAX number as the per- Guide
rect. mitted ID and the permitted
FAX number.
U03400/E03400
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
7-452
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U03500/E03500
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03600/E03600
1 Resending Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after input- FAX Oper-
reception was interrupted ting the sub address pass- ation
because the specified sub word registered in the Guide
address password did not destination unit.
match.
U03700/E03700
1 Checking the destination Destination machine has Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit no sub address bulletin has a sub address bulletin ation
board communication board communication func- Guide
function or no originals are tion. If available, request the
stored in any original deliv- destination unit to save the
ery box (sub address box). original data in the sub
address box.
U04000/E04000
1 Request to the destination The original was transmit- Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit ted to the sub address box, password in the destination ation
but the specified box was unit. Guide
not registered in the desti-
nation unit that is our own
model.
2 Checking the sub address The original was transmit- Match the sub address in the FAX Oper-
of the FAX transmission ted to the sub address box FAX forward condition ation
condition in the destination unit that Guide
is our own model, but the
sub address of the trans-
mission condition did not
match.
7-453
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U04100/E04100
1 Resending The destination unit had no Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
sub address reception to the reception function in ation
capability while the sub the destination unit. Guide
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
1 Request to the destination In encrypted transmission, Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit the specified encryption to register the encrypted box. ation
box was not registered in Guide
the destination unit.
U04300/E04300
1 Resending The encryption transmis- Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
sion was carried out, but to the reception function in ation
there is no encryption func- the destination unit. Guide
tion at the other machine.
U04400/E04400
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
7-454
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U05100/E05100
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the FAX Oper-
number interrupted because the authorization number that ation
permitted ID and FAX has been registered. Guide
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check transmis-
sion).
U05200/E05200
1 Checking the settings The number does not Change the restricted recep- FAX Oper-
match a permitted FAX tion settings. ation
number / ID, or it matches Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Request to the destination The own telephone num- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit ber is not informed from to register the own telephone ation
the destination unit. number. Guide
U05300/E05300
1 Request to the destination The number does not Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
unit match a permitted FAX change the restricted recep- ation
number / ID, or it matches tion settings. Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Request to the destination The main unit did not Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit acknowledge its phone to register the own telephone ation
number in question . number. Guide
U14000/E14000
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX Print documents stored in
box was interrupted due to memory and make room in
memory overflow in its memory. Or stop receiving in
unit. the FAX box.
7-455
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U14100/E14100
1 Request to the destination Transmission was inter- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit rupted due to the memory to release memory. ation
overflow in the destination Guide
unit when transmitting into
the sub address box.
U19000/E19000
1 Checking the memory The reception was inter- Release memory by printing
rupted due to the memory originals stored in memory.
overflow in the main unit
during memory reception.
U19100/E19100
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
7-456
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U19300/E19300
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
changed. FAX. nance
Mode List
lation
Guide
7-457
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-5 Send Related Errors

(1) Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security soft-
ware settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear
(3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or
the security software settings

1 Changing the setting The incorrect port number Change the SMB port num- SMB
has been set. ber from "139" to "445". Transmis-
sion Set-
tings
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear

1 Changing the setting The Windows Fire Wall is Open [Control panel] > [Sys-
not properly set. (Win- tem and Security] > Win-
dows Vista / 7 / 8) dows firewall] and select
[Permit the program or func-
tion through Windows fire-
wall].Check [Share files and
printers] and the check box
on the right as well.
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent

1 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not Press [Send] key or [FAX] Continu-
set to [On]. key, and select [On] in ous Scan
[Advanced setup] > [Continu- (Opera-
ous scan]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
7-458
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not Select [On] at [Functions] > Continu-
set to [On]. [Continuous scan] ous Scan
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
7-459
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes)

Scan to PC (SMB/FTP/Email) transmission error codes, contents, checkpoints and remedies are
described.
The error code not listed here may be the software failure.
Turn the power switch off then on, and execute again.
(2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 SMTP protocol is invalid.
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Changing the setting SMTP / POP3 server Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
name is incorrect. server name at [Function Set- Center RX
tings] > [E-mail] via the com- Operation
mand center. Guide
2 Changing the setting The network settings are Correct the settings in the Command
incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Command Center. Operation
Guide
3 Changing the setting The network settings that Correct the network settings System /
the main unit is connected that the main unit is con- Network
to are incorrect. nected to. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-460
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Changing the setting The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
password is incorrect. user name or password at Center RX
[Function Settings] > [E-mail] Operation
via the command center. Guide
2 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Command
settings are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Changing the setting Destination address Correct the settings in the Command
domain is restricted and Network Settings via the Center RX
transmission is denied. Command Center. Operation
Guide

SMTP protocol is invalid.

1 Checking the settings SMTP protocol is invalid. Correct the protocol in the Command
Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

The sender address is not set.

1 Changing the setting The sender address is not Correct the protocol in the Command
set. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

mand center. Guide
7-461
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Connecting the LAN cable The LAN cable is not con- Connect the LAN cable to the
nected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Changing the setting The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
rect. number.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

mand center. Guide
2 Changing the setting The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
rect. number.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide
7-462
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The server cannot establish communication.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
server name name is incorrect. server name at [Function Set- Center RX
mand center. Guide
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
port No. rect. number.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Command
Guide
4 Checking the settings The network settings that Correct the network settings System /
tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Command
Guide

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Guide
7-463
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tion Guide
- Section
8)

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

Guide

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Changing the setting The SMTP server settings Set the correct SMTP Command
are incorrect. Authentication Protocol at Center RX
[Function Settings] > [E-mail] Operation
via the command center. Guide
7-464
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Changing the setting The self-signed certificate Correct the certificates in the Command
of the device is incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
2 Changing the setting The service certificate set- Correct the certificates in the Command
tings are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
3 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 settings Correct the protocol in the Command
are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide
7-465
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a specific period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the FTP host The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name Command
name incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-466
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Correcting the user name The user name or the Correct the user name and
or the password password is incorrect. the password.
2 Changing the setting FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Command
Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting FTP protocol is not Correct the protocol in the Command
enabled. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Command
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Command
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
2 Changing the setting The FTP server settings Correct the protocol in the Command
Guide
7-467
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

Operation
Guide
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not con- Connect the LAN cable to the
nected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Correcting the FTP port The port number is incor- Correct the FTP port number.
no. rect.
Guide
Guide

Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Operation
Guide
no. rect.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide
7-468
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The server cannot establish communication.

Operation
Guide
no. rect.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Correcting the destination The destination folder Set the correct destination
folder name name is incorrect. folder.
Guide
7-469
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

No response from the server during a specific period of time.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-470
2SA/2RJ/2NK

FTP server responded with an error.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide
7-471
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a specific period of time.
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the user name The user name or the Correct the user name and
and the password password is incorrect. the password.
Guide
3 Changing the setting The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings
destination host / folder are of the destination host /
incorrect. folder.
7-472
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the destination The invalid character is Correct the destination host
host name, destination included. name, folder name or the file
folder name and the file name if the invalid characters
name are included.
2 Correcting the destination The destination folder Revise the destination folder
folder name and the file name or the file name is and file name according to
name incorrect. the naming rules.
3 Changing the setting of the The destination host or the Revise the destination host
destination host and folder. destination folder is not set and destination folder prop-
properly. erly.

SMB protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the Command
protocol are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
nected to the main unit in main unit.
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
3 Correcting the SMB port The port number is incor- Correct the SMB port num- SMB
no. rect. ber. Transmis-
sion Set-
tings
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-473
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Writing scanned data has failed.

1 Correcting the sending file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file
name incorrect. name.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

No response from the host during a specific period of time.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
nected to the main unit in main unit.
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
7-474
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-6 Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) The paper direction is incorrect
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(4) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined
in the printer driver and the main unit are mis-
matched.
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the The main unit locks up.
printer standby message is indicated
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the The main unit locks up.
main unit startup error Processing/Memory lamp
is turned on
(10) Print stops after printing several pages and The image processing fails due to the insuffi-
locks up Processing and Memory lamps on cient memory, so the main unit locks up.
operation panel are lit
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network The network has some troubles or the network
factor (1) setting is incorrect.
(12) Print output is unavailable due to the network The cable between the main unit and the PC is
factor (2) not properly connected.
(13) Print output is unavailable due to the network The access point (router or HUB) in the network
factor (3) does not operate properly.
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network The router is faulty, or the router settings are
factor (4) incorrect.
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network "Offline" appears and the print function is
factor (5) unavailable.
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network Only 1 PC cantprintoutofallPCsinstalled.Thereis-
factor (6) noerrorindicationandprintjobwillbeheldifprintinstr
uctionisrequested.'
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network The main unit IP address is changed.
factor (7)
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver [Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job
setting (1) cantbeperformedduetotheerror.(Can'tprint)'
(19) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver [Preparing the printer] is displayed on the opera-
setting (2) tion panel. The printing document is not output
and the job is held.
(20) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver A PC does not recognize the main unit.
setting (3)
7-475
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver PC operation does not stabilize.
setting (4)
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver Check if the issue occurs when printing the data
setting (5) from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC.
Then, print out the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver The incorrect printer driver was selected.
setting (6)
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it
setting (7) remains when reinstalling it
(25) The printed image is partly missing The image data processing with a certain appli-
cation (Excel, PDF) is faulty.
(26) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears The paper size is not detected properly.
Content of Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears

1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded Load the paper of the paper Printer
paper did not match the size defined at "Paper size" in Driver
paper size set in the printer the [Basic] tab in the print set- Operation
properties. tings at the PC to the cas- Guide
sette.
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the
operation panel and the operation panel and the one
one set for the paper set for the paper source do
source do not match. not match
guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
4 Checking the actuator and The actuator or the spring Reattach the actuator and the
the spring for paper sensor does not spring for the paper sensor. If
operate properly. not repaired, replace them.
5 Checking the situation The print data generated Check if the print data not
by a certain application generated by a certain appli-
(Word) is faulty. cation (Word) is output prop-
erly. And then, change the
application setting if neces-
sary.
6 Changing the setting Paper orientation is not Check the page orientation
properly set in the print with preview before printing
page setting on a certain and reset the page orienta-
application (Word). tion at the print setting on a
certain application (Word).
7-476
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size Printer
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and Driver
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray Operation
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for Guide
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media
type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in
the printer properties at the
PC.
8 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does Select "MP tray" at [Source] Printer
not match between the in the [Basic] tab in the print Driver
main unit and printer driver settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(2) The paper direction is incorrect

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn the
power switch and the main
power switch off. After 5s
passes, turn the main power
switch and the power switch
on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from
resident. Excel and Word is normal,
print the font list to check if a
font supported to special data
is built in.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font
setting) is unselected. (default setting) and print the
data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
7-477
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong

1 Changing the setting The Auto Cassette Change the Auto cassette Printer
Change is [On]. change setting to [OFF] if (Opera-
paper is not available in the tion Guide
selected cassette, paper will - Section
not be fed. ([System Menu/ 8)
Counter] > [Printer] > [Auto
Cassette Change] > [OFF])
2 Changing the setting "Media type" in the [Basic] Check the media type set on Printer
tab in the print settings at the main unit cassette and Driver
the PC differs from the MP tray and set the media Operation
media type of the cassette type for the main unit in the Guide
that is set in the main unit. [Basic] tab in the print set-
tings at the PC.
3 Changing the setting The same media type is Set different media types Cassette /
set between the main unit between the main unit cas- MP Tray
cassette and MP tray sette and MP tray Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
(4) Garbled characters

The printer driver was not properly installed.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn the
power switch and the main
power switch off. After 5s
passes, turn the main power
on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from
resident. Excel and Word is normal,
print the font list to check if a
font for special data is resi-
dent.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font
setting) is unselected. (default setting) and print the
data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
Operation
Guide
7-478
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched.

1 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size Printer
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and Driver
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray Operation
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for Guide
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media
type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in
the printer properties at the
PC.
2 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does Select "MP tray" at [Source] Printer
not match between the in the [Basic] tab in the print Driver
main unit and printer driver settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

1 Deleting the job The generated data is Delete the print job spooled in
faulty. the PC and print it out again.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated
on the printer properties
The main unit is not ready to print

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready Check if the error appears on
to print the operation panel or the
error lamp blinks. Then if
there is, cancel it.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready Resolve the problem at the
to print main unit if any
7-479
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is
indicated
The main unit locks up.

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready After confirming no error is
to print indicated on the main unit-
soperationpanel,cancelallPC-
printjobs.Then,turnthepowers
witchandthemainpowerswi-
tchoff.After5spasses,turnthe-
mainpowerswitchandthepow
erswitchon.'
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on
The main unit locks up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
est version. latest version. Update
2 Changing the setting The sleep level is not set to Turn the power switch and Date/
Quick Recovery mode. the main power switch off . Timer/
After 5s passes, turn on the Energy
main power switch and the Saver
power switch. Then, set the (Opera-
sleep level to "Quick Recov- tion Guide
ery". - Section
8)
(10)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up Processing and Memory
lamps on operation panel are lit
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.

1 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs
certain PC is faulty. when printing the data from
all PCs in the network or from
a certain PC. Then, print out
the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
2 Checking the situation The application is not prop- Check if a problem occurring
erly set. from a certain application and
file (big data like CAD data)
and change application set-
ting and refer to application-
shelp.'
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
7-480
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and Checking
reprint in the main unit job Job & Job
status Operation
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
7)
5 Memory allocation Memory allocation is insuf- If the processing memory at Mainte-
ficient. the main unit is not enough, nance
set to allocate the memory at Mode List
U340 [Adj Memory].
6 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the
buttons are not active, turn
main power switch off. After
switch on.
(11)Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)

The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check if the memory LED on Checking
work. the operation panel of the Job & Job
main unit is blinking after Operation
printing out from the PC. If (Opera-
not blinking, cancel the pro- tion Guide
cessing job and reprint out. - Section
7)
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- When the printing error
work. appears on the operation
panel or the PC screen, clear
the error caused by the toner
or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the main unit IP System /
work. Address in the status page, Network
etc. and then check if Com- (Opera-
mand Center can be opened tion Guide
using that IP Address. If not, - Section
reconfigure the network 8)
again.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the internet connec-
work. tion and restore the network
connection if necessary
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the cable and reset
work. the router or HUB.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit Restart the PC or the main
locks up. unit, and print out again.
7-481
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

1 Checking the cable The cable between the Check the cable connection
main unit and the PC is not between the main unit and
properly connected. the PC.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart the main unit and
does not properly start up. then restart the PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit
to the PC with the cross cable
and then check if the same
data can be printed out.

The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

1 Restarting up The router or the HUB Check if the link lamp of the
does not properly activate. router or hub is lit and restart
it.
2 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off,
cable properly connected. once disconnect the Ether-
net cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link
lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Restarting up The router, HUB, PC or the In case of no connection
main unit do not start up while the link lamp is lit,
properly. restart the router or hub and
then restart up the PC and
the main unit.

The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.

1 Changing the setting The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP Printer
erly set. Address indicated in the sta- Driver
tus page is the same as the Operation
IP Address in the [Port] tab of Guide
[Printer Properties] at the PC.
If not, correct the IP address
at the PC
7-482
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting The printer host name is Check the printer host name
not properly set. by printing out the status
report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the
printer host name at the [Port]
tab in the printer properties at
a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

"Offline" appears and the print function is unavailable.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the internet connec-
work. tion and restore the network
connection if necessary
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When "Offline" appears on
the printer driver, check if it is
used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
3 Changing the setting The application is not prop- Check if the other Excel /
erly set. Word data can be output and
change the setting of the
application.
4 Changing the setting The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP Printer
erly set. Address indicated in the sta- Driver
at the PC
5 Restarting up The IP address is not prop- Check if communication via System /
erly set. command center or PING is Network
available with IP address set (Opera-
up. Set up IP address again tion Guide
and restart the main unit if - Section
necessary. 8)
6 Restarting up The port settings in the Remove the checks at the
printer properties at the PC dual-directional support and
are incorrect. the SNMP status in the [Port]
tab of the printer properties in
a PC. Then, restart up the
main unit and the PC.
7 Restarting up The main unit does not After the printer is ready,
start up properly. check if the test sheet can be
output and restart the main
unit.
7-483
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: PC OS: Windows 7 Print file: Test page Connecting method: Wireless
LAN
Only 1 PC cantprintoutofallPCsin-
stalled.Thereisnoerrorindicationandprintjobwillbeheldifprintinstructionisrequested.'

1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart up the main unit or
does not properly start up. the PC.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection
connected. (Check if the network con-
nection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the ID address is System /
erly set. properly set, and correct it if Network
incorrect. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check if access via com- Command
work. mand center or PING is avail- Center RX
able and then check the hub Operation
or router. Guide
5 Changing the setting The printer port IP Correct the IP address and Printer
address, the SNMP of the remove the checks at the Driver
printer driver, or the bi- SNMP status and the dual- Operation
directional support is not directional support in the Guide
properly set. [Port] tab of the printer prop-
erties at a PC. Then, restart
up the main unit and the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the secu- Check if the printer is avail-
software or setting the rity software causes the able by uninstalling the secu-
exception phenomenon. rity software. Or, set the
exception setting.

The main unit IP address is changed.

1 Restarting up There is trouble in the net- Check if a problem occurs
work. with output from all PCs on
the network and restart up
hub or router.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check if there is problem with
connected. the cable connection on the
network.
7-484
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Restarting up The main unit does not If the operation panel or the
start up properly. buttons are not active, turn
main power switch off. After
switch on.
4 Changing the setting IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP Printer
Address indicated in the sta- Driver
at the PC
5 Changing the setting The static IP Address is Set the static IP Address in System /
not set in the System the System Menu Network
Menu (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
(18)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)
LAN
[Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job cantbeperformedduetotheerror.(Can'tprint)'

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains Printer
remaining. in the printer driver and Driver
delete the remaining. Operation
Guide
LAN
[Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The printing document is not output and the job is
held.

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains Printer
remaining. in the printer driver and Driver
delete the remaining. Operation
Guide
7-485
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A PC does not recognize the main unit.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon of
properly set. PC is [Ready]. (Right click the
printer icon and execute the
trouble shooting)
2 Installing the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
Operation
Guide
3 Restarting up The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is not the Update the printer driver. Printer
latest version. Driver
Operation
Guide
PC operation does not stabilize.

1 Restarting up The printer driver is not Restart PC. (In case if many
properly set. application software are run-
ning or the free space of the
PC memory /HDD is low)
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print
out the data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the IP Address indi-
erly set. cated in the main unit status
report and system menu is
same as the IP address in the
port setting of [Printer Proper-
ties] at the PC. If not, correct
the IP address at the port set-
ting
7-486
2SA/2RJ/2NK
The incorrect printer driver was selected.

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver Select the correct printer
is selected. driver. If it is not in the PC,
install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.
Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it remains when reinstalling it

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in Delete all print jobs spooling Printer
the spool inside the printer inside the printer driver. Driver
driver. Operation
Guide
2 Uninstalling the printer There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer
driver driver. driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer
icon and select [Print resum-
ing]. Then, check the ready
port.
4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects
address is not properly set. to a local network, check the
host name and the IP
address on the status report
of the main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/ There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address
IP port Address in the Standard in Standard TCP/IP port and
TCP/IP Port print Test Page
(25)The printed image is partly missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF) is faulty.

1 Checking the situation The image data process- When the phenomenon
ing with a certain applica- occurs with a certain file only,
tion (Excel, PDF) is faulty. check if there is an abnormal-
ity in the image data.
2 Checking the situation The data processing with a Check if the image does not
certain application (Excel, drop out on the print preview,
PDF) is faulty. and refer to the Help in the
application if necessary.
3 Changing the setting The PDL settings is incor- Select "GDI compatible Printer
rect. mode" at [PDL settings] in the Driver
print settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
7-487
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
(26)"Paper Mismatch Error" appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

1 Changing the setting The paper size for the MP Adjust the MP tray paper size
tray is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper The locations of the MP Reset the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to match the paper
match the paper size. size.
3 Checking the MP tray The MP tray is not pulled Pull out the MP tray to extend
out. it if the A3 size paper is not
detected.
4 Changing the setting The paper size is not set Register the custom size in Cassette /
properly in the System [MP Tray Setting] in the Sys- MP Tray
Menu. tem Menu > [Paper Size] > Settings
[Size Entry]. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Changing the setting Paper Mismatch Error is Set [Ignore] at [Common Set- Error Han-
set to [Ignore]. tings] > [Error Handlings] > dlings
[Paper Mismatch Error] via (Opera-
the System Menu. tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-488
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) "Check the document processor" appears
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting the
cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting the
cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
(10) When turning on the power, the display [Network device is running] does not disappear
Content of Error Messages

(1) "Check the document processor" appears
Closing of the document processor cannot be detected.

1 Executing U244 The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the Mainte-
sensor does not operate DP opening/closing sensor nance
properly. does not operate properly, Mode List
replace it.
the wire.
• DP opening/closing sensor -
DP PWB
• DP PWB - Engine PWB
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Check the output of the DP
closing sensor signal sensor signal output is opening/closing sensor signal
faulty. on the DP PWB.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
latest version. Update
7-489
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7 DP replacement The document processor Replace the document pro- Detaching
is faulty. cessor. and reat-
taching the
DP
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after
removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the
main unit

1 Reinserting the primary The primary paper feed Pull the primary paper feed Detaching
paper feed unit unit is not inserted com- unit out, then reinsert it com- and reat-
pletely. pletely. taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not rise Reattach the lift plate. If it is
up. deformed, replace it.
the wire.
• Lift motor 1, 2 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the lift motor The lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve Mainte-
even U906 (Reset disable nance
function) is executed, replace Mode List
the lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lift Motor
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-490
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after
removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the
main unit

1 Reinserting the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Pull out the PF primary feed Detaching
paper feed unit unit is not inserted com- unit and reinsert it com- and reat-
pletely. pletely. taching the
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The PF lift plate does not Reattach the PF lift plate. If it
rise up. is deformed, replace it.
the wire.
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve Mainte-
even U906 (Reset disable nance
function) is executed, replace Mode List
the PF lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PF lift
motor
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-491
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover

1 Reattaching the front cover The front cover does not Reattach the front cover.
turn the front cover sensor
on due to the fitting failure.
the wire.
• Front cover sensor - Feed
image PWB
• Feed image PWB - Engine
PWB
3 Replacing the front cover The front cover sensor is Replace the front cover sen-
sensor faulty. sor.
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover

1 Checking the right cover The covers are not fitted. When the right cover switch
switch does not turn on even if clos-
ing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover, but
check the covers if the right
cover switch turns on by
pushing directly. If the cover
is not aligned with the other
exterior covers, reattach it.
When the switch does not
always turn on, go to the next
step.
the wire.
• Right cover switch - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is Replace the right cover
switch faulty. switch.
7-492
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray

the wire.
• MP paper sensor - Relay
connector
• Relay connector - Feed
- Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the
MP paper sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is Reattach the MP paper sen-
sensor not properly attached or it sor, and replace it if it is not
is faulty. fixed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed

1 Checking the operation (Separate the factor) If the waste toner box does
when opening/closing the not rotate when opening/clos-
waste toner box cover. ing the waste toner box
cover, there might be the fac-
tor in the weight detection
actuator. Therefore, move to
the next step (Step 2). If the
waste toner box rotates,
there might be the factor in
the waste toner box or the
waste toner full sensor.
Therefore, move to the Step
3.
2 Checking the weight The weight detection actu- Repair the weight detection
detection actuator ator does not return to the actuator to return it to the
original position when proper position.
detaching and reinstalling
the waste toner box.
7-493
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Reinstalling the waste Toner adheres on the sur- Pull out the waste toner box Replacing
toner box and cleaning the face of the waste toner full and reinstall it. Or, clean the the Waste
waste toner full sensor sensor (piezoelectric sen- surface of the waste toner full Toner Box
sor). sensor. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Cleaning the waste toner The waste toner is clogged Clean inside the waste toner Detaching
box joint section at the waste toner joint box joint section of the main and reat-
section. drive unit. taching the
Main Drive
Unit
5 Replacing the waste toner Waste toner full sensor Reconnect the connector of
full sensor (piezoelectric sensor) is the waste toner full sensor.
wrongly detected. And next, measure the output
voltage of the waste toner full
sensor. (Undetected: 0V, Full
detection: 3.3V). If there is
output of 3.3V even the waste
toner is not full in the waste
toner box, replace the waste
toner full sensor.
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly
displayed

1 Replacing the wire The wire of the DP original When DP original sensor is
sensor is short-circuited. always on due to the short
circuit of the wire, replace the
wire.
2 Replacing the DP original The DP original sensor Replace the DP original sen-
sensor always turns on. sor.
and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
7-494
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is
displayed

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Reaffix the pad of the DP
original is damaged and separation pulley cover by
caught with the pad of the holding the pad. If not
DP retard pulley cover. repaired, replace the DP sep-
aration pulley cover (includ-
ing the pad).
(10)When turning on the power, the display [Network device is running] does not
disappear

switch.
2 Replacing the main PWB The module related to the Replace the main PWB. Detaching
network in the main PWB and reat-
is faulty. taching the
Main PWB
7-495
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-8 Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
section sion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the
gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the
foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject
section
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy Fan motor is dirty or faulty.
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
section sion, attachment failure of the primary paper
feed section
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or
attachment failure at the MP feed section
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the Rubbing sound between the bushing and the
fuser eject section stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the
smudges / foreign objects adhesion
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller
eject section and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of
the foreign objects.
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the inter-
ference between the parts in the fuser section
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine The drive failure of the toner container, opening/
closing failure of the toner supply shutter, the
shortage of the toner amount or aggregation of
the toner.
(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner
condensation in the developer section
(14) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
sion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum
section
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jump- Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness,
ing sounds) smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste
toner vent of the primary transfer section
(16) The drive sounds are noisy during printing
(17) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal con-
veying section (Squeak sound)
(18) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt
(Tooth jumping sounds)
(19) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit
7-496
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)

1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear Check the rotation of the
or bushing is not enough. roller, the pulley or the gear, if
they do not rotate smoothly,
apply the grease on the gears
or the bearings. (EM-50LP,
Part number: 7BG010009H)
2 Reattaching the gears or The parts such as each Reattach the gear or the
the bearings gear or bushing are not bearings.
properly attached.
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears of the conveying
on them. related rollers, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H).
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the
grease worn down. conveying related pulley and
apply the Hanarl.
(302LV94550)
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the drive gears of the
grease foreign objects are on conveying related rollers, and
them. apply the grease (EM-50LP,
Part number: 7BG010009H).
4 Checking the pressure Pressure of the conveying Reattach the pressure
spring related roller and pulley springs of the conveying
are weak, and the bearing related rollers or the pulleys,
vibrates as the roller and or replace them.
pulley rotate.
5 Replacing the feed drive The parts in the feed drive Replace feed drive unit. Detaching
unit unit are faulty. and reat-
taching the
Feed Drive
Unit
7-497
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

1 Checking the developer The developer unit drive is Check if the developer is not Detaching
unit faulty. leaking from the developer and reat-
unit, there is no damaged taching the
location, and whether the Developer
roller rotates manually. Unit
Repair if necessary.
2 Developer unit replace- The developer unit is Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are shafts, and apply the grease
on them. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
2 Checking the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bearing of the
DP conveying roller.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the gears which trans-
grease foreign objects are on it. mit the drive to the DP con-
veying roller, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H).
4 Checking the motor The motor does not Reattach the DP conveying
engage with the drive gear. related motors.
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject section

1 Cleaning and applying the Conductive bearings Apply Hanarl (302LV94550) Field Mea-
grease located at behind the lower to the conductive bearing sures for
exit roller of the main unit (black) at the machine rear the abnor-
slide with the roller shaft. side of the exit lower roller. mal noise
(abnormal sound) from the
exit unit
2 Checking the drive link The engagement of the Fix the drive side of the exit Detaching
gear drive coupling gear of the unit to the lower side with and reat-
fuser unit and the exit unit screw so that the meshing of tachint the
is strong and the exit actu- the drive coupling gear Exit Unit
ator vibrates. between the fuser unit and
the exit unit becomes proper
7-498
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Cleaning and applying the The bearings or gears are Clean the bearings of the Detaching
grease dirty or the foreign objects upper exit roller and the and reat-
adhere. gears, and apply the grease. tachint the
(EM-50LP, Part number: Exit Unit
7BG010009H)
4 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or Clean the shaft of the exit Detaching
grease the foreign objects adhere. upper pulley and the exit and reat-
lower pulley, and apply tachint the
Hanarl (302LV94550). Exit Unit
5 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or Clean the reverse guide and Detaching
grease the foreign objects adhere. the shaft of the exit feedshift and reat-
guide. If it is not possible to tachint the
remove the dirt or the foreign Exit Unit
objects, replace them.
6 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor is Execute U030 [Exit]. If the Mainte-
motor faulty. abnormal sound occurs, nance
replace the exit reverse Mode List
motor.
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy

Fan motor is dirty or faulty.

1 Cleaning the fan motor The fan of the fan motor is Execute U037 and specify Mainte-
dirty. the fan motor which has a nance
high rotation sound, and Mode List
clean the fan. Fan
Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and Fan
reconnect the connector. If Motors
not repaired, replace it. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment failure of the primary paper feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear Reattach the primary paper
clutch or the clutch are not prop- feed drive parts such as the
erly attached. gear or the clutch if they are
not properly attached.
7-499
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the gears and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are bearings of the primary feed
on them. drive section, and apply the
grease. (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H)
3 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bear- Detaching
grease dirty or foreign objects are ings of the feed roller, and and reat-
on them. apply the grease. (EM-50LP, taching the
Part number: 7BG010009H) Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
4 Checking the paper feed The paper feed roller sur- Clean the paper feed roller, or Detaching
roller face is dirty or worn down. replace it if necessary. and reat-
taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear When the gears or the clutch
clutch or the clutch are not prop- in the MP paper feed drive
erly attached. section are not properly
attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bear-
grease dirty or foreign objects are ings of the MP feed roller,
on them. and apply the grease. (EM-
50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
3 Checking the MP friction The surface of the MP fric- Clean the MP friction pad and
pad tion pad is dirty or worn replace it if necessary.
out.
4 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
attached properly.
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the smudges / foreign
objects adhesion

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser eject roller, Clean the fuser exit roller, the
grease bushing or the stop ring bearings, stop ring, etc., and
are dirty, or foreign objects apply the heat resistant
are on them. grease.
7-500
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
(10)Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign
objects.

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit sub roller or Clean the fuser exit sub roller, Detaching
grease the bearings are dirty. Or, the shaft, etc., and apply the and reat-
the foreign objects adhere. heat resistant grease. taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
(11)Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings or the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears of the fuser roller, and
on them. apply the heat resistant
grease.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty. The for- Clean the fuser exit sub roller, Detaching
grease eign objects are adhered. the shaft, etc., and apply the and reat-
Or, the grease is not heat resistant grease. taching the
enough on the fixing shaft Fuser Unit
of the fuser exit sub roller
drive gear. (Rubbing sound
of the stop ring which fixes
the drive gear)
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear
grease objects are on it. and apply the grease. (EM-
50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
4 Applying the grease The grease is not enough. Apply the grease on the pres-
sure switching cam and the
frame. (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H)
5 (If occurring when fuser The fuser forwarding guide Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
drives) Replacing the fuser is bent and contacts the and reat-
unit fuser pressure roller. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-501
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 (If fluttering sounds caused There is a large load when Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
by the vibration of the exit sliding the fuser belt and and reat-
unit occur) Replacing the the parts in the belt taching the
fuser unit Fuser Unit
7 (If ticking sounds occur) The cushion affixed in the Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
Replacing the fuser unit cap of the fuser belt edge and reat-
section is peeled off. taching the
Fuser Unit
8 Replacing the IH unit The cores of the IH unit are Check if any abnormal sound
in contact with each other. from IH unit at right upper
part of the main unit when
turning on the power. If there
are any abnormal sound,
replace the IH unit.
(12)Abnormal sound from inside the machine

The drive failure of the toner container, opening/closing failure of the toner supply shutter, the shortage of the
toner amount or aggregation of the toner.

1 Checking the toner con- The torque increases due Shake the toner container Replacing
tainer to the toner condensation. enough and reinstall it. Or, the Toner
replace it. Container
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Cleaning the drive parts of The drive gear shaft or the If the drive gear of the con-
the container motor bearings of the container tainer motor does not rotate
motor is dirty. Or, the for- smoothly, clean the shaft or
eign objects are adhered. the bearings.
3 Reattaching the drive parts The stop ring of the con- Reattach the stop ring fixing
of the container motor tainer motor drive gear has the container motor drive
come off. gear to the shaft.

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

1 Checking the developer The shaft or the bushing of Check if the developer roller
unit the developer roller is dirty rotates. If not rotating
or foreign objects are on smoothly, clean the shaft or
them. the bushing of the developer
roller.
2 Checking the developer The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Detaching
unit developer unit increased Then, replace it if the issue is and reat-
due to the toner condensa- not resolved. taching the
tion, etc. Developer
Unit
7-502
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to Adjust-
drum. supply the toner to the clean- ment/
ing unit. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check the drum screw rota- Detaching
properly rotate. tion and if it does not rotates and reat-
smoothly, clean it. If it locks, taching the
replace the IH unit. Drum Unit
4 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth surface of the
grease tooth of the drum drive drum drive gear and apply
gear, or the grease is not the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
enough. number: 7BG010009H)
5 Drum unit replacement The torque inside the drum Replace the drum unit. Detaching
unit increased due to the and reat-
waste toner clogging, etc. taching the
Drum Unit
(15)Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)

Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the
primary transfer section

1 Checking the shutter of the The shutter of the waste Check the opening and clos-
toner waste vent toner vent is not properly ing operation of the shutter of
opened and closed. the toner waste vent in the
transfer cleaning unit, and fix
the parts if necessary.
2 Checking the cleaning The cleaning screw does Check if the cleaning screw in
screw not properly rotate. the transfer cleaning unit
rotates smoothly, and clean it
if not rotating smoothly.
7-503
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear or the bush- Clean the drive gears and the
grease ing is dirty, or foreign bearings of the primary trans-
objects are on them. fer unit, and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H) or Hanarl
(302LV94550). (If they are
conductive bearings, apply
Hanarl.)
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit faulty. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
(16)The drive sounds are noisy during printing

1 Changing the setting The Quiet Mode is off. Change the setting to [ON] at Adjust-
System Menu > [Adjustment/ ment/
Maintenance] > [Silent mode] Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
(17)The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound)

1 Replacing the ground When the PF conveying Replace the ground spring.
spring roller rotates, the sliding (SPRING GROUND BRIDGE
surface of the bearings A:303RC0617_, the last digit
that hooking the PF con- is 1 or newer)
veying roller and the
ground spring is vibrating
fractionally.
7-504
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(18)Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds)

1 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the drive gears and the
grease the foreign object is bearings of the primary trans-
adhered. fer unit, and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H) or Hanarl
(302LV94550). (If they are
conductive bearings, apply
Hanarl.)
2 Replacing the main drive The gear section of the Replace the main drive unit. Detaching
unit developer K/transfer belt and reat-
motor and the gear taching the
engaged are scraped. Or, Main Drive
the drive of the parts in the Unit
main drive unit are faulty.
(19)Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit

1 Reattaching the motor in The drive of the motor in Reattach the motor in the Detaching
the main drive unit the main drive unit is faulty. main drive unit. and reat-
taching the
Main Drive
Unit
2 Checking the meshing of The hook located at the Reattach the main drive unit. Detaching
the waste toner conveying lower side of the main and reat-
gear in the main drive unit drive unit comes off and taching the
and the feed drive unit the teeth of the main drive Main Drive
gear unit side gear and feed Unit
drive unit side gear does
not engage properly.
7-505
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-9 Malfunction

(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misde-
tected or not displayed
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the
abnormal image output due to heated CPU)
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: The printing operation of
the main unit is frequently interrupted to cool the
machine inside according to the inner tempera-
ture increase during the continuous printing.)
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on
the power switch
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper
leading edge)
(7) No display in the operation panel (Image on the operation panel is faulty or
becomes pure white)
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WEL- Communicate between the main PWB and the
COME" and does not change operation panel main PWB cantbedone.'
(9) The operation panel remains displaying [Net- A bit error in the flash memory of the main PWB
work device is starting]. has occurred.
(10) The operation panel remains displaying [There The waste toner box is installed but does not
is no waste toner box]. detect it is installed.
(11) The operation panel remains displaying [Close The waste toner box cover is closed but open-
the waste toner box cover]. ing/closing is not detected.
Content of Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Object: Main unit, Paper feeder

1 Checking the actuator The actuator does not Check if the actuator for the
operate properly. paper length sensor oper-
ates when inserting the cas-
sette. If it does not properly
operate, reattach the actua-
tor.
2 Checking the paper length The paper length sensor or Reattach the paper length
sensor and fan shaped the fan shaped arm does sensor or the fan shaped
arm not operate correctly. arm.
7-506
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the detected When inserting the cas- After inserting the cassette Cassette /
paper size on the opera- sette vigorously into the vigorously into the main unit MP Tray
tion panel main unit with a large with a large amount of paper Settings
amount of paper loaded in loaded in the cassette, check (Opera-
the cassette, the paper the paper size of the target tion Guide
width guide temporarily cassette which is detected on - Section
deflects, the angle of the the operation panel. ([Status/ 8)
switching lever for the Job Cancel] key > [Paper/
paper width sensor shifts, Supplies]) If the paper size in
and the paper width sensor the cassette is not detected,
does not turn on correctly. pull out the cassette and
insert the cassette with the
normal strength. If it does not
reoccur, please explain to the
user not to insert the cassette
vigorously. If there is concern
about reoccurrence by the
same operation after that,
specify the paper size of the
target cassette instead of
[Auto]. ([System Menu/Coun-
ter] key > [Cassette/MP tray
Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to
5)])
sor - Feed drive PWB • Paper
width sensor - Feed drive
Engine PWB
5 Replacing the paper length The paper length sensor is Replace the paper length
sensor faulty. sensor.
6 Replacing the paper width The paper width sensor is Replace the paper width sen-
sensor faulty. sor.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-507
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected

1 Checking the sub tray Sub tray is not in the Pull out the sub tray to the
proper position. position where you can see
the triangle mark. Or, store it
completely inside the MP
frame.
the wire. • Main unit - Paper
conveying unit • MP paper
length sensor - Feed drive
PWB • MP paper width sen-
sor - Feed drive PWB • Feed
3 Checking the MP paper MP Paper width sensor Check the home position of
width sensor does not operate correctly. the MP paper width sensor,
and reattach it if necessary.
Then, replace the sensor if it
is not fixed.
4 Checking the MP paper MP Paper length sensor Reattach the MP paper
length sensor does not operate correctly. length sensor. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate

(Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the abnormal image output due to heated CPU)

1 Cleaning the controller fan The fan is dirty with dust. Clean the controller fan
motor motor.
the wire. • Controller fan
motor - Main PWB
7-508
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the controller The controller fan motor is Replace the controller fan Fan
fan motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate

(Final phenomenon: The printing operation of the main unit is frequently interrupted to cool the machine inside
according to the inner temperature increase during the continuous printing.)

1 Checking the developer Foreign materials such as Clean the developer fan Mainte-
fan motor operation dust adhere on the devel- motor. Execute U037 [DLP1] nance
oper fan motor. to [DLP4] and specify the Mode List
developer fan motor that Fan
does not work. Proceed to Motors
the next step after specifying. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
the wire. • Developer fan
motor - Drum/developer relay
PWB • Drum/developer relay
PWB - Feed image PWB •
PWB
3 Replacing the developer The developer fan motor is Replace the developer fan Fan
fan motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
7-509
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit")
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch

1 Measuring the input volt- The power cord has no Plug the power cord into
age continuity. another wall outlet.
2 Checking the power cord The power plug of the If the power plug is deformed
power cord is faulty. or faulty, replace the power
cord.
3 Checking the power cord The power cord is faulty. If there is no continuity of the
power cord, replace the
power cord.
4 Checking the main power The main power switch is Check the continuity between
switch faulty. the contacts of the main
power switch, and replace
the main power switch if there
is no continuity.
5 Checking the low voltage The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the con- Service
PWB nected properly. The wire nectors on the low voltage Manual -
or the PWB is faulty. PWB, then reconnect the Section 8
wire connector. If the wire is "PWBs"
faulty, repair or replace it. If Detaching
not repaired, replace the low and reat-
voltage PWB. taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
7-510
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Replacing the power The power switch is faulty. Check the power switch.
switch Replace it if there is no conti-
nuity.
7 Checking the main PWB The connector or FFC ter- Clean the terminal of the con- Service
minal is not connected nectors on the main PWB, Manual -
properly. Or, the wire, FFC, then reconnect the wire con- Section 8
PWB is faulty. nector and reconnect the "PWBs"
replace it. If not repaired, taching the
8 Checking the engine PWB The connector or FFC ter- Clean the terminal of the con- Service
minal is not connected nectors on the engine PWB, Manual -
properly. Or, the wire, FFC, reconnect the connector of Section 8
PWB
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section

(Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

1 Reaffixing the toner scat- Scattering prevention Re-affix the scattering pre- Detaching
tering prevention seal on sheet is peeling off. vention sheet on the primary and reat-
the primary transfer unit transfer unit. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the developer The developer unit or the Clean the developer unit and Detaching
and drum units drum unit is dirty. the drum unit. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
version. latest version. Update
7-511
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Executing Developer The amount of toner in the Execute the developer Adjust-
refresh developer unit is large. Or, refresh twice. ment/
the toner is deteriorated. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
5 Developer unit replace- The toner is deteriorated. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
(7) No display in the operation panel

(Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)

1 Resetting the main power The main firmware does Turn off the power switch and
not start correctly. the main power switch. And
turn on the main power
after 5s passed. After that,
set the sleep level to [Quick
Recovery].
nected properly. Or, the lowing wire connectors and Manual -
wire is faulty so that the reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
power for display is not there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
supplied. the wire. • Main PWB - Oper-
ation panel main PWB • Main
PWB - Low voltage PWB
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
4 Checking the operation The operation panel main Replace the panel main Detaching
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
5 Replacing the low voltage Low voltage power PWB is Replace the low voltage Detaching
PWB faulty and the power is not PWB. and reat-
supplied to the main PWB. taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
7-512
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change
Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel main PWB cantbedone.'

switch.
the wire. • Main PWB - Oper-
ation panel main PWB
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
(9) The operation panel remains displaying [Network device is starting].

A bit error in the flash memory of the main PWB has occurred.

1 Resetting the main power The start-up of the main Turn off the power switch and
PWB is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-513
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)The operation panel remains displaying [There is no waste toner box].

The waste toner box is installed but does not detect it is installed.

1 Opening/closing the waste The weight sensor does Open and close the waste
toner box cover not detect opening/closing toner box cover and reset the
of the waste toner box main power switch. After the
cover correctly. recovery, make sure to check
the phenomenon does not
occur again.
2 Reinstalling the waste The weight sensor does Remove and reinstall the Detaching
toner box not detect existence of the waste toner box and reset the and reat-
waste toner box correctly. main power switch. After the taching the
recovery, make sure to check waste
the phenomenon does not toner box
occur again. unit
3 Reattaching the weight The weight detection actu- Reattach the weight detection
detection actuator ator is not attached prop- actuator.
erly.
4 Reattaching the weight The weight detection Remove the waste toner box Detaching
detection spring spring has come off. unit and reattach the weight and reat-
detection spring. taching the
waste
toner box
unit
(11)The operation panel remains displaying [Close the waste toner box cover].
The waste toner box cover is closed but opening/closing is not detected.

1 Opening/closing the waste The weight sensor does Open and close the waste
toner box cover not detect opening/closing toner box cover and reset the
of the waste toner box main power switch. After the
cover correctly. recovery, make sure to check
the phenomenon does not
occur again.
2 Reinstalling the waste The weight sensor does Remove and reinstall the Detaching
toner box not detect existence of the waste toner box and reset the and reat-
waste toner box correctly. main power switch. After the taching the
recovery, make sure to check waste
the phenomenon does not toner box
occur again. unit
3 Reattaching the weight The weight detection actu- Reattach the weight detection
detection actuator ator is not attached prop- actuator.
erly.
4 Reattaching the weight The weight detection Remove the waste toner box Detaching
detection spring spring has come off. unit and reattach the weight and reat-
detection spring. taching the
waste
toner box
unit
7-514
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
7-10 Connector troubleshooting

*:Unless otherwise specified, it occurs at start-up
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No Occur JAM and service No Occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs
error *D rank) ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and no cassette open/
close can be detected
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power It doesn't occur JAM and C (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) error) call, but abnormal operation occurs
*Refer to Remarks (2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) call error error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The polygon motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
gon motor synchronization call error call error, but abnormal (3) The K image signal is shut off and abnormal K images are output
error) image *Refer to Remarks
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) The 24V power output permission signal is shut off and no 24V power is gener-
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error ated to cause 24V power error
weight detection sensor (2) The 24V output permission signal is shut off and no 24V power is generated to
cause 24V power error
YC16 DP, sensor and scanner motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) The carriage drive motor control signal is shut off and carriage error occurs
(2) Power to the carriage position sensor is shut off and carriage error occurs
(3) The carriage drive motor control signal is shut off and carriage error occurs
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off and no communication is estab-
call error call error lished to cause AFE error
YC34 Transfer High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer high voltage control signal is shut off and images become faint with-
call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal out transfer
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) Transfer belt cleaning high voltage control signal is shut off and cleaning failure
occurs
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB C5101 (Main high voltage K No occur JAM and service C5101 (Main high voltage K (1) K current detection signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
error) call error error) (3) A main charge control signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation *Refer to Remarks LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
7-515
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Engine YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
*Refer to Remarks
YC4 Fiery Relay PWB
Feed YC6 Engine PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
image communication error) error) call error occurs
(2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC28 Engine PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM No occur JAM and service C2760 (Transfer belt motor (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) call error error) error occurs
(2) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC29 Feed Drive PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C7980(Waste toner over- C7470(Toner sucking fan (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) flow)*Refer to Remarks for error) (2) The waste toner sensor control signal is shut off and waste toner overflow occurs
occurrence condition (3) The toner sucking fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC32 The middle transfer belt fuser C1950(Middle transfer belt No occur JAM and service "Main unit cover is open" the (1) The communication line with the primary transfer EEPROM is shut off and com-
high voltage PWB container unit EEPROM error) call error, but abnormal oper- front cover open is displayed. munication error occurs
solenoid ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The Yellow toner container cover open/close control signal is shut off and the
cover is not opened at Yellow toner empty
(3) The front cover open/close sensor signal is shut of and constant cover open
occurs
YC33 IH PWB fan motor, Eject/IH C6920(IH coil cooling fan C6920(IH coil cooling fan No occur JAM and service (1) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
fan motor error) error) call error (2) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
YC17 Ejection motor, sensor for C7901 (Drum K EEPROM When printing, JAM470x When printing, JAM430x (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
conveying, drum developer error) (Switch-back sensor non- (Duplex sensor non-arrival x: error occurs
relay PWB arrival x: differ by cassette differ by cassette) (2) The signal of the sensor on the paper conveying path is shut off and jam is
detected while being unable to detect paper
(3) The switch-back motor control signal is shut off at duplex printing and no paper is
switched. Then, jam is detected.
YC12 RFID PWB C7320(Toner container No occur JAM and service C7320(Toner container (1) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
detection connector error) call error, but abnormal oper- detection connector error) (2) The power line to the PWB to communicate the toner container is shut off and the
ation *Refer to Remarks toner container indication disappears from the operation panel while being unable to
detect the toner container
(3) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
YC36 Container motor When supplying the toner, When supplying the toner, No occur JAM and service (1) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
C7001(container stir motor C7001(container stir motor call error (2) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
error) error) (3) As the signal which controls the turn direction of the container motor is shut off
and the turn direction is fixed, but toner supply error doesn't occur since turned to the
supplying direction.
YC24 Drum motor Bk, Developer Bk C2201(Drum motor K steady- C2760(Transfer belt motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the control signal to drum motor Bk is shut off, motor error occurs.
or Belt motor state error) error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer Bk or belt motor is shut off, motor error
occurs.
(3) Since the control signal to drum motor Bk is shut off, motor error occurs.
7-516
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Feed YC23 Sensor belt, separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) The primary and secondary transfer pressure motor control signal is shut off and
image ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release pressure error occurs
error) error) error) (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and pres-
sure error occurs
(3) The primary and secondary transfer pressure sensor control signal is shut off and
pressure error occurs
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- No jam and service call error (1) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
per motor K error) per motor K error) (2) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The hopper K toner detection control signal is shut off and no toner is supplied
from the toner container while constantly judging sufficient toner
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and blank pages are output
Main High Voltage PWB call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks transfer
(3) Power to the developer unit is shut off and faint images are output
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB, sensor, thermis- C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Broken upper fuser No jam and service call error (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
tor error) thermistor detection) error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) AK detection signal is shut off and control is turned off while judging no AK. The
message is displayed. ation *Refer to Remarks ation *Refer to Remarks part attached to the eject section turns on the sensor there when no AK is installed
but it is turned off to cause mismatch when AK is installed and inner tray mis-detec-
tion occurs
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Main PWB No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
call error, but abnormal oper- (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
ation *Refer to Remarks occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation *Refer to Remarks error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
7-517
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Feed YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
drive right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 *Refer while detecting paper at power-up
to Remarks (2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position
the MPF paper feeding, (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and motor
C1000 (MPF lift motor error). error occurs when feeding from MPF
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs
error) (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) error) (2) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The feed motor rotation direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the
reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) The cassette paper size sensor is shut off and size cannot be detected
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Cassette 1 open/close sensor signal is shut off and the lift-up operation is not exe-
which the error doesn't occur. cuted without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-518
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Main YC42 Power Source PWB The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC2 HDD
YC32 HDD
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
7-519
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
7-520
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-11 Others
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides
(1-1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit
Adjust the center position of the punch unit (A) based on the MP tray.
Procedures
1. Pull out the inner finisher from the main
unit.
Figure 7-5
2. Remove the screw (B) and detach the punch unit cover (C).
3. Perform the test copy by feeding paper from the MP tray.
4. Loosen the screw (1).
When the punch holes shift toward the machine front side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the
machine rear side ().
When the punch holes shift toward the machine rear side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the
machine front side ().
5. Repeat Step2-3 till the punch holes are located within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value (e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm (1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm (2.75in±0.02in)
6. Tighten the screw (1).
d
e
Figure 7-6
7-521
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Reattach the punch unit cover (C) by the screw (B).

8. Reinstall the inner finisher into the main unit.
B(M3x8)
Figure 7-7
(1-2) Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjust the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) based on the center position for the
punch unit after finishing the adjustment at Step 1).
[Adjusting the center position for the cassettes in the main unit / PF-7100]
1. Perform the test copy by feeding paper from each paper source.
2. Loosen the fixing screw (E) of the pinion gear (D) that secures the center position for the paper width
guides when the punch holes shift.
3. Relocate the paper width guide (F) of the machine rear side in the counter direction of the punch holes
shifted.
When the punch holes shift in the machine rear direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in
the machine front direction.
When the punch holes shift in the machine front direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in
the machine rear direction.
4. Tighten the fixing screw (E).
5. Put paper on the cassette, and relocate the paper width guides at the machine front and rear sides along
the paper width.
D
F
Figure 7-8
7-522
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Repeat Step 1-5 till the punch holes

locate within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value
(e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, d
e
e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm
(1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm
(2.75in±0.02in)
Figure 7-9
(1-3) Adjusting the center line at U034

Execute U034 [LSU Out Left] to adjust the center line of each paper source (except the MP tray).
7-523
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110)
[Part]
Part No: 303RC94080 (3RC94080)
Part name: PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SET SP
Q'ty / 1 unit: 1
Remark
For the PF feed frame in the left cassette: Film A with PORON® x 2 pcs
For the PF feed frame in the right cassette: Film B with PORON® x 2 pcs
A B
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
40 mm
39 mm
Figure 7-10
[Affixing location]
Following PF feed frames for the left and right cassettes in PF-7110 (Large capacity feeder)
• Left cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER (303RC0603_)
• Right cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER B (303RC0613_)
[Step for affixing]

1. Locate the up-vertical and horizontal affixing location for the films with PORON® and clean there with
alcohol.
2. Remove the sheet from the PORON (a) and affix the PORON(a) faster than other parts.
3. Affix other parts (film) than PORON (a) and press them surely.
4. After affixing, pull out and reinsert the cassette multiple times to confirm the film with PORON® does not
contact the neighboring parts.
B a
A B
A
Figure 7-11
7-524
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Vertical alignment for the PF feed frame]

Affix the films on where the following 2 conditions are matched.
• Condition 1: Align the film (c) of film A and B with PORON to the slant surface (b) of the PF feed frame.
• Condition 2: Align the film (e) of film A and B with PORON to the vertical surface (d) of the PF feed frame.
b
e
d
a
Figure 7-12
[Horizontal alignment for the PF feed frame]

Align the films with PORON to the PF feed frame horizontally for the left cassette(A) and the right cassette(B).
0 mm
0.5 mm
A 0.5 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm
B
0.5 mm
0 mm
Figure 7-13
7-525
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8 PWBs
8-1 PWB description
(1) Main PWB
(1-1) Connector position
YC58 1 1 7 1 13 1 6
YC6
B15 1 B1 20 YC11 YC63 YC9
1 YC60 60
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-1
8-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) PWB photograph
Figure 8-2
(1-3) Connector lists

Destination
YC2:HDD
YC6:Operation panel main PWB
YC8:KUIO relay PWB
YC9:KUIO relay PWB
YC12:Power switch, Operation panel main PWB
YC23:Controller fan motor
YC32:HDD
YC42:Low voltage PWB
YC43:Engine PWB
YC58:WiFi PWB
YC59:USB hub PWB
YC60:USB hub PWB
YC63:Engine PWB
Connector Pin Signal I/O Measured volt- Description

s age
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
2 TXP O - HDD data signal
3 TXN O - HDD data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I - HDD data signal
8-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC2 6 RXP I - HDD data signal
7 GND - - Ground

2 LCD_OFF O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 TX0P O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 VBUS1 O DC5V DC3.3V power output to IFPWB

2 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal
3 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO1 I Analog AUDIO signal
6 WAKEUP1 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
7 RESET1 I DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 VBUS0 O DC5V DC5V power output to IFPWB
10 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal
11 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 AUDIO0 I Analog AUDIO signal
14 WAKEUP0 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
15 RESET I DC0V/3.3V Reset signal

2 5V_CUT0 I DC0V/5V DC5V cut signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 5V O DC5V DC5V power output to IFPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V_CUT1 I DC5V DC5V cut signal
YC12 A1 I2C_SCL_NFC O DC0V/ I2C clock signal

3.3V(pulse)
8-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC12 A2 INT_ENERGYSA I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VEKEY
A3 FPRST O DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A4 P2C_SDAT O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A5 C2P_SDAT I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A6 P2C_SDIR O DC0V/3.3V Panel communication direction signal
A7 P2C_SBSY O DC0V/3.3V Panel busy signal
A8 C2P_SCK O DC0V/ Panel clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A9 DISPLAY_POWE O DC0V/3.3V LCD backlight lighting-off signal
RON
A10 INT_ANYKEY O DC0V/3.3V Main recovery signal
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 +5.0V6 O DC5V DC5V power output
B1 POWER_ON O DC0V/3.3V Power key: On/Off
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 JOB_LED O DC0V/3.3V JS LED control signal
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 BEEP_POWERO O DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
N
B8 LED_MEMORY O DC0V/3.3V Memory LED control signal
B9 LED_ATTENTION O DC0V/3.3V Attention LED control signal
B10 LED_PROCESSI O DC0V/3.3V Processing LED control signal
NG
B11 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ O DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B13 INT_ENERGYSA I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VEKEY
B14 NIRQ O DC0V/3.3V NFC interrupt signal
B15 I2C_SDA_NFC O DC0V/ I2C clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC23 1 SPEED CON- O DC0V/5V CONFM: On/Off
TROL
2 GND - - Ground
3 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output

2 +5V_HDD O DC5V DC5V power output to HDD
1 GND - - Ground
YC42 1 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input from LVU

2 GND - - Ground
3 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input from LVU
4 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground

2 AC_DETECT - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 SAR_2_CH21_N I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 SAR_2_CH21_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
8 SAR_2_CH22_N I DC0V/
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
10 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
13 GND - - Ground
8-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC43 14 SAR_2_VCLK2_N I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
15 SAR_2_VCLK2_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
16 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
19 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
22 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
25 GND - - Ground
26 SAR_2_VCLK1_N I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
27 SAR_2_VCLK1_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
28 GND - - Ground
29 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
30 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
31 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
32 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
33 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
34 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
35 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
36 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
8-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC43 37 SAT_2_HSYNC_ O DC0V/ Image data signal
D_N 3.3V(pulse)
38 SAT_2_HSYNC_ O DC0V/ Image data signal
D_P 3.3V(pulse)
C_N 3.3V(pulse)
C_P 3.3V(pulse)
41 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
42 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
43 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
44 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
45 GND - - Ground
46 OS_SAD1N O DC0V/ Serializer output data
3.3V(pulse)
47 OS_SAD1P O DC0V/ Serializer output data
3.3V(pulse)
48 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
51 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
54 GND - - Ground
55 OS_SACKN O DC0V/ Serializer transfer data
3.3V(pulse)
56 OS_SACKP O DC0V/ Serializer transfer data
3.3V(pulse)
57 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
60 GND - - Ground
8-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC58 1 SD_D3 I/O DC0V/ Data signal
3.3V(pulse)
2 SD_D2 I/O DC0V/ Data signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 SD_CMD I/O DC0V/ Data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 GND - - Ground
5 SD_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
9 GND - - Ground
10 VIO PI DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
11 VBAT PI DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 PAVDD PI DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE I DC0V/3.3V Interrupt signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 RESET I DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
18 DETECT - - Ground
19 USB_+ I/O USB data signal
20 USB_- I/O USB data signal
YC59 1 VBUS O DC5V DC5V power output

2 DATA- I/O LVDS USB data signal
3 DATA+ I/O LVDS USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC60 1 +5V7 O DC5V DC5V power output

2 +5V7 O DC5V DC5V power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC63 1 JS_LED_REM O DC0V/3.3V JOB separator LED lighting signal

2 ENG_WAKEUP_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine sleep recovery signal
REQ(M_E)
3 HLD_ENG_N(M_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine stop signal
E)
4 E2C_SDAT(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication data output signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 C2E_SDAT(E_M) I DC0V/ G6 communication data input signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 C2E_SCLK(M_E) I DC0V/ G6 communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 E2C_SBSY(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication busy signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 E2C_IR(E_M) O DC0V/3.3V G6 communication interrupt signal
9 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication direction signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 ENG_POWOFF_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine power off signal
N(E_M)
11 HLD_SCN_N(E_ I DC0V/3.3V Scanner stop signal
M)
12 DP_WAKEUP_RE I DC0V/3.3V DP sleep recovery signal
Q
13 GND - - Ground
8-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Engine PWB

B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 40 1 17 1 11 1 12
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
8-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC6:Feed drive PWB
YC9:APC PWB
YC16 : DP, Home position sensor, Original size sensor, Original sensor, Scanner motor
YC21 : Coin vendor
YC22:Key card 1, Key counter
YC23:Key card or MK2
YC27:APC PWB, Waste toner motor, Weight detection sensor, Low voltage PWB
YC29:IH PWB
YC33:Main high-voltage PWB
YC34 : Transfer high-voltage PWB
YC35:Main PWB
YC36 : CCD PWB
YC38:Temperature/humidity sensor, LVU fan motor, PF PWB
YC39:Low voltage PWB
YC40:Feed image PWB
YC42:Feed image PWB
YC43:Main PWB

s age
YC6 A1 3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A2 3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
A10 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 detection signal
A11 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog IDS2 detection signal
A12 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
B1 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 detection signal
B2 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 detection signal
B3 REG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
B4 ATLAS_CLK O DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B5 ATLAS_SDO(EN O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
G to DRI) 3.3V(pulse)
B6 ATLAS_EN O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication enable signal
B7 ATLAS_CS I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
8-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC6 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
to ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
B9 MPF_ORG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
B10 CAS1_2_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close detection signal
B11 REG_CL_REM O DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 DATAP2_K O LVDS Image data K

2 DATAN2_K O LVDS Image data K
3 GND - - Ground
4 DATAP1_K O LVDS Image data K
5 DATAN1_K O LVDS Image data K
6 GND - - Ground
7 LSU_TH O Analog LSU thermistor voltage
8 GND - - Ground
9 POL_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) PM clock signal
10 POL_RDY I DC0V/3.3V PM ready signal
11 POL_REM O DC0V/5V PM remote signal
12 BD I DC0V/5V BD signal
13 P4_BK O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
14 P2 O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
15 P0 O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
16 CSI_K O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM chip select signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 DATAP2_M O LVDS Image data M
19 DATAN2_M O LVDS Image data M
20 GND - - Ground
21 DATAP1_M O LVDS Image data M
22 DATAN1_M O LVDS Image data M
23 GND - - Ground
24 SD_CLK O DC0V/3.3V Shading clock signal
25 P4_Col O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
26 CSI_C O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM chip select signal
27 CSI_Y O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver chip select signal
28 INT_ST I DC0V/5V Laser driver Initializing monitor signal
29 SET O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver set signal
30 CSI_M O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver chip select signal
8-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
32 DIO I DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data input
signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 DOI O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data output
signal
35 GND - - Ground
36 SKOI O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication clock signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 CSO O DC0V/3.3V EEPROM chip select signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 DATAP2_C O LVDS Image data C
41 DATAN2_C O LVDS Image data C
42 GND - - Ground
43 DATAP1_C O LVDS Image data C
44 DATAN1_C O LVDS Image data C
45 GND - - Ground
46 DATAP2_Y O LVDS Image data Y
47 DATAN2_Y O LVDS Image data Y
48 GND - - Ground
49 DATAP1_Y O LVDS Image data Y
50 DATAN1_Y O LVDS Image data Y
YC16 A1 GND - - Ground

A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A6 PLT_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A9 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output
A10 ORG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Original size detection sensor: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 HP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V HP: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
8-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
A16 GND - - Ground
B1 DP_CLK(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
DP)
B2 DP_SOO(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data output signal
DP)
B3 DP_TMG(DP to I DC0V/3.3V DP scanning start signal
ENG)
B4 DP_CO(DP to I DC0V/3.3V DP cover open/close detection signal
ENG)
B5 DP_RDY(DP to I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
ENG)
B6 DP_FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V DP conveying sensor: On/Off
B7 DP_ORG_SET I DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
B8 3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 +24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
B15 DP_SEL(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
DP)
B16 DP_SDI(DP to I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data input signal
ENG)

2 SGND - - Ground
3 SGND - - Ground
4 MCV_ENBL I DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor enable signal
5 FGND - - Ground
6 MCV_FED_COU O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
NT
7 MCV_EJ_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
8 MCV_COPY_SIG O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
9 MCV_UART_TXD O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 SGND - - Ground
8-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC21 11 MCV_UART_RXD I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
12 SGND - - Ground
2 DC1_SET I DC0V/3.3V Key counter set signal
3 DC1_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Key counter count signal
YC23 A1 +5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
A2 +5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
A9 MK2_ENBL I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
A10 +24V4 O DC24V DC24V power output
B1 MK2_RKEY7 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 MK2_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Count signal
YC27 1 +5V4IL_LSU O DC5V DC5V power output

2 +5V4IL_LSU O DC5V DC5V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 CLN_MOT_A O DC0V/24V Cleaning motor drive control
6 CLN_MOT_B O DC0V/24V Cleaning motor drive control
8 PGND - - Ground
9 WTNR_MOT_A O DC0V/24V Waste toner motor drive control
8-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC27 10 WTNR_MOT_B O DC0V/24V Waste toner motor drive control
11 WTNR_WEIGHT I DC0V/3.3V Waste toner sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
14 AC DETECTOR I DC0V/3.3V AC shutdown detection signal
15 GND - - Ground
16 CAS_HEATER O DC5V Cassette heater control signal
17 SLEEP O DC0V/5V 24V output enabling signal

2 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI O DC0V/ IH Clock signal (HI)
3.3V(pulse)
4 IH_IGBT_CLK_L O DC0V/ IH Clock signal (LOW)
OW 3.3V(pulse)
5 IH_ERROR I DC0V/3.3V IH error signal
6 IH_TXD O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 IH_RXD I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
9 IH_RELAY O DC0V/3.3V IH relay signal
YC33 1 SGND - - Ground
2 SGND - - Ground
3 HV_REM O DC0V/3.3V High voltage remote signal
4 B_K_MAG_AC_C O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
5 B_K_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
6 M_C_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage C
7 B_M_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
NT
8 M_K_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage K
9 M_M_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage M
10 B_C_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage C
NT
11 B_C_MAG_AC_C O DC0V/10V AC magnet roller bias control voltage C
NT
8-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC33 12 M_Y_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage Y
13 M_M_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection M
14 M_K_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Discharge detection voltage K
15 M_C_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection C
16 M_Y_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection Y
17 B_Y_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
NT
18 B_MAG_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
YC34 1 CL_CNT O Analog Cleaning control voltage

2 T1_Y_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
3 T1_C_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
4 T1_M_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
5 T1_I_SENS I Analog Primary transfer current detection
6 T2_OFF_REM O DC0V/16V Secondary transfer remote off signal
7 T1_K_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
8 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
9 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
10 T_REM O DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
11 SGND - - Ground

2 OS_SAD4P O LVDS Serializer output data
3 OS_SAD4N O LVDS Serializer output data
4 GND - - Ground
5 OS_SACKP O LVDS Serializer transfer data
6 OS_SACKN O LVDS Serializer transfer data
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
8-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC35 15 OS_SAD1N O LVDS Serializer output data
16 GND - - Ground
17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_P
18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_N
19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_P
20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_N
21 SAT_2_HSYNC_ O LVDS Image data signal
C_P
C_N
D_P
D_N
25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_P
26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_N
27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_P
28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_N
29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O LVDS Image data signal
_P
30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O LVDS Image data signal
_N
31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O LVDS Image data signal
_P
32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O LVDS Image data signal
_N
33 GND - - Ground
34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P I LVDS Image data signal
35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N I LVDS Image data signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 SAR_2_CH13_P I LVDS Image data signal
38 SAR_2_CH13_N I LVDS Image data signal
39 GND - - Ground
8-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC35 40 SAR_2_CH12_P I LVDS Image data signal
42 GND - - Ground
45 GND - - Ground
46 SAR_2_VCLK2_P I LVDS Image data signal
47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N I LVDS Image data signal
48 GND - - Ground
51 GND - - Ground
54 GND - - Ground
57 GND - - Ground
58 GND - - Ground
59 AC_DETECT - - Ground
60 GND - - Ground

5 NC - - Not used
6 LED_PWM O DC0V/ LED driver PWM signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
8 DSI_CIS_5P I LVDS Serial input data
9 DSI_CIS_5N I LVDS Serial input data
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
8-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC36 15 DSI_CIS_3N I LVDS Serial input data
16 GND - - Ground
17 DSI_CIS_CKP I LVDS Transfer clock
18 DSI_CIS_CKN I LVDS Transfer clock
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 AFE_RD I DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication read signal
27 GND - - Ground
28 AFE_WD O DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication write signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 AFE_CLK O DC0V/ AFE serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
31 GND - - Ground
32 AFE_CS O DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication select signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 AFE_MCLK_P O LVDS AFE clock signal
35 AFE_MCLK_N O LVDS AFE clock signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 NC - - Not used
YC38 A1 PF_CAS_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

A2 PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
A3 PF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A4 PF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A5 PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
A6 PF_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A7 PF_SEL2 O DC0V/3.3V PF CPU signal
8-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC38 A8 PF_SEL1 O DC0V/3.3V Side paper feeder CPU signal
A9 GND - - Ground
A11 PF_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
B1 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 SUB_SDA I/O DC0V/ Communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B4 SUB_CLK O DC0V/ Communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B5 LVU_PWB_FAN_ I DC0V/3.3V LVU fan alarm signal
ALM
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 LVU_PWB_FAN_ O DC0V/24V LVU fan: On/Off
REM
B8 HUMID_CLK O DC0V/3.3V Temperature/humidity sensor clock sig-
nal
B9 HUMID_OUT I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (humidity)
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 TEMP I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (temperature)
YC39 1 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC40 A1 +5V0 O DC5V DC5V power output

A3 GND - - Ground
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
8-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
YC40 A10 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A11 FRONT_CO_OPE I DC0V/3.3V Front cover sensor: On/Off
N
A12 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V JS sensor: On/Off
A13 ANALOG_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Analog select signal
A14 KSS_EN O DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
A15 KSS_CS O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
A16 KSS_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A17 KSS_SDI I DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A18 KSS_SDO O DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A20 3.3V_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
B1 DRUM HEAT O DC0V/3.3V Drum heater control signal
B2 DF_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B3 DF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B4 DF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B5 DF_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
B6 DF_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
B7 DF_SYNC O DC0V/ DF sync signal
3.3V(pulse)
B8 DF_DET I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
B9 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(edge)
B10 FSR_TH_CENT I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (cen-
ter)
B11 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(Fuser pressure roller)
B12 FSR_TH_MID I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (mid-
dle)
B13 FSR_ALARM I DC0V/3.3V Fuser alarm signal
B14 TPC_BK I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage K
B15 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
REM
B16 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
CLK
8-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC40 B17 DRUM_BK_MOT_ I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor sync signal K
RDY
B18 GND - - Ground
B19 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output
T2
B20 FSR_OFFSET_C O Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
NT
YC42 1 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor remote signal

OT_REM
2 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) Transfer belt motor clock signal
OT_CLK
3 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor rotation switching
OT_DIR signal
4 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/3.3V Transfer belt motor sync signal
OT_RDY
5 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor brake signal
OT_BRAKE
6 ANALOG_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Analog select signal
7 UNIT_E2P_SCL O DC0V/3.3V Unit EEPROM communication clock
8 UNIT_E2P_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V Unit EEPROM communication data sig-
nal
9 TPC_M I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage M
10 TPC_C I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage C
11 TPC_Y I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage Y
12 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal CMY
REM
13 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
CLK
14 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching sig-
DIR nal CMY
15 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor sync signal CMY
RDY
16 DRUM_COL_MO O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal CMY
T_REM
17 DRUM_COL_MO O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
T_CLK
18 DRUM_COL_MO I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor sync signal CMY
T_RDY
8-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC43 1 24V2 DC24V DC24V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 DP_WAKEUP_RE O DC0V/3.3V DP sleep recovery signal
Q
4 HLD_SCN_N(E_ I DC0V/3.3V Scanner stop signal
M)
5 ENG_POWOFF_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine power off signal
N(E_M)
6 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication direction signal
3.3V(pulse)
8-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Feed image PWB

1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A9 A1
YC19
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
8-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Low power voltage PWB
YC2:Right cover switch
YC3:Feed drive PWB
YC6:Engine PWB
YC12:RFID PWB
YC17:Exit reversing motor, Lower exit full sensor, Upper exit full sensor, Lower exit solenoid, Upper exit
solenoid, Exit sensor, Drum/Developer relay PWB
YC19 : Toner motor K, Toner level sensor K, Toner motor rotation sensor K
YC22:Fuser PWB, Thermostat, Thermistor 1/2, Fuser belt rotation sensor R
YC23:Transfer belt release motor, Developer clutch, Transfer belt release sensor
YC24:Developer K/Transfer belt motor, Drum motor K
YC25:DF PWB
YC28:Engine PWB
YC29:Feed drive PWB, Toner absorption fan motor, Waste toner sensor
YC30:BR PWB, DF PWB
YC32 : Transfer connect PWB, Container solenoid K, JS sensor, Front cover sensor, Fuser high voltage
PWB
YC33 : IH PWB fan motor, Exit/Front IH fan motor, Exit/Middle IH fan motor
YC35:Transfer high voltage PWB, Main high voltage PWB
YC36:Container motor

s age
YC1 1 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 +24V3_IL O DC24V DC24V power output


2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output
T2
8-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC6 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A3 KSS_IMAGE_SD I DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
O 3.3V(pulse)
(ENG to IMAGE)
A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI O DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
(IMAGE to ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
A5 KSS_IMAGE_CL O DC0V/ Clock signal
K 3.3V(pulse)
(ENG to IMAGE)
A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A8 DRM_EEP_SELO I DC0V/3.3V Interrupt signal
A9 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V JS sensor: On/Off
A10 FRONT_CO_OPE I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
N
A11 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A12 GND - - Ground
A13 GND - - Ground
A17 GND - - Ground
A18 GND - - Ground
B1 FSR_OFFSET_C I DC0V/3.3V Control signal
NT
T2
B3 GND - - Ground
B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_ I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor sync signal K
RDY
B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
CLK
B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
REM
B7 TPC_BK I LVDS T/C sensor detection voltage K
8-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC6 B8 FSR_ALARM I DC0V/3.3V Fuser alarm signal
B9 FSR_TH_MID I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (mid-
dle)
B10 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(Fuser pressure roller)
B11 FSR_TH_CENT I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (cen-
ter)
B12 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(edge)
B13 DF_DET I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
B14 DF_SYNC O DC0V/ DF sync signal
3.3V(pulse)
B15 DF_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
B16 DF_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
B17 DF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B18 DF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B19 DF_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B20 DRUM HEAT I DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
YC12 1 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output

2 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ RFID communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 GND - - Ground
5 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V RFID communication data signal
6 CONT_RECOG I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
7 GND - - -
8 CONNECT_REC I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
OG
YC17 A1 EXMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit reversing motor control signal

A2 EXMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit reversing motor control signal
A3 EXMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit reversing motor control signal
A4 EXMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit reversing motor control signal
A5 +3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
A6 GND - - Ground
8-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
YC17 A7 EXMAIN_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Lower exit full sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 EXINNER_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit full sensor: On/Off
A11 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A12 EXSOL1 O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
A13 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (retention)
A15 EXSOL2 O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
A16 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (retention)
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 EX_FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
A20 N.C. - - Not used
B1 VIB_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V VIBM remote signal
B2 DLP_FAN_HARF - - Not used
B3 DLP_FAN_REM O DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
B4 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
B5 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
B6 ERASER_COL O DC0V/5V ERASER CMY remote signal
B7 ERASER_BK O DC0V/5V ERASER K remote signal
B8 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 TPC_Y I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage Y
3.3V(pulse)
B11 TPC_C I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage C
3.3V(pulse)
B12 TPC_M I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage M
3.3V(pulse)
B13 TPC_BK I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage K
3.3V(pulse)
B14 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
B15 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/ EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)
B16 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1 O DC0V/3.3V Drum EEPROM select signal
B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0 O DC0V/3.3V Drum EEPROM select signal
8-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC17 B19 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B20 GND - - Ground
YC19 A1 TNMOT_BK_OUT O DC0V/ Toner motor control signal K

1 3.3V(pulse)
A2 TNMOT_BK_OUT O DC0V/ Toner motor control signal K
2 3.3V(pulse)
A3 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 THOP_PLS_BK I DC0V/3.3V Toner level sensor K: On/Off
A6 3.3V2 O DC1.2V LED power output
A7 THOP_FULL_BK I Analog Waste toner sensor detection signal K
A8 THOP_LED_BK O DC0V/ Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
3.3V(pulse) K

2 FUSER_SDA I/O DC0V/ Fuser EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 FUSER_SCL O DC0V/ Fuser EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (Fuser
pressure roller)
6 FSR_PRESS_SE I DC0V/3.3V Fuser pressure release sensor: On/Off
NS
7 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (edge)
8 FSR_JAM_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser sensor: On/Off
9 FSR_ROLL_F_SE I DC0V/3.3V Fuser belt rotation sensor F: On/Off
NS
10 +3.3V2_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 GND - - Ground
13 FSR_TH_MIDDLE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (mid-
dle)
14 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
15 GND - - Ground
16 FSR_ROLL_R_S I DC0V/3.3V Fuser belt rotation sensor R: On/Off
ENS
8-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
18 FSR_TH_CENTR I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (cen-
AL ter)
YC23 1 BLT_PRESS_OU O DC0V/ Belt release motor control signal

T1 3.3V(pulse)
2 BLT_PRESS_OU O DC0V/ Belt release motor control signal
T2 3.3V(pulse)
3 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
4 DLP_BK_CLT_RE O DC0V/24V Developer clutch: On/Off
M
6 GND - - Ground
7 BLT_4RELEASE_ I DC0V/3.3V Belt release sensor: On/Off
SENS
YC24 1 DRM_BK_MOT_D O DC0V/5V Drum motor rotation switching signal K

IR
2 DRM_BK_MOT_L I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor sync signal K
D
3 DRM_BK_MOT_C O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
LK
4 DRM_BK_MOT_R O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
EM
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V2IL2 O DC24V DC24V power output
7 DRM_COL_MOT_ - - Not used
DIR
LD
CLK
REM
11 GND - - Not used
12 +24V2IL2 - - Not used
13 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor brake signal K
OT_BRK
14 DLP_BK_BLT_M I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor sync signal K
OT_DIR
8-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC24 15 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/5V Developer motor control signal K
OT_FG
16 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
OT_CLK
17 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
OT_REM
18 GND - - Ground
19 +24V2IL2 DC24V
20 DLP_COL_MOT_ - - Not used
DIR
LD
CLK
REM
24 GND - - Not used
25 +24V2IL2 - - Not used
26 N.C. - - Not used
YC25 1 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output

2 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
YC28 1 DRUM_COL_MO O DC0V/3.3V Drum motor sync signal CMY

T_RDY
2 DRUM_COL_MO I DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
T_CLK
3 DRUM_COL_MO I DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal CMY
T_REM
4 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor sync signal CMY
RDY
5 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching sig-
DIR nal CMY
6 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
CLK
7 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal CMY
REM
8 TPC_Y O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
9 TPC_C O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
8-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC28 10 TPC_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
11 I2C_SDA I/O DC0V/24V Developer fan motor (half speed): On/
Off
12 I2C_SCL I DC0V/24V Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
13 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
14 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V Developer motor brake signal K
OT_BRAKE
15 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor sync signal K
OT_RDY
16 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching sig-
OT_DIR nal K
17 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
OT_CLK
18 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
OT_REM
2 WTNR_LOCK_SE I DC0V/3.3V Waste toner sensor
NS
4 TBLT_CLMOT_P I DC0V/5V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
WM
5 TBLT_CLMOT_C O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
HA
7 D_VIB_MOT O DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor: On/Off
8 EXSOL1_REM I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
9 EXSOL1_KEEP I DC0V/3.3V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)
10 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/3.3V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
11 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/3.3V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)
12 TN_FAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Toner absorption fan motor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
14 TN_FAN_REM O DC0V/24V Toner absorption fan motor: On/Off
YC30 1 DF_RDY(DF to I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
ENG)
2 DF_SEL(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
DF)
3 DF_SDO(ENG to O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
DF) 3.3V(pulse)
4 DF_SDI(DF to I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
8-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC30 5 DF_SYNC(DF to - - Not used
ENG)
6 DF_DET(DF to I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
ENG)
7 DF_CLK(ENG to O DC0V/ Clock signal
DF) 3.3V(pulse)
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 BRG_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge open detection signal
13 BRG_FEED_SEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge conveying detection signal 2
S2
14 BRG_FEED_SEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge conveying detection signal 1
S1
15 BRG_SET I DC0V/3.3V Bridge presence detection signal
16 BRG_MOT_CLK O DC0V/ Bridge motor clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
17 BRG_MOT_FAN_ O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor remote signal
REM
18 BRG_MOT_PD O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor control signal
19 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V Paper presence detection signal
YC32 A1 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A2 N.C. - - Not used
A3 TBLT_CLMOT_P O DC0V/ Belt cleaning motor control signal
WM 3.3V(pulse)
A4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 TBLT_CLMOT_C I DC3.3V Belt cleaning motor rotation control sig-
HA nal
A6 BELT_TH I Analog Belt thermistor voltage
A7 BLT_SCL O DC0V/ Belt cleaning motor clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 BLT_SDA I/O DC3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal
A12 COTN_SOL_BK O DC0V/24V Container solenoid K: On/Off
A13 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
8-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
YC32 A14 COTN_SOL_M - - Not used
A16 COTN_SOL_C - - Not used
A18 COTN_SOL_Y - - Not used
B1 GND - - Ground
T1
B3 FSR_OFFSET_C O Analog Offset control signal
NT
B4 PWM - - Not used
B5 CW/CCW - - Not used
B6 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 IH_CORE_HP I DC0V/3.3V IH position sensor: On/Off
B9 IHMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B10 IHMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B11 IHMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B12 IHMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V JS sensor: On/Off
B16 GND - - Ground
B17 FRONT_CO_OPE I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
N
B18 N.C. - - Not used
YC33 1 TBELT_FAN - - Not used

2 GND - - Not used
3 TBELT_FAN_LOC - - Not used
K
4 IH_PWB_FAN_R O DC0V/24V IH PWB fan motor: On/Off
EM
6 IHCOIL_FAN1 O DC24V DC24V power output
7 GND - - Ground
8-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
YC33 8 IHCOIL_FAN_LO I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
CK_F
9 IHCOIL_FAN1 O DC24V DC24V power output
10 GND - - Ground
11 IHCOIL_FAN_LO I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
CK_C
12 IHCOIL_FAN1 - - Not used
13 GND - - Not used
14 IHCOIL_FAN_LO - - Not used
CK_R
YC35 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output

T1
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
T2
T2
T2
YC36 1 CONT_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Container motor rotation switching sig-
nal
2 CONT_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Container motor sync signal
3 CONT_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Container motor clock signal
4 CONT_MOT_RE O DC0V/5V Container motor remote signal
M
5 GND - - Ground
6 24V O DC24V DC24V power output
8-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Feed drive PWB

1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
8-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Feed image PWB
YC2:Feed image PWB
YC3:Engine PWB
YC4:Feed clutch 1/2, Vertical conveying clutch
YC5:Paper length sensor 1/2, Paper width sensor 1/2, Upper paper level sensor 1/2, Lower paper level
sensor 1/2, Lift motor 1/2, Cassette sensor 1/2
YC6:Registration sensor, Middle clutch, Retard sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor, Lift upper limit sensor 1/2,
Paper sensor 1/2, Right container fan motor, Left container fan motor
YC7:Fuser edge fan motor, Belt roll-up sensor, DU sensor 1/2, Conveying open/close sensor, DU clutch 1/
2. MP clutch, MP paper width sensor, MP tray sensor, MP paper length sensor
YC8:MP lift motor, MP paper sensor, MP conveying sensor, MP position sensor
YC9:Front/Rear ID sensor, Cleaning solenoid, Registration clutch
YC10:Fuser motor, Fuser release motor, Exit fan motor
YC11:Feed motor

s age
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE I DC24V DC24V power input
T2
YC2 1 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)

2 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/24V Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
3 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)
4 EXSOL1_REM O DC0V/24V Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 TBLT_CLMOT_C I DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
HA
8 TBLT_CLMOT_P O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
WM
9 N.C. - - Not used
YC3 A1 REG_F_LED I Analog IDS1 control signal

A2 ID_SENS_R_P O Analog IDS2 detection signal
A3 ID_SENS_R_S O Analog IDS2 detection signal
A4 REG_R_LED I Analog IDS2 control signal
A5 GND - - Ground
8-38
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 3.3V2_FUSE I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B1 GND - - Ground
B2 REG_CL_REM I DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
B3 CAS1_2_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open detection sensor: On/Off
B4 MPF_ORG_SENS O DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
B5 ATLAS_SDO(DRI O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
to ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
B6 ATLAS_CS(ENG I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
to DRI)
B7 ATLAS_EN(ENG I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication enable signal
to DRI)
B8 ATLAS_SDI(ENG I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
to DRI) 3.3V(pulse)
B9 ATLAS_CLK(ENG I DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
to DRI) 3.3V(pulse)
B10 REG_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
B11 ID_SENS_F_P O Analog IDS1 detection signal
B12 ID_SENS_F_S O Analog IDS1 detection signal
YC4 1 CAS1_FEEDCL O DC0V/24V Feed clutch 1: On/Off

3 VFEED_CL O DC0V/24V Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off
5 CAS2_FEEDCL O DC0V/24V Feed clutch 2: On/Off
7 2WAY_CL - - Not used
8 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
YC5 A1 CAS1_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 1: On/Off

A2 GND - - Ground
A3 CAS1_LSIZE3 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A4 GND - - Ground
8-39
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC5 A5 CAS1_LSIZE2 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A6 CAS1_LSIZE1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A7 CAS1_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 CAS1_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 CAS1_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Lower paper level sensor 1: On/Off
A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
B3 CAS2_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 2: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 CAS2_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Upper paper level sensor 2: On/Off
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 CAS2_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Lower paper level sensor 2: On/Off
B11 CAS2_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground

A2 REGIST_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
A4 MIDCL O DC0V/24V Middle clutch: On/Off
A7 TDRS1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
8-40
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC6 A9 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 TDRS2_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 2: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 3.3V2 - - Not used
A13 NC - - Not used
A14 GND - - Not used
A15 3.3V2 - - Not used
A16 NC - - Not used
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 LIFT1_LIMIT I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 CAS1_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 1: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 LIFT2_LIMIT I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 CAS2_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 2: On/Off
B16 EXFAN O DC0V/24V Right container fan motor/Left container
fan motor: On/Off
B17 GND - - Ground
YC7 A1 DU_CL1 O DC0V/24V DU clutch 1: On/Off
A3 DUCL2 O DC0V/24V DU clutch 2: On/Off
A5 MPFCL_REM O DC0V/24V MP clutch: On/Off
A8 MPF_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V MP paper width sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 MPF_TRAY I DC0V/3.3V MP tray sensor: On/Off
8-41
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 MPF_LSIZE I DC0V/3.3V MP paper length sensor: On/Off
B1 EDGE_FAN_LOC I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
K
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 EDGE_FAN O DC0V/24V Fuser edge fan motor: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 TRANSBELT_SE I DC0V/3.3V Belt roll-up sensor: On/Off
NS
B6 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 DU_SENS2 I DC0V/3.3V DU sensor 2: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 DU_SENS1 I DC0V/3.3V DU sensor 1: On/Off
B13 RCOVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Conveying open/close sensor: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 MPFLIFT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V MP lift motor control signal

2 MPFLIFT_OUT2 O DC0V/24V MP lift motor control signal
3 MPFLIFT_HP I DC3.3V MP home position sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
9 MPF_SET I DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
11 MPF_FEED I DC0V/3.3V MP conveying sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
3 GND - - Ground
8-42
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC9 4 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 control signal
5 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 control signal
7 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 control signal
10 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog IDS2 control signal
12 ID_SOL O DC0V/24V Cleaning solenoid: On/Off
13 REG_CL O DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
YC10 1 FSRMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Fuser motor rotation switching signal

2 FSRMOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Fuser motor sync signal
3 FSRMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Fuser motor clock signal
4 FSRMOT_REM O DC0V/5V Fuser fan motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
T2_FUSE
7 FSR_RLSMOT_O O DC0V/24V Fuser pressure release motor control
UT2 signal
8 FSR_RLSMOT_O O DC0V/24V Fuser pressure release motor control
UT1 signal
9 EXFAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 EXFAN O DC24V DC24V power output
YC11 1 CASFEED_DIR O DC0V/5V Paper feed motor rotation switching sig-

nal
2 CASFEED_LD I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor sync signal
3 CASFEED_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
4 CASFEED_REM O DC0V/5V Paper feed motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
T2
8-43
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Drum/Developer relay PWB

1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
1
4 YC14
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
8-44
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Feed image PWB
YC2:Developer PWB K
YC6:Drum heater
YC10:Drum PWB K
YC14:Developer fan motor K
Connec- Pin Signal I/O Measured volt- Description

tor s age
5 +3.3/V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
6 DRM_EEP_SEL0 I DC0V/3.3V EEPROM select signal
7 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V EEPROM select signal
8 EEP_SCL I DC0V/ EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/ EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 DLP_TH O Analog Developer thermistor voltage
11 TPC_BK O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage K
3.3V(pulse)
12 TPC_M O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage M
3.3V(pulse)
13 TPC_C O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage C
3.3V(pulse)
14 TPC_Y O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage Y
3.3V(pulse)
15 GND - - Ground
17 ERASER_BK I DC0V/24V Eraser K remote signal
18 ERASER_COL I DC0V/24V Eraser CMY remote signal
19 DRM_HEAT_REM I DC0V/3.3V Drum heater remote signal
20 5V0_FUSE I DC5V DC5V power input
YC2 1 N.C. - - Not used

2 VIB_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor remote signal
3 TPC_BK/M/C/Y I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage K
3.3V(pulse)
4 DLP_TH or N.C. I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
5 3.3V2_DLPBK O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
6 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/ EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)
8-45
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC2 7 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ EEPROMEE clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
2 SCL O DC0V/5V Drum heater: On/Off
YC10 1 ERASER2 O DC0V/24V Eraser K: On/Off

2 ERASER3 O DC0V/24V Eraser K: On/Off
3 24V2/5V0 DC24V/DC5V DC24V/DC5V power output
4 ERASER1 O DC0V/24V Eraser K: On/Off
YC10 5 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ Drum heater clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 EEP_SDA O DC0V/ Drum heater clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 REM O DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor remote signal K

3 N.C. - - Not used
8-46
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Main high-voltage PWB

YC1
1
YC2
Figure 8-11
8-47
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 8-12
8-48
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Engine PWB
YC2:Feed image PWB

tor s age
YC1 1 M_K_I_SENS O Analog Discharge detection voltage K
2 DISCHARGE O Analog Discharge detection voltage
3 M_AC_CLK I DC0V/15V(pulse) AC charger clock signal
4 B_SLV_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V(pulse) Sleeve AC clock signal K
5 M_K_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger control voltage K
6 B_MAG_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V(pulse) Magnet roller AC clock signal K
7 M_K_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC charger control voltage K
8 B_K_SLV_DC_CN I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC sleeve bias control voltage K
T
9 B_K_SLV_AC_CN I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage K
T
10 B_K_MAG_DC_C I DC0V/13V(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
11 B_K_MAG_AC_C I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
12 HV_REM O DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
13 SGND - - Ground
YC3 1 PGND - - Ground

2 PGND - - Ground
3 +24V2IL I DC24V DC24V power input
4 +24V2IL I DC24V DC24V power input
8-49
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) Transfer high-voltage PWB

1 13
YC1
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
8-50
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Engine PWB, Feed Image PWB

tor s age
YC1 1 SGND - - Ground
2 T_REM I DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
3 T2_CNT I Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
4 SP_CNT I Analog Separation control voltage
5 T1_K_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
6 T2_OFF_REM O Analog Charger current detection
7 T1_I_SENS O Analog Primary transfer current detection
8 T1_M_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
9 T1_C_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
10 T1_Y_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
11 CL_CNT I Analog Cleaning control voltage
12 +24V2IL O DC24V DC24V power output
13 PGND - - Ground
8-51
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Low power voltage PEB

8
YC2 12
1 2 3 1 1 1 2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 1
YC5
YC3
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-15
8-52
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

(100V/120V)
Figure 8-16
(220-240V)
Figure 8-17
8-53
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

Destination
TB1:Inlet
TB2:Inlet
TB3:Inlet
YC1:Main Power Switch
YC2:IH PWB
YC4: Cassette heater
YC5:PF PWB
YC6:Feed image PWB
YC7:Engine PWB
YC8:Main PWB
YC9:Engine PWB

tor s age
TB1 1 LIVE I AC100V AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
TB2 1 NEUTRAL I AC100V AC power input

120V AC
220V-240V AC
TB3 1 DH_LIVE I AC100V AC power input

120V AC
220V-240V AC
YC1 1 LIVE_IN I AC100V AC power input

120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 LIVE_OUT O AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
3 NEUTRAL_IN I AC100V AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
4 NEUTRAL_OUT 0 AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
YC2 1 LIVE O AC100V AC power output

120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 NEUTRAL O AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
8-54
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 1 CH_LIVE O AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 CH_LIVE O AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
3 NC - - Not used
4 NC - - Not used
5 CH_NEUTRAL O AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
6 CH_NEUTRAL O AC100V AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC

2 GND - - Ground

5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground

3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8-55
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
7 GND - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 SLEEP I DC0V/3.3V Sleep signal

2 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Drum heater: On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 AC DETECTOR - - Not used
8-56
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Operation panel main PWB

YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
8-57
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Operation panel sub PWB
YC4:Speaker
YC5:Main PWB
YC6:LCD (backlight)
YC7:Touch panel
YC8:Main PWB
YC9:HDD
YC10:Numeric key (option)
YC11:NFC PWB

tor s age
2 LED0 O DCOV/5V LED control signal 0
3 NC - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 ATTENTION O DC0V/3.3V Attention LED control signal
6 MEMORY O DC0V/3.3V Memory LED control signal
7 PROCESSING O DC0V/3.3V Processing LED control signal
8 ENER- O DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver LED control signal
GYSAVERLED
9 INT_ENERGYSA I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VERKEY_N
10 KEY0 I DC0V/ Operation panel key scan return signal 0
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
14 SCAN0 O DC0V/ Scan signal 0
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
18 JOB_LED I DC0V/3.3V JS LED control signal
19 NC - - Not used
20 LED2 O DC0V/5V LED control signal 2
8-58
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 1 SPEAKER_P O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
2 SPEAKER_N O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
YC5 A1 +5.0V6 I DC5V DC5V power output

A2 +5.0V6 I DC5V DC5V power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 INT_ANYKEY O DC0V/3.3V Main recovery signal
A7 DISPLAY_POWE I DC0V/3.3V LCD backlight lighting-off signal
RON
A8 C2P_SCK I DC0V/ Panel clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A9 P2C_SBSY I DC0V/3.3V Panel busy signal
A10 P2C_SDIR I DC0V/3.3V Panel communication direction signal
A11 C2P_SDAT O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A12 P2C_SDAT I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A13 FPRST I DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A14 VDDDX I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I DC0V/ I2C clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O DC0V/ I2C data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B2 NIRQ I DC0V/3.3V NFC interrupt signal
B3 INT_ENERGYSA O DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VEKEY
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
B6 LED_PROCESSI I DC0V/3.3V Processing LED control signal
NG
B7 LED_ATTENTION I DC0V/3.3V Attention LED control signal
B8 LED_MEMORY I DC0V/3.3V Memory LED control signal
B9 BEEP_POWERO I DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
N
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
8-59
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 B13 JOB_LED I DC0V/3.3V JS LED control signal
B14 GND - - Not used
B15 NC - - Not used
YC6 1 LED_A O DC0V/5V LED control signal

2 LED_C I DC0V/5V LED control signal
YC7 1 YN_Bottom I Analog Touch panel YN position signal

2 XN_Left I Analog Touch panel XN position signal
3 YP_Top I Analog Touch panel YP position signal
4 XP_Right I Analog Touch panel XP position signal

2 LCD_OFF O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 TX0P O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 VGH O DC19.83V LCD High power output

2 VDD O DC3.3V LCD Driver power output
3 VGL O DC-9.1V LCD Low power output
4 VCOM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
5 VCOM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
6 AGND - - Ground
7 AVDD O DC10.34V LCD Analog power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 V1 O DC9.55V LCD V1 power output
8-60
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC9 16 V7 O DC5.02V LCD V7 power output
17 HSD O DC0V/3.3V Control bit select signal
18 GND_LVDS - - Ground
19 RxIN3+ O LVDS Display data signal
20 RxIN3- O LVDS Display data signal
21 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
30 GND - - Ground
31 RxINCK+ O LVDS Display data signal
32 RxINCK- O LVDS Display data signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 VDD_LVDS O DC3.3V LVDS power output
42 AGND - - Ground
43 AVDD O DC10.34V LCD Analog power output
44 VDD O DC3.3V LCD Driver power output
45 MODE O DC0V/3.3V Mode select signal
46 GBR O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
47 SHLR O DC0V/3.3V Left/Right writing start point setting signal
48 UPDN O DC0V/3.3V Upper/Lower writing start point setting
signal
49 COM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
50 COM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
8-61
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 1 KEY0 I DC0V/ Operation panel key scan return signal 0
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
9 10key_detect O
10 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 VDDDX I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 CLK O DC0V/ 12C clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 DATA I/O DC0V/ 12C data signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 NIRQ O DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal
8-62
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)IH PWB
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC5 YC6
1
Figure 8-20

(100V/120V)
Figure 8-21
(220-240V)
Figure 8-22
8-63
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Low voltage PWB
YC2 : IH unit
YC3 : IH unit
YC4 : Engine PWB
YC5:Engine PWB

tor s age
YC1 1 LIVE I AC100V AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 NEUTRAL I AC100V AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
YC2 1 VS O AC65V to 160V Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC3 1 COIL_COM O AC65V to 160V Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC4 1 IH_RXD O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 IH_TXD I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 IH_ERROR O DC0V/3.3V IH error signal
4 IH_IGBT_CLK_L I DC0V/ IH Clock signal (LOW)
OW 3.3V(pulse)
5 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI I DC0V/ IH Clock signal (HI)
GH 3.3V(pulse)
6 3.3V2_FUSE I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
7 GND - - Ground

2 IH_RELAY I DC0V/3.3V IH relay signal
3 GND - - Ground
8-64
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(11)Fuser high voltage PWB

(11-1)Connector position
FSR1
1 3
YC1
Figure 8-23
(11-2)PWB photograph
Figure 8-24

Destination
YC1:Feed image PWB
FSR1 : Fuser discharge needle

s age
YC1 1 FSR_OFFSET_C I Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
NT
2 +24V3_IL_F1_FE I DC24V DC24V power input
T1
3 GND - - Ground
FSR1 SP_CNT O Analog Fuser high voltage output
8-65
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8-2 PWB description (Option)

(1) PF PWB (PF-7100)
1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-25
8-66
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 8-26
8-67
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Paper sensor 1, Upper paper level sensor 1, Lower paper level sensor 1, Paper length sensor 1, Cas-
sette sensor 1
YC4:Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor 1/2, Right cover switch, Paper width sensor 1/2
YC5:Paper sensor 2, Upper paper level sensor 2, Lower paper level sensor 2, Paper length sensor 2, Cas-
sette sensor 2
YC6:Lift motor 1/2
YC8:Feed motor
YC9:Conveying clutch 1/2, Feed clutch 1/2
YC10:PF PWB
YC11:Engine PWB
YC12:Engine PWB
YC13:PF PWB
YC14:Retard sensor 1/2

tor s age
YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 CAS1_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 1: On/Off
4 3.3V4_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 CAS1_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 CAS1_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Lower paper level sensor 1: On/Off
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_SE I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
NS
12 GND - - Not used
NS
14 GND - - Ground
NS
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS1_SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 1: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ULIM_SW_1 I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
8-68
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 6 VER_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor 1: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor 2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 1: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
19 CAS2_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width switch 2: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
NS
12 GND - - Not used
NS
14 GND - - Ground
NS
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS2_SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
18 NC - - Not used
8-69
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 1 control signal
2 L_MOT1_DR O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 1 control signal
3 L_MOT2_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 2 control signal
YC8 1 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
5 LD I DC0V/24V Paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O DC0V/24V Conveying clutch 1: On/Off

3 FEED_CL1 O DC0V/24V Feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O DC0V/24V Conveying clutch 2: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O DC0V/24V Feed clutch 2: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 - - Not used
10 24V1 - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off

2 3.3V3 I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
3 GND - - Ground
4 PF_CAS1_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Cassette 1 select signal
6 EN_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8-70
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC12 7 EN_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 EN_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 EN_PAU I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OP I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

EN
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 AN_PF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 AN_PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off

2 RETARD_SENS_ I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 1: On/Off
1
3 GND - - Ground
2
6 GND - - Ground
8-71
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) PF PWB (PF-7110)

1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
8-72
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Paper sensor 1, Lower paper level sensor 1, Upper paper level sensor 1, Cassette sensor 1
YC4:Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor, Right cover switch, Horizontal conveying sensor
YC5:Paper sensor 2, Lower paper level sensor 2, Upper paper level sensor 2, Cassette sensor 2
YC6:Lift motor 1/2
YC8:Feed motor
YC9:Vertical conveying clutch, Right feed clutch 1, Left feed clutch 2, Horizontal conveying clutch 1/2
YC10:PF PWB
YC11:Engine PWB
YC12:Engine PWB
YC13:PF PWB
YC14:Retard sensor 1/2

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_SE I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 1: On/Off
NS
12 GND - - Not used
13 CAS1_SIZE2_SE - - Not used
NS
14 GND - - Not used
NS

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 VER_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
8-73
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V Horizontal conveying sensor 1: On/Off
15 3.3V4 - - Not used
16 P0R_SW - - Not used
17 GND - - Not used
18 3.3V5 - - Not used
19 P0L_SW - - Not used
20 GND - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
NS
12 GND - - Ground
13 CAS2_SIZE2_SE I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
NS
14 GND - - Not used
NS
16 GND - - Not used
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 1 control signal

3 L_MOT2_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 2 control signal
8-74
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
5 LD I DC0V/24V Paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O DC0V/24V Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off

3 FEED_CL1 O DC0V/24V Right feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O DC0V/24V Horizontal conveying clutch 1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O DC0V/24V Left feed clutch 2: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 O DC0V/24V Horizontal conveying clutch 2: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off

2 3.3V3 I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
3 GND - - Ground
6 EN_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 EN_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 EN_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
8-75
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC12 10 EN_PAU I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OP I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

EN
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 AN_PF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 AN_PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off

1
3 GND - - Ground
2
6 GND - - Ground
8-76
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) PF PWB (PF-7120)

1 YC12 3 1 YC11 4
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1
1
YC15 YC2 19
4
8 1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
YC18 YC3 YC6

1 12
Figure 8-29
Figure 8-30
8-77
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC5:Cassette sensor, Feed solenoid, Paper sensor, Lift upper limit sensor, Feed sensor
YC6:Upper paper level sensor 1/Lower paper level sensor 2, Lift lower limit sensor, Deck sensor
YC8:Lift motor
YC11:PF PWB
YC13:PF PWB
YC15:PF feed clutch
YC18:Conveying motor

tor s age
2 CVROP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Set sensor: On/Off
3 VER_CL - - Not used
4 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
5 VCVSW_3.3V1 - - Not used
6 GND - - Not used
7 VCVSW - - Not used
9 FDR_SOLA O DC0V/24V Feed solenoid (absorption): On/Off
10 FDR_SOLK O DC0V/24V Feed solenoid (retention): On/Off
11 EPRSW_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 EPRSW I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor: On/Off
14 RULMSW_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
15 3.3V4 - - Ground
16 RULMSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
18 P0RSW I DC0V/3.3V Feed sensor: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 LDPSW1_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 LDPSW1 I DC0V/3.3V Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
4 LDPSW2_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 LDPSW2 I DC0V/3.3V Lower paper level sensor 2: On/Off
7 SZSW2_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 SZSW2 I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
8-78
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC6 10 DEK_OPN1_3.3V - - Not used
2
11 GND - - Ground
12 DEK_OPN1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper Feeder sensor: On/Off
13 NC - - Not used
YC8 1 OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal

2 OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal

2 GND - - Ground
3 24V2 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC13 1 SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PAUSE I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
7 DEK_OPN1 O DC0V/3.3V Deck open/close signal output
8 DEK_OPN2 - - Not used
9 +3.3V4 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
10 GND - - Ground
11 SD_FINAL_SENS
12 PF_FINAL_SENS - - Not used
YC15 1 FDR_CL O DC0V/24V Feed clutch: On/Off

YC18 1 FMOT_CH_A I DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal

2 FMOT_CH_B I DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
3 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
4 FMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
8-79
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC18 5 FMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Paper feed motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 FMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor stop signal
5 GND - - Ground
8-80
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) DP PWB (DP-7100)

4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
5 1
5 YC11
16 YC2
YC1
1 12
YC3
4
1 YC12
4
1
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
8-81
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Engine PWB
YC4 : Feed sensor
YC5:Top cover sensor
YC6 : Original length sensor, Original width sensor
YC7 : Registration sensor, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor, Lift lower limit sensor
YC8 : Original sensor
YC9 : Feed motor, Conveying motor
YC10 : Feedshift motor
YC11 : Lift motor, Reversing motor
YC16 : LED PWB, Feedshift sensor, Lift upper limit sensor
YC17 : Exit sensor

tor s age
YC3 1 ENG_TMG O DC0V/3.3V Timing signal
2 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
4 ENG_CLK I DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG_SI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 ENG_SO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 DP_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O DC0V/3.3V Feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I DC0V/3.3V DC3.3V power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I DC24V DC24V power input

2 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Feed sensor: On/Off
4 NC - - -

2 GND - - Ground
8-82
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 3 +R24V I DC0V/24V Interlock rear 24V
YC6 1 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original length sensor: On/Off
5 HSIZE I Analog Original width sensor
6 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
3 RGST_SW I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
6 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
7 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V DP open/close sensor: On/Off
10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output to sensor
11 GND - - Ground
12 LF_DNSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off

2 SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 FMOT_CH_A I DC0V/ Paper feed motor control signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 FMOT_CH_B I DC0V/ Paper feed motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 FMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
5 FMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Paper feed motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 FMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor stop signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output
8-83
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 9 CMOT_CH_A I DC0V/ Conveying motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 CMOT_CH_B I DC0V/ Conveying motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
12 CMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor rotation switching signal
13 CMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Conveying motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
14 CMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor stop signal
15 GND - - Ground
1 SFT_A1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal

2 SFT_B1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
3 SFT_A3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
4 SFT_B3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
YC11 1 LIFT_A1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal

2 LIFT _B1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
3 LIFT _A3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
4 LIFT _B3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
5 RMOT_CH_A I DC0V/ Reversing motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 RMOT_CH_B I DC0V/ Reversing motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 RMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Reversing motor rotation switching signal
9 RMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Reversing motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 RMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Reversing motor stop signal
11 GND - - Ground
YC16 1 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal

4 GND - - Ground
5 SFT_HP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Feedshift sensor: On/Off
8-84
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
7 GND - - Ground
8 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 EXIT_SW I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
8-85
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) DP PWB (DP-7110)

3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC3 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4 1
14 B1 1 3
1
B13
YC8
Figure 8-33
Figure 8-34
8-86
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Engine PWB
YC2 : Original length sensor, Original sensor, Lift lower limit sensor, Original width sensor
YC4 : Lift upper limit sensor, Feed sensor, Exit sensor, LED PWB, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor
YC5 : Feed motor, Registration motor, Lift motor
YC6:Top cover sensor
YC7 : Drive fan motor
YC8 : CIS fan motor
YC10 : SHD PWB
YC14:Conveying motor

tor s age
YC1 1 ENG_TMG O DC0V/3.3V Timing signal
2 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG SEL I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
4 ENG CLK I DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG_SI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 ENG_SO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 DP_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O DC0V/3.3V Feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I DC0V/3.3V DC3.3V power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I DC24V DC24V power output
YC2 1 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original length sensor: On/Off
4 LNG_CLK O DC0V/ Sensor LED clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 GND - - Ground
6 SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original sensor: On/Off
9 GND - - Ground
8-87
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC2 10 LF_DNSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
11 WIDE3 I DC0V/3.3V Original width sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
YC4 A01 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A02 GND - - Ground
A03 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
A04 GND - - Ground
A05 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Feed sensor: On/Off
A06 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A08 RGST_SW(V) - - Not used
A09 +3.3V - - Not used
A10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
B01 NC - - Not used
B02 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output
B03 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal
B05 GND - - Ground
B06 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
B07 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B08 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B09 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
B11 ANODE - - Not used
B13 SKEW_SW - - Not used
YC5 1 FEED_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal

2 FEED_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
3 FEED_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
4 FEED_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
5 RGST_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
8-88
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 6 RGST_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
7 RGST_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
8 RGST_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
9 LIFT_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
10 LIFT_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
11 LIFT_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
12 LIFT_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V DC24V power input
YC7 1 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output

2 FAN_REM1 I DC0/DC24V Drive fan motor remote signal
YC8 1 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output

2 FAN_REM2 I DC0/DC24V CIS fan motor remote signal
YC10 1 CIS_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CIS sensor: On/Off

2 SHD_CLK O DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 SHD_SO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 SHD_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
5 SHD_PAGEST O DC0V/3.3V Timing input for the sub-scanning effec-
tive range (VSYNC)
6 RESETN O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMON I DC0V/3.3V Monitoring signal for the sub-scanning
effective range signal
8 SHD_SI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 SHD_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication sync signal
10 NC - - -
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 CNVY4_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
8-89
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC14 2 CNVY3_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
3 CNVY2_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
4 CNVY1_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
5 REVE4_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
6 REVE2_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
7 REVE1_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
8 REVE3_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
8-90
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) DP Interface PWB (for DP-7110)

7
YC2
1
YC1
1 40
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36
8-91
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Main PWB
YC2 : SHD PWB

tor s age
5 5.0V3 I DC5V DC5V power input
6 PCIEN_DP2M O DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
12 PCIEP_M2DP I DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
14 PCIEN_M2DP I DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
16 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
20 PCIEP_REFCLK_ O DC0V/0.7V PCIex reference clock
DP2M
21 GND - - Ground
22 PCIEN_REFCLK_ O DC0V/0.7V PCIex reference clock
DP2M
23 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 PCIERC_SWRST I DC0V/3.3V PCIex reset input
_N_M2DP
29 GND - - Ground
30 DP_RST_N I DC0V/3.3V System reset input
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
8-92
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
36 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground

2 NC - - Not connected
3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I DC1.0V/1.5V Image data
6 RX0P I DC1.0V/1.5V Image data
7 GND - - Ground
8-93
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) DF PWB (DF-7100)

1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 12 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC15 YC10
9
1 YC6
1 5
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 4 1
Figure 8-37
Figure 8-38
8-94
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Feed image PWB
YC4 : Front cover sensor
YC5:Feed image PWB
YC6:PH PWB
YC7:PH PWB
YC8 : Exit motor, Slide motor, Exit release motor, Middle motor, Entry motor
YC9:Paddle motor, Side registration motor 1/2
YC10:Stapler
YC11:Tray motor
YC13 : Paper press solenoid
YC14 : Paper LED
YC16 : Exit paper sensor
YC17 : Paddle sensor, Entry sensor
YC19 : Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 1, Bundle exit sensor, Paper press sensor 1/2, Adjust-
ing sensor, Slide sensor
YC20 : DF set sensor

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Front cover sensor: On/Off
3 TOP COV - - Not used
SOURCE
4 TOP COVSIG - - Not used
YC5 1 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal

2 ENG SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
3 ENG DI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
4 ENG DO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
7 ENG CLK I DC0V/ Serial clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
8-95
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC6 1 5V - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM - - Not used
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor remote signal
8 PU RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
9 PU SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
10 PU CLK O DC0V/ Serial clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
11 PU DI O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
12 PU DO I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)

YC8 1 EXIT MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal

2 EXIT MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
3 EXIT MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal
5 STP MOV MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
9 EJE RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit release motor control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
13 MIDDLE MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
8-96
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC8 14 MIDDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
15 MIDDLE MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
17 ENTRY MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
19 ENTRY MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
YC9 1 PADDLE MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal

2 PADDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
3 PADDLE MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
5 SIDE REG R MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
9 SIDE REG F MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
YC10 1 STP MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Staple motor control signal

2 STP MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Staple motor control signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 LS I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit LS signal
8-97
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
13 HP I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit HP signal
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal

2 TRY MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal

2 PAP PRE SOL O DC0V/24V DFPPSOL: On/Off (absorption)
ACT
3 PAP PRE SOL O DC0V/24V DFPPSOL: On/Off (retention)
KEEP
YC14 1 5V O DC5V DC5V power output

2 LED O DC0V/5V Paper LED: On/Off
YC16 1 N.C - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
3 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PADDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
4 GND - - Ground
5 ENTRY SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
A sensor 2
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
A sensor 1
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS1: On/Off
SIG
8-98
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
A8 PH ENTRY SENS I DC0V/3.3V PH paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
A9 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 MTRY FULL O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 MTRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor: On/Off
SENS SIG
A13 PADDLE SENS A - - Not used
A15 PADDLE SENS - - Not used
SIG
B1 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B2 GND - Ground
B3 BUNDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
B4 PAP PRE UP O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 PAP PRE UP I DC0V/3.3V Paper pressing sensor 1: On/Off
SENS SIG
B7 PAP PRE LOW O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 PAP PRE LOW I DC0V/3.3V Paper pressing sensor 2: On/Off
SENS SIG
B10 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
B13 STP MOV SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC20 1 SET SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 SET SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Device sensor: On/Off
8-99
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) PH PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)

6 1 11 3 1 1 4
1
YC6 YC8 YC7 YC9
13
3
YC1
YC5
1
1 1
YC2
3
Figure 8-39

Destination
YC1:DF PWB
YC2:DF PWB
YC5 : PH motor
YC6 : PH solenoid, PH tank solenoid
YC7:PH entry sensor
YC8 : PH tank full sensor, PH tank set sensor, PH pulse sensor, PH home position sensor
YC9 : PH tank full sensor

tor s age
YC1 1 PH_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
2 PH_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)
3 PH_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 PH_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 PH_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Motor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 PH_EN_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
8-100
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age

YC5 1 CCW O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal (clockwise)

2 NC - - Not used
3 CW O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal (reverse)
YC6 1* 24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output

2* PHSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Punch-hole switching solenoid (absorp-
tion)
3* PHSOL_RET O DC0V/24V Punch-hole switching solenoid (return)
5 TNKSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Tank solenoid (absorption)
6 TNKSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Tank solenoid (retention)

2 PH EN SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off

2 TNK FULL PLS O DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo transmitter): On/
Off
3 SENS 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 PHTNK_SET I DC0V/3.3V PH tank set switch On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 PHMOT PLS I DC0V/3.3V Pulse sensor: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 PHMOT HP I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off

2 TNK FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
8-101
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC9 4 TNK FULL PLS I DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
*Not applied to 100V model
8-102
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) DF PWB (DF-7110)

1 6 14 1 12 1
30
16
YC19 YC14 YC15 YC22
15
1
YC13
4 1
11 1
1 18
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
1
5
YC1
1
8
YC12
YC2
1
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
5 1
YC3 YC7
7 1
YC9
1
19 1
YC11 8 1
YC21 4 YC5 1 2 YC8 1 YC10
Figure 8-40
8-103
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 8-41
8-104
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Exit cover sensor, Front cover sensor
YC4:Feed image PWB
YC5:Feed image PWB
YC6:MT PWB
YC7:PH PWB
YC8:PH PWB
YC9:BF PWB
YC10:BF PWB
YC12:Slide motor, Exit motor, Middle motor, Entry motor, Exit release motor
YC13:Tray paper full sensor 2
YC14:Shift release motor, Shift motor 1/2, Exit clutch
YC16:Exit fan
YC17:Stapler
YC18:Relief drum motor, Feedshift solenoid 1/2/3
YC19:Tray motor
YC20:Drum sensor, Middle sensor
YC21:Sub exit sensor, Sub tray full sensor, Entry sensor, DF operation PWB, Tray paper full sensor 1
YC22:Slide sensor, Side registration sensor 1/2, Exit paper sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Tray sensor 1/2,
Paddle sensor, Adjusting sensor, Shift set sensor
YC23:Shift sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 3/4/5, Shift release sensor

tor s age
2 EXIT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Exit cover sensor: On/Off
3 FRONT COV O DC24V DC24V power output
SOURCE

2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)

2 GND - - Ground
8-105
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
7 MT DO O DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
8 MT DIN I DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
9 MT CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial clock signal
10 MT SEL O DC0V/5V Select signal
11 MT RDY I DC0V/5V Ready signal

4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM I DC0V/3.3V PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
11 PU DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output

YC9 1 BF DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input

2 BF DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
3 BF CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
4 BF SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 BF RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8-106
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 ST MOV MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal

2 ST MOV MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
3 ST MOV MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
4 ST MOV MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
YC13 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1_LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
8-107
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC14 1 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
2B
2 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
1B
2A
1A
5 SFT R MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
6 SFT R MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
7 SFT R MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
8 SFT R MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
9 SFT F MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
10 SFT F MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
11 SFT F MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
12 SFT F MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
13 EXIT CL O DC0V/24V Exit clutch: On/Off

2B
1B
2A
1A
2B
1B
2A
1A
8-108
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC16 1 EXIT FAN O DC0V/24V Exit fan 1: On/Off
MOT_SIDE
3 EXIT FAN O DC0V/24V Exit fan 2: On/Off
MOT_SIDE
5 EXIT FAN O DC0V/24V Exit fan 3: On/Off
MOT_CENT
YC17 1 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal

2 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
9 GND - - Ground
11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
YC18 1 DRM MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal

2 DRM MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
3 DRM MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
4 DRM MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
6 MID_DRM SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 (absorption): On/Off
ACT
7 MID_DRM SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 (retention): On/Off
KEEP
9 DRM_BF SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 (absorption): On/Off
ACT
10 DRM_BF SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 (retention): On/Off
KEEP
8-109
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC18 12 SUB_MID SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 (absorption): On/Off
ACT
13 SUB_MID SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 (retention): On/Off
KEEP
YC19 1 BRAKE O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal

2 DIR O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
3 CLK O DC0V/5V Clock signal
4 ENABLE O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC20 1 DRM SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 DRM SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Drum sensor: On/Off
4 MID EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 MID EJE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC21 1 STRY EJE SENS O DC5V DC5V power output

A
2 GND - - Ground
3 STRY EJE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Sub exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
5 GND - - Ground
6 STRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Sub tray paper full sensor: On/Off
SENS SIG
7 STRY FULL O DC0V/ Pulse signal
SENS PLS 3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
SIG
11 LED1 O DC0V/5V LED output
8-110
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC21 14 LED4 O DC0V/5V LED output
15 KEY1 I DC0V/3.3V Key input
16 KEY2 I DC0V/3.3V Key input
17 GND - - Ground
19 MTRY U SENS K O DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off
YC22 1 STAPLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 STAPLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
4 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
5 GND - - Ground
6 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
7 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
8 GND - - Ground
9 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
10 GND - - Ground
11 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper sensor: On/Off
13 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 BUNDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
16 MTRY HP1 SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
17 GND - - Ground
18 MTRY HP1 SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
19 MTRY HP2 SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
20 GND - - Ground
21 MTRY HP2 SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
22 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
8-111
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
24 PADDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
25 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
26 GND - - Ground
27 ADJUST SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
28 SFT SET SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 SFT SET SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift set sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC23 1 SFT F HP SENS O DC5V DC5V power output

A
2 GND - - Ground
3 SFT F HP SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
4 SFT R HP SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
5 GND - - Ground
6 SFT R HP SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
7 MTRY HALF O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
8 GND - - Ground
9 MTRY HALF I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 3: On/Off
SENS SIG
10 MTRY BF SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
11 GND - - Ground
12 MTRY BF SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 5: On/Off
SIG
13 MTRY FULL O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
14 GND - - Ground
15 MTRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 4: On/Off
SENS SIG
16 SFT RELS SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
17 GND - - Ground
18 SFT RELS SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift release sensor: On/Off
SIG
8-112
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)MT PWB
YC1
YC7 1
13 1
5 1
YC2
20
11
YC6
1 7
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
Figure 8-42
8-113
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:Tray sensor 1/2/3/4/5, Exit sensor 2
YC2:Exit sensor 1, Home position sensor, Tray sensor 6/7
YC3:DF PWB
YC4:Right cover switch
YC5:Motor

tor s age
2 OFS1 I DC0V/5V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
16 LED O DC0V/5V LED signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 TEJS I DC0V/5V(pulse) Exit sensor 2: On/Off (photo receptor)

2 LED O DC0V/5V(pulse) Exit sensor 1: Off/On (light emission)
3 GND - - Ground
4 HP SIG I DC0V/5V Home position sensor: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
8-114
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
13 NC - - Not used
YC3 1 - - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 5V I DC5V DC5V power input
8 SDI I DC0V/5V(pulse) MT serial communication data signal
9 SDO O DC0V/5V(pulse) MT serial communication data signal
10 SCLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) MT clock signal
11 SEL I DC0V/5V MT select signal
12 READY O DC0V/5V MT ready signal
YC4 1 R24V I DC24V DC24V power input

YC5 1 MOTOR_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT motor control signal

2 MOTORA O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT motor control signal
3 MOTORB O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT motor control signal
4 MOTOR_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) MT motor control signal
8-115
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)BF PWB
30 1 5 YC2 1 5 YC1 1
16
15 YC20 YC18 YC8
1 1
9
1
1 1
YC5
YC7 4
YC11 7
12
1
12
YC3
4
7
1
YC16 YC19
7
1
1
YC4
6 2
1
YC15 YC9
2
1
10 YC13 1
20
2 YC14 1 YC12 1 YC17 3 YC10 4 YC6 1

1 13
1
Figure 8-43
8-116
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Main PWB
YC4:Left cover sensor
YC5:Main PWB
YC6:BF set sensor, Tray open/close sensor
YC7:Main PWB
YC10:Adjustment motor 1/2, Side registration motor 1/2, Entry motor
YC13:Staple motor
YC15:Blade motor
YC16:Main motor
YC17:Feedshift solenoid
YC20:Adjustment sensor 1/2, Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray full sensor, Exit sensor, Conveying sensor,
Paper sensor, Blade sensor, Entry sensor

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Left cover sensor: On/Off
YC5 1 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Set sensor On/Off
4 EXIT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Tray open/close switch: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
6 ENG_DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
7 ENG_DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
8-117
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 1 EXTMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
2 EXTMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
3 EXTMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
4 EXTMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
5 MDLMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
6 MDLMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
7 MDLMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
8 MDLMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
9 CINMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
10 CINMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
11 CINMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
12 CINMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
13 EXCMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
14 EXCMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
15 EXCMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
16 EXCMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
17 STMMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
18 STMMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
19 STMMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
20 STMMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal

2 STLS2 I DC0V/5V Staple unit LS2 signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 STLS1 I DC0V/5V Staple unit LS1 signal
5 STHP I DC0V/5V Staple unit HP signal
6 STMOT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Staple motor control signal
8 FGND - - Ground
YC15 1 FLDMOT_BRK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal

2 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
8-118
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC16 1 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal

2 FLDMOT_ALM O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 GND - - Ground

2 3FSOL_ATT O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
3 3FSOL_HLD O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (return)
2 GND - - Ground
3 BDLFT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 WDL_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor: On/Off On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
12 OUT I DC0V/3.3V Exit sensor: On/Off
14 GND - - Ground
15 TRANSPORT I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 PAPER I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
21 WDU_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
23 GND - - Ground
24 BLD_HP I DC0V/3.3V Blade sensor: On/Off
8-119
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
26 BULOW_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 2: On/Off
28 GND - - Ground
29 CARRY_IN I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
8-120
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12)PH PWB (PH-7)

YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
Figure 8-44
Figure 8-45
8-121
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1:DF PWB
YC2:DF PWB
YC3:Slide motor
YC4:Motor
YC5:Solenoid, Paper edge sensor 1, Tank full sensor
YC6:Slide sensor
YC7:Paper edge sensor 2
YC8:Pulse sensor, Home position sensor
YC9:Tank set switch

tor s age
YC1 1 PH_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
2 PH_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)
3 PH_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 PH_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 PH_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
7 PHPES_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Paper edge detection: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
12 5.0V I DC5V DC5V power input

YC3 1 PHADJ_MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal

2 PHADJ_MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
3 PHADJ_MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
4 PHADJ_MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
YC4 1 PHMOT_N O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal

2 NC - - Not used
3 PHMOT_P O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal
8-122
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 2 PHSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
3 PHSOL_RET O DC0V/24V Solenoid: On/Off (return)
4 PHLED_A O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 A: On/Off
5 PHLED_B O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 B: On/Off
6 PHLED_C O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 C: On/Off
7 PHLED_D O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 D: On/Off
8 PHLED_3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
9 5.0V O DC5V DC5V power output
10 PHTNK_FUL I DC0V/5V Tank full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 PHADJ_HP I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
YC7 1 PHPES_DET I DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 2: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 PHMOT_PLS I DC0V/3.3V Pulse sensor: On/Off
4 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHMOT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 PHTNK_SET I DC0V/3.3V PH tank set switch On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
8-123
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(13)DF PWB (DF-7120)

1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 13 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1 1
YC15 YC10
9 YC12
1 YC6
1 5 6
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 6 1
Figure 8-46
Figure 8-47
8-124
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3:Feed image PWB
YC4:Front cover sensor, Top cover sensor
YC5:Feed image PWB
YC6:PH PWB
YC7:PH PWB
YC8:Exit motor, Slide motor, Exit release motor, Entry motor, Middle motor
YC10:Stapler
YC11:Tray motor
YC16:Tray paper full sensor 2
YC17:Entry sensor
YC18:Middle sensor
YC19:Side registration sensor 1/2, Exit sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Paddle sensor, Tray sensor 1/2/3, Slide
sensor

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground

3 TOP COV O DC24V DC24V power output
SOURCE
4 TOP COV SIG I DC0V/24V Top cover sensor: On/Off
YC5 1 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal

3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground

8-125
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM O DC0V/3.3V PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
11 PU DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output

YC8 1 EXIT MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Exit motor control signal

2B
1B
2A
1A
2B
1B
2A
1A
8-126
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC8 18 MIDDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal

2B
1B
2A
1A
2B
1B
2A
1A
YC10 1 STPMOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal

2 STPMOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
9 GND - - Ground
11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
8-127
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
2 TRY MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
YC16 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
6 MTRY U SENS K O DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 MID EJE SENS A - - Not used

2 GND - - Not used
3 MID EJE SENS - - Not used
SIG
4 GND - - Ground
SIG
YC18 1 MID EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 MID EJE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output

A
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Exit paper sensor: On/Off
A9 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
8-128
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
A12 BUNDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
A13 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A14 GND - - Ground
A15 PADDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
B1 MTRY HP SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 MTRY HP SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
B4 MTRY HALF O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 MTRY HALF I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 2: On/Off
SENS SIG
B7 MTRY FULL O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 MTRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 3: On/Off
SENS SIG
B10 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
B13 STP MOV SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
8-129
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8-130
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
9 Appendixes
9-1 Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
37.7 mm/1 15/32 " Chager roller
62.9 mm/2 15/32 " Sleeve roller

64.7 mm/2 17/32 " Secondly transfer roller
94.2 mm/3 11/16 " Drum

96.5 mm/3 25/32 " Heat roller (Fuser belt)
109.9 mm/4 11/16 " Press roller
845.0 mm/33 1/4 " Primaly transfer belt
*: The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.
9-1
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
9-2 Environmental command

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters can be registered or
changed by the prescribe FRPO command and set as the default condition of the printer at power on
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Setting environmental command

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, recommend to print out a service status page, so you will know
the parameter values before the changes are made. It is possible to return all FRPO parameters to the default
condition with the FRPO INIT command. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Setting the emulation to PCL6
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Items FRPO Setting value Factory

default set-
ting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inch 0
A2 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inch 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inch 17
Page width A7 Integer value in inch 17
PRESCRIBE compatible mode B0 0 to 255 0
2 (100V)
Pattern resolution at power-up B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
No. of copy at power-up C0 1 to 999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font* C2 Middle 2 digits of start up font number 0
C3 Last 2 digits of start up font number 0
C5 First 2 digits of start up font number 0
PCL font switching C8 0:HP compatible mode 0
32:Compatibility mode
9-2
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

default set-
ting
Print density control parameter D4 Pale 3
2: Relatively pale
3: Normal
4: Relevantly dark
5: Dark
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99: Accumulating with the value of FRPO 5
S5 (0:5 K bite)
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
1 (100V)
Reduction ratio (100V model only) J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
Auto linefeed mode (100V model J7 0: Auto linefeed 0

only) 1: No auto linefeed
(Japanese emulation only)
Horizontal offset (100V model K0 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
only) K1 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Vertical offset (100V model only)* K2 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
K3 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Kanji font number setting K4 0: Same as V7 0
(100V model only) 1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots
New/old JIS code switching K6 0: JIS X 0208: 1990 0
(100V model only) 1: JIS X 0208: 1978
8: JIS X 0213: 2004
KIR mode N0 0: OFF 2
2: ON
Selecting duplex printing mode N4 0: OFF 0
1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)
Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes 10
Eco Print mode N6 0: OFF 0
2: ON
Resolution(35/40 ppm only) N8 0: 300dpi 1
1: 600dpi
3: 1200dpi
9-3
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

default set-
ting
Default emulation mode P1 6 : PCL6 (except PCL XL) 6
9 : KPDL 9 (120V)
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: CR
2: CR+LF
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: LF
2: CR+LF
KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0
1: Auto switching 1(120V
model)
KPDL auto switching alternate P5 Same as P1 (except 9) 6
emulation
AES option P7 If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor 10

Page exit command and action alternate emulation after the AES is started, it 11 (120V)
when automatic emulation switch- is processed in KPDL.
ing (AES) is triggered 0: All page exit commands
1: None
2: All page exit command and Prescribe EXIT
command
3: Prescribe EXIT command only
4: ^L command only
6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command
If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor
alternate emulation after the AES is started, it
is processed in the alternate emulation .
10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed
in the alternate emulation.
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)
Setting stacker at power-up R0 1: Inner tray 1
3: When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed
7: When the 4000-sheet finisher is installed
9-4
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

default set-
ting
Paper size(start-up) R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
10: ISO A3
11: JIS B4
12: Ledger
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
20: B4toA4(100V model only)
21: A3toA4(100V model only)
22: A4toA4[98%](100V model only)
23: STKtoA4(100V model only)
24: STKtoB4(100V model only)
30: C4
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
Paper size(start-up) R2 38: 12x18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4
The default paper feeding source R4 0: Multi purpose tray 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
Sort bin full detection S3 0: Stop at paper full detection 0
1: Changing output tray at paper full detection
9-5
2SA/2RJ/2NK

default set-
ting
A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1
1: ON 0 (100V)
Host buffer size accumulated S5 0: 10KB 1
value 1: 100KB
(H8 value and integration) 2: 1MB
Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Line spacing U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (decimal value) 0
Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (decimal value) 0
Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41
1: France 0 (100V)
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53

1: IBM 0 (100V)
6: PCL
Default font pitch* U8 Default font pitch/integer 10

U9 Default font pitch/decimal 0
9-6
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

default set-
ting
Initial ANK outline font size* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font / size at 0
power-up
Upper 2-digit/valid value range: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font / size at 12
power-up
Lower 2-digit/valid value range: 00 to 99
V2 2 digits decimal value of ANK outline font / size 0
at power-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial ANK outline font name* V3 ANK outline font name at start-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font size (100 V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font 0
V model only)* / size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font / 10
size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font / 0
size at start-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial Kanji outline font name V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMIN-
(100V model only)* CHO-W3
Font type selection (courier and V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
letter Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
9-7
2SA/2RJ/2NK

default set-
ting
Paper type (MP tray) X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
8: Rough (except 100V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Hagaki
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
18: Index Tab
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
Paper type (Paper cassettes 1,2) X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
Media type X3 1: Plain 1
(Option paper cassette 3 to 5) X4 3: Preprinted
X5 5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
9-8
2SA/2RJ/2NK

default set-
ting
Cassette selection mode (PCL) X9 0: Selecting paper cassette according to an 0
escape sequence compatible with HP-
LJ5Si
0: Selecting paper cassette according to an
escape sequence compatible with HP-
LJ8000
Auto error clear at an error Y0 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
Detecting paper error at duplex Y3 0: Not detected 127
printing 127: Detected
Detecting an error of paper size
and type at fixed paper feeding
source.
Forced duplex printing setting Y4 0: OFF 0
(Media type is Preprinted, Pre- 1: ON
punched and Letterhead only)
PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zooming according to paper size 0
1: Selecting paper that paper size specified in
the PDF.
2: Select from Letter or A4 based on the paper
size specified in the PDF, and zoom
(enlarge or reduce) it according to the paper
used.
3: Print from Letter or A4 based on the paper
size specified in the PDF.
8: Printed in full magnification
9: Select from Letter or A4 based on the paper
size specified in the PDF.
10: Select from Letter or A4 based on the
paper size specified in the PDF, and zoom
(enlarge or reduce) it according to the paper
used.
13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)
Job box error control Y6 0: No error control 3
1: Output the error list
2: Display the error
3: Display the error and print the error report
*: Ignored depending on emulation
9-9
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
9-3 Image adjustment procedure chart
Adjust- Maintenance mode Setting procedures

Reference
ment pro- Item and adjustment contents Image Remark
No. Mode page Procedure Adjustment
cedure
Adjusting the center line of the MP U034 LSU Out Left P.6-39 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tray 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) [LSU Out Left]-[MPT] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the [Duplex].
1 Change the LSU writing start tim- 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
ing. (Test pattern output)
5. Press the System Menu key. Press the [Stop] key.
6. Execute the adjustment.
Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left P.6-39 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
cassettes 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) [LSU Out Left] - change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
[Cassette1] to [Cassette5] 2. Press the Start key to set the [Duplex].
2 Change the LSU writing start tim- 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value.
ing. 4. Press the Start key.
(Test pattern output) Press the [Stop] key.
5. Press the System Menu key.
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U034 LSU Out Top P.6-39 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tration of the MP tray 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(Adjustment of writing) [Lsu Out Top] - [MPT(L)] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
3 Change the secondary paper feed 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
timing. (Test pattern output)
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U034 LSU Out Top P.6-39 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tration of the cassette 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(Adjustment of writing) [Lsu Out Top] - [Cassette(L)] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
4 Change the secondary paper feed 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
timing.
(Test pattern output)
Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead P.6-189 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
[Lead] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
5 timing. 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
9-10
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Reference
cedure
Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-189 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) 1. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
[Trail] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination end 2. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
6 timing. 3. Press the Start key. setting value.
Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-189 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) C Margin 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
Select [A Margin] or [C Margin]. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
7 start/end timing. 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
Adjusting magnification of the U065 Main Scan P.6-60 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the main scanning 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
direction [Main Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
8 Processes data. 4. Place an original and press the Start key. setting value.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output)
Adjusting magnification of the U065 Sub Scan P.6-60 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the sub scanning direc- P.6-66 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
tion (scanning adjustment) U070 Sub Scan(F) U065: [Sub Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
Sub Scan(B) U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or 2. Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scanning Sub Scan(CIS) [Sub Scan(CIS)] setting value. U070: When using document processor
9 speed. *When the setting value is increased, the image
get longer.
4. Place an original and press the Start key. Press the [Stop] key.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output)
Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-63 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U067: When using on the contact glass
(Adjustment of reading) P.6-68 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When adjusting for the rotate copy, select
U067: [Front] change the setting value. [Rotate].
Changes the original scan start U072 Front U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS] 2. Press the Start key to set the *When the setting value is increased, the image
timing. Back 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value. moves leftward.
10 CIS 4. Place an original and press the Start key.
U072: When using document processor
(Test copy output) (Test copy output) Press the [Stop] key.
*Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of
duplex mode.
6. Execute the adjustment. *When the setting value is increased, the image
moves rightward.
9-11
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Reference
cedure
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U066 Front P.6-62 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U066: When using on the contact glass
tration Rotate P.6-66 2. Press the System Menu key. cursor or the numeric keys, *When adjusting for the rotate copy, select
(Adjustment of reading) 3. Place an original and press the Start key. change the setting value. [Rotate].
U071 Front Head (Test copy output) (Test copy output) 2. Press the Start key to set the *When the setting value is increased, the image
Changes the original scan start Back Head 4. Press the System Menu key. setting value. moves forward.
11 timing.
5. Select the adjustment content.
U071: When using document processor
U066: [Front] or [Rotate] Press the [Stop] key.
*Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head]
time of duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves forward.
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the fol-
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Using DP: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Magnification Copy: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Using DP: ±2.5%
MTF correction
Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
Input gamma in color mode
Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Color correction matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Copy: 2.0mm or less
Using DP: 2.5mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), the fol- Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
lowing adjustments are automatically made: (left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less(table)
*:When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly 1.5mm/100mm or less(document processor)
positioned against the original.
Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
*:DP adjustment original (ChartB)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
5 mm ±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)

Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the specified original, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
9-12
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original the following adjustments are automatically made: (Refer to P.6-196)
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)
Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
Adjust-
ment pro- Item and adjustment contents Image Setting procedures Remark
cedure
Main scan direction diagonal 1. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8).
[Original]
A B
image adjustment 2. Remove rib (c) at front side and remove b
(Adjustment of reading) upper right cover (b) in the direction of
P rin tin g d ire ctio n the arrow.
Adjust the height of the scanner 3. Remove the screw (e) that fixes the ISU
C D
unit. adjustment plate (d). a
[Output image W [Output image X
(A/C side is downward.)] (B/D side is downward.)] 4. Shift the ISU adjustment plate (d) in the
A B A B
adjustment direction. a
*:Ref. of moving amount
c
If you lower it by one step, it changes
by + 0.26 mm on the A / C side and -
C D C D
0.25 mm on the B / D side.
12 When A / C side goes down (output d
Compare the original with the output image and check the image pattern A)
side (A / C side or B / D side) where image shift occurs →Lower the ISU adjustment plate (d) by
*:Please use A3 original. shifting it in the direction of the arrow X
When B / D side goes down (output
image pattern B)
e
X
→Raise the ISU adjustment plate (d) by Y
shifting it in the direction of the arrow Y.
5. Tighten the screw (e) after the adjust-
ment is completed
6. Attach upper right cover (b) to the main
unit and fixed it with two screws (a).
9-13
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-4 Wiring diagram

(1) Engine PWB / Drive PWB
YC3 YC6 YC40 YC6

3.3V3_FUSE A12 A12 A1 A1 3.3V3_FUSE +5V0 A1 A1 A20 A20 +5V0_FUSE
3.3V2_FUSE A11 A11 A2 A2 3.3V2_FUSE +5V2 A2 A2 A19 A19 +5V2
3.3V2_FUSE A10 A10 A3 A3 3.3V2_FUSE GND A3 A3 A18 A18 GND
3.3V2_FUSE A9 A9 A4 A4 3.3V2_FUSE GND A4 A4 A17 A17 GND
GND A8 A8 A5 A5 GND +3.3V2 A5 A5 A16 A16 +3.3V2_FUSE
GND A5 A5 A8 A8 GND GND A8 A8 A13 A13 GND
REG_R_LED A4 A4 A9 A9 REG_R_LED GND A9 A9 A12 A12 GND
ID_SENS_R_S A3 A3 A10 A10 ID_SENS_R_S JS_SENS_AK A10 A10 A11 A11 JS_SENS_AK
ID_SENS_R_P A2 A2 A11 A11 ID_SENS_R_P FRONT_CO_OPEN A11 A11 A10 A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN
REG_F_LED A1 A1 A12 A12 REG_F_LED JS_SENS A12 A12 A9 A9 JS_SENS
KSS_INT A13 A13 A8 A8 DRM_EEP_SEL0
Relay Relay KSS_EN A14 A14 A7 A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_S B12 B12 B1 B1 ID_SENS_F_S KSS_CS A15 A15 A6 A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_P B11 B11 B2 B2 ID_SENS_F_P KSS_CLK A16 A16 A5 A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK(ENG to IMAGE)
REG_SENS B10 B10 B3 B3 REG_SENS KSS_SDI A17 A17 A4 A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI(IMAGE to ENG)
ATLAS_CLK(ENG to DRI) B9 B9 B4 B4 ATLAS_CLK KSS_SDO A18 A18 A3 A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO(ENG to IMAGE)
ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) B8 B8 B5 B5 ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) 3.3V3 A19 A19 A2 A2 3.3V3
ATLAS_EN(ENG to DRI) B7 B7 B6 B6 ATLAS_EN 3.3V_TH_CUT A20 A20 A1 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT
ATLAS_CS(ENG to DRI) B6 B6 B7 B7 ATLAS_CS
ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) B5 B5 B8 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) Relay Relay
MPF_ORG_SENS B4 B4 B9 B9 MPF_ORG_SENS DRUM HEAT B1 B1 B20 B20 DRUM HEAT
CAS1_2_OPEN B3 B3 B10 B10 CAS1_2_OPEN DF_CLK B2 B2 B19 B19 DF_CLK
REG_CL_REM B2 B2 B11 B11 REG_CL_REM DF_SDO B3 B3 B18 B18 DF_SDO
GND B1 B1 B12 B12 GND DF_SDI B4 B4 B17 B17 DF_SDI
DF_SEL B5 B5 B16 B16 DF_SEL
DF_RDY B6 B6 B15 B15 DF_RDY
DF_SYNC B7 B7 B14 B14 DF_SYNC
DF_DET B8 B8 B13 B13 DF_DET
FSR_TH_EDGE B9 B9 B12 B12 FSR_TH_EDGE
FSR_TH_CENT B10 B10 B11 B11 FSR_TH_CENT
FSR_TH_PRESS B11 B11 B10 B10 FSR_TH_PRESS
FSR_TH_MID B12 B12 B9 B9 FSR_TH_MID
FSR_ALARM B13 B13 B8 B8 FSR_ALARM
TPC_BK B14 B14 B7 B7 TPC_BK
DRUM_BK_MOT_REM B15 B15 B6 B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_REM
DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK B16 B16 B5 B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK
DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY B17 B17 B4 B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY
GND B18 B18 B3 B3 GND
+24V3IL_F2_FET2 B19 B19 B2 B2 +24V3IL_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT B20 B20 B1 B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
Engine PWB (1/7) YC42 YC28

DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM 1 1 18 18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK 2 2 17 17 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK
Feed drive PWB (1/3) DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
3
4
3
4
16
15
16
15
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE 5 5 14 14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE
VIB_MOT_REM 6 6 13 13 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DLP_FAN_REM 7 7 12 12 I2C_SCL
DLP_FAN_REM_HALF 8 8 11 11 I2C_SDA
TPC_M 9 9 10 10 TPC_M
TPC_C 10 10 9 9 TPC_C
TPC_Y 11 11 8 8 TPC_Y
DLP_COL_MOT_REM 12 12 7 7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
DLP_COL_MOT_CLK 13 13 6 6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
DLP_COL_MOT_DIR 14 14 5 5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
DLP_COL_MOT_RDY 15 15 4 4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY
DRUM_COL_MOT_REM 16 16 3 3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM
DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK 17 17 2 2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK
DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY 18 18 1 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 2 Relay 1 2 Relay 1 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner suction fan motor GND
24V
2
3
Relay 2
1
13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
2 2
Vibration motor BK 1 1
Main drive Feed image PWB (1/6)
9-14
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection

Engine PWB (2/7)
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K
GND 3 3 3 3 GND DP PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K YC16 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
15 2 B15 B15
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P2_KC 14 14 14 14 P2_KC
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P0_KC 15 15 15 15 P0_KC
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
GND
SD_CLK
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
GND
SD_CLK
DP
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V2IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V2
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM BD 3 3 2 2 BD A16 A16 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC TH 2 2 3 3 TH PD PWB A15 A15
Relay A14
GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND 3.3V 3 3 A14 3.3V2
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
CSI_M 38 38 38 38 CSI_M P GND 2 2 4 4 GND
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_M 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_M
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
DATAN2_M
GND
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
DATAN2_M
GND
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK Original sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6 A/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAP4_M 46 46 46 46 DATAP4_M CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
A 3 4 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
DATAN4_M
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN4_M
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor Scanner motor B 4 3 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
DATAP3_M 49 49 49 49 DATAP3_M 2 A1 A1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M B/ 6 1
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
GND 16 16 25 25 GND
AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
GND 14 14 27 27 GND
AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
GND 12 12 29 29 GND
AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
GND 8 8 33 33 GND
APC PWB AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
YC27 YC3
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
GND 3 3 6 6 GND
GND 4 4 5 5 GND
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
PGND
7
8
7
8
2
1
2
1
+24V4
PGND Laser scanner unit YC1 YC2
㸦4 beam㸧 +12V
+12V
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
+12V
+12V
NC 3 3 3 3 NC
LED PWB LED_PWM
LED_ENA
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
LED_PWM
LED_ENABLE
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1 GND 6 6 6 6 GND
2 2 Waste toner motor GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
Relay
4 4 TH
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT
Weight sensor
CCD PWB
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V
Image scanner unit

YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Power supply PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP
9-15
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Feed image PWB (Front side)

Transfer PWB Transfer connect PWB
YC2
TH 2 2 1 1 BELT_TH
Belt thermistor GND 1 1 2 2 GND YC1 YC2 YC3 YC32
+24V2_F1 10 1 +24V2_F1 +24V2_F1 10 10 A1 A1 +24V2_F1
TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK 9 2 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK 9 9 A2 A2 N.C.
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 A3 A3 TBLT_CLMOT_BWM
3.3V2 7 4 +3.3V2 3.3V2 7 7 A4 A4 +3.3V2
YC3 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 6 A5 A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
Vm(24V) 1 1 1 1 +24V2_F1 BELT_TH 5 Relay 6 BELT_TH BELT_TH 5 5 A6 A6 BELT_TH
P_GND 2 2 2 2 GND BLT_SCL 4 7 BLT_SCL BLT_SCL 4 4 A7 A7 BLT_SCL
BRAKE 3 3 3 3 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAKE GND 3 8 GND GND 3 3 A8 A8 GND
Belt cleaning motor PWM
CW/CCW
4
5
4
5
4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
9
10
GND
BLT_SDA
GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
2
1
A9
A10
A9 GND
A10 BLT_SDA
3.3V2 6 6 5 5 3.3V2
CHB 7 7
CHA 8 8 6 6 CHA
7 7 GND
- 1 2 1 2 A11 A11 +24V2_F1

Container solenoid K + 2
Relay 1 2 Relay 1 A12 A12 COTN_SOL_BK
A13 A13 +24V2_F1

A14 A14 COTN_SOL_M
A15 A15 +24V2_F1

A16 A16 COTN_SOL_C
A17 A17 +24V2_F1

A18 A18 COTN_SOL_Y
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB B5 B5 CW/CCW
3.3V 3 3 B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
IH position sensor GND 2 2 B7 B7 GND
Vout 1 1 B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
B/ 1 4 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
B 2 3 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
IH core motor A 3 Relay 2 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
A/ 4 1 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
3.3V 3 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED

JS sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
B14
B15
B14 GND
B15 JS_SENS
2 2 B16 B16 GND

Front cover switch 1 1 B17 B17 FRONT_CO_OPEN
B18 B18 N.C.
Eject unit 1
2
12
11
3 10
4 9 YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Switchback motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Eject lower full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Eject upper full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
11
10
A9
A10
A9
A10
GND
EXINNER_FULL
COM 1 3 4 9 A11 A11 +24V2_F1

YC33
Eject lower solenoid ACT
KEEP
2
3
Relay 2
1
5
6
8
7
A12
A13
A12
A13
EXSOL1
EXSOL1_KEEP TBELT_FAN 1 1
GND 2 2
COM 1 3 7 6 A14 A14 +24V2_F1 TBELT_FAN_LOCK 3 3
Eject upper solenoid ACT 2 Relay 2 8 5 A15 A15 EXSOL2
KEEP 3 1 9 4 A16 A16 EXSOL2_KEEP
3.3V 3 3 10 3 A17 A17 +3.3V2_LED 3 1 ALM

Eject sensor GND 2 2 11 2 A18 A18 GND IH_PWB_FAN_REM
+24V2_F1
4
5
4
5
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
IH PWB fan motor
Vout 1 1 12 1 A19 A19 EX_FEED_SENS
A20 A20 N.C.
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Eject/IH front fan motor
YC1
VIB_MOT_REM 20 20 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Eject/IH center fan motor
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2B) 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum-Developer TPC_Y
TPC_C
11
10
11
10
B10
B11
B10
B11
TPC_Y
TPC_C
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
relay PWB (1/2) TPC_M

TPC_BK
9
8
9
8
B12
B13
B12
B13
TPC_M
TPC_BK
DLP_TH 7 7 B14 B14 DLP_TH
EEP_SDA 6 6 B15 B15 EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL 5 5 B16 B16 EEP_SCL
DRM_EEP_SEL1 4 4 B17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DRM_EEP_SEL0 3 3 B18 B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0
3.3V2_FUSE 2 2 B19 B19 3.3V2_FUSE
GND 1 1 B20 B20 GND
9-16
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Feed image PWB (Rear side)
Toner container YC1 YC12

5V 5 5 1 1 5V2
3.3V2 4 4 2 2 3.3V2
RFID PWB EEP_SCL
GND
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
EEP_SCL
GND
EEP_SDA 1 1 5 5 EEP_SDA
YC19
TNMOT_BK_OUT1 A1 A1 9 1 3 1
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor K
6 6 CONT_RECOG
7 7 GND 3.3V2_LED A3 A3 7 3 3 3 3.3V

8 8 CONNECT_RECOG GND A4 A4 6 Relay 4 2 2 GND Toner level sensor K
THOP_PLS_BK A5 A5 5 5 1 1 Vout
3.3V2 A6 A6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_BK A7 A7 3 7 Emitter
THOP_LED_BK A8 A8 2 8 Cathode
YC36 3.3V2_LED A9 A9 1 9 Anode
+24V
GND
1
2
6
5
1
2
6
5
24V
GND
Toner Hopper
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 CONT_MOT_REM
Container motor CLOCK 4 3 4 3 CONT_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 5 2 CONT_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 CONT_MOT_DIR
Main drive unit YC24

26 25 N.C.
25 25 +24V2IL2
24 24 GND
23 23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
22 22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
21 21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD
20 20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V2IL2
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG
Developer K CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
BRAKE 7 5 13 13 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK
/ Belt motor +5V 8 4
SGND 9 3
SIG1 10 2
SIG2 11 1
12 12 +24V2IL2
11 11 GND
10 10 DRM_COL_MOT_REM
9 9 DRM_COL_MOT_CLK
8 8 DRM_COL_MOT_LD
7 7 DRM_COL_MOT_DIR
+24V 1 6 6 6 +24V2IL2
GND 2 5 5 5 GND
START/STOP 3 4 4 4 DRM_BK_MOT_REM
Drum motor K CLOCK 4 3 3 3 DRM_BK_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 2 2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 1 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR

YC23
1 3 1 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1
Belt release motor 2
3
2
1 2 2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2
Developer clutch 2 2
1 1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-17
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5) Feed drive PWB

YC7
EDGE_FAN_LOCK B1 B1 B14 B1 9 1 3 1 ALM
GND
EDGE_FAN
B2
B3
B2
B3
B13
B12
B2
B3
8
7
2
3
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
Fuser edge fan motor
Main unit YC5
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 6 A1 A1 CAS1_LSIZE3
Cassette sensor 1 GND 1 1 2 5 A2 A2 GND GND B4 B4 B11 B4 6 Relay 4 3 1 3 GND
TRANSBELT_SENS
3.3V2
B5
B6
B5
B6
B10
B9
B5
B6
5
4
5
6
2
1
Relay 2
3
2
1
Vout
3.3V
Belt roll-up sensor
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 A3 A3 CAS1_LSIZE3
GND 3 3 4 3 A4 A4 GND
Paper length sensor 1 CN-2 2 2 5 2 A5 A5 CAS1_LSIZE2 3.3V2_LED B7 B7 B8 B7 3 7 3 3.3V
CN-1 1 1 6 1 A6 A6 CAS1_LSIZE1 GND B8 B8 B7 B8 2 8 2 GND Duplex sensor 2
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 A7 A7 CAS1_WSIZE
DU_SENS2 B9 B9 B6 B9 1 9 1 Vout
Conveying
Paper width sensor 1 GND 1 1 2 7 A8 A8 GND
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Duplex sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 lower GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13 B13 B2 B13 2 4 2 2
Conveying open/close switch
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2 GND B14 B14 B1 B14 1 5 1 1
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Relay
Lift motor 1 1 1 2 1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 Duplex clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
Lift motor 2 2 2 1 Relay 2 B1 B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 2 2 Duplex clutch 2

1 1 2 1 B2 B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 +24V2 A4 A4 A11 A4 1 1
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 2 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 B6 B6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 4 B7 B7 CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Paper level sensor 2 lower GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4
Relay
5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 B13 B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2 GND 3 3 4 3 B14 B14 GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
MPFLIFT_OUT1 1 1 12 1 2 1
YC6 MPFLIFT_OUT2 2 2 11 2 1
Relay
2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
MPFLIFT_HP 3 3 10 3 2 2
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2
GND 4 4 9 4 1 1 MP position switch
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 Relay 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
3.3V 3 3 7 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED Coveying cover
Retard sensor 2 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
A10
A11
A10
A11
TDRS2_SENS
GND
10 3 A12 A12 3.3V2

11 2 A13 A13 NC
Paper feed 12 1 A14 A14 GND

CASFEED_DIR
YC11
1 6 1 6 CW/CCW
A15 A15 3.3V2
and conveying A16 A16 NC CASFEED_LD
CASFEED_CLK
2
3
5
4
2
3
5
4
LD
CLOCK
A17 A17 GND
CASFEED_REM 4 3 4 3 START/STOP Paper feed motor
Relay GND 5 2 5 2 GND
+24V2IL2 6 1 6 1 +24V
3.3V 3 3 1 15 B1 B1 3.3V2_LED
Conveying sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
14
13
B2
B3
B2
B3
GND
FEED_SENS
YC4
3.3V 3 3 4 12 B4 B4 3.3V2_LED CAS1_FEEDCL 1 1 3 3
Lift upper limit sensor 1 GND 2 2 5 11 B5 B5 GND 2 2 Paper feed clutch 1

Vout 1 1 6 10 B6 B6 LIFT1_LIMIT +24V2_F1 2 2 1 1
3.3V 3 3 7 9 B7 B7 3.3V2_LED VFEED_CL 3 3 3 3

2 2
Paper sensor 1 GND 2 2 8 Relay 8 B8 B8 GND
+24V2_F1 4 4 1 1
Vertical conveying clutch
Vout 1 1 9 7 B9 B9 CAS1_EMPTY
3.3V 3 3 10 6 B10 B10 3.3V2_LED CAS2_FEEDCL 5 5 3 3

Lift upper limit sensor 2 GND 2 2 11 5 B11 B11 GND
+24V2_F1 6 6
2
1
2
1
Paper feed clutch 2
Vout 1 1 12 4 B12 B12 LIFT2_LIMIT
3.3V 3 3 13 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED 2WAY_CL 7 7

Paper sensor 2 GND 2 2 14 2 B14 B14 GND
+24V2_F1 8 8 Paper feed drive
Vout 1 1 15 1 B15 B15 CAS2_EMPTY
B16 B16 EXFAN
24V 1 2 B17 B17 GND
Container fan motor GND 2
Relay
1
24V 1 2 1 2 1 2
Container cooling fan motor GND 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1
YC10
+3.3V2 5 5 1 12 1
YC9
1 3.3V2 FSRMOT_DIR 1 1 1 11 1 6 CW/CCW Fuser drive
LEDREF 4 4 2 11 2 2 REG_F_LED FSRMOT_LD 2 2 2 10 2 5 LD
FSRMOT_CLK 3 3 3 9 3 4 CLOCK
ID sensor front GND 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND
FSRMOT_REM 4 4 4 8 4 3 START/STOP Fuser motor
IDS 2 2 4 9 4 4 ID_SENS_F_S
IDP 1 1 5 8 5 5 ID_SENS_F_P GND 5 5 5 7 5 2 GND
+24V2IL2_FUSE 6 6 6 6 6 1 +24V
+3.3V2 5 5 6 7 6 6 3.3V2
LEDREF 4 4 7 Relay 6 7 7 REG_R_LED
Relay
ID sensor rear GND 3 3 8 5 8 8 GND
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT2 7 7 7 5 1 3
IDS 2 2 9 4 9 9 ID_SENS_R_S
IDP 1 1 10 3 10 10 ID_SENS_R_P
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser release motor
8 8 8 4 3 1
COM 1 2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
Cleaning solenoid ACT 2 Relay 1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL
EXFAN_LOCK 9 9 9 3 1 3 ALM
GND
EXFAN
10
11
10
11
10
11
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
24V
Eject fan motor
3 3 13 13 REG_CL
Registration clutch 2 2
1 1 14 14 +24V2_F2 Feed drive PWB (2/3)
9-18
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Drum/Developer relay PWB
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2_F1 1 1 +24V2_F1 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp K ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2_F1 4 3 24V2_F1 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor K
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2_DRMBK 5 6 3.3V2_DRMBK 3.3V2_DRMBK 6 6 3 3 3.3V2_DRMBK
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2_DRMBK 8 7 3.3V2_DRMBK EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB K GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC6 Developer PWB K 3.3V2_DRMBK 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit K Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer K
YC14
GND 1
Developer fan motor K Relay 2 1 1 REM
24V 2 1 2 2 +24V2
3 3 N.C.
Image process cooling Drum-Developer

relay PWB (2/2)
9-19
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(7) LVU PWB / High voltage PWB
YC2 YC3 YC1

▷ 1 1 +24V3_IL +24V4 1 1 1 1 +24V4
Right cover switch GND 2 2 2 2 GND
Feed drive PWB (3/3)
㛗 2 2 +24V3 GND 3 3 3 3 GND
+24V3_IL_F2_FET2 4 4 4 4 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2
Transfer high
voltage PWB Feed image PWB (4/6)
YC1
+24V4 1 1
+24V3 2 2
YC35 +24V3 3 3
YC1 1 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET1 +24V2 4 4 YC6 TB1
PGND 13 13 1 13 2 2 GND +24V2 5 5 1 1 +24V2 LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
+24V2IL 12 12 2 12 GND 6 6 2 2 +24V2 㯮㯮
3 3 GND GND 7 7 3 3 +24V3 TB2 Inlet 1
4 4 GND GND 8 8 4 4 +24V3 NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
5 5 GND GND 9 9 5 5 GND ⓑ ⓑ
6 6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 GND 10 10 6 6 GND
7 7 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 7 7 GND
8 8 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 8 8 GND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 㟷 1 CH_LIVE
YC1 YC1
Relay 5V0 1 1 YC7 LIVE_IN 1 1 㯤 2 COM➃Ꮚ Power switch
GND 2 2 1 1 +24V4 LIVE_OUT 2 2 ⓑ 3 LIVE_OUT
GND 3 3 2 2 GND NEUTRAL_IN 3 3 㯤 5 COM➃Ꮚ
YC34 GND 4 4 3 3 GND NEUTRAL_OUT 4 4 ⓑ 6 NEUTRAL_OUT
CL_CNT 11 11 3 11 1 1 CL_CNT +24V4 5 5 4 4 +24V4
T1_Y_CNT 10 10 4 10 2 2 T1_Y_CNT +24V4 6 6 5 5 +24V4
T1_C_CNT 9 9 5 9 3 3 T1_C_CNT 6 6 GND
T1_M_CNT 8 8 6 8 4 4 T1_M_CNT
T1_I_SENS 7 7 7 7 5 5 T1_I_SENS
T2_OFF__REM 6 6 8 6 6 Relay 6 T2_OFF__REM
T1_K_CNT 5 5 9 5 7 7 T1_K_CNT
Relay
Triac
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 8 8 SP_CNT
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 9 9 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 10 10 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 11 11 SGND
YC2 YC2
LIVE 1 1 1 1 LIVE
NEUTRAL 2 2 2 2 NEUTRAL IH PWB (1/2)
YC2
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
+24V2IL 3 3
+24V2IL 4 4
Fuse
Engine PWB (3/7) YC4
CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
NC 3 3
NC 4 4
CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
1 2
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6
PF drawer
1 3
(for Cassette heater)
Power supply PWB (2/2)
YC5
+24V2 1 1 1
GND 2 2 2 PF drawer (PF power supply㸧
YC33
18 18 NC
17 17 NC YC8
16 16 NC 12 12 5V0
YC1 15 15 NC 11 11 GND
M_K_I_SENS 1 1 14 14 M_K_I_SENS
DISCHARGE 2 2 13 13 DISCHARGE
M_AC_CLK 3 3 12 12 M_AC_CLK
B_SLV_AC_CLK 4 4 11 11 B_SLV_AC_CLK YC42
MK_AC_AC_CNT 5 5 10 10 MK_AC_AC_CNT 5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
B_MAG_AC_CLK 6 6 9 9 B_MAG_AC_CLK GND 2 2 9 9 GND
M_K_DC_CNT 7 7 8 8 M_K_DC_CNT 5V0 3 3 8 8 5V0
B_K_SLV_DC_CNT 8 8 7 7 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT GND 4 4 7 7 GND
BK_SLV_AC_CNT 9 9 6 6 BK_SLV_AC_CNT 5V0 5 5 6 6 5V0
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 10 10 5 5 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT GND 6 6 5 5 GND
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 11 11 4 4 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
HV_REM 12 12 3 3 HV_REM GND 8 8 3 3 GND
SGND 13 13 2 2 SGND 5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
1 1 NC GND 10 10 1 1 GND
Main high ࣓࢖ࣥᇶᯈ

Main (1/3)
PWB (1/3)
voltage PWB
9-20
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Fuser PWB
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor F
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2 2 2 2 2 2 EEP_SDA FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 2 1
FUSER_SCL 3 3 3 3 3 3 EEP_SCL GND 8 8 1 2 Thermistor 3 (Edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 1 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 2 2 GND Fuser release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 3 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12 2 1
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 1 2 Thermistor 4 (Press roller)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Thermostat
GND 12 12 14 14 2 1
FSR_TH_MIDDLE 13 13 15 15 1
Relay
2 Thermistor 1 (Middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor R
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 19 19 2 1
FSR_TH_CENTRAL 18 18 20 20 1 Relay 2 Thermistor 2 (Center)
Feed image PWB (5/6) Fuser unit
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Fuser charger needle 1 1 1 CHARGE
Fuser high voltage

IH PWB (2/2)
FUSER ZENER PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2_FUSE 6 6 2 2 3.3V2_FUSE
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD
IH_RXD
2
1
2
1
6
7
6
7
IH_TXD
IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-21
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Operation panel PWB / Main PWB
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V4
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15 15 V6 2 2 B1 B1 POWER_ON
16 16 V7 Power switch 1 Relay 1 B2 B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
27 27 GND LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY GND 51 51 10 10 GND
LCD 28 28 RxIN0+ LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION OS_SAD2P 50 50 11 11 OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 33 33 28 28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N
46 46 GBR INT_ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 32 32 29 29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P
47 47 SHLR GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 31 31 30 30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N
48 48 UPDN +5.0V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 30 30 31 31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P
49 49 COM +5.0V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 29 29 32 32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N
50 50 COM +5.0V6 A2 A2 A14 A14 +5.0V6 GND 28 28 33 33 GND
+5.0V6 A1 A1 A15 A15 +5.0V6 SAR_2_VCLK1_P 27 27 34 34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 26 26 35 35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N
GND 25 25 36 36 GND
YC6 YC4
SAR_2_CH13_P 24 24 37 37 SAR_2_CH13_P
1 1 LED_A SPEAKER_N 2 2 1 2 -
Backlight 2 2 LED_C SPEAKER_P 1 1 2
Relay
1 㸩 Speaker SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
23
22
23
22
38
39
38
39
SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
SAR_2_CH12_P 21 21 40 40 SAR_2_CH12_P
SAR_2_CH12_N 20 20 41 41 SAR_2_CH12_N
GND 19 19 42 42 GND
YC7
SAR_2_CH11_P 18 18 43 43 SAR_2_CH11_P
TOP 1 1 YN_Bottom SAR_2_CH11_N 17 17 44 44 SAR_2_CH11_N
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN_Left
YP_Top
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
16
15
16
15
45
46
45
46
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
RIGHT 4 4 XP_Right SAR_2_VCLK2_N 14 14 47 47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N
GND 13 13 48 48 GND
SAR_2_CH23_P 12 12 49 49 SAR_2_CH23_P
SAR_2_CH23_N 11 11 50 50 SAR_2_CH23_N
GND 10 10 51 51 GND
SAR_2_CH22_P 9 9 52 52 SAR_2_CH22_P
Operation panel sub PWB SAR_2_CH22_N 8 8 53 53 SAR_2_CH22_N
GND 7 7 54 54 GND
YC1 YC3
SAR_2_CH21_P 6 6 55 55 SAR_2_CH21_P
+5V6 1 1 1 1 +5V6 SAR_2_CH21_N 5 5 56 56 SAR_2_CH21_N
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 GND 4 4 57 57 GND
LED1 3 3 3 3 LED1 GND 3 3 58 58 GND
LED2 4 4 4 4 LED2 AC_DETECT 2 2 59 59 AC_DETECT
NC 5 5 5 5 NC GND 1 1 60 60 GND
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N 6 6 6 6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N
ENERGYSAVERLED 7 7 7 7 ENERGYSAVERLED
ATTENTION 8 8 8 8 ATTENTION
MEMORY 9 9 9 9 MEMORY Engine PWB (5/7)
PROMISSING 10 10 10 10 PROMISSING
JOB_LED 11 11 11 11 JOB_LED Main PWB (2/3)
SCAN0 12 12 12 12 SCAN0
SCAN1 13 13 13 13 SCAN1
SCAN2 14 14 14 14 SCAN2 YC5 YC60 YC56
SCAN3 15 15 15 15 SCAN3 +5V7 1 6 1 1 +5V7 3.3V0 1
KEY0 16 16 16 16 KEY0 +5V7 2 5 2 2 +5V7 DBTXD 2
KEY1 17 17 17 17 KEY1 +5V7 3 4 3 3 +5V7 DBRXD 3
KEY2 18 18 18 18 KEY2 GND 4 3 4 4 GND DBCLK 4
KEY3 19 19 19 19 KEY3 GND 5 2 5 5 GND GND 5
GND 20 20 20 20 GND GND 6 1 6 6 GND
YC3 YC59
YC1 YC11 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
VDDDX 5 5 1 1 VDDDX DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA-
GND 4 4 2 2 GND DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ YC23
NFC PWB CLK
DATA
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
CLK
DATA
ID
GND
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
ID
GND
SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 3 ALM
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ
GND
5V2
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
5V
Controller fan motor
USB hub PWB

Operation panel main PWB
(1/2)
Controller box
YC1 YC10
KEY0 10 10 1 10 1 1 KEY0
KEY1 9 9 2 9 2 2 KEY1
KEY2 8 8 3 8 3 3 KEY2
Numeric Keypad KEY3 7 7 4 7 4 4 KEY3
SCAN4 6 6 5 6 5 5 SCAN4
Relay
(option) SCAN5
SCAN6
5
4
5
4
6
7
5
4
6
7
6
7
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7 3 3 8 3 8 8 SCAN7
10key_detect 2 2 9 2 9 9 10key_detect
GND 1 1 10 1 10 10 GND
Operation unit
9-22
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-5 Wiring diagram (Options connection)

(1) Paper feeder connection
YC38 YC1
TEMP B11 B11 1 11 1 4 TEMP
GND B10 B10 2 10 2 3 GND
Temperature/humidity sensor
HUMID_OUT B9
HUMID_CLK B8
B9
B8
3
4
9
8
3
4
2
1
HUMID_OUT
HUMID_CLK
(outside machine㸧
LVU_PWB_FAN_REM B7 B7 5 7 1 1 24V
GND
LVU_PWB_FAN_ALM
B6
B5
B6
B5
6
7 Relay
6
5
2
3
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Power source fan motor
SUB_CLK B4 B4 8 4
SUB_SDA B3 B3 9 3
GND B2 B2 10 2
3.3V0 B1 B1 11 1
1 1
2 2
Relay 3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
PF_VER_SENS A11 A11 1 11 10 10 1 PF_VER_SENS
3.3V3_FUSE A10 A10 2 10 11 11 2 3.3V3_FUSE
GND A9 A9 3 9 12 12 3 GND
PF_SEL1 A8 A8 4 8 13 13 4 PF_SEL1
PF_SEL2 A7 A7 5 7 14 Relay 14 5 PF_SEL2
PF_CLK A6 A6 6 Relay 6 15 15 6 PF_CLK
PF_RDY A5 A5 16 16 7 PF_RDY
PF_SDI A4 A4 8 4 17 17 8 PF_SDO
PF_SDO A3 A3 9 3 18 18 9 PF_SDI
PF_PAUSE A2 A2 10 2 19 19 10 PF_PAUSE
PF_CAS_OPEN A1 A1 11 1 20 20 11 PF_CAS_OPEN PF PWB
1 1 1 +24V2 4 4 1 +24V2
LVU YC5 2 2 2 GND 5 5 2 GND
Engine PWB (6/7)

3 3
2 AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
LVU YC4 PF switch

6 AC_NEUTRAL 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
PF switch
PF interlock switch
9-23
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Conveying unit / Document finisher connection
YC3
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V3
BR job separator sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
JS_SENS_AK
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 1 GND 2 2 5 5 GND BR PWB
Vout 1 1 6 6 BRG_JAM1
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 2 GND 2 2 8 8 GND
Vout 1 1 9 9 BRG_JAM2
2 2 10 10 GND YC3 YC30

BR cover sensor 1 1 11 11 BRG_OPEN +3.3V3 13 13 1 1 20 20 +3.3V3
JS_SENS_AK 12 12 2 2 19 19 JS_SENS_AK
BRG_MOT_PD 11 11 3 3 18 18 BRG_MOT_PD
BRG_MOT_FAN_REM 10 10 4 4 17 17 BRG_MOT_FAN_REM
BRG_MOT_CLK 9 9 5 5 16 16 BRG_MOT_CLK
YC1 BRG_SET 8 8 6 6 15 15 BRG_SET
A/ 1 4 1 1 BRG_MOT_1B BRG_FEED_SENS1 7 7 7 7 14 14 BRG_FEED_SENS1
A 2 3 2 2 BRG_MOT_1A BRG_FEED_SENS2 6 6 8 8 13 13 BRG_FEED_SENS2
BR conveying motor B/ 3 2 3 3 BRG_MOT_2B BRG_OPEN 5 5 9 9 12 12 BRG_OPEN
B 4 1 4 4 BRG_MOT_2A GND 4 4 10 10 11 11 GND
GND 3 3 11 11 10 10 GND
+3.3V2 2 2 12 12 9 9 +3.3V2
+24V2 1 1 13 13 8 8 +24V2
5 5 FAN_REM
6 6 +24V2
Relay
A1 A1 14 14 7 7 DF_CLK(ENG to DF)
15 15 6 6 DF_DET(DF to ENG)
16 16 5 5 DF_SYNC(DF to ENG)
7 1 7 1 1 17 17 4 4 DF_SDI(DF to ENG)
6 2 6 2 2 A2 A2 18 18 3 3 DF_SDO(ENG to DF)
5 3 5 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 A3 A3 19 19 2 2 DF_SEL(ENG to DF)
Relay A4 A4
3 5 3 5 5 A5 A5 20 20 1 1 DF_RDY(DF to ENG)
2 6 2 6 6 A6 A6
1 7 1 7 7 A7 A7
YC25
DF PWB 4 4 4
1
2
Relay
1
2
A8
A9
A8
A9
5
4
5
4
1
2
1
2
+24V2
+24V2
3 3 3 A10 A10 3 3
B1 B1 2 2 3 3 GND
1K/4K B2
B3
B2
B3
1 1 4 4 GND
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
3 3
B7
B8
B7
B8
2 2 2 4 4 B9 B9
1 1 1 B10 B10
Bridge unit (AK)
Document finisher
9-24
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Other Options connection
YC22
1 GND YC23
2 DC1_SET
+5V0_FUSE A1
3 DC1_COUNT
4 +24V2
+5V0_FUSE A2
+5V0_FUSE A3 USB hub PWB (2/2)
+5V0_FUSE A4
+5V0_FUSE A5
+5V0_FUSE A6 YC1
+5V0_FUSE A7
+5V0_FUSE A8 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
MK2_ENBL A9 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
+24V2 A10 DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + IC CARD
MK2_RKEY7 B1 GND 4 4 4 GND
YC21 MK2_RKEY6 B2
1 1 1 1 +24V2 MK2_RKEY5 B3
2 2 2 2 SGND MK2_RKEY4 B4
3 3 3 3 SGND MK2_RKEY3 B5
4 4 4 4 MCV_ENBL MK2_RKEY2 B6
5 5 5 5 FGND MK2_RKEY1 B7
Coin vendor 6 6 6 6 MCV_FED_COUNT MK2_RKEY0 B8
YC2
Reley GND B9 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
㸦option㸧 7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
MCV_EJ_COUNT
MCV_COPY_SIG MK2_COUNT B10 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
KEY BOARD
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA +
9 9 9 9 MCV_UART_TXD
GND 4 4 4 GND
10 10 10 10 SGND
11 11 11 11 MCV_UART_RXD
12 12 12 12 SGND
Standard in some markets and some models YC4

VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + USB memory
Engine PWB (7/7) GND 4 4 4 GND
YC4 YC4
GND 1 1 41 41 GND
SAR_1_CH23_N 2 2 40 40 SAR_1_CH23_N
SAR_1_CH23_P 3 3 39 39 SAR_1_CH23_P
GND 4 4 38 38 GND
SAR_1_CH22_N 5 5 37 37 SAR_1_CH22_N
SAR_1_CH22_P 6 6 36 36 SAR_1_CH22_P
GND 7 7 35 35 GND
SAR_1_CH21_N 8 8 34 34 SAR_1_CH21_N
SAR_1_CH21_P 9 9 33 33 SAR_1_CH21_P
GND 10 10 32 32 GND
SAR_1_VCLK2_N 11 11 31 31 SAR_1_VCLK2_N YC58 YC2
SAR_1_VCLK2_P 12 12 30 30 SAR_1_VCLK2_P 20 USB_- GND 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 13 13 29 29 GND 19 USB_+ TXP 2 2 2 2 A+
SAR_1_CH13_N 14 14 28 28 SAR_1_CH13_N 18 DETECT TXN 3 3 3 3 A-
SAR_1_CH13_P 15 15 27 27 SAR_1_CH13_P 17 RESET GND 4 4 4 4 GND
GND 16 16 26 26 GND 16 GND RXN 5 5 5 5 B-
SAR_1_CH12_N 17 17 25 25 SAR_1_CH12_N 15 HOSTWAKE RXP 6 6 6 6 B+
SAR_1_CH12_P 18 18 24 24 SAR_1_CH12_P 14 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 19 19 23 23 GND 13 PAVDO
SAR_1_CH11_N 20 20 22 22 SAR_1_CH11_N 12 GND
SAR_1_CH11_P 21 21 21 21 SAR_1_CH11_P 11 VBAT
GND 22 22 20 20 GND WiFi PWB 10 VIO
SAR_1_VCLK1_N 23 23 19 19 SAR_1_VCLK1_N 9 GND 1 1 3.3V
SAR_1_VCLK1_P 24 24 18 18 SAR_1_VCLK1_P 8 SD_D0 2 2 3.3V KUIO relay PWB
GND 25 25 17 17 GND 7 SD_D1 3 3 3.3V
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 26 26 16 16 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 6 GND 4 4 GND YC2
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 27 27 15 15 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 5 SD_CLK 5 5 GND VBUS1 20 20 VBUS
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 28 28 14 14 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 4 GND YC32 6 6 GND USB_DN1 19 19 USB_DN
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 29 29 13 13 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 3 SD_CMD GND 3 3 7 7 5V USB_DP1 18 18 USB_DP
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 30 30 12 12 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 2 SD_D2 +5V_HDD 2 2 8 8 5V GND 17 17 GND
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 31 31 11 11 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 1 SD_D3 GND 1 1 9 9 5V NC 16 16 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 32 32 10 10 SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 10 10 GND NC 15 15 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
33
34
33
34
9
8
9
8
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
Standard in some 11
12
11
12
ACT
GND
GND
NC
14
13
14
13
GND
NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N 35 35 7 7 SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N markets and some 13 13 12V NC 12 12 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 36 36 6 6 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 14 14 12V GND 11 11 GND
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N 37 37 5 5 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N models 15 15 12V NC 10 10 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P 38 38 4 4 SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P Main PWB (3/3) NC 9 9 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P
39
40
39
40
3
2
3
2
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P HDD NC
AUDIO1
8
7
8
7
NC
AUDIO
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N 41 41 1 1 SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
(Optional in some markets GND 5 5 GND
VDD5_CUT1 4 4 VDD5_CUT
YC2 YC33
and some models㸧 RESETN1 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
+5V 1 1 10 10 5V VDD5 1 1 VDD5
+5V 2 2 9 9 5V
GND 3 3 8 8 SGND
GND 4 4 7 7 SGND
SDI 5 5 6 6 SDI YC8 YC3
SDICLK
GND
6
7
6
7
5
4
5
4
SDICLK
SGND
VBUS1
USB_DN1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
VBUS1
USB_DN1
KUIO PWB
SDO 8 8 3 3 SDO USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1
SDOCLK 9 9 2 2 SDOCLK GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC1
GND 10 10 1 1 SGND AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 VBUS0 20 20 VBUS
N.C. 11 11 WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 USB_DN0 19 19 USB_DN
RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESET1 USB_DP0 18 18 USB_DP
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 17 17 GND
YC5 VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 NC 16 16 NC
1 16 LockPin(2) USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 NC 15 15 NC
2 15 LockPin(1) USB_DP0 11 11 11 11 USB_DP0 GND 14 14 GND
FIERY relay PWB 3 14 GRLED_K2 GND 12 12 12 12 GND NC 13 13 NC
4 13 GRLED_A2 AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 NC 12 12 NC
5 12 GRLED_K1 WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 GND 11 11 GND
6 11 GRLED_A1 RESET 15 15 15 15 RESET0 NC 10 10 NC
YC3 7 10 TD4- NC 9 9 NC
CH1_RX0N 1 1 8 9 TD4+ NC 8 8 NC
CH1_RX0P 2 2 9 8 TD3- AUDIO0 7 7 AUDIO
GND 3 3 10 7 TD3+ YC9 YC4 WAKEUP0 6 6 WAKEUP
N.C. 4 4 11 6 CT2 GND 1 6 1 6 GND GND 5 5 GND
N.C. 5 5 Fiery (120V/220-240V model) 12 5 CT1 5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 VDD5_CUT0 4 4 VDD5_CUT
MFP_READYN 6 6 13 4 TD2- GND 3 4 3 4 GND RESETN0 3 3 RESETN
FIERY_READYN 7 7 14 3 TD2+ 5V 4 3 4 3 5V GND 2 2 GND
N.C. 8 8 15 2 TD1- GND 5 2 5 2 GND VDD5 1 1 VDD5
POWER_CONTROLLN 9 9 16 1 TD1+ 5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1
N.C. 10 10
GND 11 11
N.C. 12 12
N.C. 13 13
CH1_LOCKN 14 14
GND 15 15
CH1_HTPDN
RESERVE_INN
16
17
16
17
FIERY control PWB
RESERVE_OUTN 18 18
GND 19 19
N.C. 20 20
N.C. 21 21
GND 22 22
UART_TXD_EFI 23 23
UART_RXD_EFI 24 24
9-25
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-6 Wiring diagram (Options)

(1) Document processor (DP-7100) wiring diagram
YC3 YC6
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG 3.3V_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
12
2
5
15
2
3
2
3
ENG_RDY
ENG_SEL
GND
LNG_SW
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP original length sensor
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI 3.3V 4 4 3 3 3.3V
1
13
16
4
6
7
6
7
ENG_SO
DP_OPEN
HSIZE
GND
5
6
5
6
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
DP original width sensor
11 6 8 8 EN_FD_SW
Engine PWB 10
9
Relay 7
8
9
10
9
10
EN_SET_SW
3.3V3
8 9 11 11 GND
7 10 12 12 GND
6
5
11
12
13
14
13
14
GND
24V
DP PWB
4 13 15 15 24V
3 14 16 16 24V
YC9
FMOT_CH_A 1 1 1 1 CH_A
FMOT_CH_B 2 2 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 3 3 3.3V
FMOT_DIR 4 4 4 4 DIR
FMOT_PWM 5 5 5 5 PWM DP feed motor
FMOT_BRAKE 6 6 6 6 BRAKE
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
R24V 8 8 8 8 24V
YC7
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED CMOT_CH_A 9 9 1 1 CH_A
DP registration sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
RGST_SW
CMOT_CH_B
3.3V
10
11
10
11
2
3
2
3
CH_B
3.3V
CMOT_DIR 12 12 4 4 DIR
GND 3 3 4 4 GND CMOT_PWM 13 13 5 5 PWM DP conveying motor
DP timing sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
5
6
5
6
CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
CMOT_BRAKE
GND
14
15
14
15
6
7
6
7
BRAKE
GND
R24V 16 16 8 8 24V
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V_LED
DP open/close sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
8
9
GND
DP_OPEN
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V_LED
DP lift lower limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
11
12
11
12
GND
LF_DNSW
YC11
LIFT_A1 1 1 4 1 A
LIFT_B1 2 2 3 2 B
LIFT_A3 3 3 2 3 A/ DP lift motor
LIFT_B3 4 4 1 4 B/
RMOT_CH_A 5 5 1 1 CH_A
YC17 RMOT_CH_B 6 6 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED 3.3V 7 7 3 3 3.3V
DP exit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
EXIT_SW
RMOT_DIR
RMOT_PWM
8
9
8
9
4
5
4
5
DIR
PWM DP reversing motor
RMOT_BRAKE 10 10 6 6 BRAKE
GND 11 11 7 7 GND
R24V 12 12 8 8 24V
YC8
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP original sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
SET_SW
3.3V YC16
LED_REM 1 1 12 1 1 1 LED_REM
24V 2 2 11 2 2 2 24V DP LED PWB
3.3V_LED 3 3 10 3 3 3 3.3V
GND
SFT_HP_SW
4
5
4
5
9
8
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP feedshift sensor
3.3V_LED 6 6 7 6 3 3 3.3V
Relay
YC4
GND
LF_UP_SW
7
8
7
8
6
5
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP lift upper limit sensor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP feed sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
FD_SW
3.3V SFT_A1
YC10
1 1 4 9 4 1 A
4 4 NC SFT_B1 2 2 3 10 3 2 B
SFT_A3 3 3 2 11 2 3 A/ DP feedshift motor
SFT_B3 4 4 1 12 1 4 B/
YC5
1 1 1 1 24V
DP top cover switch 2 2 GND
2 2 3 3 R24V
㸦Interlock switch㸧
9-26
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Document processor (DP-7110) wiring diagram

Y C 1ࠉ
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG Y C 10ࠉ YC 1 YC 2
12 5 2 2 ENG_RDY CIS_TMG_SW 1 1 14 14 CIS_TMG_SW GND A1 1 1 A1 GND
2 15 3 3 ENG_SEL SHD_CLK 2 2 13 13 CPU_SCLK CK1 A2 2 2 A2 CK
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK SHD_SO 3 3 12 12 CPU_SI GND A3 3 3 A3 GND
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI SHD_SEL 4 4 11 11 CPU_SEL ST1 A4 4 4 A4 SP
1 16 6 6 ENG_SO SHD_PAGEST 5 5 10 10 CPU_PAGEST GND A5 5 5 A5 GND
13 4 7 7 DP_OPEN RESETN 6 6 9 9 RESETN MODE A6 6 6 A6 MODE
11 Relay 6 8 8 EN_FD_SW SHD_OVMON 7 7 8 8 CPU_OVM
Engine PWB 10 7 9 9 EN_SET_SW SHD_SI 8 8 7 7 CPU_SO
GND
VREF
A7 7 7 A7 GND
VREF
A8 8 8 A8
9 8 10 10 3.3V3 SHD_RDY 9 9 6 6 CPU_SRDY GND A9 9 9 A9 GND
8 9 11 11 GND NC 10 10 5 5 NC GND A10 10 10 A10 GND
7 10 12 12 GND 24V 11 11 4 4 24V GND A11 11 11 A11 GND
6 11 13 13 GND 24V 12 12 3 3 24V LED4R_C A12 12 12 A12 LED4_R
5 12 14 14 24V GND 13 13 2 2 GND LED4G_C A13 13 13 A13 LED4_G
4 13 15 15 24V GND 14 14 1 1 GND LED4B_C A14 14 14 A14 LED4_B
3 14 16 16 24V LED4_A A15 15 15 A15 VLED4
LED1_A A16 16 16 A16 VLED1
DP PWB LED1R_C A17 17 17 A17 LED1_R
YC 4 YC 2 YC 3 LED1G_C A18 18 18 A18 LED1_G
Y C 2ࠉ GND 1
ANODE 3 3 A1 A1 ANODE 1 1 1 GND LED1B_C A19 19 19 A19 LED1_B
DP lift upper limit 3.3V 1 1 4 4 3.3V HTPDN 2
GND 2 2 2 HTPDN LED2R_C A20 20 20 A20 LED2_R
2 2 A2 A2 GND GND 2 2 3 3 GND DP original length
sensor LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN LED2G_C A21 21 21 A21 LED2_G
LF_UPSW 1 1 A3 A3 LF_UPSW LNG_SW 3 3 2 2 LNG_SW
A4 A4 GND LNG_CLK 4 4 1 1 LNG_CLK
sensor DP IF PWB GND 4 4 4 4 GND LED2B_C A22 22 22 A22 LED2_B
Rx0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N LED2_A A23 23 23 A23 VLED2
GND 3 3 A5 A5 FD_SW
Rx0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P LED3_A A24 24 24 A24 VLED3
DP feed sensor FD_SW 2 2 A6 A6 3.3V
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
A7 A7 GND LED3R_C A25 25 25 A25 LED3_R
3.3V 1 1 GND 5 5 3 3 GND
LED3G_C A26 26 26 A26 LED3_G
A8 A8 RGST_SW(V) SET_SW 6 6 2 2 SET_SW DP original sensor
A9 A9 3.3V LED3B_C A27 27 27 A27 LED3_B
3.3V 7 7 1 1 3.3V
ANODE GND A28 28 28 A28 GND
3 3 1 9 A10 A10 ANODE
GND A29 29 29 A29 GND
DP exit sensor GND 2 2 2 Relay 8 A11 A11 GND
EXIT_SW(M) 1 1 3 7 A12 A12 EXIT_SW(M) ANODE 8 8 ANODE GND A30 30 30 A30 GND
3 3
A13 A13 NC GND 9 9 2 2 GND DP lift lower limit GND A31 31 31 A31 GND
LF_DNSW 10 10 1 1 LF_DNSW sensor GND A32 32 32 A32 GND
GND A33 33 33 A33 GND
YC 4 GND A34 34 34 A34 GND
B1 B1 NC
3.3V 1 1 3 3 3.3V GND A35 35 35 A35 GND
LED_PW 2 2 1 2 B2 B2 LED_PW WIDE3 11 11 4 4 WIDE3 DP backside timing
DPLED PWB LED_REM 1 1 2
Relay
1 B3 B3 LED_REM WIDE2 12 12 3 3 WIDE2 DP original width sensor
CIS_TMG_SW
GND
2 2 2 2 CIS_TMG_SW GND A36 36 36 A36 GND
3 3 1 1 GND 3.3V_CIS A37 37 37 A37 3.3V
B4 B4 GND GND 13 13 2 2 GND
WIDE1 14 14
sensor 3.3V_CIS A38 38 38 A38 3.3V
1 1 WIDE1
3.3V_CIS A39 39 39 A39 3.3V
GND 3 3 4 6 B5 B5 GND
CCD_TMG_SW B6 CCD_TMG_SW GND A40 40 40 A40 GND
DP timing sensor 2 2 5 Relay 5 B6
GND B1 41 41 B1 GND
3.3V 1 1 6 4 B7 B7 3.3V
GND B2 42 42 B2 GND
YC 5 2 2 NC OS_1 B3 43 43 B3 OS1
ANODE 3 3 7 3 B8 B8 ANODE
DP open/close FEED3_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ GND B4 44 44 B4 GND
GND 2 2 8 Relay 2 B9 B9 GND FEED1_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B OS2 OS2
sensor DP_OPEN 1 1 9 1 B10 B10 DP_OPEN FEED2_OUT1A 3 A
DP feed motor B5 45 45 B5
3 1 1 GND B6 46 46 B6 GND
B11 B11 ANODE FEED4_OUT1B 4 A/
4 3 3 OS3 B7 47 47 B7 OS3
B12 B12 GND NC
5 5 GND B8 48 48 B8 GND
B13 B13 SKEW_SW
OS4 B9 49 49 B9 OS4
GND B10 50 50 B10 GND
2 2 NC OS5 B11 51 51 B11 OS5
RGST3_OUT2B 5 5 6 6 B/ GND B12 52 52 B12 GND
RGST1_OUT2A 6 6 4 4 B
DP registration motor OS6 B13 53 53 B13 OS6
RGST2_OUT1A 7 7 1 1 A
RGST4_OUT1B GND B14 54 54 B14 GND
8 8 3 3 A/
Y C 6ࠉ 5 5 NC OS7 B15 55 55 B15 OS7
COM 1 1 1 24V GND B16 56 56 B16 GND
DP top cover switch NO 2 2 2 NC OS8 B17 57 57 B17 OS8
3 3 R24V LIFT3_OUT2B 9 9 4 4 B3 GND B18 58 58 B18 GND
(Interlock switch㸧 LIFT1_OUT2A 10 10 2 2 B1 OS9 B19 59 59 B19 OS9
LIFT2_OUT1A 11 11 1 1 A1 DP lift motor GND B20 60 60 B20 GND
Y C 7ࠉ LIFT4_OUT1B 12 12 3 3 A3 OS10 B21 61 61 B21 OS10
2 1 1 1 R24V GND B22 62 62 B22 GND
DP drive fan motor 1
Relay
2 2 2 FAN_REM1 OS11 B23 63 63 B23 OS11
GND B24 64 64 B24 GND
Y C 14 2 2 NC OS12 B25 65 65 B25 OS12
Y C 8ࠉ
CNVY4_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ GND B26 66 66 B26 GND
2 Relay 1 1 1 R24V
DP CIS fan motor 1 2 2 2 FAN_REM2
CNVY3_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B
DP conveying motor OS13 B27 67 67 B27 OS13
CNVY2_OUT1B 3 3 3 3 A/ GND B28 68 68 B28 GND
CNVY1_OUT1A 4 4 1 1 A OS14 B29 69 69 B29 OS14
5 5 NC GND B30 70 70 B30 GND
Y C 9ࠉ
OS15 B31 71 71 B31 OS15
1 R24V
GND B32 72 72 B32 GND
2 PRS_SOL_PULL
1 1 NC OS16 B33 73 73 B33 OS16
3 PRS_SOL_RTN
RVRS4_OUT1B 5 5 2 2 A/ GND B34 74 74 B34 GND
4 R24V OS17
RVRS2_OUT1A 6 6 4 4 A B35 75 75 B35 OS17
5 JNC_SOL_PULL DP exit motor GND
RVRS1_OUT2A 7 7 5 5 B B36 76 76 B36 GND
6 JNC_SOL_KEEP
RVRS3_OUT2B 8 8 3 3 B/ OS18 B37 77 77 B37 OS18
6 6 NC GND B38 78 78 B38 GND
GND B39 79 79 B39 GND
GND B40 80 80 B40 GND
Y C 11ࠉ
SCLK 1
SDA 2 DPSHD PWB DPCIS
1Piece_SIG 3
2Piece_SIG 4
GND 5
3.3V 6
GND 7
24V 8
9-27
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Paper feeder (PF-7100) wiring diagram
PF PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 10 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 12 1 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 1 2
1
2
1 2 9 2 2 24V1
GND
CAS1_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
11
10
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper sensor 1
3 3 3 8 3 3 FEED_CL1 A 9 4 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 1 2
1
2
1 4 7 4 4 24V1
B 8 5 2 2 GND PF paper sensor 2
C 7 6 1 1 Vout
Relay
3 3 5 6 5 5 VER_CL2 D 6 7 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 2 2
1
2
1 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1
E
F
5
4
8
9
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
PF retard sensor 1
3 3 7 4 7 7 FEED_CL2 G 3 10 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2
1
2
1 8 3 8 8 24V1
H
I
2
1
11
12
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
PF retard sensor 2
9 2 9 9 HDR_CL2
10 1 10 10 24V1
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
YC4
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
5
6
5
6
5
4
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF upper paper gauge sensor 1
3.3V 3 3 1 20 1 1 3.3V4_LED
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
19
18
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
GND 8 8 2 7 2 2 GND PF lower paper gauge sensor 1
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 8 1 1 Vout
3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 17 4 4 3.3V4_LED
GND 10 10 Relay
PF conveying sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
16
15
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
4 Relay 3
GND 12 12
5 2
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 2 5 2 2 PF Paper length switch 1
GND 14 14 3 Relay 4 3 3
6 1 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
2 2 7 14 7 7 COVER_OPEN
PF right cover sensor 1 1 8 13 8 8 GND
GND
CAS1_SET_SW
16
17
16
17
5
6
2
1
2
1
2
1 PF cassette insertion switch 1
8
7
1
2
2
1
2
1 PF paper width sensor 1
Relay
J 2 1
3.3V 3 3 9 12 9 9 3.3V5_LED 1
Relay 2
K
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
11
10
10
11
10
11
GND
ULIM_SW_2
YC5
3.3V5_LED 1 1 A
GND 2 2 B
CAS2_EMPTY 3 3 C
3.3V 3 3 12 9 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF conveying sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
13
14
8
7
13
14
13
14
GND
VER_SENS_2
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
GND 5 5 5 4 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 5 1 1 Vout PF upper paper gauge sensor 2
15 6 15 15 3.3V4
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
16 5 16 16 CAS1_WSIZE
17 4 17 17 GND
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
8
9
8
9
2
1
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF lower paper gauge sensor 2
18 3 18 18 3.3V5
GND 10 10
19 2 19 19 CAS2_WSIZE CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
Relay
20 1 20 20 GND
GND 12 12
J
CAS2_SIZE2_SENS
GND
13
14
13
14
2
3
5
4
2
3
2
3
PF paper length switch 2
Relay
K CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
L
GND 16 16 5 2 2 2 8 1 2 2
M CAS2_SET_SW 17 17 6 1 1 1 PF cassette insertion switch 2 7 2 1 1 PF paper width sensor 2
NC 18 18
L 2 1
1 Relay 2
M
YC6
2 2 1 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 Relay 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR
2 2 1 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 1 1 NC
PF lift motor 2 1 1 2 Relay 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR 2 2 NC
3 3 NC
4 4 NC
5 5 NC
6 6 NC
YC8 7 7 NC
+24V 1 6 1 6 1 1 +24V 8 8 NC
GND 2 5 2 5 2 2 GND YC12 9 9 NC
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 3 3 START/STOP VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
PF feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 Relay 3 4 4 CLOCK 3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
LD 5 2 5 2 5 5 LD GND 3 3 12 12 GND
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 13 13 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 14 14 PF_CAS2_SEL
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK
EN_RDY 7 7 16 Relay 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO
EN_SDI
8
9
8
9
17
18
17
18
EH_SDO
EH_SDI Engine PWB
16 EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
15 PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
14
13 YC11
9 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
8 YC13 GND 2 2 5 5 GND
7 1 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
2 3 3 AN_PF_SDI 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
PF main PWB 4 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
(Side feeder) 3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND 3 3 FG
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
1 1
4 YC10 Outlet
3 1 1 GND
2 2
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
AC_LIVE 1 1
PF cassette heater AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
G 4 4 3.3V4_LED
H 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
I 6 6 GND
9-28
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) wiring diagram
PF main PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 6 1 A
PF vertical conveying clutch 2
1
2
1 2 2 24V1
GND 2 2 5 2 B
CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 4 3 C
3 3 3 3 FEED_CL1 3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V

PF feed right clutch 1 2 2 GND 5 5 5 2 2 2 GND
PF upper paper gauge
1 1 4 4 24V1 CAS1_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout sensor 1
Relay
3 3 5 5 VER_CL2 3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 4 3 3 3.3V
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 2 2 GND 8 8 2 5 2 2 GND
PF lower paper gauge
1 1 6 6 24V1 CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout sensor 1
3 3 7 7 FEED_CL2
PF feed left clutch 2 2
1
2
1 8 8 24V1 Relay
3 3 9 9 HDR_CL2 GND 10 10 2 2
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 2 2 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 1 PF cassette sensor 1
1 1 10 10 24V1 GND 12 12
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13
GND 14 14
YC4 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
3.3V 3 3 1 17 1 1 3.3V4_LED GND 16
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
16
15
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
CAS1_WSIZE 17
YC5
PF vertical conveying 3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 14 4 4 3.3V4_LED 3.3V5_LED 1 1 3 4 9 1 3 3 3.3V
sensor
GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
13
12
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
GND
CAS2_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
2
1
5
6
8
7
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper sensor 2
4 Relay 3
5 2 3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V
6 1 GND 5 5 5 2 2 2 GND
PF upper paper gauge
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout sensor 2 J 6 4 3 3 3.3V
2 2 7 11 7 7 COVER_OPEN
Relay K 5 5 2 2 GND PF lift upper limit sensor 2
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 4 3 3 3.3V PF lower paper gauge L 4 Relay 6 1 1 Vout
PF right cover sensor 1 1 8 10 8 8 GND GND 8 8 2 5 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout sensor 2
3.3V 3 3 9 Relay 9 A GND 10 10
PF paper sensor 1 GND 2 2 10 8 B CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 M 3 7 7 1 1 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 11 7 C N 2 8 6 2 2 2 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
O 1 9 5 3 3 3 1 1 GND
4 4 Relay 4 4
3.3V 3 3 12 6 D GND 12 12 2 2 3 5 5 5
PF retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 13 5 E CAS2_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 1 1 PF cassette sensor 2 2 6 6 6
GND 1 1 14 4 F GND 14 14 1 7 7 7
CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
GND 16 16
CAS2_WSIZE 17
3.3V 3 3 15 3 G NC 18
PF zero sensor 1 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
16
17
2
1
H
I
J 9 9 3.3V5_LED
K 10 10 GND
L 11 11 ULIM_SW_2
3.3V 3 3 1 3 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF horizontal conveying sensor GND 2 2 2 Relay 2 13 13 GND
Vout 1 1 3 1 14 14 VER_SENS_2 1 1 NC
2 2 NC
G 15 15 3.3V4 3 3 NC
H 16 16 P0R_SW 4 4 NC
I 17 17 GND 5 5 NC
6 6 NC
18 18 3.3V5 7 7 NC
19 19 P0L_SW 8 8 NC
20 20 GND YC12 9 9 NC
VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
GND 3 3 12 12 GND
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK Engine PWB
EN_RDY 7 7 16 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO 8 8 17 Relay 17 EH_SDO
YC6 EN_SDI 9 9 18 18 EH_SDI
2 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
YC11
2 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
PF lift motor 2 1 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR GND 2 2 5 5 GND
YC8
+24V 1 6 1 1 +24V 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 5 2 2 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 3 START/STOP
PF feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 4 CLOCK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
LD 5 2 5 5 LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW 3 3 FG
16
1 1
15
14
Outlet
13 2 2
9
AC_LIVE 1 1
8
7 1
YC13
1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
PF PWB 2
4
3
4
3
4
AN_PF_SDI
AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
(Side feeder) 3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
4 YC10
3 1 1 GND
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
M 4 4 3.3V4_LED
N 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
O 6 6 GND
9-29
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Side feeder (PF-7120) wiring diagram
PF PWB
YC15 YC6
3 3 1 1 FDR_CL LDPSW1_3.3V1 1 1 9 1 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2 GND 2 2 8 2 2 2 GND PF upper paper gauge sensor 1
1 1 2 2 +24V2_F1 LDPSW1 3 3 7 3 1 1 Vout
3 HOR_CL1
LDPSW2_3.3V1 4 4 6 4 3 3 3.3V
4 +24V2_F1 GND 5 5 5 Relay 5 2 2 GND PF lower paper gauge sensor 2
LDPSW2 6 6 4 6 1 1 Vout
5 HOR_CL2
6 +24V2_F1 SZSW2_3.3V1 7 7 3 7 3 3 3.3V

GND 8 8 2 8 2 2 GND PF lift lower limit sensor
7 FDL_CL SZSW2 9 9 1 9 1 1 Vout
8 +24V2_F1
DEK_OPN1_3.3V2 10 10
GND 11 11 2 2
DEK_OPN1 12 12 1 1 PF connection sensor
NC 13 13
YC3
RDPSW1_3.3V1 1
GND 2
YC5 RDPSW1 3
2 2 1 1 GND RDPSW2_3.3V1 4
PF cassette sensor 1 1 2 2 CVROP_SW GND 5
RDPSW2 6
SZSW1_3.3V1 7
3 3 VER_CL GND 8
4 4 +24V2_F1 SZSW1 9
5 5 VCVSW_3.3V1 DEK_OPN2_3.3V2 10
6 6 GND GND 11
7 7 VCVSW DEK_OPN2 12
1 3 1 12 8 8 +24V2_F1
YC4
PF paper feed solenoid 2
3
Relay 2
1
2
3
11
10
9
10
9
10
FDR_SOLA
FDR_SOLK EPLSW_3.3V3 1
GND 2
EPLSW 3
3.3V 3 3 4 9 11 11 EPRSW_3.3V1 LULMSW_3.3V3 4
GND 5
PF paper sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
5
6
8
7
12
13
12
13
GND
EPRSW LULMSW 6
3.3V3 7
Relay P0LSW 8
3.3V 3 3 7 6 14 14 RULMSW_3.3V1 GND 9
HCVSW1_3.3V3 10
PF lift upper limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
15
16
15
16
3.3V4
RULMSW GND 11
HCVSW1 12
3.3V 3 3 10 3 17 17 3.3V1
PF feed sensor Vout 2 2 11 2 18 18 P0RSW
GND 1 1 12 1 19 19 GND
YC13
SDO 1 1 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
SDI 2 2 2 2 AN_PF_SDI
CLK 3 3 1 1 AN_PF_CLK
SEL 4 4 3 3 PF_CAS2_SEL
RDY 5 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
YC8 PAUSE 6 6 6 6 AN_PF_PAUSE
1 2 1 1 OUT2 DEK_OPN1 7 7 7 7 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
PF lift motor 2 1 2 2 OUT1 DEK_OPN2 8 8
+3.3V4 9 9 10 10 3.3V3
GND 10 10 11 11 GND
YC7ࠉ292132-4 SD_FINAL_SENS 11 11 12 Relay 12 AN_VER_SENS
1 OUT1B(L_2) PF_FINAL_SENS 12 12 8 8 NC
2 OUT1A(L_1) 9 9 NC
13 13 NC PF PWB
14 14 NC
3
4
OUT2B(R_2)
OUT2A(R_1)
15
16
15
16
NC
NC 㸦desk㸧
YC11 4 4 NC
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
YC18 GND 2 2 2 2 GND
CH_A 8 8 1 1 FMOT_CH_A 24V2 3 3 1 1 24V2
CH_B 7 7 2 2 FMOT_CH_B 24V2 4 4
3.3V 6 6 3 3 3.3V
DIR 5 5 4 4 FMOT_DIR
PF conveying motor PWM 4 4 5 5 FMOT_PWM
BRAKE 3 3 6 6 FMOT_BRAKE N N AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 2 7 7 GND
24V 1 1 8 8 +24V2_F1
L Relay L AC_LIVE
G G FG
YC16
1 +24V
2 GND
3 START/STOP
4 CLOCK
5 LD
6 CW/CCW
AC_LIVE 1 1
YC10
LVU_FAN 1
+24V2_F1 2
YC12
GND 1
GND 2
24V2 3
YC14
HOR_UNIT 1
+3.3V1 2
9-30
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Finisher (DF-7100) wiring diagram
YC8
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 YC17
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PADDLE SENS A 1 1 3 3
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF exit motor GND 2 2 2 2 DF paddle sensor
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PADDLE SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5 1 GND 4 4 3 3
STP MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 2 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 DF entry sensor
STP MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 1
STP MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 4 2 2 DF slide motor
STP MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 5 1 1 STRY EJE SENS A 7
GND 8
EJE RELS MOT 2B 9 9 4 4 STRY EJE SENS SIG 9
EJE RELS MOT 1B 10 10 3 3
EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF exit release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 YC15
1 1 1 1 24V1 LED1 1
DF front cover sensor 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG MIDDLE MOT 2B 13 13 1 6 LED2 2
MIDDLE MOT 1B 14 14 2 5 LED3 3
3 3 TOP COV SOURCE MIDDLE MOT 2A 15 15 3 4 LED4 4
4 4 TOP COVSIG MIDDLE MOT 1A 16 16 4 3 DF middle motor KEY1 5
5 2 KEY2 6
YC5 ENTRY MOT 2B 17 17 6 1 GND 7
20 20 1 8 1 1 ENG RDY ENTRY MOT 1B 18 18
19 19 2 7 2 2 ENG SEL ENTRY MOT 2A 19 19 1 6 3.3V 8
18 18 3 6 3 3 ENG DI ENTRY MOT 1A 20 20 2 5 MTRY U SENS K 9
17 17 4 5 4 4 ENG DO 3 4
16 16 5 4 5 5 ENG PAU YC21 4 3 DF paper entry motor
15 15 6 3 6 6 DET MIDDLE MOT 1B 1 5 2 YC16
Feed image PWB 14 14 7 2 7 7 ENG CLK 6 1 MTRY U SENS K 1 1 1 1
8 1 8 8 GND MIDDLE MOT 1A 2 GND 2 2 3 3
YC3 MIDDLE MOT 2A 3 PAP SENS SIG 3 3 2 2 DF exit sensor
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND 3.3V 4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND MIDDLE MOT 2B 4
4 4 3 3 3 3 24V1 3.3V 5
5 5 4 4 4 4 24V1 YC9 MTRY U SENS K 6
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF side registration
SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1 sensor 2
SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 MT
1 13 1 13 A DF side registration motor 2
SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
2 12 2 12 B YC19 SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 1 1 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2
DF side registration
3 11 3 11 C YC6
SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1 sensor 1
1 1 5V
SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 4
4 10 4 10 2 2 3.3V A
SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 3 GND 7 7 4 1
5 9 5 9 3 3 3.3V
SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 PH ENTRY SENS SIG 8 8 3 2 B PUNCH
6 8 6 8 4 4 GND
7 7 7 7 5 5 GND
SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 3.3V 9 9 2 3 C
1 4
6 6 PHPES REM
PH PWB 8 6 8 6 7 7 PHMOT REM
EJECT CL 13 MTRY FULL SENS A 10 10 3 3
9 5 9 5 8 8 PU RDY
GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor
24V2 14 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
10 4 10 4 9 9 PU SEL
11 3 11 3 10 10 PU CLK
12 2 12 2 11 11 PU DI
YC10 13 13
13 1 13 1 12 12 PU DO
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 14 14
YC7
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 15 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 BUNDLE SENS A 16 16 3 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 2 2 2 2 DF bundle exit switch
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 BUNDLE SENS SIG 18 18 1 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 DF staple PAP PRE UP SENS A 19 19 12 1 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 11 2 2 2 DF paper press sensor 1
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 PAP PRE UP SENS SIG 21 21 10 3 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 PAP PRE LOW SENS A 22 22 9 4 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 8 5 2 2 DF paper press sensor 2
PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG 24 24 7 6 1 1
YC12 DF staple ADJUST SENS A 25 25 6 7 3 3

BRAKE 1 relay PWB GND 26 26 5 8 2 2 DF adjusting sensor
DIR 2 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 4 9 1 1
CLK 3
ENABLE 4 STP MOV SENS A 28 28 3 10 3 3
GND 5 GND 29 29 2 11 2 2 DF slide sensor
24V2 6 STP MOV SENS SIG 30 30 1 12 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 1
TRY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor 2
3
YC13
24V2 1 1 3 1
PAP PRE SOL ACT 2 2 2 2 DF paper press solenoid YC20
PAP PRE SOL KEEP 3 3 1 3 SET SENS A 1 1 3 3
GND 2 2 2 2 DF connection sensor
YC14 SET SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5V 1 2 1 2
LED 2 1 2 1 Paper LED
DF PWB
9-31
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) wiring diagram: DF-7100 only
DF PWB PH main PWB

YC7 YC2
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
24V2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 YC5
CCW 1 1
NC 2 2 PH motor
CW 3 3
YC6 YC1
PU_DO 12 12 1 13 1 1 PH_SDI
PU_DI 11 11 2 12 2 2 PH_SDO
PU_CLK 10 10 3 11 3 3 PH_CLK YC6
PU_SEL 9 9 4 10 4 4 PH_SEL 24V2 1 1 3 1
PU_RDY 8 8 5 9 5 5 PH_RDY PHSOL_PUL 2 2 2 2 PH solenoid *Not applied to
PUMOT_EN 7 7 6 8 6 6 PHMOT_REQ PHSOL_RET 3 3 1 3 100V model
PUPES_EN 6 6
GND 5 5 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 4 4 8 6 8 8 GND 24V2 4 4 3 1
3.3V 3 3 9 5 9 9 3.3V TNKSOL_PUL 5 5 2 2 PH tank solenoid
3.3V 2 2 10 4 10 10 3.3V TNKSOL_HLD 6 6 1 3
5.0V 1 1
YC19 YC7
3.3V 9 9 11 3 11 11 3.3V GND 1 1 3 3
PH_EN_SENS 8 8 12 2 12 12 PH_EN_SENS PH_EN_SENS 2 2 2 2 PH entry sensor
GND 7 7 13 1 13 13 GND 3.3V 3 3 1 1
YC9
4 1 4 1 3.3V
3 2 3 2 TNK_FULL YC8 3 1
PH tank full sensor (Receiver) 2 3 2 3 GND 3.3V 1 1 2 2 PH tank full sensor (Emitter)
1 4 1 4 TNK_FULL_PLS TNK_FULL_PLS 2 2 1 3
SENS_3.3V 3 3 3 3
GND 4 4 2 2 PH tank set sensor
PHTNK_SET 5 5 1 1
SENS_3.3V 6 6 3 3
GND 7 7 2 2 PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 8 8 1 1
SENS_3.3 9 9 3 3
GND 10 10 2 2 PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 11 11 1 1
9-32
2SA/2RJ/2NK

YC12 YC19
STP_MOV_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 BRAKE 1 1 7 7
STP_MOV_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 DIR 2 2 6 6
STP_MOV_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF slide motor CLK 3 3 5 5
STP_MOV_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 ENABLE 4 4 4 4 DF tray motor
GND 5 5 3 3
EJECT_MOT 1B 5 5 1 6 24V2 6 6 2 2
2 5 1 1
EJECT_MOT 1A 6 6 3 4 YC20
EJECT_MOT 2A 7 7 4 3
DF exit motor DRM_SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
5 2 GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF drum sensor
EJECT_MOT 2B 8 8 6 1 DRM_SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
MIDDLE_MOT 1B 9 9 1 6 MID_EJE_SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
YC3 2 5 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF middle sensor
1 1 4 4 1 1 24V1 MIDDLE_MOT 1A 10 10 3 4 MID_EJE_SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
DF exit cover sensor 2 2 3 3 2 2 EJECT_COV_SIG MIDDLE_MOT 2A 11 11 4 3 DF middle motor
5 2 YC21
1 1 2 2 3 3 FRONT _COV_SOURCE MIDDLE_MOT 2B 12 12 6 1 STRY_EJE_SENS A 1 1 3 3
DF front cover sensor 2 2 1 1 4 4 FRONT_COV_SIG GND 2 2 2 2 DF sub exit sensor
ENTRY_MOT 1B 13 13 1 6 STRY_EJE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
2 5
YC4 ENTRY_MOT 1A 14 14 3 4
A5 A7 1 7 1 7 1 1 GND ENTRY_MOT 2A 15 15 4 3 DF paper entry motor 3.3V 4 4 4 1 4 4
A3 A6 2 6 2 6 2 2 GND 5 2 GND 5 5 3 2 3 3
A2 A5 3 5 3 5 3 3 ENG RDY ENTRY_MOT 2B 16 16 6 1 STRY FULL SENS SIG 6 6 2 3 2 2
DF sub tray full sensor
A4 A3 4 4 4 4 4 4 ENG SEL STRY FULL SENS PLS 7 7 1 4 1 1
A6 A1 5 3 5 3 5 5 ENG CLK EJE_RELS_MOT 2B 17 17 4 4
A1 A2 6 2 6 2 6 6 ENG DI EJE_RELS_MOT 1B 18 18 3 3 GND 8 8 3 1 3 3
A7 A4 7 1 7 1 7 7 ENG DO EJE_RELS_MOT 2A 19 19 2 2 DF exit release motor ENTRY_SENS SIG 9 9 2 2 2 2 DF entry sensor
EJE_RELS_MOT 1A 20 20 1 1 3.3V 10 10 1 3 1 1
Feed
LED1 11 11 9 1 7 1 7
image PWB YC13 LED2 12 12 8 2 6 2 6
YC5
MTRY_U_SENS K 1 1 4 1 4 1
LED3 13 13 7 3 5 3 5 DF operation
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1 1 GND LED4 14 14 6 4 4 4 4
GND 2 2 3 2 3 2
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
MTRY_U_SENS SIG 3 3 2 3 2 3 DF tray upper surface sensor 2 KEY1 15 15 5 5 3 5 3 PWB
A8 A8 1 1 3 3 3 3 24V1 KEY2 16 16 4 6 2 6 2
3.3V 4 4 1 4 1 4
A9 A9 2 2 4 4 4 4 24V1 GND 17 17 3 7 1 7 1
YC14
3.3V 18 18 2 8 3 1
SFT_RELS_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
1 12 YC6
SFT_RELS_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3
MTRY_U_SENS K 19 19 1 9 2 2 DF tray upper surface sensor 1
2 11 1 1 GND 1 3
3 10 2 2 GND
SFT_RELS_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF shift release motor
SFT_RELS_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
4 9 3 3 GND
YC22
5 8 4 4 5V
SFT_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 STPLE_SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
6 7 5 5 24V1
MT PWB 7 6 6 6 24V1
SFT_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
DF shift motor 2
GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
SFT_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 STPLE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
8 5 7 7 MT DO
SFT_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1
9 4 8 8 MT DIN
10 3 9 9 MT CLK
SFT_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4 SID_REG_R_SENS A 4 4 12 1 3 3
11 2 10 10 MT SEL
12 1 11 11 MT RDY
SFT_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3
DF shift motor 1
GND 5 5 11 2 2 2 DF side registration sensor 2
SFT_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 SID_REG_R_SENS SIG 6 6 10 3 1 1
SFT_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1
YC7
SID_REG_F_SENS A 7 7 9 4 3 3
12 12 1 1 5V
11 11 2 2 3.3V
GND 8 8 8 5 2 2 DF side registration sensor 1
EJECT_CL 13 13 3 3 SID_REG_F_SENS SIG 9 9 7 6 1 1
10 10 3 3 3.3V
9 9 4 4 GND
2 2 DF exit clutch
24V2 14 14 1 1 GND 10 10 6 7 3 3
8 8 5 5 GND
7 7 6 6 PHPES_REM
PAP_SENS SIG 11 11 5 8 2 2 DF exit sensor
YC15 3.3V 12 12 4 9 1 1
6 6 7 7 PHMOT_REM
PH PWB 5 5 8 8 PU RDY
PADDLE_MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE_MOT 1B 2 2 3 2 3 3 BUNDLE_SENS A 13 13 3 10
4 4 9 9 PU SEL
PADDLE_MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor GND 14 14 2 11 2 2
3 3 10 10 PU CLK
PADDLE_MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 BUNDLE_SENS SIG 15 15 1 12 1 1 DF bundle exit sensor
2 2 11 11 PU DI
1 1 12 12 PU DO
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4
YC8 SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
1 1 1 1 GND
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2
DF side registration motor 2 MTRY HP1 SENS A 16 16 6 1 3 3
2 2 2 2 24V2
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 17 17 5 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
MTRY HP1 SENS SIG 18 18 4 3 1 1
YC7 SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
1 1
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 MTRY HP2 SENS A 19 19 3 4 3 3
2 2 YC9
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 GND 20 20 2 5 2 2
3 3 5 1 5 5 BF RDY
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1 MTRY HP2 SENS SIG 21 21 1 6 1 1
DF tray sensor 2
4 4 4 2 4 4 BF SEL
5 5 3 3 3 3 BF CLK DF staple 4 1
6 6 2 4 2 2 BF DO
7 7 1 5 1 1 BF DI
YC17 relay PWB PADDLE SENS A 22 22 3 2 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 1 13 GND 23 23 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
YC3 STPMOT OUT2 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 24 24 1 4 1 1
BF PWB 4 4 8 8 8
YC10
8 24V2
STPMOT OUT2 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT2 4 10 8 8 2 2 ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
3 3 7 7 7 7 24V2
2 2 6 6 6 6 GND
STPMOT OUT1 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjusting sensor
STPMOT OUT1 6 8 6 6 4 4 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
1 1 5 5 5 5 GND
STPMOT OUT1 7 7
YC5 STPMOT OUT1 8 6 DF staple SFT_SET SENS A 28 28 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 29 29 2 2 DF shift set sensor
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 SFT_SET SENS SIG 30 30 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND YC23
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 SFT_F HP SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF shift sensor 1
YC18 SFT_F HP SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
DRM_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
DRM_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 SFT_R HP SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
DRM_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF relief drum motor GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF shift sensor 2
DRM_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 SFT_R HP SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
24V2 5 5 3 1 MTRY HALF SENS A 7 7 3 3

MID_DRM_SOL ACT 6 6 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 1 GND 8 8 2 2 DF tray sensor 3
YC16 MID_DRM_SOL KEEP 7 7 1 3 MTRY HALF SENS SIG 9 9 1 1
1 2 1 6 1 6 1 1 Eject fan 1
Rear 2 1 2 5 2 5 2 2 24V2 24V2 8 8 3 1 MTRY BF SENS A 10 10 3 3
DRM_BF SOL ACT 9 9 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 2 GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor 5
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 3 Eject fan 2 DRM_BF SOL KEEP 10 10 1 3 MTRY BF SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
Front 2 1 4 3 4 3 4 4 24V2
24V2 11 11 3 1 MTRY FULL SENS A 13 13 3 3
Center
1 2 5 2 5 2 5 5 Eject fan 3 SUB_MID_SOL ACT 12 12 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 3 GND 14 14 2 2 DF tray sensor 4
2 1 6 1 6 1 6 6 24V2 SUB_MID_SOL KEEP 13 13 1 3 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 15 15 1 1
SFT_RELS SENS A 16 16 3 3
GND 17 17 2 2 DF Shift release sensor
DF PWB SFT_RELS SENS SIG 18 18 1 1
9-33
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only
YC3
YC1 1 12 YC7
3 3 1 1 GND GND 2 11 1 1 GND
MT tray sensor 1 2 2 2 2 OFS1 GND 3 10 2 2 GND
1 1 3 3 5V GND 4 9 3 3 GND
5V 5 8 4 4 5V
3 3 4 4 GND 24V 6 7 5 5 24V
MT tray sensor 2 2 2 5 5 OFS2 24V 7 6 6 6 24V
1 1 6 6 5V SDI 8 5 7 7 MT DO
SDO 9 4 8 8 MT DIN
3 3 7 7 GND SCLK 10 3 9 9 MT CLK
MT 2 2 8 8 OFS3 SEL 11 2 10 10 MT SEL
B tray sensor 3 1 1 9 9 5V READY 12 1 11 11 MT RDY
3 3 10 10 GND
DF PWB
MT tray sensor 4 2 2 11 11 OFS4
1 1 12 12 5V
3 3 13 13 GND
MT tray sensor 5 2 2 14 14 OFS5
1 1 15 15 5V
MT PWB
16 16 LED
17 17 GND
18 18 TEJS
19 19 5V
1 4 1 3
YC2
2 3 2 2
1 1 5V YC5
3 2 MOTOR _A 1 4 1 4
MOTOR A 2 3 2 3
4 1 3 1 MT conveying motor
MT tray exit sensor 1 2 2 LED MOTOR B 3 2 3 2
MT tray exit sensor 2
(photo receptor) MOTOR _B 4 1 4 1
(photo emitter)
YC4
3 3 3 3 GND R24V 1 1 1 1
MT cover switch
MY 2 2 4 4 HP SIG 24V 3 3 2 2
B home position sensor 1 1 5 5 5V
3 3 6 6 GND
MB tray sensor 6 2 2 7 7 OFS6
1 1 8 8 5V
3 3 9 9 GND
MB tray sensor 7 2 2 10 10 OFS7
1 1 11 11 5V
12 12 GND
13 13 NC
14 14 5V
9-34
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10) Folder unit(BF-730) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only
YC1 YC10 YC15 7 7

1 3.3V EXTMOT_ 2B 1 1 4 4 BLDMOT_BRK 1 1 6 6
2 TXD EXTMOT_1B 2 2 3 3 BLDMOT_DIR 2 2 5 5
3 RXD EXTMOT_2A 3 3 2 2 BF adjusting motor 2 BLDMOT_CLK 3 3 4 4 BF blade motor
4 N.C. EXTMOT_1A 4 4 1 1 BLDMOT_EN 4 4 3 3
5 GND GND 5 5 2 2
MDLMOT_ 2B 5 5 4 4 24V2 6 6 1 1
YC2 MDLMOT_1B 6 6 3 3
1 3.3V MDLMOT_2A 7 7 2 2 BF side registration motor 2 YC16
2 SWCLK MDLMOT_1A 8 8 1 1 FLDMOT_DIR 1 1 6 6
3 SWDIO FLDMOT_ALM 2 2 5 5
4 RESET CINMOT_ 2B 9 9 4 4 FLDMOT_CLK 3 3 4 4
5 GND CINMOT_1B 10 10 3 3 FLDMOT_EN 4 4 3 3 BF main motor
CINMOT_ 2A 11 11 2 2 BF paper entry motor N.C 5 5
CINMOT_1A 12 12 1 1 GND 6 6 2 2
24V2 7 7 1 1
YC4 EXCMOT_2B 13 13 8 1 4 4
YC20
2 2 1 1 1 1 24V1 EXCMOT_1B 14 14 7 2 3 3
BF left cover sensor EXCMOT_2A 15 15 6 3 2 2 BF adjusting motor 1 5V 1 6 1 3 1
1 1 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG GND 2 2 2
EXCMOT_1A 16 16 5 4 1 1
5 2 BF adjusting sensor 1
BDLFT_HP 3 4 3 1 3
YC6 17 17 8 1 4 4
STMMOT_2B
2 2 1 1 24V STMMOT_1B 3 3 5V 4 3 4 3 1
BF set sensor 18 18 7 2
1 1 2 2 FRONT COV SIG STMMOT_2A 19 19 6 3 2 2 BF side registration motor 1 GND 5 2 5 2 2 BFside registration sensor 1
WDL_HP 6 1 6 1 3
STMMOT_1A 20 20 5 4 1 1
2 2 1 1 3 3 24V
BF tray sensor 1 1 2 2 4 4 EJECT COV SIG 5V 7 6 1 3 1
GND 8 5 2 2 2 BF tray full sensor
FULL 9 4 3 1 3
YC7 5V 10 3 1
3 4
1 1 GND
YC9
GND 11 2 5 2 2 BF exit sensor
2 2 GND OUT 12 1 6 1 3
5 5 1 5 3 3 ENG_RDY
4 4 2 4 4 4 ENG_SEL 5V 13 3 1 3 1
3 3 3 3 5 5 ENG_CLK 14 2 2
GND 2 2 BF vertical conveying sensor
2 2 4 2 6 6 ENG_DI 15 1 3 1 3
TRANS PORT
1 1 5 1 7 7 ENG_DO
YC10 YC3 5V 16 3 1 3 1
8 8 8 8 4 4 24V GND 17 2 2 2 2 BF paper sensor
DF PWB 7 7 7 7 3 3 24V PAPER 18 1 3 1 3
6 6 6 6 2 2 GND
5 5 5 5 1 1 YC13 5V 19 3 1 3 1
GND
5V 1 1 10 10 GND 20 2 2 2 2
YC5
2 2
BFside registration sensor 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V STLS2 9 9 WDU_HP 21 1 3 1 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND 3 3 8 8
GND
2 2 2 2 2 2 STLS1 4 4 7 7 5V 22 22 3 1 3 1
GND
STHP 5 5 6 6 GND 23 23 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V BF staple motor BF brade sensor
STMOT_OUT1 6 6 5 5 BLD_HP 24 24 1 3 1 3
STMOT_OUT1 7 7 4 4
FGND 8 8 3 3 GND 25 3 1 3 1
STMOT_OUT2 9 9 2 2 BULOW_HP 26 2 2 2 2
STMOT_OUT2 10 10
BF adjusting sensor 2
1 1 3.3V 27 1 3 1 3
YC17 GND 28 3 1 3 1
24V2 1 1 3 1 3 1 CARRY_IN 29 2 2 2 2 BF entry sensor
3FSOL_ATT 2 2 2 2 2 2 BF feedshift solenoid 3.3V 30 1 3 1 3
3FSOL_HLD 3 3 1 3 1 3
BF PWB
9-35
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11) Punch unit (PH-7) wiring diagram: DF-7110/7120 only
YC8 YC2 YC4

PGND 1 1 1 1 GND PHMOT_N 1 1 2 2 PHMOT_N
24V2 2 2 2 2 24V2 NC 2 2 PH motor
PHMOT_P 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_P
YC7 YC1 YC3

PU_DO 12 12 1 1 PH_SDI PHADJ_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PHADJ_MOT_A
PU_DI 11 11 2 2 PH_SDO PHADJ_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 PHADJ_MOT_B
PU_CLK 10 10 3 3 PH_CLK PHADJ_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PHADJ_MOT_An PH slide motor
PU_SEL 9 9 4 4 PH_SEL PHADJ_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 PHADJ_MOT_Bn
PU_RDY 8 8 5 5 PH_RDY
PUMOT_EN 7 7 6 6 PHMOT_REQ
PUPES_EN 6 6 7 7 PHPES_REQ YC6
SGND 5 5 8 8 GND SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
SGND 4 4 9 9 GND GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH slide sensor
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V PHADJ_HP 3 3 1 1 PHADJ_HP
3.3V 2 2 11 11 3.3V
5.0V 1 1 12 12 5.0V
YC5
24V2 1 1 3 1 24V2
PHSOL_PUL 2 2 2 Relay 2 PHSOL_PUL PH solenoid
PHSOL_RET 3 3 1 3 PHSOL_RET
DF PWB
PHLED_A 4 4 5 5 PHLED_A
PHLED_B 5 5 4 4 PHLED_B
PHLED_C 6 6 3 3 PHLED_C PH paper edge sensor 1
PHLED_D 7 7 2 2 PHLED_D
YC10 PHLED_3.3V 8 8 1 1 PHLED_3.3V
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 RESET 5.0V 9 9 3 3 5.0V
4 MODE PHTNK_FUL 10 10 2 2 PHTNK_FUL PH tank full sensor
GND 11 11 1 1 GND
YC11
1
1 3.3V YC7
2 DBG_TX PHPES_DET 1 1 2 2 PHPES_DET
3 DBG_RX GND 2 2 1 1 GND PH paper edge sensor 2
4 NC
5 GND
YC8
SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_PLS
SENS3.3V 4 4 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 5 5 2 2 GND PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 6 6 1 1 PHMOT_HP
PH PWB
YC9
PHTNK_SET 1 2 1 1 PHTNK_SET
GND 2 1 2 2 GND PH tank set sensor
9-36
2SA/2RJ/2NK
YC8 YC17
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 MID EJE SENS A 1 1
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 GND 2 2
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2
DF exit motor MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
GND 4 4 3 1 3 3
ST MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 2 2 DF entry sensor
ST MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 3 1 1
ST MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 DF slide motor
ST MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 1

EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF exit release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 24V1
DF front cover sensor 2 2 2 2 2 2 FRNT COV SIG ENTRY MOT 2B 13 13
ENTRY MOT 1B 14 14 1 6
1 1 3 3 TOP COV SOURCE ENTRY MOT 2A 15 15 2 5
DF top cover sensor 2 2 4 4 TOP COV SIG ENTRY MOT 1A 16 16 3 4
4 3 DF paper entry motor
YC5 MIDDLE MOT 2B 17 17 5 2
A5 A5 3 5 3 5 1 1 ENG RDY MIDDLE MOT 1B 18 18 6 1
A3 A3 4 4 4 4 2 2 ENG SEL MIDDLE MOT 2A 19 19
A2 A2 6 2 6 2 3 3 ENG DI MIDDLE MOT 1A 20 20 1 6
A4 A4 7 1 7 1 4 4 ENG DO 2 5
A6 A6 2 6 2 6 5 5 ENG PAU 3 4
A1 A1 5 3 5 3 6 6 DET 4 3 DF middle motor YC16
Feed A7 A7 1 7 1 7 7 7 ENG CLK 5 2 MTRY U SENS K 1 1 4 3 4 1
8 8 GND 6 1 GND 2 2 3 4 3 2 DF tray upper surface
image PWB YC3 MTRY U SENS SIG 3 3 2 5 2 3
sensor 2
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1 1 GND 3.3V 4 4 1 6 1 4
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
A8 A8 1 1 3 3 3 3 24V1 3.3V 5 5 6 1 3 1
A9 A9 2 2 4 4 4 4 24V1 YC9 MTRY U SENS K 6 6 5 2 2 2
DF tray upper surface
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4 1 3 sensor 1
YC6 PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
12 12 1 1 5V PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 12 1 3 3
11 11 2 2 3.3V GND 2 2 11 2 2 2
DF side registration
10 10 3 3 3.3V SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 10 3 1 1 sensor 2
9 9 4 4 GND SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3 DF side registration
8 8 5 5 GND SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 motor 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 9 4 3 3 DF side registration
7 7 6 6 PH PES REM SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 5 5 8 5 2 2
6 6 7 7 PH MOT REM SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 7 6 1 1 sensor 1
PH PWB 5 5 8 8 PU RDY SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
4 4 9 9 PU SEL SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 DF side registration GND 7 7 6 7 3 3
3 3 10 10 PU CLK SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 motor 1 PAP SENS SIG 8 8 5 8 2 2 DF exit sensor
2 2 11 11 PU DI SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1 3.3V 9 9 4 9 1 1
1 1 12 12 PU DO
YC7 BUNDLE SENS A 10 10 3 10
1 1 1 1 GND GND 11 11 2 11 2 2
2 2 2 2 24V2 BUNDLE SENS SIG 12 12 1 12 1 1 DF bundle exit sensor
4 1
YC10 PADDLE SENS A 13 13 3 2 3 3
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 GND 14 14 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 15 15 1 4 1 1
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 MTRY HP SENS A 16 16 9 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 8 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 MTRY HP SENS SIG 18 18 7 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 DF staple MTRY HALF SENS A 19 19 6 4 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 5 5 2 2 DF tray sensor 2
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 MTRY HALF SENS SIG 21 21 4 6 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 MTRY FULL SENS A 22 22 3 7 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 2 8 2 2 DF tray sensor 3
MTRY FULL SENS SIG 24 24 1 9 1 1
DF staple
relay PWB ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjusting sensor
ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
STP MOV SENS A 28 28 3 1 3 3

GND 29 29 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
STP MOV SENS SIG 30 30 1 3 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRAY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 MID EJE SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
TRAY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF middle sensor
MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
DF PWB
9-37
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-7 Installation Guide

(1) PF-7100
PF-7100
(Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.
G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
G*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
G*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴኎૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖˈ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦ࣑ᗵ᨝лǄ
┍⸽䖼㜄GḔ㥉G䊀㢨䘸GSG㝸㻝㣠ᴴG⻍㛨G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈Gⵌ☐㐐G㥐ᶤ䚌㐡㐐㝘U
ྠᲕရ࡟ᅛᐃࢸ࣮ࣉࠊ⦆⾪ᮦࡀࡘ࠸࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡣࠊᚲࡎྲྀࡾእࡍࡇ࡜ࠋ
ձ
A
ղ ճ
1
մ
մ
յ
յ ն
ն
շ շ
ո
չ
ո պչ
2
ջ
պ ռ
ջ
ս
ռ վս
ߑ
AA
տ
վ տ
C(M3x8)
ߒ
ߑ
AA
ր
ր
C(M3x8)
3
ց
4
ւ
RR FL RR FL
1 1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1 1
D E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴਴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄(˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄')˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖Ǆ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOkSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOlPGᴵGZGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල')ࡀᗋ㠃࡟᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺࡟ࠊ✰ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ06ࢱ࢖ࢺ(ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ
5
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
1 RR
FL
D
E
D 1 1 1
D
F E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
6
փ
ք
ON
7
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1.Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1.Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1.Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
简体中文
前端对位调节
1.确认纸张的前端（1）和测试样张（a）的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Top］ > ［Cassette(L)］。
한국어
선단 타이밍 조정
1.용지 선단 (1) 과 테스트 패턴 (a) 의 라인 (2) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
先端タイミング調整
1.紙の先端 (1) とテストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] を選択する。
8
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
3.Régler les valeurs. 6.Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (b) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (2) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (c) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5.Imprimez le motif de test.
3.Ajuste los valores. 6.Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (b) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (2) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De 20mm±1.5mm
5.Imprima el patrón de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 6.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (b) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (2) auf der Test-
Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> 20mm±1.5mm
5.Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.
3. Regolare i valori. 6.Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (b) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (2) nello schema
Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5.Stampare lo schema di prova.
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（a）的线

测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。（2）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.1mm
4.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
5.打印测试图案。
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (a) 에서 라인 (2) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량：0.1mm ＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
4.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
5.시험 패턴을 인쇄합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれが基準

テストパターン (b) : 設定値を上げる。
　値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (c) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >20mm±1.5mm
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.1mm
4.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。
5.テストパターンを出力する。
9
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f
Adjusting the center line

1.Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (d). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
Ajuste de la línea central

1.Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (d). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±0,5mm.
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (d). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].
Regolazione della linea centrale

1.Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (d). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±0,5mm.
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
中心线调节
1.确认纸张的中心（3）和测试样张（d）的线（4）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > ±0.5mm 以内
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette3］或［Cassette4］。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (3) 과 테스트 패턴 (d) 의 라인 (4) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ ±0.5mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
センターライン調整
1.紙のセンター(3) とテストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ ±0.5mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
10
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.

Mire d' essai (e) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (d) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (d) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±0,5mm.

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (d) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
3.Regolare i valori. 6.Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (d) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±0,5mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（d）的线

测试图案 (e) ：调高设定值。（4）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (f) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 >±0.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (d) 에서 라인 (4) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (e)：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (f)：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량：0.1mm ＜기준치＞ ±0.5mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれが基準

テストパターン (e) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (f) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >±0.5mm 以内
11
2016. 6
303RB56710-02
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) PF-7110
PF-7110
(Large Capacity Feeder)
Installation Guide
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
G*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
G*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
1
ճճ
մ մ
յ
մյ յ
ն
ն
նշ շ
շո
ոչ
ո չչ
պ
2
ճ
պ ջ
ջ ռ
ߑ
AA
ս
ռմ յ
ս
ߒ
C(M3x8)
ߑ
AA
վն
վ շ
C(M3x8)
տո չ
3
ր
RR FL RR FL
1
1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1
1
D E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
놹鵹ꗞ덵ꮕ')閵ꗉ鲚ꐩ꾅뇆덵鷕ꯍ넽鵹ꈒ霡ꐂ᧤᧥냹꫕몒뼩驍ꩡ06멵넩뱭(閶闑ꈑ꫙렍뼞鱽鲙
4
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
RR
1
FL
D
E
D 1 1
1
D
E E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
5
ց
ߑ
ւ
ON
6
Changing paper size
A4 B5
Modification du format du papier
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel ձ

Ändern des Papierformats
Cambio del formato della carta
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩ ߑ
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬኚ᭦
ߒ
ղ ճ
մ յ
1 պ
ն շ
7
ո
2 ս
2ࠉս
8
ռ ս
տ ր
ց Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.

Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare il formato carta.
ᢗ㹼㔤‫⁑؞‬ᔿ8ˈ䘋㹼㓨ᕐቪረⲴ䇮ᇊǄ
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
9
A4 Letter
10
մ
յ ն
㹼 PP
11
ո Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
12
Letter A4
ձ
ճ
* Service Parts
Parts No.
* 303RC1008_
*
*
*
13
մ
յ ն
㹼 PP
ߑ ߒ
ߔ ߓ
14
ո Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
15
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1.Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1.Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1.Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
简体中文
前端对位调节
1.确认纸张的前端（1）和测试样张（a）的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Top］ > ［Cassette(L)］。
한국어
선단 타이밍 조정
1.용지 선단 (1) 과 테스트 패턴 (a) 의 라인 (2) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
先端タイミング調整
1.紙の先端 (1) とテストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] を選択する。
16
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm

Mire d' essai (c) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm

Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De 20mm±1.5mm

Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> 20mm±1.5mm

Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（a）的线

测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。（2）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (a) 에서 라인 (2) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량：0.1mm ＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれが基準

　値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (c) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >20mm±1.5mm
17
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f

1.Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (d). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].

1.Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (d). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].

1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (d). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].

1.Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (d). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
中心线调节
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette3］或［Cassette4］。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (3) 과 테스트 패턴 (d) 의 라인 (4) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
1.紙のセンター(3) とテストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
18
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.

Mire d' essai (e) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (d) soit dans la référence.

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (d) esté dentro de los valores de ref-

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (d) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (d) all'interno del riferimento.

测试图案 (e) ：调高设定值。（4）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (f) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 >±0.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (d) 에서 라인 (4) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (e)：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (f)：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれが基準

テストパターン (e) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (f) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >±0.5mm 以内
19
2016. 6
303RC56710-02
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) PF-7120
PF-7120
(Side Feeder)
Installation Guide
A B
Color MFP Color MFP

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 70/65ppm,80/70ppm
35/35ppm,40/40ppm,
50/50ppm,60/55ppm Black & White MFP
70ppm,80ppm
Black & White MFP
40ppm,50ppm,60ppm
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP(A), see Page 1 to Page 13, Page 22 to Page 23.
For installation with a MFP(B), see Page 14 to Page 23.
1.
Français
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A), voir Page 1 à Page 13, Page 22 à Page 23.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(B), voir Page 14 à Page 23.
1.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP(A), consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 13, páginas de la 22 a la 23.
Para la instalación con un MFP(B), consulte las páginas de la 14 a la 23.
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) siehe Seiten 1 bis 13, Seiten 22 bis 23.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(B) siehe Seiten 14 bis 23.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A), vedere le pagine da 1 a 13, pagine da 22 a 23.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(B), vedere le pagine da 14 a 23.
简体中文
1.
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到 MFP(A) 上时，请参见 P1-P13,P22-P23。
安装到 MFP(B) 上时，请参见 P14-P23。
1.한국어
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
MFP(A) 에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~13 페이지 ,22 페이지 ~23 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
MFP(B) 에 설치하는 경우 14 페이지 ~23 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
装着する対象によって、取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、以下のページに記載しています。
MFP(A) に設置する場合；1 ページ～ 13 ページ、22 ページ～ 23 ページ
MFP(B) に設置する場合；14 ページ～ 23 ページ
A B C D E(M4x8P)
A
L
M N
G(M4x8) H I J
F
K*
K*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

K*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
K*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
K*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
AA
K*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
K*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
K*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
K*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ MFP
ձ ղ
1
A
մ
ն շ
2
A
չ
ջ ռ
3
A
ս վ
տ ր
ւ փ
4
A
ք
(66 mm)
C
18 mm
18 mm
B
B 77mm+0mm
-2mm
B
B
B
77mm+0mm
-2mm
B
5
A
न
6
A
प फ
ब भ
7
A
र
D
D
E(M4x8P)
E(M4x8P)
ळ ऴ
8
A
०
१ २
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
३
H
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
9
A ५ ६
ߑ
J
E(M4x8P)
ߒ
AA
७
a=b
MFP
G(M4x8)
PF
G(M4x8) a b
९ ॰
ON
10
A
A4 B5
Changing paper size

ձ
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
11
A
ճ
մ յ
Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le
format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el

tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen

Sie das Papierformat ein.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare i

formato carta.
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G
䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ
⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
12
A
Adjusting the cursor width
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding,
while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
Réglage de la largeur du curseur

* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur trop grande
risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor

* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel;
una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern,
wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta,
mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi,
come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.
⑮ḽᇳᓜⲺ䈹㢸
Ćྲ᷌⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷ሿˈਟ㜭䙐ᡀн‫׋‬㓨ˈ⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷བྷˈࡉਟ㜭ਁ⭏↚ᯌ䘋㓨ㅹᛵߥǄ
䀘㉐G䔡G㦤㥉
୔䀘㉐G䔡㢨G㣅㡰⮨GⱨἽ㫴SG䀘㉐G䔡㢨G䆠⮨Gᷱ㇠Ἵ㫴G☥㢨Gⵐ㈑䚔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㏩⏼␘U
࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡢㄪᩚ
࣮ͤ࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀᑠࡉ࠸࡜↓⤥⣬ࠊ࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀ኱ࡁ࠸࡜ᩳࡵ⤥⣬࡞࡝ࡀⓎ⏕ࡍࡿྍ⬟ᛶࡀ࠶ࡿࠋ
0.5~1.0 mm
13
A E(M4x8P) F G(M4x8) H
B
B
C
I J K*
K*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

K*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
K*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
M N
K*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
K*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
K*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
K*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
K*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
ձ ղ
OFF
ճ մ
14
յ ն
B
շ ո
պ
1mm
L
1mm
0mm
1mm
15
ջ ռ
B
E(M4x8P) E(M4x8P)
N
M
ս
H
վ տ
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
ր ց
16
ւ փ ք
B
J
E(M4x8P)
द
a=b
MFP
G(M4x8)
PF
A
G(M4x8) a b
ध न
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
17
प
B
ON
18
A4 B5
B
Changing paper size

ձ
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
19
ճ
B
մ յ
Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le
format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el

tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen

Sie das Papierformat ein.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare i

formato carta.
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G
䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ
⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
20
Adjusting the cursor width
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, B
while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
Réglage de la largeur du curseur

* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur trop grande
risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor

* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel;
una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern,
wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta,
mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi,
come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.
⑮ḽᇳᓜⲺ䈹㢸
Ćྲ᷌⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷ሿˈਟ㜭䙐ᡀн‫׋‬㓨ˈ⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷བྷˈࡉਟ㜭ਁ⭏↚ᯌ䘋㓨ㅹᛵߥǄ
䀘㉐G䔡G㦤㥉
୔䀘㉐G䔡㢨G㣅㡰⮨GⱨἽ㫴SG䀘㉐G䔡㢨G䆠⮨Gᷱ㇠Ἵ㫴G☥㢨Gⵐ㈑䚔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㏩⏼␘U
࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡢㄪᩚ
࣮ͤ࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀᑠࡉ࠸࡜↓⤥⣬ࠊ࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀ኱ࡁ࠸࡜ᩳࡵ⤥⣬࡞࡝ࡀⓎ⏕ࡍࡿྍ⬟ᛶࡀ࠶ࡿࠋ
0.5~1.0 mm
21
A
2
1
2
a b c
English
1.Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the center (2) of a test pattern. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust
the gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Français
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier la déviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2) d'une forme d'essai. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Español
1.Compruebe la desviación entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y el centro (2) de un patrón de prueba. Si la separación supera el valor de ref-
erencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Deutsch
1.Überprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prüfmusters. Wenn der Abstand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Italiano
1.Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il centro (2) di un modello di prova. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferi-
mento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
简体中文
中心线调节
1.确认标准图像 (a) 的中心位置 (1) 与测试图案的中心位置 (2) 的偏移。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette5］。
한국어
센터라인 조정
1.적정화상 (a) 의 센터 (1) 와 테스트패턴의 센터 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
1.適正画像 (a) のセンター(1) とテストパターンのセンター(2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ ±2.0mm 以内。
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5] を選択する。
22
A
2
1
2
a b c
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern is within the refer-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. ence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm

Mire d' essai (c) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max.

Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba esté dentro de los valores de refer-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm encia.
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm

Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite sich innerhalb der Referenz befindet.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.

Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张的线（2）的

测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 > ±2.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴에서 라인 (2) 의 격차가 기준 이

테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수행
테트스 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 . 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターンの線 (2) のずれが基準値内

　になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (c) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 > ±2.0mm 以内。
23
2016. 12
303RL56710-03
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) DP-7100
DP-7100
(Document processor: RADF)
Installation Guide
A B C D E F
G(M4x10) H I(M3x8)
120V (North America / Latin America)

K J
ձ
230V (Europe)
K J
ղ ճ
մ յ
1
ն շ
0mm
B
1mm
ո չ
2
ռ
վ տ
ր ց ւ
3
փ
G(M4x10)
ք द
K
J
H I(M3x8)
4
ध
ON
5
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作，准备一张 A3 原稿（a），距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线（b）并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线（c）。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿（a）并进行测试复印，确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
6
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿（a），如果偏移值在标准值以上时，对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整。
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
（주의） 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。

MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
（注意）画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
7
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 10. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 13. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page17. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 10. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 13. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 17 <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 10. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 13. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 17. <Valor de referencia>Dentro de ±1,5 %
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 10. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 13. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 17. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 10. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 13. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整，否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度第 10 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度第 13 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值第 17 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .

・선단경사확인 10 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 13 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・등배도 확인 17 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±1.5% 이내
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 10 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
両面：±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 13 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・等倍度確認 17 ページ＜基準値＞ ±1.5% 以内
8
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 19. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 21. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 23.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 19. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 21. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 23.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 19. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 21. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 23.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 19. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 21. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 23.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 19. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 21. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 23.
・确认前端定时调整第 19 页
±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 >
・确认中心线第 21 页 < 标准值 >
单面：±2.0mm 以内，
双面：±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时，可以同时自动进行等倍值，前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整第 23 页
・선단 타이밍 확인 19 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±2.5mm 이내

・센터 라인확인 21 페이지 ＜기준치＞ 단면：±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면：±3.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하면 등배도 조정 , 선단타이밍 조정 , 센터 라인조정의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고에 의한 자동조정 23 페이지
・先端タイミング確認 19 ページ＜基準値＞ ±2.5mm 以内

・センターライン確認 21 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±2.0mm 以内、
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 23 ページ
9
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]

1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内。
　　　　　双面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준체＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±4.0mm 以内
10
ղ
2.
2. ճ
3. 3.
4
մ
4.
4.
Adjust the position of the DP unit (A). Regolare la posizione dell'unità DP (A).
Loosen the adjusting screw (5). Allentare la vite di regolazione (5).
For
5. copy example (d): Slide the DP unit (A) to the machine rear (). Per un esempio di copia (d):
For copy example (e): Slide the DP unit (A) to the machine front (). Far scivolare l'unità DP (A) verso il retro della macchina ( ).
Tighten the adjusting screw (5). Per un esempio di copia (e):
Perform a test copy. Far scivolare l'unità DP (A) verso la parte anteriore della macchina ( ).
Stringere la vite di regolazione (9).
Eseguire una copia di prova.
Régler la position de l'unité CD (A). 䈳㢲'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅Ⲵս㖞Ǆ

Desserrez la vis de réglage (5). ᤗᶮ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (d): ༽ঠṧᕐ˄G˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘਾ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
Faire glisser l'unité CD (A) à l'arrière de la machine ( ). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄H˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘࡽ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (e): ㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Faire glisser l'unité CD (A) à l'avant de la machine ( ). 䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
Serrez la vis de réglage (5).
Effectuer une copie de test.
Ajuste la posición de la unidad DP (A). kw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG㢌G㠸㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚌㉬㟈U

Afloje
6. el tornillo de ajuste (5). 㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
7.
Para la copia de muestra (d): ㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
Deslice la unidad DP (A) hacia la parte posterior de la máquina ( ). GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G◘㯱OGGGGPG㡰⦐Gⴴ㛨㨰㉬㟈U
Para la copia de muestra (e): ㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
Deslice la unidad DP (A) hacia el frente de la máquina ( ). GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G㚒㯱GOGGGGPG㡰⦐G␭ᷜ㨰㉬㟈U
Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (5). 㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Haga una copia de prueba. 䊀㏘䏬G㾨䙰⪰G䚝⏼␘U
Stellen Sie die Position der DP-Einheit (A) ein. '3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࡢ఩⨨ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (5). ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (d): ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝGࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔᚋഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Schieben Sie die DP-Einheit (A) zur Geräterückseite ( ). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝHࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ$ࢆᶵᲔ๓ഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (e): ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Schieben Sie die DP-Einheit (A) zur Gerätevorderseite ( ). ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Die Einstellschraube (5) festziehen.
Eine Testkopie erstellen.
11
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
6.After the adjustment, install the inner cover (4) which is removed in step 3.Close the DP cover (3).
7.Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 9 on page 2).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
6.Après l'ajustement, installez le capot interne (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 3.Refermez le capot du DP (3).
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 9 à la page 2.)
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
6.Después del ajuste, instale la cubierta interna (4) que se quitó en el paso 3.Cierre la cubierta del DP (3).
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 9 en la página 2).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
6.Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Abdeckung (4), die in Schritt 3 entfernt wurde.Schließen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (3).
7.Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 9 auf Seite 2).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
6.Al termine della regolazione, installare il coperchio interno (4), rimosso al punto 3.Chiudere il coperchio del DP (3).
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 9 a pagina 2).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整结束后，重新安装在步骤 3 中取下的内部盖板 (4)。关闭 DP 盖板（3）。
7.拆下原稿垫（C），参照第 2 页的步骤 9 再次装上。
5.벨크로 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

＜기준치＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
　　　　　양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
6.조정 후에 순서 3 에서 분리한 내부 커버 (4) 를 설치합니다 .DP 커버 (3) 를 닫습니다 .
7.원고매트 (C) 를 제거하고 2 페이지 순서 9 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。

6.調整終了後、手順 3 で外したインナーカバー(4) を取り付ける。DP カバー(3) を閉める。
7.原稿マット (C) を取り外し、
2 ページの手順 9 を参考に再度取り付ける。
12
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]

1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值。如果超过标准值时，必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우：±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞片面の場合：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合：±4.0mm 以内
13
8.2. ղ ճ
3.
4
3
մ
4. յ
5.
Adjust the height of DP. Regolazione dell’altezza del DP

Loosen the nut (3). Allentare il dado (3).
For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite di regolazione (4).
For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite di regolazione (4).
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5 mm (5) Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (5)
Retighten the nut (3). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
4
4
3
3
Réglez la hauteur du DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
Desserrez l’écrou (3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5 mm (5) ⇿ṬⲴ〫ࣘ䟿˖㓖PP˄˅
Resserrez l’écrou (3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Adjust
Adjust the
the height
height of
of DP.
DP. Regolazione
Regolazione dell’altezza
dell’altezza del
del DP
DP
Loosen
Loosen the
the nut
nut (3).
(3). Allentare
Allentare ilil dado
dado (3).
(3).
Ajuste
For la
copyaltura del
example DP.(f): kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
For la
Afloje copy example
tuerca (f): Loosen
(3). (g): Loosen the the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U di copia
copia (f):
(f): Allentare
Allentare la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
For
Forlacopy
copy example
example (g): Tighten
Tighten the
theeladjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di di copia
copia (g):
(g): Stringere
Stringere la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
Para copia
Retighten de
the muestra
nut (3). (f): Afloje tornillo de ajuste(4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
(4).
Retighten the nut (3).
Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (4). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (5) XᵐGⷴ䞈⣽ஔ㚱WU\O\P
Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Réglez
Réglez la
la hauteur
hauteur du
du DP.
DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
Desserrez
Desserrez l’écrou
l’écrou (3).
(3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (f):
l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez
Desserrez la
la vis
vis de
de réglage
réglage (4).
(4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4).
Die l’exemple
Höhe des DP de copie (g):
einstellen. Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Resserrez
Lösen Sie diel’écrou
Resserrez Mutter(3).
l’écrou (3).
(3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (4) festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm (5) ┠┒ࡾᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸⣙PP
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest. ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ajuste
Ajuste la
la altura
altura del
del DP.
DP. kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
Afloje
Afloje la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (f):
(f): Afloje
Afloje el
el tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (g):
(g): Apriete
Apriete elel tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Vuelva
Vuelva a a apretar
apretar la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Die
Die Höhe
Höhe des
des DP
DP einstellen.
einstellen. '3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
Lösen
Lösen Sie die Mutter
Sie die Mutter (3).
(3). ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢼࢵࢺࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (f)
(f) :: Lösen
Lösen Sie
Sie die
die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4).
(4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝIࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die
Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4)
(4) festziehen.
festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝJࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ziehen
Ziehen Sie
Sie die
die Mutter
Mutter (3)
(3) wieder
wieder fest.
fest. ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢼࢵࢺࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
14
ն
6.
շ
7.
ո
8.
չ
9.
պ
10.
ջ
11.
15
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
12.Make a proof copy again.

13.Repeat steps 1 to 12 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
12.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

13.Répétez les étapes 1 à 12 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
12.Haga otra copia de prueba.

13.Repita los pasos 1 a 12 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
12.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

13.Die Schritte 1 bis 12 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
12.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

13.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 12 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
12.再次进行测试复印。
13.反复操作步骤 1~12，直至复印样张的线（2）为标准值内。
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
12.다시 벨크로를 합니다 .

13.벨크로 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 12 을 반복합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
12.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
13.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 12 を繰り返す。
16
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- de ±1,5%
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procédure suivante. Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
<Valeur de référence> ner(surface)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
de ±1,5% ner (arrière)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2.Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ación secundaria del escáner(anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
<Valor de referencia> ación secundaria del escáner(reverso).
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale

1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
<Valore di riferimento> ner (superficie)
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% ner(lato posteriore)
[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（正面）
如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Sub Scan(B) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（反面）
< 标准值 >
对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Sub Scan(B)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（뒷면）
＜기준치＞
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面）
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Sub Scan(B)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面）
＜基準値＞
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
17
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,02 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值达

在长度偏短时复印样本（h）（j）：调高设定值到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时复印样本（i）（k）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.02% 对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

길이가 짧은 경우 벨크로 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . .
길이가 긴 경우 벨크로 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.02% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4

長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j)：設定値を上げるを繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k)：設定値を下げる＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.02% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
18
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)
<Reference value> Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing(rear side)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)
<Valeur de référence> Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert> Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteri-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm ore)
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteri-
ore).
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端对位 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > Back Head ：调整前端对位 ( 反面 )
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 反面 )
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ Back Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 Back Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head ：先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail ：後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
＜基準値＞ Back Head：先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail：後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
19
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.21 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,21 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,21 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,21 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,21 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范

在前端定时偏快时复印样本（l）：调低设定值围内。
在前端定时偏慢时复印样本（m）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.21mm 线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 벨크로 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 벨크로 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
1 스텝당 변화량：0.21mm
4.벨크로를 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰

先端タイミングが短い場合コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を下げる。り返す。
先端タイミングが長い場合コピーサンプル (m)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.21mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。
20
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。

1.确认原稿（a）中心线（1）和复印样本中心线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front ：中心位置（正面）的调整
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Back ：中心位置（反面）的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 벨크로 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . Back：센터 위치（뒷면）의 조정
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）
の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Back：センター位置（裏面）の調整
＜基準値＞片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
21
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): riduce il valore. scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): aumenta il riferimento.
valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm

当中心向前偏移时复印样本（n）：调低设定值围内。
当中心向内偏移时复印样本（o）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.085mm 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이：±2.0mm 이내
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を

センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n)：設定値を下げ繰り返す。
る。＜基準値＞
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる。片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
22
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina surface adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 4.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 3 until "OK" appears.
For details, see the service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la tou-
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'origi- che Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
nal du DP 4.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
l'original de réglage. fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 3 jusqu'à
2.Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
appuyer sur la touche Start. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 3.Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP realizar un ajuste de anverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 4.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2.Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 3 hasta que aparezca "OK"
de Start. en la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 3.Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan- betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
den ist 4.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
2.Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start- wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 3, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste betätigen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 3.Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 4.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
2.Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 3
tasto di Start. fino a quando appare "OK".
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。

没有 DP 调整用原稿时 4.如果屏幕上出现 "OK"（完成），则表示调整完成。
1.进入维修保养模式 U411，选择［DP Auto Adj］，输出测试原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上，按 Start 键。重复步骤 2 和 3，直到 "OK"（完成）出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 본체로 세트하고 시작 키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 다.
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 설정하고 [DP Auto Adj] 를 눌러 조정된 원고를 4.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작 키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 3 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合う。
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出 4.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
力する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 3 を繰り返す。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
23
5mm
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until "OK" appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca "OK"
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare "OK".
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上，并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。重复步骤 1 和 2，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FU(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行正面的详细内容请参照维修手册。
调整。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 “OK” 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .

1.DP 자동조정원고 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
DP 본체로 세트합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작키의 순서로 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、Start キーの詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
24
2016. 2
303R756710-01
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) DP-7110
DP-7110
(Document processor: CIS)
Installation Guide
A B(L) B(R) C(M4x14) D E F G
I P
L M
K(M3x8)
H(M3x8 BLACK) J
120V (North America / Latin America)

O N
ձ
230V (Europe)
O N
ղ C(M4x14)
ճ
B(L) C(M4x14)
A
B(R)
մ C(M4x14) յ
D
C(M4x14)
1
ն շ
E C(M4x14)
շ շ-2
ո շ-2
ߑ
շ-2
ߑ ߒ
ߓ ߔ
2
ߕ ߖ
ߗ ߘ
ո չ
F
G
H(M3x8 BLACK)
պ ջ
3
ռ ս
վ ࠉտ
ր ց
4
փ
द ध
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
5
न ऩ
प फ
ब भ
N
O
6
य
ON
7
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作，准备一张 A3 原稿（a），距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线（b）并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线（c）。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿（a）并进行测试复印，确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
8
20mm 20mm
20mm
c
A
b B
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿（a），如果偏移值在标准值以上时，对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
（주의） 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。

MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
（注意）画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
9
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 12. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 15. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page 18. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 12. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 15. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 18. <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 12. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 15. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 18. <Valor de referencia>Dentro de ±1,5 %
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 12. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 15. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 18. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 12. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 15. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 18. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整，否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度第 12 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度第 15 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值第 18 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .

・선단경사확인 12 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 15 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・등배도 확인 18 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±1.5% 이내
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 12 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・後端斜め確認 15 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・等倍度確認 18 ページ＜基準値＞ ±1.5% 以内
10
A
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 20. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 22. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 24.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 20. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 22. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 24.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 20. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 22. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 24.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 20. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 22. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 24.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 20. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 22. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 24.
・确认前端定时调整第 20 页
±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 >
・确认中心线第 22 页 < 标准值 >
单面：±2.0mm 以内，
双面：±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时，可以同时自动进行等倍值，前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整第 24 页
・선단 타이밍 확인 20 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±2.5mm 이내

・센터 라인확인 22 페이지 ＜기준치＞ 단면：±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면：±3.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 , 등배도 , 선단타이밍 , 센터 라인의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고를 사용한 자동조정은 24 페이지 참조
・先端タイミング確認 20 ページ＜基準値＞ ±2.5mm 以内

・センターライン確認 22 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±2.0mm 以内、
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 24 ページ
11
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]

1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内。
　　　　　双面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
12
B (L) / B (R)
A
C
C
B
B (L)
B (R)
2. Remove the left hinge cover (F) and the angle control fitting (E). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14 screws (C) on the left and right fixing fittings (B(L))(B(R)).
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (F) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (E). Desserrer les 2 vis M4 × 14 (C) sur les fixations gauche et
droite (B(L))(B(R)).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. Quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (F) y el herraje de control de ángulo (E). Afloje los 2 tornillos M4 × 14 (C) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho
(B(L))(B(R)).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (F) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (E) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14 Schrauben (C) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterungen
(B(L))(B(R)) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (F) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (E). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14 (C) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di fissaggio
(B(L))(B(R)) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.拆下左部铰链盖板 (F) 以及角度限制工具 (E)。拧松左右固定工具 (B(L))(B(R)) 的 2 颗 M4x14(C) 螺丝。

3.旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉（3）以调整 DP 位置。
对于复印样本 (d) ：逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。　
对于复印样本 (e) ：顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。
按比例尺的更改量：约 1.0mm
2.좌 힌지커버 (F) 및 각도 고정쇠 (E) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (B(L))(B(R)) 의 나사 M4x14(C) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우：조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 .
샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 ： 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량：약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
2.左ヒンジカバー(F) および角度規制金具 (E) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (B(L))(B(R)) のビス M4x14(C)2 本を緩める。

3.右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP の位置を調整する。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合：調整ビスを左に回し、 DP を奥へ動かす。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合：調整ビスを右に回し、 DP を手前へ動かす。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 1.0mm
13
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14 screws (C) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 1).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis M4 × 14 (C) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1) .
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos M4 × 14 (C) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14 Schrauben (C), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14 (C) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后，重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14 螺丝（C）。
7.拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次装上。
5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

　　　　　양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
6.조정종료 후 순서 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14(C) 2 개를 조입니다 .
7.원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 1 페이지 순서 5 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。

6.調整終了後、手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14(C)2 本を締め付ける。
7.原稿マット (M) を取り外し、1 ページの手順 5 を参考に再度取り付ける。
14
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]

1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值。如果超过标准值时，必须进行调整。
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
15
3
5
A
B
6
9
8
7
4 10
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting 6.Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see
screw (9). steps 5 on page 1).
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5

2.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A) 4.Réglez la hauteur du DP.
mm (10)
3.Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis Desserrez l’écrou (8).
Resserrez l’écrou (8).
déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis
5. Reposer le couvercle arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3.
(7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7) de réglage (9).
6. Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en
du DP (A). Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de
place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1).
réglage (9).
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el 6. Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a
tornillo de ajuste (9). colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm

2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen. 4.Die Höhe des DP einstellen.
(10)
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube Lösen Sie die Mutter (8).
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Ein-
5. Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung (7)
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann stellschraube (9).
wieder anbringen.
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
6. Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbrin-
abnehmen. (9) festziehen.
gen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1) .
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite 6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo
di regolazione (9). (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
2.打开 DP（A）的上盖板（3）。 4.调整 DP 的高度。每 1 格的移动量：约 0.5mm（10）

3.拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5)，将塑松驰螺母（8）。将螺母（8）按原样紧固好。
料片 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除，拆下 DP 主机复印样张（f）时：松弛调整螺丝（9）。 5.重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板（7）。
(A) 的后盖板 (7)。复印样张（g）时：紧固调整螺丝（9）。 6.拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次
装上。
2.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 . 4.DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 . 1 개 변화량：약 0.5mm(10)

3.TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 . 너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 .
스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해 샘플 카피 (f) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 느슨 5.순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로
DP(A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 . 하게 합니다 . 장착합니다 .
샘플 카피 (g) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 조입 6.원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 1 페이지 순서 5
니다 . 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
2.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。 4.DP の高さを調整する。 1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 0.5mm(10)

3.TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、ストナット (8) をゆるめる。ナット (8) を元通り締める。
ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、コピーサンプル (f) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 5.手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り
DP(A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。ゆるめる。取り付ける。
コピーサンプル (g) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 6.原稿マット (M) を取り外し、1 ページの手順
締める。 5 を参考に再度取り付ける。
16
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
7.Make a proof copy again.

8.Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
7.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

8.Répétez les étapes 1 à 6 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
7.Haga otra copia de prueba.

8.Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
7.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

8.Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
7.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

8.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
7.再次进行测试复印。
8.反复操作步骤 1~6，直至复印样张的线（2）为标准值内。
　　　　　双面时：±4.0mm 以内
7.다시 테스트 카피를 합니다 .

8.샘플 카피 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 6 을 반복합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0mm 이내
7.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
8.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 6 を繰り返す。
17
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B X
X'
2 X'
X
2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification
according to the following procedure. Sub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.

1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner(surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Main Scan(CIS):Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du CIS du scanner
procédure suivante. Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5%
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5%
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
escáner.(anverso)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia,
Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan (CIS): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
<Valor de referencia> escáner
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo compreso fra ±1,5%
scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa proce- 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
dura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Main Scan(CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento di CIS main-scan dello scanner.
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere com- Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner
preso fra ±1,5%
[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（正面）
如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Main Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取主扫描等倍度的调整
< 标准值 > Sub Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整
对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Main Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 주주사 등배도의 조정
＜기준치＞ Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS 의 스캔 부주사 등배도의 조정
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面 )
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Main Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り主走査等倍度の調整
＜基準値＞ Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
18
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
X
X'
X'
X B
2 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3.Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,02 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值达

在长度偏短时复印样本（h）（j）：调高设定值到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时复印样本（i）（k）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.02% 对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합

길이가 짧은 경우 샘플 카피 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . 니다 .
길이가 긴 경우 샘플 카피 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.02% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4

長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j)：設定値を上げるを繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k)：設定値を下げる＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.02% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
19
2.5mm
A 2.5mm
2
B 2
1
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.
<Valeur de référence> CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端定时 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端定时 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > CIS Head ：调整 CIS 读取时的前段对位
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail ：调整 CIS 读取时的后端定时
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ CIS Head： CIS 스캔 시의 선단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 CIS Tail： CIS 스캔 시의 후단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head ：先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail ：後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
＜基準値＞ CIS Head： CIS 読み込み時の先端タイミングを調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail： CIS 読み込み時の後端タイミングを調整する
20
2.5mm
2.5mm A
2
2 B
1
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
4.Perform a test copy.
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova

在前端定时偏快时复印样本（l）：调低设定值围内。
在前端定时偏慢时复印样本（m）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.3mm 线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 샘플 카피 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . .
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 샘플 카피 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.3mm 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰

先端タイミングが短い場合コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を下げる。り返す。
先端タイミングが長い場合コピーサンプル (m)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.3mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内
21
A
2
B 2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS
dure suivante.
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。

1.确认原稿（a）中心线（1）和复印样本中心线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front ：中心位置（正面）的调整
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 CIS ：CIS 的中心位置的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
　　　　　双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
. 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . CIS：CIS 의 센터 위치조정
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 CIS：CIS のセンター位置の調整
＜基準値＞片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
　　　　　両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
22
A
2
2mm/ B
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): riduce il valore. scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): aumenta il riferimento.
valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm

当中心向前偏移时复印样本（n）：调低设定值围内。
当中心向内偏移时复印样本（o）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.085mm 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 반복합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이：±2.0mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を

センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n)：設定値を下げ繰り返す。
る。＜基準値＞
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
る。両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
23
A
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment original. out rear-side adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 5.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until "OK" appears.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP procéder au réglage du côté arrière.
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer 5. Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
l'original de réglage. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message "OK"
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP ajuste de reverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 5.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca "OK"
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un en la pantalla.
ajuste de anverso. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das 5. Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betäti- Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 5. Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare "OK".
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 4.将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。

没有 DP 调整用原稿时 5.如果屏幕上出现 "OK"（完成），则表示调整完成。
1.进入维修保养模式 U411，选择［DP Auto Adj］，输出测试原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上，按 Start 键。重复步骤 2 和 4，直到 "OK"（完成）出现。
3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 4.원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정을 합

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 니다 .
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 설정하고 [DP Auto Adj] 를 눌러 조정된 원고를 5.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .
3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 4.原稿を FaceDown で DP へセットし、スタートキーを押し、裏面の調整を

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合行う。
1. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出力 5.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、スタートキーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰り返す。
3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、
スタートキーを押し、表面の調整を行詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
う。
24
5mm
A
F 149 1mm B
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until “OK” appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca “OK”
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上，并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。重复步骤 1 和 2，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FU(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行正面的详细内容请参照维修手册。
调整。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 “OK” 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .

1.DP 자동 조정 원고를 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이라고 표시된 곳 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
에서 부터 원고를 셋팅합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작키의 순서 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、スタートキー詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
の順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
25
A 5mm
B F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until “OK” appears.
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FD(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out rear-side adjustment.
4.Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arri- 6.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.
ère) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
lequel F et R sont indiqués. jusqu'à ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
FD(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage du côté
arrière.
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca “OK”
FD(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
reverso.
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen.
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
DP eingeführt wird. fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wieder-
5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FD(ChartB)] und die Start- holen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung aus- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
führen zu lassen.
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata. Se compare
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FD(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione del lato pos- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
teriore.
4.完成正面调整后，将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下，并首先将标有 F 和 6.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
5.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FD(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行反面的重复步骤 4 和 5，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
调整。详细内容请参照维修手册。
4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 6.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FD(ChartB)], 시작키 순서로 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 5 를 반복합니다 .
뒷면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
4.表面の調整完了後、 DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、 F、R が書かれて 6.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

いる方から DP へセットする。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
5.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FD(ChartB)]、スタートキー認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 4 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
の順に押し、裏面の調整を行う。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
26
2016. 2
303R856710-01
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) DF-7100
DF-7100
(Inner Finisher)
Installation Guide
A C E
B(M4x8) D(M4x10)
ձ
ղ
ղ
ղ
ߑ
ߒ
ߓ
ߔ ߕ
1
ղ
ߑ
2
մ
3
ո
B(M4x8)
B(M4x8)
4
ռ ս D(M4x10)
D(M4x10)
վ տ
5
60.0mm±2.0mm
(120mm)
English
Adjusting the stapling position
1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center.If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 60.0 mm ± 2.0 mm from the center of the paper
Français
Ajustement de la position d'agrafage
1.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procéder à une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vérifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en décalage. Si la position d'agrafage est décalée, la régler en procédant de la manière suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier
Español
Ajuste de la posición de grapado
1.Conecte el enchufe de la máquina al receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la máquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posición de grapado está descentrada. Si la posición de grapado está descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posición.
<Valor de referencia> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm del centro del papel
Deutsch
Justage der Heftposition
1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am Gauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prüfen Sie, ob die Heftposition außermittig ist. Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm von der Blattmitte
Italiano
Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura
1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere l’interruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalità di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro. Se la posizione di spillatura è fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm dal centro del foglio
简体中文
调节装订位置
1.将机器上的电源插头插入电源插座中，打开主电源开关。
2.在装订模式（2 点固定）下进行测试复印。
3.确认装订位置的中心偏差。装订位置偏离中心时，按以下步骤进行调节。
＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 60.0mm±2.0mm
한국어
스테이플 위치 조정
1.본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
2.스테이플 모드（2 곳）에서 시험복사를 합니다 .
3.스테이플 위치의 센터 어긋남을 확인합니다 . 스테이플 위치가 중심에서 벗어난 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 60.0mm±2.0mm
日本語
ステープル位置の調整
1.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
2.ステープルモード（2 箇所止め）
でテストコピーを行う。
3.ステープル位置のセンターずれを確認する。ステープル位置が中心からずれていた場合、
次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞用紙センターより 60.0mm±2.0mm
6
(a) (b)
4.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Staple HP]. 6.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Adjust the values. 7.Perform a test copy.
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
Decrease the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): Increase <Reference value> 60.0 mm ± 2.0 mm from the center of the paper
the setting value.
4.Passez en mode maintenance U246 et sélectionnez [Finisher] > [Sta- 6.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
ple HP]. 7.Effectuer une copie de test.
5.Régler les valeurs. 8.Recommencer les étapes 4 à 7 jusqu'à ce que la position d'agrafe soit
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): réduire la conforme à la valeur de référence.
valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): aug-
menter la valeur de réglage. de papier
4.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > 6.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
[Staple HP]. 7.Haga una copia de prueba.
5.Ajuste los valores.
8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la
dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): disminuya el valor de configuración.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos- <Valor de referencia> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm del centro del papel
terior de la máquina (b): aumente el valor de configuración.
4.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > 6.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
[Staple HP]. 7.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
5.Die Werte einstellen.
8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta-
des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt <Bezugswert> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm von der Blattmitte
wird:Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert.
4.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, quindi selezionare [Fin- 6.Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
isher] > [Staple HP]. 7.Eseguire una copia di prova.
5.Regolare i valori. 8.Ripetere i passi 4 to 7 finché la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della mac- del valore di riferimento.
china (a): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della mac-
china (b): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
4.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher]>[Staple HP] 。 6.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
5.调整设定值。 7.进行测试复印。
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调低设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调高设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 60.0mm±2.0mm
4.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Staple HP] 를 선택 6.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
합니다 . 7.시험복사를 합니다 .
5.설정치를 조정합니다 . 8.스테이플 위치가 기준치내가 될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 7 을 반복합니다 .
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 낮춥니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 60.0mm±2.0mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 높입니다 .
4.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、[Finisher] > [Staple HP] を 6.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。

選択する。 7.テストコピーを行う。
5.設定値を調整する。 8.ステープル位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 4 ～ 7 を繰り返す。
ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を下げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 60.0mm±2.0mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を上げる。
7
2016. 2
303RD56710-01
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) DF-7110
DF-7110
(4000 sheets Finisher)
Installation Guide
A D
E
F(M4x20)
C(M4x8)
G H I J
B
AA
K
AK-7100
ղ A
Ｂ
AA
C(M4x8)
1
մ
b a
20 7 7
a
b a b b
a
2
շ
մ
յ
ո
ն
չ
b a
պ
20 7 7
a
b a b b
a
3
շ
շ
ջ
ո
ո
ռ
չ
չ
ս
պ
պ
վ
4
c
c=d 17
d
c＞d, c＜d 15
5
ւ
6
ध
ON
7
78.5mm±2.5mm
(157mm)
English
Français
Español
posición.
Deutsch
Italiano
la posizione.
简体中文
调节装订位置
한국어
日本語
8
(a) (b)
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): <Reference value> 78.5 mm ± 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Decrease the setting value.
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- conforme à la valeur de référence.
menter la valeur de réglage. <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
de papier
la valeur de réglage.
5.Ajuste los valores. 8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
5.Die Werte einstellen. 8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert. <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调高设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调低设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 낮춥니다 .

ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm±2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
9
2016. 2
303RW56710-01
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) DF-7120
DF-7120
(1000 sheets Finisher)
Installation Guide
A B
E
F(M4x20)
D
AA
G
C(M4x8)
AK-7100
ղ Ｂ A
AA
C(M4x8)
1
մ
b a
15 7 7
a
b a b b
a
2
շ
3
ջ
c=d 14
d
c＞d, c＜d 12
4
վ
ON
5
78.5mm±2.5mm
(157mm)
English
Français
Español
posición.
Deutsch
Italiano
la posizione.
简体中文
调节装订位置
한국어
日本語
6
(a) (b)
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): <Reference value> 78.5 mm ± 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Decrease the setting value.
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- conforme à la valeur de référence.
menter la valeur de réglage. <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
de papier
la valeur de réglage.
5.Ajuste los valores. 8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
5.Die Werte einstellen. 8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert. <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调高设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调低设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 낮춥니다 .

ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm±2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
7
2016. 2
303RV56710-01
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) AK-7100
AK-7100
(Bridge Unit)
Installation Guide
A G D
B C
AA BB(M4x20)
E
F(M4x12)
DF-7110
DF-7120
ձ
ղ
ղ
ղ
ߑ
ߒ
ߓ
ߔ ߕ
1
ղ
ߑ
2
ճ
3
շ
4
պ
պ
պ ջ
ջ
ջ
2
22
11
1
D
D
D
ռ
ռ
ռ
3
33 4
44
2
22
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
11
1 5
55
㸯Ѝ㸰Ѝ㸱Ѝ㸲Ѝ㸳
E
EE
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
ս
ս
ս
AA
AA
AA
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
վ
վ
վ
G
G
G
5
2016. 6
303RG56710-02
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)MT-730(B)
MT-730(B)
(Mail Box)
Installation Guide
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
When installing to a document finisher, see Page 1 to Page 6.
When installing to a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 12.
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation sur un module finition de documents, voir Page 1 à Page 6.
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante, voir Page 7 à Page 12.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un finalizador de documentos, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalación con una impresora, consulte las páginas de la 7 a la 12.
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 12.
.
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Quando si installa un finisher documenti, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Quando si installa una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 12.
简体中文
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到装订器时，请参见第 1 ～ 6 页。
安装到打印机时，请参见第 7 ～ 12 页。
한국어
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
문서 피니셔에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~6 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
프린터에 설치하는 경우 7 페이지 ~12 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
日本語
装着する対象によって、
取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、
以下のページに記載しています。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーに設置する場合；1 ページ～ 6 ページ
プリンターに設置する場合；7 ページ～ 12 ページ
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는

F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合

F. トレイ名称シール（ユーザー用）.........1 は必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
1
3
1
Procedure 1.Remove the front top cover (2) and rear top cover (3) at the top of the finisher (1) using a flat-
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the blade screwdriver or the like.
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
Procédure 1.Retirer le couvercle supérieur avant (2) et le couvercle supérieur arrière (3) situés en haut du
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de retoucheur (1) à l’aide d’un tournevis à tête plate ou d’un outil équivalent.
mettre la machine hors tension et de
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Procedimiento 1.Remueva la cubierta superior delantera (2) y la cubierta superior trasera (3) en la parte superior
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de del finalizador (1) utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación
de la toma de pared.
Verfahren 1.Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung (2) und die hintere obere Abdeckung (3) an der
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- Oberseite des Finishers (1) mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.
Procedura 1.Rimuovere il coperchio superiore anteriore (2) e il coperchio superiore posteriore (3) dalla parte
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la superiore del finitore (1) utilizzando un cacciavite a punta piatta, o un attrezzo simile.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
安装步骤 1.用一字形螺丝刀拆下装订器 (1) 上部的顶罩前盖板 (2) 和顶罩后盖板 (3)。

安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插
座拔下电源插头。
설치순서 1.피니셔 (1) 상부의 윗커버 앞 덮개 (2), 윗커버 뒤 덮개 (3) 를 마이너스 드라이버 등으로 제거합니
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 다.
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리
하십시오 .
取付手順 1.フィニッシャー (1) 上部の天カバー前フタ (2) 、

天カバー後フタ (3) をマイナスドライバーな
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、機どで取り外す。
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ
と。
2
A
2.Fit the hooks (4) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches (5) located at the front and rear of the top of the finisher
(1) as shown in the illustration and attach the mailbox (A) to the finisher (1).
Note:
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between the mailbox (A) and the machine.
2.Insérer les crochets (4) se trouvant à l'avant et à l'arrière au fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les encoches (5) situées à l'avant et à l'arrière en haut
du retoucheur (1) comme illustré ici, puis fixer la boîte à lettres (A) au retoucheur (1).
Remarque:
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
2.Coloque los ganchos (4) ubicados en la parte inferior frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) en las muescas (5) ubicadas en la parte superior frontal
y trasera del finalizador (1), como se muestra en la ilustración, y coloque el buzón de correo (A) en el finalizador (1).
Nota:
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la
máquina.
2.Setzen Sie die Haken (4) an der Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) in die Öffnungen (5) vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers (1) ein,
wie in der Abbildung dargestellt, und bringen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Finisher (1) an.
Hinweis:
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
2.Inserire i ganci (4) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della parte di fondo della mailbox (A), negli incavi (5) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della
parte superiore del finitore (1) come mostrato nell’illustrazione, e fissare la mailbox (A) al finitore (1).
Nota:
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la
macchina.
2.如图所示，将位于邮箱 (A) 底部前后侧的卡扣 (4) 嵌入位于装订器 (1) 顶部前后侧的凹口 (5)，并将邮箱 (A) 安装至装订器 (1)。
注：
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
2.메일박스 (A) 하부의 앞뒤에 있는 후크 (4) 를 피니셔 (1) 상부의 앞뒤에 있는 파인 홈에 (5) 에 일러스트와 같이 삽입하고 메일박스 (A) 를 피니셔측에
장착합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합니다 .
2.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (4) をフィニッシャー(1) 上部の前後にある切り欠き部 (5) にイラストのように挿入し、メールボック

ス (A) をフィニッシャー(1) に取り付ける。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かないことを確認する。
3
A
A
E(M4x12)
A
6
8
3.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws 4.Remove the rear cover (6) of the mailbox 5.Plug the connector (7) of the mailbox (A) into
M4x12 (E). (A). the connector (8) of the machine body.
6.Reinstall the rear cover (6) of the mailbox
(A).
3.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis 4.Retirer le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte à 5.Brancher le connecteur (7) de la boîte à
M4x12 (E). lettres (A). lettres (A) dans le connecteur (8) du corps
de la machine.
6.Remonter le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte
à lettres (A).
3.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos 4.Quite la cubierta posterior (6) del buzón de 5.Enchufe el conector (7) del buzón de correo
M4x12 (E). correo (A). (A) al conector (8) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (6) del
buzón de correo (A).
3.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei 4.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (7) der Mailbox (A)
Schrauben M4x12 (E). Mailbox (A). in die Steckbuchse (8) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der
Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Fissare la mailbox (A) utilizzando le due viti 4.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (6) della 5.Collegare il connettore (7) della mailbox (A)
M4x12 (E). mailbox (A). al connettore (8) del corpo macchina.
6.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (6) della
mailbox (A).
3.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。 4.拆下邮箱 (A) 的后部盖板 (6)。 5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（7）插入机器的接插件

（8）。
6.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（6）。
3.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스 4.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 떼어냅니다 . 5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (7) 를 본체의 커넥터
(A) 를 고정합니다 . (8) 에 연결합니다
6.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 다시 장착합니
다.
3.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、

メールボックス (A) 4.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を取り 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(7) を機
を固定する。外す。械本体のコネクター (8) に接続する。
6.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を元通
りに取り付ける。
4
B
9 C
7.Insert the 2 hooks (9) on the front mounting 8.Install the rear mounting plate cover (C) on
plate cover (B) for the mailbox into the fin- the finisher in the same way.
isher to install the cover (B).
7.Insérer les 2 crochets (9) du couvercle de la 8.Installer le couvercle de la plaque de mon-

plaque de montage avant (B) de la boîte à tage arrière (C) sur le retoucheur en procé-
lettres dans le retourcheur pour installer ce dant de la même manière.
couvercle (B).
7.Para instalar la cubierta (B), inserte los 2 8.Instale de la misma manera la cubierta de la
ganchos (9) de la cubierta de la placa de placa de montaje trasera (C) en el finaliza-
montaje frontal (B) para el buzón de correo dor.
en el finalizador.
7.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (9) an der vorderen 8.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere
Abdeckung der Montageplatte (B) für die Abdeckung der Montageplatte (C) am Fin-
Mailbox in den Finisher ein, um die Abdeck- isher an.
ung (B) zu installieren.
7.Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci (9) posizionati 8.Installare il coperchio della piastra di mon-
sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio taggio posteriore (C) sul finitore nella stessa
anteriore (B) per la mailbox, per installare il maniera.
coperchio (B).
7.将邮箱的安装板前部盖板 (B) 的 2 个卡扣 8.按相同方法将安装板后部盖板 (C) 安装到装

(9) 插入到装订器中，以安装安装板前部盖板订器上。
(B)。
7.메일박스의 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 의 후크 (9) 2 8.같은 방식으로 부착판 커버 뒤 (C) 를 피니셔

곳을 피니셔에 삽입하고 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 에 장착합니다 .
을 장착합니다 .
7.メールボックスの取付板カバー前 (B) の 8.同様に取付板カバー後 (C) をフィニッ

フック (9)2 箇所をフィニッシャーに挿入シャーに取り付ける。
し、取付板カバー前 (B) を取り付ける。
5
10 11
9.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 10.Insert the power plug from the machine into
the highest. the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front and verify the machine operates normally.
and rear pins (10) into the round holes (11) at the front and rear of the mailbox.
9.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 10.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (10) dans les trous ment.
ronds (11) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres.
9.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 10.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (10) en los orificios máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
redondos (11) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
9.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 10.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (10) in die Rundlöcher (11) Betrieb zu prüfen.
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.
9.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 10.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. accendere la macchina e controllare che
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- funzioni correttamente.
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (10) nei
fori rotondi (11) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
9.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 10.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电

按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (10) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (11) 源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
中来安装接纸盘。
9.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 10.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (10) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (11) 에 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
삽입합니다 . 니다 .
9. 排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 10.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し

排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (10) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (11) 込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
に挿入する。認する。
6
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1 B and C are not used.
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1 B et C ne sont pas utilisés.
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1 B y C no se utilizan.
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte..... 1 B und C werden nicht benötigt.
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1 B e C non sono utilizzati.
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1 不使用 B 和 C。
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는

F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1 B 와 C 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合

F. トレイ名称シール（ユーザー用）.........1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1 B,C は使用しない。
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
7
Note Procedure
The Attachment Kit(AK-736) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the
before the mailbox is installed. power plug from the wall outlet.
Remarque Procédure
L'Attachment Kit (AK-736) doit être installé Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la
avant d'installer la boîte à lettres. fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
Nota Procedimiento
El Attachment Kit (AK-736) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y des-
antes de la instalación del buzón de correo. enchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
Hinweis Vorgehensweise
Das Attachment Kit (AK-736) muss vor der Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts aus-
Installation der Mailbox installiert werden. geschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Nota Procedura
Installare l'Attachment Kit (AK-736) prima di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
installare il vassoio mailbox.
注安装步骤
在安装邮箱前，请先安装连接组件（AK-736)。安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주 설치순서
메일박스를 설치하기 전에 부착 키트 (AK-736) 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십
를 설치해야 합니다 . 시오 .
注意取付手順
メールボックスを取付ける前にアタッチメント必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
キット (AK-736) の取付けをおこなうこと。
8
A 1 A
E(M4x12)
1
2
E(M4x12)
1.Insert the hooks (1) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches 2.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws
(2) of the machine and attach the mailbox (A) to the machine. M4x12 (E).
Note
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between
the mailbox (A) and the machine.
1.Insérer les crochets (1) situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les enc- 2.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis
oches (2) de la machine et fixer la boîte aux lettres (A) à la machine. M4x12 (E).
Remarque
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice
entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
1.Inserte los enganches (1) que se encuentran en la parte frontal y trasera de la parte inferior del 2.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos
buzón de correo (A) en las hendiduras (2) de la máquina y acople el buzón de correo (A) a la M4x12 (E).
máquina.
Nota
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no
queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la máquina.
1.Führen Sie die Haken (1), die sich hinten und vorne an der Unterseite der Mailbox (A) befinden, 2.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei
in die Aufnahmen (2) des Geräts ein und befestigen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Gerät. Schrauben M4x12 (E).
Hinweis
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt
zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
1.Inserire i ganci (1) posti sul fronte e sul retro della sezione inferiore della mailbox (A) negli incavi 2.Fissare la mailbox(A) utilizzando le due viti
(2) presenti sulla macchina e fissare la mailbox (A) sulla macchina. M4x12 (E).
Nota
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi
che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la macchina.
1.将位于邮箱（A）底部前、后侧的挂钩（1）插入机器的凹槽（2），然后将邮箱（A）安装至机器。 2.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。

注
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
1.메일박스 (A) 의 전후면 하단에 있는 후크 (1) 를 본체의 노치 (2) 에 삽입하여 메일박스 (A) 를 본 2.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스
체에 부착합니다 . (A) 를 고정합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합
니다 .
1.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (1) を機械本体の切り欠き (2) に挿入し、メール 2.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、
メールボックス (A)
ボックス (A) を機械本体に取り付ける。を固定する。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かない
ことを確認する。
9
A
5 4
3.Remove the rear cover (3) of the mailbox 4.Remove the wire saddle (4).
(A). 5.Plug the connector (5) of the mailbox (A) into the connector (6) of the machine body.
6.Install the wire saddle (4) in the position as shown in the figure.
7.Reinstall the rear cover (3) of the mailbox (A).
3.Retirer le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à 4.Retirer le serre-câble (4).

lettres (A). 5.Brancher le connecteur (5) de la boîte à lettres (A) dans le connecteur (6) du corps de la
machine.
6.Installer le serre-câble (4) dans la position illustrée sur la figure.
7.Remonter le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à lettres (A).
3.Quite la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de 4.Retire la abrazadera del cable (4).
correo (A). 5.Enchufe el conector (5) del buzón de correo (A) al conector (6) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Instale la abrazadera del cable (4) en la posición que se muestra en la imagen.
7.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de correo (A).
3.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der 4.Entfernen Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4).
Mailbox (A). 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (5) der Mailbox (A) in die Steckbuchse (6) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Installieren Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4) an der im Bild gezeigten Position.
7.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (3) della 4.Rimuovere l'unità sella (4).

mailbox (A). 5.Collegare il connettore (5) della mailbox (A) al connettore (6) del corpo macchina.
6.Installare l'unità sella (4) nella posizione indicata in figura.
7.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (3) della mailbox (A).
3.拆下邮箱（A）的后部盖板 (3)。 4.取下束线夹（4）。

5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（5）插入机器的接插件 (6)。
6.把束线夹 (4) 安装到图示位置。
7.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（3）。
3.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 떼어냅니다 . 4.와이어 새들 (4) 을 분리합니다 .

5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (5) 를 본체의 커넥터 (6) 에 연결합니다 .
6.와이어 새들 (4) 을 그림에 표시된 위치에 설치합니다 .
7.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 다시 장착합니다 .
3.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を取り 4.ワイヤーサドル (4) を外す。

外す。 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(5) を機械本体のコネクター (6) に接続する。
6.ワイヤーサドル (4) を図の位置に取り付ける。
7.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を元通りに取り付ける。
10
Z
Y
102
102
8.Install the left cover (Y) in place. 9.Using the two screws (102) removed in step 2 in the installation guide
for the AK-736, install the right cover (Z).
*While pressing the right cover(Z) downwards, fix the right cover(J).
8.Monter le couvercle gauche (Y) en position. 9.À l’aide des deux vis (102) retirées à l’étape 2 du guide d’installation
pour l’AK-736, installer le capot droit (Z).
*Fixer le capot droit (Z) en le maintenant enfoncé vers le bas.
8.Instale la cubierta izquierda (Y) en la ubicación prevista. 9.Con los dos tornillos (102) que quitó en el paso 2 de la guía de insta-
lación para AK-736, instale la cubierta derecha (Z).
*A la vez que ejerce presión sobre la cubierta derecha (Z), fije la cubi-
erta derecha (Z).
8.Installieren Sie die linke Abdeckung (Y). 9.Mit den zwei Schrauben (102), die Sie in Schritt 2 der Installationsan-
leitung für das AK-736 entfernt haben, bringen Sie die rechte Abdeck-
ung (Z) wieder an.
*Drücken Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) leicht nach unten, während Sie
diese befestigen.
8.Installare il coperchio di sinistra (Y) in posizione. 9.Utilizzando le due viti (102) rimosse al punto 2 della procedura
descritta nella guida di installazione del kit AK-736, installare il coper-
chio destro (Z).
*Premere verso il basso il coperchio destro (Z) per fissarlo in
posizione.
8.将左盖板（Y）安装到位。 9.请用 AK-736 安装手册步骤 2 中取下的 2 颗螺丝（102）来安装右盖板

（Z)。
* 把右盖板（Z) 边向下按，边固定。
8.좌측 커버 (Y) 를 제자리에 장착합니다 . 9.AK-736 설치 설명서의 2 단계에서 분리한 나사 (102) 두 개를 사용하
여 우측 커버 (Z) 를 장착합니다 .
* 우측 커버 (Z) 를 아래쪽으로 누르는 동시에 우측 커버 (Z) 를 고정하
십시오 .
8.左カバー(Y) を取り付ける。 9.AK-736 設置手順書の手順 2 で外したビス (102)2 本で、右カバー(Z) を

取付ける。
* 右カバー(Z) を下方向に押さえながら、固定する。
11
8 7
101
10.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 11.Close the paper conveying unit(101).
the highest. 12.Insert the power plug from the machine into
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and rear pins (7) into the round holes (8) at the front and rear of the mailbox. and verify the machine operates normally.
10.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 11.Fermer l'unité de transport du papier (101).
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. 12.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (7) dans les trous sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ronds (8) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres. ment.
10.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 11.Cierre la unidad de transporte de
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (7) en los orificios papel(101).
redondos (8) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. 12.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
10.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 11.Schließen Sie die Papierführung (101).
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. 12.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (7) in die Rundlöcher (8) Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen. Betrieb zu prüfen.
10.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 11.Chiudere l'unità trasporto carta (101).
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. 12.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- accendere la macchina e controllare che
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (7) nei funzioni correttamente.
fori rotondi (8) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
10.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 11.关闭纸张传输单元（101）。

按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (7) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (8) 中 12.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电
来安装接纸盘。源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
10.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 11.반송 유니트 (101) 를 닫습니다 .
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (7) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (8) 에 삽 12.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
입합니다 . 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
니다 .
10.排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 11.搬送ユニット (101) を閉じる。

排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (7) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (8) 12.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し
に挿入する。込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
認する。
12
2012. 4
303N056730-01
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)BF-730
BF-730
(Center Folding Unit)
Installation Guide
G
C I P
B H
E
R
A O
D F K L M N
J Q
E. Front side cover ......................................... 1 L. M4 × 10 screw (black)................................ 2

English
F. Rear side cover.......................................... 1 M. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 4
Supplied parts G. Output stock tray........................................ 1 N. Lock plate .................................................. 2
A. Center-Folding unit .................................... 1 H. Output tray ................................................. 1 O. Binding band.............................................. 1
B. Front rail .................................................... 1 I. Relay paper conveying unit ....................... 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Rear rail ..................................................... 1 J. Pin.............................................................. 1 Q. D7 label...................................................... 1
D. Output stopper........................................... 1 K. M4 × 8 screw ............................................11 R. Operation label .......................................... 1
E. Capot latéral avant..................................... 1 L. Vis M4 × 10 (noire) .................................... 2

Français
F. Capot latéral arrière ................................... 1 M. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 4
Pièces fournies G. Plateau de sortie du papier........................ 1 N. Plaque de verrouillage ............................... 2
A. Plieuse....................................................... 1 H. Plateau de sortie........................................ 1 O. Collier de fixation ....................................... 1
B. Glissière avant........................................... 1 I. Unité de transport du papier de relais........ 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Glissière arrière ......................................... 1 J. Goupille...................................................... 1 Q. Étiquette D7 ............................................... 1
D. Butée de sortie .......................................... 1 K. Vis M4 × 8.................................................11 R. Étiquette de fonctionnement ...................... 1
E. Cubierta lateral frontal ............................... 1 L. Tornillo M4 × 10 (negro)............................. 2

Español
F. Cubierta lateral posterior ........................... 1 M. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 4
Partes suministradas G. Bandeja de recolección de papel de salida... 1 N. Placa de cierre........................................... 2
A. Unidad de plegado .................................... 1 H. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 O. Correa de sujeción..................................... 1
B. Carril frontal ............................................... 1 I. Unidad de transporte de papel por relevador ... 1 P. Guía ........................................................... 1
C. Carril posterior ........................................... 1 J. Pasador ..................................................... 1 Q. Etiqueta D7 ................................................ 1
D. Tope de salida ........................................... 1 K. Tornillo M4 × 8 ..........................................11 R. Etiqueta de funcionamiento ....................... 1
E. Vordere Seitenabdeckung ......................... 1 L. M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz)..................... 2

Deutsch
F. Hintere Seitenabdeckung .......................... 1 M. M4 × 12 Schraube ..................................... 4
Gelieferte Teile G. Ausgabestapelfach .................................... 1 N. Sperrplatte ................................................. 2
A. Mittenfalteinheit ......................................... 1 H. Ausgabefach.............................................. 1 O. Schellenband ............................................. 1
B. Vordere Schiene ........................................ 1 I. Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit................. 1 P. Führung ..................................................... 1
C. Hintere Schiene ......................................... 1 J. Stift............................................................. 1 Q. D7 Aufkleber .............................................. 1
D. Ausgabeanschlag ...................................... 1 K. M4 × 8 Schraube ......................................11 R. Bedienungsaufkleber ................................. 1
E. Coperchio laterale anteriore ...................... 1 L. Vite M4 × 10 (nera) .................................... 2

Italiano
F. Coperchio laterale posteriore..................... 1 M. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 4
Parti di fornitura G. Vassoio di uscita stoccaggio ...................... 1 N. Piastra di bloccaggio.................................. 2
A. Unità di piegatura centrale......................... 1 H. Vassoio di uscita ........................................ 1 O. Fascetta di legatura ................................... 1
B. Rotaia anteriore ......................................... 1 I. Unità relay di trasporto carta...................... 1 P. Guida ......................................................... 1
C. Rotaia posteriore ....................................... 1 J. Perno ......................................................... 1 Q. Etichetta D7 ............................................... 1
D. Fermo di uscita .......................................... 1 K. Vite M4 × 8................................................11 R. Etichetta di operazione .............................. 1
简体中文 E. 前部侧盖板 ...........................1 L. M4×10 螺丝（黒）......................2

F. 后部侧盖板 ...........................1 M. M4×12 螺丝 ...........................4
附属品 G. 堆纸托盘 .............................1 N. 锁定板 ...............................2
A. 中缝装订－折页单元................... 1 H. 排纸托盘 .............................1 O. 束线带 ...............................1
B. 前部导轨............................. 1 I. 中间搬运单元 .........................1 P. 导板 .................................1
C. 后部导轨............................. 1 J. 销钉 .................................1 Q. D7 标签 ...............................1
D. 排纸挡板............................. 1 K. M4×8 螺丝 ...........................11 R. 操作标签 .............................1
한국어 E. 사이드 커버 앞.................................... 1 L. 나사 M4×10（흑）............................... 2

F. 사이드 커버 뒤.................................... 1 M. 나사 M4×12 ....................................... 4
동봉품 G. 배지 저장트레이.................................. 1 N. 잠금 플레이트..................................... 2
A. 접기 유니트........................................ 1 H. 배지 트레이........................................ 1 O. 결속 밴드........................................... 1
B. 레일 앞.............................................. 1 I. 중계 반송유니트.................................. 1 P. 가이드............................................... 1
C. 레일 뒤.............................................. 1 J. 핀..................................................... 1 Q. D7 라벨 ............................................. 1
D. 배지 스토퍼........................................ 1 K. 나사 M4×8....................................... 11 R. 조작라벨............................................ 1
日本語 E. サイドカバー前 .......................1 L. ビス M4×10（黒）.......................2

F. サイドカバー後 .......................1 M. ビス M4×12 ...........................4
同梱品 G. 排紙ストックトレイ ...................1 N. ロックプレート .......................2
A. 中折りユニット....................... 1 H. 排紙トレイ ...........................1 O. 結束バンド ...........................1
B. レール前............................. 1 I. 中継搬送ユニット .....................1 P. ガイド ...............................1
C. レール後............................. 1 J. ピン .................................1 Q. D7 ラベル .............................1
D. 排紙ストッパー....................... 1 K. ビス M4×8 ...........................11 R. 操作ラベル ...........................1
1
1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Procedure 1.Open the upper front cover (1) of the docu-
material from supplied parts. Before installing the center-folding unit, turn the ment finisher.
MFP’s main power switch off and unplug the 2.Remove the screw (2) and open the lower
power cable from the power supply. front cover (3).
Install the document finisher, and then install the (NOTICE)
center-folding unit. Discard the screw (2) and do not fasten the
lower front cover (3).
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé- Procédure 1.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur (1) du
sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des Avant d’installer la plieuse mettre l’interrupteur retoucheur de document.
pièces fournies. d’alimentation principal du MFP hors tension et 2.Déposer la vis (2) et ouvrir le couvercle
débrancher le câble d’alimentation de la prise avant inférieur (3).
de courant. (AVIS)
Installer le finisseur de document, puis installer Jeter la vis (2) et ne pas fixer le capot inféri-
la plieuse. eur avant (3).
Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o Procedimiento 1.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (1) del final-
material amortiguador de las partes suministra- Antes de instalar la unidad de plegado, desco- izador de documentos.
das. necte el interruptor de alimentación principal de 2.Quite el tornillo (2) y abra la cubierta frontal
la MFP y desenchufe el cable de alimentación inferior (3).
de la toma de corriente. (AVISO)
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y Descarte el tornillo (2) y no ajuste la cubierta
luego instale la unidad de plegado. frontal inferior (3).
Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs- Verfahren 1.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (1)
material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit des Dokument-Finishers.
Teilen. beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der 2.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (2) und öffnen Sie
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. (HINWEIS)
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und Entsorgen Sie die Schraube (2) und befestigen
dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an. Sie nicht die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il Procedura 1.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (1)
materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite. Prima di installare l’unità di piegatura centrale, della finitrice di documenti.
assicurarsi che l’interruttore principale della 2.Rimuovere la vite (2) ed aprire il coperchio
fotocopiatrice sia spento e che il cavo di alimen- inferiore anteriore (3).
tazione non sia inserito nella presa. (NOTIFICA)
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere Eliminare le viti (2) e non fissare il coperchio
all’installazione dell’unità di piegatura centrale. inferiore anteriore (3).
如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭安装步骤 1.打开装订器的前部上盖板（1）。

下。安装中缝装订 — 折页单元前，请关闭 MFP 的主电 2.拆除 1 颗螺丝（2），打开前部下盖板（3）。
源开关并从电源拔下电源线。 ( 注意 )
安装装订器，然后安装中缝装订 — 折页单元。废除螺丝（2），前部下盖板（3）不需固定。
동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경 장착순서 1.문서 피니셔 앞 상커버 (1) 를 엽니다 .

우에는 반드시 제거할 것 . 중철 유니트를 설치할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 2.나사 (2) 1 개를 제거하고 앞 하커버 (3) 를
의 주전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 엽니다 .
뺀 후 작업을 할 것 . ( 주의 )
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 중철 유니트를 설치 할 나사 (2) 는 폐기하고 전면 아래커버 (3) 는
것. 고정하지 않습니다 .
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合取付手順 1.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー

は、
必ず取り外すこと。中折りユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 (1) を開く。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
電源プラグを 2.ビス (2)1 本を外し、前下カバー(3) を開く。
抜いてから作業すること。（注意）
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、中折りビス (2) は廃棄とし、前下カバー(3) は固定
ユニットを設置すること。しない。
2
6
5
9
4
6
7 8
6
4 5 4 8
3.Remove the 2 screws (4) and remove the 4.Remove the 3 screws (6) and remove the 5.Remove 2 screws (8) and remove the lower
foot cover (5). lower rear cover (7). middle cover (9).
3.Déposer les 2 vis (4) puis le couvercle du 4.Déposer les 3 vis (6) puis le couvercle arri- 5.Déposer les 2 vis (8) et le couvercle intermé-
pied (5). ère inférieur (7). diaire inférieur (9).
3.Quite los 2 tornillos (4) y quite la cubierta de 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (6) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 2 tornillos (8) y quite la cubierta
la pata (5). posterior inferior (7). intermedia inferior (9).
3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (4) und 4.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (6) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (8) und
nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung (5) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung
(7) ab. (9) ab.
3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (4) e quindi rimuovere la 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (6) e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (8) e quindi rimuovere il
copertura del piede (5). coperchio inferiore posteriore (7). pannello centrale inferiore (9).
3.拆除 2 颗螺丝（4），拆下脚座盖板（5）。 4.拆除 3 颗螺丝（6），拆下后部下盖板（7）。 5.拆除 2 颗螺钉 (8)，拆下中部下盖板 (9)。
3.나사 (4) 2 개를 제거하고 , 풋커버 (5) 를 제 4.나사 (6) 3 개를 제거하고 , 뒤 하커버 (7) 를 5.나사 (8) 2 개를 제거하고 중하 커버 (9) 를
거합니다 . 제거합니다 . 떼어 냅니다 .
3.ビス (4)2 本を外し、フットカバー(5) を取 4.ビス (6)3 本を外し、後下カバー(7) を取り 5.ビス (8)2 本を外し、中下カバー(9) を取り
り外す。外す。外す。
3
12
M
10 M
C
13
K
N
B M
11 M
6.Install the lock plates (N) on the front and 7.Place the hook (11) of the front rail (B) on the 9.Install the rear rail (C) at the rear of the doc-
rear supports using an M4 × 8 screw (K) notch (10) at the front of the document fin- ument finisher using 2 M4 × 12 screws (M) in
each. isher, at the same time inserting the projec- the same way.
tion (13) on the front rail (B) in the hole (12)
in the document finisher.
8.Fix the front rail (B) using 2 M4 × 12 screws
(M).
6.Monter les plaques de verrouillage (N) sur 7.Placer le crochet (11) de la glissière avant 9.Monter la glissière arrière (C) au dos du
les supports avant et arrière en procédant à (B) dans l'encoche (10) à l'avant du retou- retoucheur de document en procédant de la
l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (K) dans les deux cheur de document tout en insérant la saillie même façon et à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 12 (M).
cas. (13) de la glisière avant (B) dans le trou (12)
du retoucheur de document.
8.Fixer la glissière avant (B) à l'aide de 2 vis
M4 × 12 (M).
6.Instale las placas de cierre (N) en los 7.Coloque el gancho (11) del carril frontal (B) 9.Instale el carril posterior (C) en la parte pos-
soportes frontal y posterior usando un tor- en la muesca (10) de la parte frontal del final- terior del finalizador de documentos usando
nillo M4 × 8 (K) en cada uno. izador de documentos al mismo tiempo que 2 tornillos M4 × 12 (M) de la misma forma.
inserta el resalto (13) del carril frontal (B) en
el orificio (12) del finalizador de documentos.
8.Fije el carril frontal (B) usando 2 tornillos M4
× 12 (M).
6.Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten (N) an den 7. Setzen Sie den Haken (11) der vorderen Schiene 9.Montieren Sie die hintere Schiene (C) auf
vorderen und hinteren Stützen mit jeweils (B) in die Aussparung (10) vorne am Dokument- gleiche Weise mit 2 M4 × 12 Schrauben (M)
einer M4 × 8 Schraube (K). Finisher ein, und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vor- an der Rückseite des Dokument-Finishers.
sprung (13) an der vorderen Schiene (B) in die Öff-
nung (12) des Dokument-Finishers ein.
8. Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene (B) mit den 2
M4 × 12 Schrauben (M).
6.Installare le piastre di bloccaggio (N) sui 7.Posizionare il gancio (11) della rotaia anteriore 9.Installare la rotaia posteriore (C) alla parte
supporti anteriore e posteriore utilizzando (B) sull'incavo (10) alla parte anteriore della fini- posteriore della finitrice di documenti utiliz-
una vite M4 × 8 (K) ciascuna. trice di documenti, contemporaneamente zando 2 viti M4 × 12 (M) alla stessa maniera.
inserire la la sporgenza (13) sulla rotaia ante-
riore (B) nel foro (12) nella finitrice di documenti.
8.Fissare la rotaia anteriore (B) utilizzando 2
viti M4 × 12 (M).
6.使用各 1 颗 M4×8(K) 螺钉将锁定板 (N) 安装 7.将前部导轨 (B) 的挂钩 (11) 嵌入装订器前部 9.按相同方法，使用 2 颗 M4×12(M) 螺钉将后
在前后的支柱上。的缺口 (10)，同时将前部导轨 (B) 的卡销部导轨 (C) 安装在装订器后部。
(13) 插入到装订器的孔 (12) 中。
8.使用 2 颗 M4×12(M) 螺钉来固定前部导轨
(B)。
6.잠금 플레이트 (N) 를 앞뒤 지주에 나사 7.문서 피니셔 앞의 이음부분 (10) 에 레일 앞 9.같은 방식으로 나사 M4×12(M) 2 개로 문서
M4×8(K) 각 1 개로 장착합니다 . (B) 의 후크 (11) 를 걸고 동시에 문서 피니셔 피니셔 뒤에 레일 뒤 (C) 를 장착합니다 .
구멍 (12) 에 레일 앞 (B) 의 보스 (13) 를 넣
습니다 .
8.나사 M4×12(M) 2 개로 레일 앞 (B) 을 고정
합니다 .
6.ロックプレート (N) を前後の支柱にビス 7.ドキュメントフィニッシャー前の切り欠き 9.同様に、ビス M4×12(M)2 本で、ドキュメント

M4×8(K) 各 1 本で取り付ける。 (10) にレール前 (B) のフック (11) を引っフィニッシャー後にレール後 (C) を取り付
かけ、同時にドキュメントフィニッシャーのける。
穴 (12) にレール前 (B) のボス (13) を入れ
る。
8.ビス M4×12(M)2 本でレール前 (B) を固定す
る。
4
17
14
A
18
15
16
10.Place the left rollers (14) at the front and rear of the center-folding unit (A) on the tracks (15) on the inner sides of the rails, and roll in the direction
shown. The middle rollers (16) will roll onto the rails.
11.Insert the center-folding unit (A) into the document finisher along the rails.
(NOTICE)
Insert without removing the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17). (The fixing tape (18) is removed at step 15)
10.Disposer les rouleaux gauche (14) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la plieuse (A) sur les voies (15) de côté interne des glissières et faire rouler dans la direc-
tion indiquée. Les rouleaux intermédiaires (16) vont se placer d'eux-mêmes sur les glissières.
11.Insérer la plieuse (A) dans le retoucheur de document le long des glissières.
(AVIS)
Insérer sans enlever la bande adhésive de fixation (18) pour le guide câble (17). (La bande adhésive de fixation (18) est enlevée à l'étape 15).
10.Coloque los rodillos izquierdos (14) en las partes frontal y posterior de la unidad de plegado (A) en las pistas (15) de los lados internos de los carriles
y hágalos rodar en la dirección de la ilustración. Los rodillos intermedios (16) rodarán sobre los carriles.
11.Inserte la unidad de plegado (A) en el finalizador de documentos a lo largo de los carriles.
(AVISO)
Inserte sin quitar la cinta de fijación (18) de la guía para el cable (17). (La cinta de fijación (18) se quita en el paso 15.)
10.Setzen Sie die linken Rollen (14) an der Vorderseite und Rückseite der Mittenfalteinheit (A) auf die Bahnen (15) an den Innenseiten der Schienen, und
rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung. Die mittleren Rollen (16) rollen nun auf die Schienen.
11.Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) entlang den Schienen in den Dokument-Finisher ein.
(HINWEIS)
Schieben Sie sie ein, ohne das Klebeband (18) für die Kabelführung (17) zu entfernen. (Das Klebeband (18) wird bei Schritt 15 entfernt.)
10.Posizionare i rulli di sinistra (14) alla parte anteriore e posteriore dell'unità di piegatura centrale (A) sulle piste (15) sui lati interni delle rotaie, e farli
scorrere nella direzione mostrata. I rulli intermedi (16) scorreranno sulle rotaie.
11.Inserire l'unità di piegatura centrale (A) nella finitrice di documenti lungo le rotaie.
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire senza rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17). (Il nastro di fissaggio (18) viene rimosso al punto 15)
10.将中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 前后的左侧滑轮 (14) 放在导轨内侧的转动部 (15) 上，并按箭头方向转动。将中间滑轮 (16) 插入到导轨上。

11.将中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 沿着导轨插入到装订器中。
( 注意 )
插入时不需剥除电线导板（17）的固定胶带（18）。（在步骤 15 时剥除固定胶带（18））
10.접기 유니트 (A) 의 앞뒤에 있는 좌측 코로 (14) 를 레일 내측에 있는 굴림부 (15) 에 얹고 화살표 방향으로 굴립니다 . 중간코로 (16) 가 레일에 삽입됩
니다 .
11.접기 유니트 (A) 를 레일에 붙여 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니다 .
( 주의 )
전선 가이드 (17) 의 고정 테이프 (18) 를 떼어 내지 않고 삽입할 것 . （고정 테이프 (18) 는 순서 15 에서 떼어 냅니다 .）
10.中折りユニット (A) の前後にある左コロ (14) を、レールより内側にある転がし部 (15) に乗せ、矢印方向に転がす。

中間コロ (16) がレールに挿入さ
れる。
11.中折りユニット (A) をレールに沿ってドキュメントフィニッシャーに挿入する。
（注意）
電線ガイド (17) の固定テープ (18) を剥がさずに挿入すること。
（固定テープ (18) は手順 15 で剥がす）
5
20
20
22
23 K
K
21 21
19 I
A
12.Release the lock lever (19) and pull out the 13.Align the holes (21) in the relay paper conveying unit (I) with the 2 projections (20) on the docu-
center-folding unit (A) to the left of the document finisher. Install so that the lip (22) on the top frame of the relay paper conveying unit rests on
ment finisher. the document finisher’s frame (23).
14.Install the relay paper conveying unit (I) using 4 M4 × 8 screws (K).
12.Libérer le levier de verrouillage (19) et sortir 13.Aligner les trous (21) de l'unité de transport de relais (I) avec les 2 saillies (20) du retoucheur de
la plieuse (A) par la gauche du retoucheur document. Procéder de sorte que la lèvre (22) du châssis supérieur de l'unité de transport de
de document. relais repose sur le châssis du retoucheur de document (23).
14.Installer l'unité de transport de relais (I) à l'aide de 4 vis M4 × 8 (K).
12.Libere la palanca de bloqueo (19) y extraiga 13.Alinee los orificios (21) de la unidad de transporte de papel (I) con los dos resaltos (20) del final-
la unidad de plegado (A) hacia la izquierda izador de documentos. Instale de forma tal que el reborde (22) del marco superior de la unidad
del finalizador de documentos. de transporte de papel apoye en el marco del finalizador de documentos (23).
14.Instale la unidad de transporte de papel por relevador (I) usando 4 tornillos M4 × 8 (K).
12.Lösen Sie den Verriegelungshebel (19) und 13.Richten Sie die Öffnungen (21) der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit (I) auf die 2 Vorsprünge (20)
ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) zur linken des Dokument-Finishers aus. Montieren Sie so, dass die Lippe (22) am oberen Rahmen der
Seite des Dokument-Finishers heraus. eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument-Finishers (23) ruht.
14.Montieren Sie die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit (I) mit 4 M4 × 8 Schrauben (K).
12.Rilasciare la leva di blocco (19) e quindi 13.Allineare i fori (21) nell'unità relay di trasporto carta (I) con le 2 sporgenze (20) sulla finitrice di
estrarre l'unità di piegatura centrale (A) alla documenti. Installare in modo che il bordo (22) sulla struttura superiore dell'unità relay di tra-
sinistra della finitrice di documenti. sporto carta rimanga sulla struttura (23) della finitrice di documenti.
14.Installare l'unità relay di trasporto carta (I) utilizzando 4 viti M4 × 8 (K).
12.解除锁定杆（19），将中缝装订 - 折页单元 13.将装订器的 2 处突出部 (20) 与中间搬运单元 (I) 的孔 (21) 对齐。将中间搬运单元上部框架的弯

（A）从文档整理器的左侧拉出。曲部 (22) 放在装订器的框架上 (23) 以进行安装。
14.使用 4 颗 M4×8(K) 螺钉来安装后中间搬运单元 (I)。
12.잠금레버 (19) 를 해제하고 중철 유니트 (A) 13.문서 피니셔의 돌기 (20) 2 개로 중계반송 유니트 (I) 의 구멍 (21) 을 맞춥니다 . 중계반송 유니트
를 문서 피니셔 좌측으로 이동시킵니다 . 상부 플레임의 구부러진 부분 (22) 이 문서 피니셔의 플레임 (23) 에 얹히게 장착합니다 .
14.나사 M4×8(K) 4 개로 중계반송 유니트 (I) 를 장착합니다 .
12.ロックレバー(19) を解除し、中折りユニッ 13.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (20)2 個に中継搬送ユニット (I) の穴 (21) を合わせる。中

ト (A) をドキュメントフィニッシャー左側継搬送ユニット上部フレームの折曲がり部 (22) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム
へ引き出す。 (23) に乗るように取り付ける。
14.ビス M4×8(K)4 本で、
中継搬送ユニット (I) を取り付ける。
6
J
25
17
17
24
15.Remove the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17) and insert the pin (J) into the wire guide (17), with the 2 projections (24) on either side of the frame
(25).
(NOTICE)
Insert the pin (J) to keep wires in the wire guide (17).
16.Screw the pin (J) into the document finisher to anchor the wire guide (17).
15.Enlever la bande adhésive de fixation (18) du guide câble (17) et insérer la goupille (J) dans le guide câble (17) avec les 2 saillies (24) de chaque côté
du bâti (25).
(AVIS)
Insérer la goupille (J) pour que les câbles demeurent dans le guide câble (17).
16.Visser la goupille (J) dans le retoucheur de document pour fixer le guide câble (17) en place.
15.Quite la cinta de fijación (18) de la guía para el cable (17) e inserte el pasador (J) en la guía para el cable (17) con los 2 resaltos (24) a cada lado del
marco (25).
(AVISO)
Inserte el pasador (J) para mantener los cables en la guía para el cable (17).
16.Atornille el pasador (J) en el finalizador de documentos para anclar la guía para el cable (17).
15.Entfernen Sie das Klebeband (18) für die Kabelführung (17) und stecken Sie die Rändelschraube (J) in die Kabelführung (17), wobei der Rahmen (25)
zwischen den 2 Vorsprüngen (24) liegen muss.
(HINWEIS)
Stecken Sie die Rändelschraube (J) ein, um die Kabel in der Kabelführung (17) zu halten.
16.Schrauben Sie die Rändelschraube (J) in den Dokument-Finisher, um die Kabelführung (17) zu verankern.
15.Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17) e quindi inserire il perno (J) nella guida cavi (17), con le 2 sporgenze (24) su ciascun lato
della struttura (25).
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire il perno (J) per mantenere i cavi nella guida cavi (17).
16.Avvitare il perno (J) nella finitrice di documenti per ancorare la guida cavi (17).
15.剥除电线导板（17）的固定胶带（18），使框架（25）处于 2 个卡销（24）之间，将 1 个销子（J）从电线导板（17）上穿过。

( 注意 )
将销钉 (J) 穿过电线导板 (17) 时，注意避免电线露出电线导板 (17) 外。
16.将销钉 (J) 的螺纹部分安装到装订器上，以固定电线导板 (17)。
15.전선 가이드 (17) 의 고정 테이프 (18) 를 떼어 내고 보스 (24) 2 개의 사이에 프레임 (25) 이 들어 있는 상태에서 핀 (J) 1 개를 전선 가이드 (17) 에 통
과시킵니다 .
( 주의 )
핀 (J) 은 전선이 전선 가이드 (17) 에서 나오지 않도록 통하게 합니다 .
16.핀 (J) 의 나사부분을 문서 피니셔에 장착하고 전선 가이드 (17) 를 고정합니다 .
15.電線ガイド (17) の固定テープ (18) を剥がし、

ボス (24)2 本の間にフレーム (25) が入っている状態で、
ピン (J)1 本を電線ガイド (17) に通す。
（注意）
ピン (J) は電線が電線ガイド (17) から出ないように通す。
16.ピン (J) のネジ部分をドキュメントフィニッシャーに取り付け、電線ガイド (17) を固定する。
7
28 31
O 30
27
29
26 32
K
31
P
K
32 K
17.Install the ground wire (26) to the frame 19.Plug the 2 connectors (27) into the connec- 21.Align holes (32) at 2 locations in the guide
using an M4 × 8 screw (K). tors (28) on the document finisher. (P) with projections (31) on the document
18.Install the binding band (O) to the wires and 20.Plug the connector (29) into the connector finisher.
fit the band into the frame. (30) on the relay paper conveying unit (I). 22.Install the guide (P) on the document finisher
using 4 M4 × 8 screws (K).
17.Fixer le câble de terre (26) au châssis en 19.Enficher les 2 connecteurs (27) dans les 21.Aligner les trous (32) en 2 endroits du guide
procédant à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (K). connecteurs (28) du retoucheur de docu- (P) avec les saillies (31) du retoucheur de
18.Monter le collier de fixation (O) sur les ment. document.
câbles et assujettir le collier au châssis. 20.Enficher le connecteur (29) dans le con- 22.Monter le guide (P) sur le retoucheur de doc-
necteur (30) de l'unité de transport de relais ument à l'aide de 4 vis M4 × 8 (K).
(I).
17.Instale el cable de conexión a tierra (26) en 19.Enchufe los 2 conectores (27) en los conec- 21.Alinee los orificios (32) de los 2 lugares de la
el marco usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (K). tores (28) del finalizador de documentos. guía (P) con los resaltos (31) del finalizador
18.Instale la correa de sujeción (O) en los 20.Enchufe el conector (29) en el conector (30) de documentos.
cables y coloque la correa en el marco. de la unidad de transporte de papel por rele- 22.Instale la guía (P) en el finalizador de docu-
vador (I). mentos usando 4 tornillos M4 × 8 (K).
17.Montieren Sie das Massekabel (26) mit einer 19.Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder (27) mit 21.Richten Sie die Öffnungen (32) an 2 Stellen
M4 × 8 Schraube (K) an den Rahmen. den Steckverbindern (28) des Dokument- in der Führung (P) auf die Vorsprünge (31)
18.Bringen Sie das Schellenband (O) an den Finishers. des Dokument-Finishers aus.
Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den 20.Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder (29) mit 22.Montieren Sie die Führung (P) mit 4 M4 × 8
Rahmen ein. dem Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten Schrauben (K) am Dokument-Finisher.
Papierfördereinheit (I).
17.Installare il cavo di terra (26) alla struttura 19.Inserire i 2 connettori (27) nei connettori (28) 21.Allineare i fori (32) alle 2 posizioni nella
utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (K). sulla finitrice di documenti. guida (P) con le sporgenze (31) sulla finitrice
18.Installare la fascetta di legatura (O) ai cavi e 20.Inserire il connettore (29) nel connettore (30) di documenti.
quindi fissare la fascetta nella struttura. sull'unità relay di trasporto carta (I). 22.Installare la guida (P) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti utilizzando 4 viti M4 × 8 (K).
17.使用 M4×8(K) 螺钉将装接地线 (26) 安装到 19.将 2 个连接器 (27) 与装订器的连接器 (28) 21.将装订器的 2 处突出部 (31) 与导板 (P) 的孔
框架上。相连接。 (32) 对齐。
18.在电线上安装束线带 (O)，将束线带 (O) 嵌入 20.将连接器 (29) 与中间搬运单元 (H) 的连接器 22.使用 4 颗螺钉 M4×8(K) 将导板 (P) 安装到装
到框架上。 (30) 相连接。订器上。
17.나사 M4×8(K) 로 접지선 (26) 을 플레임에 19.커넥터 (27) 2 개를 문서 피니셔의 커넥터 21.문서 피니셔의 돌기 (31) 2 곳을 가이드 (P)
장착합니다 . (28) 에 접속합니다 . 의 구멍 (32) 에 맞춥니다 .
18.전선에 결속 밴드 (O) 를 장착하고 플레임에 20.커넥터 (29) 를 중계 유니트 (I) 의 커넥터 22.나사 M4×8(K) 4 개로 문서 피니셔에 가이드
결속 밴드 (O) 를 꽂습니다 . (30) 에 접속합니다 . (P) 를 장착합니다 .
17.ビス M4×8(K) でアース線 (26) をフレーム 19.コネクター(27)2 個をドキュメントフィ 21.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (31)2

に取り付ける。ニッシャーのコネクター(28) に接続する。箇所にガイド (P) の穴 (32) に合わせる。
18.電線に結束バンド (O) を取り付け、フレーム 20.コネクター(29) を中継搬送ユニット (I) の 22.ビス M4×8(K)4 本でドキュメントフィニッ
に結束バンド (O) をはめ込む。コネクター(30) に接続する。シャーにガイド (P) を取り付ける。
8
33
F
A 37
L
35
L 36
A
34
23.Open the eject cover (33). 25.Engage the projection (36) and hook (37) on the rear side cover (F)
24.Engage the projection (34) and hook (35) on the front side cover (E) with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the rear side
with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the front side cover (F) using an M4 × 10 screw (black) (L).
cover (E) using an M4 × 10 screw (black) (L).
23.Ouvrir le capot d'éjection (33). 25.Engager la saillie (36) et le crochet (37) du capot latéral arrière (F)
24.Engager la saillie (34) et le crochet (35) du capot latéral avant (E) dans dans la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latéral arrière (F) à
la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latéral avant (E) à l'aide l'aide d'une vis M4 × 10 (noire) (L).
d'une vis M4 × 10 (noire) (L).
23.Abra la cubierta de expulsión (33). 25.Enganche el resalto (36) y el gancho (37) de la cubierta lateral poste-
24.Enganche el resalto (34) y el gancho (35) de la cubierta lateral frontal rior (F) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalación de la
(E) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalación de la cubierta cubierta lateral posterior (F) usando un tornillo M4 × 10 (negro) (L).
lateral frontal (E) usando un tornillo M4 × 10 (negro) (L).
23.Öffnen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33). 25.Hängen Sie den Vorsprung (36) und den Haken (37) der hinteren
24.Hängen Sie den Vorsprung (34) und den Haken (35) der vorderen Seitenabdeckung (F) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die
Seitenabdeckung (E) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die hintere Seitenabdeckung (F) mit einer M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz)
vordere Seitenabdeckung (E) mit einer M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz) (L).
(L).
23.Aprire il coperchio di espulsione carta (33). 25.Innestare la sporgenza (36) e il gancio (37) sul coperchio laterale pos-
24.Innestare la sporgenza (34) e il gancio (35) sul coperchio laterale ante- teriore (F) con l'unità di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazi-
riore (E) con l'unità di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazione one del coperchio laterale posteriore (F) utilizzando una vite M4 × 10
del coperchio laterale anteriore (E) utilizzando una vite M4 × 10 (nera) (nera) (L).
(L).
23.打开排纸盖板 (33)。 25.将后部侧盖板 (F) 的突出部 (36) 以及挂钩 (37) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页

24.将前部侧盖板 (E) 的突出部 (34) 以及挂钩 (35) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 中，使用 1 颗 M4×10（黒）(L) 螺钉来安装后部侧盖板 (F)。
单元 (A) 中，使用 1 颗 M4×10（黒）(L) 螺钉来安装前部侧盖板 (E)。
23.배출 커버 (33) 를 엽니다 . 25.사이드 커버 뒤 (F) 의 돌기 (36) 및 후크 (37) 를 접기 유니트 (A) 에 곶

24.사이드 커버 앞 (E) 의 돌기 (34) 및 후크 (35) 를 접기 유니트 (A) 에 꽂 습니다 . 나사 M4×10（흑）(L) 1 개로 사이드 커버 뒤 (F) 를 장착합니
습니다 . 나사 M4×10（흑）(L) 1 개로 사이드 커버 앞 (E) 을 장착합니 다.
다.
23.排出カバー(33) を開く。 25.サイドカバー後 (F) の突起 (36) およびフック (37) を、中折りユニッ

24.サイドカバー前 (E) の突起 (34) およびフック (35) を、
中折りユニット (A) にはめ込む。
ト (A) にはめ込む。ビス M4×10（黒）(L)1 本で、
サイドカバー後 (F) を取り付ける。
ビス M4×10（黒）(L)1 本で、サイドカバー前 (E) を取り付ける。
9
33
38
38
26.Insert the 2 pins (38) on the output tray (H) in the holes in the center-folding unit (A) to install the
tray.
27.Install the output stock tray (G) on the output tray (H).
28.Close the eject cover (33).
26.Insérer les 2 goupilles (38) du plateau de sortie (H) dans les trous de la plieuse (A) pour installer
le plateau.
27.Installer la butée de sortie du papier (G) sur le plateau de sortie (H).
28.Fermer le capot d'éjection (33).
26.Inserte los 2 pasadores (38) de la bandeja de salida (H) en los orificios de la unidad de plegado
(A) para instalar la bandeja.
27.Instale la bandeja de recolección de papel de salida (G) en la bandeja de salida (H).
28.Cierre la cubierta de expulsión (33).
26.Stecken Sie die 2 Rändelschrauben (38) des Ausgabefachs (H) in die Öffnungen der Mittenfal-
teinheit (A) ein, um das Fach zu installieren.
27.Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach (G) am Ausgabefach (H) an.
28.Schließen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33).
26.Inserire i 2 perni (38) sul vassoio di uscita (H) nei fori sull'unità di piegatura centrale (A) per instal-
lare il vassoio.
27.Installare il vassoio di uscita stoccaggio (G) sul vassoio di uscita (H).
28.Chiudere il coperchio di esplusione carta (33).
26.将排纸托盘 (H) 的 2 根销钉 (38) 插入中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的孔中，以安装排纸托盘 (H)。

27.将堆纸托盘 (G) 安装到排纸托盘 (H) 上。
28.关闭排纸盖板 (33)。
26.배지트레이 (H) 의 핀 (38) 2 개를 접기 유니트 (A) 의 구멍에 넣고 배지 트레이 (H) 를 장착합니다

.
27.배지 저장 트레이 (G) 를 배지 트레이 (H) 에 장착합니다 .
28.배출커버 (33) 를 닫습니다 .
26.排紙トレイ (H) のピン (38)2 本を中折りユニット (A) の穴に入れ、

排紙トレイ (H) を取り付け
る。
27.排紙ストックトレイ (G) を排紙トレイ (H) に取り付ける。
28.排出カバー(33) を閉じる。
10
40 41
A
40
39
39 D
Q
29.Insert the 2 projections (39) on the back of the output stopper (D) in the portions circled on the 30.Adhere the D7 label (Q) at the location
center-folding unit (A). shown in the figure.
Fit the 3 hooks (40) on the output stopper (D) in the holes (41) in the center-folding unit (A).
29.Insérer les 2 saillies (39) au dos de la butée de sortie (D) dans les parties encerclées de la 30.Apposer l'étiquette D7 (Q) à l'endroit repéré
plieuse (A). sur la figure.
Assujettir les 3 crochets (40) de la butée de sortie (D) dans les trous (41) de la plieuse (A).
29.Inserte los 2 resaltos (39) de la parte posterior del tope de salida (D) en las porciones marcadas 30.Adhiera la etiqueta D7 (Q) en el lugar que se
con un círculo de la unidad de plegado (A). muestra en la ilustración.
Coloque los 3 ganchos (40) del tope de salida (D) en los orificios (41) de la unidad de plegado
(A).
29.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge (39) auf der Rückseite des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die mit Kreis 30.Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber (Q) an der
bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. abgebildeten Stelle an.
Setzen Sie die 3 Haken (40) des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die Öffnungen (41) der Mittenfaltein-
heit (A) ein.
29.Inserire le 2 sporgenze (39) sulla parte posteriore del fermo di uscita (D) nelle porzioni cerchiate 30.Far aderire l'etichetta D7 (Q) alla posizione
sull'unità di piegatura centrale (A). mostrata nella figura.
Fissare i 3 ganci (40) sul fermo di uscita (D) nei fori (41) nell'unità di piegatura centrale (A).
29.将排纸挡板 (D) 内侧的 2 处突出部 (39) 插入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的圆框部。 30.在图示位置黏贴 D7 标签 (Q)。
将排纸挡板 (D) 的 3 个挂钩 (40) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的孔 (41) 中。
29. 배지 스토퍼 (D) 의 안쪽에 있는 돌기 (39) 2 곳을 접기 유니트 (A) 의에 삽입합니다 . 30.D7 라벨 (Q) 을 그림의 위치에 붙입니다 .
배지 스토퍼 (D) 의 후크 (40) 3 곳을 접기 유니트 (A) 의 구멍 (41) 에 끼웁니다 .
29.排紙ストッパー(D) の裏側にある突起 (39)2 箇所を中折ユニット (A) の丸枠部に挿入する。 30.D7 ラベル (Q) を図の位置に貼り付ける。
排紙ストッパー(D) のフック (40)3 箇所を中折りユニット (A) の穴 (41) にはめ込む。
11
R
31. Adhere the Operation label (R) at the location shown in the figure.
32.Reinstall the foot cover (5) and lower rear cover (7).
33.Close the lower front cover (3) and the upper front cover (1).
31.Apposer l'étiquette de fonctionnement (R) à l'endroit repéré sur la figure.

32.Reposer le couvercle du pied (5) et le couvercle arrière inférieur (7).
33.Fermer le capot inférieur avant (3) et le couvercle avant supérieur (1).
31.Adhiera la etiqueta de funcionamiento (R) en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustración.

32.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (5) y la cubierta posterior inferior (7).
33.Cierre la cubierta frontal inferior (3) y la cubierta frontal superior (1).
31.Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber (R) an der abgebildeten Stelle an.

32.Bringen Sie die Fußabdeckung (5) und die untere hintere Abdeckung (7) wieder an.
33.Schließen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (3) und die obere vordere Abdeckung (1).
31.Far aderire l'etichetta di operazione (R) alla posizione mostrata nella figura.
32.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (5) e il coperchio inferiore posteriore (7).
33.Chiudere il coperchio inferiore anteriore (3) e il coperchio superiore anteriore (1).
31.在图示位置黏贴操作标签 (R)。
32.按原样安装脚座盖板 (5) 和后部下盖板 (7)。
33.关闭前部下盖板（3）和前部上盖板（1）。
31.조작 라벨 (R) 을 그림의 위치에 붙입니다 .

32.풋커버 (5) 및 뒤하 커버 (7) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
33.전면 아래커버 (3) 및 전면 윗커버 (1) 를 닫습니다 .
31.操作ラベル (R) を図の位置に貼り付ける。

32.フットカバー(5) および後下カバー(7) を元通りに取り付ける。
33.前下カバー(3) および前上カバー(1) を閉じる。
12
a a
Adjustment of centerfold-stapling position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Staple Pos.
Check the distance (a) from the stapling position to the center of the paper. 2.Adjust the values.
If the distance (a) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
to adjust the position.
<Reference value (a)> ±2 mm
Réglage de la position d'agrafage des pages centrales dépliables 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Staple
Vérifier la distance (a) entre la position d'agrafage et le milieu de la feuille Pos.
de papier. Si cette distance (a) est supérieure à la valeur de référence, 2.Régler les valeurs.
régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (a)> ±2 mm
Ajuste de la posición de grapado de la unidad de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Staple
Compruebe la distancia (a) desde la posición de grapado con respecto al Pos.
centro del papel. Si dicha distancia (a) supera el valor de referencia, 2.Ajuste los valores.
realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (a)> ±2 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfalt-Heftposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (a) zwischen der Heftposition und der Papier- Staple Pos.
mitte. Falls der Abstand (a) größer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die Position 2.Die Werte einstellen.
gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (a)> ±2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di cucitura dell’unità di piegatura cen- 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e Sta-
trale ple Pos.
Controllare la distanza (a) dalla posizione di spillatura al centro del foglio. 2.Regolare i valori.
Se la distanza (a) è superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la procedura 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (a)> ±2 mm
中缝装订位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Staple Pos。

检查从装订位置到纸张中心的距离 (a)。如果距离 (a) 超出标准值范围，按 2.调整设定值。
照下列步骤调节装订位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准值 (a) ＞ ±2mm
접기 스테이플 위치조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Staple Pos 를 선택합니

스테이플 위치에서 용지 중앙까지의 거리離 (a) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (a) 다.
가 기준치 외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (a) ＞ ±2mm 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
中とじステープル位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、

Booklet、
Staple Pos を選択す
ステープル位置から用紙センターまでの距離 (a) を確認する。距離 (a) がる。
基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (a) ＞ ±2mm 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
13
b
Adjustment of center folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Booklet Pos.
Check the distance (b) from the edge of the paper to the center folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (b) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (b)>
A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ±3 mm
Réglage de la position de pliage central 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Booklet
Vérifier la distance (b) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position de Pos.
pliage central. Si cette distance (b) est supérieure à la valeur de référence, 2.Régler les valeurs.
régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (b)>
A4, Letter : Longueur de la feuille × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longueur de la feuille × 1/2 ±3 mm
Ajuste de la posición de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Book-
Compruebe la distancia (b) desde el borde del papel a la posición de ple- let Pos.
gado. Si dicha distancia (b) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (b)>
A4, Letter: Longitud del papel × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longitud del papel × 1/2 ±3 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (b) zwischen der Papierkante und der Mit- Booklet Pos.
tenfaltposition. Falls der Abstand (b) größer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (b)>
A4, Letter: Papierlänge × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Papierlänge × 1/2 ±3 mm
Regolazione della posizione centrale di piegatura 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (b) dal bordo della carta alla posizione centrale di Booklet Pos.
piegatura. Se la distanza (b) è superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la 2.Regolare i valori.
procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (b)>
A4, Letter: Lunghezza carta × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Lunghezza carta × 1/2 ±3 mm
中缝折叠位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Booklet Pos。

检查从纸张头部到折叠位置的距离 (b)。如果距离 (b) 超出标准值范围，按 2.调整设定值。
照下列步骤调节折叠位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准值 (b) ＞
A4,Letter: 纸张长度 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 纸张长度 ×1/2 ± 3mm
접기 위치조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Booklet Pos 를 선택합니

용지 끝에서 접기 위치까지의 거리 (b) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (b) 가 기준치 다.
외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (b) ＞ 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
A4,Letter: 용지길이 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 용지길이 ×1/2 ± 3mm
中折り位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、

Booklet、Booklet Pos を選択す
用紙端から中折り位置までの距離 (b) を確認する。距離 (b) が基準値外のる。
場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (b) ＞ 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
A4,Letter: 用紙長 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 用紙長 ×1/2 ± 3mm
14
c
Adjustment of tri-folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Three Fold.
Check the distance (c) from the edge of the paper to the second folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (c) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (c)> 7.0 ±2 mm
Réglage de la position de triple pliage 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Three
Vérifier la distance (c) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position du Fold.
deuxième pliage. Si cette distance (c) est supérieure à la valeur de 2.Régler les valeurs.
référence, régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Ajuste de la posición de plegado tríptico 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Three
Compruebe la distancia (c) desde el borde del papel a la segunda posición Fold.
de plegado. Si dicha distancia (c) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (c) zwischen der Papierkante und der Three Fold.
zweiten Faltposition. Falls der Abstand (c) größer als der Bezugswert ist, 2.Die Werte einstellen.
ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di piegatura tripla 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (c) dal bordo della carta alla posizione della sec- Three Fold.
onda piegatura. Se la distanza (c) è superiore al valore di riferimento, 2.Regolare i valori.
seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
三折位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Three Fold。

检查从纸张头部到第 2 个折叠位置的距离 (c)。如果距离 (c) 超出标准值范 2.调整设定值。
围，按照下列步骤调节折叠位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm
두번 접기 위치 조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Three Fold 를 선택합니

용지끝과 두번째 접히는 위치까지의 거리 (c) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (c) 가 다.
기준치 외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
三折り位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、

Booklet、Three Fold を選択す
用紙端と二つ目の折り位置までの距離 (c) を確認する。距離 (c) が基準値る。
外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
15
NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Machine: DF-790,DF-7110
AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Modèle: DF-790,DF-7110
AVISO
Este accesorio es sólo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Modelo: DF-790,DF-7110
HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Modell: DF-790,DF-7110
NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell’applicante.
Modello: DF-790,DF-7110
注意
本产品适用于以下机型。
机型 : DF-790,DF-7110
주의
본 제품은 이하의 기종에 적용됩니다 .
기종： DF-790,DF-7110
注意
本製品は、以下の機種に適用します。
機種： DF-790,DF-7110
16
2016. 3
303ND56710-02
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12)PH-7 A/B/C/D
PH-7 A/B/C/D
(Punch Unit)
Installation Guide
B
C D E F
A
I K L
J M
H
E. Spring......................................................... 1 L. Large clamp (for DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110).. 1

English M. Ferrite core ................................................ 1
F. Punch PWB ............................................... 1
Supplied parts G. Waste hole punch box ............................... 1
A. Punch guide............................................... 1 H. M3 × 8 tap Tight S screw ........................... 3
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
B. Hole punch unit.......................................... 1 I. Label sheet ................................................ 1 material from supplied parts.
C. Motor unit................................................... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) is not used.
J. Film (for DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 .......... 1
D. Stop ring .................................................... 1
K. Small clamp (for DF-770/DF-7120)............ 1
E. Ressort ...................................................... 1 L. Grand collier (pour DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) . 1
Français
F. PWB de la perforatrice............................... 1 M. Noyau de ferrite ......................................... 1
Pièces fournies G. Bac de récupération de la perforatrice....... 1
A. Guide de perforatrice................................. 1 H. Vis S taraudée M3 × 8 ............................... 3 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
B. Perforatrice ................................................ 1 I. Feuillet d’étiquettes.................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
C. Moteur ....................................................... 1
J. Film (pour DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 ........ 1 pièces fournies.
D. Bague d'arrêt ............................................. 1
K. Petit collier (pour DF-770/DF-7120)........... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) n'est pas utilisé.
E. Resorte ...................................................... 1 L. Sujetador grande (para DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110)1

Español
F. PWB de perforación................................... 1 M. Núcleo de ferrita......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Caja para desechos de la perforación ....... 1
A. Guía de perforación................................... 1 H. Tornillo de ajuste M3 × 8........................... 3 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
B. Perforadora................................................ 1 I. Hoja con etiqueta ...................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
C. Unidad motriz ............................................ 1
J. Película (para DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 ........ 1 das.
D. Anillo de tope............................................. 1
K. Sujetador pequeño (para DF-770/DF-7120) .. 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) no se utiliza.
E. Feder ......................................................... 1 L. Große Klemme (für DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) 1

Deutsch
F. Locher-PWB .............................................. 1 M. Ferritkern ................................................... 1
Gelieferte Teile G. Lochungsabfallbehälter.............................. 1
A. Locherführung ........................................... 1 H. M3 × 8 Passstift-Verbundschrauben.......... 3 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs-
B. Lochereinheit ............................................. 1 I. Aufkleberbogen.......................................... 1 material vollständig von den mitgelieferten
C. Motoreinheit............................................... 1
J. Film(für DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 ............ 1 Teilen.
D. Anschlagring.............................................. 1
K. Kleine Klemme (für DF-770/DF-7120) ...... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) wird nicht benötigt.
E. Molla .......................................................... 1 L. Morsetto grande (per DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110)1

Italiano
F. Scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione .... 1 M. Nucleo di ferrite.......................................... 1
Parti di fornitura G. Scarto perforazione ................................... 1
A. Guida perforazione .................................... 1 H. Viti con testa a croce S M3 × 8 .................. 3 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
B. Unità di perforazione ................................. 1 I. Foglio di etichette....................................... 1 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
C. Unità motore .............................................. 1
J. Pellicola(per DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)*1 .... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J)non è utilizzato.
D. Anello di bloccaggio................................... 1
K. Morsetto piccolo (per DF-770/DF-7120) .... 1
E. 弹簧 .................................1 K. 固定夹小（DF-770/DF-7120 用 ) ........1

简体中文
F. 打孔单元电路板 .......................1 L. 固定夹大（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 用） .1
附属品 G. 打孔纸屑盒 ...........................1 M. 磁环 .................................1
A. 打孔导向板........................... 1 H. M3 X 8 攻丝紧固型 S 螺丝 ..............3
B. 打孔单元............................. 1 I. 标签纸 ...............................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
C. 电机单元............................. 1 下。
J. 胶片（DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 用 )*1 ......1
D. 止动环............................... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120: 不使用 (J)。
E. 스프링............................................... 1 K. 클램프 소（DF-770/DF-7120 용）.......... 1

한국어
F. 펀치기판............................................ 1 L. 클램프 대（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 용）.. 1
동봉품 G. 펀치폐기박스...................................... 1 M. 페라이트 코어..................................... 1
A. 펀치가이드......................................... 1 H. 나사 M3×8 탭타이트 S......................... 3 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
B. 펀치유니트......................................... 1 I. 라벨 시트........................................... 1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
C. 모터유니트......................................... 1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) 는 사용되지 않습니
J. 필름（DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 용）*1 .... 1
D. 스톱링............................................... 1 다.
日本語 E. バネ .................................1 L. クランプ大

（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 用）..1
F. パンチ基板 ...........................1 M. フェライトコア .......................1
同梱品 G. パンチくずボックス ...................1
A. パンチガイド......................... 1 H. ビス M3×8 タップタイト S .............3 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
B. パンチユニット....................... 1 I. ラベルシート .........................1 は必ず取り外すこと。
C. モーターユニット..................... 1 *1 *1:DF-7110/DF-7120:(J) は使用しない。
J. フィルム（DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 用） ...1
D. ストップリング....................... 1
K. クランプ小（DF-770/DF-7120 用）.........1
1
2 4
1
3
Procedure Removing the cover (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Remove the 2 screws (3) and remove the
Before installing the hole punch unit, make sure If installing on the DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, upper rear cover (4).
the MFP's main power switch is turned off and proceed to step 1 on page 3.
that its power cord is unplugged from the power 1.Remove the screw (1) and remove the small
outlet. rear cover (2).
Install the document finisher first and then install
the hole punch unit.
Procédure Dépose du couvercle (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Déposer les 2 vis (3) et déposer le couvercle
Avant d’installer la perforatrice, s’assurer que Pour l'installation sur le modèle DF-790/DF-791/ supérieur arrière (4).
l’interrupteur d’alimentation principal du MFP est DF-7110, passer à l'étape 1 de la page 3.
hors tension et que le câble d’alimentation est 1.Déposer la vis (1) et déposer le petit couver-
débranché de la prise secteur. cle arrière (2).
Installer d’abord le finisseur de document, puis
installer la perforatrice.
Procedimiento Extracción de la cubierta (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Quite los 2 tornillos (3) y, después, quite la
Antes de instalar la perforadora, asegúrese de que Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790/DF-791/ cubierta trasera superior (4).
el interruptor principal de la alimentación DF-7110, vaya al paso 1 de la página 3.
del MFP esté desconectado y de que el cable de ali-
1.Quite el tornillo (1) y, después, quite la cubi-
mentación esté desenchufado de la toma de corri-
ente de la pared. erta trasera pequeña (2).
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y luego
instale la perforadora.
Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Die 2 Schrauben (3) entfernen und die obere
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit Zur Installation des DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 hintere Abdeckung (4) abnehmen.
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 3.
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und 1.Die Schraube (1) entfernen und die kleine
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. hintere Abdeckung (2) abnehmen.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Lochereinheit an.
Procedura Rimozione del coperchio (DF-770/DF-7120) 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (3) e quindi rimuovere il
Prima di installate l'unità di perforazione, assicu- Se si installa sull'unità DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, pannello superiore posteriore (4).
rarsi che l'interruttore principale dell'MFP sia procedere al passo 1 a pagina 3.
spento e che il cavo di alimentazione sia scolle- 1.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
gato dalla presa di corrente. pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
all’installazione dell’unità di perforazione.
安装步骤拆下盖板（DF-770/DF-7120 时） 2.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (3)，拆下后上部盖板 (4)。

安装打孔单元时，必须事先关闭 MFP 主机的主电安装到 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 上时，跳至 P3 的
源开关，并拔下电源插头后再进行作业。步骤 1。
首先安装装订器，然后安装打孔单元。 1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (1)，拆下后部小盖板 (2)。
설치순서 커버제거（DF-770/DF-7120 의 경우） 2.나사 (3) 2 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (4) 를

펀치유니트를 부착할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 에 장착하는 경우에 제거합니다 .
의 주 전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 는 P3 의 순서 1 로 진행합니다 .
뺀 다음 작업을 할 것 . 1.나사 (1) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (2) 를
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 펀치유니트를 설치 할 제거합니다 .
것.
取付手順カバーの取り外し（DF-770/DF-7120 の場合） 2.ビス (3)2 本を外し、後上カバー(4) を取り

パンチユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 に装着の場合は、P3 の外す。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、電源プラグを手順 1 へ進む。
抜いてから作業すること。 1.ビス (1)1 本を外し、後小カバー(2) を取り
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、パンチ外す。
ユニットを設置すること。
2
6
10
7
5 7
7 9
Removing the cover (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Remove the 3 screws (7) and remove the Installing the hole punch unit
7110) upper rear cover (8). 3.Remove the screw (9) and pull the guide
1.Remove the screw (5) and remove the small (10) outwards.
rear cover (6).
Dépose du couvercle (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Déposer les 3 vis (7) et déposer le couvercle Installation de la perforatrice
7110) supérieur arrière (8). 3.Déposer la vis (9) et tirer le guide (10) vers
1.Déposer la vis (5) et déposer le petit couver- l'extérieur.
cle arrière (6).
Extracción de la cubierta (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y, después, quite la Instalación de la perforadora
7110) cubierta trasera superior (8). 3.Quite el tornillo (9) y tire de la guía (10)
1.Quite el tornillo (5) y, después, quite la cubi- hacia fuera.
erta trasera pequeña (6).
Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-790/DF-791/ 2.Die 3 Schrauben (7) entfernen und die obere Anbringen der Lochereinheit
DF-7110) hintere Abdeckung (8) abnehmen. 3.Die Schraube (9) entfernen und die Führung
1.Die Schraube (5) entfernen und die kleine (10) nach außen ziehen.
hintere Abdeckung (6) abnehmen.
Rimozione del coperchio (DF-790/DF-791/DF- 2.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7) e quindi rimuovere il Installare l’unità di perforazione
7110) pannello superiore posteriore (8). 3.Rimuovere la vite (9) ed estrarre la guida
1.Rimuovere la vite (5) e quindi rimuovere il (10) verso l'esterno.
pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
拆下盖板（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 时） 2.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下后上部盖板 (8)。安装打孔单元

1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (5)，拆下后部小盖板 (6)。 3.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (9)，将导向板 (10) 向外拉
出。
커버제거（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 의 경우） 2.나사 (7) 3 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (8) 를 펀치유니트 부착

1.나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (6) 를 제거합니다 . 3.나사 (9) 1 개를 제거하고 가이드 (10) 을 앞
제거합니다 . 으로 끌어 당깁니다 .
カバーの取り外し（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 の場 2.ビス (7)3 本を外し、後上カバー(8) を取りパンチユニットの取り付け

合）外す。 3.ビス (9)1 本を外し、ガイド (10) を手前に引
1.ビス (5)1 本を外し、後小カバー(6) を取りき出す。
外す。
3
38
J
4.After using alcohol to clean the shaded portion (38) of the motor shown for adhering the film (J), adhere the film. (DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 only)
4.Après avoir utilisé de l'alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée (38) sur laquelle le film (J) est apposé, coller ce film. (DF-770/DF-790/DF-791
uniquement)
4.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte sombreada (38) del motor mostrada en la ilustración para pegar la película (J), pegue la película.
(DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 solamente)
4.Den in der Abbildung grau dargestellten Teil (38) des Motors zum Anbringen des Films (J) mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Film anbringen. (nur DF-
770/DF-790/DF-791)
4.Dopo aver usato l’alcool per pulire la parte ombreggiata (38) del motore, illustrata per l’adesione della pellicola (J), far aderire la pellicola. (solo DF-
770/DF-790/DF-791)
4.用酒精清洁电机斜侧处（38）的粘贴位置后，粘贴胶片（J）。( 仅限 DF-770/DF-790/DF-791)
4.모터 사선부（38）의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 필름（J）을 부착합니다 . (DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 만）
4.モーター斜線部（38）の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、フィルム（J）
を貼り付ける。(DF-770/DF-790/DF-791 のみ )
4
12
11
5.Install the punch guide (A) so that the leading edge of the guide (11) is below the document finisher frame (12).
5.Monter le guide de la perforatrice (A) de sorte que le bord d'attaque du guide (11) se trouve sous le bâti du retoucheur de document (12).
5.Instale la guía de perforación (A) de forma tal que el borde delantero de la guía (11) quede debajo de la carcasa del finalizador de documentos (12).
5.Die Locherführung (A) so einsetzen, dass die Vorderkante der Führung (11) unter dem Rahmen (12) des Dokument-Finishers liegt.
5.Installare la guida perforazione (A) in modo che il bordo principale della guida (11) sia sotto il telaio (12) della finitrice di documenti.
5.将打孔导向板 (A) 的前端 (11) 安装在装订器的框架 (12) 的下部。
5.펀치가이드 (A) 의 끝 (11) 이 문서 피니셔의 프레임 (12) 밑으로 되도록 장착합니다 .
5.パンチガイド (A) の先端 (11) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム (12) の下になるように取り付ける。
5
1
6.Insert the hole punch unit (B) into the docu- Notes When Installing the Punch Unit
ment finisher. When installing the punch unit at the procedure 6 on page 6, please insert it while slightly holding
it up ( 1 , 2 )
Please note that the hook at the bottom (A) might be damaged if the punch unit is forcibly installed
while holding it down.
6.Insérer la perforatrice (B) dans le retoucheur Notes lors de l'installation de l'unité de perforation:
de document. Lors de l'installation de l'unité de perforation à la procédure 6 de la page 6, veuillez l'insérez en la
soulevant légèrement ( 1 , 2 ).
Veuillez noter que le crochet du bas (A) peut être endommagé si l'unité de perforation est installée
de force en la maintenant vers le bas.
6.Inserte la perforadora (B) en el finalizador de Nota al instalar el kit perforador

documentos. Al instalar el kit perforador según página 6 del procedimiento 6, introdúzcalo elevándolo
ligeramente ( 1 , 2 )
Tenga en cuenta que la pestaña de la parte inferior (A) se puede dañar si el kit de perforado se
fuerza en la instalación.
6.Die Lochereinheit (B) in den Dokument-Fin- Hinweis zur Installation der Locheinheit
isher einsetzen. Wenn Sie die Locheinheit wie in Schritt 6 auf Seite 6 beschrieben installieren, halten Sie die
Locheinheit beim Einsetzen ein wenig nach oben ( 1 , 2 ).
Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Haken (A) am Boden beschädigt werden kann, wenn die Locheinheit
bei der Installation nach unten gehalten wird, so dass zu viel Kraftaufwand erforderlich ist.
6.Inserire l'unità di perforazione (B) nella fini-

Note per l’installazione dell’unità di perforazione.
trice di documenti. Installare l'unità di perforazione, come da procedura 6 pagina 6, inserendola delicatamente e
tenendola sollevata ( 1 , 2 ).
Fare attenzione al gancio nella parte inferiore (A) che potrebbe venir danneggiato se si forza
verso il basso durante l’istallazione.
6.将打孔单元 (B) 插入到装订器中。

6.펀치유니트 (B) 를 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니

다. ] ]
6.パンチユニット (B) をドキュメントフィ

ニッシャーに挿入する。㻢㻢
6
B
C
13 16
B
15
14
C
C
7.Raise the hole punch unit (B) slightly and fit the hook (13) on the motor unit (C) into the groove 8.Secure the motor unit (C) with the 2 screws
(14) in the document finisher. At the same time, insert the rod (15) on the motor unit (C) into the (H).
hole (16) in the hole punch unit (B).
7.Lever légèrement la perforatrice (B) et insérer le crochet (13) du moteur (C) dans la rainure (14) 8.Fixer le moteur (C) à l'aide de 2 vis (H).
du retoucheur de document. Insérer en même temps la tige (15) du moteur (C) dans le trou (16)
de la perforatrice (B).
7.Levante ligeramente la perforadora (B) y encaje el gancho (13) de la unidad motriz (C) en la 8.Asegure la unidad motriz (C) con los 2 tornil-
ranura (14) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte la varilla (15) de la unidad los (H).
motriz (C) en el orificio (16) de la perforadora (B).
7.Die Lochereinheit (B) leicht anheben und den Haken (13) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die Nut (14) 8.Die Motoreinheit (C) mit den 2 Schrauben
des Dokument-Finishers einsetzen. Dabei auch die Stange (15) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die (H) sichern.
Öffnung (16) der Lochereinheit (B) einstecken.
7.Sollevare leggermente l'unità di perforazione (B) ed inserire il gancio (13) sull'unità motore (C) 8.Fissare l'unità motore (C) con le 2 viti (H).
nella scanalatura (14) della finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire l'asta (15)
sull'unità motore (C) nel foro (16) dell'unità di perforazione (B).
7.稍稍抬起打孔单元 (B)，将电机单元 (C) 的卡扣 (13) 嵌入装订器的沟槽 (14) 内。与此同时，将电 8.使用 2 颗螺丝 (H) 来固定电机单元 (C)。
机单元 (C) 的轴 (15) 插入打孔单元 (B) 的孔 (16) 中。
7.펀치유니트 (B) 를 조금 들면서 모터유니트 (C) 후크 (13) 를 문서 피니셔의 구 (14) 에 꽂습니다 . 8.나사 (H) 2 개로 모터유니트 (C) 를 고정합니
이것과 동시에 모터유니트 (C) 의 축 (15) 을 펀치유니트 (B) 구멍 (16) 에 삽입합니다 . 다.
7.パンチユニット (B) を少し持ち上げながら、モーターユニット (C) のフック (13) をドキュメン 8.ビス (H)2 本で、
モーターユニット (C) を固
トフィニッシャーの溝 (14) にはめ込む。これと同時に、モーターユニット (C) の軸 (15) をパン定する。
チユニット (B) の穴 (16) に挿入する。
7
17
15
E 18
9.Fit the stop ring (D) over the motor unit rod 10.Run the hole punch unit wire (17) through
(15) and fit the spring (E) between the hole the motor unit edging (18).
punch unit and motor unit.
9.Monter la bague d'arrêt (D) sur la tige du 10.Faire passer le câble de la perforatrice (17)
moteur (15) et insérer le ressort (E) entre la dans le passage de câbles du moteur (18).
perforatrice et le moteur.
9.Coloque el anillo de tope (D) sobre la varilla 10.Tienda el cable de la perforadora (17) a
de la unidad motriz (15) y coloque el resorte través de la pestaña de la unidad motriz
(E) entre la perforadora y la unidad motriz. (18).
9.Den Anschlagring (D) auf die Stange (15) 10.Das Kabel (17) der Lochereinheit durch den
der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder (E) Kantenschutz (18) der Motoreinheit führen.
zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit
einsetzen.
9.Inserire l'anello di bloccaggio (D) sull'asta 10.Far passare il cavo dell'unità di perforazione
(15) dell'unità motore ed inserire molla (E) (17) attraverso il bordo (18) dell'unità
tra l'unità di perforazione e l'unità motore. motore.
9.将止动环 (D) 嵌入到电机单元的轴 (15) 上， 10.将打孔单元的电线 (17) 穿过电机单元的包边

在打孔单元与电机单元之间安装弹簧 (E)。孔 (18)。
9.모터유니트 축 (15) 에 스톱링 (D) 을 꽂고 펀 10.펀치유니트의 전선 (17) 을 모터유니트의 에

치유니트와 모터유니트 사이에 스프링 (E) 징 (18) 에 지나가게 합니다 .
을설치합니다 .
9.モーターユニットの軸 (15) にストップリン 10.パンチユニットの電線 (17) をモーターユ

グ (D) をはめ、パンチユニットとモーターユニットのエッジング (18) に通す。
ニットの間にバネ (E) を取り付ける。
8
25
23
21 25
24
F F
20
20
22 H
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-770/DF-7120) 13.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
If installing on the DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, proceed to step 11 on page 13. nectors (25) on the punch PWB (F).
11.Fit the 2 hooks (20) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (21) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (23) on the document finisher into the hole (22) in the punch PWB (F).
12.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (24) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-770/ 12.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (24)
DF-7120). à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une
Pour une installation sur le modèle DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, passer à l'étape 11 en page 13. vis (H).
11.Insérer les 2 crochets (20) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (21) du retoucheur 13.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (23) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (22) connecteurs (25) de la PWB de la perfora-
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F). trice (F).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-770/DF- 12.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable
7120) de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (24) y
Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, vaya al paso 11 de la página 13. el PWB de perforación (F).
11.Coloque los 2 ganchos (20) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (21) del finalizador de docu- 13.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (23) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (22) conectores (25) del PWB de perforación (F).
del PWB de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-770/DF-7120) 12.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (24)
Zur Installation des DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 weitergehen zu Schritt 11 auf Seite 13. der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F)
11.Die 2 Haken (20) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (21) am Dokument-Finisher einset- festziehen.
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (23) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (22) auf der Locher- 13.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
PWB (F) einsetzen. verbinder (25) der Locher-PWB (F)
anschließen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-770/ 13.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
DF-7120) nei connettori (25) sulla scheda a circuiti
Se si installa sull'unità DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110, procedere al passo 11 a pagina 13. stampati di perforazione (F).
11.Inserire i 2 ganci (20) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (21) della
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (23) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (22) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
12.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (24) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-770/DF-7120 时） 13.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的
安装到 DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 上时，跳至 P13 的步骤 11。接插件 (25) 相连接。
11.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (20) 挂在装订器的缺口 (21) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔
(22) 卡入装订器的突出部 (23)。
12.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (24) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-770/DF-7120 의 경우） 13.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥

DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 에 장착하는 경우에는 P13 의 순서 11 로 진행합니다 . 터 (25) 에 접속합니다 .
11.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (20) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (21) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍
(22) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (23) 에 넣습니다 .
12.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (24) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け（DF-770/DF-7120 の場合） 13.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板

DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 に装着の場合は、P13 の手順 11 へ進む。 (F) のコネクター(25) に接続する。
11.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (20)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (21) に引っ掛け
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (22) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (23) に入れる。
12.ビス (H)1 本で、パンチユニットのアース線 (24) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
9
M
27
39
26
14.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 15.Fasten two wires which were connected in 16.Install the small clamp (K) on the finisher,
nectors (27) on the DF main PWB (26). step 14 with the clamp (39). then pass and fasten the wires from the
motor unit and hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
14.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 15.Attacher les deux fils qui ont été connectés à 16.Monter le petit collier (K) sur le retoucheur
foratrice aux connecteurs (27) de la PWB l'étape 14 avec le collier (39). puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de
principale du DF (26). la perforatrice dans ce collier pour les fixer
en place.
17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
14.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 15.Apriete los dos cables que conectó en el 16.Instale el sujetador pequeño (K) en el final-
foración a los conectores (27) del PWB prin- paso 14 con la abrazadera (39). izador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de
cipal del DF (26). la unidad motriz y la perforadora.
17.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
14.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 15.Befestigen Sie die beiden Kabel, die in 16.Die kleine Klemme (K) am Finisher anbrin-
verbinder (27) der DF-Haupt-PWB (26) Schritt 14 verbunden wurden, mit der gen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit
anschließen. Schelle (39). und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und
befestigen.
17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
14.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 15.Fissare i due cavi collegati al punto 14 con il 16.Installare il morsetto piccolo (K) sul finitore, e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (27) morsetto (39). quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità
sulla scheda principale PWB (26) della DF. motore e dall’unità di perforazione.
17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
14.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 15.使用固定夹（39）来固定步骤 14 中连接的 2 16.把小固定夹（K）安装在装订器上，从电机单

(26) 的接插件 (27) 连接。根电线。元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固
定。
17.用磁环（M）套住导线。
14.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 15.순서 14 로 접속한 2 개의 전선을 클램프 16.클램프 소（K）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니

(26) 의 커넥터 (27) 에 접속합니다 . (39) 로 고정해 주십시오 . 트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키
고 고정합니다 .
17.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다
.
14.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 15.手順 14 で接続した 2 本の電線をクランプ 16.クランプ小（K）をフィニッシャーに取り付

(26) のコネクター(27) に接続する。 (39) で固定する。け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットから
の電線を通し、固定する。
17.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
10
28
18.Replace the upper rear cover (4) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (28) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (2).
18.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (4) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (28) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (2).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (28) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(4) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (2).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (4) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (2) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (28) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(4) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
18.按原样安装后上部盖板 (4) 与后部小盖板 19.打开前上部盖板 (28)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。

(2)。
18.뒷 상커버 (4) 와 후 소커버 (2) 를 원래대로 19.앞 상커버 (28) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
18.後上カバー(4) と後小カバー(2) を元通り取 19.前上カバー(28) を開き、

パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
11
J( B )
B C J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the 21.Close the upper front cover (28).
locations shown in the illustration: B, C.
20.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet 21.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (28).
d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration : B, C.
20.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las 21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (28).
etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración: B, C.
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber 21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28)
vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen: B, C. schließen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) 21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (28).
sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: B, C.
20.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：B、C。 21.关闭前上部盖板 (28)。
20.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：Ｂ，Ｃ . 21.앞 상커버 (28) 를 닫습니다 .
20.ラベルシート (J) 内の B、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。 21.前上カバー(28) を閉じる。
12
32
33 34
31 34
30
29
F
F
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) 13.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
11.Fit the 2 hooks (29) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (30) in the document finisher. At the same nectors (34) on the punch PWB (F).
time, insert the projection (32) on the document finisher into the hole (31) in the punch PWB (F).
12.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (33) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-790/ 13.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
DF-791/DF-7110). connecteurs (34) de la PWB de la perfora-
11.Insérer les 2 crochets (29) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (30) du retoucheur trice (F).
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (32) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (31)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
12.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (33) à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-790/DF-791/ 13.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
DF-7110) conectores (34) del PWB de perforación (F).
11.Coloque los 2 ganchos (29) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (30) del finalizador de docu-
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (32) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (31)
del PWB de perforación (F).
12.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (33) y el PWB
de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110) 13.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
11.Die 2 Haken (29) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (30) am Dokument-Finisher einset- verbinder (34) der Locher-PWB (F)
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (32) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (31) auf der Locher- anschließen.
PWB (F) einsetzen.
12.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (33) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-790/ 13.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
DF-791/DF-7110) nei connettori (34) sulla scheda a circuiti
11.Inserire i 2 ganci (29) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (30) della stampati di perforazione (F).
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (32) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (31) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
12.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (33) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 时） 13.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的

11.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (29) 挂在装订器的缺口 (30) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔接插件 (34) 相连接。
(31) 卡入装订器的突出部 (32)。
12.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (33) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 의 경우） 13.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥

11.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (29) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (30) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍 터 (34) 에 접속합니다 .
(31) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (32) 에 넣습니다 .
12.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (33) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け（DF-790/DF-791/DF-7110 の場合） 13.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板

11.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (29)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (30) に引っ掛け (F) のコネクター(34) に接続する。
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (31) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (32) に入れる。
12.ビス (H)1 本で、
パンチユニットのアース線 (33) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
13
L
36
35
14.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 15.Install the small clamp (L) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (36) on the DF main PWB (35). hole punch unit.
16.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
14.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 15.Installer le grand collier (L) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de la perfo-
foratrice aux connecteurs (36) de la PWB ratrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place.
principale du DF (35). 16.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
14.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 15.Instale el sujetador grande (L) en el finalizador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foración a los conectores (36) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (35). 16.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
14.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 15.Die große Klemme (L) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (36) der DF-Haupt-PWB (35) Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen.
anschließen. 16.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
14.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 15.Installare il morsetto grante (L) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (36) dall’unità di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (35) della DF. 16.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
14.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 15.把大固定夹（L）安装在装订器上，从电机单元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固定。

(35) 的接插件 (36) 连接。 16.用磁环（M）套住导线。
14.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 15.클램프 대（L）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키고 고정합
(35) 의 커넥터 (36) 에 접속합니다 . 니다 .
16.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다 .
14.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 15.クランプ大（L）をフィニッシャーに取り付け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットからの電線を

(35) のコネクター(36) に接続する。通し、
固定する。
16.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
14
37
17.Replace the upper rear cover (8) and small 18.Open the upper front cover (37) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (6).
17.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (8) et 18.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (37) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (6).
17.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 18.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (37) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(8) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (6).
17.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (8) und die kle- 18.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (6) wieder einsetzen.
17.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 18.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (37) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(8) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
17.按原样安装后上部盖板 (8) 与后部小盖板 18.打开前上部盖板 (37)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。

(6)。
17.뒷 상커버 (8) 와 후 소커버 (6) 를 원래대로 18.앞 상커버 (37) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
17.後上カバー(8) と後小カバー(6) を元通り取 18.前上カバー(37) を開き、

パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
15
A
C
J( A )
J( C )
19.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the locations shown in the illustration: A, C.
20.Close the upper front cover (37).
19.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration :
A, C.
20.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (37).
19.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican
en la ilustración: A, C.
20.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (37).
19.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung
angegebenen Stellen: A, C.
20.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) schließen.
19.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: A, C.
20.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (37).
19.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：A、C。
20.关闭前上部盖板 (37)。
19.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：A，Ｃ .

20.앞 상커버 (37) 를 닫습니다 .
19.ラベルシート (J) 内の A、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。
20.前上カバー(37) を閉じる。
16
a b
[Adjusting the hole punch position] Adjusting the hole punch entry registration
1.Connect the MFP power plug to the wall out- 1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Regist.
let and turn the MFP main power switch on. 2.Adjust the values.
2.Make a test copy in punch mode. When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
3.If any off-centering is observed, follow the When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
procedure below to adjust the hole position. 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
[Réglage de la position des perforations] Réglage de l'enregistrement de l'entrée des perforations

1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation du MFP dans la prise 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Regist.
murale et mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP 2.Régler les valeurs.
sous tension.
2. Effectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation. Si le papier est alimenté de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
3. Si les perforations sont décentrées, suivre la Si le papier est froissé exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
procédure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
perforation.
[Ajuste de la posición de perforación] Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforación

1. Conecte el enchufe del MFP en el receptáculo de 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Regist.
pared y encienda el interruptor principal del MFP. 2.Ajuste los valores.
2. Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de per- Cuando el papel alimentado está torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuración.
foración. Cuando el papel se dobló copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
3. Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
abajo para ajustar la posición del agujero.
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition] Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung

1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist.
Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Hauptschalter ein. Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
2. Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen. Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3. Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione] Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione
1. Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione 1.Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Regist.
dell’MFP alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e 2.Regolare i valori.
accendere l’interruttore principale di alimentazione.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore
2. Eseguire una copia di prova in modalità di perfora-
zione. dell'impostazione.
3. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
［打孔位置的调节］打孔装入定位调节
1.将 MFP 主机上的电源插头插入电源插座中， 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Regist。
打开主电源开关。 2.调整设定值。
2.在打孔模式下进行测试复印。纸张斜向搬运时的复印样本 (a)：调高设定值。
3.打孔位置有偏差时，按以下步骤进行调节。纸张作 Z 字折时的复印样本 (b)：调低设定值。
3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
［펀치위치의 조정］ 펀치반입 레지스트 조정

1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Regist 를 선택합니다 .
전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
2.펀치모드에서 시험복사를 합니다 . 용지가 경사로 반송되는 경우의 복사샘플 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
3.펀치위치가 벗어난 경우에는 다음 순서로 조 용지가 Z 꺾임이 있는 경의 복사샘플 (b)：설정치를 내립니다 .
정합니다 . 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
［パンチ位置の調整］パンチ搬入レジスト調整
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Regist を選択する。
込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。 2.設定値を調整する。
2.パンチモードでテストコピーを行う。用紙が斜めに搬送される場合コピーサンプル (a)：設定値を上げる。
3.パンチ位置がずれていた場合、次の手順で調用紙が Z 折れする場合コピーサンプル (b)：設定値を下げる。
整を行う。 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
17
c
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Feed. <Reference value (c)>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: 13 mm; Inch specification: 9.5 mm
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
(c): Increase the setting value.
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Feed. <Valeur de référence (c)>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: 13 mm; Spécifications en pouces: 9,5 mm
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la alimentación de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Feed. <Valor de referencia (c)>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: 13 mm; en pulgadas: 9,5 mm
Si la posición de perforación está más cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuración.
Si la posición de perforación está más alejada del borde que el valor de referen-
cia (c): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed. <Bezugswert (c)>
2. Die Werte einstellen. Metrischer Abstand: 13 mm; Abstand in Zoll: 9,5 mm
Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Feed. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: 13 mm; Specificazione in pollici: 9,5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di mm
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置搬运调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。

1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Feed。＜基准值 (c) ＞
2.调整设定值。公制规格：13mm、英制规格：9.5mm
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 短时：调高设定值。
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 长时：调低设定值。
펀치위치 반송조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Feed 를 선택합 ＜기준치 (c) ＞
니다 . 센치사양：13mm, 인치사양：9.5mm
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 짧은 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 긴 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
パンチ位置搬送調整 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。

1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Feed を選択す＜基準値 (c) ＞
る。センチ仕様：13mm、インチ仕様：9.5mm
2.設定値を調整する。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より短い場合：設定値を上げる。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より長い場合：設定値を下げる。
18
e f
d
f
Centering the hole punch position 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Width. <Reference value>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: d = 80 mm ± 0.5, e = 40 mm ± 2
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Decrease the Inch specification: d = 2.75 inch ± 0.5, e = 1.375 inch ± 2,
setting value. f = 4.25 inch ± 0.5
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: Increase the
setting value.
Centrage de la position de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Width. <Valeur de référence>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Diminuez la valeur de Spécifications en pouces: d = 2,75 pouces ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pouces ± 2,
réglage. f = 4.25 pouces ± 0,5
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine: Augmentez la valeur
de réglage.
Centrado de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Width. <Valor de referencia>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: En pulgadas: d = 2,75 pulgada ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pulgada ± 2,
Reduzca el valor de configuración. f = 4.25 ± 0,5 pulgada
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
máquina: Aumente el valor de configuración.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch <Bezugswert>
Width. Metrischer Abstand: d = 80 mm ± 0,5; e = 40 mm ± 2
2. Die Werte einstellen. Abstand in Zoll: d = 2,75 Zoll ± 0,5, e = 1,375 Zoll ± 2,
Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert verringern. f = 4.25 Zoll ± 0,5
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert
erhöhen.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Width. <Valore di riferimento>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della Specificazione in pollici: d = 2,75 pollici ± 0.5, e = 1,375 pollici ± 2,
macchina: Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. f = 4.25 pollici ± 0.5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
macchina: Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置中心调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。

1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Width。＜基准值＞
2.调整设定值。公制规格：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
打孔位置向机器前部偏移时：调低设定值。英制规格：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
打孔位置向机器后部偏移时：调高设定值。
펀치위치 센터조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Width 를 선택합 ＜기준치＞
니다 . 센치 사양：d=80mm±0.5, e=40mm±2
2.설정치를 조정합니다 . 인치사양：d=2.75inch±0.5, e=1.375inch±2, f=4.25inch±0.5
펀치구멍이 기기 앞측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 뒷측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
パンチ位置センター調整 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。

1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Width を選択す＜基準値＞
る。センチ仕様：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
2.設定値を調整する。インチ仕様：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
パンチ穴の位置が機械前側にずれている場合：設定値を下げる。
パンチ穴の位置が機械後側にずれている場合：設定値を上げる。
19
2016. 12
303NK56712-02
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(13)PH-7100/7110/7120/7130
PH-7100/7110/7120/7130
(Punch Unit)
Installation Guide
A D E
E F H(M4x8)
A
A B(M3x8)
B(M3x8) E FF H(M4x8)
H(M4x8)
B(M3x8)
C C D
D G
G I(M4x8)
C G I(M4x8)
I(M4x8)
DF-7100
DF-7100
DF-7100
ձ
ձ
Be sure
Be sure to
to remove
remove any any tape
tape and/or
and/or cushioning
cushioning materials
materials from
from the
the parts
parts supplied.
supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de F
Veillez àà retirer
Veillez retirer les
les morceaux
morceaux de
rembourrage des pièces fournies.
de bande
bande adhésive
adhésive et/ou
et/ou les
les matériaux
matériaux de de FF
rembourrage des
rembourrage des pièces
pièces fournies.
fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes
Asegúrese de
Asegúrese de quitar
quitar todas
todas las
las cintas
cintas y/o
y/o material
material amortiguador
amortiguador de de las
las partes
partes
suministradas.
suministradas.
suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den
Stellen Sie
Stellen Sie sicher,
sicher, dass
dass sämtliche
sämtliche Klebebänder
Klebebänder und/oder
und/oder Polstermaterial
Polstermaterial vonvon den
den
gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
gelieferten Teilen
gelieferten Teilen entfernt
entfernt wurden.
wurden.
Rimuovere tutti
Rimuovere tutti ii nastri
nastri adesivi
adesivi e/o
e/o ii materiali
materiali di
di protezione
protezione dalle
dalle parti
parti fornite.
fornite.
鶎ꚾ븽꾅隕뇊묁넩뺹꿹띞녡閵Ꝏ꽩넽鱉陲끥꾅鱉ꗍ麑겑뇑阥뼍겢겑꿙
ղ
ղ ճ
ճ
մ
մ յ
յ
1
ն A
B(M3x8)
չ C
2
պ
ջ
ջ
ջ
ߒ
ߓ
ߔ ߕ
3
ջ
ߑ
4
ս
5
ց
H(M4x8)
H(M4x8)
6
द I(M4x8)
I(M4x8)
G
ध न
प
Proceed to step 1 on page 9.
Passer à l'étape 1 de la page 9.
Vaya al paso 1 de la página 9.
ON
Weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 9.
Procedere al passo 1 a pagina 9.
䐣㠣 3Ⲵ↕僔 Ǆ
3넍ꯑ꫑ꈑ덹뼾
3ࡢᡭ㡰࡬㐍ࡴࠋ
7
फ
D द
B(M3x8)
ब
ब
C(M3x8)
8
English
[Adjusting the hole punch position]
1.Make a test copy in punch mode.
2.If any off-centering is observed, follow the procedure below to adjust the hole position.
(For the referrence value, refer to each adjustment content.)
Français
[Réglage de la position des perforations]
1.IEffectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation.
2.Si les perforations sont décentrées, suivre la procédure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de perforation.
(Pour la valeur de référence, se reporter à chaque contenu d'ajustement.)
Español
[Ajuste de la posición de perforación]
1.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de perforación.
2.Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de abajo para ajustar la posición del agujero.
(Para información sobre el valor de referencia, consulte el contenido de cada ajuste.)
Deutsch
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition]
1.Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen.
2.Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
(Den Referenzwert finden Sie im jeweiligen Einstellungsabschnitt.)
Italiano
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione]
1.Eseguire una copia di prova in modalità di perforazione.
2. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione.
(Per informazioni sul valore di riferimento vedere il contenuto di ogni regolazione.)
简体中文
［打孔位置的调节］
1.在打孔模式下进行测试复印。
2.打孔位置有偏差时，按以下步骤进行调节。
( 标准值请参照各调整内容。)
한국어
［펀치위치의 조정］
1.펀치모드에서 시험복사를 합니다 .
2.펀치위치가 벗어난 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정합니다 .
( 기준 값에 대해서는 각 조정 내용을 참조하십시오 .)
日本語
［パンチ位置の調整］
1.パンチモードでテストコピーを行う。
2.パンチ位置がずれていた場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
（基準値は、各調整内容を参照のこと。）
9
a b
Adjusting the hole punch entry registration

1.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Adjust the values.
When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
Amount of change per step: 0.25mm
Réglage de l'enregistrement de l'entrée des perforations

1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Régler les valeurs.
Si le papier est alimenté de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si le papier est froissé exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,25mm
Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforación

1.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Ajuste los valores.
Cuando el papel alimentado está torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuración.
Cuando el papel se dobló copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,25mm
3.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung

1.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,25mm
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione

1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246 e selezionare [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2. Regolare i valori.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,25mm
打孔装入定位调节
1.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher] > [Punch Regist]。
2.调整设定值。
纸张斜向搬运时的复印样本 (a)：调高设定值。
纸张作 Z 字折时的复印样本 (b)：调低设定值。
펀치반입 레지스트 조정
1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Punch Regist] 를 선택합니다 .
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
용지가 기울어져서 반송되는 경우의 복사샘플 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
용지가 Z 꺾임이 있는 경우 복사샘플 (b)：설정치를 내립니다 .
パンチ搬入レジスト調整
1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、[Finisher] > [Punch Regist] を選択する。
2.設定値を調整する。
用紙が斜めに搬送される場合コピーサンプル (a)：設定値を上げる。
用紙が Z 折れする場合コピーサンプル (b)：設定値を下げる。
10
c
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
1.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Punch Feed]. 4.Perform a test copy.
2.Adjust the values.
5.Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until the hole punch position is within the refer-
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
ence.
(c): Increase the setting value.
<Reference value (c)>
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value. Metric specification: 13.0mm ±2mm
Amount of change per step: 0.5mm Inch specification: 9.5mm ±2mm (0.37” ± 0.08”)
Réglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner [Finisher] > [Punch Feed]. 4.Effectuer une copie de test.
2. Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 1 à 4 jusqu'à ce que la position de perforation soit
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
dans la référence.
référence (c): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
<Valeur de référence (c)>
référence (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage. Spécifications métriques: 13,0mm ±2mm
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,5mm Spécifications en pouces: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
Ajuste de la alimentación de la posición de perforación
3.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > [Punch Feed].
2. Ajuste los valores.
5.Repita los pasos del 1 al 4 hasta que la posición de perforación de los
Si la posición de perforación está más cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuración.
agujeros esté dentro de los valores de referencia.
Si la posición de perforación está más alejada del borde que el valor de referencia <Valor de referencia (c)>
(c): Reduzca el valor de configuración. Sistema métrico: 13,0mm ±2mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,5mm En pulgadas: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > [Punch 4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
Feed]. 5.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 4 solange, bis die Lochposition sich
2. Die Werte einstellen. innerhalb der Referenz befindet.
Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
<Bezugswert (c)>
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
Metrischer Abstand: 13,0mm ±2mm
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern. Änderung pro Schritt: 0,5 mm Abstand in Zoll: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246 e selezionare [Finisher] > [Punch
Feed].
4.Eseguire una copia di prova.
2. Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere i punti da 1 a 4 fino a portare la posizione di foratura
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di all'interno del riferimento.
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di Specificazione in unità metrica: 13,0mm ±2mm
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
Specificazione in pollici: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
打孔位置搬运调节 3.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
1.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher] > [Punch Feed]。 4.进行测试复印。
2.调整设定值。 5.重复步骤 1 ～ 4，直至打孔的孔的位置达到标准值。
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 短时：调高设定值。＜基准值 (c) ＞
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 长时：调低设定值。公制规格：13.0mm±2mm
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.5mm 英制规格：9.5mm±2mm(0.37”±0.08”)
펀치위치 반송조정 3.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Punch Feed] 를 선택 4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
합니다 . 5.펀치 구멍 위치가 기준 이내가 될 때까지 1 단계 ~ 4 단계를 반복 수행
2.설정치를 조정합니다 . 합니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 짧은 경우：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치 (c) ＞
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 긴 경우：설정치를 내립니다 . 센티사양：13.0mm±2mm
1 스텝당 변화량：0.5mm 인치사양：9.5mm ±2mm (0.37”±0.08”)
パンチ位置搬送調整 3.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。

1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、
[Finisher] > [Punch Feed] を 4.テストコピーを行う。
選択する。 5.パンチ穴の位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 4 を繰り返す。
2.設定値を調整する。＜基準値 (c) ＞
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より短い場合：設定値を上げる。センチ仕様：13.0mm±2mm
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より長い場合：設定値を下げる。インチ仕様：9.5mm±2mm (0.37”±0.08”)
11
1
d
e
Centering the hole punch position 4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 until the hole punch position is within the reference.
Adjust the position of the punch unit A. (MP tray paper feed) <Reference value (d) >
1. If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Metric specification: d = 40.0mm ± 2mm,e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:Unadjustable)
Slide the punch unit A to the machine rear ( ). Inch specification: d = 34.93mm ± 2mm (1.38” ± 0.08”),
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:Unadjustable)
Slide the punch unit A to the machine front ( ). * Proceed to step 26 on page 8.
2. Retighten the screws (1). * If the center line for the cassette feed is shifted, adjust it as in the next page.
3. Perform a test copy.(MP tray paper feed)
Centrage de la position de perforation 4. Répéter les étapes 1 à 3 jusqu'à ce que la position de perforation soit dans la référence.
Régler la position de l’unité de perforation A. (Alimentation papier du bac MF) <Valeur de référence (d) >
1. Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Spécifications métriques: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm ,e=80.0mm±0.5mm(e:Ajustement impos-
sible)
Faire glisser l’unité de perforation A à l’arrière de la machine ( ). Spécifications en pouces: d = 34,93 mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine: e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:Ajustement impossible)
* Passer à l'étape 26 de la page 8.
Faire glisser l’unité de perforation A à l’avant de la machine ( ).
　 * Si la ligne centrale pour l'alimentation du magasin est décalée, effectuer l'ajustement
2. Resserrez les vis (1).
　　comme indiqué à la page suivante.
3. Effectuer une copie de test.(Alimentation papier du bac MF)
Centrado de la posición de perforación 4. Repita los pasos del 1 al 3 hasta que la posición de perforación de los agujeros
Ajuste la posición de la perforadora A.(Recarga de papel de la bandeja MP (multiuso)) esté dentro de los valores de referencia.
1. Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: <Valor de referencia (d) >
Sistema métrico: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm,e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:No ajustable)
Deslice la perforadora A hacia la parte posterior de la máquina ( ). En pulgadas: d = 34,93mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la máquina: e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:No ajustable)
Deslice la perforadora A hacia el frente de la máquina ( ). * Vaya al paso 26 de la página 8.
2. Apriete de nuevo los tornillos (1). 　 * Si la línea central del depósito de papel está desplazada, ajustela como
3. Haga una copia de prueba.(Recarga de papel de la bandeja MP (multiuso)) se indica en la siguiente página.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 4. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 3 solange, bis die Lochposition sich innerhalb
Stellen Sie die Position der Lochereinheit A ein.(Einzug aus Universalzufuhr) der Referenz befindet.
1. Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: <Bezugswert (d) >
Metrischer Abstand: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm, e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:Nicht einstellbar)
Schieben Sie die Lochereinheit A zur Geräterückseite ( ). Abstand in Zoll: d = 34,93 mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt:
e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:Nicht einstellbar)
Schieben Sie die Lochereinheit A zur Gerätevorderseite ( ). * Weitergehen zu Schritt 26 auf Seite 8.
2. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben (1) wieder fest. * Falls der Einzug aus der Kassette nicht mehr mittig erfolgt, stellen Sie ihn wie
3. Eine Testkopie erstellen.(Einzug aus Universalzufuhr) folgt ein.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 4. Ripetere i punti da 1 a 3 fino a portare la posizione di foratura all'interno del riferimento.
Regolare la posizione dell'unità di perforazione A.(Alimentazione carta da bypass) <Valore di riferimento (d) >
1. Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della Specificazione in unità metrica: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm, e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:Non regola-
macchina: Far scivolare l’unità di perforazione A verso il retro della macchina ( ). bile)
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della Specificazione in pollici: d =34,93 mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
macchina: Far scivolare l’unità di perforazione A verso la parte anteriore della e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”)(e:Non regolabile)
* Procedere al passo 26 a pagina 8.
macchina ( ). * Se la linea centrale del cassetto si è spostata, regolarla come indicato nella
2. Stringere di nuovo le viti (1). pagina successiva.
3. Eseguire una copia di prova.(Alimentazione carta da bypass)
打孔位置中心调节 4. 重复步骤 1 ～ 3，直至打孔的孔的位置达到标准值。

调整打孔组件（A) 的位置。( 手送托盘供纸 ) ＜基准值 (d) ＞
1.打孔位置向机器前部偏移时：把打孔组件（A) 向机器后侧移动。( ) 公制规格：d=40.0mm±2mm , e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e: 不可调整 )
打孔位置向机器后部偏移时：把打孔组件（A) 向机器前侧移动。( ) 英制规格：d=34.93mm±2mm(1.38”±0.08”) ,
e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e: 不可调整 )
2.拧紧螺丝 (1)。
※ 跳至 P8 的步骤 26。
3.进行测试复印。( 手送托盘供纸 )
※ 纸盒供纸时，如果中心位置发生偏移，请实施下页的调整。
펀치위치 센터조정 4. 펀치 구멍 위치가 기준 이내가 될 때까지 1 단계 ~ 3 단계를 반복 수행합니다 .
펀치유니트 A 의 위치를 조정하세요 . ( 수동급지대 ) ＜기준치 (d) ＞
센티사양：d=40.0mm±2mm , e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e: 조정 불가 )
1. 펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 앞측으로 벗어난 경우：펀치유니트 A 를 기기의 뒤쪽으 인치사양：d=34.93mm±2mm(1.38”±0.08”) , e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”)
로 밀어주세요 .( ) (e: 조정 불가 )
펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 뒷측으로 벗어난 경우：펀치유니트 A 를 기기의 앞쪽으 ※ P8 의 순서 26 로 진행 .
로 당겨주세요 .( ) ※ 카세트 급지시 센터 라인이 맞지 않는 경우에는 다음페이지를 참조하여 조정
2. 나사 (1) 를 다시 조입니다 . 을 하세요 .
3. 테스트 카피를 합니다 . ( 수동급지대 )
パンチ位置センター調整 4. パンチ穴の位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 3 を繰り返す。＜基準値 (d)
＞
パンチユニット (A) の位置調整を行う。（手差しトレイ給紙）
センチ仕様：d=40.0mm±2mm,e=80mm±0.5mm（e: 調整不可）
1. パンチ穴が機械前側にずれている場合インチ仕様：d=34.93mm±2mm(1.38”±0.08”),
パンチユニット (A) を機械後側（）にずらす。 e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”)（e: 調整不可）
パンチ穴が機械後側にずれている場合 ※P8 の手順 26 へ進む。
パンチユニット (A) を機械前側（）にずらす。 ※ カセット給紙でセンター位置がずれている場合は、次頁の調整をおこなう。
2. ビス (1) を締め付ける。
3. テストコピーを行う。（手差しトレイ給紙）
12
2
Centering the hole punch position(Adjusts the center line for each paper Shift the paper width guide (2) at the machine rear side to the machine front side
source.) ( ).
Adjust the center line for each paper source in reference to the punch unit center line 3. Retighten the screws (3).
adjusted in P12.
4. Load paper in the cassette and align the paper width guide at the machine front
1. Loosen the screw (3).
and rear side to the paper width.
2. If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine:
Shift the paper width guide (2) at the machine rear side to the machine rear side
5. Perform a test copy.
( ).
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine:
Centrage de la position de perforation(Ajuste la ligne centrale pour chaque Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine:
source de papier.) Décaler le guide de largeur de papier (2) à l'arrière de la machine vers l'avant de
Ajuster la ligne centrale pour chaque source de papier en référence à la ligne cen- la machine ( ).
trale de l'unité de perforation ajustée à la page 12. 3. Resserrez les vis (3)
1. Desserrer la vis (3). 4. Charger le papier dans le magasin et aligner le guide de largeur de papier à
2. Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: l'avant et à l'arrière de la machine en fonction de la largeur du papier.
Décaler le guide de largeur de papier (2) à l'arrière de la machine vers l'arrière de 5. Effectuer une copie de tes
la machine ( ).
Centrado de la posición de perforación(Ajuste la línea central para cada origen Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
de papel.) máquina:
Ajuste la línea central para cada origen de papel según el ajuste de la línea central Desplace la guía del ancho del papel (2) del reverso hacia la parte anterior de la
de la unidad de perforación en la página 12. máquina ( ).
1. Afloje el tornillo (3). 3. Apriete de nuevo los tornillos (3).
2. Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: 4. Coloque el papel en el depósito y alinee la guía del ancho del reverso y del
Desplace la guía del ancho del papel (2) del reverso hacia la parte posterior de la anverso a la anchura del papel.
máquina ( ). 5. Effectuer une copie de test.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition(Stellt den Einzug aus jeder Papierquelle mit- Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt:
tig ein.) Schieben Sie die vordere Breitenpapierführung (2) nach hinten zur Gerätevorder-
Stellt den Einzug aus jeder Papierquelle in Bezug auf die Mittellinie der Locheinheit seite ( ).
ein, die auf Seite 12 beschrieben ist. 3. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben (3) wieder fest.
1. Lösen Sie die Schraube (3). 4. Befüllen Sie die Kassette mit Papier und richten Sie die beiden Breitenführungen
2. Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: so aus, dass diese am Papierrand anliegen.
Schieben Sie die hintere Breitenpapierführung (2) nach hinten zur Geräterück- 5. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
seite ( ).
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione(Regola la linea centrale per Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
ogni alimentazione carta.) macchina: Spostare la guida di larghezza carta (2) sul lato posteriore del sistema
Regolare la linea centrale di ogni alimentazione carta facendo riferimento alla linea
centrale dell'unità di foratura regolata a pagina 12. verso la parte frontale del dispositivo ( ).
1. Allentare la vite (3). 3. Stringere di nuovo le viti (3)
2. Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della 4. Caricare la carta nel cassetto e allineare la guida di larghezza carta che si trova
macchina: Spostare la guida di larghezza carta (2) sul lato posteriore del sistema sul lato anteriore e posteriore del sistema alla larghezza della carta.
5. Eseguire una copia di prov.
verso il retro del dispositivo ( ).
打孔位置中心调节 ( 调整各个供纸盒的中心位置。) 3. 拧紧螺丝 (3)。

以 P12 中已调整的打孔组件的中心位置为基准，对各个供纸盒的中心位置进行调整。 4. 把纸张放入纸盒，根据纸张的尺寸来调整机器前后的纸张尺寸导板的位置。
1. 拧松螺丝（3）。 5. 进行测试复印。
2. 如果打孔的孔洞向机器前侧偏移时
把机器后侧的纸张尺寸导板（2）向机器后侧（）移动。
如果打孔的孔洞向机器后侧偏移时
把机器后侧的纸张尺寸导板（2）向机器后侧（）移动。
펀치위치 센터조정 ( 각 급지대 별로 조정합니다 .) 4. 용지를 카세트에 넣고 기기 전면과 후면의 용지 폭 가이드를 용지 폭에 맞게 조

12 페이지의 펀치유니트 센터 라인을 기준으로하여 각 급지대 별로 센터 라인을 조 정합니다 .
정합니다 . 5. 테스트 카피를 합니다
1. 나사 (3) 을 풉니다 .
2. 기기 후면의 용지 폭 가이드 (2) 를 기기 후면 (<-) 으로 밉니다 .( )
기기 후면의 용지 폭 가이드 (2) 를 기기 전면 (<-) 으로 밉니다 .( )
3. 나사 (3) 를 다시 조입니다 .
パンチ位置センター調整 ( 各給紙段のセンター調整をおこなう。） 3. ビス (3) を締め付ける。

P12 で調整したパンチユニットのセンター位置を基準にして、各給紙段のセンター位 4. 用紙をカセットにセットし、機械前後の用紙幅ガイドの位置を用紙幅にあわせて
置を調整する。調整する。
1. ビス (3) を緩める。 5. テストコピーを行う。
2. パンチ穴が機械前側にずれている場合
機械後側の用紙幅ガイド (2) を機械後側（）にずらす。
パンチ穴が機械後側にずれている場合
機械後側の用紙幅ガイド (2) を機械前側（）にずらす。
13
6.Repeat the steps 1 to 5 until the hole punch position is within the refer-
ence.(For reference values, see page 12.)
7.Execute maintenance mode U034 [LSU Out Left] and adjust the center
line.(For details, see the instructions on Page 17 to Page 18.)
6.Répéter les étapes 1 à 5 jusqu'à ce que la position de perforation soit

dans la référence.(Pour les valeurs de référence, voir page 12.)
7.Exécuter le mode maintenance U034 [LSU Out Left] et ajuster la ligne
centrale.(Pour plus de précision, se reporter aux instructions de la
page 17 à la page 18.)
6.Repita los pasos del 1 al 5 hasta que la posición de perforación de los

agujeros esté dentro de los valores de referencia.(Consulte la página
12 para los valores de referencia).
7.Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U034 [LSU Out Left] y ajuste la
línea central.(Consulte las instrucciones en las páginas 17 y 18 para
más detalle.)
6.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 5 solange, bis die Lochposition sich
innerhalb der Referenz befindet.(Referenzwerte finden Sie auf Seite
12.)
7.Führen Sie im Wartungsmodus U034 [LSU Out Left] aus und justieren
Sie die Mittellinie.(Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 17 bis 18.)
6.Ripetere i punti da 1 a 5 fino a portare la posizione di foratura

all'interno del riferimento.(Per i valori di riferimento, vedere a pagina
12.)
7.Eseguire la modalità di manutenzione U034 [LSU Out Left] e regolare
la linea centrale.(Per i dettagli, vedere le istruzioni a pagina 17 e 18.)
6. 重复步骤 1 ～ 5，直至打孔的孔的位置达到标准值。( 基准值，请参照 P12。)

7. 实施维修保养模式 U034 的［LSU Out Left］，进行中心线的调整。( 详细步骤，请
参见 P17-18。)
6.펀치 구멍 위치가 기준 이내가 될 때까지 1 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수행

합니다 .(12 페이지의 값 참조 .)
7.메인터넌스 모드 U034[LSU Out Left] 를 실행하여 센터라인을 조정합
니다 .( 자세한 내용은 17~18 페이지를 참조하세요 .)
6.パンチ穴の位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
（基準値は、12 ページ参照）
7.メンテナンスモード U034 の［LSU Out Left］を実行し、センターライン
を調整する。( 詳細は、17 ～ 18 ページ参照）
14
6 7
$ $ $
㸫㸩
f g h

1.Check the gap between the paper center (6) and the line (7) of test pattern (f). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1] ,[Cassette2],[Cassette3]or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (6) et la ligne (7) du motif de (f). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1],[Cassette2],[Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].

1.Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (6) y la línea (7) del patrón de prueba (f). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1],[Cassette2] ,[Cassette3] o [Cassette4].

1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (6) und der Linie (7) auf der Testseite (f). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den
Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1],[Cassette2],[Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].

1.Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (6) e la linea (7) dello schema di prova (f). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1],[Cassette2],[Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
中心线调节
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette1］,［Cassette2］,［Cassette3］或［Cassette4］。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (6) 과 테스트 패턴 (f) 의 라인 (7) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1],[Cassette2],[Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
1.紙のセンター(6) とテストパターン (f) の線 (7) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette1],[Cassette2],[Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
15
6 7
$ $ $
㸫㸩
f g h
Test pattern (g) : Increase the setting value. of line (7) in test pattern (f) is within the refer-
Test pattern (h) : Decrease the setting value. ence.

Mire d' essai (g) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (7) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (h) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (f) soit dans la référence.

Patrón de prueba (g) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (7) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (h) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (f) esté dentro de los valores de ref-

Testmuster (g) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (7) auf der Test-
Testmuster (h) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (f) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-

Modello di prova (g) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (7) nello schema
Modello di prova (h) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (f) all'interno del riferimento.

测试图案 (g) ：调高设定值。（7）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (h) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 >±0.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (f) 에서 라인 (7) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (g)：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (h)：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (f) の線 (7) のずれが基準

テストパターン (g) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (h) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >±0.5mm 以内
16
2016. 8
303RF56710-03
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(14)JS-7100
JS-7100
(Job separator)
Installation Guide
2016. 2
JS-7100 303RN56710-01
յ
ձ
ߑ ߓ
ߒ A
ߔ
մ
ն
A
շ
շ EN
EN Set
Setthe
themaintenance
maintenancemode
modeU211,
U211,and
andset
set[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
FR
FR Passez
Passezen
enmode
modemaintenance
maintenanceU211
U211etetparamétrer
paramétrer[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
ES
ES Configure
Configureelelmodo
modode
demantenimiento
mantenimientoU211
U211yyconfigure
configure[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On]
[On]. .
DE
DE Aktivieren
AktivierenSie
Sieden
denU-Parameter
U-ParameterU211
U211und
und[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
ITIT Accedere
Accederealalmodo
modomanutenzione
manutenzioneU211,
U211,eeselezionare
selezionare[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
CN 䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ
CN
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ8ˈᢺ
8ˈᢺ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@Ǆ
>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@Ǆ
KR ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YXXG㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔGpGqGzGeGv⪰G㉘㥉䚝⏼␘U
KR ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YXXG㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔGpGqGzGeGv⪰G㉘㥉䚝⏼␘U
JP ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ
JP ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8
8ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@
ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@ࢆタᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢆタᐃࡍࡿࠋ
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(15)FAX System 12
FAX System 12
(FAX Kit)
Installation Guide
2016. 2 1 2
FAX System 12 303RK56710-01
A C F J OFF
D G
1
2

Kyocera TA 4002 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kyocera TA 4002 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TASKalfa 4002i

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BAT-

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE

Notation of products in the manual

Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

(1-17) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"......................................................................................... 1-22

(16) Installing Software ............................................................................................................. 2-43

(1) Wire connection................................................................................................................. 3-14

(2-1) Image scanner section ............................................................................................. 3-67

(1-6) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover .......................................................... 4-61

(4-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB ................................................................... 4-219

(5-2) Black spots (toner smudges).................................................................................... 7-68

(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper........................................................................ 7-118

(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray.......................................................................................... 7-478

(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section........................................................................... 7-501

(6-1) Connector position ................................................................................................... 8-47

(7-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-95

(12) Finisher (DF-7120) wiring diagram .................................................................................... 9-37

(2) Copy Functions

Continuous Copy 1 to 999 sheets

(3) Printer Functions

(4) Scanner Functions

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Dimension (W × D × H) 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"

(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet × 2)

Paper Size A4, B5, Letter

(5-4) Side Feeder (3000-sheet)

(5-5) Inner Finisher

Weight Approx. 11.5 kg or less / Approx. 25.4 lbs. or less

(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)

(5-7) 1000-sheet Finisher

Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Dimension (W × D × H) 548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm / 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"

Weight Approx. 30 kg / Approx. 66.2 lbs.

(5-8) 4000-sheet Finisher

Dimension (W × D × H) 607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm / 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"

Weight Approx. 40 kg / Approx. 88.2 lbs.

(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Dimension (W × D × H) 510 × 400 × 470 mm / 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"

Weight Approx. 10 kg / Approx. 22.1 lbs.

(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

The number Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

Tri-folding 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

Tri-folding 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more

Tri-folding Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated,

(5-12) Job Separator (JS) Tray

Dimension (W × D × H) 480 x 430 x 100mm / 18.90" x 16.93" x 3.94"

Weight Approx. 0.6 kg / Approx. 1.4 lbs.

(5-13) Banner Tray

Dimension (W × D × H) 400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm / 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"

Weight Approx. 0.5 kg / Approx. 1.2 lbs.

(5-14) FAX System

Network FAX functions

1-2 Part Names

%) 3) 3)

1.1. '7% )$;6\VWHP &DUG

: Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes